http://video.about.com Welcome to video.about.com, a collection of exclusive, free online videos from About's talented guides and content partners. aboutvideo_6936 Wed, 24 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/thaifood/Papaya.htm All About Papaya How to cut, prepare and serve. papaya,fruit,tropical,dessert,cut,slice,open,healthy,vitamin 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. papaya,fruit,tropical,dessert,cut,slice,open,healthy,vitamin Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food.<br/><br/>Today I'm going to show you how to cut and prepare a papaya.<br/> <h3>Choosing a Papaya</h3>Papayas are ripe when they are mostly yellow and will give slightly when pressed gently. They should not be too soft or mushy by the stem. Look for clean smooth skin, and there should be no smell.<br/><h3>Removing Papaya Seeds</h3>First wash the papaya. Then cut it in half lengthwise and remove the seeds. You can spoon them out or hold the papaya in one hand and slide the seeds out with the spoon. <br/><br/>You can discard the seeds, or save them to use in a salad dressing or for garnish.<br/><h3>Scooped Papaya Pieces</h3>At this point, you could scoop out the papaya with a spoon and eat it right away. Or you could use a melon baler to remove the fruit and put it on a plate.<br/><h3>Papaya Peeling</h3>For slices, you should remove the skin. Turn the papaya on its side and just peel the skin down with a paring knife. You can also cut off the ends, stand up the papaya, and slice downward. Go back and remove any spots you missed.<br/><h3>Papaya Slices</h3>Once the skin is removed, you can cut slices or thick wedges. For chunks, cut the thick wedges into smaller pieces. <br/><br/>An excellent source of Vitamin C, papayas can be eaten at any time of day.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Food.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_6791 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/coffeetea/Iced-Coffee.htm The video shows a trick for making perfect iced coffee at home. coffee,iced coffee,cube,ice cube,coffee cube,drink,recipe,caffeine 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. coffee,iced coffee,cube,ice cube,coffee cube,drink,recipe,caffeine Hi, I am Ben Kurtzman for About.com Food, and today I am going to show you a quick trick for making delicious iced coffee.<br/><br/>There are two ways that most people make iced coffee at home. One is to make a pot of coffee and simply add ice cubes. The other is to brew a pot of hot coffee and then put it in the refrigerator. Now, the problem I find with just adding ice cubes to coffee is that it waters down very quickly. And the difficulty with brewing coffee and putting it in the fridge is that becomes stale before too long. <br/><br/> <H3>Iced Coffee Cubes</H3> And so I suffered with both of these methods for many years, but then, one day, a friend showed me the trick of coffee cubes, and I am going to share that with you today.<br/><br/>If you take a pot of hot coffee and pour it into an ice cube tray and freeze it as if it were ice cubes, then it will be there when you want iced coffee and it will be nice and fresh, and it will be in iced cubes.<br/><br/>Once you have your coffee cubes, any time you want iced coffee simply make a pot of hot coffee, add the coffee cubes to the glass and then add just a little bit of the hot coffee to melt the cubes a little bit, and you are good to go. <br/><br/> <H3>Dissolve the Sugar</H3> Here is another little trick. What I like to do is take my sugar and put a little bit at the bottom of the glass, then I am going to pour the hot coffee over it so that it dissolves nicely. So now the sugar should be dissolved, and you are not going to get any of the grains.<br/><br/> <H3>Make the Iced Coffee</H3> I am going to fill the rest of the cup with my coffee cubes. You can fill it all the way to the top because, as you can see, they melt very quickly. I am just going to fill the rest of the glass with hot coffee so that it covers all of the cubes. Do not forget to leave room for cream. <br/><br/>The great thing about this drink is that as the ice melts you get more and more coffee so it enhances the flavor, and for those of you who love caffeine, it is going to pack a little bit more of a punch too.<br/><br/>Well that is it. Thanks for watching, and to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6365 Thu, 20 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/americanfood/Lemon-Curd.htm Lemon curd is a delicious, old-fashioned lemon dessert sauce. Its intense flavor and creamy, rich texture go great with gingerbread or fresh berries. lemon curd, american food, videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. lemon curd, american food, videos Hi, I'm Chef John Mitzewich for About.com. Today we are making something that tastes so much better than it sounds, we're making homemade lemon curd. <br><br> Lemon curd is an old-fashioned, amazingly delicious sauce with a terrible name: lemon curd. But amazingly delicious lemon sauce is too long. <h3>Combine the Lemon Curd Ingredients</h3></h3> But it's a really easy recipe. It's 6 egg yolks, 1 cup white sugar. Stir that together with your whisk for 2-3 minutes, and it will turn from yellow-gold color into a creamy, light pale yellow mixture. It only takes a few minutes of whisking. <br><br> Add 2 tablespoons of lemon zest and 1/3 cup of fresh lemon juice. Freshly squeezed gives you a better flavor. Stir that together and scrape down the sides with a spatula. <br><br> Now that's ready for what's called a double boiler. We're going to cook this over steam. Put an inch of water in a saucepan and bring it to a slow simmer. <br><br> In the meantime get 1/2 cup of butter, sliced in pieces, and put it aside. We're going to use it later. <h3>Cook the Lemon Curd Over Steam</h3> Now our water is simmering. Put the metal bowl over the water. The bowl is not touching the water, it's just holding in the steam. So make sure you get the right sizes here. <br><br> This is going to cook for 7-10 minutes. We're going to stir that constantly with the spatula. Some people use a whisk, but I like the spatula because it will scrape along the bottom where the steam is hitting it. Once it starts to thicken and gets hot, you're getting close. <br><br> What you're looking for is that basically, it will coat the back of a spoon. Some people like to cook it thicker than that at this point, but that's dangerous. <br><br> It can go from this to scrambled eggs in like a minute. But, as long as it coats the back of a spoon, you're okay. <h3>Add the Butter to the Lemon Curd</h3> We're going to now add the butter one slice at a time. When one piece is melted in, add the next. When it's all incorporated, you're ready to chill. <br><br> If I was going to serve this for a big party, I would just cover the with a piece of plastic, chill it and serve it, but I'm going to put it some glass jars and give them as gifts. <h3>Chill the Lemon Curd</h3> So I think putting it in a zippered plastic bag while it's still runny is a great idea. This will let you fill up the jars nice and neat with no drips. <br><br> If I used a funnel or a spoon, it would be a disaster because I'm not coordinated. And there it is, lemon curd. I'm going to put a little piece of plastic on it so no skin forms. Chill completely before serving. <h3>Serve the Lemon Curd</h3> Now what to serve this delicious lemon curd, lemon sauce on? Fresh berries are amazing with it, any kind of cakes, ginger breads, tarts, and things like that. But I love it just with some fresh berries and gingersnaps. <br><br> I did some little lemon tarts with gingersnap cookies and a dollop of the lemon curd and a fresh berry. So delicious, so easy to make, it makes a great gift and I really hope you give this a try. Enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6136 Fri, 21 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/seattle/Pike-Place-Market-in-Seattle.htm This public market takes friendly customer service to a new level. It's all about fresh food, fun, and fish-throwing. seattle, downtown, pike, place, market, street 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. seattle, downtown, pike, place, market, street This public market takes friendly customer service to a new level. It's all about fresh food, fun, and fish-throwing. aboutvideo_6212 Wed, 09 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/losangeles/California---LA-s-The-Brewery.htm Artist loft housing in Los Angeles at The Brewery art colony, a former Pabst brewery converted to lofts. los, angeles, california, brewery 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. los, angeles, california, brewery Artist loft housing in Los Angeles at The Brewery art colony, a former Pabst brewery converted to lofts. aboutvideo_6929 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/chinesefood/fresh-ginger.htm Instructions on peeling and grating fresh ginger ginger,fresh,cut,prepare,root,cooking,ginger root 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. ginger,fresh,cut,prepare,root,cooking,ginger root Hi, I am Ben Kurtzman for About.com Food and today I am going to show how to use fresh ginger.<br/><br/> <H3>What is Ginger? </H3> Not everyone who has enjoyed a ginger ale or a ginger beer realizes what ginger actually looks like. It is this crazy thing right here. Despite its unusual appearance, ginger is a very useful root and can add flavor to any number of dishes. <br/><br/> <H3>Peeling Ginger Skin</H3> The first thing that you need to do when you are cooking with ginger is to peel the skin off. Only peel off as much as you are going to be using that day. <br/><br/> <H3>Cutting Ginger</H3> As soon as you peel the ginger you will notice that it has a very strong aroma, so about half a tablespoon should be good for most marinades and sauces. For recipes where you need the ginger to be a little more finely chopped, you could mince it like you would a clove of garlic, or as an alternative, you can use a grater. <br/><br/> As you can see, I now have a nice little pile of ginger, having done barely any work. So now that you know a little bit more about ginger, try to incorporate it into your cooking. I think you will find that it is a very versatile way to add a lot of flavor to just about any type of cooking. <br/><br/> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5250 Wed, 12 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/seniorhealth/Brow-Lift.htm A brow lift corrects signs of aging. Learn more about brow lifts and their effects. brow lift, face lift, cosmetic surgery 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. brow lift, face lift, cosmetic surgery <h3>What is the Skin?</h3> The skin, the body's largest organ, is a fairly resilient and elastic tissue. However, aging, stress, and environmental factors can affect the appearance of the skin over time. <h3>What is a Brow Lift?</h3> A surgical procedure called a brow lift can help correct sagging eyebrows, as well as furrowed lines between the eyebrows and across the forehead that result from aging. <h3>Getting a Brow Lift</h3> During a brow lift, an incision is made in the hairline and the skin of the forehead and brow is freed from the underlying tissues. <br><br> While the skin is lifted, fat and, if necessary, excess skin is removed. <h3>Effects of a Brow Lift</h3> Following the surgery the incisions are generally hidden in the hairline and the face is left with a more youthful appearance. <h3>Risks of a Brow Lift</h3> There are several potential complications associated with this procedure that should be discussed with a doctor prior to surgery. <br><br> Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_5596 Tue, 20 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/macs/Set-up-Apple-s-Mail-Program.htm Apple Mail comes pre-loaded on Macs and is teeming with useful features and the ability to check multiple accounts. Get started using Apple Mail in just a few simple steps. Apple mail, email, outlook, mac, gmail 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Apple mail, email, outlook, mac, gmail Hi. I am Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I will show you how to set up Apple Mail. <h3>Open Apple Mail</h3> You can access the mail client either by clicking on its icon on the dock or by going to your application folder and double clicking on the mail program. <h3>Why Use Apple Mail?</h3> Apple's Mail Client comes with all Apple Computers and allows you to check all your email addresses at once. It works with iSync and .Mac to keep your email settings and message in sync regardless of where you have apple mail set up. <h3>Setting up your Account</h3> If you have not already tried to set up an account or open the program before you will likely see the guide for setting up an account. If you don't see the new account setup go up to Mail choose Preferences, then accounts and click on the plus sign on the bottom. <h3>Apple Mail Account Types</h3> This screen asks you to choose your email account type and start providing information. You can choose from a .Mac account if you purchased one, or choose POP, IMAP or exchange. If you want to check your gmail account or an account from a domain you own or work for then you will likely choose pop. <h3>Apple Mail Description</h3> The Description is what will appear within the program to help differentiate it from other email accounts you might set up. <h3>Full Name</h3> Whatever you enter next to Full Name will be displayed when someone receives an email from you. Now type in your email address and click continue. <h3>Mail Servers</h3> We are now asked for the incoming mail server. This information should be provided by your email service provider. For gmail it is pop.gmail.com. For email from a domain I own it is www followed by the name of the domain dot com. <br><br>Next enter in your email user name to log on and the password. Hit continue. The program will try logging on to see if you entered the information correctly. <br><br> If it is successful we now have to enter in the outgoing mail server information. Again, this should be in your email documentation. Very likely it will look something like smtp. your domain dot com or www. your domain .com <br><br> I use my private email account for outgoing mail so it is www.mydomainname.com followed by my user name and password. <br><br> I will hit continue again. Now I can either import mailboxes from other programs such as entourage or outlook, setup a second account, or I can be done. <h3>Sending an Email in Apple Mail</h3> Now we have mail set up. On the left is the one email accounts inbox that I set up. On the top right will be the list of my emails and I can read each individual message below it. <br><br> To send an email all I need to do is click new, type the email address, message, and hit send. <br><br> After I set up all my email addresses you can see all the different accounts and their respective inboxes. <h3>Apple Mail Search</h3> Mail has a useful and easy search function on the top right and you can sort by Name, subject, or date received. <h3>Customizing your Apple Mail</h3> There are many different options and settings you can choose from within Mail, but when you first get started take a look at the Preferences under the Mail drop down. Options that I change include how often new mail is checked for, setting up a junk email folder, and setting up a signature at the end of all my emails. <br><br> Finally, I will hide mail and keep in my dock at all times. Whenever I get a new message I hear a ding and just click on my program to read my email <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.about.com. <br><br> aboutvideo_6752 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/autorepair/Car-Emergency-Kit.htm Learn the essential items needed to build a reliable emergency kit for your car. emergency kit,car emergency,car essentials,road emergency,road kit 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. emergency kit,car emergency,car essentials,road emergency,road kit Hi, I'm Barbara Terry for About.com Autos. <br/><br/>It is extremely important to have certain essential items in your car incase of a breakdown or accident. These kits can be purchased at auto supply stores or you can create your own. First of all acquire a container&#133; I prefer a fishing tackle box, because it has little compartments and shelves. <br/><br/><H3>Emergency Kit Essentials</H3><br/>These are the items that I carry with me, and if you want to add to this to customize your own emergency car kit&#133; that is great!<br/><ul><li>Band-Aids</li><li>Water</li><li>Blanket</li><li>Protein or breakfast bars</li><li>Aspirin</li><li>Pen and paper</li><li>Scissors</li><li>Towel</li><li>Flashlight with extra batteries</li><li>Road flares</li><li>All fluids- quart of oil, transmission, brake, power steering, windshield wiper fluid, clutch fluid if you are driving a standard transmission</li><li>Can of fix-a-flat</li><li>Some antifreeze</li><li>Set of jumper cables</li></ul><br/>You never know when you or your car will be having an issue while venturing out on the road, it is much better to be over prepared then under prepared! <br/><br/>To learn more, visit us on the Web at Autos.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_5881 Thu, 15 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/golosangeles/See-Los-Angeles--Chinatown.htm It's east meets west and old meets new in L.A.'s Chinatown. chinatown, los, angeles, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. chinatown, los, angeles, california It's east meets west and old meets new in L.A.'s Chinatown. aboutvideo_6787 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/autorepair/Replacing-Wiper-Blades.htm Learn how and when to replace the wiper blades on your car for maximum performance and safety. cars,maintenance,windshield wipers,wiper blades 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cars,maintenance,windshield wipers,wiper blades Hi, I'm Barbara Terry for About.com Autos. <br/><br/>In order to see through your windshield clearly, you'll want to replace the wiper blades if they're worn out. And once you master this task it will be a breeze in the future. <br/><H3>Buying your Wiper Blades</H3>At the auto parts store, ask someone to assist you in finding the proper blade replacement for your wiper blades. It's easier to buy the whole blade than just the rubber insert. <br/><H3>Removing Wiper Blades</H3>When replacing the blade, pull it away from the windshield and you're either going to be required to pull on a tab or push on a tab. Today I'm actually pulling on mine. I'm going to pull on it, I'm going to slide the wiper blade down, and simply pop it off. <br/><H3>Replacing with New Wiper Blades</H3>When replacing your old wiper blade with a new one, grab the new one, and just line it up with the blade arm and you're going to want to just slip it into place. Wait for it to click. When it does, put it back down on the windshield. <br/><br/>Keep in mind that not all wiper blade arms come up as far as the one we're demonstrating with today. <br/><H3>Wiper Blade Access</H3>And you're done. If you're having trouble accessing your wiper blades, turn on your ignition, turn your windshield wipers on, and turn off your ignition when your wiper blades are vertical. This makes working on them a lot easier.<br/><br/>Have your blades replaced approximately twice a year. <br/><br/>To learn more, visit us online at Autos.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_6179 Thu, 19 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/losangeles/California---LA-s-Sherman-Oaks.htm Everything you can do in L.A., you can do &quot;on the other side of the hill&quot;-- and with less traffic. sherman, oaks, los, angeles, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. sherman, oaks, los, angeles, california Everything you can do in L.A., you can do "on the other side of the hill"-- and with less traffic. aboutvideo_6768 Sat, 27 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/autorepair/Jumpstarting-Your-Car.htm Learn how to safely jumpstart your dead car battery to get your engine started and your car running again. jumpstart,car battery,dead battery 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. jumpstart,car battery,dead battery Hi, I'm Barbara Terry for About.com Autos. If you are not lucky enough to have a jump-box, you will need to borrow a friend's car in order to jump start your weak or dead battery. <br/><br/><H3>Possible Dead Battery Causes</H3><br/>If your battery is low on water, simply pop off the cover and check the level. <br/><br/>You should be able to see the water level close to the top.. or it may be your battery cables. If there is corrosion on the connecters, the power from the battery will be altered. <br/><br/><H3>Jumpstarting Safety</H3><br/>When jump-starting your car make sure both cars hoods are properly propped open for safety. <br/><br/>You will need to have either the negative to the positive clamp clamped on the cable like this until you affix the first clamp then affix the second clamp&#133;note&#133;black is for the negative and red is for the positive. <br/><br/><H3>Attaching your Car Battery</H3><br/>You will then need to repeat the same steps to the other car that will be giving you the juice you are requiring to get your car started. Let the 2 cars sit for at least a minute. You can also reve the idle up in the assisting car in order to get quicker voltage to your dead or weak battery. Try starting you car, if it is having a hard time, let it sit for a few minutes before trying again. <br/><br/><H3>Keeping your Car Battery Going</H3><br/>I would recommend even after you have gotten your car started to keep the battery connection on for a few more minutes to assure enough voltage to keep your car running until you can get it to the shop to determine the exact problem. Repeat the same procedure when you are unhooking the cables you will want to affix the first clamp to the cable like so&#133;..and repeat the same steps on unhooking the other car. <br/><br/><H3>After the Car Battery's Started</H3><br/>Keep in mind that you may need to buy a new battery or it could possible be the alternator that has gone bad, when this happens it interrupts the voltage to keep your car running.<br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the web at Autos.About.com<br/> aboutvideo_5764 Wed, 10 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/boston/Boston-Neighborhoods--Allston.htm Allston is Boston's Rock City-- go underground with local musicians and check out this town's indie rock scene. allston, boston, massachusetts 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. allston, boston, massachusetts Allston is Boston's Rock City-- go underground with local musicians and check out this town's indie rock scene. aboutvideo_5842 Wed, 21 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/atlanta/Atlanta-s-McLendon-Avenue.htm McLendon Avenue in Atlanta, Georgia, isn't just a street, it's a lifetyle. Check out this hip, funky community. mclendon, atlanta, georgia,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. mclendon, atlanta, georgia,videos McLendon Avenue in Atlanta, Georgia, isn't just a street, it's a lifetyle. Check out this hip, funky community. aboutvideo_6989 Wed, 04 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/How-to-Frost-a-Cake.htm Simple instructions as to how to frost a cake. frost cakes, cake frosting, cake icing, icing, frosting, video 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. frost cakes, cake frosting, cake icing, icing, frosting, video Hi, I'm Rachel Thebault from Tribeca Treats for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to ice a cake. <h3>Items Needed to Frost a Cake</h3> You will need:<ul> <li>a cake stand or bowl with a flat bottom</li> <li>offset spatula</li> <li>icing</li> <li>cake</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Cake for Frosting</h3> I've pre-baked a cake and chilled it in the fridge. Chilling the cake prevents crumbs from falling off into the icing. I've also sliced the top of the cake to make the layers as flat and even as possible. <h3>Frost the Crumb Coat</h3> Take some of the icing and spread it evenly over the bottom layer. For a cake with 1 inch thick layers, you want about 1/4 inch of icing in the middle. <br><br> Next, place the second layer on top and check to make sure it's centered with the bottom side facing up. Then gently press the layers together so they hold in place. <br><br> Then coat the top and sides of the cake with a very thin layer of icing. This is the crumb coat, which separates any crumbs from the outer part of the cake. Refrigerate for 5-10 minutes. <h3>Finish Icing the Cake</h3> Finally, generously spread the remaining icing around the sides and the top, until you have an even coat - about 1/4 to 1/2 an inch thick. Smooth the top and the sides with the offset spatula. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5763 Wed, 21 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/portlandor/Portland--Alberta-Street.htm Alberta Street in Portland, Oregon, is changing fast. Get a taste of its unique multicultural flavor before it disappears. portland, oregon, alberta, videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. portland, oregon, alberta, videos Alberta Street in Portland, Oregon, is changing fast. Get a taste of its unique multicultural flavor before it disappears. aboutvideo_5867 Tue, 27 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/pittsburgh/Tour-of-Carlisle--Pennsylvania.htm The &quot;greatest small town in the world&quot; features the largest Corvette car show in the world. carilsle, pennsylvania,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. carilsle, pennsylvania,videos The "greatest small town in the world" features the largest Corvette car show in the world. aboutvideo_6898 Tue, 13 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Import-Media.htm Give your videos a unique, creative spin. Learn how to import video footage, pictures, audio, and music into Windows Movie Maker. windows movie maker videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. windows movie maker videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll teach you how to import video footage, pictures, and audio into Windows Movie Maker. It's easy to import existing footage, pictures, or music into your project in Movie Maker. <br><h3>Find Movie Maker Import Options</h3>To import extra elements click on the task button. This brings up Import options under Capture Video. You can also go to File, Import into collections to select audio. This brings up the Import file window. <br><h3>Importing Music</h3>Under file types click the dropdown menu and select Audio and Music files. I'll select some music and hit the Import button. Now hit the collections button on the top bar. Our music is imported into the Collections folder. If you have a lot of music, you can right click on collections and click new collection. I'll rename this collection music. Now, I'll move my music into this new folder. <br><h3>Importing Pictures</h3>Now I'll click, File Import into collections again. This time I'll select Picture Files under dropdown menu. I'll find some pictures, hold down the Shift key and select all my pictures. If you want to choose several pictures individually, hold down the Ctrl key and click on each one. Now I'll hit import. Our pictures show up in the Collections folder. <br><br>Once again I'll right click on collections and click new collection. I'll rename this collection pictures and drag my pictures from the general collections folder to the pictures folder. <br><h3>Importing Video into Movie Maker</h3>Now I'll import some video files stored on my computer by going to File, Import into collections. This time I'll select Video Files under dropdown menu. I'll find my videos. I'll hold down the Ctrl key and select them. And I'll hit the import button. After a few moments, our video appears in the collection window. <br><br>Each of the clips are automatically sorted into individual folders so there's no need to organize them. <br><h3>Organize Movie Maker Imports</h3>I imported and organized all my files into folders to keep my project organized. If you don't keep your files organized you can quickly get overwhelmed on a project with many elements. A little organization in advance saves time down the road. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4690 Wed, 25 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/Funnel-Cake.htm Do you love funnel cakes? Don't wait until your next local fair to indulge in the treat. Learn how to make funnel cakes at home. dessert videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. dessert videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make a funnel cake. <h3>Funnel Cake Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 cup flour</li> <li>3/4 teaspoon baking powder</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon salt</li> <li>1 egg</li> <li>1 cup plus 1 tablespoon milk</li> <li>2 tablespoons sugar</li> <li>powdered sugar</li> </ul> <h3>Combine the Funnel Cake Ingredients</h3> First pour the flour, baking powder, and salt in a bowl. Use a whisk to mix these dry ingredients together. <br><br> Then, in a different bowl, crack and place the egg and then pour in all of the milk. Beat the egg and milk together. <br><br> Next, add the sugar and then stir to dissolve the sugar into the other wet ingredients. <h3>Beat the Ingredients</h3> Add the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients in parts. Then, use an electric mixer to beat it smooth. <h3>Pour the Batter Into a Skillet</h3> Now, pour about 1 inch of oil into a skillet. Heat it over medium heat until it reaches 375 degrees. This may take about 10 minutes. <br><br> If you have one, you can pour the batter into a funnel and then let it run in and around the pan. I'm going to just pour the batter into a measuring cup, and then make circular shapes with the batter in the oil. <h3>Cook the Funnel Cake</h3> Cook for a few minutes until you see it is golden brown. Use tongs to carefully flip the funnel cake. <br><br> Let it cook on the other side for another minute, and when it's completely golden brown, take it out of the oil and let it drain on paper towels. <br><br> Sprinkle with powdered sugar or use other toppings such as fruit or syrups. Serve warm and enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5903 Fri, 25 Jan 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/losangeles/Santa-Monica-Bay-Bike-Path.htm Skate to look and feel great down the Santa Monica Bay Bike Path. santa, monica, bay, bike, los, angeles, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. santa, monica, bay, bike, los, angeles, california Skate to look and feel great down the Santa Monica Bay Bike Path. aboutvideo_6900 Fri, 26 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Titles-in-Movie-Maker.htm Add titles, credits, and other text content to your Windows Movie Maker projects with these easy steps. Movie Maker,Titles,Video Editing 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Movie Maker,Titles,Video Editing Hi. I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll teach you how to add titles to your video project in Windows Movie Maker.<br/><h3>Movie Maker Project Setup</h3>First open up your movie project or create a new project and import video or pictures. I've already placed clips on the timeline. If you cant see the timeline, and see the storyboard instead, click on the show timeline button. <br/><h3>Types of Movie Maker Titles</h3>After arranging your video you might want to add titles and credits to your project. To add titles, go to Tools Titles and Credits. The title options window appears. You can place titles in the beginning, before a clip, on a clip, after a clip, and at the end of the movie. I'll click on title at the beginning. Now I'll title this Act 1. Under More Options I'll select Change the Animation. <br/><h3>Movie Maker Title Preview</h3>One of the useful tools in Movie Maker is that it will show you what each title does. To see what a title looks like, click on a title animation. The Title animation plays in the preview window.<br/><br>If the preview window is too small click and drag the edge to the left. I'll scroll down and find a title I like. I'll choose a Zoom Out. <br><h3>Movie Maker Title Options</h3>Now under More Options I'll click Change the Text Font and Color. I can change the font, make the text bold, change the background color, and customize other options. Now I'll click Done Add title to movie. The title was added to the front of my project. I'll hit the spacebar to play the title.<br/><h3>Movie Maker End Credits</h3>Now I'll add an end credit. I'll click Tools Titles and Credits. And I'll click on Add Credits at the end. In the first line I'll type The End. On the second line I'll type by in the first textbox, and Isaac Brody in the second. Ill click done, add title to movie. I'll move the playhead and hit spacebar to play my credits. That looks good to me. And thats how you add credits to your movies in movie maker.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com<br/> aboutvideo_6847 Sun, 28 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Ice-effect.htm Make truly distinctive and exciting text in your Adobe Photoshop images with this Ice Effect. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Text Effects,Text,Graphic Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Text Effects,Text,Graphic Design Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. Today I'll teach you how to create an ice text effect using Photoshop CS2. <br><br>Start by creating a new document. Go to File, New. I'll select preset 800 X 600 to make things easy. And click ok. <br><h3>Photoshop Ice Effect Step 1- Background</h3>Now fill the background black by selecting the paint bucket tool on the left toolbar. If you can't see the paintbucket tool hold down the mouse over the gradient tool to bring up the paint bucket. And click once on the background. <br><h3>Photoshop Ice Effect Step 2- Text Color</h3>Now select the type tool on the left toolbar and switch your foreground color button to white. Now type the words ICE COLD. <br><h3>Next Step for Ice Effect- Layers</h3>Now hit the create a new layer button on the layer pallete. And hold down alt + go to Layer, Merge visible. <br><h3>Creating Ice in Photoshop</h3>Now go to Filter, Stylize, Wind. Set the Method to Wind, Direction set it From the right, click ok. Now go to Filter and you'll see wind on the top. Select it again. Now go to Filter, Stylize, Wind, set the Method to Wind, Direction set it From the left, click ok. Now go to Filter and you'll see wind on the top. Select it again. <br><br>Now go to Edit, Transform, Rotate 90 degrees CW to turn the image on its side. And again go to Filter, Stylize, Wind, set the Method to Wind, Direction set it From the right, click ok. And repeat the wind filter. And one more time goto Filter, Stylize, Wind, set the Method to Wind, Direction set it From the left, click ok. And repeat it one more time. Now go to Edit, Transform, Rotate 90 degrees CCW to turn the image right side up again. <br><h3>Photoshop Ice Effect Final Adjustments</h3>Now make sure the top layer is selected and go to Image, Adjustments, Hue/Saturation. Click the colorize box. And just the hue saturation box until you get a blue color you like. I'll use 220 for hue and 59 or saturation. Click ok. <br><br>We've just succeeded in creating a cool ice effect in Photoshop. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com.<br> aboutvideo_6111 Tue, 12 Feb 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/queens/Queens--Little-India.htm Come to Little India in Jackson Heights for authentic Southeast Asian cuisine and groceries, sari shops, and the best of Bollywood. queens, jackson, heights, new, york, city 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. queens, jackson, heights, new, york, city Come to Little India in Jackson Heights for authentic Southeast Asian cuisine and groceries, sari shops and the best of Bollywood. aboutvideo_4613 Wed, 20 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/windows/Subscribe-to-RSS-Feeds.htm Get the information you need when you want it by subscribing to RSS feeds. Learn how to sign up for feeds and how to customize them in Microsoft Vista. rss feeds,microsoft vista,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. rss feeds,microsoft vista,videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I will show you how to subscribe to RSS Feeds using Microsoft Vista. <h3>What Does RSS Mean?</h3> RSS stands for Really Simple Syndication. RSS feeds provide information from Web sites, such as news sites, that becomes readily available to you on your computer when you subscribe. <h3>Go to the Web Site</h3> First, open up your Web browser, and go to the site that has the RSS Feed that you want. <br><br> Next, click on the RSS button here. Remember, if the Web site doesn't have the RSS button, it means that there aren 't any feeds available for that site. <h3>Subscribe to the RSS Feed</h3> Click on the 'subscribe' option you want from the pull-down window. For example, on cnn.com, I can choose to subscribe to the Top Stories or Recent Stories. <br><br> Next, you can make changes that you want, like the name or location of the RSS feed, in the dialog box here. Click 'OK' when you are satisfied with your RSS feed. <h3>Access the RSS Feed</h3> Once you have subscribed, the RSS feed will be visible in your browser tool bar here. To access the feed, click on the RSS feed button. You will see the latest information here. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_5907 Tue, 27 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/seattle/Seattle---Tour-of-Belltown.htm Come dig through the roots of the Seattle music scene in this relaxed yet vibrant neighborhood. seattle, washington, ballard 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. seattle, washington, ballard Come dig through the roots of the Seattle music scene in this relaxed yet vibrant neighborhood. aboutvideo_10257504 Mon, 10 Jul 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://home.about.com/z/cg/vp.htm?ch=style&l=style/v/10&ap=1 Style expert Kim Johnson Gross shows you how to mix a few key pieces for a variety of timeless, stylish looks. 2006 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Home/Consumer Information/Clothing and Accessories Shopping/Clothing Style expert Kim Johnson Gross helps you discover the essential items every woman should have in her closet and shows you how to successfully mix these few key pieces for a variety of timeless, stylish looks to fit any occasion. aboutvideo_6032 Sun, 08 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/boston/Boston---Jamaica-Plain.htm Everybody feels welcome in the melting pot of Jamaica Plain, Boston. boston, massachusetts, jamaica, plain 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. boston, massachusetts, jamaica, plain Everybody feels welcome in the melting pot of Jamaica Plain, Boston. aboutvideo_4556 Thu, 26 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/chinesefood/Lo-Mein.htm Wondering what to make for dinner tonight? Try this delicious recipe for lo mein. You can have the leftovers for lunch the next day. chinese food,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. chinese food,videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make lo mein. <h3>Lo Mein Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you'll need:<ul> <li>1 pound soft lo mein noodles</li> <li>1/2 pound sliced beef</li> <li>1 package mushrooms</li> <li>1/4 cup shredded carrots</li> <li>2 scallions</li> <li>2 slices ginger root</li> <li>1 clove crushed garlic</li> <li>1/4 c. cooking oil</li> <li>2 tablespoons dark soy</li> <li>1 tablespoon light soy</li> <li>1 teaspoon sugar</li> <li>1 tablespoon wine</li> <li>salt</li> <li>pepper</li> <li>1 teaspoon cornstarch</li> <li>dashes sesame oil</li> </ul> <h3>Make the Marinade for the Lo Mein Beef</h3> A few hours before cooking, I'm going to make the marinade for the beef. I'm going to cut my pre-sliced beef into thin strips. Lo Mein can also be made with chicken, shrimp, or just with vegetables. <br><br> In a mixing bowl, combine the wine, the light soy sauce, half of the sugar, a sprinkle of pepper, a dash of sesame oil, and 1 tablespoon of cooking oil. <br><br> Pour the sauce over the beef. Let the beef marinate in the refrigerator for a few hours. <h3>Cook the Lo Mein Noodles</h3> When you are ready to cook everything, start with the noodles and the vegetables. First, bring a pot of water to a boil. <br><br> Cook the lo mein noodles according to the package directions, usually between 1 and 3 minutes. Drain them in a colander and rinse with cold water, so they don't overcook. <h3>Prepare the Lo Mein Sauce</h3> Next, shred the scallions, I like to do this by just cutting with kitchen shears. Then chop one piece of ginger. <br><br> Also, prepare the sauce by combining the dark soy sauce and the rest of the sugar. <h3>Heat and Flavor the Oil</h3> Now, heat 2 tablespoons of oil in a wok over high heat. We are going to flavor this oil by adding one slice of the ginger and the garlic clove. Brown them for a minute or two and then remove them from the pan. <h3>Stir Fry the Lo Mein Ingredients</h3> Next, stir fry the mushrooms for a few minutes. Then add the beef. You can also add the chopped ginger at this time. Cook until the beef is no longer pink. <br><br> Next, pour in the carrots. To save time, I bought pre-shredded carrots; this is about one medium carrot. Cook for one more minute. <br><br> Now pour everything into a bowl while we work with the noodles. <h3>Stir Fry the Lo Mein Noodles</h3> Add 3 more tablespoons of oil. When it is hot, fry the noodles and bring the heat back down to medium. <br><br> Then, add the scallions, bean sprouts, and finally the beef and vegetable mixture . Mix it all together. Finally, pour on the sauce and cook for 1 more minute. Serve hot and enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5905 Wed, 21 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/losangeles/LA-s-Gangster-History.htm Before gangstas, there were gangsters in Los Angeles. los, angeles, california, sunset, strip 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. los, angeles, california, sunset, strip Before gangstas, there were gangsters in Los Angeles. aboutvideo_5444 Tue, 25 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Sausage-and-Kale-Soup.htm It's easy to load up on healthy kale when you combine it with spicy Portuguese sausage and potatoes in this amazing soup. soup recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. soup recipes,videos Hi, I'm Chef John Mitzewich for About.com Food, and today we're making a delicious Portuguese-style sausage and kale soup. <h3>Sausage and Kale Soup Ingredients</h3> Now, if there was some kind of Soul Food Olympics, this should be Portugal's entry. It's so satisfying and so easy to make. <br><br> You're going to need:<ul> <li>8 ounces Linguisa sausage, which is a spicy Portuguese sausage or any spicy sausage. (I actually used chorizo - please don't tell the Portuguese!)</li> <li>12 ounces chopped kale</li> <li>2 russet potatoes</li> <li>1/2 chopped onion</li> <li>1 quart chicken stock or any stock</li> </ul> Now, I buy the kale already washed in those bags cut and ready to go. If you want to take out some of those stems, you can, but they are edible. <h3>Saute the Onions and Sausage</h3> In your stockpot, you're going to add a couple of tablespoons of olive oil. On medium heat, go ahead and add your sausage and onion, and a teaspoon of salt. <br><br> You're just going to saut&#233; that until the onions soften, probably about 5-10 minutes. And all that delicious flavorful oil is going to seep out of the sausage. <h3>Combine the Liquid and Potatoes</h3> At that point, I'm going to add my liquids, which is my quart of chicken stock and 1 quart of water. Go ahead and add your potatoes, and simmer that on low. <br><br> Now, if you want, as it's simmering, you can skim the top for that oil. That's optional. That's very flavorful, but if you're going low-cal, it's not a bad idea. <h3>Simmer the Potatoes</h3> You're going to simmer this until the potatoes fall apart. How will you know? If you can mush them against the side of the pot and they just smash, that's what you're looking for. <h3>Add the Kale</h3> At that point, we're going to add the kale, which is going to seem like a ton, but in just a few seconds it's going to wilt down and seem like the perfect amount. <br><br> Now, just after a couple minutes, it's going to look like it's done. But if you taste it, it will have a little bit of a bitter aftertaste. It has to cook longer than a few minutes. <h3>Simmer the Kale</h3> So what we're going to do now, even though it's a nice bright green, were going to sacrifice a little bit of color for a much better flavor. <br><br> We're going to simmer the kale until tender; it's going to take about 20 or 25 minutes. You'll be amazed how mellow that flavor gets. <h3>Serve the Sausage and Kale Soup</h3> We have to eat our dark leafy greens, and if I have to trick you by adding sausage and potatoes, I'll do it! And there you go, our finished soup. <br><br> The potato adds a perfect velvety texture to the stock. I'm going to garnish with a little bit of sour cream and some paprika. <h3>Tailor the Soup to Your Taste</h3> Now, this is a really easy soup to tailor. If you want it thicker, add more potato. If you want it richer, add more sausage. If you add a different green, fine. <br><br> But it's amazing how just a few simple ingredients produce such a comforting and satisfying soup. Thank you, Portugal. I hope you give that a try. Enjoy! <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3956 Mon, 23 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/Pie-Crust-Lattice.htm Weaving a pie crust lattice is simple, and the overall effect is gorgeous. Try this technique to top off a berry pie. baking videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. baking videos Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I am going to show you how to make a pie crust lattice. <br><br> This is a great way to top off a berry pie. It looks fancy, but is actually not that complicated to create. <h3>Cut the Crust Into Strips</h3> You will need to make a double crust. Place the bottom crust in the pie pan, and add the filling. <br><br> Now, roll out the top crust. Cut it into strips about 3/4 inch wide. <h3>Crisscross the Strips</h3> We will begin by taking two long strips and forming an "X" in the center of the pie. Now, take four shorter strips and lay them toward the edge of the pie, so that they are parallel with the first strips we put down. <br><br> So, we have an "X" in the middle, and then two along the outside, parallel with the middle strip. Take four more strips and place them in between the outer and innermost ones that we have. <h3>Seal the Bottom and Top Crusts</h3> This lattice is simple to create, and to the naked eye, it looks like it is woven. Trim off any crust hanging over the edge of the pie, and seal the bottom and top crusts together. Now your pie is ready to bake and enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3691 Wed, 14 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/macs/iDVD-Slideshows.htm Transform piles of pictures into entertaining slideshows with custom music and comments using Apple iDVD. iDVD, Slideshows, Computers, Photos, movies 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. iDVD, Slideshows, Computers, Photos, movies Hi- I am Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I will show you how to create a photo slideshow directly in iDVD. iDVD allows you to have well over 9,000 images in one or more slideshows, depending upon what other content you have on your disc. <h3>Select Photos for Slideshow</h3> I will open the Media pane, and click Photos to see my iPhoto albums. I will drag one of my albums called crew shots into the DVD menu. A button is created that links to the images and it is called the name of my album. I can rename it by clicking the text and changing it. If the button is selected and I click open the buttons pane, I can givc the button a shape. <br><br>Now, if I double-click the button the slideshow editor will open. Here are all the thumbnails of the photos. You can choose to view the thumbnails vertically or horizontally by clicking these buttons. <h3>Arrange Photos for iDVD Slideshow</h3> You can click and drag the photos to re-arrange their order and you can click and press delete. You can also add other images from the finder by clicking and dragging them in. <h3>Slideshow Loops & Comments</h3> If you click on settings, you can choose to loop the slideshow, display navigation arrows, allow users to copy the pictures to their computer, and enable the titles and comments. <br><br> If you click on the file name you can give it a new display name. You can also add the comments by clicking on Add comments and typing something in. <h3>iDVD Slideshow Transitions</h3> You can choose what transition to use between the images by using this drop down menu. To change the length of the slides make a selection from this drop down menu. You can allow viewers to advance through the slideshow manually with a remoe control only if there is no soundtrack. <h3>Slideshow Music Soundtrack</h3> To add music, click on audio. Select the song you want from iTunes or Garageband and click apply. You can adjust the slideshow volume with this slider. iDVD automatically adjusts the overall duration of the slides to match the length of the audio clip. The slide duration is changed to "Fit to Audio." However, you can go back and change the duration. <h3>The Final Review</h3> Finally, you can preview your slideshow by clicking play. Click return to go back to the main menu. Now I will play the entire DVD, select my button, and I can watch the slideshow. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at computing.about.com. <br><br> aboutvideo_6777 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/autorepair/Winter-Driving---Maintenance.htm Learn how to drive and maintain your car in winter weather conditions. winter driving,auto safety,snow tires 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. winter driving,auto safety,snow tires Hi, I'm Barbara Terry for About.com Autos. Today we're going to talk about tips for winter weather driving and maintaining your car in winter weather. <br/><H3>What you Need for Winter Driving </H3>It is wise to invest in a good set of snow tires. Keep in mind that these tires can last you up to 4 seasons, of course depending on how many miles you put on them. <br/><H3>Winter Driving- Tires</H3>To maintain your tires, always rotate them and have them high-speed balanced every 5,000 miles. If you can afford it, have your car's undercarriage sprayed with a rust-preventative product. My suggestion for cutting down on snow glare would be to put your sun visor down, wear a good pair of non-glare sunglasses, and always keep your windshield as clean as possible inside and out on a consistent basis. <br/><H3>Winter Driving- Maintenance</H3>It's also important to wash your vehicle on a regular basis to get all of the salt off of your exterior. This will prevent your car from having a rust issue in the future. <br/><H3>Winter Driving- Safety</H3>You should always keep plenty of space between your car and the one in front of you. Pay close attention to not only how you are driving but to the other drivers on the road around you. You never know when another motorist on the road near you may lose control and cause an accident. <br/><br/>Also, if you do not have anti-lock breaks, do not slam on the breaks. It is very important to gently pump them in a consistent manner. <br/><br/>Driving in torrential weather can be tricky, even if you're a seasoned, bad-weather driver. By staying cool and calm, and always knowing your surroundings, you can prevent not only your causing an accident but being involved in an accident that someone else is causing. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Autos.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_6944 Thu, 01 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Slideshow-in-iMovie.htm Learn how to create an iMovie slideshow, so you can share your photos with family and friends. imovie videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. imovie videos Hi. I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing.<br><br>Today I'll teach you how to create a photo slideshow in Apple iMovie. First open up your movie project or create a new project. <br><h3>Choose Pictures for an iMovie Slideshow</h3>To create a photo slideshow click on the photos icon. This brings up the photo library. There are no pictures in it. You cant do a photo slideshow in iMovie without first putting photos in your photo library in iPhoto.<br><br>If you dont have any pictures in the photo library, open up your harddrive, go to applications, and doubleclick on iPhoto. And now click and drag photos to the main window. This adds them to the photo library. Now quit iPhoto by going to iPhoto quit and go back to iMovie. <br><h3>iMovie Slideshow and the Ken Burns Effect</h3>My photos appear under photo library and I'll click on them and click on the Ken Burns effect. Ken Burns is a documentary filmmaker who is known for using moving still shots in his documentaries. When I click on a photo it shows the effect in the small preview window in the right corner. <br><br>We can reverse the effect by clicking the reverse button. We can adjust the size of the picture with the first slider and the speed of the effect with the second slider. <br><h3>Add More Pictures to iMovie Slideshow</h3>To add pictures into the timeline click on the clip viewer icon. And drag your pictures into the timeline.<br><br>When you drag your photos to the timeline, a redline appears below the pictures. The computer needs to process the pictures and the redline shows the progress. <h3> Other Features in iMovie Slideshow</h3>To apply the effect click on the first photo, and click update. Once again the redline appears to render the effect. I'll click update for all of my pictures. After its finished rendering I'll click on the gray part of the timeline to deselect the clips. <br><br>To shorten the picture length in the timeline click the timeline viewer icon, zoom out, and click and drag on the edge of each photo to shorten the length. <br><br>To make your slideshow even nicer, click on the transitions icon and drag a cross dissolve between each picture. <br><h3>Finish Your iMovie Slideshow</h3>Finally, drag the playhead to the beginning of the timeline and press play. And theres our photo slideshow. <br.<br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_4774 Fri, 29 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/email/Add-a-Photo-to-an-AIM-Profile.htm Customize your instant messenger profile with a photo or buddy icon. Watch how to add an image to your AIM profile. instant messenger,AIM videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. instant messenger,AIM videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I will show you how to add a photo or buddy icon to your AIM page. <br><br> Adding a photo or buddy icon on AIM allows you to share images with everyone on the AIM network. <h3>Sign On to AIM</h3> First sign onto your AIM account. If you don't have an AIM account, go to aim.com to download the free instant messaging system. <h3>Edit Your AIM Profile</h3> Once you are signed in, go to 'Edit My AIM Page' at the top of your buddy list window. <br><br> In the Web browser window that opens up, you can customize your personal data, photo, AIM profile, basic info, favorite sites, and more. <h3>Select a Photo to Add to Your AIM Profile</h3> To add a photo, click on 'My Photo' from the list on the left side of the screen. Here, you will see your current photo, if you have one. <br><br> To add a new photo or to change your current photo, click on the 'Browse' button. From here, you can choose a photo to add to your page. <br><br> Once you have found a photo that you want, select it, and then press 'Open.' <h3>Preview the Photo</h3> To see what your photo will look like, click on the 'Preview' button. A preview of your image will appear in the Web page for you to see. If you decide to use another photo, go back to 'Browse' to pick another photo. <h3>Name the Photo</h3> If you are satisfied, you can choose to type a photo title in the space provided. I will type 'winter leaves.' When you are finished, click on 'Save Page.' <br><br> Now, your photo, or minipic, will appear on your AIM page, your friends Buddy Galleries, and elsewhere on the <br><br> AIM pages site. AIM will claim to remove any copyrighted images or inappropriate material. <h3>Change a Buddy Icon</h3> To add a buddy icon, go to 'Edit Expressions' on the top of your buddy list window. <br><br> In the Web browser window, you can edit your buddy icon, wallpaper, sound, and smileys. In the Buddy Icon section, you can Reset or Change your icon. <br><br> I will click on 'Change' since I do not have a buddy icon yet. If you have a buddy icon already, click on 'Reset' to clear it. Then click on 'Change.' <h3>Select the Buddy Icon</h3> In this window, you can select your icon from the list of categories such as animals, movie titles, people, or travel. I will choose Animals. <br><br> When you click on the category you want, you can select an image from the subcategory list. I will click on 'Cats.' Now you can choose from a variety of images. Click on the image you want. <h3>Preview Your Buddy Icon</h3> To preview the image, click the 'Preview' button, and you can see what your buddy icon will look like. Click 'OK' when you are done previewing. When you are satisfied, click 'Apply.' <br><br> Now when you chat with someone on AIM, they will be able to see your buddy icon in the chat window. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com aboutvideo_4777 Mon, 23 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/email/Identify-a-Phishing-Scam.htm That email from your bank looks legit, but how can you be sure? Check out these tips on how to identify a phishing scam. computing videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. computing videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll teach you how to identify a phishing scam. <h3>What is a Phishing Scam?</h3> A phishing scam is a scam where the scammer sends an email purporting to be from a valid financial or e-commerce provider, such as eBay. <br><br> The email often entices the intended victim to visit a fraudulent Web site and enter sensitive financial and identification information. <h3>Check the HTML Link</h3> There are several tips to avoid a phishing scam. Scammers use HTML, a programming language, in emails. It links emails to a scamming Web site instead of the Web site that it claims to be. <br><br> If you have a suspicious email that is asking you to send information by clicking on the link, hover your mouse over the link. <br><br> Each HTML link has two components to its tag, the real link, called the target, and the displayed text. In a phishing scam, the display text is different from the actual Web site that it's linked to. It leads you to another page, which can be misleading, but is a clever trick for scammers. <h3>Look at the Target</h3> Avoid being misled. Hover your mouse over the link again, and take a look at the bottom left corner of your browser window. <br><br> If you see nothing, go to 'View' on the Toolbar and click 'Status Bar.' You should see the actual target, or where the link takes you, displayed there. <h3>Refer to the Page Source</h3> While this tip will be helpful, the most seasoned scammers will still find ways to elude being caught. <br><br> If you want to make sure that links in your email are not false, go to your email, right click, and select either 'Page Source' or 'Properties.' This will take you to the HTML version of your email, and you can check links there. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_5839 Tue, 11 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/phoenix/Mill-Avenue-in-Tempe--Arizona.htm Home to Arizona State University, Tempe offers up great live music and even a graffiti shop. mill, phoenix, tempe, arizona 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. mill, phoenix, tempe, arizona Home to Arizona State University, Tempe offers up great live music and even a graffiti shop. aboutvideo_6130 Thu, 29 May 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/goeasteurope/Visit-Krakow--Poland.htm Are beers with berry preserves modern and historic? Krakow itself certainly is. krakow, poland 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. krakow, poland Are beers with berry preserves modern and historic? Krakow itself certainly is. aboutvideo_18584610 Mon, 10 Jul 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://home.about.com/z/cg/vp.htm?ch=health&l=health/v/1&ap=1 Are you plagued by frequent heartburn? Here are just a few tips on how to avoid and treat it. 2006 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Health/Conditions and Diseases/Digestive Disorders/Esophagus/Reflux Disease Shopping/Health/Conditions and Diseases/Digestive Disorders/Heartburn [intro] If you've ever had a burning sensation in the middle of your chest that works its way up toward your throat, then you're all too familiar with heartburn. Also called acid indigestion, heartburn is extremely common. Estimates are that 60 million Americans suffer from heartburn at least once a month. For many people it's an occasional nuisance. For others, it's a daily misery that makes eating and sleeping difficult. Left untreated, it can lead to serious complications. [body] Everybody experiences heartburn differently. Besides that painful burning sensation, it might feel like food is coming back into your mouth, or you might have a bitter taste in the back of your throat. Often, the discomfort gets worse when you bend over or lie down. Heartburn strikes when stomach acid flows up into your esophagus, the tube that connects your mouth to your stomach. At the top of your stomach, there's something called the lower esophageal sphincter that is supposed to let food into your stomach and keep what's in your stomach from flowing back up into your esophagus. When it doesn't work properly, acid spills up into your esophagus. Many things can trigger heartburn, including fatty and fried foods, chocolate, citrus, and tomatoes. Caffeine, alcohol, and tobacco can cause heartburn, too. So can large meals, tight clothes, and eating two to three hours before going to bed. If you're pregnant, you're more likely to experience heartburn as well. The good news is there are things you can do to prevent and treat heartburn. Start by tracking what you eat and then limit foods that seem to cause the problem. Eating smaller, more frequent meals, and avoiding alcohol, caffeine, and cigarettes will make a difference. It also helps to avoid lying down for about two hours after you eat. There are some over-the-counter medications that can prevent heartburn from occurring. They come in two types: acid blockers that reduce the amount of acid your stomach produces and protein pump inhibitors that stop your stomach from making acid at all. To be effective, you need to take these medications before heartburn starts. Once the symptoms start, antacids can help ease the pain. Sometimes it can be difficult to tell the difference between pain caused by heartburn and a heart attack. Chest pain that radiates out to your neck, jaw, or arms, shortness of breath, an irregular pulse, and sweating are all signs that you should seek emergency medical treatment. Check with your doctor if your heartburn becomes more severe or frequent, you have trouble swallowing, or you experience nausea or vomiting. Drastic weight loss, severe hoarseness, extreme stomach pain, and black or bloody bowel movements are also reasons to see your doctor. For most people, heartburn is an occasional uncomfortable nuisance. But, if you suffer from chronic heartburn, you shouldn't just ignore it. Left untreated, it can cause serious permanent damage to your esophagus. Fortunately, the odds are good that changes in diet and lifestyle combined with the right medication will help you get it under control. I'm Dr. Mona Khanna, About Health. aboutvideo_6071 Wed, 05 Mar 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/gonyc/Take-a-Walk-Through-Chelsea.htm What's a single gal to do in New York? Go to Chelsea, that's what. chelsea, manhattan, new, york, city 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. chelsea, manhattan, new, york, city What's a single gal to do in New York? Go to Chelsea, that's what. aboutvideo_6991 Wed, 08 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/Write-on-Cakes-With-Frosting.htm Finish decorating your cake by adding a special (and edible) message. Learn how to pipe frosted lettering on your cake. cake, frosting, piping, icing, write on cakes 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cake, frosting, piping, icing, write on cakes Hi, I'm Rachel Thebault from Tribeca Treats for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to write a message on a cake. <h3>Supplies Needed to Write With Frosting</h3> You will need:<ul> <li>a cake stand</li> <li>piping bags</li> <li>a small round pastry tip</li> <li>a coupler</li> <li>tinted icing at room temperature for easier piping</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Cake for Writing</h3> We've already iced the cake and put our border on it, then refrigerated it for 10 minutes so that the icing is cold and piping will be easier. <h3>Begin Piping the Message</h3> Hold the pastry bag, fitted with a small round tip, perpendicular to the cake. Using your weak hand as a guide hand, pipe the message. <h3>Space Out the Icing Message</h3> It's helpful to count the number of letters in each word before you pipe, so you can match up the middle of the word to the middle of the cake. This way it won't be scrunched up at the end. <h3>Fix Frosting Gaps</h3> If you have an air bubble in the bag and you get a broken letter, you can gently squeeze a little more icing into the gap. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more visit us on the web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5792 Wed, 21 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/gosoutheast/Tour-of-Decatur--Georgia.htm For a low-key, down home day or night on the town, head to Decatur, Georgia. georgia, decatur 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. georgia, decatur For a low-key, down home day or night on the town, head to Decatur, Georgia. aboutvideo_6786 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/autorepair/Replacing-Air-Filter.htm Learn how to change and maintain your car's air filter for optimal performance and gas mileage. air filter,car maintenance,gas mileage 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. air filter,car maintenance,gas mileage Hi, I'm Barbara Terry for About.com Autos. <br/>You should switch out your air filter approximately every 15,000 miles. It's something that can easily be done and will not break your bank. <br/><H3>Locating Air Filter</H3>Let's start by popping the hood and locating our air filter. On corroburated engines, the air filter is located on top of the motor. It's a round metal piece that's usually about the size of a medium pizza. <br/><br/>On the fuel-injected vehicle that we're working on today, the air filter is located to the side of the engine and it's rectangular in shape. <br/><H3>Removing and Replacing Air Filter</H3>Once you locate your air filter, you'll want to unclamp the housing, lift it up, remove the old air filter and set it aside. If you don't have a vacuum cleaner availabile use a wet cloth to remove all of the dust and dead bugs but today we're actually going to vacuum it out. We're going to make sure we get all of those dead bugs and dust out of there. <br/><br/>Again this is something that can be done really easily. Make sure to get it down in there really good and tight. Put the housing back on properly and of course re-clamp it down. <br/><H3>Air Filter Precautions</H3>Remember to always have your motor turned off and your engine cooled down before messing around under the hood. And also, replace those dirty, old air filters with new, clean ones to keep your engine running properly and to ensure better gas mileage. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Autos.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_6117 Tue, 11 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/toronto/Canada---Toronto-s-Parkdale.htm Parkdale is one of the oldest neighborhoods in Toronto. In fact, it might actually be one of the elemental neighborhoods to the Milky Way. toronto, canada, parkdale 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. toronto, canada, parkdale Parkdale is one of the oldest neighborhoods in Toronto. In fact, it might actually be one of the elemental neighborhoods to the Milky Way. aboutvideo_4122 Fri, 13 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktoppub/Extract-Images-from-a-PDF.htm Learn two ways to extract images and text from a PDF using Adobe Acrobat. pdfs, Adobe Acrobat, video 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. pdfs, Adobe Acrobat, video Hi, I'm Don Schecter for About.com Computing. Today, I'll show you how to extract text or images from a PDF file. <br><br> There are many ways to extract images from a PDF, but today I'll show you just using Adobe Acrobat. <h3>Select the Image or Text You Want to Extract</h3> First open the PDF file you wish to extract from. On the toolbar, click the 'select' button. Click the image or text you want to extract. I'll take this image. <br><br> You will see a button in the top left corner of your selection. Click it, and your selection will be copied to your clipboard. <h3>Paste the Image or Text</h3> Now open a document where you want your extracted text or image. I'll open a blank Word document. Right click and choose 'paste.' There's my image. <br><br> You can see some black lines around it from the edges of the original image. I don't want those, so I'll go back and extract it another way. <h3>Use the Snapshot Tool</h3> On the toolbar, click the Snapshot tool. Now, if I click and drag around the image, it will automatically add it as a selection to the clipboard. Click 'OK.' I'll go back to my Word document, right click, and choose 'paste.' There it is with no lines around it. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, visit us on the Web at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6781 Tue, 09 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/southernfood/Fruit-Salsa.htm A chef explains how to make pineapple salsa fruit,salsa,pineapple,cilantro,dipping sauce,low fat,recipe,pineapple salsa 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. fruit,salsa,pineapple,cilantro,dipping sauce,low fat,recipe,pineapple salsa Hi, this is Ben Kurtzman with About.com food, and today we are going to be making pineapple salsa, which is one of my favorites, because it is very versatile. You can use it to accent a nice piece of fish or chicken, or you can just eat it on its own with corn chips.<br/><br/> <H3>Pineapple Salsa Ingredients</H3><br> First, we have half of a pineapple, we have a quarter cup of cilantro, three cloves of garlic, half of a white onion, half of a red pepper, half of a jalape&#241;o pepper, the juice of one lemon, and salt and pepper. I have chopped the cilantro, the garlic, the onion, and the red and jalape&#241;o peppers pretty finely. I like a nice smooth salsa. If you like it a little more chunky in texture that is okay too, just plan accordingly as you chop.<br/><br/> <H3>Prepare the Ingredients</H3><br> I am going to begin by chopping the pineapple. Keep chopping until you get the chunks the size you want. They do not have to be exactly the same size, but you want to keep a certain consistency.<br/><br/>Now, I am going to take our pineapple, put it in a small mixing bowl. Now, the only thing left to do is add our remaining ingredients. Our cilantro, and I am going to use a rubber spatula here to get the remainder. Here is out garlic. Beautiful. Onion of course. And as you can see here I have included the red pepper and the jalapeno in the same bowl. Here is our lemon juice. One, and two.<br/><br/> <H3>Mix the Ingredients</H3><br> If you can see here, it looks like I have underestimated the size of the bowl we are going to need. But that is not a big deal. We can just take a slightly larger bowl and put the contents in before we mix it. Now our pineapple is on top. This is not going to be a pineapple upside down cake. And we will mix. You really want to get everything blended nicely so that all of the ingredients are represented in a single bite. And the beautiful thing about this dish is the colors are just lovely. You get some nice yellows, some greens, some reds, very festive. <br/><br/> <H3>Taste and Adjust</H3><br> Now what I am going to do is just take a little taste of the salsa on a corn chip. This is my favorite part. I am going to do this before we add the salt and pepper, so here we go. It is delicious.<br/><br/>Now I am going to add just a little bit of salt and pepper. Here is our salt. Grind some pepper in. Stir it up. Add it to our mix. <br/><br/> <H3>Salsa Variations</H3><br> One of the great things about this recipe is that it is really adaptable. You can substitute any of the ingredients for anything that you like better. You can use different kinds of fruit, or maybe you like red onion instead of a white onion. Feel free to experiment. That is what makes this a great recipe.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6000 Thu, 10 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/losangeles/California---LA-Griffith-Park.htm Take a hike through author John Albert's personal field of dreams in Griffith Park. griffith, park, los, angeles, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. griffith, park, los, angeles, california Take a hike through author John Albert's personal field of dreams in Griffith Park. aboutvideo_5975 Wed, 21 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/detroit/Detroit---Tour-of-Hamtramck.htm This blue-collar enclave in the middle of Detroit has evolved into Mo-Town's rock 'n roll epicenter. detroit, hamtramck, michigan 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. detroit, hamtramck, michigan This blue-collar enclave in the middle of Detroit has evolved into Mo-Town's rock 'n roll epicenter. aboutvideo_6973 Thu, 08 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Croutons.htm Croutons add a satisfying crunch to soups and salads. Learn how to make your own croutons at home. crouton,salad,recipe,bread,bake,soup 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. crouton,salad,recipe,bread,bake,soup Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make homemade croutons.<br> <h3>Prepare the Crouton Bread</h3> Preheat the oven to 325 degrees. Start with a firm bread such as a baguette. Thinly cut the bread into slices. For something a bit fancier, cut the bread at an angle. You can also cut it into cubes. Arrange the slices on a baking sheet. Line the pan with parchment paper or aluminum foil for an easy clean up.<br> <h3>Crouton Seasonings</h3> Take:<ul> <li>4 tablespoons of melted butter</li> <li>add 1 teaspoon of garlic powder</li> <li>1 tablespoon of dried parsley flakes</li> <li>1 tablespoon of grated parmesan cheese</li> <li>a pinch of salt and pepper</li> </ul>Mix all of the ingredients well. <br> <h3>Season the Bread</h3> Now, dip a pastry brush into the butter mixture. Dab each slice with the brush to cover the entire top of the bread. Place small cubes of bread into a bowl. Put the butter mixture into the bowl and gently toss the cubes with the butter. <br> <h3>Bake the Croutons</h3> Arrange the cubes on the baking sheet in a single layer. Put the pans into the oven and bake for 25 to 30 minutes. Thicker slices may need a longer bake time. If you like softer croutons, use a shorter bake time. When the croutons are dried and slightly brown, remove them from the oven. Remove the croutons from the pan and store in an airtight container. Serve the croutons with your favorite soup or salad.<br><br> Thanks for watching, to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6904 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Apple-iMovie-titles.htm Give your movie the finishing touch it needs- Add both professional-looking titles and credits to your videos in Apple iMovie. iMovie,Video Titles 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. iMovie,Video Titles Hi. I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. <br/><br/>Today I'll teach you how to add titles to your video project in Apple's iMovie. First open up your movie project or create a new project and import clips. I've already placed clips on the Timeline. After arranging your video you might want to add titles and credits to your project. <br><h3>iMovie Title Window</h3>To add titles, click on the Titles icon. This brings up the title window. The title window displays customizable settings. In the title boxes at the bottom I'll title this My Great Movie and in the second title box I'll type by Isaac Brody. <br><h3>Text Size</h3>Above this I can change the title size; I'll make mine a little smaller. <br><h3>Background</h3>I can choose to put my title over black, but I'll leave that unchecked. <br><h3>Font</h3>I can also change the font. I'll select Arial. I'll leave the color white. <br><h3>iMovie Title Animation</h3>Above the font setting I can change the Title Animation. If you click on the title animations, iMovie previews them in the small preview window in the right corner. I'll scroll down and select Centered Title. Above this I can change the speed of the animation to affect how quickly the title fades in. <br><br>And I can change the pause setting to set how long the title stays up for. I'll set the speed to two, and the Pause Setting all the way up to four. Now I'll hit the preview button at the top to see how it looks. That looks pretty good. <br><h3>Title Positioning</h3>I don't like where my title is centered so I'll move it. To move the titles higher up or down click on the small preview window in the right corner. A cross appears. I can click up or down in the window to position the title. I'll click toward the top of the preview window. And now I'll click the preview button to see how it looks. That's much better. I'm satisfied with the title. <br><h3>Add Title to iMovie Timeline</h3>To apply the title I'll click the icon next to the centered title animation and drag it onto a clip on my timeline. <br><h3>Title Fixes</h3>If you don't like the title, highlight it and hit the Delete button. I like it, so I'll go to Edit Undo. <br><br>If you want, you can take this further by adding End Titles and credits. <br><br>And that's how you create titles in iMovie. Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_6990 Wed, 04 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/How-to-Decorate-Cake-Borders.htm Don't serve your guests a plain old cake. Jazz it up with these decorative borders. cakes, cake borders, decorate cakes, frosting cakes, video 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cakes, cake borders, decorate cakes, frosting cakes, video Hi, I'm Rachel Thebault from Tribeca Treats for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to pipe decorative borders on a cake. <h3>Tools Needed to Pipe a Cake Border</h3> You will need:<ul> <li>a cake stand </li> <li>piping bags</li> <li>round and star pastry tips</li> <li>a coupler</li> </ul> These cake decorating items can be found online or at a specialty food store. You will also need some room- temperature icing for easy piping. <h3>Prepare Your Iced Cake for Decorating</h3> Start with a cake that you've finished icing and let it sit in the refrigerator about 10 minutes. Using a cake that has cold icing on it will allow you to more easily fix any mistakes by scraping them off and re-piping. <h3>Assemble the Frosting Piping Bag</h3> Assemble your piping bag with the coupler and the pastry tip. First, pick up a round or star tip and place it in a pastry bag. Add about a cup of icing. Be careful not to add too much icing, or it will be harder to control your pastry bag. <h3>Make a Pearl Cake Border</h3> For pearls, use a round tip and pipe straight down onto the cake. Release pressure and then make a small circular motion with you hand to avoid creating point. <h3>Make a Star or Flower Cake Border</h3> For stars or flowers, use a star tip and pipe straight down onto the cake, again releasing pressure before you pull up. For flowers, you can use a tinted icing with a small round tip and pipe a small round circle in the center. <h3>Make a Shell Cake Border</h3> For shells, use a star tip and pipe sideways to create the thick end of the shell. Then release pressure as you pull along the cake. Begin the next shell, slightly overlapping the first. <h3>Make a Bottom Cake Border</h3> By placing the cake on a lightly larger cake board, you can also decorate the bottom with a similar border. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5909 Tue, 11 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/sanfrancisco/San-Francisco-s-Tango-Scene.htm Do the tango and dance cheek to cheek with a stranger in San Francisco. tango, san, francisco, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. tango, san, francisco, california Do the tango and dance cheek to cheek with a stranger in San Francisco. aboutvideo_4908 Thu, 29 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/indianfood/How-to-Make-Poppadom.htm Poppadom is a delicious, wafer-thin Indian bread flavored with spices like cumin and pepper. Try serving yours with chutney. poppadom,videos,indian food 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. poppadom,videos,indian food Hi, I'm Natasha Levitan for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make poppadom. <h3>Poppadom Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>2 cups urad flour</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon ground black pepper</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon ground cumin</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon salt</li> <li>1/4 cup water</li> <li>2 cups oil for frying</li> </ul> <h3>Make the Poppadom Dough</h3> To your bowl with flour, add black pepper, cumin, and salt, and mix them together with a paddle. Add water, and knead until the dough comes together. <h3>Roll Out the Poppadom Dough</h3> Flour your working surface, and transfer your dough on it. Pinch a walnut sized piece of dough, roll it between your hands. <br><br> Place it on your board and roll it out with a rolling pin into a shape of a circle. If your circle isn't perfect, here is a tip you can use. <br><br> Take a CD, place it on your dough and cut around it with a knife and discard the extra dough. Now your poppadom is perfect. <h3>Cook and Serve the Poppadom</h3> You can cook poppadom in a variety of different ways: microwave, bake, or fry. Into a deep pan, pour in your two cups of oil. <br><br> Turn the heat on medium, and heat the oil. Place your poppadom in it. Let it cook for two minutes on one side then turn it over with a slotted spoon and cook it on the other side for 30 seconds. <br><br> Take it out onto a plate lined with a paper towel to absorb the extra oil. You can serve it with a chutney or any main dish.<br><br> Thank you for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5862 Fri, 25 Jan 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/losangeles/Basketball-on-Venice-Beach.htm You gotta get your A game on to play on the Venice Beach basketball courts. venice, beach, los, angeles, basketball, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. venice, beach, los, angeles, basketball, california You gotta get your A game on to play on the Venice Beach basketball courts. aboutvideo_5575 Tue, 11 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/php/Basic-PHP-Syntax.htm PHP is a server side scripting language that, very often along with databases created with SQL, can create dynamic webpages. Learn basic PHP syntax in this demonstration. php, syntax, basic php 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. php, syntax, basic php Hi! I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I will show you the basics of PHP. PHP is a server side scripting language that, very often along with databases created with SQL, can create dynamic webpages. <h3>Start a PHP File</h3> The very first step when coding with PHP is to start with a blank file. I am using notepad. I will go to file save and call it test.php. Make sure that you add the extension .php at the end. <h3>Create a Tag for PHP Code</h3> Now we need to create a tag letting the server know that there is php code. So type a bracket, question mark,then php. Following this will be our code. <br><br> At the end of the code, we need to add another question mark and a closing bracket to state that the php statement is complete. Anything that is outside of this tag will be read as HTML. If you want, you can leave out the php text in the tag and just start with a bracket and question mark. <h3>Add a Comment to the PHP</h3> Comments are always a good idea when you want to explain what a function or piece of code does without it being displayed. To create a comment, you can type two slashes and then a comment on one line. <br><br>Alternatively, you can write your comment after the number sign. If you have a large block of text you can type a (IS THIS BACK?) slash followed by an asterisk. Then write your block of text and end it with another asterisk and slash. <h3>Output Text in PHP</h3> Now, let's output some text. All we need to do is add the word echo followed by our text in quotes. I will write Hello World. If you want to add another line of text, just add a semicolon after the quote and, on the next line I will type echo again and, in quotes, Hello Again. <h3>Upload the PHP File</h3> I will save this file and upload it via FTP to my web server. If I open up my Web browser and type in the URL where that file is saved, we will see our text. Notice that there is no line break between the two statements. If I go back to my code I can add an echo in between them. In quotes I will add an html break tag. Once I save and upload the file again, I can hit refresh and there is the text on the second line. <h3>Variables in PHP</h3> If you have used variables in other languages, then PHP will seem familiar. Just type a dollar sign and make up a name for your variable. I will create $text1. To give this a value I'll insert an equals sign and then Hello World in quotes again. I can create another variable $number that is an integer. I can write a number, 312 and don't need to put it in quotes. <br><br> There is a lot more you can do with PHP but this should help give you a feel for what to expect when working with PHP. Thanks for watching. For more information, visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4813 Wed, 08 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Pecan-Sandies.htm Whether you're enjoying tea or are just craving a delicate, sweet treat, these pecan sandies are sure to satisfy. cookie recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cookie recipes,videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make pecan sandies. <h3>Pecan Sandies Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 cup butter</li> <li>3/4 cup dark brown sugar</li> <li>1 egg yolk</li> <li>1/2 cup ground pecans</li> <li>2 1/2 cups flour</li> <li>1/2 cup sugar</li> <li>1 1/2 teaspoon cinnamon</li> </ul> Preheat oven to 325 degrees, and line two cookie sheets with parchment paper. <h3>Combine the Pecan Sandies Ingredients</h3> In the bowl of an electric stand mixer, cream the butter and the brown sugar on high speed. Add the egg yolk, pecans, and flour. Mix until combined well. <h3>Roll and Slice the Dough</h3> Divide dough in half and using parchment paper. Roll each half into a long two-inch-wide cylinders. <br><br> With a butter knife, thinly slice each log into 1/4-inch slices. Place on the prepared cookie sheets. <h3>Bake the Pecan Sandies</h3> Bake for 20 minutes, and then remove from the oven. <br><br> In a small bowl, mix the sugar and cinnamon. While the cookies are hot, roll them on both sides in the cinnamon and sugar mixture. <br><br> Set on a rack to cool completely. Enjoy with a cup of tea <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4791 Tue, 17 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/latinfood/Cuban-Sandwich.htm Want a taste of Havana during your next lunch break? With six ingredients and five easy steps, you can make the perfect pressed Cuban sandwich. latin food,food videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. latin food,food videos Hi, I'm Drew Duncan for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make the perfect pressed Cuban sandwich. It's a very simple process with six ingredients and five basic steps. <h3>Cuban Sandwich Ingredients</h3> The ingredients include:<ul> <li>dill pickles</li> <li>roast pork</li> <li>smoked ham</li> <li>Swiss cheese</li> <li>yellow mustard</li> <li>Cuban bread</li> </ul> You can use Italian or French bread, but it's better with real Cuban bread. You'll also need a sandwich press or a griddle and heavy frying pan in order to press the sandwich. <h3>Heat the Griddle</h3> Turn on your griddle and set the temperature to 350 degrees. You'll know the griddle is ready when a drop of water sizzles. <h3>Layer the Cuban Sandwich Ingredients</h3> Slice your bread in half and spread mustard on both halves. Place the first half on the griddle and layer your ham, pork, cheese, and pickles. Place the remaining half of the bread on top. <h3>Press and Cut the Cuban Sandwich</h3> Next, take your pan and press it down on top of the sandwich. You want the sandwich to be pressed to about a fourth of its original size. <br><br> Your Cuban is done when the bread is crispy and the cheese is melted. Take your sandwich off the griddle, and cut it diagonally across the length of the sandwich. <br><br> After your first bite, you'll be saying, "Vive el Cubano!" Thanks for watching. To learn more, please visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3805 Wed, 27 Dec 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/wine/How-to-Open-Wine.htm Instructions for opening a bottle of wine using a wine key. open,wine,bottle,drink,wine cork,cork,corkscrew,wine key 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. open,wine,bottle,drink,wine cork,cork,corkscrew,wine key Hi, I am Ben Kurtzman for About.com Food and I am going to show you how to open a bottle of wine using a wine key. <br> <H3>Parts of a Wine Key</H3> Let me start by introducing you to the different parts of the wine key. There is the knife, which we use to remove the foil around the top of the bottle. This is the corkscrew, which we turn into the cork. And there is the lever, which we will use to help extract the cork from the bottle. <br> <H3>Prepare Wine Bottle</H3> The first step is to remove the foil from the top of the bottle. Use the knife to cut around the top. Now, twist the corkscrew firmly into the center of the cork. When the corkscrew is in deep enough, hook the claw on the side of the bottle. <br> <H3>Open Wine Bottle</H3> Now you can lift up on the other end of the wine key, and using leverage, the cork should come right out. If everything goes smoothly the cork should come out with a satisfying pop and in one piece. <br> <H3>Cork Troubleshooting</H3> If some pieces of cork break off into the wine, you can still drink it. Simple pour the bottle through a strainer and enjoy the wine from a decanter. <br> <H3>Serving Wine </H3> For many wines, it is a good idea to open them a little while before you plan to serve them to give it an opportunity to breath. And finally, pour the wine in to a glass and enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching, and to learn more visit us on the Web at Food.About.com. aboutvideo_4929 Thu, 16 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/cocktails/Cocktail-Garnishes.htm Garnishes not only add flavor to your beverages, but they also serve as attractive decorations that liven up cocktail hour. cocktail videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cocktail videos Hi, I'm Jonathon Stewart for About.com Food, and today it's all about cocktail garnishes. <br><br> If you're looking to impress your friends or guests with your bartending expertise, there's no better way to bring some bling to your beverage than by appropriately garnishing your cocktail. <br><br> And no, I'm not talking about just shoving a lime into your Corona. Here's what we've got today; check it out. <h3>Use Limes as Garnishes</h3> Limes are far and away the most common garnish found in cocktails these days, and are the go-to for just about any vodka or gin drink, and are often served with rum or even whiskey. <h3>Definition of a Garnish</h3> One quick distinction: If a garnish adds flavor to a drink, it's technically called a "garnish." If it's just there to hang out and look pretty, it's technically called "garbage." <br><br> No really, it's actually called garbage, so don't be offended if your grandfather asks for a Manhattan without the garbage. Just spare him the cherry. <h3>Cut a Lime Garnish</h3> Limes can go both ways, garnish or garbage. To cut a lime garnish, cut a full lime in half cross-ways, then quarter the two remaining halves. <br><br> Always rub the lime around the rim of the glass, squeeze it into your cocktail, and toss the rind in for good measure. <h3>Cut a Lime for Decoration</h3> To cut a lime wedge for decoration, or to give your guest the option of using the garnish, cut the lime lengthwise, then make a small slit through the center of each half. <br><br> Flip the lime over and quarter each half, then use the center slit to hang it from the side of the glass. <h3>Use Lemons as Garnishes</h3> Lemons can also be cut into garnish wedges, for use in drinks like vodkalLemonades or even Bloody Mary's. <br><br> These are not to be confused with twists however, which are a common garnish for martinis, and are also traditionally made solely from lemons. More often than not, when you hear someone ask for a lime twist, what they really want is a lime wedge. <h3>Make a Lemon Twist</h3> To make a twist, cut off both ends of a lemon, then use a spoon to remove the fruit from inside. Slice the remaining rind lengthwise into quarter-inch strips. <br><br> Wipe the rim of your glass with the rind side of the lemon peel, then twist to release the rind's oils into your drink, and drop it right in. <h3>Cut Fruit Into Wheels</h3> Lemons, limes and oranges can also be easily cut into "wheels," which can really spruce up the appearance of a fancy cocktail. <br><br> To cut a wheel, simply slice a thin layer from the center of your piece of fruit, then make a small cut from the center toward the rind. <br><br> If you want to hang a full wheel, make your initial slice a little thicker. Go a little thinner, and you can easily turn your wheel into a fancy spiral. <h3>Other Types of Garnishes</h3> Other main garnishes include cherries, olives, and whipped cream, and other typical garbage includes things like colored straws, little umbrellas, and fire. <br><br> Although, personally I wouldn't recommend lighting up anything you're planning to pour into your head. <h3>How to Use Olives and Cherries</h3> Olives are most often served in martinis, either on plastic swords, toothpicks, skewers, or, my favorite, cocktail monkeys. <br><br> Traditionally olives should be pimento-less, but these days you'll find them stuffed with anything from jalape&#241;os to blue cheese. <br><br> Cherries garnish cocktails like Manhattans and sour drinks, and typically sit in the bottom of the glass or on top of the ice. Maraschino cherries are traditional, but fresh picked fruit is a tasty update. <br><br> Always remember that while cocktail garnishes can be delicious, never pick at a bartender's stash - unless you're the bartender, of course. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5823 Wed, 10 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/losangeles/Local-Poker-Spots-in-LA.htm You don't have to head to Vegas to play poker! Place your bets in Los Angeles at these local poker spots. LA Poker, poker, la, los angeles 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. LA Poker, poker, la, los angeles You don't have to head to Vegas to play poker! Place your bets in LA as well. aboutvideo_6176 Sun, 08 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/boston/Boston---Somerville.htm No matter who you are, there's a coffee shop and a place for you in Davis Square, the hip center of suburban Somerville. somerville, boston, massachusetts 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. somerville, boston, massachusetts No matter who you are, there's a coffee shop and a place for you in Davis Square, the hip center of suburban Somerville. aboutvideo_6804 Sat, 27 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/coloring-book.htm How to turn digital pictures into a coloring book using Adobe Photoshop photoshop,coloring book,photoshop coloring book 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. photoshop,coloring book,photoshop coloring book Hi, I'm for Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I am going to show you how to have some fun with your family by turning your photos into a coloring book using Adobe Photoshop.<br/><h3>Choose your Photoshop Coloring Book Images</h3>First open up Photoshop. Click on the File Menu, select Open, and find your digital picture.<br/><h3>Duplicate & Convert Layers to Black & White</h3>First duplicate the background layer. Go Layer> New> Layer via Copy. Now we have 2 layers, the Background Layer, and Layer 1 With Layer 1 selected, choose Image> Adjustments> Desaturate. This turns our photo into greyscale. <br/><br/>Now we have to duplicate Layer 1. Go to Layer> New> Layer via Copy. With Layer 2 selected, go to Image> Adjustments> Invert. In the Layers Palette change the Layers Blend Mode to Color Dodge. The picture is now almost completely white.<br/><br/>Now go to Filter> Blur> Gaussian Blur. When the dialog box appears start by moving the Radius Slider all the way to the left. Once you've done that you can start to slowly move it to the right. As you move the slider the sketch of your picture will start to appear. If your photo reappears, just nudge the slider to the left just a little.<br/><br/>You can print out a few different sketches and collate them into a coloring book for the kids. Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com.<br/><br/> aboutvideo_5782 Fri, 16 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/boston/Roxbury-s-Dudley-Square.htm A diverse neighborhood unites to save its mom and pop shops and a unique grassroots cafe. massachusetts, boston, roxbury, dudley, square 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. massachusetts, boston, roxbury, dudley, square A diverse neighborhood unites to save its mom and pop shops and a unique grassroots cafe. aboutvideo_5319 Thu, 20 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/menshealth/Impotence.htm A man who is impotent cannot maintain an erection. Learn more about what causes impotence. impotence, erectile disfunction 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. impotence, erectile disfunction <h3>What Is Impotence?</h3> Impotence is a disorder of the male reproductive system and is the inability to maintain an erection of the penis. <h3>What Is an Erection?</h3> An erection is dependent on blood flow to the penis, which is triggered by sensory and mental stimulation. With appropriate stimulation, arterial blood flows into the small arteries inside the penis. As the blood vessels in the penis dilate, blood flow increases, and vascular channels called the corpora cavernosa and the corpora spongeosum become engorged, resulting in an erection. <h3>Causes of Impotence</h3> Impotence can be caused by a disruption at any stage in this series of events. Certain diseases, including diabetes and muscular dystrophy can cause impotence. Psychological factors can also lead to impotence. And, impotence can be a side effect of some common medications.<br><br>Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_139041073 Mon, 10 Jul 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://home.about.com/z/cg/vp.htm?ch=food&l=food/v/2&ap=2 Learn how to make the perfect iced coffee at home. 2006 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Home/Cooking Home/Cooking/Beverages/Coffee Hi, I am Ben Kurtzman for About.com Food, and today I am going to show you a quick trick for making delicious iced coffee. There are two ways that most people make iced coffee at home. One is to make a pot of coffee and simply add ice cubes. The other is to brew a pot of hot coffee and then put it in the refrigerator. Now, the problem I find with just adding ice cubes to coffee is that it waters down very quickly. And the difficulty with brewing coffee and putting it in the fridge is that becomes stale before too long. And so I suffered with both of these methods for many years, but then, one day, a friend showed me the trick of coffee cubes, and I am going to share that with you today. If you take a pot of hot coffee and pour it into an ice cube tray and freeze it as if it were ice cubes, then it will be there when you want iced coffee and it will be nice and fresh, and it will be iced cubes. Once you have your coffee cubes, and time you want iced coffee simply make a pot of hot coffee, add the coffee cubes to the glass and then add just a little bit of the hot coffee to melt the cubes a little bit, and you are good to go. Here is another little trick. What I like to do is take my sugar and put a little bit at the bottom of the glass, then I am going to pour the hot coffee over it so that it dissolves nicely. So now the sugar should be dissolved, and you are not going to get any of the grains. I am going to fill the rest of the cup with my coffee cubes. Now you can fill it all the way to the top because, as you can see, they melt very quickly. Now, I am just going to fill the rest of the glass with hot coffee so that it covers all of the cubes. Do not forget to leave room for cream. The great thing about this drink is that as the ice melts you get more and more coffee so it enhances the flavor, and for those of you who love caffeine, it is going to pack a little bit more of a punch too. Well that is it. Thanks for watching, and to learn more visit us on the web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4668 Wed, 13 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/mideastfood/Baba-Ghanoush.htm Treat your party guests to baba ghanoush, a popular, flavorful Middle Eastern spread typically served with pita bread. eggplant recipes, appetizers, appetizer videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. eggplant recipes, appetizers, appetizer videos Hi, I'm Natasha Levitan for About.com Food. Today, I'm going to show you how to make baba ghanoush. <h3>Baba Ghanoush Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 large eggplant</li> <li>2 tablespoons raw tahini</li> <li>1 lemon</li> <li>1 clove garlic</li> <li>3 tablespoons olive oil</li> </ul> <h3>Roast the Eggplant</h3> First, we're going to roast the eggplant. Preheat the oven to 400 degrees. Prick the eggplant in 4 or 5 different places. In the oven, place a pan on a lower rack to catch the juices, and then place the eggplant on the top rack. <br><br> As the eggplant cooks, turn the eggplant over as the skin darkens. You know your eggplant is ready when it starts dripping juice. <br><br> Keep the eggplant in the oven for about 40 to 50 minutes. The flesh should be fully cooked when the skin is blackened and the eggplant shrinks. <h3>Prepare the Baba Ghanoush Ingredients</h3> Cut off the ends, and take off the eggplant skins. If the eggplant is fully cooked, the skin should come off by itself. Chop your eggplant into several pieces. <br><br> Cut your lemon in half and squeeze the juice with a citrus reamer by turning it left then right. Crush the garlic clove using the side of a knife. <h3>Blend the Ingredients</h3> Place your eggplant, lemon juice, garlic, tahini, and two tablespoons of olive oil into a blender. Turn the blender on high to mix your ingredients until their consistency is smooth. Then turn the blender off. <h3>Serve the Baba Ghanoush</h3> Put your baba ghanoush in a serving dish. Pour one tablespoon of olive oil and sprinkle paprika on top for decoration. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4543 Tue, 26 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/coffeetea/Ethiopian-Tea-Recipe.htm Ethiopian tea is a delicious blend of black tea, spices, and honey. Try brewing a glass for yourself. ethiopian tea,tea recipes,tea videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. ethiopian tea,tea recipes,tea videos Hi, I'm Lea Elleseff for About.com Food. Today we're going to prepare a swift cup of Ethiopian tea. <h3>Ethiopian Tea Ingredients</h3> To do this, you will need the following ingredients:<ul> <li>black tea</li> <li>cloves</li> <li>cardamom</li> <li>1 cinnamon stick</li> <li>honey</li> <li>orange slice (for garnish)</li> </ul> <h3>Combine the Hot Water and Black Tea</h3> Preparing this tea is a spicy breeze. All there is to do is to pour boiling water in to your favorite tea cup. <br><br> Add black tea. I prefer loose leaf, but tea bags are fine. <h3>Add the Spices and Honey</h3> Sprinkle in a few pods of cardamom and a bit or two of clove. Don't forget your cinnamon stick and honey to taste. <h3>Let the Ethiopian Tea Sit</h3> Now that everything is swimming together, stir your tea. Add your garnish of orange slice, and let the brew sit for 3-5 minutes. <br><br> The longer you let it sit the spicier your tea will be. And now, your Ethiopian tea is ready to serve. <br><br> Thank you for joining us. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5766 Wed, 21 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/phoenix/Artsy-Phoenix.htm Phoenix is a vibrant city, offering world-class museums, great shopping, and a thriving arts scene. downtown, phoenix, arizona 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. downtown, phoenix, arizona Phoenix is a vibrant city, offering world-class museums, great shopping, and a thriving arts scene. aboutvideo_5988 Wed, 18 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/losangeles/California---Car-less-LA.htm Can you live without a car in L.A, the epicenter of America's automobile obsession? car, drive, los, angeles, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. car, drive, los, angeles, california Can you live without a car in L.A, the epicenter of America's automobile obsession? aboutvideo_6039 Wed, 18 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/philadelphia/Pennsylvania---Philly-Manayunk.htm Its name means &quot;where you come to drink,&quot; but there's much more to do than just drink in Manayunk. manayunk, philadelphia, pennsylvania 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. manayunk, philadelphia, pennsylvania Its name means "where you come to drink," but there's much more to do than just drink in Manayunk. aboutvideo_4296 Thu, 31 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/Dried-Fruit-Scone-Recipe.htm These delicious scones are flavored with dried berries and cherries, but you can adjust the recipe according to your taste. scones,breakfast,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. scones,breakfast,recipes,videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make homemade scones with dried fruit. <h3>Ingredients for Scones With Dried Fruit</h3> For this recipe you will need:<ul> <li>2 cups flour</li> <li>1 cup dried fruit</li> <li>2 tablespoons baking powder</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon salt</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon baking soda</li> <li>2 tablespoons sugar</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon nutmeg</li> <li>1/2 cup cubed butter</li> <li>3/4 cup buttermilk</li> <li>1 egg white </li> </ul> Preheat oven to 425 degrees. <h3>Combine the Scone Ingredients</h3> Pour the flour, sugar, baking powder, baking soda, salt, and nutmeg in a large mixing bowl. Whisk together all these dry ingredients. <br><br> Next, add the butter into the bowl. Cut it in with a pastry blender until the mixture resembles crumbs. <br><br> Then, stir in the dried fruit. I'm using a combination of dried strawberries, cherries, and blueberries. Now pour in the buttermilk. Use a rubber spatula to mix in the buttermilk; this will help bring the dough together. <h3>Cut the Dough Into Triangles</h3> Roll the dough into a ball. Flour a rolling surface and rolling pin. Place down the dough and roll out a rectangle so it's one-inch thick. <br><br> Grease aluminum lined baking sheets with non-stick cooking spray. <br><br> Using a pizza cutter, cut the rectangle in half, and then in half again. Take each square and divide it into two triangles. Place the triangles onto the sheet. <h3>Bake the Scones</h3> Finally, lightly beat the egg white. Brush the tops of the scones with the egg. Bake for 15 minutes, or until they are golden brown. Cool them on wire racks. Serve warm and enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6975 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Knife-Safety.htm Are you careful enough around the kitchen? Learn the basics of knife safety and how to sharpen your knives. kitchen safety videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. kitchen safety videos Hi I am Ben Kurtzman for About.com Food and today we are going to talk about knife safety. <br/><br/>There is one basic principle to knife safety: be in control. The three things that you need to be in control of to avoid accidents are the knife, the object you are cutting, and your own hands. <br/><H3>Choosing the Right Knife</H3>The first thing you need to do is make sure that you have the right knife for the job. You do not need a fancy 20 piece knife set, but there are some basic knives that you would want in any kitchen. You should have at least one knife that is good for chopping vegetables. It is also good to have a small paring knife for finer work, as well as a separate bread knife. This serrated long knife is what I use to cut bread. And, finally, you should have a good knife for cutting through meat or anything with a thick skin. <br/><br>You always want to try to use the right knife for its intended purpose. If you were to use a paring knife to cut a pumpkin, for instance, it is inappropriately sized and could cause an accident. <br/><H3>Handling the Knife</H3>Now let's talk about how to handle the knife and the object you are cutting. Always cut away from yourself. That way, if the knife slips it will not head back toward your body. One way to protect yourself is to tuck your fingertips back into your hand. You can still grip whatever it is that you are cutting and handle the knife without endangering your fingertips. <br/><H3>Sharpening the Knife</H3>Finally, make sure the knife blade you are using is sharp. If the knife is dull you will have to use extra pressure, and that can increase the likelihood that you might slip and have an accident. When you bring the knife home from the store it should be very sharp. However, it will get dull after repeated use. <br/><H3>Keeping Knife Blades Sharp</H3>I am going to show you a trick for retaining a sharp blade. If you do not have one already, go out and buy a knife sharpener like this. Hold the knife sharpener upright with the metal end pointing down into a cutting board. You are going to want to apply enough pressure so that it does not slip. Hold the knife blade at a 45-degree angle against the sharpener. Apply pressure and run the blade along the sharpener. You want to do this three or four time for each side. <br/><br/>If you do this every time you use your knife it will maintain its sharp blade for a long time. One way to test the sharpness of the blade is to run your thumb along it gently. If it is sharp, you thumb should catch. <br/><H3>Storing Knives</H3>Finally, be sure to store your knives with the blades covered. A wooden knife block like this is great, or you can just store them in a plastic sleeve in a drawer. Storing your knives like this does two things. It keeps the blades sharp because the knife does not bang around against other things, and it also reduces your risk of an accident. You do not want to open up a drawer in your kitchen only to find a sharp knife waiting for you. <br/><br/>Use these knife tips for safe and enjoyable cooking. Thanks for watching, and to learn more visit us on the Web at Food.About.com. aboutvideo_6055 Thu, 19 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/losangeles/California---LA-s-N--Hollywood.htm An actor's-- or wannabe actor's-- paradise. And for those who want to star gaze, a great neighborhood for celebrity sightings. north, hollywood, los, angeles, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. north, hollywood, los, angeles, california An actor's-- or wannabe actor's-- paradise. And for those who want to star gaze, a great neighborhood for celebrity sightings. aboutvideo_4071 Wed, 24 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/philadelphia/Historic-Philadelphia.htm See all the Major Sites in Historic Philadelphia including Liberty Bell Center and Independence Hall. historic philadelphia,liberty bell,franklin hall 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. historic philadelphia,liberty bell,franklin hall Hi I'm John Fischer your Guide to the Greater Philadelphia and South Jersey area at About.com. <br><H3>Historic Philadelphia Visitor Center</H3> The best place to begin a visit to Historic Philadelphia is at the new Independence Visitor Center at the corner of 8th and Market Streets. It's directly across from the new Liberty Bell Center. <br><H3>Indepndence Hall</H3> Across from the Liberty Bell Center sits Independence Hall on Chestnut Street between 5th and 6th Streets. It is flocked on either side by Congress Hall and Old City Hall. Originally the State House of Pennsylvania, it was in the Assembly Room where the Declaration of Independence was adopted on July 4, 1776. <br><H3>Rising Sun Chair</H3> The "rising sun" chair used by George Washington as he presided over the Constitutional Convention is original. Benjamin Franklin tried to determine if the sun was rising or setting. "But now at length I have the happiness to know that it is a rising and not a setting sun," he said. <br><H3>Carpenters Hall</H3> Nearby on Chestnut between 4th and 5th, you'll find Carpenters Hall where the First and Second Continental Congress met. <br><H3>First Bank of the US</H3> Nearby on 4th Street is the First Bank of the United States, conceived by Alexander Hamilton and built in a neo-classical design which was intended to recall the democracy and splendor of ancient Greece. <br><H3>Franklin Hall Area</H3> Crossing Chestnut Street you'll find a small alley taking you to Franklin Court where the house of Philadelphia's most famous founding father, Benjamin Franklin, once stood. <br><br> Walk back to 5th Street and two blocks to the north and you'll come to Arch Street and the new and exciting National Constitution Center. <br><br> A short walk east on Arch Street will bring you to the Betsy Ross house where legend has it that the first American flag was sewn. <br><br> If you head over to 2nd near Market Street, you can't miss Christ Church. Founded in 1695, it is where most of the founding fathers worshipped. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more about Historic Philadelphia join us on the web at Philadelphia.About.com. aboutvideo_5609 Thu, 15 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/financialsoft/How-to-Set-Up-Microsoft-Money.htm After doing the research, you finally decided to buy Microsoft Money. Now what? This video tutorial shows you how to set up Money and perform some basics tasks. set up microsoft money,financial software,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. set up microsoft money,financial software,videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Money. Today I'll show you how to set up Microsoft Money. <h3>Requirements for Using Microsoft Money</h3> Before you begin using Microsoft Money, you will need:<ul> <li>a PC running Windows XP or Vista</li> <li>an Internet connection</li> <li>enough space to download a version of Microsoft Money from the company's Web site</li> </ul> <h3>Choose a Version of Money to Download</h3> There are a few different versions that you can choose from. I have downloaded Money Essentials, but as you can see, if you want all of the different features, you should go with the home and business version. <br><br> Setting up accounts and other basic functions will be available on any Microsoft Money program. Carefully read over the Web site to see which version would be best for you. <h3>Use the Online Feature of Money</h3> When I first open Money, I have to type in my Windows Live ID and password, which protects any sensitive financial information by encrypting information that is transmitted over the Internet. <br><br> It's also helpful because it provides access to online features in Money. If you don't want to use the online feature or Windows Live ID, check the box at the bottom to sign in directly without online features. Then click 'next.' <h3>View Accounts in Microsoft Money</h3> Money will always open up on the home page, where you can set up bills and deposits, spending reports, or your spending tracker. <br><br> To view your accounts, click the Banking tab. Your account list will appear with the total amount in each. <br><br> On the left sidebar there are options to edit your account list by adding a new account, sorting the list, or paying bills. <br><br> Under the account tools drop down menu, you can view your account register where your transactions are located. You can also view a list of payees, which are people or organizations you pay money to. <h3>Adjust Settings in Microsoft Money</h3> Click on 'Bills' to view a summary of your bills. If you haven't linked your online banking account to this program, you may want to do it at this time. <br><br> Keep in mind that you have options to control Microsoft Money on the top. You can go to file password manager to change or remove your Windows Live ID. <br><br> You can import a downloaded statement, or under Tools, bring up a calculator. Or choose settings to adjust everything from how often you back up your files to your display settings. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at money.about.com. aboutvideo_6926 Sat, 27 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/exercise/boat-pose.htm Strengthen your core and ab muscles with this effective yoga position - the boat pose. yoga positions, ab exercises, yoga videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. yoga positions, ab exercises, yoga videos Hi, I'm Leslie Nesbitt for About.com Health. Today we're going to look at strengthening the core muscles using a position called boat pose. <br/> <H3>Set up the Boat Pose Position</H3> With your feet planted, just take your fingertips to the tops of the shins and assist in the pulling up. Use your abdominals to also pull in your lower back. Don't let that back round. That can happen if you become fatigued. And if you do, no problem. Just stop and take a break. <br/> <H3>Form the Boat Pose</H3> So, as you come back to a comfortable position, we are balancing on the glutes. Don't put too much pressure on that tailbone. <br/><br> Start by lifting one leg, and right away your abdominals are going to kick in. Start to hold and strengthen. Then if you're able to, add that second leg. <br/> <H3>Boat Pose Modifications</H3> Now you can modify this position with the fingertips on the floor to assist with the back and chest lift. If you feel strong here and stable, keep breathing, and add the arms. The abdominals are supporting you the whole time. <br/><br/>Take 10 to 15 deep breaths as you hold this boat pose.<br><br/> Why is this called boat pose? Because we're acting like our bottom is a little rudder in the water and the rest is the boat floating on top. <H3>Advanced Boat Pose</H3> As you become stronger, you may be able to drop a few inches to the floor, coming back up again. Once again, as you start to fatigue, you're here, or just drop one foot to the floor.<br/><br/>To learn more, visit us on the Web at health.about.com. aboutvideo_5253 Wed, 12 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/orthopedics/Bunions.htm A bunion is a common and treatable foot deformity. Here's information on what to do if you suffer from bunions. bunion, foot, Tailor's bunion 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. bunion, foot, Tailor's bunion <h3>What is a Bunion?</h3> In your foot, the bones, tendons, and ligaments located at the base of the great toe, called the medial first metatarsal phalangeal joint, work together to distribute your body weight. A bunion is an enlargement of the bone or tissue surrounding the medial first metatarsal phalangeal joint. <h3>Getting a Bunion</h3> It is a common foot deformity that can be inherited or can occur as a result of repeated stress to the joint. <h3>What is a Tailor's Bunion?</h3> When the bone becomes enlarged, it pushes the big toe inward, sometimes over the other toes, causing a protrusion on the outside of the foot. Bunions can also occur on the fifth metatarsal joint, or near the "pinky" toe. This is called a tailor's bunion. <h3>Treating Bunions</h3> Bunions can range in size and severity. Severe bunions may need to be surgically corrected. Most people however, find relief from wearing soft, pliable shoes, and arch supports, and from applying ice to the sore toe joint. <br><br> Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_4909 Mon, 20 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/japanesefood/Black-Sesame-Ice-Cream.htm Craving a sweet but nutty ice cream? Try this simple recipe for black sesame ice cream, a favorite at Japanese restaurants. dessert videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. dessert videos Hi, I'm Natasha Levitan for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make black sesame ice cream. <h3>Black Sesame Ice Cream Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you'll need:<ul> <li>3 tablespoons black sesame seeds crushed and roasted</li> <li>2 cups heavy cream</li> <li>2 cups whole milk</li> <li>1/2 cups granulated sugar</li> <li>4 eggs</li> <li>ice cream maker</li> </ul> <h3>Combine the Cream and Sugar</h3> In a medium saucepan, add cream, milk, and half of the sugar. Whisk them together, turn the heat on high, and bring the mixture to boil. Then turn the heat off. <h3>Make the Egg Yolk Mixture</h3> Crack the eggs over the side of the bowl, and separate the egg yolks and egg whites into two separate containers. <br><br> In a small saucepan, whisk together egg yolks and sugar until well combined. Turn the heat on low. <h3>Combine the Egg and Cream Mixtures</h3> Add yolk egg mixture to the cream mixture. Turn the heat on low and cook for 5 minutes, or until the mixture achieves a custard-like consistency. <br><br> Pour into your ice cream maker, and follow the instructions until it is ready. Serve your ice cream with fruit or jam. <br><br> Thank you for watching. To learn more, please visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4760 Mon, 16 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/wine/How-to-Pair-Wine-and-Chocolate.htm Craving wine and chocolate? Why not have both? Learn how to pair these complex, decadent treats. wine,food videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. wine,food videos Hi, I'm Jonathon Stewart for About.com Food, and today, it's all about pairing wine and chocolate. <br><br> Can it really be done? Well, probably not if it's a candy bar and a box of white zin. But if you know your wine, and you know your chocolate, then you, too, can make this combination a match made in heaven. <h3>Learn the Basics of Pairing Wine and Chocolate</h3> Both wine and chocolate can be very complex on their own, so keep it simple with three basics:<ul> <li>the wine you select must be perceived as sweeter than the chocolate</li> <li>since chocolate coats your mouth when you eat it, you'll need a wine that's big enough to cut through its richness</li> <li>try looking for flavors in both that are similar to one another</li> </ul> <h3>Use Your Taste Buds</h3> The most important factor in all this, as in all pairings of food and wine, is that only you can decide what tastes best. <br><br> Use the following guidelines to help you get started, and then let your taste buds lead the way. <h3>What to Pair With White Chocolate</h3> White chocolate, though not a true chocolate due to its absence of cacao, is a super-sweet blend of sugar, milk and cocoa butter. <br><br> Try a sec or demi-sec Champagne, or the hint of orange in a muscato. Other good pairings for white chocolate include Rieslings and Gew&#252;rztraminers. <h3>What to Pair With Milk Chocolate</h3> Milk chocolate, which contains a small amount of cacao, is the sweetest of the real chocolates with its high sugar content. <br><br> Remember rule one and choose a sweeter wine than chocolate, or the pairing might leave your mouth tasting like a rubber band. <br><br> For milk chocolate, your best match might just be a sweet and tasty tawny port. But if you find the right bottle of pinot noir, you won't be disappointed. <h3>What to Pair With Semisweet Chocolate</h3> Chocolate that contains about 50 to 70 per cent cacao is known as semisweet, the sweetest of the dark chocolates. <br><br> With tones that are nutty, spicy, or earthy, semisweet dark chocolate has a balanced and less sweet aftertaste than milk or white chocolate. <br><br> Cabernets or Bordeauxs will tend to bring out any fruity or peppery nuances in the chocolate, while a ruby port is considered a classic pairing with semisweet chocolate. <h3>What to Pair With Bittersweet Dark Chocolate</h3> The richest, most intensely flavored chocolates are known as the bittersweet darks, which contain the least amount of sugar, and the greatest amount of cacao - anywhere from about 71 and 100 percent. <br><br> Their bitter, roasted flavoring is so intense, that it really needs a strong red wine to balance the taste. Either that or a really yummy cookie. <br><br> Zinfandels are the go-to when it comes to pairing wine and bittersweet dark, but you might also find an Australian shiraz or a Spanish grenache to be a suitable companion. <br><br> Since these chocolates are the least sweet, your pallet of appropriate pairings is much wider, meaning you can also experiment with many of the sweeter wines like ports and muscats. <h3>Taste the Wine, Then the Chocolate</h3> Once you've got a great pairing, it's nothing but bliss. Start by tasting the wine, allowing its flavors to fully saturate your mouth. <br><br> Then take a bite of the chocolate, letting it slowly melt on your tongue. Sip the wine once again, and you might never consider having one without the other ever again. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com aboutvideo_5843 Wed, 10 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/chicago/Chicago-s-Bronzeville-Tour.htm Stroll down Muddy Waters Street, sing along to the soulful sounds of Otis Clay, and be sure to sink your teeth into some of Harold's Chicken. Take a tour of Chicago's Bronzeville. bronzeville, bronze, ville, chicago, illinois 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. bronzeville, bronze, ville, chicago, illinois Stroll down Muddy Waters Street, sing along to the soulful sounds of Otis Clay and be sure to sink your teeth into some of Harold's Chicken. aboutvideo_4619 Tue, 13 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Capture-Video-in-Windows-Vista.htm Are you ready to begin viewing and editing your home video? Learn how to capture your whole tape or just parts of your video in Windows Vista. Windows Vista, Video, Capture, Video in Vista 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Windows Vista, Video, Capture, Video in Vista Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to capture video from you video camera to your computer using vista. <h3>Import the Video to Your Computer</h3> First make sure that your computer is on. Plug your video camera into the computer and turn it on. The import Video Wizard will appear where you can type the name of your video. Select a folder where you want your video file to be saved by clicking the browse button. It's a good idea to create a new folder for your video file or files you might use if you decide to do any editing later. Click 'open.' <h3>Choose a Vista Video Format</h3> Choose a format under the drop down menu. The 'Audio Video interleaved' option will copy your video as an avi file. The 'Windows media video single file' will copy it as a wmv file. The 'one file per scene' option will also create wmv files, but Vista will divide the video into separate files where it thinks the scenes change. I'll choose the windows media video single file. Click 'next.' <h3>Capturing the Entire Video in Vista</h3> If you want to capture the entire tape, click 'import the entire videotape to my computer.' You also have the option of importing, then burning to a DVD, or only import parts of the videotape. <br><br>If you select the entire tape, the camera will automatically start rewinding and begin copying. If you want to stop the recording before the whole tape is copied, click stop. After it's done, click 'finish.' <h3>Capturing Parts of the Video in Vista</h3> If you choose to capture parts of the tape and not the whole thing, use the controls in the window to find the place in your tape that you want to capture. I usually leave a little room before and after the part that I want to copy in case I need a little wiggle room for editing. <br><br>Click 'start video import' to begin copying. Click 'stop video import' when you have the clip you want. You can repeat this process until you have all the clips you need. When you're done, click 'finish.' <h3>View and Edit the Video in Windows Vista</h3> Now you can see your video files in the folder you saved them. You can edit them in Windows Movie Maker or put them online so your friends can watch them. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit About.com. aboutvideo_6880 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/vegetarian/Pesto.htm A traditional Italian sauce, pesto contains fresh basil, Parmesan cheese, garlic, and olive oil. Try it with pasta or in recipes. pesto,pesto sauce,recipe,vegetarian,pasta,sauce,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. pesto,pesto sauce,recipe,vegetarian,pasta,sauce,videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make a pesto sauce using fresh basil. <h3>Pesto Ingredients</h3> For a traditional pesto, I will use:<ul> <li>1 cup basil</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon garlic</li> <li>4 tablespoons Parmesan cheese</li> <li>1/3 cup pine nuts</li> <li>1/2 cup extra virgin olive oil</li> <li>salt</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Fresh Basil</h3> First, wash your basil leaves and pat them dry with a towel. Remove the leaves from the stems and place them into your measuring cup. You want about 1 cup of packed-down leaves. <h3>Combine the Pesto Ingredients</h3> Put your basil into the food processor and add the garlic, cheese, and pine nuts. Instead of pine nuts, you could also use cashews, or you could omit the nuts completely. <br><br> Lock your lid into place, turn on the food processor, and mix until you have a paste. This may take 10 to 20 seconds, depending on your mixer. <br><br> If you see clumps of basil piling up on the sides, you can use your spoon to scrape them down. <h3>Mix in the Olive Oil and Salt</h3> Turn the food processor back on, and slowly pour 1/2 cup of extra virgin olive oil. This will help integrate the oil in with the other ingredients. <br><br> Next, add a pinch of salt. Keep mixing until it's well blended. <br><br> Use your pesto for dinner tonight, or you can save some of it by freezing it in an airtight container. This sauce is great for a light summer pasta or to add to a nice winter soup. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3556 Sat, 27 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/WinXPScreenshot-mov.--8z.--8z.htm Capture and save a screenshot in Windows XP screenshot,windows,windows xp 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. screenshot,windows,windows xp Hi. I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing.<br/><h3>Why Capture Screen Shots?</h3>Sometimes you may need to copy your computer screen to show others how it looks. Frequently, people do screen captures to create instruction manuals for others. I'm going to show you a quick example.<br/><h3>Capturing the XP Screenshot</h3>Let's say that you want to show someone what your start menu looks like. First, click on the start menu, then press the Print Screen button on your keyboard. This is located to the right of the F12 key on a standard keyboard.<br/><br/>The image of your screen has now been copied to the clipboard as if you had copied a file.<br/><h3>Viewing your Screenshot</h3>Now open an image viewing program. For this exercise, I m going to use Adobe Photoshop. You can use many other image editing programs to do the same thing.<br/><h3>Editing Your Windows XP Screenshot</h3>In Photoshop, select New, then Click OK. To import the file, go to Edit, paste. The entire screen is now in your new file. Use your cropping tool to select the area which you want to use. I will save the file by going to File, Save.<br/><br/>If you don't have Photoshop or another sophisticated program, you can always use Microsoft Paint, which is located in Programs, Accessories.<br/><h3>Working with your Screenshot</h3>After you've hit print screen button, simply paste the image. Then use the marquee tool to select the area you want to show. Go to edit, copy. Now create a new file by going to File, New. Click, NO when it asks you to save changes. Finally, paste the new image by going to Edit, Paste.<br/><h3>Save Your Windows XP Screenshot</h3>Now save the file. Go to File, Save. You can save your image file in many different formats. I recommend JPEG, which is the standard format for most digital images.<br/><br/>You have successfully created and saved a screen shot You can email it, put it up on a website or use in a document or presentation.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Computing.About.com.<br> aboutvideo_6872 Fri, 02 Mar 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/vegetarian/Tofu.htm You know tofu is good for you, but do you know how to cook with it? Watch how to drain, freeze, bake, and saute tofu like a pro. cooking tofu,tofu,vegetarian,meat substitute,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cooking tofu,tofu,vegetarian,meat substitute,videos Hi, I'm Ben Kurtzman for About.com Food, and today we are talking tofu. <h3>Ways to Cook Tofu</h3> Everyone knows the health benefits of eating tofu. But when it comes to cooking it, another question comes up: What exactly do I do with this big block of compressed soy product? <br><br> Well, there are a lot of things that you can do with tofu. You can bake it, you can saute it, you can put it in any number of dishes as a substitute for meat. <h3>Drain the Tofu</h3> But before you cook it, you have to drain it. Most tofu that you buy at the store comes packaged in water. It is not enough to simply drain the water from the package. You also have to get rid of any water the tofu has absorbed. <br><br> Tofu is like a sponge in the sense that it absorbs a lot of water, but unlike a sponge in that you cannot just wring it out. <br><br> To remove the absorbed water from the tofu, put it on some paper towels on a plate. Apply pressure to the top of the tofu using a cutting board and a couple of cans of tomatoes. You can use whatever you have handy, but the important thing is to maintain the pressure on the top of the tofu. <br><br> Let the tofu stand like this for about 15 minutes, and then it should be properly drained and ready for cooking. <h3>Freeze the Tofu</h3> There are three general things you can do with the tofu at this point. You can freeze it, you can saute it, or you can bake it. <br><br> Freezing tofu changes its consistency. After it thaws it is almost like ground beef, so it is perfect for things like soups, chilies, and sauces. <h3>Bake the Tofu</h3> To bake tofu, cut it into pieces about 1/2-inch thick and put them on a single layer on a baking pan. <br><br> As I mentioned before, the great thing about tofu is that it is so absorbent. So you can use any number of different sauces--soy sauce, barbecue sauce, even salad dressing. The tofu will absorb it and become very flavorful. <br><br> After you have baked the tofu for an hour at 400 degrees, it should be ready to eat. You can eat it hot as a side dish, or in salads or sandwiches. <h3>Saute the Tofu</h3> If you want to saute tofu, cut it into cubes and add it to hot oil in a skillet. Sautee it for a few minutes until it turns golden. <br><br> When you saute tofu like this, it is delicious. You can either add it to a stir-fry or eat it alone with a dipping sauce. <br><br> Now that you know some of the basics of cooking with tofu you should feel free to experiment. I am sure you will find that it is great in all kinds of recipes and with all kinds of flavors. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4801 Tue, 03 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/kosherfood/Kosher-Sweet-Potato-Pie.htm This rich, creamy kosher sweet potato pie will have them asking for seconds. Watch how to make this tasty dessert. kosher food recipes,dessert videos,pie recipes 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. kosher food recipes,dessert videos,pie recipes Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make kosher sweet potato pie. <h3>Kosher Sweet Potato Pie Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you'll need:<ul> <li>9-inch pie crust in a pan</li> <li>1 pound sweet potatoes</li> <li>1 cup soy milk</li> <li>2 eggs</li> <li>1/4 cup firmly packed brown sugar</li> <li>1/4 cup all-purpose flour</li> <li>1 teaspoon pure vanilla extract</li> <li>1 teaspoon ground cinnamon</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon nutmeg</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon salt</li> </ul> <h3>Boil the Sweet Potatoes</h3> Place sweet potatoes in a pot with enough water to cover, and bring to boil. Reduce the heat and simmer potatoes until they're fork-tender, about 45 minutes. <br><br> Preheat oven to 350 degrees. <h3>Peel the Sweet Potatoes</h3> Drain the potatoes. Then run cold water over the sweet potatoes, and remove the skin using the back of a fork. Once the potatoes are peeled, put them in the bowl of a mixer, and break up the potatoes into pieces. <h3>Combine the Sweet Potato Pie Ingredients</h3> Next, add the milk, the sugar, the flour, the eggs, the vanilla, cinnamon, nutmeg, and salt. Beat the mixture until it is smooth. You could also do this using a whisk attachment. <h3>Bake the Kosher Sweet Potato Pie</h3> Now, fill the pie crust with the sweet potato mixture. Put it in the oven on a cookie sheet, and bake for about 1 hour. <br><br> The pie is done when a knife inserted into its center comes out clean. This pie is non-dairy and can be served with any meal. Enjoy! <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, please visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5339 Tue, 09 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/vision/Cataracts.htm If your vision is cloudy, you may suffer from cataracts. Learn more about this vision impairment and its symptoms. cataracts, impared vision, 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cataracts, impared vision, <h3>Normal Vision</h3> During normal vision, light first passes through the cornea, which is the clear covering of the eye, and then through the pupil, which is actually a hole in the iris or colored part of the eye. The light then passes through the lens where the image is focused onto the retina at the back of the eye. The image is then converted to electrical signals that are sent to the brain. <h3>Do You Have Cataracts?</h3> It is essential that the lens remains transparent in order for clear vision. When cataracts occur, the lens becomes cloudy or opaque, preventing light from passing clearly to the retina. Cataracts often occur as a person ages but can develop as a result of other medical conditions. A doctor will need to perform an eye examination in order to confirm the diagnosis of cataracts and to recommend treatment. <br><br> Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_3806 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/The-Ultimate-BLT.htm Heidi Dehncke-Fisher shows how to make the ultimate BLT blt,sandwich,bacon,lettuce,tomato,lunch 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. blt,sandwich,bacon,lettuce,tomato,lunch Hi, Im Heidi Dehncke-Fisher and welcome to About.com Food. Today Im going to show you how to make the Ultimate BLT.<br/><br/>The Bacon, Lettuce, and Tomato sandwich dates back to late Victorian Tea Sandwiches. The acronym, BLT comes from diner waitresses and cooks who abbreviated the sandwichs name at busy lunch counters across America.<br/>In its simplest form, the BLT brings together a delicious combination of flavors. To make my Ultimate BLT you will need:<br/><br/>6 Slices of Thick-Cut Slab Bacon &#150; you can use Turkey Bacon for a leaner alternative<br/>Butter lettuce and Arugula<br/>One juicy hothouse tomato<br/>Your favorite bread &#150; Im using Italian Ciabatta bread<br/>Mayonnaise<br/>And Blue Cheese Dressing<br/>The first step is to cook your bacon. Bacon can be sauteed, roasted, broiled or even microwaved. I find its best to saute it &#150; that way you can keep an eye on it as it cooks and control how crispy it is. <br/><br/>Separate and place your bacon in a skillet, one layer deep. Start it off over medium-high heat until it begins to sizzle, then turn down the heat to medium. <br/>After five minutes, turn the slices onto their uncooked side and cook for another five minutes. If you like your bacon on the chewy side, take it out at this point &#150; for crispy bacon, leave it on the heat for a couple more minutes.<br/><br/>To get some extra grease off the bacon pat it with a paper towel. Look at the difference that makes...<br/><br/>While your bacon is draining on a paper towel, toast your bread lightly. When its done, its time to build the sandwich. <br/><br/>Spread a layer of mayonnaise on the bottom slice of bread and blue cheese dressing on the top slice. Layer your bacon on the bottom slice. Arrange your tomatoes on top of the bacon &#150; then the arugula &#150; and then the crispy butter lettuce.<br/><br/>There you have it &#150; the Ultimate BLT. I think youll find that the tangy blue cheese and the aromatic arugula perfectly complement this already delicious taste combination.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the web at food dot about dot com.<br/><br/><br/><br/> aboutvideo_5976 Tue, 05 Feb 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/studenttravel/Check-Out-Hoboken--NJ.htm Get re-energized by Hoboken. hoboken, new, jersey 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. hoboken, new, jersey Get re-energized by Hoboken. aboutvideo_6106 Tue, 12 Feb 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/queens/Astoria--Queens--Bakery-Tour.htm Baritone Ross Benoliel's tour of Astoria's Greek and Italian bakeries will take your taste buds to operatic heights. astoria, queens, new, york, city, nyc 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. astoria, queens, new, york, city, nyc Baritone Ross Benoliel's tour of Astoria's Greek and Italian bakeries will take your taste buds to operatic heights. aboutvideo_6183 Fri, 21 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/nashville/Tour-of-Nashville.htm See three great spots that Nashvillians often frequent on Saturday afternoons. nashville, tennessee 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. nashville, tennessee See three great spots that Nashvillians often frequent on Saturday afternoons. aboutvideo_5827 Wed, 09 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/losangeles/California---LA-Exposition-Prk.htm Where would you rather be -- Exposition Park in Los Angeles or a small town in Alabama? exposition, park, los, angeles, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. exposition, park, los, angeles, california Where would you rather be -- Exposition Park in Los Angeles or a small town in Alabama? aboutvideo_17209854 Mon, 10 Jul 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://home.about.com/z/cg/vp.htm?ch=homegarden&l=homegarden/v/6&ap=1 Anne-Marie Barton shares her thoughts on how Today's modern moms can maintain their sense of self. 2006 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Home/Family/Parenting/ Home/Family/Parenting/Mothers Even though today's modern mothers can do it all, too often they allow their children to become all they do. Anne-Marie Barton shares her thoughts on how moms can maintain their sense of self. aboutvideo_3683 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/presentationsoft/PowerPoint-Animations.htm Wow friends and colleagues by learning how to make preset and custom PowerPoint animation, to enliven your next deck and keep your audience riveted. Computing,Software,PowerPoint Presentations,PowerPoint,Animation,Design,Template 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Software,PowerPoint Presentations,PowerPoint,Animation,Design,Template Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll show you how to insert preset and custom animations in PowerPoint. Basically, how to create effects on any slide. <br><br>In PowerPoint, the word animation refers to the way that text boxes, bullet points, or images move on the screen during a presentation. First open PowerPoint. I will open a pre-existing document by going to File, Open and choosing my project. <h3>Animation Scheme Choices</h3>Select a slide; click the Design button on the toolbar at the top. On the sidebar at the right side of the screen click the link that says Animation Schemes. A list of subtle, moderate, and exciting animations will appear. You can click on one from the list and see it previewed on your selected slide. <h3>Apply PowerPoint Animation Scheme</h3>If you just want the animation applied to one slide, all you need to do is click the effect you want. <br><br>At the bottom there is a button that says Apply to all Slides. I will apply it to all of my slides. Click the Slide Show button to preview your slide show with your new animations. Right click and choose End Slide Show. <h3>Custom PowerPoint Animation</h3>To make your own custom animations, start with a slide with no animation. To get rid of an existing animation, choose No Animation. <br><br>Now go to Slide Show on the menu at the top of the screen and choose Custom Animations. Select the item you want to animate. Click on Add Effect on the right side and choose an animation. <h3>Custom Animation Options</h3>There is a drop-down menu with many options. You can change the entrance of your information, the emphasis, the exit of your information, and how it moves. <br><br>I am going to start the animation when I click on the slide. <h3>Customizing Speed</h3>You can also adjust the direction and speed of your animation. <br><h3>Incorporating Content</h3>To animate the second line, select it and choose your animation under Add Effect. I will start it after the previous line starts and move a little slower. <br><br>Notice at the bottom of the sidebar you can re-order the text boxes by using the arrows. <h3>PowerPoint Animation Undo</h3>You can also remove all animation effects by clicking Remove. I will remove my second animation. <br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_4609 Wed, 02 Apr 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/browsers/Managing-Pop-Up-Windows.htm Want the solution to dealing with those pesky pop-ups? Learn how to manage pop up windows in Internet Explorer and Firefox. pop up, window, browser 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. pop up, window, browser Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I'm going to show you how to manage pop up windows in Microsoft Vista using both Firefox and Internet Explorer. <h3>Manage Pop Ups in Firefox</h3><ul> <li>OPEN Firefox</li> <li>CLICK Tools / Options</li> <li>CLICK 'Content' tab</li> <li>CLICK to check 'Block Popup Windows' box</li> <li>CLICK 'Exceptions' button to choose which websites you want to pop-up</li> <li>TYPE in sites you want pop-ups from</li> <li>CLICK 'Allow'</li> <li>CLICK 'OK'</li> </ul> <p></p> Obviously, you won't know the names of every website that you'll ever visit that you want to allow pop-ups. When you go to a site that has pop-ups, you will see a window on top of the browser that says Firefox has blocked the pop-ups. <br><br> If you CLICK Options, you can allow the pop up, edit the pop-up blocker, or click on don't show this message when pop-ups are blocked. If you CLICK Edit the pop-up blocker, you can add this website to your exceptions list. If you CLICK allow the pop up under the drop down menu, it will automatically add the website to the list. <h3>Manage Pop Up Windows for Internet Explorer</h3> <ul> <li>OPEN Internet Explorer</li> <li>CLICK Tools / Pop-Up Blocker / Turn On Pop-Up Blocker or Pop Up Blocker Settings</li> <li>TYPE websites you want to allow to pop-up</li> <li>CLICK 'Add' to add them to the list</li> <li>CLICK high, medium or low filtering level for Internet Explorer to block what it thinks are unwanted pop-ups</li> <li>CLICK 'OK'</li> </ul> When you go to a site where you would like to see pop ups, but they have been blocked, follow the same steps as in Firefox to manage your pop-ups. However, to get to the drop down menu, just click on this message window instead options. <br><br> Another trick is holding the CTRL key when clicking on a hyperlink to a pop-up. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_5928 Wed, 14 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/seattle/Seattle---Tour-of-Fremont.htm Ever seen a SCUD missile up close and personal or been to the center of the universe? Then you've never been to Fremont. seattle, washington, fremont, videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. seattle, washington, fremont, videos Ever seen a SCUD missile up close and personal or been to the center of the universe? Then you've never been to Fremont. aboutvideo_5969 Tue, 11 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/toronto/Toronto-s-Liberty-Village.htm Liberty Street in downtown Toronto has become a haven for artists, actors, and other creative types. liberty, village, ontario, toronto, canada 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. liberty, village, ontario, toronto, canada Liberty Street in downtown Toronto has become a haven for artists, actors and other madly creative types. aboutvideo_3709 Wed, 27 Dec 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/mideastfood/Vegetable-Kebabs.htm Instructions for making vegetable kebabs on bamboo skewers. kebab,skewer,grill,cookout,recipe,cooking,pepper,squash,vegetable kebab 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. kebab,skewer,grill,cookout,recipe,cooking,pepper,squash,vegetable kebab Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food and I am going to show you how to prepare vegetable kebabs. <br><br> <H3>Prepare Bamboo Kebab Skewers</H3> We are going to use these bamboo skewers for our vegetables, so the first thing we need to do is soak them in cold water. Soaking the skewers makes them moist, so they will not burn when we put them on the grill. <br><br> <H3>Prepare the Vegetables</H3> While these are soaking, let us chop up our vegetables. Many people like to use different types of vegetables on the same skewer when they make kebabs. While this is colorful and attractive, it is not ideal when it comes to cooking. By cooking everything together, you will get some that are underdone, and some that are overdone. Because we want all of our vegetables to be perfectly done, we are going to put like ones together on the same skewer. <br><br> <H3>Skewer the Kebabs</H3> Now, if I were to put the skewers through the vegetables like this, they would not be able to lie flat on the grill, and if I put them through like this, they would spin around when I tried to flip them over, making it difficult to cook them evenly. So, here is the trick: we are going to double skewer our vegetables, so they are easy to flip on the grill. <br><br> Now, before cooking the vegetables we will coat them with olive oil, so they do not stick to the grill, and sprinkle on some salt and pepper. Then, they should be ready to cook. Thanks for watching, and to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5718 Tue, 25 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/brooklyn/Crown-Heights-Broooklyn-Tour.htm There are many worlds and cultures in Crown Heights, and somehow they all manage to get along. Take a tour of Crown Heights, Brooklyn. new york,travel,videos,brooklyn 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. new york,travel,videos,brooklyn There are many worlds and cultures in Crown Heights and somehow, they all manage to get along. Take a tour of Crown Heights, Brooklyn. aboutvideo_6972 Sat, 20 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/Brownies.--6I.--6I.htm Warm brownies made from scratch are a heavenly dessert. See how homemade brownies are made from start to finish. dessert videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. dessert videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make brownies from start to finish, showing some tips and hints along the way.<br/> <H3>Preheat the Oven</H3> Preheat the oven to 350 degrees.<br/><br> <H3>Brownie Pan Size</H3> When you are following any brownie recipe check the size of the pan that it recommends and the corresponding bake time. Also, metal pans cook faster than glass pans. You can line your pan with aluminum foil or parchment paper for easier clean up. Grease only the bottom of the pan, this will help the brownies rise up the sides of the pan. <br/> <H3>Homemade Brownie Dry Ingredients</H3> When baking it helps to gather your ingredients and measure them out before you start. Begin with your dry ingredients. Combine: <ul> <li>1 1/3 cups of flour</li> <li>1 teaspoon of salt</li> <li>1 teaspoon of baking powder</li> </ul> Whisk it all together and set aside.<br/><br>Baking powder helps brownies be light and airy. An all purpose flour will keep the brownies together better than a cake flour.<br/> <H3>Homemade Brownie Wet Ingredients</H3> In a larger bowl combine the wet ingredients: <ul> <li>2 sticks butter</li> <li>1 1/2 cubs cocoa powder</li> <li>2 cups sugar</li> <li>4 eggs</li> <li>1 1/2 teaspoons vanilla</li> </ul> Ahead of time, you need to melt 1 cup (or 2 sticks) of butter, on the stove or in the microwave. Next comes the chocolate. To prevent lumps, I'm sifting in 1 1/2 cups of cocoa powder. If you would like to use chocolate squares, melt them with the butter. You can see that it will get very thick. <br><br>Next, add 2 cups of sugar. One at a time, beat in 4 eggs. The more fat in your recipe from the butter, chocolate and eggs, the more moist and dense the brownies will be.<br/>Finally, stir in 1 1/2 tsp of vanilla.<br/><br> <H3>Combine Wet and Dry Brownie Ingredients</H3> Now add the premixed flour mixture. Mix it until it's just combined. Don't over mix it. Sort of fold it in. If you want to add toasted nuts or chocolate chips, do that last. <br/>Pour the batter into the prepared pan and use your scraper to spread it evenly. Place the pan into the oven.<br/><br/> <H3>Test Brownie Doneness</H3> Since I'm using a smaller pan, the brownies will be thicker and I'm going to need more time. So I'm going to wait 45 minutes. Use a toothpick to test the brownies, they should have a little of the brownie stuck. <br/><br/> <H3>Cool and Cut Brownies</H3> Remove the pan from the oven and place it on a cooling rack. To make squares, let the brownie cool completely before cutting. This may take 30-40 minutes. <br/><br/> <H3>Serve or Store</H3> When serving, you can sprinkle some powdered sugar or maybe frost the brownies and decorate them. If there are any leftovers, keep them in an airtight container in the pantry or freeze them for up to 6 months. <br><br>Brownies have many possibilities for texture, flavors and toppings. Have fun exploring all of the endless combinations. Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6815 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/strawberry-shortcake.htm Learn how to make perfect strawberry shortcake, including tips for cutting strawberries and making homemade whipped cream. dessert videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. dessert videos Hi, this is Ben Kurtzman for About.com Food, and today I am going to show you how to make one of my favorite desserts, strawberry shortcake. The beauty of strawberry shortcake lies in its simplicity. It is a biscuit or cake, topped with whipped cream, and strawberries. <br/><br/> <H3>Prepare and Slice the Strawberries</H3> First we will wash the strawberries, then we will remove the tops and slice them. When many people slice strawberries, they make a simple horizontal cut to remove the stem. I am going to show you another way where you do not waste as much of the berry. With a sharp paring knife you can cut a circle around the top of the stem and then remove it without losing too much of the berry. So as you can see, I am simply cutting in a circular motion around the top of the berry, and it will pop right out of the top and all we lose is the inedible part of the fruit. <br/><br/>After you remove the top, slice the strawberry thinly. <H3>Sweeten the Strawberries</H3> Once we have sliced the berries, we are going to add a quarter cup of sugar. This will make the berries even sweeter, and it will bring out their natural juices. Stir it up so that the strawberries are coated and nice and sweet. The strawberries will release their juices after you have let them sit for about fifteen minutes. <br/><br/>That will leave you with a strawberry syrup, along with the strawberries that you already have in the bowl. Set the berries aside, and we will work on the whipped cream. <H3>Make the Whipped Cream</H3> Buying whipped cream in the store is always an alternative, but it is easy to make at home, and it will turn out delicious. There is a one word key to making whipped cream at home, and that word is COLD. So, before you go ahead and start making your whipped cream, take the bowl that you are going to prepare it in, and your beaters, and put them in the freezer for a little while. You do not have to worry about doing it for very long, about five minutes will do. <br/><br/>The next step is to add one cup of heavy cream to the chilled bowl. We will mix the cream at medium speed until it forms peaks. You want to be careful and not mix your cream for too long, because then you will just end up with butter. <br/><br/>Once the cream is mixed, add two tablespoons of sugar, and a teaspoon of vanilla. Now we will just mix it to get the sugar and vanilla blended. <br/><br/> <H3>Assemble the Strawberry Shortcake</H3> Our final task is assembling the shortcake. I am using these individual sponge cakes that I bought at the store, but you can use whatever kind of cake or biscuit you like. First, scoop the strawberries on top of the cake, making sure you get plenty of the syrupy juice. Then, we will top it with the whipped cream and it will be ready to enjoy. <br/><br/> Thanks for watching, and to learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5498 Wed, 19 Mar 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/kosherfood/Kasha-Varnishkes.htm this video will show how to make kasha varnishkas kosher, kasha, kasha varnishkes, recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. kosher, kasha, kasha varnishkes, recipe Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I am going to show you how to make kasha varnishkes. <h3>Kasha Varnishkes Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 package cooked bowtie noodles</li> <li>2 tablespoons oil</li> <li>1 chopped onion</li> <li>1 cup kasha</li> <li>1 egg</li> <li>14.5 oz. chicken stock</li> <li>2 tablespoons melted margarine</li> <li>1 teaspoon salt</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon pepper</li> </ul> <h3>Heat the Onion</h3> In a heavy frying pan, pour in the oil. Once it is hot, add the onions. Saute the onions for about 5 minutes and then remove them from the pan and set aside. <h3>Boil the Soup Stock</h3> Meanwhile, in a saucepan, bring 2 cups of soup stock to a boil. <h3>Mix the Kasha and Egg</h3> In a separate bowl, pour the egg and beat it. Next, add the kasha, and stir it into the egg so that all the kernels are coated. <h3>Heat the Kasha</h3> Now, pour the egg-covered kasha into the frying pan. Fry over high heat, stirring, until the egg has dried and kernels are separate, this may take about 3 minutes. <h3>Cook the Kasha Varnishkes </h3> Pour the boiling soup stock over the kasha. Next, add the onion and the salt and pepper. Cover and simmer on low heat until all the liquid has been absorbed. This may take about 10-15 minutes. <h3>Add the Final Kasha Varnishkes Ingredients</h3> While the kasha is still warm, stir in the bowtie noodles. Finally, pour over the melted margarine and mix it together. Serve and enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching, to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6953 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Using-themes-in-Apple-iDVD-4.htm Make your DVD look professional and polished- Use iDVD to add themes to your DVD menus and subdirectories. Computing,Gadgets,Programs,Apple iDVD,DVD Encoding,DVDs,Films,Movies,Videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Gadgets,Programs,Apple iDVD,DVD Encoding,DVDs,Films,Movies,Videos Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. Today I'll teach you how to use themes in iDVD 4. <br><br>First open up Apple iDVD. Open up your harddrive, click on applications, and double click iDVD. If you've used iDVD before it opens with the last project. And whatever dvd template used will automatically play. <br><br>If you want to turn off the dvd template to stop the motion and sound click the motion button. <br><h3>Choose iDVD Theme</h3>To see the different themes you can choose, click on the customize button. A side window opens up and themes is the first tab. You can scroll down and select themes to match your project. There's everything from wedding themes to kid themes, and even road trips. <br><br>Click on a theme to load it. You can click on the motion tab to preview any animations on a theme. <br><h3>iDVD Theme Types</h3>There are two types of themes, themes with animation and still menus. <br><h3>Animated Themes</h3>Animation menus tend to have a dropzone where you can drag and drop photos or movies. When I drag a movie onto an amimation themes dropzone and click motion, the video blends into the menu. <br><h3>Still Themes</h3>If you drag and drop a movie on a still picture theme, the video creates a button that links to the video. <br><h3>Customizing your Themes</h3>After selecting a theme we'll click on the settings tab to customize it. To change animation settings, you need to click the motion button and then adjust the settings under menu. You can adjust the duration of the menu animation and movie animation before it loops. <br><h3>Transitions</h3>You can also create a transition between when the menu changes to the main movie. I'll select Page Flip. <br><h3>Theme Backgrounds</h3>The backgrounds box shows our template theme. <br><h3>Audio</h3>The audio box we can mute or change our audio. You can drag audio into the audio box to set the menu music. <br><h3>Text</h3>If you click on your menu text, you can adjust the position, font, color, and size under text settings. <br><h3>Buttons</h3>Finally you can create buttons by clicking on the style box under buttons and choosing an icon. If you click on free position you can move it anywhere on the menu. You can drag the slider to change the size of the icon. <br><br>And that's how you work with themes in iDVD. Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_4074 Tue, 23 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/chinesefood/How-to-Use-Chopsticks.htm Chopsticks are easy to use. Learn how, with a little practice, you can soon be an expert. chopsticks,chinese food,chinese cuisine 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. chopsticks,chinese food,chinese cuisine Hi, I'm Rhonda Parkinson, your Guide to Chinese Cuisine on About.com and I'm here to help you learn how to use chopsticks.<br><br> Whether you're dining out at a Chinese restaurant or enjoying takeout at home, Chinese Food just tastes better with chopsticks. We'll go over the basic steps and then try them out at a Chinese restaurant. <br><H3>Chopstick Intro</H3>Here we have a pair of Chinese chopsticks. You can see the chopsticks taper to a blunt end. It's the blunt end that's used to pick up food. <br><H3>Positioning Chopsticks</H3>Take a chopstick and place it in your hand so that it's resting comfortably between the tip of your fourth finger, the ring finger, and the hollow gap between the thumb and second finger. Keep the fourth finger straight. Now take the other chopstick and place it on top between the tip of the thumb and the tips of the second and third fingers. You'll notice your fingers are curled. You'll want your fingers placed about the middle of the chopsticks, neither too low nor too high.<br><H3>Holding Chopsticks</H3> Make sure the ends of the chopsticks are even and do not cross. Now to pick up a piece of food, move the top chopstick outward. Put the chopsticks around the food, in this case we're imagining there's a piece of food, and bring the top chopstick back. The top chopstick does all the work while the bottom chopstick remains stationary. <br><br>Let's try that again. Move the top chopstick outward, grab the food, and bring the top chopstick back. <br><H3>Chopsticks in Action</H3>Now that you know the basic technique, let's try it out at a Chinese restaurant. When you're using chopsticks for the first time, it's easiest to start with dishes where the food is cut into roughly bite-size pieces, like moo goo gai pan, ginger beef, or sweet and sour pork. Hold your chopsticks in the correct position, move the top chopstick outward, place the chopsticks around the food and move the top chopstick back. Then it's easy to raise the food to your mouth. <br><br>No Chinese meal would be complete without a bowl of steaming rice. Fortunately, Chinese steamed rice is quite sticky, which makes it easy to pick up. Also, steamed rice is served in a small bowl. It's okay to pick up the bowl while you're eating to bring the rice closer to your mouth. <br><br> Chopsticks are really very easy to use. All it takes is a little practice and you'll soon be an expert. To learn more about this topic, visit us on the Web at chinesefood.about.com. aboutvideo_6939 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/autorepair/Evacuation--10-Essentials.--5E.--5E.htm Learn the 10 essentials you need for an emergency kit that will leave you prepared if you ever have to evacuate your home. Emergency kit,evacuation,natural disaster 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Emergency kit,evacuation,natural disaster Hi, I'm Dan Zukowski for About.com Autos. <br/><br/>If, someday, a hurricane, flood or wildfire forces you to evacuate your home in a hurry, there's no time to waste. <br/><br/>A good idea is to have a kit in your car or ready to go. <br/><br/><H3>Emergency Kit Items</H3><br>And right now, I'm going to show you the ten essentials to take with you.<br/><ol><li>Have plenty of this: cold hard cash. ATMs may not work, and you can't count on your credit cards either- with phone lines or power out, stores and gas stations may not be able to accept them.</li><li>Maps. Sure, you know your local area, but you may wind up far from home. And detours are a distinct possibility.</li><li>Be sure you have your cell phone, and your car charger. You may need it in an emergency, and to let family and friends know where you are. </li><li>Water. Don't rely on local sources. Most experts recommend at least one gallon per person per day. And don't forget water for your pets.</li><li>Food is next. You may be stuck in traffic for hours, and convenience stores may close. Bring along non-perishable food items such as dry snacks, fruits, vegetables, and granola bars.</li><li>Prepare as if you were going on a camping trip. Bring along blankets, sleeping bags, and pillows. A camp stove is a great idea- you can make coffee or soup.</li><li>Don't forget a change of clothes. Bring jackets or rainwear to cope with inclement weather.</li><li>Have at least one flashlight, along with spare batteries.</li><li>Always keep a first aid kit in your car.</li><li>Finally, don't leave home without your important documents. Keep them handy in an envelope that you can quickly grab.</li></ol><br/>You might have additional needs, such as medications, and if you are caring for someone, be sure to take care of their special needs as well.<br/><br/>Hopefully, you'll never need to use this kit. But if the knock on the door comes, you'll be ready to go. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Autos.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_3789 Fri, 26 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/The-Perfect-Holiday-Ham.htm Learn how to make the perfect baked ham for your holiday celebration or any night. ham,baked,holiday,thanksgiving,christmas,recipe,easter,dinner 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. ham,baked,holiday,thanksgiving,christmas,recipe,easter,dinner Hi, I'm Heidi Dehncke-Fisher and welcome to About.com Food. Today I am making a baked ham &#150; the hands down holiday favorite.<br/><br/><H3>Purchasing Fresh Ham</H3>Ham is one of the leanest cuts of pork. One serving has about 145 calories and contains vitamins B1 and B12. When buying a fresh ham look for a pale pink or beige color. Many hams are not ready to eat and require baking in the oven. <br/><br/><H3>Prepare Ham to Bake</H3>Prior to baking I let the ham soak for 6 hours in a pot of water in the refrigerator. This helps to reduce the salt content. <br><br><H3>Start Baking the Ham</H3>I am making a smoked ham, bone in - which needs to cooked at 325 degrees until the inner temperature of the ham reaches 160 degrees &#150; 20 minutes per pound.<br/><br/><H3>Baked Ham Glaze Ingredients</H3>Now that the ham is baking in the oven, it's time to make the glaze. For your glaze you will need:<ul><li>Equal amounts brown sugar and mustard &#150; I start with 1/2 cup of each</li><li>1/4 of a cup of honey</li></ul><H3>Glazing Baked Ham</H3>Bake your ham most of the way through, leaving the last 20 minutes for baking with the glaze on. Trim the fat down to approximately a 1/4 inch and score it diagonally in a diamond pattern before glazing. Slather your glaze all over the fatty outside layer of the ham &#150; making sure it reaches into the diamond crevices. <br><br><H3>Serving Baked Ham</H3>As a final touch insert cloves and return the ham to the oven to finish baking &#150; approximately 20 minutes. You will know your ham is finished when the meat thermometer reads 160 degrees.<br/><br/>A beautiful baked ham &#150; not just for holidays, but great for any time of year. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6769 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/autorepair/Preparing-Your-Car-for-Summer.htm Learn what to check and change on your car to transition it from winter's snow tires to summer performance. summer driving,summer car,snow tires 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. summer driving,summer car,snow tires Hi, I'm Barbara Terry for About.com Autos. Whether you're preparing your car for winter or summer, there are some adjustments and inspections that will need to be made pertaining to the season change. Today we're going to be talking about prepping your car for summer. <br/><H3>Removing Snow Tires to Bring your Car to Summer</H3>If you've been using snow tires, switch them out for regular tires. This will give you a quieter, smoother ride. Also, you'll want to check the air pressure in your tires to make sure it's at the correct leve. You may want to adjust it for the hotter operating conditions that we deal with in the summer. Having the proper air pressure in your tires will ensure you get the best gas mileage possible and make your tires last longer. <br/><H3>Fluids to Check</H3>Because our engine's cooling system works harder in warmer weather, make sure to have your radiator and your radiator hoses checked. Also, make sure that all of your fluids have the proper fluid level, and make sure to have your oil changed every 3,000 miles. <br/><H3>Parts to Check</H3>Inspect the belts and the hoses and have them replaced if they need to be. Inspect the wiper blades and have them replaced if they are worn out. And always make sure you have plenty of windshield wiper fluid. Bugs are an increased nuisance in the summertime. For safety, make sure your windshield is clean and clear of them.<br/><br/>Please take time to make the adjustments and the inspections that are necessary to ensure a safer ride for you and other drivers on the road. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Autos.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_6824 Fri, 26 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/busycooks/Burrito.htm Instructions on how to assemble and roll a perfect burrito buritto,roll,rice,beans,roll burrito,dinner,tortilla,mexican foo 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. buritto,roll,rice,beans,roll burrito,dinner,tortilla,mexican foo Hi, I'm Ben Kurtzman for About.com Food and today I am going to show you the trick for rolling great burritos.<br/><br/> <H3>Choose the Burrito Fillings</H3> The great thing about burritos is that you can make them to your personal taste and fill them with whatever you like. Today, we are going to fill the burrito with a few of my favorites. We have a base of black beans, rice, some saut&#233;ed green pepper and red onion, grated Monterey jack cheese, a little bit of sour cream and some salsa. But again, the fillings are versatile, it is the assembly of the burrito itself that we are going to concentrate on.<br/><br/> <H3>Consider Burrito Tortilla Size</H3> The first key to making a great burrito, and I can not stress this enough, it is critical, is using the right size tortilla. When you go to the store you will see that there are a number of different varieties of tortilla advertised as burrito sized. Always get the largest one, because when you go to add your fillings you want to make sure that there is enough room for everything. The tortilla that we are using today, as you can see, is about 12 inches in diameter, and I think that this is a great size.<br/><br/> <H3>Heat the Tortilla</H3> The next thing that we need to do is make the tortilla malleable so that it is nice and soft and will roll easily. We will do this by giving it a quick heating in the microwave. Wrap the tortilla in a paper towel, so that it does not dry out, and then you are going to want to heat it for about 45 seconds.<br/><br/> <H3>Assemble the Burrito</H3> My pet peeve about store-bought or restaurant burritos is that sometimes the filling inside the burrito does not always mix very well, so you can take a big bite of the burrito and all you get is sour cream or salsa - very disconcerting. So I have spent a long time trying to figure out how to mix everything together so that you get all of the flavors in one bite, and now I am going to share that with you. <br/><br/>So that it will be easy to roll, you want to line up your ingredients a little off center on the tortilla. I like to put down a thin layer of sour cream, followed by a drizzle of salsa. This way it makes sure that you get a little bit of sour cream and salsa in each bite, not just a big shot of one or the other. I like to put my rice down next, especially before I put down my vegetable, beans or any meat, because it will absorb any juices that seep through. After you put down the rice, put down a layer of cheese before you put down your other hot ingredients, so that it will sandwich and melt nicely. Put down your beans, your vegetables, and anything else you might add on top of that, and you're ready to roll.<br/><br/> <H3>Roll the Burrito</H3> Now take our edges, spin it around like so, fold it over, and then the opposite side comes over with it. When you get to the end, tuck everything in so that it forms a nice seal and holds everything inside. Even the most perfect burrito may leak a little bit, so the final step is to wrap it all in some tin foil because that will hold everything together and contain any leakage. <br/><br/>Well, that is it. Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5888 Mon, 19 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/busycooks/How-to-Hold-a-Knife.htm Want to learn how to use a knife like the chefs do? Check out these handy tips on how to properly grip a knife. how to hold a knife,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. how to hold a knife,videos Hi, I'm Chef John Mitzewich for About.com Food. Today, I'm going to show you the proper way to grip a knife. <br><br> By learning the proper knife grip, you will dramatically improve your knife skills. Before I show you, let me show you some wrong ways to hold the knife. <h3>Two Ways Not to Hold a Knife</h3> Here is bad knife grip number one. We call this the "hammer hand." It's like you grabbed a hammer or screwdriver. It's good for household tools, but not for cutting food. <br><br> We also call it the "Rambo," so if you are in an action film or fighting off mutant zombies, it's not bad. But for chopping food or slicing food, it's not the best. <br><br> Here is bad knife grip number two. We call this the "pointer." It's a little better than the hammer hand, but still not a great grip. <h3>Put Your Forefinger on the Knife's Heel</h3> This is the proper knife grip. It's very easy to learn. So let me take you through how to get a hold of this. Oh, I made a joke! <br><br> The key is this heel of the blade where the metal meets the handle. You're going to put your forefinger right on that seam. <h3>Grip the Other Side With Your Thumb</h3> On the other side, your thumb grips the knife in the same spot, only on the opposite side. So the knife is being held by your thumb and forefinger. <br><br> Your other three fingers wrap around the knife grip. So those three fingers are really what holds the knife, and the thumb and forefinger apply the pressure and the guidance as you cut. <br><br> This is the official chef knife grip that has been tested and practiced over hundreds of years, through cuts and injuries. So this is what we've perfected. <h3>Benefits of the Chef Knife Grip</h3> It's going to feel a little weird when you first start out, but give it a try, you'll get a lot more control than the hammer hand. <br><br> When you are chopping straight down like this you get a lot of power and control. But, even more importantly, when you're using a sliding motion, with your thumb and forefinger on the blade, you will have so much more control. <h3>Tips to Remember the Proper Knife Grip</h3> So, here are a couple of rhymes to help you remember. "If you feel the steel, the grip is real." And, "if you touch the blade, you have it made." <br><br> Anyway, I'm really late for a freestyle battle with Kanye West, so I'm going to run. But I hope you practice that and give it a try, and you'll find out what a better grip that is. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4345 Fri, 01 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Restore-a-Discolored-Photo.htm How to Restore a Discolored Photo in Photoshop Elements photo restoration, photoshop tutorials, photoshop videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. photo restoration, photoshop tutorials, photoshop videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to restore a discolored photo using Photoshop Elements. <h3>Choose a Photo to Restore</h3> First open Photoshop Elements, and click on the 'edit and enhance icon.' Open the photo you would like to restore. <br><br> Now switch to the 'quick fix mode' by clicking on the tab at the top. Go to the view drop down menu at the bottom and choose 'before and after.' I'll choose 'before and after landscape' because that is how my photo is oriented. <h3>Recolor the Photo</h3> To recolor the image, go to the smart fix slider at the right. Drag the slider towards the middle and the photo will look more colorful. Dragging the slider to the right will bring out the blues and greens, while dragging it to the left will emphasize the reds and yellows. <br><br> Once you're happy with the color in the photo, click the check icon at the top of the tab to apply the changes. <h3>Adjust the Photo's Lighting</h3> If you're image is too dark or light the sliders in the lighting tab can be used to increase the detail. If necessary, use the lighten shadows and darken highlights sliders to adjust the brightness. Then you can change the midtone contrast slider to increase the contrast if the image has become faded. Click the check mark to accept the changes. <h3>Try the Restoration Auto Adjust</h3> You can also click the auto button in each section to adjust your photos color and lighting. Here is my picture before, and after. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_5543 Tue, 18 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/weblogs/What-is-a-Blog-.htm Even if you're not very tech savvy, you've probably heard of blogs. Learn how to start a blog, and get tips on how to make your blog successful. blog, web log, what is blog, how to blog 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. blog, web log, what is blog, how to blog Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll tell you about blogs. By this point, even if you're not that tech savvy, you've heard of blogs. But what are they? What is the purpose? How can you get one? Today I'll give you some answers. <h3>Blogs, or Web Logs</h3> Blog is short for a web log. A web log is a series of chronological posts most of the time made by a single person. People write blogs for many different reasons. Mainly people write them with readers in mind, whether its to promote a business or to entertain readers in a number of different topics. <h3>Blogs vs. Websites</h3> A blog is different from a website because the posts are always in chronological order and below each post is a place for readers to comment. Commenting is a huge part of why blogs have become so popular. Most websites do not allow for reader participation, whether they are for businesses or just articles. Being able to communicate directly with the person who penned the entry is a unique feature of blogging. <h3>How to Start a Blog</h3> If you want to start your own blog about issues or topics you are passionate about, you will need to find a blog platform or host that you can use to publish your blog. Popular platforms and programs include:<ul> <li>myspace.com</li> <li>Blogger</li> <li>Wordpress</li> </ul> These are free platforms so you will be using a subdomain name like donsblog.blogspot.com. But many platforms allow you to have your own domain. Most platforms are very user-friendly, so getting started is easy. In many platforms you can even add links to other blogs that you read and friends' blogs. <h3>Writing Successful Blogs</h3> If you want people to read your blog, you will have to update it pretty often. If you plan on updating once a month or once a week even, dont expect much traffic. To increase traffic, visit other blogs and post comments, adding your blog URL address so viewers might click it. You can also submit posts to social media sites like Digg.com. <br><br>Don't be discouraged if you don't get a lot of traffic right away. Keep writing and posting on your blog. It's free, and it's easy, and the best part is you can write about things that are important to you. Get comments and feedback and build community through discussions on your blog.<br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_5840 Wed, 18 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/golosangeles/California---Los-Angeles-Film.htm Find out where famous flicks were filmed. los, angeles, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. los, angeles, california Find out where famous flicks were filmed. aboutvideo_5804 Tue, 27 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/seattle/Seattle---Tour-of-Georgetown.htm Planes, trains and... art? In the shadow of an airport, railroad tracks and freeway, Georgetown is nevertheless a thriving arts community with great bars, and historic buildings. georgetown, seattle, washington 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. georgetown, seattle, washington Planes, trains and... art? In the shadow of an airport, railroad tracks and freeway, Georgetown is nevertheless a thriving arts community with great bars and historic buildings. aboutvideo_6751 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/autorepair/Tire-Car.htm Learn how to maintain and check your car tires for optimal performance, longevity, and safety. tire pressure,car tires,car maintenance,car safety 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. tire pressure,car tires,car maintenance,car safety Hi. I'm Barbara Terry for About.com Autos. <br/><H3>Car Tire Gadgets</H3>Today there are so many gadgets available to check the air in your tire; I like to refer to the old $2.00 special that can be picked up at most stores.<br/><H3>Car Tire Pressure Resource</H3>To determine the proper air pressure that needs to be in your tires, you will need to refer to the sidewall of the tire, or the manufacturer of the tire, also&#133; most tire stores can offer you assistance to determine the proper and correct tire air pressure. <br/><H3>Adding Air to your Car Tires</H3>Simply place the tire gauge onto the tire stem, allow for a reading and then you will be able to determine how much air is needed if any. <br/><br/>Add air then recheck.<br/><H3>Car Tire Treads</H3>To check the condition of the tires, you can stick your finger in the tread to make sure that you have plenty of tread left or a cute trick of the trade is to use a penny&#133;stick it upside down and you really should not be able to see any of Lincolns head, remember to check all 4 tires.<br/><H3>Car Tire Maintenance</H3>To get the most life out of your tires and the smoothest ride possible have your tires rotated and high-speed balanced every 5000 miles.<br/><H3>Car Tire Life</H3>Remember that most tires have a life of anywhere from 40 to 60 thousand miles so replace the tires on a timely basis to insure a safe ride for you and your family. <br/><H3>Car Tire Spares</H3>Also check or have your spare tire checked about every 6 months, you do not want to be stranded somewhere without a spare tire that is in good condition.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Autos.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_4545 Tue, 27 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/indianfood/How-to-Make-Ghee.htm Does your recipe call for ghee, or clarified butter? Watch how easy it is to make this healthy alternative to traditional butter. ghee,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. ghee,videos Hi, Lea Elleseff here reporting from my kitchen for About.com Food. Today we're going to make clarified butter, a healthier and purer version of regular butter. <br><br> It's delicious to cook with and easy to make. The best part is, all you need to make it is butter. To be more specific, I'm going to use 4 sticks (or 1 lb.) of regular, unsalted butter. <h3>Melt the Butter</h3> Let's begin. Put all the butter into a pot, and cook it on a low heat. In a few minutes, the butter will melt, the foam will rise to the top, and bubbles will be bursting. <h3>Scoop the Foam From the Butter</h3> Once the foam appears, lower the heat to an even lower degree and scoop off the foam with a spoon. <br><br> Continue to cook the butter on a low heat for about 5-15 minutes, or until the butter becomes very clear and the milk solids on the bottom become a light brown. <h3>Pour the Butter Through a Filter</h3> Now turn the heat off and let the pot stand for 2 minutes, allowing everything to settle before straining everything into a jar through a coffee filter or a cheese cloth. <br><br> Once everything is in the jar, let it cool and solidify. <h3>Store the Ghee</h3> Your clarified butter is now ready and can be stored at room temperature for up to a year. You can now use it a as a dip for lobster sauce, an Indian food, or as a substitute for any recipe at all that calls for butter. <br><br> Thank you for joining us. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6003 Wed, 18 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/losangeles/California---LA-s-Koreatown.htm It may look like a bunch of strip malls to outsiders, but it's as authentically Korean as you can get outside of Korea. los, angeles, california, koreatown 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. los, angeles, california, koreatown It may look like a bunch of strip malls to outsiders, but it's as authentically Korean as you can get outside of Korea. aboutvideo_6746 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/autorepair/Road-Trip-Preparation.htm Learn how to prepare your car for a road trip including what parts to check and what to bring with you. road trip,car trip,auto maintenace 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. road trip,car trip,auto maintenace I'm Barbara Terry for About.com Autos.<br/><br/> Millions of Americans take a road trip every year. Let's discuss what mechanical issues you need to check out yourself or have a qualified mechanic check and some of the essential items to have in your car before venturing out to that favorite destination. <br/><H3>Road Trip Checks</H3>Let's pop the hood and check the main fluids that get your car running down the road. <br><H3>Road Trip Oil Checking</H3>To properly check the oil you will need to pull the dipstick out. Wipe it off thoroughly. Put it back in, pull it out and read the cross-hatches on the dipstick. <br/><H3>Road Trip Transmission Check</H3>To check the Transmission fluid you will need to do the same process, pull it out wipe it off; stick it back in and when you pull it back out you will have your proper reading. <br/><H3>Road Trip Radiator Check</H3>Now let's check the radiator fluid, your radiator should always have a half antifreeze half water mix; you can see the level through your overflow. <br><H3>Road Trip Windshield Prep</H3>If you want to be able to keep safety on the freeway and be able to see clear out your windshield always make sure you have enough windshield wiper fluid in order to clear all of those dead bugs and road grime off your windshield. <br><H3>Road Trip Tire Check</H3>You should also have your tire pressure checked or it is really easy to check it yourself, make sure to check all 4 tires.<br/><H3>Road Trip Necessities</H3>Next let's go over the items that you will want to have in your car for safety and essential use: <ol><li>Jumper cables for a dead or weak battery- yours or to help someone else's car in trouble</li><li>Gallon of water for a potential radiator issue, or for being parched in hot weather</li><li>Safety road flares in case of a breakdown. There were over 3,000 deaths on the road last year from cars breaking down and not having the breakdown area safely secured</li><li>A can of fix a flat, for a quick, temporary fix to a flat tire</li><li>Quart of oil</li><li>Flashlight with extra batteries</li><li>Road maps to guide your way or to find a great short-cut</li><li>Spare tire- and check its air pressure and condition before packing </li></ol>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the web at Autos.About.com.<br/><br/> aboutvideo_4786 Fri, 19 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/gourmetfood/How-to-Shuck-Oysters.htm Want to treat yourself to the freshest seafood around? See how easy it is to shuck an oyster at home using an oyster knife. oysters, open oysters, east coast oysters 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. oysters, open oysters, east coast oysters Hello! I'm Rich Vellante, Executive Chef of Legal Sea Foods in Boston, MA, for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to shuck an oyster. And what you need with oysters is obviously going to your local fish monger and buying some oysters. <h3>Using an Oyster Knife</h3> And also you will need an oyster knife. Now this is a very sturdy knife with a pointy end to it. You'll see a number of different styles but you can go to a store like William and Sonoma to purchase something like this. <h3>Supplies Needed to Shuck an Oyster</h3> The other thing that you'll need is a dish towel. The other thing you can do is a type of glove. Now this glove which Ill use today but this glove will protect you if you are trying to open up the oyster and something hits you by mistake. It protects you from the pointy knife. <h3>Find the Oyster Hinge</h3> So why don't we get going and try this technique. If you'll notice in the oyster, it's very very flat. It's almost seamless in the front of it. So the only area where there is a potential opening to actually hinge it is right in the back. And you'll see there is this natural hinge. <br><br>And that is what this type of knife is used for. You get that knife in that hinge &#150; you see how I can get some of that knife in there. It is essentially like a hinge and what I can do is work it in and then pop it open. <h3>Slide the Oyster Knife Into the Hinge</h3> You can just hold it in your hand. But I would recommend for someone who is just starting out, what I would do is just grab a towel, place it on a firm board, and then hold down one side and it will give you some leverage. What you do is, this is the hinge area, and what I am doing is, I'll get the knife into that point and I'll establish a firm contact and wiggle it a little bit until I feel like it is solid. And then I'll turn the knife just a tad to pop it open. <h3>Disconnect the Oyster From the Shell</h3> Now as you can see it is starting to pop open. But don't forget that the oyster is connected and it is connected right in this area. It is connected right to the top of the oyster. and it is also connected to the bottom shell. So remember just like a clam it is connected to the top and the bottom of the shell. <br><br> So what I have done is initially open up the hinge and what I want to do is run my knife along the top. I do not want to make contact with the oyster itself and sever it. Now I have turned my knife at an angle and running it along and feeling the top. I am staying away from the bottom. <br><br>Now what I have done is I have opened this up. And now I have the oyster inside and I cut along the bottom of the oyster. <h3>Clean the Inside of the Shucked Oyster</h3> You will notice some mud in here and some debris. I am also cupping it so none of the liquid comes out. So I want to run my towel just along the edge just to get some of the mud and some of the sea bottom out of there. <br><br> And essentially, what you have is this beautiful oyster sitting in this little bit of brine, and it is great with a squeeze of lemon. It's great with some tobacco. Thanks for watching! To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com aboutvideo_6206 Tue, 11 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/seattle/Tour-of-West-Seattle.htm The vibe is easy on Easy Street in West Seattle-- far enough from downtown for families and seniors but close enough to keep life interesting for local musicians. west, seattle, washington 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. west, seattle, washington The vibe is easy on Easy Street in West Seattle-- far enough from downtown for families and seniors but close enough to keep life interesting for local musicians. aboutvideo_3671 Tue, 26 Dec 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/wine/How-to-Open-Champagne.htm Instructions for safely opening a bottle of champagne champagne,champagne bottle,open champagne,cork,sparkling wine, New Year's Eve 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. champagne,champagne bottle,open champagne,cork,sparkling wine, New Year's Eve Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I am going to show you how to open a bottle of champagne. I know it looks like a lot of fun to let the cork fly and the champagne flow everywhere. But really, is not that best left to the World Series winners? Use this method the next time you want to share a bottle of bubbly with a date. <br/><br/><H3>Prepare the Champagne Bottle</H3>The first thing to do is remove the packaging foil around the neck of the bottle. There should be a small tab to get you started. Next, untwist the wire around the cork and remove it. <br/><br/><H3>Aim the Bottle Safely</H3>Here is a quick safety tip -- make sure the bottle is not pointed toward anyone or anything breakable when you go to open it. <br/><br/><H3>Remove the Champagne Bottle Cork</H3>Grip the neck of the bottle firmly in one hand and the cork in the other. Using slow but firm motions, gently twist the cork up and out of the bottle. You should hear a satisfying pop, but there will be no dangerous explosion. <br/><br/>All that is left to do now is pour your champagne into a couple of flutes and enjoy. Thanks for watching, and to learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6982 Wed, 27 Dec 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/italianfood/roasted-garlic.htm Demonstration on how to roast a whole head of garlic roast,garlic,fresh,garlic paste,roasted garlic 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. roast,garlic,fresh,garlic paste,roasted garlic Hi, I'm Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food and I am going to show you how to roast a head of garlic. <br/><br/>This is a delicious way to prepare garlic, and you will end up with a paste that has a great flavor and is not quite as pungent as fresh garlic. <br/><br/><H3>Prepare Garlic for Roasting</H3>Begin by peeling off as much of the papery skin as you can. Then, you want to cut off the top of the garlic to expose the cloves. Place the garlic on a square of aluminum foil with the exposed cloves facing up. Drizzle a little bit of olive oil over the garlic, and then wrap the aluminum foil tightly around it. <br/><br/><H3>Begin Roasting Garlic</H3>Place the package in the oven and bake it at 450 degrees for about an hour. When it is done, the garlic should be soft to the touch. Remove the garlic from the oven and let it cool until you are able to handle it. <br/><br><H3>Using Roasted Garlic</H3>To use the roasted garlic, simply remove the cloves from the head, and squeeze out the paste that is inside. This is perfect for spreading on bread or using in recipes such as mashed potatoes. <br/><br/>I hope you enjoy this simple and delicious way for preparing garlic. Thanks for watching, and to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com.<br/> aboutvideo_6207 Thu, 10 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/losangeles/California---LA-s-Watts-Towers.htm You'll be moved and inspired by this visit to a oft-maligned neighborhood and one man's obsessive, visionary art. south, los, angeles, california, watts, towers 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. south, los, angeles, california, watts, towers You'll be moved and inspired by this visit to a oft-maligned neighborhood and one man's obsessive, visionary art. aboutvideo_4720 Fri, 28 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/Stollen.htm Although it's perfect for the holidays, stollen tastes great any time of the year. Watch how to make this tried-and-true family recipe for stollen. stollen, desserts, recipes, videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. stollen, desserts, recipes, videos Hi, my name is Heidi Dehncke-Fisher and welcome to About.com Food. Today, I am going to make my father's recipe for stollen. <h3>Description of Stollen</h3> Stollen, a German Christmas bread-like cake filled with dried fruit, almonds, and spices, originated in Dresden around 1450. Today, the bread is made worldwide. <br><br> Since 1994, Dresden enjoys a Stollenfest, in which a giant stollen, usually weighing about four tons, is baked and cut and sold for charity. <h3>Stollen Ingredients</h3> To make my father's stollen recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 3/4 pounds flour</li> <li>1/4 ounce salt</li> <li>4 ounces sugar</li> <li>1 teaspoon nutmeg</li> <li>2 cake yeast envelopes</li> <li>peel of 1 lemon</li> <li>1 cup milk</li> <li>1/2 pound butter</li> <li>3 ounces chopped almonds</li> <li>2 eggs</li> <li>6 ounces raisins</li> <li>1 container orange peel, candied</li> <li>1 container lemon peel, candied</li> <li>powdered sugar</li> </ul> <h3>Combine the Stollen's Ingredients</h3> Begin by mixing most of the dry ingredients together. Combine half the flour, the salt, sugar, nutmeg, and yeast. <br><br> At the same time, heat the milk and butter in a saucepan and add this to dry mixture. Add your almonds. Be careful not to let the butter and milk mixture overheat on the stovetop, as it will kill the yeast. <br><br> Now add the rest of the flour, eggs, raisins, orange peel, and lemon peel. Cover with a kitchen towel, and let it rise for two hours. <h3>Braid and Bake the Stollen</h3> Shape or braid on a cookie sheet, and bake at 350 degrees Fahrenheit for 20-30 minutes. I have sprinkled powdered sugar on it, and it's ready to serve. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6806 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/busycooks/Tomato-Sauce.--20.--20.htm Once you see how quick and easy this tomato sauce is to make, you will never have a reason to eat tomato sauce from a jar again. italian food, videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. italian food, videos Hi, I am Ben Kurtzman for About.com Food and today I am going to show you how to make a quick and delicious homemade tomato sauce. This is a recipe you can put together in 15 minutes, the same amount of time it takes most pasta to boil. Once you see how quick and easy this is to make, you will never have any reason to eat tomato sauce from a jar again.<br/><br/> You will need the following ingredients for this recipe: <ul> <li>1 tablespoon olive oil</li> <li>1/2 a chopped onion</li> <li>4 cloves chopped garlic</li> <li>1 tablespoon dried basil</li> <li>1 teaspoon of salt</li> <li>1 14 ounce jar of diced tomatoes</li> </ul><br> If you are planning to use today's recipe for pasta, it makes three servings.<br/><br/> <H3>Cook the Onions</H3> Start by heating a tablespoon of olive oil in a skillet over medium high heat. To see if your olive oil is hot enough, sprinkle a little bit of water into the skillet. If it splatters, you will know you are ready to go. First, add the onion, and stir them occasionally until they are soft. It should take five minutes. <H3>Stir in Additional Flavors</H3> When the onions are ready, add the garlic, the salt, and the basil. Now we are going to add garlic. By adding the basil now, you will make sure it mixes well with the oil, which infuses its flavor throughout the sauce. Once you have added everything cook it for a minute or so. You want all of the onion and all of the garlic nicely coated with the basil and salt.<br/><br/> <H3>Pour in the Tomato</H3> Once these ingredients are mixed, add the canned tomatoes and let them come to a boil. So now, as you can see, the tomatoes are starting to bubble up, so we are going to turn down the heat to low and let it simmer. I am going to take a little taste. That is really good, but I think it could use a little something extra. <H3>Test and Adjust</H3> Let us try a little balsamic vinegar. Sometimes, adding a little vinegar can give the sauce the extra kick it needs. Half a teaspoon should do. So let me give it a final taste to make sure it is just how I want it. That is perfect. We are good to go.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4683 Mon, 13 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/indianfood/Balti-Fried-Fish.htm Looking for a fish dish that'll knock your socks off? This spicy fried Balti fish recipe is popular in seaside towns in India. indian food,cooking videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. indian food,cooking videos Hi, my name is Natasha Levitan for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make Balti fried fish. <h3>Balti Fried Fish Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 pound cod or any other white fish</li> <li>1 medium onion, chopped</li> <li>1 tablespoon lemon juice</li> <li>1 teaspoon salt</li> <li>1 teaspoon crushed garlic</li> <li>1 teaspoo crushed dried red chilis</li> <li>11/2 garam masala</li> <li>1 tablespoon chopped fresh cilantro</li> <li>2 medium tomatoes</li> <li>2 tablespoons cornstarch</li> <li>2/3 cups corn oil</li> </ul> <h3>Combine the Balti Fried Fish Spices</h3> First, we'll make spicy onion mixture. Then, place it in a medium bowl and add the lemon juice, salt, garlic, crushed red chilies, garam masala, and chopped cilantro. <br><br> Mix together well and set aside. <h3>Prepare the Tomatoes</h3> Next, we will remove the skin from tomatoes. In a medium saucepan, heat water to a boil. Gently drop tomatoes into the boiling water for 10 seconds. <br><br> With a slotted spoon, lift the tomatoes out of the water and place them in a medium bowl. Remove the skin. <h3>Coat the Fish With the Tomato Sauce</h3> Chop the tomatoes into large pieces, and add your sliced onions to them and mix everything together. <br><br> Place your tomato and onion mixture into a blender, and turn the blender on high for about 30 seconds until the mixture becomes the consistency of a sauce. <br><br> Chop the fish into small cubes. Pour the sauce over your spicy fish mixture, and mix together well. Add cornstarch to the bowl and mix again until the fish pieces are well coated. <h3>Fry the Balti Fish</h3> Finally, we're going to fry our fish mixture. Heat the oil in a large frying pan, then reduce the heat to medium. <br><br> Carefully add few pieces of fish. Turn them over with a slotted spoon so they fry evenly on all sides for about five minutes, until the fish is golden brown. <br><br> Remove the fish pieces from the pan and place them on a plate lined with paper towel. Serve the fish on a platter with chutney on the side. <br><br> Thank you for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5521 Fri, 07 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/vegetarian/Avocado-Olive-Dip.htm this video will show how to make an avocado olive dip avocado, olive, dip, recipe, vegetarian 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. avocado, olive, dip, recipe, vegetarian Hi! I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make avocado olive dip. <h3>Avocado Olive Dip Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>3 avocados <li>1 can black olives</li> <li>1 (4-oz.) can chile peppers</li> <li>3 green onions</li> <li>3 tomatoes</li> <li>2 tsp. minced garlic</li> <li>3 tbsp. olive oil</li> <li>1 lemon</li> <li>1 tbsp finely chopped basil leaves</li> </ul> <h3>Remove Avocados From Shells</h3> Cut the avocado lengthwise all the way around. Twist the halves and, using your knife, strike and remove the pit. With a small paring knife, lightly cut the avocado. <br><br>With a spoon remove the avocado from the peel and place it in a large mixing bowl. Do this with all but one of the avocados. <h3>Mash the Avocados</h3> Then use a potato masher to mash the avocados until they are smooth. Then, take the last avocado out of its skin. Cut it into small pieces and then add it to the mashed avocado. <h3>Prepare the Olives</h3> Drain the can of olives. If you purchased whole olives, slice them with a paring knife. Add them into the bowl. <h3>Chop the Dip Vegetables</h3> Next, chop the green onions into thin slices. Add them into the bowl. Also cut the tomatoes. Take out the seeds and chop them into small pieces. Add them to the bowl. <h3>Mix the Avocado Olive Dip Ingredients</h3> Then, pour in the garlic, olive oil, and basil leaves. Now, juice the lemon over the bowl. <br><br> Mix everything together. Cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate for at least 2 hours. This will help the flavors to blend. <br><br> Serve with corn chips and enjoy. Thanks for watching, to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5054 Wed, 31 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/greekfood/Tzatziki-Recipe.htm Tzatziki is a refreshing yogurt and cucumber dip. Learn to make this Greek favorite and serve it as a tasty appetizer or party snack. Tzatziki, sauce, greek, dip 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Tzatziki, sauce, greek, dip Hi! My name is Simon, and I am the owner and founder of Saucy located in New York City for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make the Greek Tzatziki. <h3>Tzatziki Ingredients</h3> To make the Greek Tzatziki, you need to have:<ul> <li>1/2 a pound of Greek yogurt </li> <li>2 medium sized Kirby cucumbers</li> <li>about 2 tablespoons of fresh chopped garlic</li> <li>1/2 cup of fresh mint</li> <li>1/2 cup of fresh chopped dill</li> <li>1/3 of a cup of extra virgin olive oil</li> <li>Kosher salt (2 pinches)</li> <li>fresh pepper (1 pinch) </li> </ul> <h3>Mix the Greek Yogurt and Herbs</h3> You're going to take the yogurt and just put it into the bowl, make sure you have a whisk or some kind of spatula to mix it, add the garlic, and add the fresh chopped mint, and the dill, the olive oil. <h3>Prepare the Cucumber</h3> Just chop the heads of the cucumber, and them I'm taking the skin off and leaving the body skinless. And what I'm going to do next is chop the skin of the cucumber and the cucumber separately. Let's start with the cucumber itself. The cucumber doesn't have so much flavor, it's a lot of water, so its emulsified with the yogurt and the spices, and it creates the body of the Greek Tzatziki. And I'm adding the body of that cucumber into that mix. <br><br> Next, I'll do the same with the peel of the cucumber, then chop it nicely, small diced. Its very important that the cucumber will be fresh, and will be a Kirby cucumber, not the wax that you see in the supermarket. It has to be fresh if you want to get a good Greek Tzatziki. <h3>Mix the Tzatziki Ingredients</h3> I'm adding that to the mix. I will season that will a little salt and pepper. Now gently mix everything together, and that's how you make Greek Tzatziki. <br><br>Thank you for watching. To learn more, please visit us at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4698 Wed, 08 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Chicken-Puffs.htm Don't know what to make for dinner tonight? This simple, homemade chicken puff recipe calls for chicken, mushrooms, and cream cheese with herbs. chicken recipes,cooking videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. chicken recipes,cooking videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make chicken puffs. <h3>Chicken Puffs Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1/2 pound puff pastry squares</li> <li>1 tablespoon butter</li> <li>2 diced chicken breast halves</li> <li>6 chopped mushrooms</li> <li>4 ounces herb cream cheese</li> <li>1/4 cup chopped parsley</li> <li>1 beaten egg</li> <li>salt</li> <li>pepper</li> </ul> <h3>Combine the Chicken and Mushrooms</h3> First, melt the butter on a skillet under medium-high heat. Add the chicken and the mushrooms. Season the pan with salt and pepper. <br><br> Once the chicken is cooked through, and the mushrooms have released their juices, remove the mixture from the pan and put it to cool in the refrigerator for at least 15 minutes. <h3>Cut the Pastry Dough Into Squares</h3> Preheat the oven to 400 degrees. <br><br> Next pull out a layer of pastry dough and roll it into a 14-inch square. Cut it into four squares. <h3>Add the Chicken Puff Filling</h3> Spread 1-2 tablespoons of the cheese onto the square. Then top it off with a tablespoon of parsley and next, a spoonful of chicken and mushrooms. <br><br> Now, brush the edges of the square with the beaten egg. This will help seal the edges of the pastry together. <h3>Bake the Chicken Puffs</h3> Pick up the corners, and fold into the center over the filling. Please the puff seam side down onto a parchment lined baking sheet. <br><br> Do this for all of the squares. Brush the top of the puffs with the egg mixture so they will turn a nice golden brown. <br><br> Bake for 25 minutes, until they are puffed and golden. Serve warm and enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_18584115 Mon, 10 Jul 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://home.about.com/z/cg/vp.htm?ch=health&l=health/v/7&ap=1 If you do come down with a cold or the flu, we've got a few tips for how to feel better. 2006 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Health/Conditions and Diseases/Infectious Diseases/Viral/Influenza Health/Conditions and Diseases/Respiratory Disorders/Common Cold [intro] Every year as winter sets in, the inevitable happens. First one member of your family gets sick. Then another. Then another. Maybe it's a runny nose and scratchy throat. Or it could be a high fever, aches and pains, and a splitting headache. Either way, say hello to the cold and flu season. Fortunately, there are some things you can do to lower the odds that you and your family will get sick. [body] Start with a flu vaccine. Depending on age and physical health, a flu shot every year is essential for some people. For others, it's optional, but still a good idea. The next best thing you can do is make hand washing a serious priority for your family. Try to keep everyone from touching their eyes and nose, too, because that's where cold and flu germs enter your body most easily. If you can, stay away from anyone who is sick, particularly during the first few days of their illness when they are most contagious. When someone in your house is sick, keep a separate hand towel in the bathroom just for them. If you're sick, cover your mouth with a tissue when you cough or sneeze. Then throw away the tissue and wash your hands. Until recently, it didn't matter whether you had a cold or the flu because the treatment was essentially the same. Rest and plenty of fluids. A fever reducer and pain reliever like acetaminophen or ibuprofen for aches or a temperature. Maybe a decongestant or a cold formula for the runny nose, sore throat, and cough. Now, however, it's worth knowing exactly what you're fighting, because new antiviral drugs can help you get over the flu more quickly. The telltale sign is the severity of the symptoms. If you have a high fever, a severe headache, and sore muscles, you've probably got the flu. For antiviral drugs to be effective, you need to start taking them within two days of getting sick. If you think you've got the flu, your doctor can give you a quick test that will let you know for sure. There are some other reasons to call the doctor. If your child's cold suddenly includes a high fever, ear pain, or a sinus headache, you should check with your pediatrician. The same is true if a cough gets worse while the rest of the symptoms improve. With the flu, difficulty breathing or chest pain when coughing can be a sign of pneumonia. Whether you have a cold or the flu, don't bother with antibiotics. Colds and the flu are caused by viruses so they won't help. And never give aspirin to a child or teenager because it can cause a rare but dangerous condition called Reye's syndrome. Colds typically last a week, but two weeks isn't uncommon. For the flu, it usually takes about two weeks to completely recover. [close] Fortunately, colds and the flu usually come and go without complication. And about the time that leaves start to appear on trees and the tulips bloom, you can congratulate yourself for having survived another cold and flu season. And, then, say hello to allergy season. I'm Dr. Mona Khanna, About Health. aboutvideo_6194 Tue, 11 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/seattle/Seattle---U-District.htm The sorority girl and the avenue rat -- it's a culture clash that happens everyday on University Way in Seattle. university, district, u-district, seattle, washington 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. university, district, u-district, seattle, washington The sorority girl and the avenue rat -- it's a culture clash that happens everyday on University Way in Seattle. aboutvideo_6906 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/adding-transitions-in-iMovie-.htm Use Apple iMovie transitions to make your jumps from one video scene to another smoother and more professional-looking. Computing,Software,iMovie,Editing,Transitions,Movies,Videos,Film,Television 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Software,iMovie,Editing,Transitions,Movies,Videos,Film,Television Hi. I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. Today I'll teach you how to add transitions to your video clips in Apple's iMovie. <br/><br/>First open up your movie project or create a new project and import video clips. I've already placed clips on the timeline. After arranging your video you might want to add transitions to your project. <br/><h3>iMovie Transitions Window</h3>To add transitions, click on the Transitions icon. This brings up the Transitions Window. Here are a list of different transitions. <br/><h3>Transition Preview </h3>If you click on a transition it previews in the small preview window in the right corner. If you press the preview button you can watch the transition in the large preview timeline. <br/><h3>Transition Speed</h3>You can change the speed of the transition by dragging the speed slider. Some transitions can be used for creative effect while others denote the passage of time. <br/><h3>Cross Dissolves</h3>A Cross Dissolve is the most basic transition and implies time elapsing between the events in the clips. <br/><h3>Push Transitions</h3>The Push Transition allows you extra settings to adjust the direction of the transition. Just click on any of the direction levels. <br/><h3>Add Transitions to iMovie Timeline</h3>Once you pick a transition click and drag it between two clips. When you drop the transition a red line appears below the transition. The computer needs to process the effect and the red line shows the progress. <br/><h3>Edit iMovie Transitions</h3>If you're in a different tab like clips or photos and want to adjust a specific transition, you can hit Ctrl and click on the transition and select Edit Transitions. <br/><h3>Deleting</h3>If you don't like the transition, you can select it and hit Delete. But I do like it, so I'll go to Edit, Undo. I'll position the play head at the beginning of the timeline and hit the Spacebar or hit the Play button to preview my video. And that's how you work with Transitions in Apple's iMovie. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_6829 Fri, 26 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/italianfood/Roasted-Red-Pepper.htm Roasting red peppers brings out a distinct and delicious flavor, and it's easy to do at home! roasted red pepper,roast,red pepper,pepper,cook,bake,vegetable,broil 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. roasted red pepper,roast,red pepper,pepper,cook,bake,vegetable,broil Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman, for About.com Food. Today I'm going to talk about roasting red peppers. <br><br>Red peppers are great because they taste different when raw and when they're cooked. Roasting a red pepper brings out its sweet side and it is easy to do at home.<br><br> <H3>Gather Materials to Roast the Pepper</H3> First you'll need a knife and a brown paper bag or aluminum foil. Choose a red pepper that looks firm and crisp with a glossy skin.<br> <H3>Broil and Rotate the Red Pepper</H3> Turn on your broiler to get it warmed up. Rinse the pepper and place it directly on the oven rack right underneath the flame. This is what broiling is. The flame will cause the pepper to bubble and turn black. We want this to happen. Once the top side of the pepper turns black, rotate it. Repeat this process until the whole pepper has been roasted.<br><br> <H3>Cook the Pepper in a Container</H3> Now, take out the pepper and place it into a paper bag, or wrap it in aluminum foil. Make sure it is tight. The pepper will continue to cook in its container. This also loosens the skin. After about 10 to 15 minutes, remove it from the bag and let it cool down a little bit.<br> <H3>Prepare the Roasted Red Pepper</H3> To cut your pepper, insert the knife on top and cut around the stem. Slice it in half, and remove the seeds. With a knife, gently scrape off the skin. You can slice the pepper into strips as thick as you want them.<br><br>Roasted red peppers can be used in a variety of dishes from pizza to salads. You can even puree it and put it in your pasta sauce.<br><br>Thanks for watching, to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4504 Fri, 15 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/southernfood/Pecan-Pie.htm Rich, delicious pecan pie is a wonderful way to cap off any meal. Save time in the kitchen by using a pre-made pie crust. pecan pie, desserts, pies, recipes, videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. pecan pie, desserts, pies, recipes, videos Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I am going to show you how to make pecan pie. This is a delicious dessert, and it is actually quite easy to make. <h3>Pecan Pie Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>a single pie crust</li> <li>2 cups pecans</li> <li>3 eggs</li> <li>1 cup corn syrup</li> <li>1 cup brown sugar</li> <li>1 tablespoon flour</li> <li>1/4 cup butter</li> <li>1 teaspoon vanilla extract</li> </ul> <h3>Toast the Pecans</h3> Begin by preheating the oven to 350 degrees. Place the pecans in a large skillet. We will toast them over medium heat for about five minutes, stirring them constantly until they begin to darken. <br><br> Remove the pecans from the skillet and let them cool. <h3>Combine the Ingredients</h3> Melt the butter on low heat in the microwave or on the stovetop. In a medium bowl, gently whisk the eggs. Add the corn syrup, brown sugar, butter, flour and vanilla. <br><br> Stir these ingredients together and then gently fold in the pecans. <h3>Bake the Pecan Pie</h3> Pour the filling into the pie crust, and put the pie in the oven. Let it bake for about 50 to 60 minutes, until a knife comes out cleanly from the center. <br><br> You should let the pie cool before serving. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4425 Thu, 10 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/beer/Beer-Batter-Onion-Rings.htm Looking for a satisfying snack you can whip up in minutes? Try this recipe for delicious beer-batter onion rings. onion rings,beer,cooking,frying,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. onion rings,beer,cooking,frying,recipes,videos Hi, I'm Chris Chmura for About.com Food. We're about the explore the sizzling relationship between America's most popular grown-up beverage and an everyday vegetable. Let's make some beer-batter onion rings. <h3>Beer-Batter Onion Rings Ingredients</h3> The ingredients are easy. You'll only need:<ul> <li>1-2 onions</li> <li>a can of beer</li> <li>1 1/2 cup flour <li> vegetable oil for frying</li> </ul> <h3>Mix the Beer-Batter Onion Rings Ingredients</h3> In a large mixing bowl, blend the flour with about a 1 1/2 cups of beer, or one 12-ounce can. Whisk them until the batter thickens and you see plenty of bubbles in the bowl. <br><br> Now cover the bowl with plastic wrap and set aside for a few hours. <h3>Benefits of Cooking With Beer</h3> If you're having trouble parting with a can of the good stuff for this recipe, consider this: A New Zealand study found that adding beer to batter helps reduce the oily fat content of fried food by as much as 40 percent. Yep, that's less fattening <i>and</i> tastes great. <h3>Peel the Onions</h3> Next, peel then chop the onion. Simply pop the onion's natural rings apart with your fingers. I like large pieces, about a 1/2-inch thick. There's no right or wrong here. Keep in mind that the thinner they are, the more work you'll have to do in the frying pan. <h3>Warm the Vegetable Oil</h3> Once the batter has thickened, pour an inch or so of vegetable oil into a frying pan and warm to 370 degrees. On my stove, that's medium-high heat. <h3>Coat the Onion Rings With Batter</h3> I now make an assembly line near the cooktop-- left to right: onion, batter, oil. With a pair of metal tongs, I carefully dunk each ring into the beer batter, coat it evenly, shake off the excess, and ease it into the hot oil. <h3>Cook the Beer-Batter Onion Rings</h3> Each onion ring should cook about two minutes on each side. Of course, if they're thin, you won't necessarily need to turn them. <br><br> When they're done, use the tongs to transfer each ring from the pan to a paper towel-lined plate where the extra oil will be absorbed. <br><br> Now, don't be alarmed if your first few onion rings are lighter than you're used to in restaurants and look a little like Japanese tempura. The dirtier the oil gets, the darker the batches become. <h3>Serve the Beer-Batter Onion Rings</h3> Once your completed product is on a serving dish, add salt or pepper for flavor, and in the case of my family, add a side of ketchup. <br><br> For a twist in the presentation department, look no further than a paper towel holder. Make sure it's clean. Then unscrew the top, remove the roll, and stack the onion rings to complete this uniquely tall serving suggestion. <br><br> That's a lot fun for food for just a few dollars or less, as long as you're willing to part with a beer. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us here on the web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6034 Wed, 06 Feb 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/studenttravel/Boston-s-Dive-Bars.htm How far can you stretch $63 in Boston's dive bars? boston, massachusetts, dive, bars 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. boston, massachusetts, dive, bars How far can you stretch $63 in Boston's dive bars? aboutvideo_5182 Wed, 12 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/orthopedics/CAT-Scans.htm When having a CAT scan done, know how it works and what to expect. CAT scan, x-ray, 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. CAT scan, x-ray, <h3>What is a CAT Scan?</h3> A CAT scan is used to detect both bone and soft tissue damage. During the procedure, three-dimensional anatomical imagery is created by utilizing x-ray technology. <h3>Use of X-rays</h3> X-rays are used to create images by shining a high energy electromagnetic beam through the patient's body. This beam casts a shadow onto an x-ray film. A photograph of the internal structures is created through the shadows cast by varying tissue densities. Softer tissues allows more x-ray light to pass through, while harder tissues, such as bone allow less light to pass through. <h3>How a CAT Scan Works</h3> While x-rays are limited to two dimensional renderings. CAT scans are able to generate 3D views by rotating a conventional x-ray beam in a spiral around the patient's body. This series of rotations around the body creates image slices. A computer gathers, compiles and translates these images into a three hundred and sixty degree view of a targeted area or even the entire body. <br><br> Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_6755 Tue, 13 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/usedcars/Used-Car-Shopping.htm It can be a bit intimidating buying a used car but there are some great values out there. Learn how to distinguish the deals from the lemons. used cars,used car shopping,auto buying,resale value,auto mechanics 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. used cars,used car shopping,auto buying,resale value,auto mechanics Hi. I am Barbara Terry for About.com Autos. When shopping for a used car, narrow down your search by deciding on the exact make and model you are looking for and the budget you are allowing yourself to purchase that car.<br/><br/><h3>Buying a Used Car- Mechanics</H3><br/>When shopping for a good dependable used car there are key elements we will want to check out before writing that check. I always check it our mechanically first, let's pop the hood and check out the fluids and the condition of the visible belts and hoses <br/><br/><H3>Buying a Used Car- Fluids</H3><br/>When checking the oil make sure it has a honey brown color, if the oil is dark and goopy the previous owner probably did not have regular oil changes performed so a potential engine issue may exist so be aware.<br/><br/>When checking the transmission fluid the fluid should have a rich red color to its tone and should never feel gritty or grimy or like it has metal flakes in it, if it does, it may mean that the gears inside the transmission are grinding up, so be aware.<br/><br/>The brake fluid, power steering fluid, windshield washer fluid and coolant should be at proper levels.<br/><br/><H3>Buying a Used Car- Parts</H3><br/>The belts and hoses should never look cracked or expanded like they are going to explode <br/>or break.<br/><br/>Tires...make sure that all 4 are in good condition<br/><br/>Interior components&#133;check out all power options, mirrors, blinkers, headlights, taillights, brake lights, air conditioner, heater and of course the stereo.<br/><br/>Test drive the car to see if it fits to your liking, and if you want your mechanic to check it out that is fine too!<br/><br/>Buying a used car can be tricky, but then again, keep in mind that it is a used car not a new one, so expect that there will be repairs needed, just keep some money aside for that. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Autos.about.com.<br/> aboutvideo_4606 Fri, 30 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/windows/Share-a-Vista-File-or-Folder.htm With or without using your public folder, you can easily share files in Windows Vista. Follow these simple steps to share a file or folder anywhere on your computer. vista, file, folder, share 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. vista, file, folder, share Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I'm going to show you how to share files or folders using Vista. <h3>Sharing Options for Files and Folders</h3> There are two ways to share a file or folder: moving items into your public folder, or just sharing an individual file or folder without using the public folder. In this video, I'll show you how to share a file or folder anywhere on your computer. <h3>Choose a File to Share</h3> <ul> <li>FIND folder or file you want to share (GO TO Start menu and 'Computer' or 'Search')</li> <li>CLICK once on file</li> <li>CLICK Share Button, if you own the file or have permission to share it*</li> </ul> <p></p> *You can also right click on the file or folder you want to share and CLICK Share in the drop down menu. <h3>Create Permission to Share Files and Folders</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK on user you want to share the file with</li> <li>CLICK ADD</li> <li>CLICK on the user in your list to select the level of permission they can have from the drop down menu that appears i.e. as a co-owner or only a reader</li> <li>CLICK Share when you are finished</li> </ul> <h3>Adjust the Vista Settings</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK on 'Network and Sharing Center' on the top of your window</li> <li>CLICK on the button next to the file/folder to turn your file shares on/off</li> <li>CLICK on the setting you want on the menu that appears</li> <li>CLICK 'Apply'</li> </ul> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_5904 Wed, 18 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/golosangeles/California---Malibu.htm Catch the perfect wave in the surfer's paradise of Malibu. malibu, los, angeles, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. malibu, los, angeles, california Catch the perfect wave in the surfer's paradise of Malibu. aboutvideo_4129 Thu, 29 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Photo-Color-Sketch-in-Elements.htm Are you trying out cool effects in Photoshop Elements? Try creating a color sketch from a photo with these easy steps. elements, photoshop, color sketch, photo 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. elements, photoshop, color sketch, photo Hi! I'm Don Schecter for About.com Computing. Today I'm going to show you how to create a color sketch from a photo in Photoshop Elements. <h3>Create a New Photo Layer</h3> First, open Photoshop Elements, and open the photo you want to add this effect to. In the layers palette, drag the background layer (your photo) to the new layer icon to duplicate it. Name the new layer 'gray.' Go to 'enhance, adjust color,' and choose remove color. Now duplicate the gray layer and rename it 'smart blur.' <h3>Adjust the Photo</h3> Go to 'filter, blur, smart blur' and adjust the radius, threshold, and quality to suit your photo. The mode should be on 'edge only.' This should apply some outlines to your image. <br><br> Now I'll invert the layer by pressing 'control i.' Go to 'filter, blur, Gaussian blur' and use a radius of 1. Click 'ok.' <h3>Create an Emboss Layer</h3> Duplicate the gray layer and rename it 'emboss.' Move it to the top of the layers palette. Go to 'filter, stylize,' and choose 'emboss'. Adjust the angle, height, and amount to suit your photo. I'll use these settings. <br><br> In the layers palette, make sure the emboss layer is selected and under the drop down menu change the emboss blend mode to hard light. <h3>Adjust the Photo's Glowing Edges</h3> Duplicate the gray layer again and name it 'glowing edges.' Move it to the top of the layers palette. Go to 'filter, stylize,' and click on 'glowing edges.' You can change the width, edge brightness and smoothness to suit your photo. I'll use these settings. Now invert the glowing edges layer with a keyboard shortcut control l. Set the blending mode at the top of the layer palette to multiply, and change the opacity to 50. <h3>Adjust the Glowing Edges Blur</h3> Duplicate the glowing edges layer and rename it to 'glowing edges blur.' Make sure it is at the top of the layers palette. Go to 'filter, blur, Gaussian blur,' and use a radius of 3. Now set the blending mode to multiply and the make sure the opacity is set to100. <br><br> Now duplicate the background layer and name it 'color hard light.' Move it to the top of the layers palette. Set the blending mode in the drop down menu to hard light. <h3>Adjust the Photo's Color</h3> Duplicate the background layer again and name it 'color.' Move it to the top of the layers palette. Set the blending mode to 'color'. Now click on the eye icon next to the gray and background layers to hide them. <br><br> To further adjust your image, you can change the opacity or levels of any of the layers. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6954 Wed, 24 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/thaifood/Cutting-mangoes.htm Demonstration of a way to easily and quickly cut mangoes, and end up with evenly sized cubes cut,mango,slice,open,fruit,mangoes,knife 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cut,mango,slice,open,fruit,mangoes,knife Hi, I'm Ben Kurtzman for About.com Food, and today I am going to show you a great trick for cutting mangoes. <br/><br/>Mangoes are a delicious fruit, but they have a big pit in the middle, which makes them difficult to cut. This technique makes quick work of cutting mangoes, and you end up with nice, evenly-sized cubes. <br/><h3>Choosing a Mango</h3>The mango should be soft to the touch. That is how you know it is ripe. The pit is a flat oval that runs down the center of the mango. The fruit may appear round, but it is actually wider on one side. You need to find the wide side so that you know where to cut. <br/><h3>Cutting the Mango</h3>Using a sharp knife, slice off the side of the mango, getting as close to the pit as possible. Now do the same thing on the other side. Using a sharp paring knife slice a grid of half-inch cubes. You want the knife to get as close to the skin as possible without penetrating it. <br/><h3>Cubing Mango</h3>Using both hands, bend the fruit backwards so that the cubes pop out of the skin. Now you can easily pop off the cubes of mango and you can eat them raw, put them in a salad or use them for cooking. This method will allow you to get most of the fruit off the mango. <br/><h3>Final Slices</h3>There will still be a little bit of fruit attached to the pit. You can either discard it, or use a paring knife to slice off the remainder. These pieces will not be evenly-sized like the others, but they will taste just as good. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching, and to learn more visit us on the Web at Food.About.com.<br> aboutvideo_4266 Thu, 20 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/webdesign/Creating-Webpage-Frames.htm Framesets help organize your webpage's content, and they're easy to set up. Learn the basics to creating webpage frames. frames, web page, website, website frames 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. frames, web page, website, website frames Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'm going to show you how to create webpage frames. <h3>Documents Needed to Build Webpage Frames</h3> To create a webpage that uses framesets to organize your content, you need an HTML document with a frameset and an HTML document for each frame. The frameset tells the browser how to divide the screen into split windows. <h3>Add Column Frames</h3> First open Notepad, or any text editor. I'll open a previously saved HTML document that already has the basic outline of a webpage. To add a column frame on the left side, which you can add links to your different pages, type in brackets frameset cols=the number of pixels you want the width of your column to be. I'll type 120. Type a comma and and asterisk, which means the other frame will be the remainder of the window. Don t forget to close the frameset tag. <h3>Name the Frames</h3> Adding names to each frame allows us to add a link in one frame and have it open in a different frame. This is ideal if you want a menu on the screen while viewers browse around your website. To add a name to each frame, we'll have to first identify the HTML document we want to open in each frame. In the frameset tag, type in brackets, frame source (src) = in quotes the name of your HTML document you want to open in the left column. <br><br>I'll type menu.html and close the quotes. This is how I saved the HTML document I want to open by default in that frame. Now I'll give this frame a name by typing name = and in quotes menu. Don't forget to close the bracket. You'll need another frame source for the remainder of your webpage. I'll name it main and close the brackets. <br><br> Now that you have the basics to create frames, you can learn how to add attributes, and use targets to open links in a different frame. Thanks for watching. For more information, visit computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6930 Wed, 31 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/southernfood/charcoal-grilling.htm Instructions for lighting and cooking with a charcoal grill charcoal,grilling,cookout,food,summer,grill,bbq,barbecue 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. charcoal,grilling,cookout,food,summer,grill,bbq,barbecue Hi, I am Ben Kurtzman for About.com Food, and today I am going to show you some tips for charcoal grilling. A lot of people like using a gas grill because it is so quick and easy, but charcoal grills offer a distinct flavor and are really quite simple. <br/><H3>Charcoal Grill Safety</H3>When you buy charcoal briquettes, you can get ones that are already soaked in lighter fluid. These are the easiest and the simplest to get lit. In the interest of safety, make sure your grill is settled on a nonflammable surface. Also, make sure it is not near anything that could catch fire. <br/><H3>Starting the Grill</H3>Begin by stacking your briquettes in a pyramid. If your grill has air vents, open then up. This will increase airflow and help your charcoal burn better. Using matches, light the pyramid of briquettes in several places. After about ten or fifteen minutes the flames will die down and the charcoal will become gray with ash. Spread the charcoal out, and put the grill rack back on. Once the grilling rack is in place, use a grill brush to make sure it is clean. <br/><H3>Testing the Grill Heat</H3>You can test the heat of the fire by placing your hand about six inches above the coals. If it is only comfortable to keep your hand there for a second or two, you are grilling with very high heat. If you can keep you hand there for five or six seconds, this is medium heat, and anything longer is low. Most of the time you will be able to cook without the grill cover, however, if you want to increase the heat, covering the grill is a quick way to do that. <br/><br/>Now that you know the basics of charcoal grilling, try it with different vegetables and meats. It will provide a different flavor than gas grilling, and it is not very complicated. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching, and to learn more, visit us on the Web at Food.About.com.<br/><br/> aboutvideo_3761 Mon, 16 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/kosherfood/Potato-Knish-Recipe.htm Craving comfort food? Potato knishes are a tasty snack or side dish. Watch how to make potato knishes at home. potato knish,knish,kosher,vegetarian,recipe,video 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. potato knish,knish,kosher,vegetarian,recipe,video Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make potato knishes from scratch. <h3>Ingredients for Potato Knishes</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>6 potatoes</li> <li>1/4 cup of oil</li> <li>1 teaspoon salt</li> <li>1 teaspoon baking powder</li> <li>3 cups flour</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon salt</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon pepper</li> <li>1/4 cup butter</li> <li>1 onion</li> <li>1/2 cup cold water</li> <li>1 egg</li> </ul> <h3>Cook the Potatoes</h3> First, we cook the potatoes. Use a vegetable peeler to take off all of the skin. Be sure to put the tip of the peeler into the potato to remove any deep parts. Next, cut the potatoes into large chunks, which will help them cook faster. <br><br> Place the potatoes into a pot of boiling water. Cook for around 15-20 minutes, until they are soft. Now, drain the pot into a colander. <h3>Mash the Potatoes</h3> Put the potatoes back into the pot and then mash them well. Measure out 1 cup of mashed potatoes. This is going to be for the dough. <br><br> Put the measured potatoes into a bowl. Add the oil and salt, then mix it together. You'll see it gets nice and creamy. <h3>Prepare the Flour Mixture</h3> In a separate bowl, add the baking powder to the flour. Whisk them together. Add about one-third of the flour mixture to the mashed potatoes and mix. In sections, add in all the flour as best you can. <h3>Knead the Dough</h3> Next, make a small well in the center of the bowl. Pour the cold water right into that spot. Knead the dough with your hands for a few minutes. The dough will come together, and soon you have a nice, firm ball. <br><br> Place a wet cloth or towel on top of the dough, and let it sit for 30 minutes. <h3>Combine the Ingredients</h3> Meanwhile, cut and peel the onion. Dice it into small pieces. Then melt the butter in a pan to medium high heat. Add the onions and saut&#233; until they are soft, but not yet brown. <br><br> Pour the onions into a mixing bowl. This will be for our knish filling. Add 1 1/2 cups of mashed potatoes, 1/2 teaspoon of salt, and 1/4 teaspoon of pepper. Combine everything together. Preheat the oven to 425 degrees. <h3>Roll the Dough</h3> Flour a flat surface and a rolling pin. Place down the dough, and divide it into four parts. Take one part and prepare it for rolling. Roll out the dough, flipping it over occasionally, so it is one-quarter of an inch thick. <h3>Make a Square Knish</h3> For a square knish, with a pizza cutter or knife, trim the edges of all sides of the dough so it forms a rectangle. Place the potato filling into the center of the square. Fold over the short sides and push down on the edge. <br><br> Next, fold over the longer sides. You'll see how the dough forms a pocket around the filling. Dip your fingers into some water, then wet the dough to help seal the edges. <br><br> Place the knish on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper. Crack an egg, and beat it with a fork. Paint the egg on the knish with a brush for the final touch. <h3>Make a Round Knish</h3> To a make a round knish, use a bowl to help make an even circle with the rolled dough. Place the filling in the center, pull up the sides, and pinch the dough at the top. <br><br> Place it on the baking sheet, and brush with the egg. You could also make a long knish log or cut the log into small bite-sized knishes. <h3>Bake the Potato Knishes</h3> Place the pan into the oven, and cook for about 20-25 minutes. You can see how the egg brings a nice golden color to the finished knishes. Enjoy the knishes as a side dish or a snack. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6046 Thu, 19 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/sanfrancisco/California---SF-s-Mission-Dist.htm The best thing about this neighborhood, besides the mural art, cool clubs and authentic Mexican food, is that it stays open late. mission, district, san, francisco, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. mission, district, san, francisco, california The best thing about this neighborhood, besides the mural art, cool clubs and authentic Mexican food, is that it stays open late. aboutvideo_4738 Thu, 26 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/Jelly-Roll.htm Jelly rolls are a heavenly way to cap off a meal and also go great with coffee or tea. Check out this simple recipe for homemade jelly rolls. dessert videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. dessert videos Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I am going to show you how to make a jelly roll. This is a fun dessert that looks and tastes great. <h3>Jelly Roll Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>3 eggs</li> <li>1 cup sugar</li> <li>1/3 cup water</li> <li>1 teaspoon vanilla</li> <li>3/4 cups flour</li> <li>1 teaspoon baking powder</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon salt</li> <li>powdered sugar</li> <li>2/3 cups jelly or jam</li> </ul> For baking the cake, you will need a 15 1/2 by 10 1/2 inch pan, which is slightly larger than your average baking pan. Line the pan with aluminum foil, and then spray it with cooking oil. <br><br> Finally, you will need a large kitchen towel that is larger than the baking pan. <h3>Combine the Jelly Roll Ingredients</h3> Begin by preheating the oven to 375 degrees. Crack the eggs into a small bowl, and beat them together for three or four minutes until they are light and fluffy. <br><br> Pour the eggs into a larger bowl, then add the sugar and beat it in. Now we will beat in the water and the vanilla. <br><br> In a small bowl, mix together the flour, the baking powder, and salt. Gradually add this mixture to the wet ingredients, beating as you go. <h3>Bake the Cake</h3> Pour the batter into the prepared cake pan and spread it out so that it fills all the corners. Bake the cake for 12 to 15 minutes, until a fork comes out cleanly from the center. <h3>Roll Up the Cake</h3> Spread the towel out on a clean surface, and sprinkle it liberally with powdered sugar. Turn the cake upside down onto the towel, and remove the aluminum foil. <br><br> Now, we will roll the cake up with the towel inside of it. Let the rolled cake cool for 20 minutes or so on a wire rack. <h3>Spread the Jam on the Cake</h3> While the cake is cooling, whisk the jam with a fork to make it more spreadable. Unroll the cake and spread the jam over the entire surface. <h3>Serve the Jelly Roll Cake</h3> Now we will reroll the cake, without the towel this time, sprinkle it with powdered sugar, and it should be ready to serve. Cut slices off the roll for a delicious and beautiful dessert. Enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4692 Mon, 20 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/Moroccan-Beef-Turnovers.htm Shake things up at dinner tonight by serving Moroccan beef turnovers. These meat-filled dough squares are perfect as an appetizer or main dish. appetizer videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. appetizer videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make Moroccan beef turnovers. <h3>Moroccan Beef Turnover Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 egg</li> <li>2 tablespoons olive oil</li> <li>1/2 finely chopped onion</li> <li>2 teaspoons minced garlic</li> <li>1 chopped tomato</li> <li>1 tablespoon tomato paste</li> <li>1/2 pound ground beef or lamb</li> <li>1 tablespoon chopped parsley</li> <li>1-pound box puff-pastry dough squares</li> <li>sesame seeds</li> </ul> For the Moroccan spices, you will need 1/4 teaspoon of each: cumin, paprika, cinnamon, cayenne pepper, sea salt. You will also need 1/2 teaspoon pepper and a pinch of ground ginger. <h3>Beat the Egg</h3> Preheat the oven to 400 degrees. Also line a baking sheet with parchment paper. <br><br> In a small bowl, lightly beat the egg and set it aside for later. Brushing this on the turnovers will give them a golden glow and will help the sesame seeds to stick. <h3>Cook the Onion and Tomatoes</h3> Next, heat the oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the onion, and cook for 4-5 minutes until the onions are translucent. <br><br> Then add 1 teaspoon of the garlic, the chopped tomato, and the tomato paste. Continue to cook for another 3 minutes <h3>Combine the Meat and Spices</h3> Meanwhile, in a medium bowl, combine the meat, rest of the garlic, parsley, and the Moroccan spices. <br><br> These flavors of cumin, paprika, cinnamon, cayenne pepper, salt, pepper, and ginger provide the Moroccan flavors for this dish. <br><br> Mix it all together well so the spices are evenly distributed. <h3>Saute the Meat Mixture</h3> Now, add the meat mixture to the pan and saut&#233; until the liquid is reduced and the meat is cooked through. <h3>Fill the Pastry Squares With Meat</h3> On a flat surface, slightly roll out each puff pastry square. With a knife or pizza cutter, slice the pastry into four smaller squares. <br><br> Spoon a large tablespoon of meat into the center of each square. Then, brush the edges of the square with the egg mixture. <br><br> Fold the squares over the filling to form a triangle. Then with a fork, press down the edges to seal the turnovers. <h3>Bake the Moroccan Beef Turnovers</h3> Place each turnover a few inches apart on the prepared baking sheets. Brush the tops with the egg. Then, sprinkle the top of each pastry with the seeds. <br><br> Bake for 25 minutes or until the pastry is puffed and golden. Serve warm and enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6041 Wed, 16 Apr 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/gochicago/Walk-Through-Lincoln-Park-Zoo.htm This isn't a walk in the Park-- at least not the kind you expect. lincoln, park, chicago, illinois 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. lincoln, park, chicago, illinois This isn't a walk in the Park-- at least not the kind you expect. aboutvideo_6161 Fri, 18 Apr 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/gochicago/Check-Out-Rogers-Park.htm This neighborhood in north Chicago is one of the most culturally diverse in the country. chicago, illinois, rogers, park 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. chicago, illinois, rogers, park This neighborhood in north Chicago is one of the most culturally diverse in the country. aboutvideo_6134 Fri, 21 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/seattle/Seattle---Pioneer-Square.htm Pioneer Square - the heart of old Seattle - is THE place to go to experience Seattle's early history. seattle, downtown, pioneer, square, washington 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. seattle, downtown, pioneer, square, washington Pioneer Square - the heart of old Seattle - is THE place to go to experience Seattle's early history. aboutvideo_4864 Mon, 23 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Grilled-Peaches-and-Yogurt.htm Have a sweet tooth? Try this healthy alternative. Sliced peaches are grilled then paired with delicious Greek yogurt. grilling videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. grilling videos Hi and welcome. I'm Stefan Aschan for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make hot grilled peaches served over Greek yogurt. <br><br> It's such a great thing to serve for anyone that you would like to impress, for any kind of dinner party, or at lunch. <h3>Grilled Peaches and Yogurt Ingredients</h3> For the hot grilled peaches, you will need:<ul> <li>one peach</li> <li>2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil</li> <li>7 ounces Greek yogurt (2% fat)</li> <li>a pinch of cinnamon</li> </ul> <h3>Cut the Peach Into Slices</h3> First, start off by cutting the peach in half and open up the peach. It's going to be a little bit tricky. <br><br> Take the pit out of the peach, then turn it around and cut it into thin slices. You do want to have some thickness to it because you don't want to have the peach fall apart when placing it on the grill. <h3>Prepare the Grill</h3> Next, you are going to use about two tablespoons of extra virgin olive oil and slightly cover the grill. A great thing about the grilled peaches is that you can do this on any grill, even on the barbecue. <br><br> Before you place the peaches on the grill, you do want to test the grill if it's hot enough by adding a few drops of water on it. This was ready to go. <h3>Place the Peach Slices on the Grill</h3> So now let's place the peaches on it. You can use your fingers or a utensil you are most comfortable with to place the peaches on the grill. <br><br> Leave it on the grill for about two minutes. Then, when the peaches are golden brown like this, turn it around. You will smell it when it's ready to be turned over. <h3>Add the Peaches to the Greek Yogurt</h3> Once you have turned the peach around, turn down the heat and let it sit for another minute. Then, just place the hot grilled peaches over the Greek yogurt. <br><br> And as a decoration, the final tip is just a little bit of cinnamon. For decoration purposes, just put a little bit on the side, and voila. The hot grilled peaches over Greek yogurt are ready. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4495 Thu, 31 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/Caramel-Corn.htm This recipe for sweet, buttery caramel corn will have your little ones asking for more. Serve it as a snack or as a treat at a child's party. candies,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. candies,recipes,videos Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I am going to show you how to make caramel corn. This is an easy recipe that is fun to make and to eat. <h3>Caramel Corn Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>3/4 cup unpopped popcorn</li> <li>1 1/2 tablespoons butter</li> <li>1 1/2 cups brown sugar</li> <li>6 tablespoons water</li> </ul> You will also need a candy thermometer and some waxed paper. <h3>Pop the Popcorn</h3> Pop the popcorn in an air popper if you have one, or in a paper bag in the microwave. <br><br> To pop the popcorn in the microwave, pour 1/4 cup of kernels into a small, lunch-sized paper bag. Fold the bag over tightly so that the top is sealed. Microwave on high for two to three minutes until the popping slows to about five seconds apart. <br><br> Repeat this until you have popped all of the 3/4 cup of popcorn. When the popcorn has finished popping, pour it into a large bowl. <h3>Mix the Butter, Sugar, and Water</h3> Melt the butter in a saucepan over medium heat. Add the sugar and the water, and stir everything together and bring the mixture to a boil. <br><br> Let this boil until it reaches 234 degrees. <h3>Combine the Popcorn and Sugar Mixture</h3> Now, remove the sugar mixture form the heat and pour it over the popcorn. Stir everything together with a wooden spoon until the popcorn is all coated. <br><br> Now, pour out the popcorn onto baking sheets lined with waxed paper. Lightly butter your fingertips so that they do not stick to the popcorn. Now you can separate the corn into individual kernels. <h3>Make Caramel Corn Balls</h3> If you want to make popcorn balls, you will have to use either half as much popcorn or twice as much of the sugar mixture. <br><br> Pour the sugar over the popcorn, stir everything together with a wooden spoon, and let it cool very slightly. Butter your fingertips, and then form the popcorn into balls. <br><br> They may not feel like they are sticking together very well when the caramel is still warm, but once they cool they will be nice, solid popcorn balls that you can enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5863 Thu, 17 Apr 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/gochicago/Chicago-s-Gold-Coast.htm If you've got money to blow, Chicago's Gold Coast is the place to go. gold, coast, chicago, illinois 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. gold, coast, chicago, illinois If you've got money to blow, Chicago's Gold Coast is the place to go. aboutvideo_4502 Thu, 14 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/southernfood/Coleslaw-Recipe.htm Coleslaw is a staple of picnics, barbecues, or any outdoor party. Learn how to make this crowd-pleasing side dish. coleslaw,barbecue,side dish,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. coleslaw,barbecue,side dish,recipes,videos Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I am going to show you an easy recipe for coleslaw. <h3>Coleslaw Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 small cabbage, about two pounds</li> <li>2 medium carrots</li> <li>1 small onion</li> <li>3 tablespoons cider vinegar</li> <li>4 teaspoons salt</li> <li>1/3 cup mayonnaise</li> <li>1/3 cup sour cream</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Cabbage</h3> Remove the core that runs up the center of the cabbage. This part is very tough, and you do not want it in your coleslaw. Then, finely chop the remaining parts of the cabbage. <h3>Combine the Coleslaw Ingredients</h3> Place the cabbage in a large bowl, and toss it with the vinegar and the salt. Use a cheese grater to shred the onion and the carrots. Then, place these in the bowl with the cabbage. <br><br> Add the mayonnaise and the sour cream, and mix everything together well. <h3>Refrigerate the Coleslaw</h3> Place the salad in the refrigerator, and let it sit at least an hour before serving. This will allow the cabbage to become soft and tender. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6749 Fri, 13 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/email/Outlook-Express-Email.htm Learn how to set up an email account in Outlook Express, and check your other email accounts, too. Computing,Programs,Outlook Express,Email Account,Email,Video 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Outlook Express,Email Account,Email,Video Hi I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Are you having trouble setting up your email account in Outlook Express? If so, don't worry, just follow these easy steps. <br><br> Before you start, make sure you have email information from your internet service provider. <br><h3>Add a New Email Account in Outlook</h3> Once Outlook is open, go to the Tools menu and click on 'Accounts.' Choose the tab that says 'Add' and click the 'Mail' option. <br><br> Type in the name that you would like people to see when you send mail, and then click, 'next.' Here, just type in your email address, and click, 'next.' <h3>Select the Mail Servers</h3> Your internet service provider will tell you what to fill out for this next page. Many email accounts use POP3. Now type in your incoming mail server and your outgoing main server. <br><br> My outgoing mail server is smtp.rcn.com. <h3>Set Up a Username and Password</h3> Next, type in your account and username and then a password. Some accounts require you to check off a box that says, 'Securer Password Authentication.' Mine doesn't, so I'll just click 'next.' <br><br> And that's it. Click 'finish,' and you're all done. <h3>Add Other Email Accounts Through Outlook</h3> But hold on. Let's say that you also have a Hotmail account that you want to check mail from. It's no problem. <br><br> Just go back to the 'Add' tab and select the mail option one more time. Your email display name pops up again; you can change it or keep it the same. Now type in your Hotmail email address and click 'next.' <br><br> Here's something new: Outlook has put in all the necessary information for Hotmail. All you have to do is click 'next.' Type in your hotmail password and click 'next' one last time. <br><br> Now I can receive email from two accounts or set up as many as I want. It's that easy! <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6753 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/autorepair/Filling-In-Small-Scratches.htm Learn how to remove scratches from your car's paint quickly easily to keep your car looking like new. Paint Scratches,Car paint,Car maintenance,Autos,scratch remover 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Paint Scratches,Car paint,Car maintenance,Autos,scratch remover Hi, I'm Barbara Terry for About.com Autos. <br/><br/>It is not necessary to have your whole car painted or even the entire panel painted because you have acquired a few scratches. Most of the time you can fill in those scratches to create a like new smooth look. <br/><H3>Old-fashioned Scratch Remover</H3>Most people who fill in a scratch will refer to the old bottle of paint and the brush applicator that is attached to this bottle that you can find at most auto supply stores. <br/><H3>Scratch Remover Trick</H3>After years in the car industry learning the little tricks of the trade this is probably one of my favorites. You will need to buy a brand new medical syringe with a small needle, you can get one of these at a medical supply house. <br/><H3>Car Paint Matching</H3>In order to get the correct match to your cars paint contact a body shop, give them the make, model, and year of your vehicle or simply take it to them so they can look at it and give you the correct match to your cars color. <br/><H3>Scratch-Remover Technique</H3>The benefit of this procedure is that you will be filling in the scratch not painting over it and also getting paint on the area around the scratch that is perfectly fine.<br/><br>Demo&#133;..Fill the syringe with the paint, then carefully insert the needles tip into the far end of the scratch, release enough paint in order to fill in the scratch completely, make sure you do not over- fill in the scratch because then you will have paint running onto the perfectly fine areas of your car. <br/><br/>You will need to let this dry completely before washing your car. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Autos.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_5998 Wed, 18 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/philadelphia/Pennsylvania---Italian-Philly.htm Customers of Philly's outdoor Italian Market have been treated to fresh, authentic food and personalized attention for generations. pennsylvania, philadelphia, italian, market 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. pennsylvania, philadelphia, italian, market Customers of Philly's outdoor Italian Market have been treated to fresh, authentic food and personalized attention for generations. aboutvideo_4681 Thu, 26 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/candy/Persian-Pistachio-Nougat.htm Nougat is a Middle Eastern sweet made out of pistachios and flavored with rose water. Learn how to make this yummy Persian pistachio nougat at home. candy videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. candy videos Hi, I'm Natasha Levitan for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make Persian pistachio nougat. <h3>Persian Pistachio Nougat Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you'll need:<ul> <li>2 cups granulated sugar</li> <li>1 1/2 cups light corn syrup</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon salt</li> <li>1/4 cup water</li> <li>2 eggs</li> <li>1 1/2 teaspoon rose water</li> <li>1 cup toasted pistachios</li> </ul> <h3>Beat the Egg Whites</h3> Crack two eggs over a bowl, and separate the whites from the yolks by pouring the contents of the egg from one shell into another. <br><br> Keep the egg whites. Place egg whites in a large bowl of a stand mixer, and whisk until they hold stiff peaks. <h3>Make the Sugar Mixture</h3> Combine the sugar, corn syrup, salt, and water in a large saucepan over medium-high heat. Stir until the sugar is dissolved, and continue to cook until mixture reaches hard-ball stage (250 degrees). <h3>Add the Mixture to the Egg Whites</h3> When sugar syrup has reached 250 degrees, remove it from heat and slowly pour approximately one quarter of the mixture into the stiff egg whites, with the mixer running constantly. <br><br> Continue to beat the egg whites until the mixture holds its shape. <h3>Add the Rose Water and Pistachios</h3> Return the saucepan with the remaining sugar syrup to the stove, and continue to cook over medium-high heat until the mixture reaches 300 degrees (hard-crack stage). <br><br> With the mixer running, pour the remaining sugar syrup slowly into the egg mixture and continue beating until mixture is thick and stiff. <br><br> Add the rose water, and mix it together. Then fold in the nuts and stir until they're combined. <h3>Set the Pistachio Nougat</h3> Oil the bottom and sides of a baking pan. Spoon the nougat into the prepared pan, and press it smoothly and evenly. <br><br> Keep it in refrigerator until the nougat is set. Take it out of the mold and cut it into squares. Pistachio nougat is a lovely accompaniment to tea or coffee. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6981 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/vegetarian/Dried-Beans.htm Instructions for soaking and cooking dried beans dried,beans,hydrate,soak 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. dried,beans,hydrate,soak Hi, I'm Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and today I am going to show you how to prepare dried beans. Dried beans come in many more varieties than the canned ones, and they taste a lot fresher. <H3>Prepare the Dried Beans</H3> Begin by emptying the beans into a bowl. Sort through them to make sure there are no stones, debris, dirt or anything like that. <H3>Soak the Dried Beans Overnight</H3> Next, we will rinse the beans and soak them. Soaking can take anywhere from one hour to over night. The long way, if you have a lot of time, is to place the beans in a pot and add at least 4 times as much water as the volume of beans. Set the beans aside for at least four hours or up to overnight, then they should be ready for cooking. <H3>Quicker Soaking Methods</H3> There is also a quicker way to soak the beans if you have less time. Again, put the beans in a pot with at least four times as much water as the volume of beans. Put the pot on the stove, and bring the water to a boil. <br/><br/>After the water boils, remove the pot from the heat, cover it, and let the beans stand for at least one hour. Now they are ready for cooking. <H3>Cook the Beans</H3> Once the beans have finished soaking, drain the water. To cook the beans, fill up the pot with plenty of fresh cold water. Put the pot on the stove, and let it boil over high heat for about ten minutes. Some kind of scummy stuff may appear on the surface of the water. This is nothing to worry about, and you can just skim that off. <H3>Prepare the Cooked Beans</H3> After 10 minutes add whatever kind of flavoring you want to the beans: garlic, salt, pepper, herbs, spices, whatever you would like. Lower the heat to a simmer, and let the beans cook like that for about one hour. <br/><br/>After the beans are done, they are ready to serve and enjoy. Thanks for watching, and to learn more visit up on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6182 Tue, 11 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/toronto/Tour-of-Kensington-in-Toronto.htm You can sense the city's funky, multicultural mix in shops packed with goods from Europe, the Caribbean, the Middle East, South America, and Asia. kensington, toronto, ontario, canada 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. kensington, toronto, ontario, canada You can sense the city's funky, multicultural mix in shops packed with goods from Europe, the Caribbean, the Middle East, South America, and Asia. aboutvideo_6892 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/cocktails/Mojitos.htm Instructions for making a refreshing cuban cocktail, the mojito cocktail,mojito,cuban recipe,mint,beverage,recipe,rum,lime 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cocktail,mojito,cuban recipe,mint,beverage,recipe,rum,lime Hi, I'm Ben Kurtzman for About.com Food and today I am going to show you how to make a mojito. This refreshing Cuban cocktail is great for a hot summer day, when you are kicking back with friends, or even with a meal. <br/><br/><H3>Mojito Ingredients</H3>Here is what you will need: <br/>Fresh mint<br/>2 tablespoons of sugar<br/>1 lime<br/>2 ounces light rum<br/>Ginger ale<br/> Ice <br/><br/><H3>Preparing Mojito Ingredients</H3>We are going to start by crushing the mint and the sugar in a mortar and pestle. Mortar and pestles are great for crushing garlic and herbs, they are fairly inexpensive, and you can pick them up at just about any kitchen store. <br/><br/>When you are making a mojito you can use as much fresh mint as you want. I would start with a minimum of 5 or 6 leaves. Mixing the mint leaves with the sugar creates kind of a paste, and the reason we do this is so that it will mix in much more smoothly with the liquids and when we take a sip it will not be grainy. <br/><br/><H3>Crushing Mint Leaves</H3>It is important to be patient when you are crushing the mint leaves. It may take few minutes, but it really is the best way to bring out the natural juices in the mint. And it may be a stretch, but it almost looks like pesto when you are done with it. <br/><H3>Mojito Sugar Paste</H3>I am going to take my mint sugar paste and put it in the glass that I am going to use for my drink. Next we are going to work with the lime. We are going to cut it in half and use half of it for juice, and the other half will be garnish. <br/><br/><H3>Add Final Ingredients</H3>Next, we are going to add the rum and the ice, and finally we are going to top it off with a little bit of ginger ale. Now I am going to give it a quick stir to get everything mixed properly, and we are going to add a lime garnish, and it will be ready to enjoy. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching, and to learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com.<br/> aboutvideo_4494 Fri, 08 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/cocktails/How-to-Make-Jello-Shots.htm Spice up your next party by serving chilled jello shots. These flavorful treats are sweet and easy to make. jello shots,drink recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. jello shots,drink recipes,videos Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I am going to show you how to make jello shots. <br><br> These are fun at parties, but watch out. They are sweet and potent, so it can be easy to go overboard and not realize quite how much alcohol you have consumed. <h3>Jello Shot Ingredients and Supplies</h3> To hold the jello shots, you will need some small plastic cups. The ones used by restaurants to hold condiments are great because they are the perfect size. <br><br> You will also need some vegetable oil cooking spray. If you spray a little bit of this inside the cups before adding the jello, the shots will not stick to the sides and will come out easily. And do not worry, you will not taste the oil at all. <br><br> You will also need some fruit-flavored jello, boiling water, cold water, and some hard alcohol. <h3>Recreate Your Favorite Drinks</h3> Most people use vodka for jello shots, but you can get creative and recreate your favorite drinks in jello form. <br><br> For example, use lime jello and tequila to make a margarita shot, strawberry jello and rum for a daiquiri shot, or pineapple jello and coconut rum for a pina colada shot. <h3>Make the Jello</h3> For each cup of jello you will need 1 cup of boiling water. Empty the contents of the jello packet into a large bowl. Then pour the boiling water over the jello. <br><br> Stir together the water and the jello for about two minutes until it is completely dissolved. <h3>Add the Alcohol</h3> The jello recipe calls for 1 cup of cold water. Instead, we are going to use 1/4 cup of water and 3/4 cups of alcohol. Add these to the jello, and stir them in. <h3>Refrigerate the Jello</h3> Now, use a ladle to transfer the jello into the plastic cups. Place these in the refrigerator for at least four hours until the jello sets. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4567 Fri, 06 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/onlineadvertising/BC-IAB-Locchass-Velez.htm Jonathan Lochhaas Raymond Velez Jonathan Lochhaas, Raymond Velez, video advertising 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Jonathan Lochhaas, Raymond Velez, video advertising <p>Anecdotally it feels as though we recreating more and more content for things that I'm not sure we would have created video content as opposed to regular text or a richer type of Internet content. So it feels like we re-doing more of that, so it feels like there's a trend towards that. But to say there are a lot fewer agencies creating video for clients is my guess than people creating video. Then it's Hollywood and Bollywood in the world culture building video.</p> <p>As you move to TV or internet TV, you have different engagement models. So it's less about someone watching till the end of the commercial because in many cases you have to watch till the end of the commercial. Your controls go dead and you have to see the whole commercial to go on. I think it's more the interactive model that follows that because it's no longer a passive experience. So a basic example of that is what AOL does right now. You see a 15 second commercial come on during the episode that you're watching, and after that's done, there's a little banner that comes up that's relevant to that. Now that's a very simple model, but it kind of shows that not only can you have this impression, but you can also measure click through, and depending on your interaction model, you can actually look at conversion. Did I get this customer? So the power of Net 2.0 is really that we can get a lot more accurate metrics out of this, that it's possible to get real conversion rates. We can see how far a person went down the purchase path. So, I think to answer the question about engagement models, how far we're gonna go, again, it's the Wild West right now. We don 't know what it's going to be like. We know that we have much richer data, much deeper data and a much more detailed interaction model and we can look into an engagement model. I think that in a year, we re all going to be looking back and saying look at all these brilliant ideas that came out of this because it really it is so rich, and we've never had this before.</p> <p>How often do we make it relevant enough to keep people engaged? So the big difference between TV and digital video is now I know exactly who a person is whether they've logged in or I'm looking at an anonymous cookie data. So there is a way to make things more relevant, and that relevancy should drive engagement. Maybe instead of measuring engagement, we need to figure out a way to measure relevancy. If I'm watching a show and there's a crazy advertisement that makes no sense to me, why do I have to watch that? We don't necessarily have to do that anymore. We can always show relevant information so people will want to stay engaged because it has some meaning to them somehow.</p> <p>Well, and you see things like the marketing campaign that followed the "Charlie's Angels" movie where they had that sort of hard cased backpack sales went through the roof because people were familiar with it. Well how much more powerful is that type of an engagement when it's not just I get out of the theater and three weeks later I'm in the mall to see it, I can now have an advertisement right in front of me that says, wow, that's a really cool backpack. I'd like to go buy that. So the models for scaling this are already there, it's just the immediacy increases with the Web, as has always been the case.</p> aboutvideo_6048 Wed, 06 Feb 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/gomexico/Visit-Tijuana.htm Go where few tourists have gone-- deep into the heart of Tijuana, Mexico. mexico, tijuana 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. mexico, tijuana Go where few tourists have gone-- deep into the heart of Tijuana, Mexico. aboutvideo_4454 Mon, 18 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Create-a-Rainbow-in-Photoshop.htm Want to splash a colorful rainbow across a party invitation or on stationery? Learn how to create one in Adobe Photoshop. Adobe Photoshop,graphic design videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Adobe Photoshop,graphic design videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to create a rainbow in Adobe Photoshop <br><br> I'm using Photoshop CS2, but you should be able to create a rainbow in any version you're using. <h3>Open a New Document</h3> Start with a new document, but the dimensions must be square. I'll use a 400x400 pixel canvas. <br><br> The size should be a few pixels larger than the width you want for the finished rainbow. Click 'OK.' <h3>Make a New Layer</h3> Make a new layer by clicking the new layer button in the layers palette. Select the rectangle marquee tool, and click and drag a selection about twice as tall as you want your rainbow width to be. Leave some room at the bottom edge of the document. <h3>Select the Gradient Tool</h3> Now I'll just select the gradient tool. I'll choose the spectrum gradient. Make sure the shape is set to linear gradient. <br><br> Hold the shift key down, and click and drag from the bottom of the rectangle to the top. Now deselect. <h3>Select the Rectangular Polar Coordinate</h3> Go to 'filter,' 'distort,' and choose 'polar coordinates.' Select rectangular polar if it is not selected. <br><br> Now I'll just click the minus button in the filter dialog to preview the effect. Click 'OK' and you should see a circle rainbow. <h3>Apply a Soft Blur</h3> For a finishing touch, go up to 'filter,' 'blur,' and select 'Gaussian blur.' I'll choose '1' to apply a soft blur, and click 'OK.' <br><br> Now, I'll select the top half of the rainbow and press 'delete.' I'll just rotate the canvas, and there's our rainbow in its own layer so you can copy it into another document or save it for future documents. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4356 Sun, 03 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/italianfood/Polenta-Recipe.htm Polenta is delicious comfort food and tastes great with everything from cheese to tomatoes to mushrooms. Watch how to make polenta at home. polenta,Italian food,comfort food,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. polenta,Italian food,comfort food,recipes,videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make polenta. <h3>Polenta Ingredients</h3> For this recipe you will need: <ul> <li>6 cups water</li> <li>1 teaspoon salt</li> <li>2 cups polenta (cornmeal)</li> <li>3 tablespoons butter (optional)</li> <li>grated cheese</li> <li>tomato sauce to taste</li> </ul> <h3>Combine the Water and Polenta</h3> First,pour the cornmeal and 2 cups of the cold water into a large bowl. Whisk it so there are no lumps. <br><br> Next, pour the remaining 4 cups of water and the salt into a pot, and bring to a boil. <h3>Stir the Polenta</h3> Now, gradually stir in the polenta and cold water mixture. <br><br> Let the polenta and water simmer gently. Stir frequently, so there's no sticking. It will take about 30 minutes until it's very thick. <br><br> At the end, mix in the butter. <h3>Pour the Polenta Into a Buttered Bowl</h3> Butter a bowl for the polenta to cool. The polenta will take shape of the bowl after sitting for about 10 minutes. <br><br> Once it's set, invert the polenta onto a flat plate. You can cut it into thick slices and top with tomato sauce and grated cheese. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6069 Wed, 05 Mar 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/gonyc/Visit-Times-Square.htm Experience Broadway and Times Square with off-Broadway artist Nilsen. times, square, new, york, city 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. times, square, new, york, city Experience Broadway and Times Square with off-Broadway artist Nilsen. aboutvideo_4541 Tue, 12 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/antiques/How-to-Haggle.htm Before you hit the next yard sale or antiques fair, watch how to master the art of bargaining. negotiate,haggle,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. negotiate,haggle,videos Hi, I'm Sarah Pihl for About.com Home. Ever wonder how to cut down on the cash you spend on a coveted collectible? I'm here at the Brimfield, Massachusetts, Antiques Fair with few tips on how to haggle. <h3>Tips on How to Haggle</h3> For some, the art of making a deal comes naturally. However, I have always had to work at it. But here is what I have learned on how to cut a deal from some of the best negotiators I know. <h3>Arrive to the Sale Early</h3> Hit the ground running. If you're focused on fairs, get there early &#150; otherwise the good stuff might be gone before you can crack open you wallet. Plenty of professional buyers hit this circuit and cherry-pick the gems. <h3>Research What You Want to Buy</h3> Know your knickknacks, and come prepared. If you know what you're looking for, do some online research. <br><br> But stay open-minded. If you leave the shopping list at home, you will be more likely to spy other treasures to take home. <h3>Set a Spending Limit Beforehand</h3> Bargaining can get costly if you get caught up in the action. Preset the maximum you're willing to spend before you make an offer. <h3>Be Polite to Vendors</h3> Play nice. Dealers say being polite will get you a lot further. <br><br> Jackie Lavery, Brimsfield, MA, antiques dealer: "I think people will tend to give you a little more off than they would." <h3>Keep a Poker Face</h3> Even if you love what you're looking at, don't "ooh" and "aah." It's a dead giveaway. <br><br> If you blow your cover, recruit a friend to do your bidding with a predetermined spending cap. <h3>Play Dumb</h3> But playing dumb can sometimes do the trick too. Put on a pout, profess your love, but say sadly how the price tag is too hefty for your budget. That is, unless they can come down on their price. <h3>Be Prepared to Walk Away</h3> If a dealer is unwilling to negotiate at all, hit the road. Take a break from the bargaining table and see what else is out there. <h3>Wait for the Deal</h3> Or, you can wait it out. <br><br> Jackie Lavery: "It makes it so much easier to load up when you don't have to take a big piece home. I would say if you see a big, and you're interested, wait until the last day. The only thing with that is, you take the chance of it not being there." <br><br> Sarah Pihl: But just remember that in the end, if you'll love it forever, it's okay to pay too much. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at homegarden.about.com aboutvideo_18584614 Mon, 10 Jul 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://home.about.com/z/cg/vp.htm?ch=health&l=health/v/8&ap=1 Thinking about getting a flu shot? Have questions? Get your flu shot questions answered by Dr. Mona Khanna. 2006 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Health/Conditions and Diseases/Infectious Diseases/Viral/Influenza Health/Child Health/Immunizations ? [open] If it's that time of year when the leaves change colors, the nights get cooler, and the days get shorter, it can only mean one thing: flu season. In the United States, up to 20 percent of the population gets the flu every year. For most us, it simply means a few days in bed. But for some, the flu is much more serious. Each year, about 36,000 people die from serious flu complications. [body] The best way to avoid the flu is to get vaccinated. There are two types of flu vaccines. One is a shot that contains a small amount of inactive flu virus. The second is a nasal spray that contains live, weakened viruses that don't cause the flu. It's recommended only for healthy people between the ages of 5 and 49. Both vaccines work the same way-they trick your body into creating antibodies that will fight flu germs. It takes about two weeks after you are vaccinated for this protection to develop. Because every flu season brings a new strain of the flu, you need to be vaccinated each year to be protected. Flu season normally kicks off in November. That makes October and November the ideal time to be vaccinated. February is usually peak flu season, so getting the vaccine in December or even later can still help. Recommendations for who should get a flu shot change each year. But some people are always considered high priority and should plan to get a flu shot before every flu season. You are on that list if you are 65 years old or older, live in a long-term care facility, or have a chronic health condition. Flu shots are always recommended for children 6 to 23 months old, pregnant women, and healthcare workers who have direct contact with patients. You should also get a flu shot if you have a child under the age of six months. There are some people who shouldn't get a flu shot. If you are allergic to chicken's eggs or have had an allergic reaction to flu vaccines in the past, a flu shot is not for you. If you are currently sick with a fever, wait until you start to feel better. Also, flu shots are not approved for children under six months old. For the rest of us, a flu vaccine is a good idea. If flu shots are in short supply, you can almost always find the nasal spray vaccine. Check with your doctor or your state or local health department to find out where to get vaccinated. After you get your flu shot, don't be surprised if you experience a little soreness and redness where you had the shot or a low grade fever and a few aches. [close] There are other ways to avoid the flu. Try to avoid people who are sick as much as possible. Regular hand washing is a good preventative measure. Washing toys and objects that young children play with is also important. And, teaching kids to cover their mouth when they cough or sneeze is a good idea, too. Not only will these tips help you avoid the flu, but they can save you and your family from that other scourge of the winter season: the common cold. I'm Dr. Mona Khanna, About Health. aboutvideo_6217 Tue, 18 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/gohawaii/Hawaii-s-West-Maui.htm Snorkeling, surfing, sailing, and sun - see what makes Hawaii's West Maui shine. hawaii, hawai'i, west, maui 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. hawaii, hawai'i, west, maui Snorkeling, surfing, sailing, and sun - see what makes Hawaii's West Maui shine. aboutvideo_4150 Thu, 20 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/webdesign/Add-Bookmarks-to-a-Webpage.htm Adding a bookmark to your webpage will allow a reader to jump down the page to view different information. Watch how simple it is to add a bookmark for easy browsing. bookmarks, webpages, web design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. bookmarks, webpages, web design Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to add a bookmark to your webpage so you easily maneuver through lots of information on one page. <h3>Open an HTML Document</h3> First open Notepad, or if you are using a Mac, open Simple Text. I will open a saved html document that I have been working on. <h3>Prepare the Document for Bookmarks</h3> Adding a bookmark will allow a reader to jump down the page to view different information. First you should create the whole page with all the information you want. I have organized it with headings. Bookmarks work well if you have a table of contents at the top and the chapters or sections of information below. <h3>Add a Bookmark to the Webpage</h3> Within the paragraph where you want the link, type the a tag, href= quote pound then the name of the part you want to link to in your page. I will link to heading1, end quote and close the brackets. Now type the text of the link. I'll just type Heading 1. Don't forget to close the a tag. <h3>Choose the Bookmark ID Attribute</h3> Now I will go down in my document where heading 1 is and put an id attribute. This is where the link will take us when we click on it. Within the heading 1 tag, type id equals quote heading1 close the bracket Heading 1. You can use the id attribute to link anything in the same page. <br><br> Now when I click on the bookmark it will take me down to my heading. Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6205 Wed, 05 Mar 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/milwaukee/Milwaukee-s-East-Side.htm For one-stop shopping and entertainment, head to Milwaukee's east side, where you'll find Brady's Pharmacy and Diner and the Oriental Theatre and Bowling Alley. milwaukee, east, side, wisconsin 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. milwaukee, east, side, wisconsin For one-stop shopping and entertainment, head to Milwaukee's east side, where you'll find Brady's Pharmacy and Diner and the Oriental Theatre and Bowling Alley. aboutvideo_5336 Wed, 17 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/arthritis/Arthritis.htm Osteoarthritis is a degenerative loss of cartilage in the joints. Learn more about the effects and causes of osteoarthritis. osteoarthritis, arthritis 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. osteoarthritis, arthritis <h3>Healthy Joints</h3> In order to understand the changes that occur in the joints of a person with osteoarthritis, it is necessary to first understand how joints work. The two main bones of the knee are the femur and the tibia. In a normal knee joint, the connecting surfaces of these two bones are covered with cartilage -- a smooth and strong material that cushions the impact between the bones. The joint is also surrounded by synovial fluid, which aids in joint mobility. <h3>Effects of Osteoarthritis</h3> In people with osteoarthritis, there is a chronic degenerative loss of cartilage resulting in bone to bone exposure, bone destruction, inflammation, and pain. <h3>Causes of Osteoarthritis</h3> Osteoarthritis can affect any joint in the body and is commonly found in the neck, back, and hips. The cause of osteoarthritis is unknown, but aging plays a significant role in the development of this condition. <br><br> Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_6993 Sun, 13 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/frenchfood/Nutty-Salmon.htm Tired of the same-old salmon dish? Try this recipe for almond-encrusted wild salmon topped with a rich butter sauce. salmon,almonds,dinner,fish,French food,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. salmon,almonds,dinner,fish,French food,recipes,videos Hi, I'm Rich Vellante, executive chef at Legal Sea Foods in Boston, for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make our nutty salmon. <h3>Cut the Salmon Into Three Parts</h3> What I've done is cut the salmon into three different parts, so we can manage it and build it in a nice way on the plate when we are done. <h3>Nutty Salmon Ingredients</h3> The ingredients here are fairly simple. We have:<ul> <li>salmon</li> <li>almonds</li> <li>egg wash</li> <li>butter sauce</li> </ul> <h3>Butter Sauce Ingredients</h3> <ul> <li>shallots, finely chopped</li> <li>white wine</li> <li>cold butter</li> </ul> <h3>Season the Salmon</h3> So just to start out, I'll add a little bit of salt and a little bit of pepper to the salmon. <br><br> Now, we left the skin on. You can ask your fishmonger to take the skin off, if you'd like. We do recommend that you use wild salmon. <h3>Coat the Salmon in Almonds</h3> Next, I dip the salmon in egg wash, coat it a little bit, and then press it into the almonds. I'm creating a crust. I used gloves so it's easy to clean up. <h3>Heat the Olive Oil and Butter</h3> Now, I have my pan over on the stove heating up, and I'm going to add a little olive oil and butter. <br><br> You want this at a medium heat. You do not want it too high because then it will scorch. <h3>Cook the Salmon Fillets</h3> Once it starts to bubble, add some of those almonds and the salmon. Cook the fillets over medium heat for two to three minutes. <br><br> And when you go over the fish, you see the crust starting to form. You don't want to go too far because then the fish is going to burn. <br><br> So what I'm going to do it pop it into the oven at 375 degree for about seven to nine minutes. I take it out of the oven, and as you can see, the almonds are adhering nicely. <h3>Make the Butter Sauce</h3> Next, we are going to be making a Beurre Blanc, or a butter sauce. The butter sauce we are going to do here is just in the pan, and it consists of some shallots that are chopped up finely, some white wine, and a little bit of cold butter. <br><br> Now I'm going to add some of the shallots and a little bit of white wine, and reduce that down a little bit. Once that's reduced down a bit, I will add the cold butter. <br><br> This is a sauce that you need to be a little patient with, and let the wine reduce down. Once I get the white wine down to about a tablespoon, I can add in the cold butter. <h3>Serve the Nutty Salmon</h3> And as you can see, I am slowly thickening the sauce. I pour it over the fish, and there you have it. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4081 Wed, 24 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/philadelphia/Camden-s-Adventure-Aquarium.htm See highlights from the amazing Aquarium in Camden, NJ including the Rainbow Reef, Ocean Realm Theater, and Penguin Island. new jersey,aquarium,adventure aquarium,sealife,south jersey 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. new jersey,aquarium,adventure aquarium,sealife,south jersey Hi, I'm John Fischer, your Guide to the Greater Philadelphia and South Jersey area at About.com. <br><H3>Adventure Aquarium Remodeling</H3> With a new name, double the exhibit space and a 53 million dollar investment, the new Adventure Aquarium opened on the Camden Waterfront on May 25, 2005. <br><H3>Ocean Realm</H3> Irazu Falls welcomes visitors to the first main exhibit area the Ocean Realm where visitors can see Northern Diamondback Terrapins - hardshell turtles, and a lovely exhibit of the fish found near and Under the Boardwalk. You can view spiny lobsters so close you feel like you were in tha tank with them. <br><H3>Rainbow Reef</H3> Rainbow Reef features many of the colorful fish found just off the New Jersey and Eastern Atlantic coast. If you look carefully you may even see a Moray Eel. <br><H3>Ocean Realm Theater</H3> The highlight of the Ocean Realm is the Ocean Realm Theater where divers feed the fish twice daily and answer questions from the audience. <br><H3>Penguin Island</H3> Outside you'll find Penguin Island featuring 21 African Penguins and the Seal Shores Exhibit, home to 7 harbor and gray seals. <br><H3>Aviary and African River</H3> The second large exhibit area is the West African River experience with a free flight aviary. The highlight of this exhibit are the two female African hippos named Button and Jenny who you can view in their underwater home. <br><H3>Jules Verne Gallery</H3> In the Jules Verne Gallery you'll find some of the most exotic and fascinating creatures of the sea including deep sea jellyfish and sea dragons. <br><H3>Sharks</H3> The highlight of the Adventure Aqaurium is the new 550,00 gallon Shark Realm where over 20 sharks and other sea creatures make their home. You can view them from the new underwater shark tunnel or one of the many floor to ceiling viewing areas. The Adventure Aquarium has so much to see and do. You can easily spend the entire day at this new highlight of the Delaware Riverfront. <br><H3>Adventure Aquarium Gift Shop</H3> Your final stop is the new Adventure Pier Gift Shop where you can buy that special souvenier and start making your plans for your next visit to the Adventure Aquarium. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more about the Greater Philadelphia and South Jersey area join us on the Web at Philadelphia.About.com. aboutvideo_6853 Fri, 26 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/italianfood/Pizza.htm Fresh-made pizza is much easier to make than most people realize. Learn how to prepare your own pizza dough and top it with your favorite ingredients. italian food,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. italian food,videos Hi, I am Ben Kurtzman for About.com Food and today I am going to show you how to make homemade pizza. You can always call to order pizza delivery, but it is quick and easy to make at home. <br/><br/> <H3>Pizza Dough Ingredients</H3> We will start by making the dough. You will need the following ingredients: <ul> <li>1/2 cup hot water</li> <li>1 tablespoon yeast</li> <li>1 tablespoon olive oil</li> <li>1 1/2 cups flour</li> <li>1 tablespoon rosemary</li> <li>1 tablespoon salt</li> </ul> <H3>Mix and Knead Dough Ingredients</H3> Start by dissolving the yeast in the water. While we are waiting for the yeast to dissolve, add the salt and rosemary to the flour. Give it a quick stir. Once the yeast is dissolved, add the olive oil. After you add the liquid ingredients to the flour, you can stir for a little bit, but pretty soon you will need to use your hands. And now, I have to abandon ship. Time to use my hands. <br/><br/> Once you have worked all the flour in, continue to knead the dough for another few minutes. <br/> <H3>Allow Dough to Rise</H3> Once the dough is kneaded, we need to allow it to rise. Take some olive oil on a paper towel and apply that to the inside of the bowl, so the dough does not stick while rising. Now, put the dough back in the bowl, cover it, and let it sit for an hour or so. You will know it us ready when it doubles from its original size. <br/><br/> <H3>Heat Pizza Stone</H3> The best way to cook pizza at home is on a pizza stone, which can be purchased at any kitchen or home goods store. What you want to do is heat the pizza stone for about 20 minutes at 425 degrees. It retains heat from the oven, and actually cooks the dough from the outside, giving you a nice, crisp crust. <br/><br/> <H3>Prepare Pizza Dough</H3> While it is heating, we will prepare the dough. You want to make a fist and punch down the dough so that the air that has built up in it is released. This would be the time that some cooks would show you how to throw the pizza dough up in the air. We ware not going to do that today. You can get the same result by rolling it out. Make sure that the surface you are rolling on and the rolling pin are well coated with flour so that the dough does not stick. Always start from the center when rolling, not the edges. And do not worry if it is not perfectly circular. An amoebic-shaped pizza is part of the charm. <br/><br/> <H3>Add Pizza Toppings</H3> Now that the dough is ready and the pizza stone is heated, we are going to put the dough on the pizza stone and add our sauce and toppings. By putting a thin layer of cornmeal on the pizza stone we can prevent the dough from sticking. If any of the dough spills over the pizza stone, it is okay. Just fold it back over and you will make a nice crust. <br/><br/>Now I am going to add the tomato sauce and spread it evenly around. We are going to be topping our pizza today with bell peppers and grated mozzarella cheese, but you can feel free to use whatever you want. <br/><br/> <H3>Cook the Pizza</H3> Put the pizza in the oven and let it cook at 425 degrees for 15 or 20 minutes. You will know it is done when the cheese starts to bubble and turn brown. Once the pizza is cooled, all that is left is to slice, serve and enjoy. <br/><br/> Thanks for watching, and to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5809 Tue, 11 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/sanfrancisco/Belly-Dancing-in-San-Francisco.htm The San Francisco Bay Area is a mecca for belly dancing. Take a tour of belly dancing hot spots with Luna, the 2005 People's Choice Bellydancer. san, francisco, belly, dancing, bay, area, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. san, francisco, belly, dancing, bay, area, california The San Francisco Bay Area is a mecca for belly dancing. Take a tour of belly dancing hot spots with Luna, the 2005 People's Choice Bellydancer. aboutvideo_4273 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktoppub/Business-Cards-in-Illustrator.htm Do you want to make professional-quality business cards? See how it's done using Adobe Illustrator. business cards, adobe illustrator, videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. business cards, adobe illustrator, videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'm going to show you how to make a business card in Adobe Illustrator. <h3>Choose a Business Card Template</h3> First open Illustrator. I'm using Illustrator CS 2. Go to 'File' and choose 'New' from Template. In the window, you can choose what kind of business card you would like to make. Click on blank templates. You can see there are 4 different blank business cards. Today I'll use one of the templates. Click 'new.' <h3>Add Text and Images to the Business Card</h3> Now select the type tool and change all the text to your information. To add a logo or photo, go up to file and choose 'open.' Open the image you want. It should be small and without a lot of detail. Click to select it so there's a box around it. Now go up to edit and choose 'copy.' Go back to your business card, and go to 'Edit' and click 'paste.' You can now position it anywhere you want on the card. <h3>Adjust Your Business Logo</h3> I'll also change the color of my logo. When I'm finished, I'll go up to 'File' and click 'save.' Give your file a name, and click 'save' again. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_5523 Tue, 13 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/coffeetea/Apple-Tea.htm A refreshing way to cool off, apple tea is a perfect blend of tea and apple cider. For an extra kick, add a stick of cinnamon. apple tea,coffee and tea, videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. apple tea,coffee and tea, videos Hi, I am Rachel Edelman for About.com food. Today I am going to show you how to make apple tea. <h3>Apple Tea Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 quart water in a pot</li> <li>3 tea bags</li> <li>1/4 cup sugar</li> <li>2 cups apple cider</li> <li>cinnamon sticks</li> </ul> <h3>Brew the Tea</h3> First place the pot on medium high heat, and cover the pot with a lid. Take out the teabags and remove the paper tags. Once the water is boiling, Add the tea bags to the boiling water. <br><br> Now, cover the pot and allow the tea to simmer for 5 minutes. Push the tea bags to the side of the pot and then, remove tea bags from the water. <h3>Add the Sugar and Apple Cider</h3> Next, pour in the sugar. Stir in the sugar and heat until it has dissolved. Now, add the apple cider and reheat the tea. <br><br> Once hot, pour into a drinking mug. Add a stick of cinnamon to stir and add additional flavor. This is a perfect drink for a cool day! Enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5478 Mon, 31 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/indianfood/Gajrela.htm Also known as carrot delight, gajrela is a tasty blend of carrots, spices, and heavy cream. This sweet dessert hails from the Punjab region of India. gajrela, desserts, indian food, videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. gajrela, desserts, indian food, videos Hello, my name is Mala Desai for About.com Food. Today I will be making gajrela, or carrot delight. This is a specialty from the Punjab region of India. <h3>Gajrela Ingredients</h3> To make this dish, you will need:<ul> <li>1 pound carrots, finely grated</li> <li>3 cups 2 percent milk</li> <li>1/2 cup heavy cream (optional)</li> <li>1 cup sugar (raw sugar is preferred)<li> <li>1-inch cinnamon stick that can be removed later</li> <li>a few cloves</li> <li>a few crushed cardamon seeds</li> <li>2 tablespoons raisins</li> </ul> <h3>Combine the Gajrela Ingredients</h3> Place the grated carrots in a cooking vessel with a very heavy bottom. Add milk, cinnamon, cloves, and cardamon. <br><br> Cook on high and then low heat, stirring regularly until the milk has almost completely dried up. This will take quite a while. If you rush the process, it will not taste the same. <h3>Add Sugar to the Gajrela Mixture</h3> Add the sugar and cream and continue stirring. Once the sugar has dissolved, stir constantly. The mixture must not stick to the bottom of the pot at any point during cooking. <h3>Serve the Gajrela</h3> The gajrela is ready when milk has completely dried and carrots leave the sides of the cooking vessel. <br><br> Decorate with ground almonds, cashews, pistachios, and walnuts and serve while hot. Heavy cream can be served on the side instead of adding during the cooking. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more you can visit us on the web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5983 Fri, 09 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/brooklyn/Tour-Greenpoint-Brooklyn.htm A spit away from Manhattan is Greenpoint, an authentic Brooklyn neighborhood of tough guys and families with kids. Oh, and then there's the Murder Bar... greenpoint, brooklyn, nyc, new, york, city 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. greenpoint, brooklyn, nyc, new, york, city A spit away from Manhattan is Greenpoint, an authentic Brooklyn neighborhood of tough guys and families with kids. Oh, and then there's the "Murder Bar..." aboutvideo_4676 Fri, 29 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/indianfood/How-to-Make-Chapati.htm Ultra-versatile chapati is usually eaten with cooked dal or vegetable dishes. Watch how to make this delicious round bread. chapati,Indian bread,Indian recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. chapati,Indian bread,Indian recipes,videos Hi, I'm Natasha Levitan for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make chapati. <h3>Chapati Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>2 1/2 cups whole wheat flour</li> <li>1 teaspoon salt</li> <li>1 cup water</li> <li>3 tablespoons oil</li> <li>a folded dry cloth</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Chapati Dough</h3> Add salt to your whole wheat flour and mix with a wooden paddle. Make a depression in the center, and slowly add water in small portions while mixing it well with the flour, until you have smooth dough. <h3>Roll the Chapati Dough</h3> Oil your hands and knead the dough for five minutes. Divide the dough into 10-12 equal pieces. Form the pieces of dough into balls by rolling them in your hands. <br><br> Roll each piece of dough by pushing the rolling pin from the center of the dough out to the edges. Do this until you have a circle 4 inches in diameter. <h3>Cook the Chapati</h3> Place your skillet on the burner and turn the heat to medium. Place rounds one at a time, flour side down, on the skillet. <br><br> Cook for 1-2 minutes, or until the surface begins to bubble. Turn the chapati over on the other side, and cook for 1-2 minutes longer. <h3>Serve the Chapati</h3> Then, press the surface with a dry cloth to make the chapati puff up. Brush them with melted butter and serve. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5910 Tue, 11 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/sanfrancisco/San-Francisco-s-Singles-Scene.htm What's a single gal like Hilary to do in the big city? Here's the inside scoop on the date potential in some popular San Francisco neighborhoods. single, singles, san, francisco, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. single, singles, san, francisco, california What's a single gal like Hilary to do in the big city? Here's the inside scoop on the date potential in some popular San Francisco neighborhoods. aboutvideo_6811 Sun, 28 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/The-Patch-Tool.htm Would your pictures be perfect if you could just remove one or two obtrusive objects from the frame? Use Adobe Photoshop's Patch Tool to re-touch your digital pictures and photos in just a few steps. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Re-touch,Graphic Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Re-touch,Graphic Design Hi. I am Don Schechter for About.com Computing.<br><br>Today I am going to show you how to use the patch tool using Adobe Photoshop cs 2 to make your digital pictures look nicer. <br><h3>Choose Picture for Adobe Photoshop Patch Tool</h3>First, I am going to open up Adobe Photoshop. Go to file, open and select your digital picture. It's a little dark and grainy and it is perfect for this tutorial. <br><br>Over here you can see the reflection of a light shining in the mirror. I think it is pretty distracting and I want to get rid of it. <br><h3>Locating Adobe Photoshop Patch Tool</h3>On the left side of your screen is your toolbar. This is where we will find the patch tool. If you don't know which tool this is, look for the bandaid. That is the healing brush tool. Click and hold down this button. There's the patch tool. Select it and let the mouse go. <br><h3>Identifying Area to Patch</h3>Now, I am going to go over to that reflection, hold down the mouse and draw a circle around the light. This is the area I want to change. Now move the mouse inside the circle until that icon changes. <br><h3>Using Adobe Photoshop Patch Tool</h3>Now, here comes the magic. Click down on the mouse and drag it around. This new circle or oval shows the area that will be inserted over the reflection. Once you have selected what looks best just click elsewhere and there you go. <br><br>The patch tool can be useful in removing everything from relections, date and time stamps on the bottom of a photo, or entire objects. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at Computing.About.com.<br><br> aboutvideo_6881 Wed, 31 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Dissolves-and-Transitions.htm You don't have to be a professional video editor to learn fancy Final Cut Pro transitions like dissolves. Add creativity and interest to all the movies you make in a few simple steps. Computing,Gadgets,Software,Final Cut Pro,Editing,Movies,Videos,Film,Television 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Gadgets,Software,Final Cut Pro,Editing,Movies,Videos,Film,Television Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing.<br><br>Today I'll teach you how to add dissolves and transitions to video footage in Final Cut Pro. <br><br>Once you've arranged your clips on the timeline you may want to add transitions between them. Adding dissolves and other effects to clips helps to create a smooth transition in your videos. They can also be fun and creative. <br><h3>Accessing Final Cut Pro Transitions</h3>First, click on the Effects Tab. If it's missing you can go to Window, Effects. <br><br>Next to the box that says video transitions is an arrow, click on it. We have a list of transition effects to put between clips. Let's say I want to put a dissolve between clips. <br><h3>Final Cut Pro Dissolve Transition</h3>Click on the arrow on the dissolve folder to expand the dissolve effects. <br><br>The most basic dissolve is a cross-dissolve. Click and drag it between two clips. When you see the shadow, let go of the mouse. Now I'll move the playhead before the effect and hit the spacebar. There's our dissolve. <br><br>We can change the dissolve size by dragging it in either direction. And if we don't like it we can click on the dissolve and hit the delete button. <br><h3>Final Cut Pro Wipe Transition</h3>Now let's get a little fancier and do a wipe. Open up the wipe folder by clicking on the expand arrow. <br><br>I'll drag a clock wipe between two clips. I'll click and drag it to make it larger. <br><br>And I'll click the playhead before the wipe and hit the spacebar. <br><br>If we double-click on our transition, a settings window appears to make adjustments. <br><br>I'll change the wipe direction to counterclockwise, give it a border, and change the color. Now I'll move the playhead and hit spacebar. <br><h3>Other Final Cut Pro Transitions</h3>There are many transitions available from page peels to cube spins. Play around with the different options to find what you like. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_6793 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/childparenting/Sibling-Rivalry-and-Conflict.htm Constant fighting between siblings can turn a happy home into a house of horrors. This video is about reducing conflict between children in the home. About.com video Expert Kathy Moore offers practical parenting advice for parents struggling with children who fight tease and whine. sibling,rivalry,children,conflict,toddlers 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. sibling,rivalry,children,conflict,toddlers Hi, I am Kathy Moore for About.com Parenting. As the mother of two kids, it is very frustrating to see them fight. I think every parent wishes their children could always be sweet and cooperative but sibling rivalry is a fact of life so I am working on some new strategies to try to reduce fighting, teasing, and conflict in our home.<br/> <H3>Track Daily Behavior</H3> First of all I have started to keep a little journal so I can track the time of day that my kids fight, cry or whine. After just a few days I noticed that most incidents occur just before a meal or nap time. After making this discovery, I have already become more proactive at working to avoid conflict at these times of the day. <br/> <H3>Reduce Mealtime Crankiness</H3> If you notice that conflict seems to happen when mealtime is approaching in your home, try getting the kids involved in meal preparation or setting the table. Engaging in a closely supervised activity can limit behaviors that lead to those annoying little spats.<br/> <H3>Focus Your Attention</H3> It is important to remember that often kids are wanting more attention from mom or dad and they will pick on a sibling just to get more attention. If you know the times and triggers for conflicts in your home you can work to head them off before they become full-blown problems.<br/> <H3>Teach Empathy</H3> Even with toddlers you can teach coping skills and simple tricks to avoid conflict. I am working with my kids to resist the temptation to shout, cry, or hit in favor of calmly expressing their feelings and wants to one another. I also try to get them to look at the situation from the other's point of view.<br/> <H3>Respond to Different Interests</H3> My children are relatively close in age so they often enjoy the same type of activity but it is important to encourage individual interests and provide unique distractions that cater to each child's age and interest level. Some children might be more interested in reading while others might need a tactile activity.<br/> <H3>Send Positive Conflict Messages</H3> Remember the old saying, the apple does not fall far from the tree? Both my husband and I have been paying closer attention to how we behave in front of the kids. Children are sponges when it comes to absorbing the atmosphere in the home. If you and your mate model a caring, supportive relationship, your children will learn to behave that way with one another. On the other hand, if you shout and holler at one another your children will learn that behavior too.<br/><br/>Sibling rivalry is as old as Cain and Abel so do not feel bad if your kids seem to clash a lot. Helping children learn to avoid and manage conflict takes lots patience and a sense of humor. And you know, teaching these skills now will benefit your children for their whole lives.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Parenting.about.com. aboutvideo_6945 Wed, 31 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Editing-in-Camtasia.htm Learn how to edit the materials you've captured in Camtasia to so you can present exactly the segments of your videos that are the most relevant. Computing,Programs,Software,Camtasia,Video Editing,Videos,Graphics,Production 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Camtasia,Video Editing,Videos,Graphics,Production Hi. I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing.<br><br>Today I'll teach you how to edit your Camtasia clips together. <h3>Before you Edit Camtasia Clips</h3>I've already got a Camtasia project open with clips in my clip bin. You can open a project, or create a new one and import clips into your bin.<br><br>To edit clips in camtasia, make sure the timeline is visible. If you can't see the timeline click on the show timeline button. <br><h3>Camtasia Clip Timeline</h3>To edit clips click and drag them to the timeline. You can drag them one by one or highlight them all and drag to the timeline. <br><br>You can rearrange the order of clips on the timeline by clicking and dragging them. You can edit the length of clips by clicking on the edge of a clip and dragging it.<br><br>Once you're happy with the length you can drag the play circle to the beginning of the timeline in the preview window and hit the play button. That looks good. <h3>Add Transitions to your Camtasia Clips</h3>Now I'll add transitions to the clips. To add transitions I'll click on Edit, Transitions on the Task List. <br><br>If you can't see the task list click on View, Task List. This brings up the transitions window. Our timeline was replaced with the storyboard timeline. Don't worry, this is normal. The transitions window lists the available transition animations. If I doubleclick on them they preview in the preview window. There are simple transitions and more creative ones. <br><br>To apply a transition, click and drag it to the arrow between two clips. I'll drag the pixellate clips between the first two clips, and a gradient wipe between the second and third clips. <h3>Preview Camtasia Clip Edits</h3>To preview the transition, click on the small box between clips and hit play in the preview window. I like how those look. <br><br>When you're done hit finished. The transitions appear in my timeline between the clips. I'll move the play circle to the beginning in the preview window and hit play. <br><br>And that's how you edit clips together in Camtasia. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_6045 Fri, 21 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/nashville/Tour-of-Broadway-in-Nashville.htm The heart and soul of Nashville's country music scene is here on Broadway, from a historic print shop to corner buskers to world-renowned stages. nashville, tennessee, broadway 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. nashville, tennessee, broadway The heart and soul of Nashville's country music scene is here on Broadway, from a historic print shop to corner buskers to world-renowned stages. aboutvideo_5761 Wed, 09 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/losangeles/California-LA-Atwater-Village.htm Atwater-- a small town in the the big city. This up &amp; coming neighborhood boasts family-owned coffee shops, galleries and quirky boutiques. atwater, village, los, angeles, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. atwater, village, los, angeles, california Atwater-- a small town in the the big city. This up & coming neighborhood boasts family-owned coffee shops, galleries and quirky boutiques. aboutvideo_5582 Fri, 28 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/animation/Flash-8-Workspace.htm Don't know a stage from a paste board? Don't worry--check out this introduction to the Flash 8 workspace and see where everything is located. animation,flash 8,workspace,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. animation,flash 8,workspace,videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll talk about the Flash 8 workspace and show you where everything is laid out and what goes where. <h3>The Flash Workspace Toolbar</h3> When you create a new Flash document, you have a few things to look at. <br><br> All the way on the left is our toolbar that contains all the tools we'll employ. Here you have tools for creating shapes such as ovals and rectangles. <br><br> There are selection tools as well as drawing tools, erasers, view tools, and more. <h3>Use the Timeline to Create Keyframes</h3> On top we have the timeline, which shows all the frames in our animation, and which we use to specify when an action occurs. On the timeline, we'll create keyframes to change our animation over time. <h3>Watch Animation on the Stage</h3> In the middle we have the stage, which is what is being shown at our selected frame. When someone watches your animation, everything that happens on your stage is shown. <br><br> In this case, our very first frame. The stage is the white part. <h3>Place Movie Elements on the Paste Board</h3> The grey part around the stage is the paste board. You can place elements in your movie on the paste board, but they won't be visible until you move them onto the stage. <br><br> If I click on the zoom tool, and zoom out by holding the option key on my Mac keyboard, I can see more of the paste board. <h3>See Options in the Properties Panel</h3> On the bottom we have the properties panel. The properties will change depending upon what we've selected. <br><br> Let's go to the toolbar and choose the oval tool. The properties panel will change and show me my options for creating an oval. <br><br> I can click and drag out an oval. I can now go back to the properties panel and change the color. <br><br> If I go back to the toolbar and select the text tool for example, I now have new options. On the right we have additional panels, which include the library and color mixer. <h3>Minimize or Pull Up Panels</h3> If there is a panel that you want to minimize, simply click on the name and the panel will close up. There are other panels available, and to bring them up, go to 'Window' and click on one. <br><br> Here's one for color swatches. It pops up next to my color mixer, and I can just right click it and close it. <br><br> Let's open up another panel. I'll select 'Output.' I can take my mouse and click just to the left of the word 'output.' I can now drag this panel into another panel. <h3>Customize Your Workspace</h3> If you customize your workspace you can save it for future use. Go up to 'Window,' 'Workspace layout,' and select 'Save current.' Give it a name. <br><br> If you accidentally or deliberately change your workspace, you can load your custom workspace by going to 'Window,' 'Workspace layout,' and choosing the one you names. <br><br> Finally, on the very top we have all our menu options. If there's something you can't find, this is a good place to look for it. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_3506 Mon, 22 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/cars/Changing-Tires.htm You don't have to panic the next time you get a flat tire. Follow these simple steps and you'll be able to replace your flat tire with your spare quickly and easily. cars,tire change,tires,spare tires,flat tires,lug nuts,hub cap,car jack 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cars,tire change,tires,spare tires,flat tires,lug nuts,hub cap,car jack Hi, I'm Aaron Gold, your Guide to Cars at About.com<br><br>Oh, man - flat tire. There are two things you can do: If you're pregnant, or have a bad back, it's best to call someone to help, but if you're up to it, you can save some time and do it yourself.<br><h3>Prepare to Do a Tire Change</h3>If you're out on the road when you get a flat, be sure to pull over to a safe place, away from traffic, and on a flat, level, surface. Put the transmission in park if it's an automatic or reverse if it's a stick, and set the parking brake.<br><h3>Tire Change Essentials</h3>Cars come with everything you need to change a tire:<ul><li>A jack</li><li>Lug nut wrench</li><li>Spare Tire</li></ul>You may want to have a couple of other useful things:<ul><li>A pair of gloves</li><li>Large plastic garbage bag (to help keep your hands and clothes clean)</li><li>Set of wheel chocks</li></ul><h3>Tire Change</h3>Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire. If your car has a plastic wheel cover that covers the bolts, pry it off. On this Honda, the bolts go right through the wheel cover.<br>Loosen the bolts before you jack up the car. You may have to yank pretty hard.<br><br>Now, check the car owner's manual to make sure you know how to operate the jack and what the proper jacking points are. Be sure to position your car-jack under a jacking point to avoid damaging the car or creating a dangerous situation. I'll crank the jack just enough to get the flat tire off the ground. Notice I'm keeping my body away from any place where it could get crushed if the car falls off the jack.<br><br>Remove the lug nut bolts... and pull the wheel off.<br><br>For a full size spare, you may have to use the jack to raise the car a bit, then you can roll the spare into place, but these compact spares are light enough to lift into place. Tighten the lug nut bolts, using a diagonal pattern, to attach the spare.<br><br>Lower the car... and tighten the bolts again to assure the spare is set squarely on the car.<br><br>Put the flat-tire in the bag and you won't get your clothes dirty. In most cars, the flat-tire will fit into the tire well where your spare was. Rip a hole in the bag to tighten everything back down.<br><h3>After a Tire Change</h3>When you get on the road, please note, if you have to make a sudden swerve, the car may respond differently than it would with four regular tires. So be sure to observe spare-tire speed limits noted in the car owner's manual. Be sure to pull over and re-tighten your lug nut bolts after driving the car about 20 miles. Also get to a tire shop to replace the spare tire as soon as you can.<br><br>Thanks for watching. I'm Aaron Gold. To learn more, visit us on the web at Cars.about.com. Drive safely!<br> aboutvideo_4338 Wed, 23 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/Fruit-Tart-Recipe.htm A homemade fruit tart is a satisfying way to finish a meal. Save time in the kitchen by using a pre-made pie crust. fruit,fruit tart,baking,dessert,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. fruit,fruit tart,baking,dessert,recipes,videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make a fruit tart using a homemade filling and fresh mixed berries. <h3>Fruit Tart Ingredients</h3> For this recipe you will need:<ul> <li>refrigerated pie or tart crust</li> <li>3 1/4 cups mixed berries</li> <li>3 tablespoons apricot preserves</li> <li>5 tablespoons unsalted butter, room temperature</li> <li>1/3 cup sugar</li> <li>2 eggs</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon almond extract </li> <li>2 tablespoons dark rum </li> </ul> First, preheat the oven to 350 degrees. Place your baking sheet in there too, so it can be preheated as well. <h3>Make the Fruit Tart Filling</h3> Now, I'm going to make the filling. Place the butter and the sugar into a stand mixer. Using the beater attachment, cream them together. <br><br> Once combined, crack and add the eggs. Mix them together. Then add the almond extract and the rum. <h3>Bake the Fruit Tart</h3> Once everything is mixed in, the filling is ready. You can refrigerate the filling up for 4 days, or you can use it right away. <br><br> Next, take your pasty dough and lay it in a 9-inch tart pan. Then, fill the dough with the almond cream filling. <br><br> Take out your preheated baking sheet, and place the tart pan in the center. Bake the tart 15-20 minutes, or until the crust is golden brown. <h3>Prepare the Fruit Topping</h3> While the pan is cooking, prepare your fruit. You can use all of your favorite berries. <br><br> I'm going to use strawberries, blueberries, raspberries and blackberries. I'm also going to cut the strawberries into 1/4-inch slices to lay out on my tart. <h3>Make a Glaze for the Fruit Tart</h3> Also, we are going to cook the apricot preserves to make a glaze for the tart. Put the preserves and 1 teaspoon of water into a saucepan. Cook on medium heat until it looks like it has melted. <br><br> Then, strain the preserves to remove the lumps. We'll brush this over the berries at the end. <h3>Place Fruit on Top of the Tart</h3> When the tart is ready, remove the pan from the oven, and place the tart on a wire rack to cool for 5-10 minutes. <br><br> Once it's slightly cool, arrange the berries on top of the tart. I'm going to put out the strawberry slices around the edge, then have a row of blueberries, and put the raspberries and blackberries in the middle. <h3>Serve the Fruit Tart</h3> Now, brush the berries with the glaze for a nice, shiny finish. Serve with whipped cream for a tasty treat. Enjoy! <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6770 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/usedcars/Keeping-Your-Car-s-Resale-Valu.htm Learn what steps you can take to ensure the maximum value for your used car when it comes time to resell or trade-in, as well as how to keep your car running for as long as possible. resale value,used car value,auto depreciation,car maintenance 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. resale value,used car value,auto depreciation,car maintenance Hi, I'm Barbara Terry for About.com Autos. Let's discuss the ways to keep your car's resale value as high as you can so when you decide to sell it you'll get the most money out of it. <H3>Records for Used Car Value Reliability</H3> Never toss the maintenance records because the potential buyer will want to review them to make sure the car's maintenance was done on a timely basis. <H3>Paint and Used Cars</H3> Keep the car's color real. I would not suggest painting it turquoise, because when it comes time to sell it, you will limit the number of potential buyers. <H3>Cleanliness and Used Cars</H3> Sometimes we can't avoid eating in our cars, but keep in mind that food and drink spills will actually reduce the resale value. <H3>Maintenance and Used Cars</H3> Maintain your car inside and out by having regularly-scheduled maintenance. Also have it properly cleaned on a regular basis. When replacing your tires, you'll be better off in the long run by replacing all 4 at the same time instead of buying 2 for the front and 2 for the rear a couple of months later. <br/><br/>You should have your tires rotated and balanced on a regular basis for longer tread life. <br/><br/>Keep in mind that all cars depreciate over time. Have your expectations high but give them a reality check when pricing that used car. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at autos.about.com. aboutvideo_4457 Thu, 30 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/spreadsheets/Adjust-Tabs-in-Microsoft-Excel.htm Microsoft Excel tabs make organizing different data worksheets easy while keeping them in just one file. See how to format and manage the tabs in Excel. microsoft excel, tabs, worksheets, spreadsheets 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. microsoft excel, tabs, worksheets, spreadsheets Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'm going to help you manage your sheet tabs in Microsoft Excel. Sheet tabs enables you to create several different sheets with data and charts in one file. <h3>Find the Excel Tabs</h3> I'll open up an Excel document. At the bottom of each new document there are three tabs named Sheet 1, 2, and 3 respectively. I can click on any one of these tabs and it will take me to a new sheet. I can change the order of the tabs by selecting one and then dragging it to the end of the line. <h3>Hide the Excel Tabs</h3> To hide all of the tabs, go to 'tools' in the menu bar and then click 'options.' In the view tab, deselect 'sheet tabs' under 'window options.' You can also hide the tabs by clicking the vertical bar next the horizontal scroll bar and dragging it to the left. <h3>Format Individual Excel Tabs</h3> Now I'll deal with tabs individually. Select one of the tabs and then go up to 'format,' and then 'sheet.' Here you have a few options. You can hide the individual sheet by clicking 'hide' or you can change the background, tab color, or tab name. Select 'tab color.' Select a color from the pop-up window and then click 'OK.' <br><br> You can also make any changes by right-clicking any of the tabs. You can change the color, rename a tab, or delete it. To rename a tab, select 'rename' and then type in what you want in the space provided. You can also do this by going up to 'Insert' and then clicking 'worksheet or chart.' <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_5324 Fri, 28 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/heartdisease/Angioplasty.htm Balloon angioplasty opens arteries clogged from plaque buildup. Learn more about how this procedure works. balloon angioplasty, stenting, plaque, 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. balloon angioplasty, stenting, plaque, <h3>The Healthy Heart</h3> The heart is a beating muscle that continually pumps blood to the rest of the body. The coronary arteries supply the heart itself with the necessary oxygen and nutrients it needs to function effectively. <h3>Why Do Arteries Clog?</h3> Over time, fatty deposits called plaque can build up inside the arteries, clogging the passages and reducing the flow of blood. If the coronary arteries develop plaque, blood flow to the heart can be compromised. <h3>What Is Balloon Angioplasty?</h3> Balloon angioplasty is a procedure which opens arteries that have become narrowed or clogged from plaque buildup. <h3>What Happens During Balloon Angioplasty? </h3> During this procedure, a small incision is made in the thigh to gain access to the femoral artery. A guide wire is then inserted into the femoral artery and is threaded through the artery to the site of the blockage. <br><br> A catheter that is attached to a deflated balloon moves along the guide wire to the site of the blockage. When the balloon is inflated, it compresses the plaque against the arterial wall enlarging the opening of the artery. This enables blood to move normally through the artery. <h3>What Is a Stent?</h3> Oftentimes during angioplasty, a stent is inserted at the site of the blockage to help the artery from reclosing. A stent is a wire mesh tube placed around the deflated balloon catheter. When the catheter is guided to the blockage site and is inflated, the stent expands and adheres to the artery wall. The catheter and guide wire are then removed and the stent remains in place. <br><br> Both angioplasty and angioplasty with stenting may need to repeated if the plaque buildup returns. <br><br> Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_6949 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Apple-iMovie-to-iDVD-export.htm Export your edited iMovie videos into iDVD and you'll be all set to watch your completed videos on your home television set. Computing,Software,Apple iMovie,Apple iDVD,Export,Videos,DVD Encoding,DVDs 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Software,Apple iMovie,Apple iDVD,Export,Videos,DVD Encoding,DVDs Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll teach you how to export your movie from Apple iMovie to Apple iDVD to create your own DVD. <br><h3>Find iDVD in iMovie</h3>After you've completed your editing and have everything arranged on your timeline click on the iDVD icon on the right side. This brings up the iDVD Chapter Markers Window. <br><h3>iDVD Chapters in iMovie</h3>We'll add chapter markers before we export to iDVD. Chapter markers allow you to skip to different parts of your DVD just like in movie DVDs you buy at the store. In the timeline, drag the play head to the spot where you want to create a marker. Now I'll click the Add Chapter button. A thumbnail appears and asks for a chapter title. <br><br>I'll name this Scene 2. When you add a chapter marker it shows up on the timeline as a yellow diamond. <br><br>I'll move the play head a bit and hit the Add Chapter icon again. I'll name this Scene 3. You can add as many chapters as you want but they can't be too close to one another. <br><h3>Undo Chapters</h3>To delete a chapter marker, click on the thumbnail and hit the Remove Chapter icon. I want it so I'll go to Edit, Undo. <br><h3> Export from iMovie to iDVD</h3>Now I'll export to iDVD by clicking on the Create iDVD Project button. This opens up iDVD. When iDVD opened, it inserted my movie into a theme, which is just a template. <br><br>To change the template click on the Customize button and scroll down to find something you like. If you want to stop the motion of the DVD Template, click on the Motion button. <br><h3>Previewin your Movie</h3>To see what your DVD looks like, click the Preview button. <br><br>This brings up a virtual remote control. I can press Enter to play my movie and I can skip ahead to the chapters. I can click Menu to access the Main Menu. Once I'm satisfied I'll click the Preview button to close the virtual preview. <br><h3>Completing your Export</h3>And now I'll click the Burn button twice. Once to open it, and the second time to burn the DVD. My DVD tray popped up and I inserted a disc. And now my DVD is burning. <br><br>After it's finished, your disc ejects. iDVD asks if you're finished or want to burn another DVD. I'm finished and I'll hit done. And that's how you go from iMovie to iDVD to create a DVD movie. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_6870 Sun, 28 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/spreadsheets/Autosum.htm Learn how to use the sum and autosum functions in Microsoft Excel and you'll appreciate the efficiency of spreadsheets for dealing with data lists. You'll never use a calculator again! autosum,sum function,excel,spreadsheets 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. autosum,sum function,excel,spreadsheets Hi. I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I am going to show you how to use a powerful tool in Microsoft Excel, the sum function. This tool is very helpful for many tasks ranging from running a business to managing your personal finances.<br/><h3>Why Use Excel Sum Function?</h3>For this demonstration, I've created a list of food expenses from January to July. Instead of going to a calculator and typing in all these numbers excel can add them up for you. <br/><h3>Finding Excel Autosum Function</h3>First, I will click in the field next to the word total. I want my sum to go here. Now, if I go to this icon, called autosum, excel guesses that I want to add up all the cells above it. If you can't find this icon, go up to insert and click on function. This provides a list of all the possible functions. <br/><h3>Deciphering Excel Autosum Function</h3>Once I click on it some text pops up. It shows an equals sign, the word sum and then in parenthesis is B3:B10. What this means is that it is going to add up all the values in the cells ranging from B3 to B 10. If I hit return, I now have the total. If I want to delete that total I can just click on the cell and hit delete.<br/><h3>Sum vs. Autosum in Excel</h3>The autosum function is useful but not always what you want. Let us say I want to only calculate how much I spent from March to May. In this case, I have a few different options. If I click and highlight the values from March to June, and then click on the autosum button, I do get the sum total for just these three fields. However, it put the sum in the first available field below the numbers. Not where I want it to go. <br/><h3>Limiting Sum Inputs in Excel</h3>To get the sum of those three values in the right place, I am going to first click on the field where I want it to go. Now, next to the autosum button is a small arrow that I will click on. If I go down to sum and click on it the same formula and range appears as before. Regardless if I clicked on the autosum icon or the sum function in the drop down menu I can change which fields are calculated by clicking and dragging the fields I want. See how the range is now B5 to B7.<br/><br>But we are not done. Lets say that I actually want to add how much I spent every other month. I will first delete my total field, go back to the sum function, and instead of dragging, I will click on each of the fields I want to add together. Instead of a colon inbetween the cells, indicating a range of cells, we have each field listed and separated by an addition sign. If I hit return I get my total.<br/><br/>The Sum function is just one of many tools in Excel. Once you get used to the basics of this function, you can use it to determine everything from finances to school grades. Thanks for watching, for more information please visit us online at Computing.About.com<br/><br/> aboutvideo_5571 Tue, 11 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/php/Using-PHP-With-HTML.htm There are a couple ways to include HTML when coding PHP. Learn two options that work equally well, then decide which one makes the code more clear and concise for you. html, php, web, code, file 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. html, php, web, code, file Hi! I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I will show you how to use HTML when coding PHP. <h3>Begin a PHP File</h3> First let me open a new Notepad document. Go to 'file, save as' and give it a name, and make sure to add the extension .php <h3>Use Standard HTML</h3> There are different ways you can incorporate HTML. Let's start by just including the standard html tag, along with the title and body tags. Do not forget their end tags. I'll quickly create a paragraph tag with some text. You can add any HTML tags you like. <h3>Add in PHP Tags</h3> Now create a PHP tag with some code. I will type echo and, in quotes, This is my PHP text. I'll also add a semicolon so I can add more lines later. This is an easy way to use both HTML and PHP side by side. <h3>HTML Within PHP Code</h3> However, you can include HTML tags within your PHP code. This is convenient when you don't have long lines of HTML code you want to include. <br><br> Under my PHP echo code, I'll add another echo line. Within the quotes we can add more text - My PHP Header. We can put HTML tags directly within the quotes. I'll add a header tag. Don't forget to close the tag and end with a semicolon. <br><br> I will add another echo with, in quotes, an HTML break tag and a semicolon. I will copy and paste the code a few times and add a final echo with Goodbye in quotes <h3>View the HTML / PHP File</h3> Now I will save my file and upload it via FTP to my website. Let me open up my Web browser and, once I type in the URL of the file, we can see what we just coded. <br><br> Both ways of including HTML work equally well, it is just a matter of personal choice and what will make your code more clear and concise. Thanks for watching. For more information, visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4623 Fri, 30 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/windows/Share-Media-With-Media-Player.htm Using Windows Media Player, you can share files among a group of computers and easily access files regardless of where the media is stored. See how to share media files in Media Player. media, files, share, windows, media player 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. media, files, share, windows, media player Hi, I am Don Schechter for About.com Computing. I'm going to show you how to share media on Windows Media Player. When you share media among a group of computers, you can access your media or media on one computer regardless of where the media is stored. <h3>Start Windows Media Player</h3> To share media, be sure that all the computers on the network have Windows Vista and Windows Media Player installed and set up. Open up Windows Media Player. Your library will appear with your music options listed. <h3>Choose Media to Share</h3> Go up to the menu bar and select 'Library,' and then 'Media Sharing.' In the new window, click 'Settings.' Here you can choose what type of media you want to share. Then click 'OK.' <h3>Select Sharing Settings</h3> If you select 'find media that others are sharing,' this will allow your computer to share videos, pictures, and music with other computers. If you select 'share my media,' your media automatically is shared with all computers or users in the network. <h3>Connect and Share in Your Network</h3> Next select the network you would like to connect to. I'll select other users on this PC. To customize what you are sharing with each network, click 'customize.' You will see the same window that appeared when you clicked on 'Settings.' Select what type of media you would like the share. When you are done click 'OK' and then click 'OK to share.' <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_5767 Wed, 21 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/atlanta/Atlanta-s-Little-5-Points.htm If you're looking for fun and a little counter-culture, come to Little 5 Points, a &quot;bohemian jewel&quot; just outside Atlanta. little, five, 5, points, atlanta, georgia 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. little, five, 5, points, atlanta, georgia If you're looking for fun and a little counter-culture, come to Little 5 Points, a "bohemian jewel" just outside Atlanta. aboutvideo_4464 Wed, 13 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/google/Google-Desktop.htm Google Desktop is one way to quickly search for items on your desktop and on the Web. Learn how to install and customize this handy tool. Google Desktop,Google Gadgets,search,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Google Desktop,Google Gadgets,search,videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I'm going to show you how to install and run Google Desktop. <br><br> This program allows you to search for items very quickly on your desktop as well as on the Web. <h3>Download and Install Google Desktop</h3> To install Google Desktop, go to desktop.google.com. Click on 'agree' and 'download.' Click 'save.' When prompted, choose to restart your computer now. <br><br> You can also customize Google desktop for personal preferences, like gmail and your personal homepage. Next, click 'enable advanced features.' Then click 'yes,' 'enable sidebar.' <h3>Search for Files on Your Desktop</h3> Once installed, go to the Google Desktop homepage to search for any file on your desktop. <br><br> You can get to this page by clicking 'desktop' above the search box on google.com, or double-clicking on the Google Desktop icon on the lower right hand corner of your task bar. <br><br> If you want to search for a file, for example, a Word document, type in a keyword from the document title and click 'search desktop.' <br><br> I will type in alumni list, and here's the result. The results will pop up just as they do when you're using Google to search on the Web. <h3>Customize Google Gadgets</h3> Google Desktop comes with Google Gadgets, which are interactive mini-applications, such as news, weather, and photos. They are organized into a sidebar on your computer screen. <br><br> You can move the different parts around your desktop or up and down the sidebar by clicking and dragging each application to where you want it to go. <br><br> You can personalize your gadgets by moving your mouse to the upper right hand corner of the specific application until a little gray bar appears. <h3>Use Google Gadgets</h3> Click the middle menu button, and you can choose what you want to adjust from the pulldown menu. You can even write to-do lists or notes in the sidebar. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6776 Sun, 21 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/4wheeldrive/Understanding-Sticker-Price.htm Learn how to interpret and understand sticker price to get the best possible value when it's time to purchase a new car. New Cars,car buying,car purchasing,sticker price,warranties,autos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. New Cars,car buying,car purchasing,sticker price,warranties,autos Hi, I'm Barbara Terry for About.com Autos. When understanding the sticker price the manufacturers always have a base price, then they add to that with the options and add-ons. <br/><H3>New Car Purchase- Which Options are Valuable?</H3>Keep in mind that some manufacturers have options and add-ons that they already include in the base price. I suggest doing due diligence and researching that exact make and model that you want when you're buying those extra options on your car- like the extended warranty and under-carriage protection, paint protection, and all the other add-ons offered in the F&I department (finance department). It may be better to add them into the total finance price of the vehicle instead of weeks later taking money out of your pocket to add options that did not come with your car. <br/><H3>Test Driving for Better New Car Purchases</H3>Test drive the auto to see what is best for your budget and to your liking. The warranty is also so important to keep you from going broke on your auto repairs in the future. So, keep that in mind when making your final decision. <br/><H3>How to Negotiate your New Car Purchase</H3>When negotiating, I remember when I purchased my first new car. I shopped around, I went from one dealership to the next, then I went home. As early as that afternoon, the dealerships started calling me with incentives and better prices on the cars I looked at. I then figured out that the way to get the best price on the cars I looked at was to get 1 dealership against the next. <br/><br/>There is a limit as to how much a dealership can come down off the sticker price, so ask to see the invoice to the car. If you feel good about the final price, then make the purchase. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Autos.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_5868 Sat, 26 Jan 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/losangeles/Bergamot-Station-Arts-Center.htm Bergamot Station in Santa Monica houses more than 50 art galleries and is a destination for art lovers around the world. los, angeles, bergamot, arts, center, california, santa, monica 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. los, angeles, bergamot, arts, center, california, santa, monica Bergamot Station in Santa Monica houses more than 50 art galleries and is a destination for art lovers around the world. aboutvideo_4584 Fri, 29 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/kosherfood/Kosher-Noodle-Kugel.htm A sweet dairy dish, noodle kugel is a tasty way to cap off any dinner. Watch how to make kosher noodle kugel at home. noodel kugel,passover recipes,kosher food videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. noodel kugel,passover recipes,kosher food videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make kosher noodle kugel. <h3>Kosher Noodle Kugel Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 container (16 oz.) cottage cheese</li> <li>1 container (16 oz.) sour cream</li> <li>1 cup sugar</li> <li>5 eggs, beaten</li> <li>1/2 cup (1 stick) margarine, melted</li> <li>1 tablespoon imitation vanilla</li> <li>1 package (12 oz.) broad egg noodles, cooked, rinsed and drained (kosher for Passover) <li>1 tablespoon cinnamon and sugar</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Noodles</h3> Put on a pan of boiling water and heat noodles as directions say, 8 to10 minutes. Then preheat the oven to 350 degrees. <h3>Combine the Kugel Ingredients</h3> Mix the cottage cheese, sour cream, sugar, the eggs, margarine, and the vanilla until well blended. If you'd like, it's common to also add raisins to noodle kugel. <br><br> When the noodles are done, drain them and then stir the noodles into the mixture. <h3>Bake the Kosher Noodle Kugel</h3> Spoon everything into a 13x9-inch baking dish and sprinkle with cinnamon sugar. <br><br> Bake 50 minutes to 1 hour, or until the center is set. Cool at least 10 minutes before cutting to serve. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6307 Mon, 11 Aug 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/jobsearch/Office-Fashion-Dos-and-Donts.htm Does your office style border on the wild side, or are you the picture of professionalism? No matter how casual your office is, some things you just shouldn't wear to work. Find out the dos and don'ts of dressing for work. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Hey guys - Jonathon Stewart here for About.com. So, you've got a job - if you're lucky, it's one that allows you to wear whatever you want to work. But, for the scores of millions of Americans who punch a card at the office, attire is not usually quite so laid back. (Unless you work at Google.) Try these office dos and don'ts on for size, and you're guaranteed to look your best, without getting fired. Check it out: Before you put anything on, it's probably best to check out your company-specific dress code. A good number of offices are business casual, but rules can vary, so before you get into a tangle with a supervisor, be sure you know the company line. Which hopefully is something like, "Heck, every day's Friday here!" Oh wait, that was a restaurant I once worked in. Hm. As a general rule, avoiding the following is probably best: sweat pants, sneakers, t-shirts, sloppy items like ripped jeans, revealing items like spaghetti straps, strapless tops, or tank tops, flip flops, cheap suits, or anything polyester. You should probably also avoid baseball hats and bandanas, or any combination thereof. Instead, stick to cleaned and pressed pants and button down shirts, skirts no shorter than just above-the-knee, v-neck sweaters, shoes that cover both your heel and toes, and camisoles - as long as they're in good taste and worn under a jacket. For women, that is. I personally never look great in a camisole. Jeans are somewhere on the middle ground - if you do opt for them, make sure they're straight-legged, dark, and absent any "wear lines" or other markings. Many companies only allow jeans on casual Friday - just remember, casual Friday in any company does not equal Slobby McSlobberson Friday. It's also best to avoid wearing any strongly scented perfume or cologne, unless your office is in Paris. As for facial hair, it's generally discouraged in the office, but if you insist on a stash or a beard, make sure they are neatly trimmed, and make you distinguished. Alright... I'm shavin' it. Thanks for watching - to learn more, visit us on the web at style.about.com. aboutvideo_3780 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktoppub/Business-Cards-in-MS-Publisher.htm Nothing makes you look quite as professional as your own businss cards. Learn how you can create your own set with Microsoft Publisher. Computing,Software,Microsoft Publisher,Business Cards,Small Business,Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Software,Microsoft Publisher,Business Cards,Small Business,Design Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll show you how to create your own business cards using Microsoft Publisher. This is a great tool for any small business. <br><h3>Finding Business Card Tool</h3>First open Microsoft Publisher. Now click Publications for Print. You may also start from scratch by clicking Blank Publication. But I will use one of Publisher's designs. In the subcategories find Business Cards. <br><h3>Designing your Business Cards</h3>Now you can choose from their designs. Remember that you can always change the color schemes and fonts if you don't like the ones they have provided. Just double-click the one you want to open it up. <br><br>Notice the options in the left sidebar. You can include a generic logo they have provided. You can also change the orientation of the business card. It does change how the design is set up. You can also choose to print multiple copies on one sheet. <br><h3>Business Card Font</h3>Now I would like to change the font because it is hard to read. I'll use the font schemes so all the fonts will look good together. Click font schemes on the left sidebar. Click any of the options to see them applied to your business card. <h3>Business Card Colors</h3>I'd like to change the color scheme. Click Color Schemes on the left sidebar. Click any of the options to see what they would look like with your design. If none of the color schemes suit your needs, click the Custom Color Scheme link at the bottom of the screen. A box will appear where you can choose your colors for what publisher calls an accent. <br><h3>Deleting</h3>To delete a text box or picture simply click the object and press Delete.<br><h3>Business Card Graphics</h3>You can also insert pictures, clip art or your own logo from your computer. Just go to the picture icon and choose Picture from File. Find your logo or picture and click OK.<br><br>Now you can fix the size and placement in your document. To adjust the image, use the Picture toolbar. <br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_6886 Thu, 15 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Windows-Movie-Maker-transition.htm Smooth out new scene and clip starts in your video projects with the help of Windows Movie Maker transitions including dissolves and other effects. transitions,movie maker,dissolve,fade,video 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. transitions,movie maker,dissolve,fade,video Hi. I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. Today I'll teach you how to add transitions in Windows Movie Maker.<br/><h3>Show Timeline</h3>First open up your movie project. I've already placed clips on the timeline. If you can't see the timeline, and see the storyboard instead, click on the Show Timeline button. Adding dissolves and other effects helps smooth transitions between clips in your videos. <br/><h3>Transition Options</h3>Next to the Collections button is a drop-down menu. Click it and select Video Transitions. Here is a list of various transitions you can use. One of the useful tools in Movie Maker is that it will show you what each transition does. To see what a transition will look like, click on a transition and click Play in the preview window. If the preview window is too big or too small click and drag it. <br/><h3>Transition Types</h3>Some transitions can be used for artistic expression while others denote the passage of time. A fade is the most basic transition and implies time elapsing between the events in the clips. I'll scroll down and find a transition I like.<br><h3>Inserting Transitions</h3>To add this transition, I can drag and drop it between two clips. The shaded area shows the transition. In the timeline there is a transition track. There is our new transition. If I go to the left edge of this transition, I can trim the length. <br/><h3>Transition Editing</h3>If you want to replace a transition with another one, all you have to do is drag and drop a new one over it. If you want to delete a transition, click on it and hit the Delete button. <br/><br/>Transitions can be fun to use as well as make a movie look more professional.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_6784 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/autorepair/Applying-a-ClearCoat-Protector.htm Learn how to apply a clear coat protector to your car's paint to prevent fading and maintain resale value. Paint Job,Autos,Car Paint,Resale Value 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Paint Job,Autos,Car Paint,Resale Value Hi, I'm Barbara Terry for About.com Autos. By spending an hour or so applying a clear coat protector to your car's paint, you'll not only prevent premature fading, prevent oxidation, you'll also maintain your car's resale value, and of course, you'll keep your car's paint looking spiffy.<br/><H3>Protecting your Car's Paint Job- Products</H3>After using many different clear coat protectors, I found that my favorite product is the one put out by Metro Guardian, and it's really simple to use. <br/><H3>Protecting your Car Paint- Applying Product</H3>Grab a rag, and to apply the product you're going to rub it on to a panel of your vehicle. I would recommend doing 1 panel at a time and repeating the whole process throughout the vehicle. Make sure you get plenty of product onto the paint surface, rub it in really good, it might take some elbow grease, and wait until it dries to a nice haze, or until you can see the color of your paint through the product. <br/><br/>Then we're going to take a clean, soft cloth, an old t-shirt is really good to use- it's my favorite, and with a little bit more elbow grease, we're just going to wipe it off, very thoroughly.<br/><br/>Always allow the product to dry at least 24 hours before washing and waxing your vehicle. The product will leave a deep seal on your paint while forming a high-gloss finish that will actually repel water and other contaminants. <br/><br/>I absolutely love what it does to my car's surface. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Autos.About.com.<br/><br/> aboutvideo_4656 Thu, 14 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Evan-Almighty-Interviews.htm Wanda Sykes and John Michael Higgins play a couple of assistants to Evan Baxter (Steve Carell) in the Universal Pictures comedy Evan Almighty. Sykes and Higgins love to improv and director Tom Shadyac allowed them plenty of freedom to play. evan almighty, wanda sykes, john michael higgins, red carpet interview 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. evan almighty, wanda sykes, john michael higgins, red carpet interview Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the World Premiere of <i>Evan Almighty</i>.<p> <h3>Wanda Sykes ('Rita')</h3><p> <b>I read in the production notes that it took you a while to convince you to sign onto this. Was that true?</b><p> Wanda Sykes: "That's true."<p> <b>Why?</b><p> Wanda Sykes: "Well at first when I read the script you could just tell like that the character Rita really wasn't fully developed. I mean, you could just lift her right out of the script and it wouldn't change anything. So I was like, 'There's nothing here.' And at the meeting with Tom Shadyac I shared my thoughts and he totally agreed. He said, 'You understand, that's why we want you for this part because I know you could bring so much more to it. You would make it an integral part of this movie.' He was so passionate about this project. He's like, 'It's going to be huge and it's going to be so big! And if it doesn't work, I'm going to be in a lot of trouble.'"<p> <b>He convinced you it was going to be big but at what point during the production did you realize just how huge it was going to be?</b><p> Wanda Sykes: "It must have been when we got to Charlottesville and walking up and seeing this gigantic ark. That's very humbling. I was like, 'Okay, so we're not the stars of this movie. Here's the star, ladies and gentleman.'"<p> <b>Did you have to work with any of the live animals?</b><p> Wanda Sykes: "No, no."<p> <b>That's something you were very happy about?</b><p> Wanda Sykes: "Very happy about! There was never a day I was like, 'I want to work with the birds.' I never. Never."<p> <b>You improv'd all of your part?</b><p> Wanda Sykes: "Pretty much."<p> <b>Did he give you any guidelines on where you couldn't go?</b><p> Wanda Sykes: "Not really. I mean, I knew they were trying to do a family movie and we were going to keep it clean. That was pretty much it. But I didn't feel handcuffed or any hindrance because of that."<p> <b>Were you hesitate about signing onto a spin-off?</b><p> Wanda Sykes: "No, not really. No, because this was such a far stretch from the original <i>Bruce Almighty</i>. And as long as you've got Morgan Freeman playing God, you've got a movie. What is there to worry about, you know?"<p> <h3>John Michael Higgins ('Marty')</h3><p> <b>You love to improve so how much were you allowed free rein in this?</b><p> John Michael Higgins: "I never saw a script. If there was one I wish they'd gave it to me. No, Steve improvises a lot. I do, too, Wanda, Jonah [Hill]&#133; If they gave us a script it wouldn't have mattered. We're all just said what we wanted to anyway, and I think Tom [Shadyac] basically likes it that way. You get material that way. It sort of loosens things up."<p> <b>Did he tell you when you guys were going the wrong way with it or did he just let the cameras roll?</b><p> John Michael Higgins: "Yeah, he thinks of it as an editing thing. You just throw a lot of arrows at the target and then you go back later and cut out all the unfunny stuff, which is about 90%."<p> <b>It's got to be a higher percentage than that. You always crack me up.</b><p> John Michael Higgins: "Steve has a much higher percentage than I do. That's why he's the star. Almost everything that comes out of him works really well."<p> <b>What's it like working with him?</b><p> John Michael Higgins: "Well Steve is one of the nicest&#133;he really is one of the nicest people in Hollywood, honestly. I don't know where he came from. He should really be thrown out of Hollywood. He shouldn't be here. He's too nice. He'll never make it. He'll never be a star. Look at this. But he's a dream and I'll work with him anytime."<p> <b>Were you at all leery about signing onto something that's a sequel of a super successful movie?</b><p> John Michael Higgins: "Yeah, I guess I was. But when I saw Steve was involved and Tom, who I trust implicitly, I thought it'll be great. And it is great. It's really good."<p> <b>And you've got <i>Fred Claus</i> with Vince Vaughn coming up too.</b><p> John Michael Higgins: "I suppose there will be a sequel to that. Well, God willing. Yeah, that's coming up soon. That was a big movie, too."<p> <b>Is that another one where you just get to riff?</b><p> John Michael Higgins: "Yeah, we just let it go. Vince you know, you can't keep him on script. That's why we love him."<p> <h3>More Coverage of <i>Evan Almighty</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://video.about.com/movies/Evan-Almighty-Cast-Interviews.htm">Steve Carell, Tom Shadyac, Johnny Simmons and Graham Phillips Interviews</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/evanalmighty/ig/Evan-Almighty-Photos/index.htm"><i>Evan Almighty</i> Movie Photos</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/evanalmighty/"><i>Evan Almighty</i> Trailers, Poster and Credits</a></li><p> aboutvideo_3624 Sat, 27 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/presentationsoft/Converting-PowerPoint-to-word.htm Have you been frustrated trying to switch or combine Microsoft Office programs? Learn the settings and steps to convert a PowerPoint Presentation to a Word document, preserving both layout and content. PowerPoint,Word,convert powerpoint to word, power point, microsoft word 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. PowerPoint,Word,convert powerpoint to word, power point, microsoft word Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br/><br/>Today I'll show you how to convert your Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation to a Microsoft Word document so you can print it out for editing, approval from your boss, or for notes. <br/><h3>Export PowerPoint Deck</h3>First open PowerPoint and open the presentation you want to convert by going to File, Open and choosing your project. Then go to File, Send to, and choose Microsoft Office Word. <br/><h3>Choose PowerPoint Export Layout</h3>A window will appear with five different options for the layout of your presentation in Word. Choose which layout best suits your needs. If you have speaker notes, which are hidden text fields in your Power Point presentation, they will show if you choose a layout with the wavy lines. <br/><br/>If you choose a layout with slides and straight lines there will be space for someone to make comments or take notes on your slides. You can also choose to just display your outline. An outline view is easy if you just need to see the information on the slides. I ll choose blank lines next to slides.<br/><h3>Pasting Options for Converting PowerPoint to Word</h3>At the bottom of the window there are two options for pasting methods. You can just paste which will create a document in the style you've chosen above. Or you can choose Paste Link. This feature allows your Word document to update next time you open it if the presentation is edited in PowerPoint. It's great if you plan on making multiple drafts. <br/><br/>Click OK when you're done. Your presentation will open up in Word. I can type in the blank space, print it, save it and email it. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Computing.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_4353 Tue, 27 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/kosherfood/Kosher-Rugelach.htm Add a sweet treat to the end of your meal by making homemade rugelach. This dessert pastry is filled with a cinnamon, sugar, walnuts, and raisins. rugelach,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. rugelach,videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make kosher rugelach. <h3>Kosher Rugelach Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>3 cups all-purpose flour</li> <li>2 sticks cubed unsalted butter</li> <li>8 ounces cubed cream cheese</li> <li>1/3 cup sour cream</li> <li>1/2 cup white sugar</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon salt</li> <li>1 tablespoon ground cinnamon</li> <li>1 cup finely chopped walnuts</li> <li>1/2 cup chopped raisins</li> <li>milk</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Kosher Rugelach Dough</h3> First, prepare a food processor with a chopping or dough blade. Next, place the cream cheese, butter, and sour cream in the mixer. Pulse this together until its creamy. <br><br> Then add the flour and the salt. Pulse again until the mixture pulls away from the sides as it blends. Use the dough function on your mixture, if you have one. <h3>Store and Chill the Rugelach Dough</h3> Take out the blade and scoop out 1/4 of the mixture. For easy storage, place the dough into a plastic bag and then shape the dough into round disc. Do this with all the dough, so you have four bags. <br><br> This dough also freezes well. Wrap each disk in plastic and chill 2 hours, or up to 2 days. <h3>Combine the Rugelach Filling</h3> In a mixing bowl, combine the chopped walnuts, finely chopped raisins, sugar, and cinnamon. There are many varieties of rugaleh. You can add brown sugar or even chocolate chips in the filling. <h3>Add Filling to the Dough</h3> Taking one disc out of the fridge, and roll it into a 9-inch circle. Keep the other disks chilled until you are ready to roll them. <br><br> Now add the filling. Sprinkle the sugar and nut mixture all around the dough. Then, lightly press it down into the dough. <h3>Cut and Wrap the Rugelach Dough</h3> With chef's knife or pizza cutter, cut each round into 12 wedges. Roll wedges from wide to narrow, you will end up with point on outside of cookie. Some people like to add fruit jams to the dough before adding the filling to make another variation. <br><br> Instead of a circle, you can also wrap the dough like a jelly roll. Then, cut the roll into small pieces. <h3>Chill the Kosher Rugelach Dough</h3> Place the rugelach on foil-lined baking sheets and chill for around 20 minutes. This will help prevent the shape of the dough from falling apart while cooking. <br><br> Preheat oven to 350 degrees F (180 degrees C). <h3>Bake the Kosher Rugelach</h3> After the rugelach are chilled, brush with milk and sprinkle some extra cinnamon and sugar on top. <br><br> Bake them in the center rack of your oven for about 20 minutes, until lightly golden. Cool on wire racks. Serve and enjoy! <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5926 Fri, 21 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/nashville/Tour-of-East-Nashville.htm Nashville owes its reputation as &quot;Music City USA&quot; in large part to the hard-working musicians on the east side who are fueled by great beer and cool bars. nashville, east, tennessee 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. nashville, east, tennessee Nashville owes its reputation as "Music City USA" in large part to the hard-working musicians on the east side who are fueled by great beer and cool bars. aboutvideo_6946 Sat, 27 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/export-your-camtasia-project.htm Learn how to export your Camtasia projects into Quicktime movies for easy sharing with colleagues and friends. Computing,Programs,Software,Camtasia,Export,Quicktimes,Videos,Graphics 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Camtasia,Export,Quicktimes,Videos,Graphics Hi. I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll teach you how to your Camtasia projects into a movie. <br><h3>Choose a Camtasia Project to Export</h3>I've already got a Camtasia project open with clips on my timeline. You can create a new project and import clips to put on a timeline for exporting. <br><h3>Camtasia Export Settings</h3>To export my footage I'll go to File, Produce Video As. <br><h3>Camtasia Export and Production Wizard</h3>This brings up the Production Wizard window. You have a couple choices.<br><br>If you click recommend my production settings Camtasia automates the export process by asking you questions on what you want to export too.<br><br>You can select custom production profile and create your own export settings.<br><br>I'll click on MOV since I want to export a Quicktime movie, and I'll click Next. <br><h3>Camtasia Export Encoding Options</h3>The Quicktime encoding options windows comes up. I'll click on Quicktime options to adjust settings.<br><br>I'll click settings, and change the compression type to H264. Frame rate on Current, Keyframes on Automatic, and I'll raise the Compressor Type to High.<br><br>Encoding quality is set to Best quality, Data rate, Automatic, and I'll click OK. And I'll click OK again.<br><br>I'll click size, select custom under dimensions, and I'll type in my screensize, 1280 by 1024 and click OK.<br><br>I find it useful to export at fullscreen in case I need to zoom in when making tutorials. I'll click Next, and click Largest Video Size and click Next. <br><br>On the video options screen I'll leave all the settings unchecked and click next. I wont change marker options and click next instead. <br><h3>Additional Camtasia Export Settings</h3>I'll name this screen fullsize, I'll click the Browse icon and choose my desktop and hit save. <br><br>I'll uncheck Organize Produced Files Into Subfolders. I'll click Show Production Results, and also check Play Video After Production. And Ill click Finish. <br><br>It takes a little time to render so be patient. And there's our exported file. I'll hit the play button. I'll close it and hit finish when I'm done.<br><h3>Camtasia Export for Web</h3>If you want to export at a web friendly size you can follow these steps change the custom dimensions to 320 by 240, or whatever size you wish.<br><br>And that's how you export in Camtasia. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_6680 Thu, 03 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Ron-Perlman-on-Hellboy-2.htm Ron Perlman reunites with Guillermo del Toro and the rest of the 'Hellboy' cast for another round of adventures featuring the cigar-chomping hero in 'Hellboy II: The Golden Army.' 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the Los Angeles Film Festival and Universal Pictures' World Premiere of <i>Hellboy II: The Golden Army</i>.<p> <h3>Ron Perlman ('Hellboy')</h3><p> <b>So how much fun is it to get back into him again?</b><p> Ron Perlman: "So much fun. So much fun, it's not even putting into wordable &#150; if that's a sentence."<p> <b>Whoa, that's a lot of fun.</b><p> Ron Perlman: "That's a lot of fun. I wish everybody, especially the real dudes, could get to play Hellboy like at least for a day. It's so much fun."<p> <b>Is it easier this time because you don't have to go back and tell the origin story so you just get to get right into it? Is that more freeing for you?</b><p> Ron Perlman: "It's a very complex scenario this time around. I mean, the groundwork has been laid. The world has been set. The table has been set, but the ante has been raised significantly in the second film. The action is bigger. The stakes are higher, and the relationship between our two lovebirds &#150; Hellboy and Liz &#150; is on the rocks."<p> <b>Is it nice to actually have more of the relationship story and get into that a little deeper?</b><p> Ron Perlman: "It's nice to see a guy who's been charged with saving humanity having to do it in a completely compromised and drunken state."<p> <b>That's always fun.</b><p> Ron Perlman: "Because he's being screwed around by this chick in a big way."<p> <b>The fans loved the first film so you guys set the bar so high. How tough was it when you're reading that script to go, "Yeah, it is going to top it. We are going to satisfy everybody out there?</b><p> Ron Perlman: "You put your faith in Guillermo del Toro and you can't buy a better stock in the world. I mean, you know, there's Google and then there's Guillermo del Toro. You want to invest in this guy, and you want to just completely try to get on his team and take the greatest ride of your life. You're always in good hands and you never have to worry about will it be good or bad. You know it's going to be at least interesting and imminently watchable. We just bask in his glow."<p> <b>You've worked with him so many times now. How have you seen him evolve over the years as a filmmaker?</b><p> Ron Perlman: "He's basically the exact same guy I met back in 1990. The exact same guy. The only thing that changes is the canvass that he chooses to paint on. He keeps going back and doing smaller works like <i>Devil's Backbone</i> and <i>Pan's Labyrinth</i>. And then every once in a while he stretches out and does a big old studio comic book movie. The circumstances change, Guillermo remains true to his original aesthetic and intellect and passion."<p> <b>And <i>Hellboy 3</i>? You're ready for that one?</b><p> Ron Perlman: "Fingers crossed."<p> <b>But you're ready, right? You'll be back for it?</b><p> Ron Perlman: "Well, you know, if I'm not in a walker by then."<p> <b>Maybe it'll be less than four years until we get to the next one.</b><p> Ron Perlman: "This is my daughter, Blake."<p> <b>You're gorgeous by the way.</b><p> Ron Perlman: "She's making her film debut here in <i>Hellboy 2</i>."<p> <b>Are you really? Who are you playing?</b><p> Blake Perlman: "I have a little role as the reporter. There's a big action sequence where Hellboy gives himself away and that's me. You'll see me in there, speckled."<p> <b>Have you always wanted to be an actress?</b><p> Blake Perlman: "Always, all my life. I'm a singer and a songwriter so I just finished an album, actually, now so that's my focus. But I love to act and I love to kind of learn from the best."<p> <b>Exactly. So more collaboration between the two of you in another project that's not a <i>Hellboy</i>?</b><p> Ron Perlman: "Right now we're going to collaborate on a bag of popcorn."<p> <h3>More on <i>Hellboy II: The Golden Army</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/hellboy2/ig/Hellboy-2-Photos/index.htm"><i>Hellboy II: The Golden Army</i> Photos</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/hellboy2/"><i>Hellboy II: The Golden Army</i> Credits, Trailer, Interviews and Poster</a></li><br> aboutvideo_4299 Sat, 17 Mar 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/cocktails/Ginger-Sour-Recipe.htm The combination of sweet and sour in this beverage is crowned by the refreshing taste of ginger and vodka. Learn how to mix a ginger sour. cocktail videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cocktail videos Hi, I'm Sam from Pete's Candy Store in New York City for About.com food, and today I'm going to show you how to make a ginger sour. <h3>Ginger Sour Ingredients</h3> For this you're going to need:<ul> <li>1 1/2 ounces of citron vodka</li> <li>1/2 an ounce of lemon juice</li> <li>1/2 an ounce of simple syrup</li> <li>depending on how much ginger you like, 3 thumbnail sized pieces</li> </ul> <h3>Muddle the Ginger</h3> Starting off with a rocks or old-fashioned glass, add your ginger, and then your going to want to muddle that, just breaking it up a little bit. <h3>Mix the Ginger Sour</h3> Next, your citron vodka, and your juice and simple syrup. Add ice, shake. That's how you make a ginger sour. Thanks for watching. To learn more visit us at food.about.com. <br><br> <b>About the Ginger Sour:</b> The combination of sweet and sour in this beverage is crowned by the refreshening taste of ginger and vodka. aboutvideo_6473 Tue, 26 Feb 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Jon-Favreau-Iron-Man-Interview.htm Iron Man director Jon Favreau showed off a never-before-screened batch of clips from Iron Man to the 2008 Wonder Con crowd and, of course, they went absolutely crazy. The film version of Iron Man is one of the most anticipated movies of 2008. Jon Favreau, Interview, Iron Man 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Jon Favreau, Interview, Iron Man Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2008 San Francisco Wonder Con.<p> <h3>Director Jon Favreau (<i>Iron Man</i>)</h3><p> <b>The fan reaction out there &#150; they love every single little bit. But you can't feed it to them all at the same time, right?</b><p> Jon Favreau: "I guess not. I mean, I can't gauge it. When you're out there with whatever it is &#150; 4 or 5 thousand people &#150; it's just a wall of humanity."<p> <b>Can you see anything?</b><p> Jon Favreau: "You can't really see much. You can see the front row where they're asking you questions. But you can't hear your own voice because it's such a big hall and the acoustics aren't great. You just try and put on a good show for them. The tendency with this kind of stuff is to show the minimal amount that you can because a lot of it ends up online. It gets bootlegged, it gets ripped. But with a movie like <i>Iron Man</i> where people don't know that much about it &#150; or at least they didn't, now they do thanks to the fans &#150; I kind of feel like they're my big lifeline so I want to make sure that they're happy. I want to make sure that they're supportive. I want to make sure that they feel like I'm looking out. If they're going to sit in the rain and come out and wait in line and sit in this hall, I don't think they just want to hear a talking head answering questions. And so I try and pull as much together footage-wise as I can. And I think it's only good for the movie. I think people talk about it and that talk spreads, and now the mainstream media cares about this movie. But they didn't before Comic Con, and these are that same people. This is that same crowd, so I feel like you've got to give them a little something. At least let them see it first, you know what I mean?"<p> <b>This brings up a good point. You're talking about these fans that actually brought <i>Iron Man</i> up. People didn't know it before. I didn't know it before. I don't know the story; I only know what you tell me. So am I going to understand what you're telling me or do I need to know a backstory?</b><p> Jon Favreau: "You don't need to know about <i>Iron Man</i> going in. There's two different challenges. One is with the people who know <i>Iron Man</i>. Are you doing it right? Is Robert the right guy &#150; Robert Downey Jr &#150; the right guy to play him? Am I the right guy to direct him? I've never directed a superhero movie. I've done <i>Elf</i> and <i>Zathura</i> and <i>Made</i>. They don't really line up in a way that seems logical. So I think the onus is on me to say, 'Hey, this franchise is in good hands. This is a character that you love and if I screw up, you're going to have to wait a while probably to see somebody else take another crack at him.' People have been waiting a long time. But the technology is there. I think the cast is there and the passion is there, so we wanted to show that. And here you show longer scenes than you would on a trailer where it's, "Cut, cut, cut, half-second, two second, half-second, half-second, one second, boom, boom, boom. That looks like a cool movie to go to this summer.' In this crowd, you let the scenes play a little bit more. You show some cut footage, even if it's not totally done yet. They're very forgiving of that. They want to see the tone and the mood, so we showed them a little bit of that.<p> But if you don't know <i>Iron Man</i>, this introduces you to Iron Man. At the beginning of the movie there is no Iron Man. There is Tony Stark. You get to know him. You get him pretty quick, thanks to Robert Downey Jr. You show a day in his life. You show him get taken into captivity and you show how he develops in the most rudimentary way the beginnings of the Iron Man suit and why. And then you see it grow into a passion and an obsession and an alter ego for him. You'll understand it."<p> <b>Were the comic books as funny as this is? Every clip was cracking me up.</b><p> Jon Favreau: "There's humor in it. I think a lot of it is I just like humor. I like watching it in films. And I like to be funny in movies. But I know like in Tarantino films, those aren't comedies but I certainly appreciate the humor in them. I think tension gives a wonderful opportunity for humor so you always have to find the humor, I think, especially in serious circumstances.<p> I think it's true to the books in that Marvel always had an irreverent quality to them. Some of the adaptations haven't had that; it's been very earnest. But Marvel was more a reaction to the more earnest like Superman-type characters, the very stoic, iconic, flawless characters. The Marvel guys are the guys with problems. They're living in New York City. They all knew each other. They were human, they were flawed. And certainly in the case of Tony Stark, they had a little bit of a swagger. It's a little tongue and cheek. The stakes are never betrayed. It's never presented in a way where it's not life or death or not real, but the attitude definitely has a different spin to it."<p> <h3>More on <i>Iron Man</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/ironman/a/ironmanrd072807.htm">Interview with Robert Downey Jr</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/ironman/a/ironmanth072907.htm">Terrence Howard Interview</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/ironman/a/ironmangp072807.htm">Interview with Gwyneth Paltrow</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/ironman/"><i>Iron Man</i> Photos, Credits, Trailer, Interviews, and Poster</a></li><p> aboutvideo_6764 Fri, 26 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Using-the-clone-tool-in-photos.htm Would your pictures be perfect if you could just remove one or two blemishes? Well, with the Clone Tool in Adobe Photoshop, you can be your own professional air-brusher in just a few steps. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Air-brush,Graphic Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Air-brush,Graphic Design Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. Today I'll teach you how to correct facial blemishes using the clone tool in Photoshop.<br/><br/>First, open up photoshop. Click on file, select open, and select your picture to open. There are several ways to fix blemishes, but we're going to focus on the clone tool. <br><h3>Clone Tool Step One- Duplicate</h3>First make a duplicate of your photo by dragging it onto the create a new layer icon. Now make sure the copy layer is selected. Double click on the copy layer and name it cloning. We made a duplicate to protect the original in case we want to make changes later on and also to compare our corrections. <br><h3>Choosing your Clone Area</h3>Now select the clone tool on the toolset on the left side. The clone stamp tool works by cloning a part of the picture you select. To select a section to clone hold down the alt key on PC, the option key if you're on a mac. See the target crosshairs? I want to remove blemishes over his left eyebrows. I'll hold down the alt key and I'll click on a clear section of skin. And now I'll click on a blemish. I just cloned a blemish away.<br><h3>Clone Tool Tips</h3> I find it useful to keep one finger on the alt key and to use my right hand to clone with the mouse. I'll try a few more. It's easy to make a mistake and you may have to hit undo by going to edit, and hitting step backward. It takes practice to clone properly. <br><br>One good method is to clone the area around a blemish since it will be similar in color. Click off the eye icon on the cloned layer in the layer pallete. Compare the differences. See the difference a little cloning can do to improving people's complexions. <br><h3>Clone Tool to Remove Objects</h3>In addition to removing blemishes cloning is a good tool to remove unwanted background objects from a picture. I'll click file, open, and show you a picture where I clone out my dog Ruthie. <br><br>First I'll duplicate the original layer by dragging it to the create a new layer icon. To clone out Ruthie I need to sample the road next to her. I'll select my clone stamp tool on the left hand toolset. I'll hold down alt and select a clear patch of road to clone. And now I'll paint over her. I can quickly remove her from a picture. I already cloned her out in a finished layer. <br><br>I'll click the eye icon on my finished layer to make her disappear. <br><br>Cloning is a great way to remove blemishes and unwanted objects to bring out the best in your pictures.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com<br/> aboutvideo_4923 Mon, 10 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/cocktails/Hangover-Remedies.htm Prevention is always the best course, but when your head is pounding and you need some relief, check out this surefire hangover remedy. hangover remedies,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. hangover remedies,videos Hi, I'm Jonathon Stewart for About.com Food, and today... <br><br> Ah, man, it's so hard to concentrate today. Do you ever have that feeling? That achy, dizzy head, the nauseated stomach, furry tongue, that slimy sheen of sweat that makes your skin a sort of mauve-gray? <br><br> Is it the flu? Well, it could be, but it might also be the three glasses of sangria, two beers, and that birthday shot of tequila you thought would be "fun" last night right before you told your boss how much you loved him. <h3>Supplies Needed to Remedy a Hangover</h3> Today, it's all about hangover remedies and prevention, and for this recipe, here's what you'll need. Check it out:<ul> <li>1000 milligrams vitamin C</li> <li>one B complex vitamin</li> <li>600 milligrams N-acetyl-cysteine or "NAC"</li> <li>400 milligrams Ibuprofen</li> <li>one over-ripe banana</li> <li>5-6 frozen strawberries</li> <li>1/4 cup wild blueberries</li> <li>1/4 cup frozen or fresh pineapple</li> <li>about 1 1/2 cups cold vanilla soy milk</li> <li>1/2 cup orange juice</li> <li>a dash of salt</li> <li>a dash of cayenne</li> <li>about 100 ounces clear, filtered water</li> </ul> <h3>Reasons for a Hangover</h3> There's a huge body of medical research that delves into why you feel one particular set of symptoms or another when you're hung over, but basically it boils down to this: alcohol is toxic to just about every major organ in your body. <br><br> While your system is well-equipped at dealing with small amounts of alcohol, over-consumption forces your internal processes into all sorts of imbalance. <br><br> But none of this information is gonna help cure your pounding head, so on we go. <h3>Prepare the Vitamins and Pain Relievers</h3> Start by setting aside the vitamins C and B, which are essential vitamins your body is likely depleted of. Also set aside the NAC, a powerful antioxidant, and the ibuprofen. <br><br> Taking vitamins or pain relievers on an empty stomach can cause discomfort in a perfectly functioning, healthy body, so let's blend up our shake first. <h3>Blend All of the Ingredients</h3> Combine all your ingredients in a blender, from the banana to the cayenne. And don't try to fit in the 100 ounces of water, either into the blender or your stomach just yet, Drunky. <br><br> The fruit contains fructose, which is a healthy form of sugar, and the banana is a natural antacid that can help with your nausea. <br><br> The salt will keep you safe from the rare but potentially dangerous hyponatremia, and the cayenne is just an all-around natural bad stuff butt-kicker. <br><br> Once you've got it all in, blend away and pour yourself a glass. <h3>Drink the Shake</h3> Take it easy with this one. Don't force anything into your body that doesn't want to go there, although this stuff is oddly delicious. <h3>Take the Vitamins and Drink Water</h3> Once you've got a few swallows down, pop your vitamins, NAC, and ibuprofen, and be sure to follow your shake with a full glass of room temperature water. <br><br> Next to air, water is the number one substance essential for human survival. Make sure that throughout the day, your mantra is this: hydrate, hydrate, hydrate. <h3>Ways to Prevent a Hangover</h3> It must be stated that the best way to get rid of a hangover is to be pre-emptive. Don't drink more than one drink an hour, and even then if you begin to feel intoxicated, switch over to water. <br><br> There are products out there that contain activated charcoal, which absorbs a lot of alcohol-related toxins, but be careful with these, too. <br><br> Over indulgence of any kind still places a huge burden on your liver and other organs, and over indulgence on a chronic basis can be life-threatening. As the old Greek saying goes: "meden agan," or "do nothing over much." <br><br> Have fun, be well, be safe, and thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6899 Thu, 15 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Photo-Slide-Show.htm Transform your static photos and images into an entertaining show with the slideshow feature in Microsoft's Windows Movie Maker. Computing,Software,Windows Movie Maker,Photography,Pictures,Photos,Share,Video 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Software,Windows Movie Maker,Photography,Pictures,Photos,Share,Video Hi. I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll teach you how to create a photo slideshow in Windows Movie Maker. <br><h3>Import Slideshow Pictures</h3>I've already got Movie Maker open and I'll start by importing photos to create a slideshow with. I'll go to File, Import into Collections. This brings up the Import File window. Under file types click the dropdown menu and select Picture files. I'll select some of my pictures. I'll hold down the shift key and select all of them. <br><br>If you want to choose several pictures individually, hold down the Ctrl key and click on them. Now I'll hit import. <br><br>Our pictures show up in the Collections folder. Click on the collections button and right click on collections and click new collection. I'll rename this collection pictures. Now I'll click and drag the pictures into this new folder. <br><h3>Slideshow Timeline</h3>Now I'll put some pictures on my timeline. If you can't see the timeline click on the Show Timeline button option. You can drag photos one by one to order them on the timeline, but I'll just highlight them all and drag them to the timeline. <br><h3>Slideshow Effects</h3>Now I'll add effects to the pictures. I'll click on the collections dropdown menu and select video effects. I'll put an ease in effect on every clip by clicking the effect and dragging it. <br><h3>Slideshow Transitions</h3>Next I'll select video transitions under the collections dropdown menu. I'll scroll down and choose Wipe, Wide Right and drag it between each picture in my timeline. <br><h3>Preview</h3>Now I'll drag the play head to the beginning of the timeline and hit the spacebar to watch my slideshow. <br><br>There are many transitions and effects you could use for your photo slideshow to make it more interesting and fun. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_4165 Fri, 28 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/webdesign/Using-Meta-Data-for-Search.htm Not familiar with meta data, and how search engines use it to find your site? Learn what meta data is and how to implement it in HTML. meta, meta data, html, website, webpage 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. meta, meta data, html, website, webpage Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I'll show you what meta data is and how to use it for your website. <h3>What is Meta Data?</h3> Meta data is information used to describe the document but it is not displayed. Two common types of meta tags are keywords and description. <h3>Keywords and Meta Data</h3> Keywords make it easier for search engines to find your page. You can put words that describe your page within a meta tag. Open a bracket, type meta then a space. Type name= keywords in quotes. Then type content= quote, and now type some keywords that describe your site. Separate them by commas. Don't forget to close the quotes and brackets. <h3>Meta Data Descriptions</h3> Description is a short synopsis of what your page is about. Mainly, it's used for search engines so they can describe to the viewer what is on your webpage. Start with a meta tag, only in this one, instead of keywords type 'description' in quotes. Then content= quote and type your sentence. Don't forget to close the quotes and the bracket. <h3>Meta Tags and Sourcing</h3> You can also use meta tags for information such as author and copyright information like this:<br><br> copyright - the copyright date of the page<br><br> meta name= copyright content= August 2007 <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6983 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Pickles.htm You can turn cucumbers into dill pickles in a snap. Learn to make homemade pickles that can be stored in the freezer. pickle,cucumber,cook,homemade,recipe,pickles,vinegar 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. pickle,cucumber,cook,homemade,recipe,pickles,vinegar Hi, I'm Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food and I have a great recipe for dill pickles that are easy to make and easy to store. These pickles go in the freezer, so you do not have to worry about any complicated canning process, but they will still keep for a long long time. <br/><br/> To make this recipe you will need: <br> <ul> <li>6 or 7 small cucumbers</li> <li>1 large onion</li> <li>4 teaspoons of salt</li> <li>2 tablespoons of water</li> <li>1 cup of sugar</li> <li>1/2 cup of cider vinegar</li> <li>1 teaspoon of dried dill</li> </ul> <br/> <H3>Prepare the Cucumbers</H3> Start by peeling the cucumbers, and then cut them in half lengthwise. Using the tip of a spoon you can easily scoop out the seeds. Now we cut the cucumbers into smaller slices. You also need to cut the onion into small slices. <br/><br/> <H3>Soak the Vegetables</H3> Next, put the cucumbers, the onion, the salt, and the water in a large bowl. Make sure it is not an aluminum bowl, because that will react negatively with the acid. Let this mixture stand for about two hours. Then, drain off the liquid but do not rinse the cucumbers and onion. <br/><br/> <H3>Add in Ingredients</H3> Put the vegetables back in the bowl and add the sugar, vinegar and dill. Let this stand until the sugar has dissolved completely. You will want to give it a stir from time to time. There should now be plenty of liquid in the bowl covering up the cucumber and the onion. <br/><br/> <H3>Storing Pickles</H3> Put this mixture into freezer safe containers. Leave about an inch of empty space in the top of the container. Put these in the freezer, where they will keep for a long time. When you are ready to eat the pickles, you can thaw them either at room temperature or in the refrigerator. Enjoy! <br/><br/> Thanks for watching, and to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5859 Tue, 27 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/seattle/Seattle---Tour-of-Ballard.htm Ballard is fiercely proud and protective of its heritage and local character. Enjoy fish caught straight from the sea or take in a roots and Americana music show. seattle, washington, ballard 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. seattle, washington, ballard Ballard is fiercely proud and protective of its heritage and local character. Enjoy fish caught straight from the sea or take in a roots and Americana music show. aboutvideo_4261 Thu, 20 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/webdesign/Add-a-Link-to-an-Email-Address.htm Want to enable your site users to contact you easily? Learn to add a link from your website to an email address. html, links, email address, html links 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. html, links, email address, html links Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to add a link from your website to an email address so viewers can contact you. <h3>Add the Email Link Tag</h3> First, open your html document of the page where you want the link to go. Type an a tag, then href=mailto:(semicolon)don@about.com the text you want on your page, I'll type Email Don (close brackets and close the a tag if you haven t done so already). <br><br> a href= mailto:don@about.com Email Don /a <h3>Add a CC, BCC, and Email Subjects</h3> You can also add a cc, bcc or subject to emails customers send you. To do this type the address as you did already, but follow it with a question mark then type cc=anotheremailaddress or bcc=emailaddress or for a subject type subject=subject text. If you want more than one of these elements, like a cc and a subject, simply type an ampersand between them. <br><br> I want to add a cc and a subject. My link looks like this. <br><br> When I click on the link my mail program opens with the email addresses all ready to go. Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit computing.about.com. aboutvideo_5309 Mon, 01 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/vision/Presbyopia.htm People who suffer from presbyopia can't focus on objects from up close. Find out more about what causes presbyopia and how it's treated. presbyopia 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. presbyopia <h3>What Is Presbyopia?</h3> Presbyopia is the inability to focus on objects up close. <h3>Healthy Vision</h3> During normal vision, light passes through the cornea, and then through the pupil, which is actually a hole in the colored part of the eye. Light then passes through the lens where it is focused at a point on the retina at the back of the eye. At this point, the image is converted into electrical signals that are sent to the brain. <h3>What Causes Presbyopia?</h3> The lens is flexible and can change its shape to focus light onto the retina. The focusing power of the eye depends on the elasticity of the lens. As a person ages, the elasticity in the lenses decrease, causing presbyopia. <br><br> A presbyopic person sees faraway objects clearly. However, the images of nearby objects focus behind the retina, causing these objects to look blurred. <h3>Symptoms of Presbyopia</h3> Symptoms of presbyopia may include tired eyes, headaches, and blurred near-vision. People often notice the first symptom of presbyopia when they need to hold reading material farther away from themselves in order to focus more clearly. <h3>Treating Presbyopia</h3> Presbyopia normally occurs in people over the age of 40. A doctor may prescribe reading glasses to correct this vision deficiency. aboutvideo_6324 Thu, 17 Apr 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/prom/How-to-Rent-a-Limo-for-Prom.htm Need a lift to prom? Why not go in style? Check out these easy tips on renting a limo for the big event. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Hey guys, Jonathan Stewart here for About.com. Let's face it. Riding around in limos can be a lot of fun, and most of us don't get the chance to do it every day. They can add a classy touch to any occasion, and might just be the right ticket for you prom night. Know what's out there and avoid getting ripped off with these tips. Check it out. <h3>Choose a Prom Limo</h3> Tip number one: Choose your ride. The first thing you should consider is how many people you'll be traveling with &#150; if you want to organize a group of friends or hang solo with your date. Next, consider your style. Are you going for classic chic or big bling? I typically go with the romantic black limo &#150; big enough for six, cozy enough for two. <br><br>But, I've definitely had a blast rocking the 16-passenger hummer as well &#150; not often mind you. They're pretty bad on gas. Town cars, which fit two people, are less private than limousines because they rarely have a partition in between driver and passengers. <br><br> Six-passenger limos comfortable fit four, and usually have seats facing each other from front to back. 8-12 passenger stretch limos usually have long seats facing one another, side to side - same for 14-22 passenger Navigators, Expeditions, Excursion, Escalade, and Hummers. <h3>Determine How Much Time You Need</h3> The next thing you need to consider is how long you're going to need your ride for. A lot of places have a 4-hour minimum on the weekends, especially if they know it's for prom. <h3>Negotiate Your Limo Prices</h3> Tip number two: Always Negotiate. Check out online services like limos.com, but you should also flip through your Yellow Pages and make phone calls, too. Be very specific about what you want, get your quotes, and then compare them with all the others. Next, call the place with the lowest price, and ask them for a 20% discount from their quote. Use that number for a starting point for all your other calls. <br><br> So, you call up company B and say, "hey, company A is going to give me a decked out Navigator for $150 an hour. Can you give it to me for $100?" In any event, be sure not to tell them that it's prom, at which point rental companies see dollar signs, and you negotiations get tougher. <h3>Check for Limo Rental Incidental Costs</h3> Tip number three: Incidentals. Be sure to ask whether gratuity, gas, cleaning charges, extra stops, or any other potentially hidden fees are including in the total cost. Most importantly, make sure you do all this in as far in advance as possible - by up to a couple months ahead. You may think you can score a deal by renting last minute, but on big weekends like town, depending on the size of the city or town you live in, your more likely to be riding with dad. <h3>Confirm Your Limo Rental Before Prom</h3> Tip four: Confirmation. Check your reservation the Monday of the week before prom, and be sure to get a cell number of where you driver can be reached on the day. Call a few hours before you scheduled pick up to be sure that everything is squared away. <br><br> Finally, have a blast. Just be careful not to trash the car, or you'll likely be charged for damages. And cheesy or not, it can be a lot of fun to stick your head out the sunroof if you've got one, just look out for low-hanging branches and overpasses. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at About.com. aboutvideo_6875 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/chinesefood/stir-fry.htm Instructions on how to stir-fry vegetables stir fry,cook,vegetables,stir-fry,pan,recipe,stir,fry,stir fry,wok 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. stir fry,cook,vegetables,stir-fry,pan,recipe,stir,fry,stir fry,wok Hi, I am Ben Kurtzman for About.com Food and today I am going to show you the secret to making a great stir-fry. <br/><br/> <H3>Stir Fry Basics</H3> The key to stir-fry is having a very hot pan and very thinly sliced vegetables that will cook on contact. I like to cook my stir-fry in a wok. Woks are great because they give you a large surface area. You can make a stir-fry in a typical skillet, but the problem is that if you pile the vegetables on top of each other they will steam instead of fry.<br/><br/> <H3>Vegetable Cuts</H3> For today's stir-fry I am using the following ingredients: onions, carrots, red peppers, celery, and broccoli. This is just what I have chosen for today, but you can use whatever you like. <br/><br/>If you notice, my celery and my carrot are cut diagonally so that they are very thin, but they have a large surface area. This will enable them to cook better. Once you have prepared your vegetables, the next step is making sure your oil and your pan are sizzling hot. <br/><br/> <H3>Vegetable Cooking Times</H3> Now you are going to want to add your vegetables in order according to the length they have to be cooked. You want to start with you onion. Onions always have to be cooked the longest. Then, if you have vegetables that are dense or fibrous like carrots or celery you want to add those. Then you want to add the vegetables that do not take quite as long to cook, like your red pepper or broccoli, or tomato if you have them. <br/><br/>When you add your vegetables, cook them for a few minutes so that they sear, and then add the next ones. <H3>Stir Fry Vegetables</H3> Once you begin adding vegetables and ingredients keep everything moving with a wooden spoon or spatula. That is the stir in stir-fry. It will prevent everything from burning. Once everything is cooked you can either eat the vegetables in their own juices, or else you can add a store bought sauce, or some vinegar or oil or whatever you like. <br/><br/>I hope you enjoy it. Thanks for watching, and to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6030 Sun, 08 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/boston/Massachusetts---Brookline.htm Take a his &amp;amp; hers tour of Brookline, Massachusetts with a local DJ and a stylista. brookline, massachusetts 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. brookline, massachusetts Take a his &amp; hers tour of Brookline, Massachusetts with a local DJ and a stylista. aboutvideo_4812 Fri, 29 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/busycooks/Cookie-Brittle.htm You can whip up this cookie recipe in a flash because you don't need to spoon the batter. Learn how to make cookie brittle. cookie brittle,cookie recipes,dessert videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cookie brittle,cookie recipes,dessert videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make cookie brittle. <h3>Cookie Brittle Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 cup butter at room temperature</li> <li>1 cup sugar</li> <li>1 1/2 teaspoons vanilla extract</li> <li>1 teaspoon fine sea salt</li> <li>2 cups all purpose flour</li> <li>10 ounces chocolate chips</li> </ul> <h3>Combine the Ingredients</h3> Preheat the oven to 350 degrees. Line a 10x15-inch jelly roll pan with parchment paper. <br><br> In an electric stand mixer, pour in the butter and then pour in the sugar. Put on the beater attachment, and turn on the machine. <br><br> Cream them together on medium speed until the mixture is light yellow and smooth. Then stop and scrape down the sides. <h3>Finish Making the Cookie Brittle Dough</h3> Add in the vanilla and salt, and then mix again. Now, slowly add the flour, and mix until smooth. The dough will get thick and sticky, pulling away from the sides of the bowl. Stop the mixer and with a wooden spoon, take the dough out of the beater. <br><br> Finally, stir in the chocolate chips. You can make a variation on this cookie by substituting butterscotch chips, crushed toffee candy, or by adding nuts to the dough. <h3>Roll Out the Dough</h3> Pour the dough into the pan. Then, with a spoon, press the dough down into a thin, even layer in the pan. <br><br> Lay another layer of wax or parchment paper over the dough, and with a rolling pin, flatten out the dough so it's a smooth surface. Peel off the wax paper, and you'll see how smooth it is. <h3>Bake the Cookie Brittle</h3> Place the pan in the oven and bake them on your middle rack for 20-25 minutes or until golden brown. Check on them at 20 minutes, because they can burn around the edges easily. <br><br> Cool completely. Then, just use your hands to break into pieces with your hands to create uneven treats of cookie brittle. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4227 Tue, 20 Mar 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/cocktails/Rusty-Nail-Recipe.htm A sophisticated after dinner drink, the rusty nail combines Scotch with Drambuie. Top it with a lemon twist and enjoy! rusty nail,cocktail,recipe,drink,scotch 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. rusty nail,cocktail,recipe,drink,scotch Hi, I'm Sam from Pete's Candy Store in New York City for About.com Food, and today I'm going to show you how to make a Rusty Nail. <h3>Rusty Nail Ingredients</h3> For the Rusty Nail, you're going to want:<ul> <li>1 1/2 ounces of Scotch</li> <li>3/4 ounce Drambuie</li> <li>a lemon twist</li> </ul> <h3>Mix the Rusty Nail</h3> For the Rusty Nail, you're going to start off with a rocks glass, or an old-fashioned glass filled with ice. You're going to add your Scotch, your Drambuie, and if you like, a lemon twist for garnish. Give it a stir, and that's a Rusty Nail. <br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more visit us at food.about.com. <br><br><br> <b>About the Rusty Nail:</b>A sophisticated after dinner drink, the rusty nail traditionally combines Scotch with Drambuie. Top it with a lemon twist and enjoy! <br><br> <b>Shopping List:</b><ul> <li>Scotch</li> <li>Drambuie</li> <li>lemon for garnish</li> </ul> aboutvideo_4677 Thu, 14 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/indianfood/Indian-Chai.htm Indian chai is often made with ginger and cardamon, but this recipe also calls for a heavenly mix of cinnamon, fennel, cloves, and peppercorn. Indian chai,spiced tea,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Indian chai,spiced tea,recipes,videos Hi, I'm Natasha Levitan for About.com Food. Today, I'm going to show you how to make Indian chai. <h3>Chai Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 cup milk</li> <li>1 cup water</li> <li>3 tablespoons black tea leaves (use strong teas like assam, darjeeling, nilgiri or ceylon) <li>1 teaspoon ginger paste</li> <li>3 cardamom pods</li> <li>2 black peppercorns</li> <li>2 cloves</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon ground cinnamon</li> <li>1 teaspoon ground fennel</li> <li>2 teaspoons sugar</li> </ul> <h3>Crush the Cardamon Pods</h3> Crush the cardamon pods with a side of the knife. The pods will open to release small black seeds. We will not discard the green shell, but use the whole thing in our tea mixture. <h3>Combine the Milk, Water, and Spices</h3> Heat water and milk in a small saucepan on high heat until the water and milk begin to boil. <br><br> As the mixture begins to rise, add in the spice mixture and stir it with a whisk. Turn the heat down to low. <h3>Add the Tea Leaves</h3> When the liquid rises to a boil again, add tea leaves and stir. Cover your saucepan with a lid and allow it to brew for two minutes, until the tea color turns brown, like coffee with milk. <h3>Strain the Chai Tea</h3> Now we're going to strain our spice mixture using a metal strainer. Pour your tea into a cup, and add sugar to taste and stir. Our chai is done. <br><br> Thank you for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3941 Fri, 22 Feb 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/breadbaking/How-to-Make-Popovers.htm Popovers are light rolls that have a hollow inside. Using this delicious recipe, see how to make popover bread in your kitchen. popovers, bread, popover, bake 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. popovers, bread, popover, bake Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make your own popovers. <H3>Popover Ingredients</H3> For this recipe you will need: <ul> <li>1 cup flour</li> <li>1/4 tsp. salt</li> <li>1 cup whole milk</li> <li>2 extra large eggs</li> <li>1 tablespoon unsalted butter, melted</li> <li>1 additional unsalted butter</li> <li>1 popover pan</li> </ul> <H3>Prepare the Popover Pan</H3> Place oven rack at lowest position in your oven. Preheat the oven to 450 degrees. Place the popover pan on an aluminum lined cooking sheet. Prepare the pan by thoroughly greasing it with unsalted butter. <H3>Mix the Popover Batter </H3> In medium bowl, combine flour and salt. In a small bowl, crack your two eggs. In another medium bowl, combine milk, eggs and the melted butter. Beat it well. <br><br> Pour the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients. Stir with wire whisk until it's just blended. You'll see that the batter will be thin. And it's okay if there are some lumps. <H3>Bake the Popovers</H3> Pour batter into your popover pan. Fill each cup half-way. Place the cookie sheet and the pan into the hot oven and bake for 20 minutes. Be sure not to open the door while its cooking. <br><br> After 20 minutes, reduce heat to 350 degrees and bake 15-20 minutes longer. The popovers are done when they are a deep golden-brown color. <br><br> Serve the popovers with your favorite fruit spread. I'm serving this with pumpkin butter. <br><br> Thanks for watching, to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6994 Thu, 28 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/gourmetfood/Cod-with-Olive-Topping.htm A mouth-watering olive crust tops this light and savory cod dish. Learn how to cook cod with this easy olive tapenade. Cod With Olive Tapenade Recipe, cod, olive tapenade, seafood 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Cod With Olive Tapenade Recipe, cod, olive tapenade, seafood My name's Rich Vellante, Executive Chef from Legal Sea Foods in Boston, MA for About.com Food, and today I'm going to show you how to make cod - and it's cod topped with an olive crust. <h3>Cod With Olive Tapenade Ingredients</h3> Obviously you have these little fillets of cod, and we have all these very savory ingredients that are going to go on top of the cod.<ul> <li>1 1/2 &#150; 2 lbs. cod fillet</li> <li>1/4 cup Kalamata olives</li> <li>1/4 cup Spanish olives</li> <li>2 tsp capers</li> <li>1 1/2 minced anchovies</li> <li>2 tsp minced garlic</li> <li>1 1/2 tbsp olive oil</li> <li>1 tbsp balsamic vinegar</li> <li>1/2 cup diced tomato</li> <li>2 tbsp minced fresh parsley (optional) </li> <li>salt and pepper to taste</li> </ul> <h3>Mix the Olive Tapenade</h3> So what we are going to do first is, with our Cuisineart, I have some Kalamata olives, and I have some Spanish Olives. I have capers and I have anchovies. So what I'm going to do fist is add the Kalamata olives to the food processor, add some green olives, I have here some tomatoes - and tomato will smooth that out - equal portions of olive and then twice as many tomatoes. <br><br>I have here capers, they're from the caper bushes. And also I have some anchovies. And a little bit of minced garlic &#150; I like garlic. Then I have here some balsamic vinegar. Just pour a little bit of balsamic vinegar in there. Pulse that a little bit then, I'm going to add some olive oil and pulse that again. Try and make that into a paste. <h3>Cover the Cod With the Olive Tapenade</h3> Now I have here a little bit of parsley - this will finish it off. So I have my paste now, and I have my fish. Now I don't think I will have to salt this, but I will add a little bit of olive oil to it. What I have here is this olive tapenade, this olive paste, and I'm putting that on top. <h3>Heat the Pan</h3> I'm going to add a little bit of olive oil to a pan. I feel it's important to heat the pan before you put it in the oven - that's why some people get confused when they read a recipe and the recipe says 20 minutes in the oven. Well if you think about it, it's going to take a good 5 minutes just for the pan to heat up. So, I'm just trying to alleviate that and speed up the process by heating up the pan here. <h3>Cook the Cod</h3> Now I'll just put this in the oven, and what I've done is, we've cooked this for about 20 minutes in a 375-degree oven. It could take longer, it could take less depending on how hot your oven is, but we are going to take it out. <h3>Serve the Cod With Olive Tapenade</h3> You have to be careful with cod, as it is very delicate. And you could add the natural juices on there. And then just to finish it off we have some lemon and some parsley - anything you want just to give it some color. And there you go! <br><br> Thanks for watching and to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5771 Fri, 16 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/gocalifornia/Pet-Friendly-Carmel--CA.htm Take your dog or cat with you while you eat or sleep at one of Carmel's 66 pet-friendly places. carmel, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. carmel, california Take your dog or cat with you while you eat or sleep at one of Carmel's 66 pet-friendly places. aboutvideo_4216 Mon, 23 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/cocktails/How-to-Make-a-Lemon-Spiral.htm Add some pizazz to your cocktail by draping a lemon spiral over the rim of the glass. Learn how to make this garnish at home. cocktail videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cocktail videos Hi, I'm Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make a lemon spiral. <br><br> Lemon spirals look fancy, but they are actually very easy to make, and they make a nice addition to drinks and cocktails. <h3>Start the Lemon Spiral</h3> You will need a lemon zester like this one. Begin by washing and drying the lemons. <br><br> Using the blade in the middle of the zester, start at the top of the lemon and cut in a spiral all the way around. <h3>Twist the Lemon</h3> Pressing the blade firmly into the lemon peel with one hand, use your other hand to slowly twist the fruit. You want to go deep enough that you grab a good chunk of the peel, but not so deep that you puncture the fruit. <br><br> If you are really talented, you may be able to make it all the way down the lemon in one cut. But most likely, the peel will break off about halfway down. <h3>Add the Lemon Spiral to a Drink</h3> When it comes off, the peel will be slightly twisted, but you may have to do a bit of manual adjustment to get a really good spiral. <br><br> Now you can drop the lemon twist right in a drink, or artfully lay it over the rim of a glass. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3797 Tue, 06 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktoppub/Add-Shadows-in-MS-Publisher.htm Learn how to use Microsoft Publisher to add a shadow to text or objects to make text or objects stand out from the background of your Publication. Computing,Software,Microsoft Publisher,Publications,Graphic Design,Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Software,Microsoft Publisher,Publications,Graphic Design,Design Hi. I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll show you how to add a shadow to text or an object in Microsoft Publisher. First open Microsoft Publisher. You can start with a pre-designed publication, but I will open one that I already started. <br><h3>Choose Object for a Publisher Shadow</h3>Now select the text you wish to add a shadow to, in this case, it is a WordArt object. Go up to the toolbar and click the shadow style icon. <br><h3>Publisher Shadow Options</h3>There are many different options to choose from. Click on a shadow you like. You can adjust the shadow by clicking on the icon in the toolbar and selecting shadow settings. A small toolbar will appear where you can adjust the shadow. <br><h3>Publisher Shadow Position</h3>You can nudge the shadow up, down or to either side. <br><h3>Publisher Shadow Color</h3>You can also choose a color for the shadow under the Shadow color drop down menu. <br><h3>Shadow Transparency</h3>If you click on semitransparent shadow, it will take away or add transparency to the shadow. <br><h3>Undo Publisher Shadow</h3>If you decide you don't like the type of shadow you chose, just select the text and click the shadow icon to select a different shadow. <br><h3>More Shadow Options</h3>To add shadow to an object such as a picture or clip art, select the object and click the shadow icon on the toolbar. Adjust it the same way you would as if it was a text object. Adding shadows to text or pictures helps them stand out in your publication. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_4154 Fri, 28 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/webdesign/Link-to-Webpages-in-HTML.htm One of the beginner tricks in Web design is linking your pages to other websites. Learn how to create an HTML link in an anchor tag so you can link to your favorite sites. html, link, webpage, website, web design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. html, link, webpage, website, web design Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I 'll show you how to add links to other webpages using HTML. Links are what allow viewers to move around from page to page. <h3>Open an HTML Document</h3> First open Notepad, or if you re using a Mac, open Simple Text. I'll open a previously saved html document by going to 'file,' and choosing 'open.' Change files of type to 'all files,' then open your HTML document. <h3>Type the Link in an Anchor Tag</h3> Links use the anchor tag to create a link. Inside the anchor tag type an href attribute and the address or URL that you would like to link to. It should look like this with the URL in quotes. You must put the full address of the website you want to link to. Now close the bracket and type what you want the link to look like on your page. Then close the a tag. Closing the a tag is always required. <h3>Test the Link </h3> Save your HTML document and close Notepad. Open the same document in a Web browser. You will see that the link is underlined and colored differently from the rest of the text. Click to open the link. Now if I hit the back button, the color of the link has changed to show that I have visited it. <br><br> Once you know how to include links within your web page you can stylize them or learn how to link them to other pages within your own website. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4161 Thu, 20 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/webdesign/Create-Lists-in-HTML.htm Want to organize your site's information in a reader-friendly way? Learn how to create HTML bullet and number lists for your webpage. lists in html, list, html, website 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. lists in html, list, html, website Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll teach you how to create lists in HTML for your webpage. <h3>Open an HTML Document</h3> First open Notepad. I'm going to open a previously saved HTML document. <h3>Types of HTML Lists</h3> You create lists within the body of your webpage. There are two different kinds of lists, numbered and bulleted. <h3>Create a Numbered Webpage List</h3> For a numbered list, use the ol tag which needs an end tag. Within these tags use the li tags on either side of each item on the list. <h3>Create a Bulleted Webpage List</h3> For unnumbered, or bulleted lists, use the ul tag which also needs an end tag. Within these tags use the li tags on either side of each item on the list. Here's what it looks like. <h3>Create a Definition List</h3> There is another kind of list called the definition list. It allows you to indent text under words you want to define, like in a dictionary. Use the dl tag - which needs an end tag . For the definition term use the dt tag. For the definition that is indented use the dd tag. Make sure that the definition term and the definition is within the dl tag. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit computing.about.com. aboutvideo_3937 Thu, 26 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/busycooks/Green-Bean-Casserole.htm A staple of holiday dinners, green bean casserole can be paired with a variety of dishes. Bonus: this tasty dish is a cinch to make. holiday videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. holiday videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make a green bean casserole. <h3>Green Bean Casserole Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 can (14.5 ounces) French style green beans</li> <li>2 tablespoons diced pimiento</li> <li>1 can (10 3/4 ounces) condensed cream of mushroom soup</li> <li>1 tablespoon butter</li> <li>1 can fried onions</li> </ul> <b>Casserole Topping </b><ul> <li>1/4 cup fine bread crumbs</li> <li>1/4 cup grated Parmesan cheese</li> <li>2 tablespoons melted butter</li> </ul> Preheat the oven to 350 degrees. Open and drain the green beans. Lightly butter a 1 1/2 quart casserole dish. <h3>Combine the Casserole Ingredients</h3> In a mixing bowl, add the green beans, diced pimiento, and finally the mushroom soup. Combine the ingredients well. <br><br> Pour the mixture in the casserole dish. Evenly distribute the mixture throughout the dish. <h3>Make the Green Bean Casserole Topping</h3> In a separate bowl, combine the bread crumbs, Parmesan cheese, and the melted butter. Combine it well so it becomes a crumbly mixture. <br><br> Sprinkle it over the top of the casserole. Instead of the homemade topping, you can also top the mixture with a can of fried onions. <h3>Bake the Green Bean Casserole</h3> Place the dish in the oven and bake, uncovered, for 25 to 30 minutes. When it's done, take it out of the oven. <br><br> You'll see how one side has the salty crispy onions and one side has the sweeter breadcrumbs. Take a spoonful of the side with your favorite topping and enjoy. <br><Br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6754 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/usedcars/Preparing-Your-Car-To-Sell.htm Time to buy a new car? Learn what you can do to increase resale or trade-in value of your current car as you prepare your used car to sell. used car sale,resale value,trade-in value 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. used car sale,resale value,trade-in value Hi, I'm Barbara Terry for About.com Autos. <br/><br/>Whether you sell your car on your own, or trade it in at a dealership for a new one, you will want to prepare it in order to get the most money out of it. <br/><br/><H3>Clean your Used Car to Sell</H3><br/>Wash your car thoroughly to make sure you get all of the dirt off of it. Wash your windshield and all the other glass features, inside and out. Fill in all the small scratches. <br/><br><H3>Tire and Wheel Prep</H3><br/>Now let's do tires and wheels. In order to get a great shiny look on your tire, you'll want to pick out your favorite tire dressing, wipe it on really good. For wheels, make sure you get into all those little slots and crevices very well. And get all that break dust off your wheels. You can actually spend about 5 minutes on them and make them look brand new. <br/><br/><H3>Interior Polish</H3><br/>Then apply a non-greasy conditioner to your dashboard very thoroughly and all the other vynl components inside your car, including the console. <br/>If you have a leather interior, make sure to apply a good leather conditioner to all of the leather inside your car. <br/><br/><H3>Fluid Checking</H3><br/>Now let's pop the hood and check the fluids. Let's check the oil, the transmission fluid, the radiator coolant, the break fluid, power steering fluid, and windshield washer fluid to get those dead bugs off the windshield. <br/><br/><H3>Minor Repairs</H3><br/>Last, if there are some small, inexpensive repairs that you can do on your own, or have done, I strongly encourage you to do so. I had a saying in the car business that I used to live by: Spend 50 dollars and get 500 more. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Autos.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_5599 Thu, 17 Jan 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/personalweb/Create-a-MySpace-Photo-Album.htm Sharing photos with your friends has never been easier! See how to build and customize a MySpace photo album and slideshow. myspace, photo, album 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. myspace, photo, album Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to build a MySpace photo album. <h3>Upload Photos to MySpace</h3> Sign into myspace.com with your username and password. Click the add edit photos link from your myspace homepage. Then click the browse button to locate the photos you want to upload and put in an album. Select multiple photos at the same time by control clicking. Then click 'open' and the photos will be uploaded to your Photo Upload box. Click 'next.' <h3>Add Photos to a MySpace Album</h3> Here you will be asked if you want to add them to an existing album, which you can find in the drop down menu, or create a new one by typing a title for it. Click 'upload.' After it's done, click 'next.' You can add a caption to each photo if you like then click save when you're finished. <h3>Arrange the Photos in MySpace</h3> Click 'arrange photos' to change the order of the pictures. Click and drag them until they are in the order you want. The first photo will be the photo album cover on your myspace page. Click 'save.' On the next page, you can customize the album cover. This is what visitors will see when they look at your photo albums. Click and drag the box to a part of the first photo which is the album cover. <br><br> When you like it, click 'save album cover.' That's it. Your photo album is created. <h3>Create a MySpace Slideshow</h3> Now you can add your album as a slideshow by clicking here. Find the album you want to use in your profile in the drop down menu. Then highlight the html code in the box and press control c to copy it. Navigate to where you want to put the slideshow in your myspace personal information. And paste the code by pressing 'control V' in one of the text boxes. Click 'save all changes.' Click view my profile on the right side to see what it looks like. <br><br> Creating a photo album on myspace is very easy and it's a great way to post pictures for your friends. Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_3698 Sat, 27 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/presentationsoft/Importing-Media-in-PowerPoint.htm Want to spice up your PowerPoint presentations with images or even video? Learn how to import, adjust, and arrange media into your slides. powerpoint clip art,powerpoint video,powerpoint, power point 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. powerpoint clip art,powerpoint video,powerpoint, power point Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br/><br/>Today, I'll show you how to import and arrange media such as clip art, pictures, and video into your PowerPoint presentation.<br/><h3>Slide Prep for PowerPoint Media Importin</h3>Find the slide you want to add media to. If you don't see the Layout sidebar on the right side, go up to Format, and choose Slide Layout. Under the Layout sidebar make sure the layout you choose has the icon for the type of media you want. Some of the layouts in the bottom will not let you insert certain types of media. <br/><h3>Inserting Clip Art into PowerPoint Slides</h3>I want to first insert a clip art file. Double-click inside the clip art box and a window will appear with all of your clip art choices. Select the one you want and click OK. <br><h3>Clip Art Placement and Sizing</h3>Now you can adjust the size of your clip art with the circles around it. Click and drag a corner circle to adjust size proportionally. To move the clip art just move your mouse over it and when a 4-arrow icon comes up click and drag it where you want it. <br/><h3>Picture Toolbar for PowerPoint Media</h3> You will notice that when you have clip art selected a Picture toolbar appears. If you don't see this toolbar, right-click on the picture and select Show Picture Toolbar. This allows you to add another picture, change to grayscale or black and white, and adjust contrast and brightness. You can even crop, rotate, add a lined box around it, or compress the picture. You can also change the colors in it. The last button in the toolbar will reset the picture in case you don't like how you changed it. <br/><h3>Import Digital Pictures to PowerPoint</h3>To import your digital pictures, choose a different layout and click the Insert Picture icon. Choose a picture and Click Insert. Now you can adjust the picture the same way you would with the clip art. <br/><h3>Removing PowerPoint Media</h3>To delete a piece of media, simply click on it so a box appears around it and press Delete. <br/><h3>Add Video to PowerPoint Presentations</h3>To include video in your presentation, make sure the layout you've chosen has the Clapboard on it. Double click to add your clip. Click Import and find your media clip, Then click ADD, then OK. A window will appear asking if you want the movie to start automatically when you get to that slide or when you click on it. I will choose the When Clicked option and resize the video. <br/><br/>To preview this slide, click on the slideshow button below the slides tab.<br/>To stop or start the video during the presentation simply click the video.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Computing.About.com.<br/><br/> aboutvideo_5627 Mon, 11 Aug 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/jobsearch/Create-a-DVD-resume.htm DVD resumes can serve as an advantage if you want to showcase your work, not to mention your technical skills. Find out how to make a DVD resume, and get tips on making it smooth and professional. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com. Depending on your career path, you may want to create a DVD resume to send out to potential employers. It will give you an advantage over people with paper resumes. <h3>Supplies Needed for a DVD Resume</h3> You'll need a camera and editing and DVD creation software like Windows Movie Maker or iMovie. DVD resumes are particularly useful for anyone involved in design of any kind, visual arts, or anything that can be portrayed in front of a camera. <h3>Create a DVD Resume Setting</h3> Potential employers will want to see your face, so you should always introduce yourself first. You may be more comfortable sitting down. Make sure that you are lit well and that the microphone is getting every word. You may want to reconstruct the background so it doesn't look like your living room or bedroom. You want the focus to be on you. Talk right into the camera so that when people watch it, it will be as though you are talking directly to them. Relax and be yourself. <h3>Add Media to Your DVD Resume</h3> Then if you have graphics, clips of performances, art, design, or any visuals of your work put those after your initial introduction. This way your employers can connect your face and voice with the products that you have made. You can add text to describe what is on screen. If you have won any awards on certain item that you show, be sure to add that as text. <h3>State Your Experience in the DVD Resume</h3> Next, you can briefly describe your resume. Start with your education if you are a recent college grad. Then go into what you've been doing since graduating. You can be very general here and just describe your last position or your longest held position. Be sure to mention any awards or certificates you received. <h3>DVD Resume Camera Tips</h3> If you have a friend working the camera, ask them to get different shots of you, either from different angles or close ups of your head and shoulders to mid shots which show you from the waist up. You can talk straight into the camera again, but this does not mean you cannot look away or blink. If it helps, have a friend behind or the camera who you can look at. Your friend might also act as an interviewer and ask you questions about your career. You may want to talk about your proudest accomplishment or some challenges that you have overcome. You don't have to talk straight through your whole resume. It's okay if you make mistakes and want to start a sentence over. <h3>Edit the DVD Resume</h3> When editing your clips together, it might be a good idea to put transitions between each clip you use to make it flow better. Find music to go with your resume, preferably some with no lyrics which could be distracting or send the wrong message. Depending on how much detail you go into in your resume description, the DVD resume may be longer. <h3>DVD Resume Length</h3> Remember that anyone who will be reviewing the DVD probably won't have a lot of time to focus on one application. A DVD resume longer than 10 minutes might get fast forwarded or abandoned after the first few minutes. At the end make sure you put your contact information in writing. <br><br> After you burn your DVD, be sure to label it with your name, contact info and website if you have one. Do not forget to test it out in a DVD player before you send it out. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at money.about.com. aboutvideo_3923 Wed, 25 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Scrambled-Eggs.htm Scrambled eggs are a delightful addition to a breakfast or brunch menu. Watch how to properly whisk and cook eggs. eggs,scrambled eggs,breakfast,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. eggs,scrambled eggs,breakfast,recipes,videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make scrambled eggs. <h3>Ingredients for Scrambled Eggs</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>3 eggs</li> <li>1/4 cup low-fat milk </li> <li>1 teaspoon butter</li> </ul> <h3>Crack the Eggs</h3> First, crack the eggs into a bowl. Hold the egg in the palm of your hand. Firmly tap a hard surface, such as your counter. You'll see that it makes a nice, even crack. Hold the eggs over the bowl. With your thumbs, gently pry open the shell, and let the egg drop. <h3>Whisk the Eggs</h3> Next, beat them with a wire whisk. Be sure that you stir at an angle to allow air to enter the eggs. Whisking for 1 2 minutes will create fluffier eggs. You also want the color of the eggs to be even. If you use an electric whisk, you ll probably only need about 30 seconds. <br><br> Now add the milk. Milk brings a creamy texture to the scrambled eggs. You can use soy milk as well. <h3>Cook the Eggs</h3> To cook the eggs, place a frying pan over medium-low heat. Melt 1 teaspoon of butter to coat the pan. Pour in the eggs, and give it a minute to let it start to set. <br><br> Then, with a wooden spoon or a spatula, push the eggs around to allow the raw egg to run down and reach the bottom of the pan. Also, break apart any of the large egg pieces with your spoon. <br><br> Once it seems like the eggs are cooked, stir all of the eggs once more and cook for another 20 seconds. <h3>Serve the Scrambled Eggs</h3> Remove the pan from the heat and serve. Season the eggs with salt and pepper. You can add a lot of your own touches to this basic recipe. Add sausage, cheese, or vegetables for a variety of scrambled egg breakfasts. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6995 Thu, 19 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/beer/How-to-Properly-Pour-Beer.htm Think you can pour your favorite cold one in any old glass? Think again. Watch as a seasoned pro shows you the proper way to pour various beers. beer,bartending videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. beer,bartending videos Hi, I'm Brendan Hartranft at the Nodding Head Brewery and restaurant in Philadelphia for About.com Food. <br><br> Today we're going to talk about how to pour a specific beer into its specific glassware. <h3>Select an Amber or Pilsner Beer</h3> We're going to start with a beer that you might find in your refrigerator. This is a beer that might have the carbonation of any other type of beer, be it a darker beer, an amber beer, a lighter pilsner, whatever. <br><br> And we're going to use a regular pint glass for this. It's what most people are accustomed to. <h3>Pour the Amber or Pilsner Beer</h3> Open it up, throw the cap down. We're going to hold it at a 45 degree angle. Let it slide down the glass sexy-like. <br><br> And then to create that nice fluffy head we like, we're going to straighten out, pour right in the center. And that looks really nice - ready to go and enjoy. <h3>Select a Hefeweizen</h3> So now we're going to mix it up a bit. We're going to pour different beers that have very different glasses to go with that beer. <br><br> We're going to start with the Hefeweizen. It's a style that originated in Bavaria, and the glass that goes with it is a big boy. <br><br> It's about a half liter. This glass is specifically used to showcase the color of the beer, but also allows room for a nice, dense head. <h3>Place the Hefeweizen Bottle in the Glass</h3> We're just going to pop it open, grab the bottle, grab the glass, and dunk it right in there. Don't get nervous at home, because once you flip it over you can meter it out exactly how you want. <br><br> Take your time with it, it's not going anywhere. About here you want to stop. <h3>Swirl Then Pour the Hefeweizen</h3> This is where you take the time. You want to swirl the bottle around a little bit and get all the yeast up that's at the bottom of the bottle. That's the really important part with this style. <br><br> Just flip it over, and top it off there, and take your time. There's the room we were talking about for that nice, dense head. <br><br> Get every drop out because, well, you paid for it. And you're ready to go. <h3>Select a Belgian Golden Ale</h3> We're going to finish with a Belgian golden ale. For this we're going to use the quintessential Belgian beer Duvel. <br><br> This beer goes in its own glass. It's a very popular custom in Belgium for every beer to get its own glass with the name of the brewery on it. The style of this glass is used so it really captures the aroma of this beer and showcases the clarity. <h3>Pour the Belgian Golden Ale</h3> Pop it open, and this is a little different. We're going to let it slide down the side here. This is a very volatile beer, so you want to take it slow so it doesn't get away from you. <br><br> We're going to top it off there, and we have all that space to go so, you know, don't be bashful with it. You're going to want a nice, dense head with that, too. <h3>Drink the Belgian Golden Ale</h3> The way this glass is designed, with the tulip there, when you tip it to your lips that beer is going to come right up, so don't worry about it. And it's delicious. <br><br> So today is just the tip of the iceberg. There are a lot of different beers out there, and there are a whole lot of glasses. <br><br> Thanks for joining us. Make sure to visit us on the Web at food.about.com. Cheers! aboutvideo_6938 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/vegetarian/Zucchini-Chips.htm For a tasty snack or appetizer, you can bake zucchini chips in a homemade batter. See how with these simple steps. zuchhini,zucchini chips,recipe,side dish,appetizer,bake 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. zuchhini,zucchini chips,recipe,side dish,appetizer,bake Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman, for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make baked zucchini chips. This is a tasty way to serve this healthy vegetable.<h3>Prepare the Zucchini</h3>First preheat the oven to 475 degrees. Wash 2 large zucchini. You can make this with the skin on or off. I'm going to peel the zucchini. Slice the zucchini into 1/4 inch chips. <h3>Coat the Zucchini</h3> Next we will dip them into the coatings. The first bowl has egg substitute. The second bowl has crushed cornflakes. For extra flavoring, you can add Italian seasoning and some parmesan cheese to the flakes. My cornflakes have parmesan cheese. Lay the chips on a baking sheet sprayed with nonstick cooking spray. You can also put them on parchment paper for easier clean up.<br><br>Try to switch hands so one hand is the dry hand and one hand is the wet hand. This will prevent your fingers from getting too sticky. <h3>Bake the Zucchini Chips</h3>Spread out the chips on the pan. Put the pans into your oven and cook for about 5 to 10 minutes, when you see a golden brown color. Pull out the pans and flip over the chips<br>Put them back into the oven for another 5 minutes. When they look nice and crispy, put them in a bowl, serve, and enjoy!<br><br>Thanks for watching, to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5284 Tue, 18 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/ibdcrohns/Gastric-Ulcers.htm An ulcer is a sore on the lining of the stomach. Learn more about symptoms of ulcers and how gastric ulcers form. gastric ulcer, stomach lining 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. gastric ulcer, stomach lining <h3>Healthy Digestion</h3> Food enters the body through the mouth, then travels down the esophagus, and into the stomach. The stomach produces acid and an enzyme called pepsin, which aids in digestion. The stomach lining is protected from the digestive acids by a thin layer of mucus. <h3>What Is an Ulcer?</h3> Sometimes, an imbalance between the pepsin and stomach acids can develop. When this happens, an ulcer can form. An ulcer is a sore that develops on the lining of the stomach. <h3>Symptoms of an Ulcer</h3> Symptoms of a gastric ulcer can include abdominal pain that occurs after a meal, nausea, vomiting, weight loss and fatigue. <h3>Causes of Gastric Ulcers</h3> Some gastric ulcers can be caused by infection with a bacterium called Helicobacter pylori. This bacteria exists in the stomach and can change the mucous layer that protects the lining from digestive acids. <br><br> Cigarette smoking, foods and beverages containing caffeine, alcohol use, and certain medications may contribute to the development of gastric ulcers.<br><br>Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_4641 Wed, 23 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/candy/Caramel-Candy-Apples.htm Want to satisfy your sweet tooth? This recipe for decadent caramel candy apples is simple and whips up fast. candy apples,caramel apples,desserts,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. candy apples,caramel apples,desserts,recipes,videos Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I am going to show you how to make caramel apples. <br><br> These are a great treat in the fall or any time of year, and you will love how easy they are to make. <h3>Ingredients for Caramel Candy Apples</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>five ripe, red apples</li> <li>1 pound soft, store-bought caramels</li> <li>2 tablespoons water</li> <li>1/2 cup chopped peanuts</li> </ul> You will also need some wooden skewers, a double boiler, and cupcake papers. <h3>Prepare the Apples</h3> Begin by washing the apples and removing their stems. Stick the wooden skewers securely into the stem end of the apples. <h3>Heat the Caramels</h3> Boil some water in the bottom of the double boiler. Unwrap the caramels, and place them in the top of the double boiler with the two tablespoons of water. <br><br> Now, place the pan with the candies over the boiling water. Let them heat up, and stir them gently until they are completely heated and smooth. <h3>Dip the Apples Into the Caramel</h3> Now, you can remove the caramels from the heat. Dip the apples one at a time into the melted caramel and coat them. <h3>Serve the Caramel Candy Apples</h3> Then dip the tops into the chopped peanuts, and place each apple in a cupcake paper. Chill the apples in the fridge, and the caramel should set in just a few minutes. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3471 Fri, 27 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/mp3/itunesburnCD-mov.htm Would you like to keep a hard copy of your favorite iTunes playlists and albums? See how easy it is to burn a CD in iTunes. iTunes, CDs, Burn CDs, videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. iTunes, CDs, Burn CDs, videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'm going to show you how to burn CDs using iTunes. <h3>Before You Burn a CD in iTunes</h3> Today, I'm using iTunes 7. Before burning the music to the CD, iTunes converts the songs to a standard audio file format. You can fit about 74 minutes of music on a standard blank CD. First, let's check some settings. Go to 'Edit,' 'Preferences.' Now click the 'advanced tab,' and then 'burning.' <h3>Change iTunes CD Burn Settings</h3> Here we see my CD burner, the preferred speed, which I keep on 'maximum possible." You should make sure that the Audio CD bubble is selected. The audio CD should play in just about all CD players. <br><br>If I wanted to make an MP3 disc or data disc to be used by another computer, I would choose one of the options instead. If you want to make sure that all the songs on the CD play at the same volume level, select 'Use Sound Check.' Now click 'ok.' <h3>Choose an iTunes Playlist</h3> If you want to turn one of your pre-existing playlists into a music CD, first make sure you have highlighted the right playlist. If you don't have a playlist ready, go to 'file,' 'new playlist.' You can name the new playlist and then drag songs into it.<br><br> <h3>Burn the iTunes Playlist</h3> I'll use the playlist I already have and delete this new one by selecting it and hitting backspace. Now click the 'burn disc' icon. Insert a blank CD-R and click the 'burn disk' icon again. The icon will then animate to show that it is burning the disc and you can view the progress of the burn at the top of the iTunes window. <h3>Burning Multiple CDs</h3> If there are more songs in your playlist than can fit on one CD, iTunes will burn as many songs as possible and then ask you to insert another disc to continue. If your playlist contains any songs purchased from iTunes Music Store, you can only burn the playlist seven times.<br><br> <h3>Cancel or Complete the CD Burn</h3> You can cancel the burning by clicking the X next to the progress bar. However, if you cancel this operation, you won t be able to use the CD-R after canceling. Once the burn is complete, we see my new CD, which I can play or which I can simply eject. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_3944 Thu, 28 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/lowfatcooking/Fat-Free-Bean-Dip.htm Scoop this black bean dip on fat free chips or crisp vegetable bites for a healthy snack that won't leave you feeling weighed down. bean dip, fat free bean dip, black bean dip, snack, healthy recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. bean dip, fat free bean dip, black bean dip, snack, healthy recipe Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today, I'm going to show you how to make a fat-free bean dip. <h3>Fat Free Bean Dip Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>15 ounce can black beans</li> <li>1/2 cup salsa</li> <li>1/2 cup plain fat-free yogurt</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon cumin</li> <li>2 tablespoons chopped fresh cilantro </li> </ul> <h3>Puree the Black Beans</h3> Open the can of black beans. Drain the beans into the sink. Place the black beans and the salsa into a blender. Put on a lid and puree it until it is smooth. <h3>Mix the Fat Free Bean Dip Ingredients</h3> Pour the pureed beans and salsa into a serving bowl. Chop the cilantro into small pieces. Add two tablespoons to the dip. Now add the yogurt and the cumin and mix it all together. You can serve it as is, or garnish with some fat free cheese, extra yogurt, and cilantro leaves. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5380 Tue, 28 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/gardening/Dry-and-Freeze-Herbs.htm Wondering what to do with the fruits of your herb garden? Learn how to dry and freeze herbs for year-round use in the kitchen. herbs,gardening videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. herbs,gardening videos Hi, I'm Jane Deeken for About.com Home and Garden. Today, I'm going to share with you some tips for freezing and drying common herbs. <br><br> This is so great &#150; you'll be able to use them all year-round. <h3>Supplies Needed to Freeze or Dry Herbs</h3> The equipment that you'll need consists of:<ul> <li>a wire rack &#150; it's a screen for a window</li> <li>a permanent marker</li> <li>a resealable freezer bag</li> <li>string</li> </ul> <h3>Select Herbs to Freeze or Dry</h3> First, let's choose some of your favorite in-season herbs. I have sage, thyme and rosemary. These are only a few of the ones that you can really successfully freeze or dry. <br><br> Choose the freshest herbs from your area, from a farmer's market or the supermarket or, if you're lucky enough to have one, from your garden. <h3>Tie Herbs Together</h3> Herbs that can be cut into sprigs, such as parsley, mint, rosemary or thyme, can be tied together and hung in a well-ventilated area. <br><br> Two weeks is sufficient amount of time for the herbs to dry. You may want to check them every once in a while to see how they're doing. <br><br> Thicker-stemmed herbs may take just a little bit longer. <h3>Dry and Store Leafy Herbs</h3> Leafier herbs, such as sage or bay leaf, can be placed on a wire rack and then put into a darkened area for about a week. You want to cover it with a piece of cheesecloth to keep the dust off. <br><br> When your herbs are completely dry, it's time to put them in a re-sealable freezer bag. Make sure you label the bag, though, to avoid confusion later. I think this is ready to go. <h3>Freeze Soft-Leaved Herbs</h3> Soft-leaved herbs, such as basil, chives and parsley, can be cleaned, put into containers, and kept frozen for up to three months. <br><br> Drying and freezing herbs is easy and fun to do, and a terrific way to enjoy the taste of summer all year long. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at homegarden.about.com. aboutvideo_6137 Thu, 19 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/philadelphia/Penn---Mt--Airy.htm The coffee joints, shops, and clubs on Germantown Avenue bring this close-knit community even closer. mount, airy, philadelphia, pennsylvania 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. mount, airy, philadelphia, pennsylvania The coffee joints, shops and clubs on Germantown Avenue bring this close-knit community even closer. aboutvideo_6133 Fri, 07 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/gonewengland/Tour-Pittsfield--Massachusetts.htm Check out Pittsfield - the 'Next Big Thing' and the birthplace of baseball. massachusetts, pittsfield 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. massachusetts, pittsfield Check out Pittsfield - the 'Next Big Thing' and the birthplace of baseball. aboutvideo_3791 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/southernfood/How-to-Make-Giblet-Gravy.htm Heidi Dehncke-Fisher shows how to make the perfect gravy gravy,stock,thanksgiving,turkey,giblet,sauce,holiday,recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. gravy,stock,thanksgiving,turkey,giblet,sauce,holiday,recipe Hi. Im Heidi Dehncke-Fisher and welcome to about.com food. Today I am going to make my mother in-laws flavorful giblet gravy recipe for poultry.<br/><br/>Giblets are usually packaged inside the chicken or turkey you buy to roast. When boiled they make a flavorful stock &#150; one of the necessary ingredients for your gravy.<br/><br/>Lets get started. You will need:<br/><br/>browning and seasoning sauces which help to bring out the meats flavor.<br/>Salt and pepper<br/>Cold water<br/>Stock &#150; made from the birds giblets<br/>The bird itself<br/>A thickening agent &#150; usually fine white flour<br/>&#189; stalk celery and<br/>half an onion<br/><br/>You should begin with making the stock for your gravy. Wash the giblets and put them in a pot. Add celery and onion and simmer for 2 hours. <br/><br/>After its finished cooking remove the bird from the roasting pan. Pour the drippings into a bowl or cup and draw off the excess fat floating on top with a baster - about 2-3 tablespoons. Scrape the bottom of the roasting pan with a spatula to loosen the cooked on bits. Then return your drippings to the roasting pan.<br/><br/>Add flour &#150; enough to thicken the juices and drippings in the pan &#133;.you shouldnt have any runny material left &#150; just the thickened juices.<br/><br/>Turn heat on medium high&#133;stir the roux you have just created as it heats&#133;it will begin to bubble. When it is all bubbly &#150; still stirring constantly add 2 cups of cold water &#150; you need to use your judgment as you may need to ad more depending on the amount of drippings.<br/><br/>Turn your heat down to medium. Keep stirring &#150; make sure you are incorporating all the roux and juicy tidbits from the corners of the pan&#133;.the gravy will begin to thicken &#150; as this occurs ad a cup or so of your stock. Keep adding it and stirring &#150; heat should be on low at this point.<br/><br/>Cook the gravy on low stirring occasionally. 15 minutes or so to cook thoroughly. Add salt and pepper to taste and the browning and seasoning sauce &#150; start with a small dollop and you can ad more if you like. At this point taste the gravy&#133;should be flavorful smooth & hot&#133;<br/><br/>One of the great things about this recipe is how much gravy it actually makes. As you can see I already have a whole gravy boatful and another 1 1/2 probably to go.<br/><br/>Everybody loves a good gravy on their roasted poultry dinner. Its true comfort food.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more visit us on the web at food.about.com.<br/> aboutvideo_6774 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Garlic.htm Fresh garlic adds a flavorful punch to savory dishes. Learn how to peel and chop garlic with a quick, time-saving tip. how to,peel,chop,garlic,cook,flavor,recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. how to,peel,chop,garlic,cook,flavor,recipe Hello, I am Tim Minor for About .com Food, and today I will show you some nice, safe techniques for chopping garlic. The garlic clove, a very delicious root vegetable, can be used as a base in almost every kind of food you can imagine. Italian food... it is everywhere. <br/><br/> <H3>Remove Garlic From Peel</H3> We are gonna want to just rip it open, get this outer skin off. Get rid of that, nobody wants to eat that. It kind of sticks to everything, so you want to make sure it does not get in the finished product.<br/><br/>What I used to do, when I was starting out cooking, was just give it a gentle cut, and then try to peel it, but it is really a pain, takes forever, gets all over you. But what I have learned over the years is you can just take it, take the wide part of your knife, take the palm of your hand and just crush it. And it comes right off, easy-peasy.<br/><br/> <H3>Slice the Garlic</H3> Now give it a nice slice. You want to cut it really thin this way. And just keep on chopping until you get it as small as you want.<br/><br/>I like a nice big chunk of garlic. Some people like tiny pieces. Depends what you are making, really.<br/><br/>There we go, el chopped garlique.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more about this join us on the web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3753 Thu, 28 Dec 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/chinesefood/Shrimp-Fried-Rice.htm This video will show step-by-step how to make fried rice. rice,fried rice,shrimp,chinese food,cooking,side dish,seafood,recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. rice,fried rice,shrimp,chinese food,cooking,side dish,seafood,recipe Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food, and today I'm going to show you how to make shrimp fried rice.<br><br> For this recipe you will need:<br> <ul> <li>2 cups cold cooked rice</li> <li>2 oz. frozen cooked shrimp</li> <li>1 cup frozen baby peas</li> <li>green onion</li> <li>3 tbsp olive oil</li> <li>2 eggs</li> <li>3 tbsp low sodium soy sauce</li> </ul> <H3>Prepare Shrimp Fried Rice Ingredients</H3> First slice the onion into thin strips. You will need about half of a cup of onions. Place the frozen shrimp into a colander. Add to it the frozen peas. Run cold water over shrimp and peas until they have thawed. Never use hot or warm water to defrost shrimp. <br/><br/>If your shrimp still have the tails on, once they start to thaw, go through and remove all of the tails. Be sure to get off all the shell. Drain the shrimp and peas well. I m patting them down with paper towels to soak up excess moisture.<br><br> <H3>Begin Frying Ingredients</H3> Turn on a burner to a medium high heat. Pour the olive oil in a heavy skillet or a wok. Once the oil is hot, stir fry the onion until it is tender. <br/>Next add shrimp and peas. Stir-fry everything until the shrimp are hot. <br/><br/> In a separate bowl, crack the two eggs. Beat them with a fork or whisk. Now add the rice to the skillet. Traditionally a wooden spoon is used to help break up the rice. Keep everything moving around the skillet until it is hot. <br><br> <H3>Fry the Egg</H3> Push the food to sides of skillet or wok so there is a small circle in the middle. Pour in the beaten eggs. Scramble the eggs right in the center, stirring frequently, and then stir the eggs into the rest of the food so the pieces are small. <H3>Flavor the Shrimp Fried Rice</H3> Finally, sprinkle the dish with soy sauce. Stir fry for minute or two more, to ensure even distribution of flavors. <br><br> Fried rice can be made with any type of protein - enjoy making this dish for your family! <br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3925 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/southernfood/Hash-Browns.htm Savory hash browns are a delightful addition to breakfast time meals. Fry up homemade hash browns with these tips. hash browns,potatoes,breakfast,side dish,recipe,potato 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. hash browns,potatoes,breakfast,side dish,recipe,potato Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make your own hash browns. <h3>Hash Brown Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>3 - 4 potatoes</li> <li>1 onion</li> <li>vegetable oil</li> <li>1 tsp salt</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Potatoes</H3> For hash browns, you can keep the skin on the potatoes, just be sure to wash them very well. Or you can just peel the skin. Rinse the peeled potatoes. <h3>Grate the Potatoes</H3> Next, grate the potatoes by hand or using a food processor. Once the potatoes are grated, take off the lid, drain them in a colander, and press out some more of the moisture with paper towels. Put them in a bowl, add the salt, and mix. <h3>Add in Onions</H3> If you like onions, you can add them too the potatoes as well. Peel, cut and mince the onion. Then add it to the grated potatoes. <h3>Fry the Hash Browns</H3> Heat oil in a large skillet on medium heat. Drop the potatoes into the oil and flatten with your spatula. Brown the first side for about 3 minutes, then flip it over. Do not try to turn it until the first side is brown, or it will fall apart. Brown the second side for about 3 minutes as well. <br><br>You can make one large hash brown using the whole pan. Cut it into smaller pieces once it is cooked. <br><br> Remove the hash browns from the skillet and drain on paper towels. Keep warm in a 200 degree oven while you cook the rest of your meal, or serve them right away.<br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3724 Wed, 31 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/southernfood/Baked-Acorn-Squash-Recipe.htm This video will show how to prepare and bake acorn squash. acorn squash,squash,bake,side dish,vegetable,baked squash,mash 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. acorn squash,squash,bake,side dish,vegetable,baked squash,mash Hi, I m Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to choose, prepare and bake acorn squash.<br/><br> <H3>Baked Acorn Squash Ingredients</H3> You will need:<br> <ul> <li>1 acorn squash</li> <li>1 tablspoon butter</li> <li>2 tablespoon brown sugar</li> <li>2 teaspoon maple syrup</li> <li>a dash of salt</li> </ul> <H3>Choosing and Storing Acorn Squash</H3> First wash the squash. Chose an acorn squash that has a deep-colored rind without any blemishes or mold. The squash should feel heavy for its size. Keep uncut squash in a cool, dark place.<br/><br> <H3>Cutting and Cooking Acorn Squash</H3> With a sharp knife, cut the squash in half. The rind is very thick, so expect resistance and be careful with the knife. Turn the squash and cut all the way around. With a spoon or an ice cream scoop, remove the seeds. Acorn squash can be baked, steamed, or simmered. Today we are going to bake the squash.<br/> <H3>Bake the Acorn Squash</H3> Preheat oven to 400 degrees. With a small knife, make small cuts on the inside of each half of the squash. Place the squash in a baking pan, with the cut side facing up. Next, add about 1/4 inch of water to the bottom of the baking pan. This will help prevent the skin from burning and the flesh from drying out.<br/><br> <H3>Season the Squash</H3> Next we season the squash. I'm going to use 2 tsp of maple syrup, 1 tbsp of butter, and 2 tsp of brown sugar to sweeten the squash. With a fork, pick up half tbsp of butter and press it along the inside of the squash. Next add a tbsp of brown sugar and spread it all along the inside of the half. Do this for both halves. Then take the maple syrup and pour it over both of the pieces. <br/> <H3>Bake Again</H3> Put the pan in the oven and bake for about an hour until the squash is very soft. Carefully remove the squash from oven. Pour the syrup from inside the squash over the sides. Let them slightly cool before serving. <br/><br> You can eat it right out of the shell, or spoon it out into a bowl and serve. Mash the squash with a fork and enjoy. <br/><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4329 Wed, 07 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Using-Photos-in-iMovie.htm Want to add still photos to your iMovie video project? Find out how you can feature your pictures in iMovie with this tutorial. Photos in iMovie, iMovie, Photo, Tutorial 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Photos in iMovie, iMovie, Photo, Tutorial Hi! I'm Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Computing, and I am going to show you how to work with photos in iMovie. <h3>Open Photos in iMovie</h3> Once you are in iMovie you can access your iPhoto library by selecting the media button, and then clicking 'Photos.' This will open your iPhoto library, where you can browse through your photo albums. <h3>Select iMovie Photos</h3> Choose an album that you want to view, and then browse through your photos to select one that you want to use to start your photomontage. The picture will automatically open in the large preview window with the ken burns effect applied. Uncheck the effect box if you want your picture to remain stationary on screen. <h3>Adjust the Photo Settings</h3> Or, keep the box checked and you can adjust the photo settings. Move the tap to start and use the slider to zoom in or out on your photo. You can adjust the location of your photo on screen by clicking on the photo itself. The cursor will turn into a hand, which can be used to drag the photo around the screen. <h3>Finish the Photo Settings</h3> When you have finished the photo settings for the start of the picture, move the tab to end and adjust the settings for the end of the picture. You can preview the picture settings by clicking on the play button in the preview bar. If you want the photo to play backwards, click the reverse button. <h3>Fix With the Photo Times</h3> You can adjust the amount of time that the photo remains on screen by dragging the slider toward the turtle or toward the rabbit. You can also type in a specific amount of time in the box. The first number is seconds, and the second is frames. <h3>Apply the Photo to iMovie</h3> Click 'apply' when you are finished adjusting the photo settings. This will import your picture to the timeline. You can see the effect rendering by the little red bar below the photo. Repeat this process with other photos to create a photomontage in iMovie. <br><br> Have fun. Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_5130 Fri, 28 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/heartdisease/Angiography.htm An angiography tests for plaque in the coronary arteries. Learn more about what happens during a coronary angiography. angiogram, angiography 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. angiogram, angiography <h3>A Healthy Heart</h3> The heart is a beating muscle that continually pumps blood to the rest of the body. The coronary arteries supply the heart itself with the necessary oxygen and nutrients it needs to function effectively. <h3>How Does Plaque Affect the Heart?</h3> Over time, fatty deposits called plaque can build up inside the arteries, clogging the passages and reducing the flow of blood. If the coronary arteries develop plaque, blood flow to the heart can be compromised. <h3>Why Perform a Coronary Angiography?</h3> If a patient develops heart-related symptoms, such as chest pain, dizziness or light-headedness, a coronary angiography may be performed to test for the presence of plaque in the coronary arteries. <h3>What Happens During an Angiography?</h3> During angiography, a small incision is made in the upper thigh in order to gain access to the femoral artery. Next, a guide wire is inserted into the femoral artery and is threaded to the aorta. A catheter is then inserted along the guide wire. <BR><br> Once the catheter reaches the aorta, a contrast dye is injected. When the dye flows from the aorta to the coronary arteries, an x-ray, or angiogram, is obtained. The image taken during angiography will show if there is any blockage, aneurysms, narrowing, or other abnormalities in the arteries. <h3>After an Angiography</h3> Following the angiography, the catheter and guide wire are removed. If treatment is necessary, the physician can recommend appropriate therapy. <br><br> Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_6330 Mon, 16 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/housekeeping/Clean-Picture-Frames.htm Your memories are precious - why let them just collect dust? Try these easy tips for cleaning picture frames. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. They house images of our younger selves, our loved ones, and memories that we cherish and hold onto over the years. So why not keep 'em looking their best? Hey guys - Jonathon Stewart here for About.com. Let's face it, from the dust that settles into the wood to the fingerprints that collect on the glass - your picture frames can get pretty mucky. And is that any way to treat your sordid past? <br><br>Today it's all about keeping them clean and presentable - the picture frames that is, ridding your closet of skeletons, well, that's a whole different ball game. Check it out. <h3>Dust and Clean the Picture Frame</h3> Start by carefully removing your frame from your shelf or wall, and setting it aside somewhere safe. Using a feather duster or lint-free cloth, dust around the edges of the frame to remove any particles that may have gathered over time. Next, dampen another lint-free cloth, and run it over the edges of the frame to gently clean any remaining or more deeply ingrained dirt or grime. <h3>Clean Locations for Picture Frames</h3> Hopefully, you haven't hung any important pieces of art over your stovetop or in the shower - kitchens and bathrooms are notoriously dirty and humid, and a little rough on frames. Be sure not to use any heavy chemical cleaners at any stage of this process as they can be potentially damaging to the pictures and mats beneath the glass. <h3>Polish the Picture Frame</h3> Once your frames are shined up, grab a bottle of glass cleaner - or, better yet - a 50-50 solution of water and white vinegar. Dampen a cloth with your solution and carefully polish the glass, being sure to wipe it completely clean. Resist the urge to spray cleaner directly onto the glass, which can inadvertently slip past the frame edge and down onto your picture as well. Resist the urge to spray your kids too, even if they've got a little grime that could stand to be removed. <h3>Inspect the Picture Frame</h3> Once you've finished with the glass, take a good look at the frame from all angles. Sometimes changing your perspective will allow you to see things you may have missed before. Repeat the cleaning if necessary, re-hang or re-shelve your frame, and move on to the next one. Unless you've only got one picture, in which case I hope it's of John Travolta from his disco days. <br><br> Thanks for watching! To learn more, visit us on the Web at homegarden.about.com. aboutvideo_18584116 Mon, 10 Jul 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://home.about.com/z/cg/vp.htm?ch=health&l=health/v/9&ap=1 Make sure you have all the information you need about over-the-counter cold medicines for children. 2006 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Health/Conditions and Diseases/Respiratory Disorders/Common Cold Health/Child Health [intro] It's doesn't matter how persistent you are about getting your kids to wash their hands. Or how careful you are to keep them away from the neighbor kid with the runny nose. Kids get sick. And when your child has aches, pains, and a fever, it's no fun at all. For either of you. [body] These days, there are plenty of over-the-counter remedies that promise to ease your child's symptoms. But before you reach for a bottle of children's pain reliever or cold medicine, here are a few things to think about. The first is that while over-the-counter medications can make your child feel better, they don't actually help them get better. And cold remedies make some kids irritable or nervous, which can make it hard for them to sleep. So if your child has a low fever and a drippy nose but seems fine otherwise, there's probably no need to run to the medicine cabinet. In addition, you should never give children under 2 over-the-counter drugs without consulting your doctor first. Also, never give aspirin to kids under 16. It can cause a rare but dangerous condition called Reye's syndrome. And if your child is taking a prescription drug, check with their doctor before giving them an over-the-counter medication. On the other hand, if a fever, cough, or runny nose is keeping your child from sleeping, an over-the-counter drug might be just the thing to help them get some needed rest. Keep in mind that different drugs treat different symptoms. For aches and pains or a fever, acetaminophen (better known as Tylenol) or ibuprofen are probably your best bets. For a runny nose, there are antihistamines and decongestants such as (can we ask our health expert about specifics here?).. Expectorants and suppressants (show on video) treat cough symptoms. Some cold remedies combine these drugs, often with a fever reducer. The trick is to match the medication to the specific symptom that is making your child miserable. If the problem is just a runny nose, there's no reason to give her a cold remedy that includes a cough suppressant and acetaminophen, too. If you do decide that medicine will help, the first rule is to always read the directions carefully. Use your child's weight to decide on the proper dosage. Be sure to use the measuring device that came with the medication. Measuring caps aren't interchangeable from bottle to bottle. And kitchen spoons aren't accurate enough for measuring medicines. Also be very careful if you give your child more than one over-the-counter medication at a time to make sure you aren't accidentally giving them a double dose of something. [close] One thing that is getting easier is getting your child to take their medicine. Most medications come in a range of enticing flavors. There are new options, too, including tablets that melt in your child's mouth and thin strips that dissolve on the tongue. If it's just a garden variety cold, remember that it doesn't actually matter if your child takes their medicine or not. They'll be back to normal in a week or so no matter what you do. I'm Dr. Mona Khanna, About Health. aboutvideo_6478 Fri, 02 May 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/dairyfreecooking/Homemade-Soy-Milk.htm Sure, you can buy it at the store, but homemade soy milk is not only easy, it's delicious. See how to turn a bag of uncooked soy beans into fresh soy milk. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Hey guys - Jonathon Stewart here for About.com. We all know how you make milk - well, come to think of it, all I'm totally sure about is that it involves a cow - but did you know that you can actually make your own soy milk? Well, you can, and you don't even need your own soy cow. Check it out. <h3>Soy Milk Ingredients </h3> For this recipe you'll need:<ul> <li>about a pound of uncooked soy beans</li> <li>about a quart of water</li> <li>about a half cup of brown or cane sugar</li> <li>a slice of orange, ginger, or vanilla bean</li> </ul> You'll also need a blender and some cheese or muslin cloth. Some people recommend removing the hulls from the soy beans before doing anything else, but if you use the cheese cloth a little later on, they'll end up getting weeded out anyway. <h3>Soak the Soy Beans</h3> Start by allowing your soy beans to soak overnight in a bowl of water. You may notice that the beans tend to absorb the water, and increase in size. Next, drain any remaining water from the beans, and scoop about a cup into your blender. Add fresh water at a ratio of about three parts water to one part beans. <h3>Blend the Soy Beans</h3> Blend. Once your beans have been transformed into a pulpy liquid, pour them into a large pot. Repeat with the rest of your beans, until you have a full pot of the blended soy mixture. <h3>Cook the Soy Beans</h3> Set your burner on high, and bring to a rolling boil, stirring frequently. You may notice a frothy foam begin to form on the surface - if so, simply remove and continue stirring. Add in your sugar to taste, and your orange, ginger, or vanilla.<br><br> The total boiling time should be about 20 minutes, and feel free to be creative in what you add for flavor. Just don't add any cow milk, which, you know, kind of defeats the whole purpose here. <h3>Strain the Soy Milk</h3> Clip a piece of cheese cloth to another pot, and when the time is up, pour the soy milk through it, and allow the pulpy mass to collect in the cloth. When all the milk has been strained, squeeze any remaining milk from the pulp, allow the liquid to cool, then transfer to a container in your fridge. <br><br> And drink it! Yum. And before you toss it out, know that the pulpy leftover is called "okara," and can be used to make things like soy burgers or soy chili. You can also use it to feed your vegan horses and pigs, too, if you've got any. <br><br> Thanks for watching! To learn more, visit us on the Web at About.com. aboutvideo_3916 Thu, 12 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/italianfood/How-to-Make-Minestrone.htm A hearty Italian soup, minestrone is great for lunch or as a starter for a meal. Learn how to whip up a bowl of homemade minestrone. minestrone,Italian soup,soup,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. minestrone,Italian soup,soup,recipes,videos Hi, I'm Keith Dunlop for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make homemade minestrone. <br><br> To Italians, minestrone means "big soup." In other words, it's a soup with lots of different things in it, especially pasta, beans, and vegetables. <h3>Minestrone Ingredients</h3> To make minestrone, you'll need:<ul> <li>2 16-ounce cans of navy beans</li> <li>32 ounces chicken broth</li> <li>4 carrots, chopped</li> <li>2 medium potatoes, cut into 1/2-inch cubes</li> <li>1 28-ounce can of whole peeled or chopped tomatoes</li> <li>1 large onion, sliced thinly</li> <li>5 cloves of garlic, chopped</li> <li>1 stalk of celery, sliced thin</li> <li>1 zucchini, sliced into half moons</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon salt</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon black pepper</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon Herbes de Provence</li> <li>1 cup broken-up thin spaghetti</li> <li>basil pesto or Parmesan cheese</li> </ul> <h3>Saute the Vegetables</h3> The first step is to make the foundation for your soup. For most soups, that's onion, garlic, and celery, and that's what it is for minestrone. So heat up olive oil in a large pot over medium heat, and add the onion, garlic, and celery. <br><br> Cook these until the onion becomes slightly translucent. At this point, you can add your carrots and saute for about five minutes. <h3>Combine the Ingredients</h3> From here, it's really quite simple. You just add the rest of the ingredients to the pot. Add your stock, tomatoes, beans, potatoes, zucchini, salt and pepper, Herbes de Provence, and pasta. Incidentally, this is a great way to use up the leftover pasta you've got in your cupboard. <br><br> Now it just needs to simmer slowly for a couple of hours so all the flavors can combine. <h3>Serve the Minestrone</h3> When it's ready, serve in a bowl and top with a dollop of basil pesto or a sprinkling of Parmesan cheese - or both. And there's your minestrone, a delicious homemade soup. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5410 Wed, 26 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/pediatrics/Mumps.htm Mumps is a virus that causes the salivary glands to swell. Learn more about symptoms of and vaccination against mumps. mumps, MMR vaccine 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. mumps, MMR vaccine <h3>What Is Mumps?</h3> Mumps is a contagious viral infection caused by the paramyxovirus. The virus is spread through contact with infected saliva. When an infected person sneezes or coughs, moisture droplets spray into the air. The virus is spread by coming in contact with these infected droplets. <br><br> Following exposure to the mumps virus, there is usually an incubation period lasting 14 to 24 days, during which no signs of the disease are present. During this time, the virus begins to multiply in the cells of the upper respiratory tract and lymph nodes, increasing the levels of virus circulating in the bloodstream. <h3>Symptoms of Mumps</h3> The first symptoms of mumps are chills, headache, and a general feeling of malaise. This is followed in 12 to 24 hours with swelling of the salivary glands. The glands are usually tender to touch and cause pain when chewing or swallowing. A temperature of up to 104 degrees Fahrenheit can also develop. <h3>Effects of Mumps</h3> Complications from mumps can include deafness, meningitis, or nerve damage. In boys or men who contract mumps, painful swelling of the testicles can also develop. <h3>Vaccinating Against Mumps</h3> An effective vaccine for mumps is available and is usually given in combination with vaccines for measles and the less severe German measles, or rubella. This MMR vaccine is given to all children following their first birthday, with a second dose usually given before entering school. The MMR vaccine should not be given to pregnant women.<br><br>Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_5999 Wed, 18 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/golosangeles/California---LA-Leimert-Park.htm This neighborhood in South Los Angeles awaits discovery by a new generation. leimert, park, los, angeles, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. leimert, park, los, angeles, california This neighborhood in South Los Angeles awaits discovery by a new generation. aboutvideo_4148 Mon, 20 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/webdesign/Add-a-Website-Background-Image.htm Want to give your website a unique and personalized look? Learn how to add a background image to your webpage. backround image, website, webpage, htlm, css 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. backround image, website, webpage, htlm, css Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to add an image as your background in HTML for your website <h3>Use CSS to Add the Background</h3> First open Notepad, or if you're on a Mac, use Simple Text. Using Cascading Style Sheets, or CSS, you can place an image in the background of your webpage. You can have it move when you scroll or stay stationary behind your text. <h3>Save Your Files in the Same Folder</h3> First make sure the picture you want to use is saved in the same folder as your CSS and HTML file. This will make it easier to put into your CSS file. <h3>Open the CSS Document</h3> Open Notepad if you're using a PC, or Simple Text on a Mac. I'm going to open a previously saved CSS document by going to 'open' and changing the files of type to 'all files'. Click 'open' <h3>Code the Background Image</h3> To put an image as background, type within braces: background-image: url parenthesis quote the location of the image relative to your css file and file type, the end quote, parenthesis, semicolon. url( nameofphoto.(dot)typeofpic ); <h3>Identify the Image Type</h3> If you're not sure what type of picture you have, find it and go to 'properties.' If you're going to use a picture as a background image, as a general rule, use the GIF format with graphics that you have created on your computer such as horizontal rules, buttons, or animation. <br><br>Use the Jpeg format when the images are scanned pictures or photographs. <h3>Link the CSS File in the HTML File</h3 Make sure you have a link in your HTML file to your CSS file. If you do not have a link already, save and close your CSS file. Open your HTML file. Type this within the head tag: link rel= stylesheet type= text/css href= style.css / <br><br> The href shows the location of your CSS file, called style. It's simpler if your CSS file and HTML file are located in the same directory. <br><br> You will notice when you open your html file in your browser the image is repeated horizontally and vertically on the entire page by default. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4930 Mon, 20 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/Prepare-Zest.htm Make the best of your citrus fruit rinds by using this easy prep method for homemade zest - no fancy tools needed. zest videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. zest videos Hi, I'm Jonathon Stewart for About.com Food with today's 90-second quick tip. <br><br> If you've ever gotten halfway into a recipe that calls for zest and found yourself asking, "What the heck is zest," trust me, you're not alone. <br><br> Follow these easy prep tips, and you'll be adding zest to your dishes like a pro. Check it out. <h3>Definition of Zest</h3> Zest is simply defined as the colorful, outermost layer of skin on citrus fruits, most commonly lemons, oranges, and limes. <br><br> Used in recipes that require bold, fruity flavoring, zest can be found in anything from bean soups to cocktail sauces to meringue pies. <h3>Tools Needed to Zest</h3> There's a handy tool out there called a zester, which gets the zesting job done quite nicely. <br><br> But if you don't have room in your kitchen for one more niche gadget, try using these tools, which are more likely lining your kitchen drawers. <h3>Use a Vegetable Peeler for Zest</h3> Using a vegetable peeler or paring knife, carefully peel away pieces of the fruit's rind, which contain the aromatic oils that give zest its intense flavor. <br><br> Be sure to stay as close to the surface as possible. The white pith between the rind and the fruit is bitter and works against the tastiness of the peel. <h3>Make Grated Zest</h3> Take these pieces and mince with a kitchen knife if your recipe calls for grated zest. Or alternately try using a box or hand grater. <br><br> Always pack zest loosely in your measuring spoon unless your recipe specifies otherwise - zesty! <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4620 Mon, 05 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Record-Live-From-a-Camera.htm Cut out the middle man and record straight from your video camera to your computer. Not sure how? This easy tutorial shows you the ropes. record live action,desktop video,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. record live action,desktop video,videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to record with your video camera straight into your computer using Vista. <h3>Create a Folder for the Video</h3> First, connect the camera to your computer and turn it on. Be sure to set it to record mode. <br><br> A video import wizard will appear. Type the name of the video you are about to shoot. Click 'browse' to tell Vista where to save the video file. I will make a new folder and save it there. Click 'OK.' <h3>Select the Format of the Video</h3> In the format dropdown menu, select the type of format you want your video to be in. <br><br> The first one will save it as an avi file. The second one will save it as a single Windows media video file, even if you stop recording then start again. <br><br> The third choice will also save the video as a Windows media video file but will create a different video file each time you start and stop recording. I'll choose Windows media video one file per scene. Click 'next.' <h3>Start Recording the Footage</h3> Click the 'start video import' button to start recording the feed. Since the camera is connected to the computer, you can't go very far with the camera. <br><br> Click 'stop video import' to pause the recording. If you chose wmv single file, you can press stop and start again and both clips will be saved in the same file. <br><br> I chose wmv one file per scene, so when I click 'start' again, it will record a new file. <h3>Tips for Starting or Stopping the Recording</h3> You can start and stop as many times as you like to get the footage you want. Be aware of how much space you have on your computer for video files. Usually every five minutes or so takes up 1 gigabyte of space on your hard drive. <h3>View the Finished Video</h3> Click 'finish' when you have all the footage you want. You can view your video in the photo gallery window that pops up. <br><br> Here are the separate files in the folder I created. I can now edit them in Windows Movie Maker or put them online for my friends and family to see. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4496 Wed, 23 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Chocolate-Mousse.htm Sweet, light, and rich, chocolate mousse may be the perfect dessert. Watch how to whip up a batch at home. chocolate mousse,desserts,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. chocolate mousse,desserts,recipes,videos Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food. I'm going to show you an easy recipe for chocolate mousse. This is a rich, creamy dessert, and it is one of my favorites. <h3>Chocolate Mousse Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 1/2 cups heavy cream</li> <li>5 ounces semi-sweet chocolate, finely chopped</li> <li>1 teaspoon vanilla extract</li> <li>1/8 teaspoon salt</li> <li>3 tablespoons sugar</li> </ul> <h3>Combine the Cream and Chocolate</h3> To begin, pour 1/3 cup of cream into a small saucepan. Heat the cream over high heat until it just starts to boil. <br><br> Place the chopped chocolate in a small bowl, and pour the heated cream over it. Whisk the chocolate and cream together until the chocolate is completely melted and the mixture is smooth. <h3>Add the Remaining Ingredients</h3> Now, set this aside and let it cool. When the cream chocolate mixture is cool, add the vanilla and salt, and whisk them in. <br><br> Pour the remaining cream into a large bowl and, using an electric mixer, beat it until it forms peaks. Now, add the sugar and beat that in. <br><br> Add the chocolate mixture to the cream, and beat it at a medium-low speed until everything is mixed together and smooth. <h3>Serve the Chocolate Mousse</h3> Let the mousse cool in the refrigerator. You can serve it in small bowl or cups garnished with fresh fruit. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4725 Tue, 11 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/cocktails/Shiso-Mojito.htm The secret to the zesty flavor of a shiso mojito is fresh shiso mint leaves. This winning cocktail is perfect for outdoor parties. cocktail videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cocktail videos Hi, my name is Makoto Suzuki with Bozu Restaurant in New York City for About.com Food, and today we are making a shiso mojito. <h3>Shiso Mojito Ingredients</h3> For this cocktail, you will need:<ul> <li>2-3 fresh limes</li> <li>4-6 shiso mint leaves</li> <li>2-3 teaspoons sugar</li> <li>2 ounces light rum</li> <li>1 ounce Brazil cachac</li> <li>dash of key lime juice</li> </ul> <h3>Tear the Shiso Mint Leaves</h3> Step one is to cut the limes and put the slices in a stir glass. Then tear the shiso mint leaves. Shiso is a Japanese mint leaf we usually use for Japanese cooking. Shiso is going to give the mojito its unique flavor. <h3>Combine the Shiso Mojito Ingredients</h3> Next, put the Japanese brown sugar - its called kibi sato - and simply squeeze the limes. Now I'm mixing lime, shiso, and brown sugar. <br><br> The next step is to add two ounces of light rum, one ounce of Brazilian cachaca, and a dash of key lime. And shake it! That's a shiso mojito. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5009 Tue, 11 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/familycrafts/How-to-Make-Mouth-Pop-Up-Cards.htm A picture really is worth a thousand words. Celebrate your next special occasion by making an adorable mouth pop-up card. card videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. card videos Hi, Lea Elleseff here for About.com Parenting. Today I'm going to show you how to make a mouth pop-up card. <h3>Supplies Needed to Make a Mouth Pop-Up Card</h3> This craft is great for occasions like holidays, birthdays, and invitations. Here's what we'll need:<ul> <li>2 pieces of paper (medium thickness)</li> <li>scissors</li> <li>glue stick</li> <li>colored pencils, markers, and pens</li> <li>googly eyes</li> </ul> <h3>Make the Pop-Up Image</h3> Let's begin. Fold one piece of paper in half, and cut a line like this of about one inch. Fold the flaps around it into two triangles. <br><br> Now, score the edges with the blunt end of your scissors. Gently push the triangles through to the other side of the paper, fold it, and score. <br><br> Voila, now you have your pop-up image. <h3>Glue the Pieces of Paper Together</h3> Next, fold another piece of paper and glue the one with the pop-up image right on top of it. Make sure not to put any glue on the actual pop-up piece. <h3>Draw the Card's Image</h3> Now you're ready to draw your image. I'm not sure what I'll draw today. I'm just going to start and see what comes out. <br><br> Oh my, look at this. It's a fashionable alien. And notice how I left room for the eyes. <h3>Glue On the Googly Eyes</h3> Now it's time to glue the googly eyes on like this. What should I use it for? Maybe I'll throw an alien dress up party. Or better yet, I'll use it as an invitation to get my cousin to come visit me. <br><br> So there you have it, and now that you do you can get creative with your own mouth pop-up card. <br><br> Thank you for joining me. To learn more, visit us on the Web at parenting.about.com. aboutvideo_5414 Tue, 18 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/orthopedics/Fractures-1.htm Fractures can occur when too much pressure is applied to a bone. Learn about the different types of bone fractures. bone fracture, hairline fracture, complete fracture, 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. bone fracture, hairline fracture, complete fracture, <h3>The Human Skeletal System</h3> The skeletal system is made up of 206 bones and provides support, allows for movement, and protects the internal organs of the body.<BR> <h3>What Is a Fracture?</h3> Sometimes, too much pressure is applied to a bone that results in what is known as a fracture. Fractures are commonly caused by a fall, strike from an object, or by twisting or bending of the bone.<BR> <h3>What Is an Incomplete Fracture?</h3> When the bone is only cracked or partially broken, doctors refer to it as an incomplete fracture.<BR> <h3>What Is a Hairline Fracture?</h3> A hairline fracture is an incomplete fracture, like a crack that does not break all the way through the bone. It usually is the result of a relatively minor injury.<BR> <h3>What Is a Greenstick Fracture?</h3> A greenstick fracture is an incomplete fracture that is similar to the break of a young tree branch. Only one side of the bone breaks causing the bone to bend.<BR> <BR>Both hairline and greenstick fractures are usually treated by immobilization with a cast to allow it to mend.<BR> <h3>What Is a Complete Fracture?</h3> When the bone is broken into pieces, doctors refer to it as a complete fracture.<BR> <h3>What Is a Simple Fracture?</h3> A simple fracture is a complete fracture where the bone is broken into two fragments. This break can be transverse (which means straight across the bone), oblique (which means at an angle)....and spiral (which means an angle that is twisted).<BR> <h3>What is a Comminuted Fracture?</h3> A comminuted (or multifragmentary) fracture is a complete fracture where the bone is broken into several fragments. This type of fracture is usually a result of a severe injury.<BR> <BR>Both simple and comminuted fractures are usually treated with immobilization with a cast or sometimes with pins, screws, and plates.<BR> <h3>If You Fracture a Bone</h3> All fractures must be taken seriously. If you think that a bone has been fractured, you should seek immediate medical attention.<BR><BR>Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_3667 Tue, 13 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/windows/Zip-Files-101.htm Create Zip Files out of your larger files so you can send them via e-mail and upload to databases in a convenient, compressed format. Computing,File Size,Share,Zip Files,WinZip Files,E-mail,Compression 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,File Size,Share,Zip Files,WinZip Files,E-mail,Compression Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing.<br><h3>What is a Zip File?</h3>A Zip file is sometimes called an archive file. Really it acts as a container to transport and store your files. A zip file bundles one or more files into a single container file while it compresses the contents up to 90%.<br><h3>Zip File Versus WinZip File</h3>A zip file is different from a WinZip file. WinZip is specialty software that creates and manages Zip files. <br><h3>Open a Zip File</h3>To open a Zip file, you must have WinZip archive software. Double click your Zip file and a Wizard will come up to guide you through the process.<br><br>After the process is completed you can use the decompressed files any way you like. You can even delete the Zip original file to save space. <br><h3>Create a Zip File</h3>If you want to create your own Zip files, open WinZip. Now open the Wizard by clicking the Wizard button on the toolbar. A window will come up asking what you d like to do. Simply click Create a new Zip file and click Next. The WinZip Wizard will guide you through the process.<br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Computing.About.com.<br> aboutvideo_5497 Thu, 29 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/kosherfood/Kosher-Coffee-Cake.htm Want to add a new dessert to your baking repertoire? Try this light and delicious kosher coffee cake with a sugary pecan center. coffee cake, kosher, dessert, recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. coffee cake, kosher, dessert, recipe Hi, I am Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today, I'm going to show you how to make kosher coffee cake. <h3>Kosher Coffee Cake Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 cup sugar</li> <li>1/2 cup butter</li> <li>2 eggs</li> <li>1 cup sour cream</li> <li>2 teaspoons vanilla</li> <li>2 cups flour</li> <li>1 teaspoon baking soda</li> <li>1 teaspoon baking powder</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon salt</li> <li>1 1/2 teaspoons cinnamon</li> <li>3 tablespoons sugar</li> <li>1/2 cup chopped pecans or walnuts</li> </ul> First preheat the oven to 350 degrees. <h3>Combine the Coffee Cake Wet Ingredients</h3> Pour a cup of sugar and the butter in a large mixing bowl. With an electric mixer, cream the sugar with the butter. Next add eggs and beat them into the mix. Then add the sour cream and vanilla. Combine everything. <h3>Prepare the Coffee Cake Dry Ingredients</h3> In a separate bowl, sift the flour, baking soda, baking powder, and salt. Mix this together. <h3>Mix All the Coffee Cake Ingredients</h3> In small batches, mix this into the wet ingredients. In another bowl, combine cinnamon, sugar, and chopped pecans. <br><br> Grease a cake pan and dust with flour. Be sure that the pan is floured on all sides. Pour half of the batter into the pan. Spread the batter around, so it is evenly around the pan. Sprinkle with the nut mixture. Add remaining batter. <h3>Bake the Kosher Coffee Cake</h3> Place the pan onto a cookie sheet and place in the oven. Bake coffeecake at 350 degrees for 35 to 40 minutes. Take the cake out of the oven, and flip it over onto a plate. Cut out a piece and you will see that the nut mixture is right in the center of the cake. Enjoy!<br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4443 Mon, 03 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Upload-Videos-to-YouTube.htm Do you have a video that you want to share with the world? Learn how to sign up for a YouTube account, adjust your account settings, and upload new videos to YouTube. youtube, video, upload 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. youtube, video, upload Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I'll show you how to upload your own videos onto Youtube for the world to see. <h3>Create a YouTube Account</h3> First, go to youtube.com and create an account. To do this, click on the 'Sign Up' button at the top of the screen. Fill out all of the requested information. An email will be sent to you asking you to confirm your email address. Click the link in the email to confirm. <h3>Customize Your YouTube Profile</h3> Next, you can customize your profile by clicking on your username at the top of the screen. You can choose to add a photo, video logs, favorite videos, subscribers, and friends. <h3>Fill in the Video Upload Information</h3> To upload a video, go to the upload page by clicking on 'Upload' in the upper right corner of the homepage. On this page, fill out your video information including title, description, and tags. Tags are key words used to describe your video. They help people search and locate videos on Youtube. <h3>Adjust Video Settings</h3> Next, you can choose to broadcast your video publicly or privately. There are also date and map options that let viewers know where and when the video was produced. Lastly, you can customize your sharing options including comments, video responses, ratings, and embedding. <h3>Upload the Video to YouTube</h3> The next step is to upload your video onto YouTube from your computer. Click on 'Upload Video' to find a video file on your computer. Next, click the browse button to search for the file you want to upload. Double click on the file and it will appear in the text box. Click on 'Upload Video.' <h3>Video Upload Specs</h3> Youtube will accept AVI, WMV, MOV, and MPG files. However, the video file must be no larger than 100MB, and no longer than 10 minutes. The longer the video, the larger the file will be. <h3>Watching and Deleting Videos</h3> It may take a few minutes to upload your video. You can see the progress with the blue bar. When your video has finished uploading, you can access it in My Videos. If you want to remove the movie, click 'Remove Movie' underneath the video icon in My Videos. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_3834 Mon, 23 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/busycooks/Chicken-Paprikash.htm This classic Hungarian dish traditionally calls for sweet paprikash, but this delicious recipe uses a democratic blend of hot and sweet. chicken dish,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. chicken dish,videos Hi, I'm Heidi Dehncke-Fisher for About.com Food. Today I am making my version of Chicken Paprikash. <h3>Chicken Paprikash Flavors</h3> This dish originated in Hungary and is renowned for its exquisite paprika flavor. This dish traditionally uses sweet paprika, but today I am going to be mixing both hot and sweet. <h3>Chicken Paprikash Ingredients</h3> To make this Chicken Paprikash, you will need: <ul> <li>1 1/2 pounds thinly sliced chicken cutlets</li> <li>1 large sweet onion</li> <li>a pint of grape tomatoes</li> <li>4 cloves garlic</li> <li>6 ounces marinated artichoke hearts</li> <li>6 ounces marinated red sweet peppers</li> <li>half of an orange pepper</li> <li>1 Spanish green pepper chopped</li> <li>1 cup of mushrooms</li> <li>small can of cannellini beans</li> <li>2 cups chicken broth</li> <li>4 tablespoons sweet paprika</li> <li>2 tablespoons hot paprika</li> <li>1 tablespoon onion flakes</li> <li>salt and pepper to taste</li> <li>16 ounces sour cream</li> <li>1 9 ounce box of Spaetzle</li> <li>3 tablespoons oil</li> <li>2 1/2 tablespoons all-purpose flour</li> </ul> <h3>Combine the Chicken Paprikash Ingredients</h3> Pour oil into a large skillet over medium heat. Add onion, garlic, artichoke hearts, sweet pepper, all your fresh peppers, mushrooms, and salt and pepper. Cook for 15 minutes, stirring occasionally. <br><br> Add in your flour and paprika, and then the cannellini beans. Stir and blend for about two minutes. <br><br> Add chicken broth and raise to high heat until the sauce begins to boil. Add chicken and onion flakes; stir and reduce heat to low. Cook approximately 20 minutes. <h3>Cook the Pasta</h3> Begin cooking your Spaetzle, which is like other pastas and requires cooking for 15 minutes in a pot of boiling water. <br><br> Add your sour cream and stir gently and add your fresh tomatoes. Be careful to keep stirring, as the sour cream can separate. <h3>Serve the Chicken Paprikash</h3> After two minutes remove from heat, and plate your chicken, delicious paprika sauce, and vegetables over the Spaetzle. Wow, that looks and smells delicious. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4304 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Chocolate-Fondue.htm Decadent chocolate fondue tastes great when paired with fruit, angel food cake, ladyfingers, and pretzels. chocolate,chocolate fondue,dipping sauce,dessert,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. chocolate,chocolate fondue,dipping sauce,dessert,recipes,videos Hi, I'm Heidi Dehncke-Fisher for About.com Food. Today I am going to make chocolate fondue. <br><br> Invented at the Chalet Suisse restaurant in New York City in the 1950s, chocolate fondue is great with fruit, angel food cake, ladyfingers, pretzels, and even chips <h3>Ingredients for Chocolate Fondue</h3> For my chocolate fondue recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 cup heavy whipping cream</li> <li>16 ounces chocolate</li> <li>2 tablespoons kirsch brandy or Cointreau</li> </ul> <h3>Combine the Ingredients</h3> You can buy morsels, but if your chocolate is in bar form, then chop or break up your chocolate into small bits. Combine all of the ingredients in a fondue pot or saucepan. <h3>Heat and Serve the Chocolate Fondue</h3> Stir over low heat until everything has combined and is velvety and smooth. Chocolate fondue is as luscious as it looks. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6402 Wed, 25 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/spanishfood/Prawns-wrapped-in-Serrano-Ham.htm This fast and easy Spanish prawn recipe features an irresistible combination of salty ham wrapped around the sweet shellfish. The perfect dish for any party! 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Hi, I'm Chef John Mitzewich for About.com. Today we have a delicious Spanish recipe, prawns wrapped with Serrano ham. <h3>Ham-Wrapped Prawns Ingredients</h3> All right, get yourself:<ul> <li>1 pound of frozen peeled and deveined prawns. I like the tails on but it doesn't matter. Those are the 30 to a pound size. </li> </ul> We're going to add 1/2 tsp paprika, you can use hot, sweet, or smoked. <ul> <li>1 tbsp olive oil</li> <li>black pepper to taste</li> <li>1 tbsp of orange juice</li> <li>1/2 tsp orange zest</li> </ul> Give that a mix. No salt because the ham is salty and will flavor this perfectly. <ul> <li>And there is our Serrano ham.</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Serrano Ham</h3> Very similar to proscuitto, in fact if you cant find Serrano ham just use proscuitto. Any ham will work - Virginia ham, etc. So what we're going to do is cut each slice into 3 pieces. I put a few together and used scissors and sliced those in 3. You can use a knife, but I like the scissors. So there are the little strip we're going to wrap the prawns with. <h3>Wrap the Prawns in Ham</h3> To wrap, I just start at the top and wrap it around until I get to the tail. By the way 10 slices should be enough for a pound of shrimp. So there you go. Don't worry about getting it perfect. As this cooks the ham will shrink and you wont see any mistakes. So just wrap it up and don't spend to much time on it. As long as its covered you are fine. <h3>Roll the Prawns</h3> Then we're going to take a regular supermarket bamboo skewer, and I'm going to go into the tail first and push it through to the large end, the head end of the prawn. I'm going to keep doing that and put 4 per skewer. If you use the short skewers just put 2 or 3. <h3>Heat the Prawns</h3> Then in a saut&#233; pan, in a couple tablespoons of olive oil, over med-high heat, we're going to get a nice sear on the Serrano ham. It will kind of shrink-wrap&#133; hey, pork favored shrink-wrap. I'm going to give 2-3 minutes per side. You can feel it when it's done, they turn from opaque to kind of white, and a bit firm to the touch. <h3>Serve the Prawns Wrapped in Serrano Ham</h3> This is so delicious. You have to try this. It's an incredible appetizer, it's great if you're going to do a tapas party. And if you've never heard of "tapas" before, they are just small plates of Spanish food served at parties and things like that. I garnished with some Spanish olive oil and orange zest. <br><br> As you saw, it's super easy to make - an incredible combination with the orange, the saltiness of the ham, the sweetness of the shrimp. This is really, really, really, great. I hope you give it a try. Enjoy. <br><br> To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4925 Mon, 20 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/cellphones/iPhone-Review.htm Before you fork over your money for an Apple iPhone, find out exactly what you're buying. This review covers the good - and bad - of the cell phone. apple iphone review 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. apple iphone review Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Gadgets. After months of speculation and hype, the first version of the iPhone was released. Today I'll talk about some of great features of the iPhone as well as what it is lacking. <h3>Access the iPhone Home Screen</h3> First and foremost, the iPhone is a lot lighter than you'd expect. It's got a beautiful design and futuristic look. To wake up the phone, all you have to do is press the sleep wake button on top and slide your finger. <br><br> That brings us to the touch screen and the home screen. It seems to gets smudgy right after you use it, but that doesn't seem to affect how well it works. <br><br> Apple includes a small cloth to wipe away your fingerprints, but I haven't found it to be too magical. <h3>Access the iPhone Controls</h3> All you have to do is press on any icon to bring up your phone controls, mail, iPod, stocks, camera, and more. <br><br> One of the great physical features of the phone is the one actual button on the bottom of the phone. No matter where you are, if you click this button once, it will take you back to the main screen. <h3>Locate Important iPhone Buttons</h3> On the side you'll find volume up and down buttons, as well as my personal favorite, a silent ringer switch. On top is the headphone jack and sleep wake button. <br><br> On the bottom is the iPod connector, a speaker, and the microphone. Unfortunately, sometimes when I'm watching movies through the iPod, I find that my hands cover up the speaker. <h3>Rating the iPhone's Service Provider</h3> Before I go any further, I should mention that if you are thinking about buying an iPhone, then make sure you are ready to use AT&T as your cell phone service provider. <br><br> I had to pay an early termination fee to transfer over from Verizon to AT&T. <h3>Rating the Edge Network</h3> I've found my current service to be worse than what I had, but it's been worth living with. Another downside of switching over to AT&T is the use of the slow Edge network. The iPhone looks for any Wi-Fi access that is available. <br><br> If you know a network's password, or if it is unprotected, your Internet connection is pretty good. <br><br> However, if there aren't any wireless networks available you are stuck with the Edge network. It takes quite a bit longer to check your email with the mail program or visit a web page. <h3>Surf the Web on the iPhone</h3> Speaking of Web pages, the Safari application is currently pretty close to providing you with full Web access. <br><br> Unlike other phones, you get full color, text, layout, and images. You see most everything and can zoom in by just moving your two fingers apart. <br><br> When you tip the iPhone over, the page can be viewed horizontally. Click on a link to load the page. <br><br> However, this first version of the iPhone does not allow you to view flash, which is one of my biggest complaints. <h3>Manage Content on the iPhone</h3> Speaking of complaints, unlike with other iPods, you can't exactly manage what is on your iPhone. <br><br> When you connect your iPhone to your computer, it syncs your mail, music, contacts, and more. However, you can't choose to go in and delete a song or movie off your iPhone without moving it out of iTunes. <br><br> It would be nice if you could set up profiles in iTunes. For example, one profile with what you wanted on your iPhone and one with what you wanted on your Apple TV, and so on. <br><br> Other fun and useful features include Google maps and widgets for stocks, YouTube, a camera, and more. <h3>Call With the iPhone</h3> As for the phone itself, you can't make a phone call without pressing a few keys. You have to click phone, keypad, and then you can do your dialing. <br><br> However, I do like the options to create and look at a favorites list, recent calls, and most especially, how voicemail works. Your messages are listed like emails and all you need to do is click to listen to any one message. <br><br> To be honest, one of the least necessary but most fun features is the ability to scroll through your contacts list by flicking your finger. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us online at gadgets.about.com. aboutvideo_4325 Fri, 25 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/mideastfood/Tabouli.htm Looking for a tasty way to incorporate more grains into your diet? Try this recipe for tabouli, a healthy salad composed of bulgur wheat and diced vegetables. tabouli, Middle Eastern food, recipes, videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. tabouli, Middle Eastern food, recipes, videos Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I am going to show you how to make tabouli. This is a delicious, healthy salad that is great in the summer or any time of year. <h3>Tabouli Ingredients</h3> For this recipe you need:<ul> <li>1 cup bulgur wheat</li> <li>1 1/2 teaspoons salt</li> <li>1 1/2 cups water</li> <li>1/3 cup olive oil</li> <li>1/3 cup lemon juice</li> <li>red onion</li> <li>tomatoes</li> <li>cucumber</li> <li>3 cups parsley</li> </ul> <h3>Soak the Bulgur</h3> Begin by bringing the water to a boil. Combine the bulgur and salt in a large bowl. Pour the boiling water over the bulgur, cover the bowl, and let it sit for half an hour. <h3>Combine the Ingredients</h3> While the bulgur is soaking, we will prepare the other ingredients. Dice the vegetables into small pieces, and chop the herbs finely. <br><br> After half an hour, when the bulgur is ready, add the olive oil and lemon juice. Place this mixture in the refrigerator until it is chilled. <h3>Serve the Tabouli</h3> Mix the vegetables and herbs into the tabouli just before serving. You can eat this salad as is, or serve it over a bed of lettuce. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4463 Thu, 10 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/southernfood/Key-Lime-Pie.htm A democratic blend of tangy and sweet, Key Lime Pie is a tasty way to end a meal. Watch how to make a classic Key Lime Pie at home. Key Lime Pie,pies,desserts,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Key Lime Pie,pies,desserts,recipes,videos Hi, I'm Nicole Chmura for About.com Food. No matter what your climate or location might be, this simple recipe will turn your home into a tropical paradise. Let's whip up a classic key lime pie. <h3>Key Lime Pie Ingredients</h3> First, let's gather our ingredients. We'll need:<ul> <li>1 9-inch graham cracker pie crust</li> <li>3 egg yolks</li> <li>1 can sweetened condensed milk</li> <li>2 teaspoons grated lime zest</li> <li>1/2 cup key lime juice, fresh or bottled </li> </ul> If you can not find key lime juice in your grocery store, general lime juice is a close match. <h3>Combine the Ingredients</h3> Combine the egg yolks and milk in a mixing bowl, and beat with a mixer at high speed until light and fluffy. This should take about five minutes. <br><br> Then, gradually beat in lime juice and 2 teaspoons of freshly grated lime zest. Zest is nothing more then the fine outer layer of the citrus peal. But it packs a powerful punch of flavor for your taste buds, as it contains a concentrated amount of citric acid. <h3>Prepare the Pie Crust</h3> Once the mixture is fully combined, set it aside for a few moments as you prepare your ready-made pie crust. <br><br> Simply remove the inverted plastic cover, but don't throw it away. This actually flips upside down to become a handy lid for your completed dessert. <h3>Bake the Key Lime Pie</h3> Next, pour the creamy filling into your pie crust and place in a 350 degree preheated oven for 12 minutes. Remove the pie from the oven when it has lost its liquid appearance, but still does not reveal a change in color. <br><br> Now, chill the tropical treat. I recommend overnight to ensure that it is fully set. <h3>Serve the Key Lime Pie</h3> When you are ready to serve, top your key lime pie with a dollop of whipped cream and enjoy. This sweet indulgence will have you day dreaming about your last sun-filled vacation, without shelling out your hard earned sand dollars. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us here on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_10889322 Mon, 10 Jul 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://home.about.com/z/cg/vp.htm?ch=style&l=style/v/9&ap=1 Looking to land a new job? Style expert Kim Johnson Gross helps you put your best foot forward with the perfect interview outfit. 2006 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Home/Consumer Information/Clothing and Accessories Shopping/Clothing Looking to land a new job? Style expert Kim Johnson Gross helps you put your best foot forward with the perfect interview outfit. aboutvideo_4162 Thu, 20 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/webdesign/Create-Tables-in-HTML.htm Tables add a clean look to a webpage, and also help organize information in a reader-friendly way. Learn the tags you need to create a table in HTML. tables, html, webpage, website, internet 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. tables, html, webpage, website, internet Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to create tables for your website using HTML. <h3>Open an HTML Document</h3> First open Notepad, or if you're using a Mac, open Simple Text. I'll open a project that was previously saved. <h3>HTML Table Tags</h3> There are three main tags you will need to create a table using html. The word table between brackets defines a table. Tr between brackets defines a row in the table. Td defines a column in the table. <h3>Determine the Table Size</h3> The simplest way to create a table is to determine how big it needs to be, then build it row by row. I will build a 3 row by 3 column table. <h3>Plug in the HTML Table Tags</h3> Start with the table tag. Don't forget the end tag. Now for the first row, type the tr tag. For the columns, type the td tag and Row 1 Column 1 then the end td tag. Do the same for columns 2 and 3. Don t forget to end the row with the end tr tag. <br><br> Now create another row using the tr tag. And do the same thing for the columns as before only type Row 2 Column 1 in within the column tags. After you have typed out all your rows and columns, don't forget to end your table. <h3>Add a Border to the HTML Table</h3> I'm going to put a border in the table by typing border=1 into the start table tag. <br><br> Thanks for watchiing. To learn more, visit computing.about.com. aboutvideo_5585 Fri, 28 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/animation/Import-Video-Into-Flash.htm Perk up a Web page by adding a video. If you're using Adobe Flash, check out these tips on how to import, encode, and upload your video file. encode videos,import videos into flash,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. encode videos,import videos into flash,videos Hi. I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to import video in Flash using Flash 8. <h3>Determine What Files to Import</h3> If you have Quicktime installed, you can import files that are avi, dv, mpeg, or mov. <br><br> If you are working on a PC with DirectX 9 or later you can import avis, mpegs, and windows media files as well. <br><br> You can see this list in the Flash Help Menu. <h3>Import the File Into Flash</h3> Under 'File,' go to 'Import,' and then 'Import video.' Here you can choose whether to import a video on your computer or already deployed on a server. The later will be either a .flv or .xml file. <br><br> I'll click 'Choose and locate a video on my computer.' Once the path is filled in, click the 'Next' button. <h3>Choose a Deployment Option</h3> You can chose deployment options, including progressive download from a Web server, stream from Flash video streaming service or from Flash communication server, embed the video and play in timeline, or link Quicktime video for publishing to Quicktime. <br><br> There are some issues with these choices. It's recommended that you only choose to embed the video if you are using short clips, ideally less than a minute or two. <br><br> Otherwise you'll likely encounter sync issues. <br><br> You can only choose the last option if you are publishing your fla out to Quicktime, and you have to target Flash Player 3 through 5. It is not compatible with Flash Player 8. <br><br> The recommended option is the default option - progressive download from a Web server. I'll select it and click 'Continue.' <h3>Encode the Video</h3> Now I can specify how to encode the video. I can choose from the dropdown menu of presets or click advance settings. <br><br> The default codec for Flash 8 is the On2 codec. I can change the codec to Sorenson Spark, adjust the frame rate, and more. <br><br> I'll encode my video to high quality, at a frame rate of 15 frames per second. I'll change the size to 480 by 360. If your clip has audio you can specifiy its encoding here. <h3>Choose a Skin for the Video</h3> I'll click 'Continue.' Now I can choose a skin for the video. The skin is the display for the video. <br><br> You can choose one from this dropdown menu. Click 'Continue.' <h3>Save the Video File</h3> Now, you are given a final message that tells you what happens next. It tells you that you must save your fla file before encoding can occur as well a where the video to be encoded will be located. <br><br> There's other information you can read through. Click 'Finish' when you're done. <br><br> If you haven't already saved your fla file, you will be asked to do so. The video is now encoding. <h3>Preview the Movie</h3> Once it's done encoding, it will be placed on the stage. When you preview your movie you'll see the skin you chose and you will be able to use the controls to stop and play the movie. <br><br> Finally, when you're ready to upload your files, make sure that you take all of the Flash files that were created, including the flv and swfs. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_10251489 Mon, 10 Jul 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://home.about.com/z/cg/vp.htm?ch=style&l=style/v/3&ap=1 Learn the basics for building a stylish, affordable maternity wardrobe that will grow with you throughout your pregnancy. 2006 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Shopping/Clothing/Women's/Motherhood Home/Consumer Information/Clothing and Accessories ? Pregnancy - the ultimate wardrobe dilemma. You don't want to spend a bunch of money buying new clothes every few months as your belly expands. You have a baby on the way after all. But, there's no need to chuck your fashion sense out the window either. Learn the basics for building a stylish, affordable maternity wardrobe that will grow with you throughout your pregnancy. aboutvideo_5446 Wed, 12 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/southernfood/60-Second-Brussel-Sprouts.htm The brussel sprout has gotten a bad rap over the years. Try this unusual technique to bring out the vegetable's natural sweetness and great flavor. brussel sprouts,southern food,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. brussel sprouts,southern food,videos Hi, I'm Chef John Mitzewich for About.com Food, and today's recipe is called 60-second Brussels sprouts. And if you don't like Brussels sprouts, I guarantee that you've never tried this recipe. <h3>What are Brussels Sprouts?</h3> OK, what's the normal reaction when people hear they are having brussel sprouts? Booooooo. <br><br> Yet the same people who were just booing don't have the same hatred for cabbage. And really what is a brussel sprouts? It's a small baby cabbage. <br><br> So if you think of it as a small delicious baby cabbage and cook it properly, you'll have something incredibly delicious. <h3>Prepare the Brussels Sprouts</h3> So let me show you how to prep this. You're going to cut it in half. You're going to remove the core just like a big cabbage, use a triangle cut and remove the bottom of the brussel sprout. <br><br> And the reason we do that is so when we slice it everything will separate, and we don't have chucks of hard white core at the bottom. <h3>Cut the Brussels Sprouts Into Thin Slices</h3> So, what were going to do - and the whole secret to this recipe - is the fast cooking time. To accomplish that, I'm going to slice this really thin, across the grain. <br><br> By the way, if any leaves come off, just roll them up and slice them and add them to the pile. <h3>Ingredients Needed to Cook Brussels Sprouts</h3> There we go. We have a nice bowl of brussel sprouts; I did about 18. <br><br> I'm going have one lemon halved, one tablespoon olive oil, one tablespoon butter, and salt and pepper to taste. <h3>Combine the Ingredients</h3> Have your strainer ready. Another secret is the super-high heat. <br><br> You're going put in the olive oil when the pan is just smoking hot. Throw in the Brussels sprouts. Squeeze in half the lemon, the other half we add at the end. Add the salt and pepper. <h3>Cook the Brussels Sprouts</h3> You're going to cook this for exactly 60 seconds - no more. The reason people don't like Brussels sprouts is they over cook them and the sulfur comes out and it smells and tastes gross. <br><br> Stir constantly for 60 seconds, and then turn off the heat. Add the other half lemon, which is going to cool the pan down a little. <br><br> Put in your butter and stir that in and when that's melted you're ready to serve. <h3>Benefits of the Cooking Time</h3> So, instead of trying to hide the flavor of brussels sprouts, this recipe adds a few little ingredients: lemon, butter, salt, and pepper, which really brings out the natural sweetness and deliciousness of the brussels sprouts. <br><br> You're going to be amazed. You're not going to believe it. You're going to say, I like brussel sprouts. You're going to say that. <br><br> And the secret really is the 60 seconds of cooking. I know, it took a few minutes to slice them, but it was totally worth it. But anyway I hope you give this a try, and enjoy! <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5301 Wed, 12 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/firstaid/Burns.htm Learn about the three different types of burns, their risks, and their effects on the skin. burn, first-degree burn, second-degree burn, third-degree burn, 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. burn, first-degree burn, second-degree burn, third-degree burn, <h3>What is the Skin?</h3> Skin is the largest organ of the human body. Exposure to extreme heat, radiation, electrical shock or chemical agents can burn the skin causing pain, blistering, and in severe cases, irreversible damage. <br><br> The epidermis is the outermost layer of skin and the dermis is the middle layer, with the subcutaneous tissue lying beneath. <h3>Types of Burns</h3> Burns are classified as first, second or third degree burns depending on the amount and depth of tissue damage. <h3>First-Degree Burn</h3> A first-degree burn causes damage to the epidermis, causing pain, redness and some swelling. Typically, this type of burn will heal without scarring.</li> <h3>Second-Degree Burn</h3> A second-degree burn causes damage to the epidermis and the dermis, and this burn usually results in pain, redness and blistering.</li> <h3>Third-Degree Burn</h3> Third degree burns are the most severe because the damage extends past the upper layers of skin to the sensitive subcutaneous tissue, destroying nerves, blood vessels, and other dermal components. <br><br> Extensive third degree burns can be fatal because the threat of infection is extremely high. In fact, bacterial infection is the leading cause of death in burn victims. <br><br> Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_6845 Thu, 15 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/FIRE-TEXT-EFFECT-IN-PHOTOSHOP.htm Make your text distinctive and exciting with Photoshop text effects- learn how to make your words appear to be on fire. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Text Effects,Text,Graphic Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Text Effects,Text,Graphic Design Hi, I m Isaac Brody for About.com computing. <br><br>Today I'll teach you how to create a fire text effect using Photoshop CS2. Start by creating a new document. Go to File, New. I'll select preset 800 X 600 to make things easy. And click OK. <br><h3>Photoshop Fire Effect Background</h3>Now fill the background black by selecting the paint bucket tool on the left toolbar. If you can't see the paintbucket tool hold down the mouse over the gradient tool to bring up the paint bucket. And click once on the background. <br><h3>Entering your Text</h3>Now select the TYPE tool on the left toolbar and switch your foreground color button to white. Now type the word fire. <br><h3>Layering in your Wind</h3>Now click the create a new layer button on the layer pallete. And hold down the alt key and goto Layer, Merge visible. Now click Edit, Transform, Rotate 90 degrees CCW. Now go to Filter, Stylize, Wind, set the Method to Wind, Direction set it From the right, click OK. <br><br>Now go to filter, the last filter used, wind is on top. Select wind twice. Now goto Edit, Transform, Rotate 90 degrees CW to return the image rightside up again. <br><br>The reason we rotated the image is because the wind filter only works horizontally. Now go to Filter, Blur, Gaussian Blur, set the Radius to about 2.5. Click ok. <br><h3>Text Effect Color</h3>Next go to Image, Adjustment, Hue/Saturation. Select the colorize box. Now set hue to 38 and saturation to 100. Click OK. Now drag your top layer to the create a new layer button to duplicate it. Make sure the top fire layer is selected and change the blending mode to color dodge. <br><h3>Blending Effect Layers</h3>Now blend the two fire layers by going to Layer, Merge down. Now go to Filter - Liquify and select the first tool at the top of the left toolbar. Drag on the fire in an upward swirling pattern to create arched flames. Click ok. <br><h3>Final Color Layers</h3>Now let's move our original text layer above the fire layer. With our fire text layer selected right click or Ctrl + click on the mac on the fire text layer. Select blending options.Click on color overlay. The default color is red. Make sure color overlay is selected and click on the color box to change the color. <br><br>Choose a darker shade of red and click ok. Now click on inner glow. The default settings give us a nice warm glow. I'll stick with that and click OK. <br><br>We've just succeeded in creating a cool fire effect in Photoshop. Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_3619 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/southernfood/Buttermilk-Biscuits.htm Learn how to make the best homemade southern buttermilk buscuits that taste great with any meal. recipe,buttermilk,biscuit, buttermilk biscuits 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. recipe,buttermilk,biscuit, buttermilk biscuits Hi, I'm Jemme Beth Aldrige for About.com Food. <br/><br/>Today I'm going to show you how to make Southern Buttermilk Biscuits. These are the ingredients you'll need to make buttermilk biscuits: <br/>A pinch of salt, one and a half cups of flour, one tablespoon of baking powder, half a tablespoon of baking soda, two tablespoons of Crisco, and one cup of buttermilk. <br/><br/>Before you get started you're going to want to butter your pan with some Crisco. Preheat your oven to 400, put your pan in the oven and bring it back out so the Crisco is melted. That way you can have it ready for the biscuits. <br/><br/>When mixing the ingredients in the bowl, make sure you mix the dry ingredients before you mix the wet ingredients, and remember to add the buttermilk slowly. <br/><br/>So now you're going to mix the dry ingredients together. Pour your one and a half cups of flour, half a tablespoon of baking soda, one tablespoon of baking powder, and a pinch of salt into a bowl. <br/><br/>Next you add the Crisco, and half a cup of buttermilk. Add a little more, a little at a time. So this is about the consistency you are going to want- it's sticky but still firm. <br/><br/>Next you're going to flour up your cloth. You can use a dish rag or an old pillow case works just great. Just powder it with flour. You want to get a good amount of flour because your biscuit dough is definitely sticky. You're going to shake the powder onto the dough. <br/><br/>Then knead the dough three times. Now I don't have a rolling pin, so I'm going to use a bottle instead. You roll the dough to about half an inch thickness. Now you take a glass and flour the bottom of the glass. Place the glass (rim) in the dough and pull out. <br/><br/>Finally, you take the biscuit, and put it in the melted Crisco, and then flip it over. You're going to want to keep them in the oven for about 15 minutes, but check them because you want to notice them rising and getting fluffy, and they should start to turn a golden color. Make sure they don't get too brown. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching, to learn more visit us on the web at Food.About.com aboutvideo_7946 Wed, 30 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Idris-Elba-RocknRolla.htm During my interview with Gerard Butler, Idris Elba jumped in to say he and Butler are twins. While that's not quite the case, they do play partners in crime in the Guy Ritchie movie 'RocknRolla.' 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2008 San Diego Comic Con.<p> <h3>Idris Elba &#8211; 'Mumbles' in <i>RocknRolla</i></h3><p> Idris Elba: "Sorry I jumped into your interview there."<p> <b>That was cool. You and [Gerard Butler] are twins, huh?</b><p> Idris Elba: "We are not twins. Same dad."<p> <b>So you guys do play close compadres in this &#8211; partners in crime?</b><p> Idris Elba: "Yes. He plays One Two and I play Mumbles."<p> <b>Why aren't you Three Four?</b><p> Idris Elba: "No, see that wouldn't work out."<p> <b>Why?</b><p> Idris Elba: "One Two Three Four &#8211; they'd get confused. They'd have to say, 'One Two Mumbles,' and so we come over, yeah. I don't know. My character doesn't mumble, how about that?"<p> <b>So where did the nickname come from?</b><p> Idris Elba: "I don't know. It's Guy Ritchie's clever name."<p> <b>His twisted imagination.</b><p> Idris Elba: "There you go &#8211; twisted imagination."<p> <b>What is he like to work with?</b><p> Idris Elba: "Guy Ritchie's a good guy to work with. He's focused, he knows what he wants. He makes a good movie."<p> <b>And this is a twisted one, but it's a comedy, right?</b><p> Idris Elba: "There are so many characters in this and great actors, and a huge plot. But it's so funny. The action sequences are funny."<p> <b>How do you have funny action sequences?</b><p> Idris Elba: "Well, I'll tell you. I don't want to give away the game but there's one sequence where we're running away from these guys that just won't die. I mean, we bat him down, we shot them, we do this and they just keep getting up. And after a while it becomes comedy."<p> <b>So killing the same person over and over again is comedy in a Guy Ritchie movie.</b><p> Idris Elba: "Wait till you see it. Wait till you see it and you'll know exactly what I'm talking about. It's fu-larious. Fu-larious."<p> <b>That is a good word.</b><p> Idris Elba: "It's f* hilarious."<p> <b>Got it. You bleeped yourself. That was very nice of you.</b><p> Idris Elba: "I did. I wanted the editor to see that I was profanity conscious."<p> <b>How quickly do you sign on to a Guy Ritchie project?</b><p> Idris Elba: "I mean honestly, you've got to make sure it is what you can do. You know, Guy Ritchie has a certain style and I absolutely wanted to challenge myself and do that style, and you sign on. He called me and said, 'I'd love you to do it.' And, of course, I'd worked with Joel Silver before. Cool guys to make movies with, basically, and I said, 'Yeah, I want to do it.'"<p> <b>And he does this thing where he counts down 5, 4, 3, 2 before he does a scene. Tell me about that.</b><p> Idris Elba: "Weird, you know? You're not sure what's going on. It's like, 'Okay, we're going in 5, 4...,' 'Hold on, Guy,' '3,' 'No, wait Guy, honestly my pants, I need to pull my pants up,' '1, action!' And you're ready."<p> <b>And you've got to be ready no matter what?</b><p> Idris Elba: "Well, you're supposed to be."<p> <b>Is it a cool way to work?</b><p> Idris Elba: "If you pay attention, it is."<p> <b>Do you not pay attention on the set?</b><p> Idris Elba: "I always pay attention. Pay attention to me."<p> <b>And you've got <i>The Unborn</i> coming up.</b><p> Idris Elba: "<i>Unborn</i> is coming out, David Goyer's film. Me and Gary Oldman. Gary's a great guy, guys. He's fantastic. Odette Yustman's in that one. It's a good cast."<p> <h3>More on <i>RocknRolla</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/library/weekly/blrocknrollapicsa.htm"><i>RocknRolla</i> Photos</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/rocknrolla/ig/RocknRolla-Photos/index.htm">The <i>RocknRolla</i> Cast at Comic Con Photo Gallery</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/rocknrolla/"><i>RocknRolla</i> Trailer, Credits, and News</a></li><br> <li> More on <i>RocknRolla</i> Stars <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/butlergerard/">Gerard Butler</a></li> and <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/pivenjeremy/">Jeremy Piven</a><p aboutvideo_18584117 Mon, 10 Jul 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://home.about.com/z/cg/vp.htm?ch=health&l=health/v/10&ap=1 The USDA has released a new version of the food pyramid. Find out how to decipher the new guidelines. 2006 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Health/Nutrition ? Health/Weight Loss [intro] Back in 1992 when the U.S. government unveiled the Food Guide Pyramid, the plan was to provide a simple illustration that would make it easy for people eat more sensibly. Did it help? Not much. Americans weigh more today than ever. Portion sizes are bigger. Obesity is shortening life expectancy. Part of the problem was that the Food Guide Pyramid was based on questionable science. It didn't help that it hadn't changed in more than a decade even though our understanding of the way diet affects health has changed significantly. And of course most people didn't follow the guidelines anyway. [body] Hoping to remedy the situation, the USDA introduced a new pyramid in April 2005. Called MyPyramid, it's made up of six colorful stripes that are wide at the base and narrow at the top. Each color represents a different food group. Green for vegetables. Red for fruits. The orange stripe for grains is wider than the yellow stripe for oils. That's so you'll know which one you should eat more of, and which less. The new pyramid also features a human figure climbing a set of stairs to remind you to exercise regularly. One of the biggest changes between old and new is that now there are actually 12 pyramids. The USDA hopes you'll go to MyPyramid.com. There, if you enter your sex, age, and the amount of exercise you get every day, you'll see a more personalized plan that shows how much you should eat from each food group. The new pyramid also dispenses with those mysterious servings that the old pyramid recommended. Who ever really knew how much food "6 to 11 servings" of grain was, anyway? Instead, MyPyramid makes its recommendations in ounces and cups. While most observers agree that MyPyramid is an improvement, it has generated some controversy. A number of critics say the food industry played too big a role in developing the pyramid. The recommendation that people drink three glasses of milk is one example. That guideline is based on questionable science according to the Harvard School of Public Health. Others say the new pyramid should do more to discourage Americans from eating so much junk food. [close] Still, if you follow MyPyramid guidelines, odds are good you will eat healthier. Alternatively, you might try the Healthy Eating Pyramid from the Harvard School of Public Health. Developed to make up for shortcomings in MyPyramid, it differs in a number of significant ways. Instead of grouping fish, poultry and red meat into one "meat" category, it suggests that it's much better to eat fish, chicken, or eggs than steak. The Harvard pyramid also encourages people to eat lots of whole grains and avoid processed starch like white bread or white rice. In contrast, MyPyramid says it's fine to eat them in equal amounts, even though research shows that whole grains are much healthier. In the end, both pyramids are designed to help you pay closer attention to the food you eat. And, that is an essential step to achieving a healthier diet and ultimately improving your overall health. I'm Dr. Mona Khanna, About Health. aboutvideo_6360 Thu, 13 Mar 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/vegetarian/How-to-Make-Tofu-Turkey.htm For a hearty and filling vegetarian main dish, try making this delicious tofu turkey. It's the perfect recipe for a holiday or special occasion. tofu, turkey, holiday, recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. tofu, turkey, holiday, recipe Hi, I'm Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com. Whether you are a vegetarian or you are cooking for one, a tofu turkey is an elegant entree for holidays and other special occasions. <h3>Tofu Turkey Ingredients</h3> You will need:<ul> <li>5 blocks of firm tofu</li> <li>1/4 cup fresh herbs (thyme, sage and rosemary) </li> <li>1 tbsp bouillon powder</li> <li>2 tbsp poultry seasoning</li> </ul> You will also need a colander, cheesecloth, and a blender. <h3>Blend the Tofu</h3> Drain the tofu and add it in batches to the blender. Blend the blocks of tofu until they are smooth. Transfer the blended tofu to a large bowl. <h3>Prepare the Herbs</h3> Wash and dry the herbs and chop them finely. Add the herbs, the bouillon and the poultry seasoning to the tofu and mix them in. <h3>Drain the Tofu Mixture</h3> We will be using the colander to drain the tofu, so you will want to place it over a plate or bowl to catch the water that drips off. Line the colander one layer of cheesecloth. Then, transfer the tofu mixture into the colander. We will want to put some weight on the top to help it drain. I am going to use a plate and a heavy can. <h3>Refrigerate the Tofu Mix</h3> Place this in the refrigerator and let it drain for at least 2 hours but up to overnight. <h3>Mix the Tofu Turkey Marinated</h3> Now, we will make the marinade. You will need:<ul> <li>1/4 cup balsamic vinegar</li> <li>1/2 cup red wine</li> <li>1/4 cup fresh herbs</li> <li>1 tbsp bouillon powder</li> <li>2 tsp Dijon mustard</li> </ul> Chop the herbs, and then mix them together with the rest of the ingredients. When the marinade is done, make a stuffing you can use to fill the tofurkey. <h3>Form the Tofu Turkey</h3> When the tofu is done draining, unwrap the cheesecloth from the top of it. Scoop out the tofu in the center, leaving it about an inch thick around the outsides. Now, fill the cavity that you have created with the stuffing, and then cover it with the tofu you removed earlier. <h3>Bake the Tofu Turkey</h3> Transfer the tofu to a greased cooking sheet and brush it with the marinade. Place the tofurkey in the oven at 350 degrees for an hour and a half. Remove it every 15 minutes or so to reapply the marinade. When the tofurkey is finished, carve it and use the marinade, heated up, as a gravy. Garnished with parsley and served with your favorite sides, this makes an elegant vegetarian entree. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at About.com. aboutvideo_6833 Mon, 22 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/exercise/hip-streches.htm Learn how to increase hip flexibility to prevent hip pain and injury. hip stretch,hip opener,hip pain,injury prevention 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. hip stretch,hip opener,hip pain,injury prevention Hi, I'm Leslie Nesbitt for About.com Health. Today we're going to show you three great hip openers. <br/><br/><H3>Importance of Stretching for Hip Pain</H3><br/>This is a really important part of your work out and your stretching. The hips become very tight and congested, especially as we age. And that can lead to injury. so take some time, breathe deeply, and let me show you a couple of hip openers. <br/><br/><H3>Positioning for Hip Pain Prevention</H3><br/>Now I'm seated in a simple cross-legged position. From here start to walk the fingertips forward. Drop the chest down toward the shins and let the chin drop about half-way down to the chest. <br/><br/><H3>Advanced Hip Moves</H3><br/>For some people this is enough. If you need a little more you can walk forward so your chest is actually lying down on the shins. <br/><br/>When you come out of it make sure you come up very slowly. And then of course we want to re-cross to the less familiar side next and repeat the same move. <br/><br/><H3>Frog Pose for Hip Pain Prevention</H3><br/>Now let's go into a modified frog pose. This is a little more intermediate. I'm going to have you put the toes together, the big toes, and we're opening the knees up just as wide as you can. <br/><br/><H3>Variations on Frog Pose</H3><br/>If you have tender knees you can always pad them with an extra towel or mat. Now in this position if you're just starting out, sitting up is just fine. If you need a little more you can come down to the forearms. Also remember to drop your hips and bottom back toward your heels. If you need a little bit more from here, you can walk the hands forward, drop the forearms perhaps to the floor, or line those ears up with the arms. <br/><br/>Once again you want to come out of this very slowly. Taking care with those hips. <br/><br/><H3>Final Hip Pain Prevention Stretch</H3><br/>The final move, this is a little more advanced. Come onto the hands and knees. Cross one knee over the other and make sure that one knee is on the floor. The most important part here is to move slowly. Open your feet up as wide as you can and then start to drop your bottom back to the floor. <br/>For many of us this is enough in this position. Now you can modify it by taking a blanket or a block and placing that between those feet that are opened up so that as you sit back you have some support. <br/><br/><H3>Listening to your Body for Hip Pain Prevention</H3><br/>Your body's always going to tell you what to do so just keep listening to it. For many of us this is enough of a hip opener, breathing deeply 4 or 5 times. If you need a little bit more you can come forward, chest over that front knee, holding and breathing, that's really going to open up and stretch those hips. <br/><br/>To learn more, visit us on the Web at Health.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_6846 Thu, 15 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/PHOTO-FRAMES-IN-PHOTOSHOP--.htm Make your favorite photo look polished and elegant- learn how to add a tasteful faux frame to the image itself with Adobe Photoshop. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Art,Graphic Design,Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Art,Graphic Design,Design Hi, I m Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll teach you how to create a realistic tasteful photo-frame for your pictures in Photoshop CS2. I've already got Photoshop open with a picture. <br><h3>Setting Canvas Settings</h3>After your photo is open go to Image, Canvas Size. This brings up the canvas size window. Check the box for relative. And change your measure of units to pixels under width and height. <br><br>Make sure the canvas extension color is set to white. Under width and height I'll use 50 for both and click, OK. <br><br>There we go, a very basic no frills frame for our photos. We could stop there, but let's take it a step further. <br><h3>Additional Frame Lines</h3>Click on the rectangular marquee tool on your left hand toolbar, and let's create a smaller rectangle halfway between the outside frame and picture. Now click on create a new layer. And double-click on the layer name and name it inside border. <br><h3>Photoshop Photo Frame Fills and Effects</h3>Now fill the inside border by going to Edit, Fill. Under contents we'll change use to Black and click, OK. We lost our picture, but don't worry, it's just hidden for the moment. <br><br>Our rectangle is still selected, but we need to contract it. So go to Select, Modify, and hit CONTRACT. Insert a value of 3, and click OK. <br><br>Now we'll go back to Edit, Fill, and under contents we'll change the use to White and click, OK. The inner white rectangle is still selected so hit delete, or go to Edit, Clear to remove the white rectange. <br><br>And hit ctrl + D on pc, or CMD + D on mac to collapse the rectangle. We've got a tasteful looking inner border now. <br><h3>Frame Shadows</h3>We could stop there, but let's take it one step further and play with the blending options. Double click on the inside border layer icon. Click on Dropshadow. The default options are alright, nothing great, I tend to like things more subtle. Change the distance to 0, the spread to 0, and a size of 5. I'll take the opacity down to 50 percent. I'll use the multiply blending mode and click OK. <br><br>I use this because it just gives a picture a subtle amount of depth to make it stand out. <br><br>And that's how you create a realistic photo frame. Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_5525 Mon, 26 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/busycooks/Fruit-Tacos.htm Not sure what to serve the guests at your child's birthday party? These fruit tacos are fun to make and taste great, too. Find out how to set up a fruit taco buffet. fruit tacos,kid's parties,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. fruit tacos,kid's parties,videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make fruit tacos. <h3>Fruit Taco Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>taco shells</li> <li>fresh fruit, like nectarines, strawberries, and bananas</li> <li>2-3 tablespoons orange juice</li> <li>small yogurts of different flavors and colors</li> <li>a variety of chopped or sliced nuts</li> <li>a collection of bowls and spoons</li> </ul> <h3>Bake the Taco Shells</h3> Place the taco shells on an aluminum foil-lined baking sheet. Spread them out all around the sheet. Put them in a 325 degree oven and heat for about 5-7 minutes. <h3>Cut the Fresh Fruit</h3> Meanwhile, cut the fruit and place each of them in separate bowls. For pitted fruit, cut around the pit and slice the fruit. <br><br> You can cut the fruit into very small pieces so it's easier to spoon out of the bowl later. Be sure to hull the strawberries so everything in the bowl is ready to eat. <br><br> To keep the fruit fresh and moist, add a little orange juice in each bowl and coat the fruit. Place a spoon in each bowl. <h3>Put the Yogurts in Bowls</h3> Then, lay out each yogurt flavor also on aluminum foil-lined trays or sheets. This will catch any spills or drips. Peel off the tops and put a small spoon in each yogurt flavor. <br><br> You can see this yogurt has bright fun colors for kids. You can use plastic spoons and bowls for an easy clean up. Also place spoons in the bowls with the nuts. <h3>Set Up the Fruit Taco Buffet</h3> Set up your buffet with first the taco shells, then the bowls of fruit, then the tray of yogurt, and the nuts last. <br><br> Invite your birthday party guests to fill their tacos with their favorite fruits, spoon on some yogurt, and finally top it off with some nuts. Your guests will love this creative, interactive, and healthy snack. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com aboutvideo_5254 Mon, 17 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/alcoholism/Drug-Addiction.htm Drug use can lead to drug addiction and dependence. Learn more about drug addiction and treatment for drug addiction. drug addiction, drug dependence, drug use, drug treatment 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. drug addiction, drug dependence, drug use, drug treatment <h3>How the Brain Works</h3> The brain is composed of millions of interconnecting nerve cells, called neurons. In order for the brain to function so that a person can think, move, or feel, these neurons must communicate. They do so by receiving, processing, and sending chemical signals called neurotransmitters. When a neurotransmitter is released from one neuron it binds to another at a specific site called a receptor, much like the way a key fits into a lock. If the key fits, the receiving neuron will be able to process the signal and send it on. <h3>Physical Effects of Drug Use</h3> A drug is any substance that, once inside the body, changes how the body works. Drugs can be swallowed, sniffed, inhaled, injected, absorbed through the skin, or dropped into the eye. No matter the route of administration, most drugs will eventually travel through the circulatory system and reach the brain. <br><br> In the brain, drugs can affect almost any step in the communication between neurons by increasing or decreasing the amount of neurotransmitter that reaches the receiving neuron. A drug can also bind directly to a receptor in place of a neurotransmitter. In the case of drug abuse, the interference in nerve communication often causes a temporary pleasurable sensation. <h3>What Is Drug Addiction?</h3> With drug addiction, a person craves the pleasurable sensation produced by a drug and compulsively uses it despite its negative consequences. <br><br> The use of certain kinds of drugs may also produce a physical addiction or dependence, meaning that the drug must be present for the body to function normally. In this case, when the drug is withdrawn, the user may experience mild to severe effects ranging from nausea to death. <h3>Treatment for Drug Addiction</h3> There are many ways to treat a person with drug addiction, and a physician-supervised program is the most appropriate and safe type of management.<br><br>Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_4686 Tue, 18 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/lowfatcooking/Low-Fat-Black-Bean-Soup.htm This simple but tasty black bean soup makes a hearty and filling meal. Top it off with a dollop of low fat sour cream and enjoy! black bean soup, low fat, recipe, soup 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. black bean soup, low fat, recipe, soup Hi I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make black bean soup. <h3>Black Bean Soup Ingredients</h3> For this recipe you will need:<ul> <li>2 cans black beans, drained and rinsed</li> <li>2 c. of fat free, reduced sodium chicken broth</li> <li>1 c. medium salsa</li> <li>1 tsp ground cumin</li> <li>4 tbsp low fat or fat-free sour cream</li> <li>2 tbsp fresh chopped cilantro </li> </ul> <h3>Blend the Soup Ingredients</h3> First pour 1/2 of the beans into a blender. Then add the chicken broth, the salsa, and the cumin. Blend these ingredients together for about 10 seconds, so it is lightly pureed. To make a slow-sodium version of this soup, you could use tomatoes instead of the salty salsa. <h3>Heat the Black Bean Soup</h3> Then, place a saucepan over medium heat. Combine the pureed bean mixture with remaining beans. Cook this until the soup is hot. <h3>Serve the Low Fat Black Bean Soup</h3> Next, ladle soup into your bowl. Top each bowl with one tablespoon of sour cream and garnish with a tbsp. of the chopped cilantro. Serve and enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5758 Mon, 29 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/candy/Chocolate-Mint-Truffles.htm Truffles may taste rich and decadent, but they are surprisingly easy to make at home. Try your hand at these chocolate mint truffles, the perfect gift for any chocolate lover. chocolate, truffle, candy, mint, dessert 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. chocolate, truffle, candy, mint, dessert Hi, I'm Chef John Mitzewich for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make hand-rolled chocolate mint truffles. <h3>Prepare the Chocolate</h3> Okay, we're going to start with some really good chocolate, 1 pound of dark chocolate, I'm using bittersweet, but semi-sweet is fine, but use something high quality. We're going to use 1 cup of heavy cream. <br><br>All right, we have to break up the chocolate into small pieces, and if you use your hand you know what you are going to do? Eat some, and then the proportions will be off. So use a knife and cut it into small pieces about 1/4 to 1/2 inch in size. <h3>Prepare the Heavy Cream</h3> Put you cream on the stove to boil. Do not walk away because it will boil over, it always does, that's the nature of cream. As soon as it comes to a boil you're going to quickly pour it over your chocolate. We're going to let it sit for 60 seconds. You're going to add your pure mint extract; I'm using 1 tsp. <h3>Make the Chocolate Ganache</h3> Now, we're going to slowly stir in the center of the bowl. I can't think of anything that looks so ugly, and then all of a sudden looks so beautiful as making truffles. So, you're going to slowly stir the center and eventually the melted chocolate and cream will come together. And what forms is that beautiful, shiny, what's known as a ganache. <br><br>By the way, that one of my favorite food words of all time&#133;"Ganache," which just is melted chocolate and cream. There is plenty of heat in that boiling cream to melt all the chocolate since we cut it in those small pieces. We're going to take a spatula and scrape down all the sides, and we have to chill this. <h3>Chill the Chocolate</h3> So, throw some plastic wrap on it and chill it in the fridge for at least an hour. And when it comes out it will be nice and firm and easy to work with. We're going to need some cocoa to roll these in. And the production could not be easier. <h3>Roll the Chocolate Into Truffles</h3> Simply form these into balls, I used a sorbet scoop, you can use a teaspoon, a melon baller, or anything you want. Throw them into the cocoa and roll them around. Now, here is a little controversy. Truffle "purists" don't roll them between their fingers like this, they leave them rough because they are actually suppose to look like the truffle from the ground. That's why the cocoa is on there, it's supposed to look like dirt. So, I guess I'm not a purist because I do roll them. <h3>Chocolate Truffle Texture</h3> And, because I can never transfer these to a plate without getting cocoa everywhere, I dust the whole plate with cocoa - see I cheated. I put a sprig of mint so people know what they are eating. And there is the perfect truffle bite. You can tell it has the perfect texture because it holds the teeth marks. I'm not kidding about that; if it was too soft you would not see that definition, if it was too firm, or didn't have enough cream, it would crumble. <br><br> Anyway, these make an incredible holiday gift. They are great for the holiday table. And you could just make them and eat them. So I hope you give them a try. Making truffles is super-easy. And, most importantly, enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6526 Wed, 16 Apr 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Sarah-Marshall-Premiere.htm Producer Judd Apatow (the man behind 'Knocked Up,' '40 Year Old Virgin,' and 'Superbad') joined the stars and director of 'Forgetting Sarah Marshall' for the film's world premiere in Hollywood. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the World Premiere of <i>Forgetting Sarah Marshall</i>.<p> <h3>Judd Apatow (Producer of <i>Forgetting Sarah Marshall</i>)</h3><p> <b>Jason [Segel] blamed being naked in this movie on you. He says you've been trying to get him naked forever, since <i>Freaks and Geeks</i>. Is that true?</b><p> Judd Apatow: "There's really no one in any of these movies I'm not trying to get naked. I just think everyone should be naked, and I think every part should be seen. It's not that there's a specific part I'm trying to expose. I want all of it. Janet Jackson set us back way too many years. We've got to fight to get that ground back."<p> <b>You want to do just a pure everybody naked movie?</b><p> Judd Apatow: "You know, I think we should do just a production of <i>Hair</i>, you know? And we'll just let the sun shine in and like do it with everyone naked."<p> <b>Sounds good. And Russell Brand says you're working together again and he says it might even be a spin-off of this character. Or is it going to be something totally different?</b><p> Judd Apatow: "He is working on a movie with Nick Stoller, the director of this, which is a little bit in the same universe of 'celebrity losing his mind', which Russell seems to understand &#150; I guess."<p> <h3>Kristen Bell ('Sarah Marshall' in <i>Forgetting Sarah Marshall</i>)</h3><p> <b>What makes Judd Apatow's movies so special? Why is it that he connects with the audiences?</b><p> Kristen Bell: "I think because he puts a lot of thought and intelligence behind them, and he assembles a group of writers that just are sort of reinventing the R-rated comedy. I think he speaks from a male perspective, and so often the comedies that we've seen more recently that have failed, have been a little softer, I guess. He doesn't get offensive but he does keep a little bit more of the male perspective involved."<p> <b>How does it feel to be part of the gang?</b><p> Kristen Bell: "Dreamy."<p> <h3>Nicholas Stoller (Director of <i>Forgetting Sarah Marshall</i>)</h3><p> <b>How tough was it to direct someone who is your friend, naked? It's not like you guys are just director/actor. You two are friends.</b><p> Nicholas Stoller: "I mean, you know, as a guy you spend years in male locker rooms. It's not like that weird. I guess what was weird is that everyone else is clothed and staring and kind of bored. He was terrified."<p> <b>Bored?</b><p> Nicholas Stoller: "Well, you know, you're on a set so everyone is shooting. We did like a million takes of that. And so it was kind of a funny situation where he was terrified and nervous and was like, 'I don't want to do it,' and I was like, 'Why did you write it into your script?'"<p> <b>You did a million takes of it? Was that because he wasn't comfortable doing this or you just wanted to punish him because you've always wanted to do that to him?</b><p> Nicholas Stoller: "He was a total pro. Jason was a total pro. His penis, not so much. Not so much. His penis was a little green. It got very nervous."<p> <b>That's kind of gross.</b><p> Nicholas Stoller: "Yeah, I guess that is a little gross. But that's the truth, metaphorically."<p> <b>The Muppet movie, are you going to have male Muppets crying in that?</b><p> Nicholas Stoller: "No crying male Muppets but a lot of puppet penis."<p> <b>So there's an R-rated Muppet movie?</b><p> Nicholas Stoller: "No, it's not going to be R-rated. It's going to be a PG-rated movie."<p> <b>How tough is that for you?</b><p> Nicholas Stoller: "You know, there's an essential sweetness to all these movies. I feel like it's just you eliminate the curse words, the sex, the male full frontal, and then you write an entirely new script and you shoot that."<p> <b>Is it going to be populated with all the guys from Judd Apatow's crew?</b><p> Nicholas Stoller: "We definitely want to get as many cameos as possible. That was such the core, well, not the core, but a big part of the early Muppet movies, so we want to try to do that, definitely."<p> <b>How do you become part of his group in the first place? Is it like an initiation you go through?</b><p> Nicholas Stoller: "We're just all friends, and you have to murder someone."<p> <b>That's what Bill Hader said.</b><p> Nicholas Stoller: "You have to murder someone."<p> <b>He said he killed a 9-year-old.</b><p> Nicholas Stoller: "Basically you walk into Judd's office and he just says a number and that's the age of the person you have to kill."<p> <b>What was your number?</b><p> Nicholas Stoller: "Mine was&#133; It was really sad. It was 94. It's hard to find someone who's 94, first of all. It's not that hard to murder them."<p> <b>Do you guys have your own gang signs?</b><p> Nicholas Stoller: "We do have our gang signs. We actually don't have gang signs."<p> <b>Do you have a gang name?</b><p> Nicholas Stoller: "All right, the Apatown."<p> <b>Okay, that's kind of okay. Not quite as catchy as the Rat Pack.</b><p> Nicholas Stoller: "We actually call ourselves the Bloods as well, so it's kind of awkward because the Crips always want to fight us. We're like, 'No, we're the <i>other</i> Bloods.' So the Crips are like, 'Oh, sorry, awkward.' So there's a lot of awkward situations."<p> <b>Because I don't think you guys could really stand up against them.</b><p> Nicholas Stoller: "Well, I mean, that's your opinion. But I think&#133; We'll see. No, we definitely, if there are any Crips watching, we couldn't definitely not take you on. Definitely not. I want to be very clear about that. There's no way in a million years. We bow down before your abilities."<p> <h3>Jason Segel (Writer of and 'Peter' in <i>Forgetting Sarah Marshall</i>)</h3><p> <b>When's the sequel coming out?</b><p> Jason Segel: "I don't think there'll be a sequel anytime soon, but we are doing a new movie for Judd called <i>Five Year Engagement</i> which is about relationships over a long period of time, so I'm very excited about that."<p> <b>What's the appeal of relationship stories for you?</b><p> Jason Segel: "Basically Nick and I are the least macho guys in Hollywood and so we enjoy writing about relationships. Simple as that."<p> <b>And working with Russell Brand, what's he like on the set?</b><p> Jason Segel: "He's a comic genius. I feel so lucky to have found him. It's unbelievable."<p> <b>Did you really write the part for him after you met him?</b><p> Jason Segel: "Yeah, we changed it. It was originally a British author and we changed it to be a rock star because he was so brilliant."<p> <h3>More Coverage of <i>Forgetting Sarah Marshall</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://video.about.com/movies/Russell-Brand-Sarah-Marshall.htm">One on One with Russell Brand</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://video.about.com/movies/Bill-Hader-Interview.htm">Interview with Bill Hader</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://video.about.com/movies/Jason-Segel-Interview.htm">Jason Segel Interview</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://video.about.com/movies/Kristen-Bell-Interview.htm">Kristen Bell Interview</a></li><br><li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/forgettingsarahmarshall/ig/Forgetting-Sarah-Marshall-Pics/index.htm"><i>Forgetting Sarah Marshall</i> Photos</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/forgettingsarahmarshall/"><i>Forgetting Sarah Marshall</i> Trailer, Videos, Poster and Credits</a></li><p> aboutvideo_5212 Thu, 04 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/orthopedics/Tennis-Elbow.htm Tennis elbow is an injury to the elbow's tendon that develops because of repetitive motion. Learn more about what causes tennis elbow and how to treat it. tennis elbow, tendonitis 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. tennis elbow, tendonitis <h3>The Body's Skeletal System</h3>The skeletal system is the framework for the body. It gives the body shape, protects internal organs, and allows movement.<BR> <h3>Injuring the Tendons</h3>Movement is accomplished by an interaction of the bones with muscles, ligaments, and tendons. However, sudden injuries or repeated physical stress can damage the tendons that attach muscles to the bones.<BR> <h3>What Is "Tennis Elbow"?</h3>For example, one common injury affects a tendon that anchors the extensor carpi radialis muscles of the lower arm to the outside bump, or epicondyle, of the elbow.<BR> <BR>Because this muscle is used to pull the hand backwards, as in a backhanded tennis swing, the injury is often called "tennis elbow."<BR> <h3>How Tennis Elbow Develops</h3>The repetitive movements required during tennis, as well as with painting and many other tasks, put stress on this tendon and causes small tears. Inflammation, or tendonitis, can then develop, and will be accompanied by soreness or pain on the outside of the upper arm near the elbow.<BR> <h3>Treating Tennis Elbow</h3>Treatment of tennis elbow often involves rest and immobilization of the arm. A brace may also be beneficial primarily because it prohibits use of the elbow.<br><br>Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_4203 Mon, 23 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/Chocolate-Bundt-Cake.htm Thanks to their unique shape, bundt cakes are known for being rich and moist. Watch how to make one from scratch, plus how to make a glaze. dessert videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. dessert videos Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I am going to show you how to make a bundt cake from scratch. <h3>The Shape of Bundt Cakes</h3> Bundt cakes are made in a distinctive deep pan with a hole in the center. This shape allows the batter to retain a lot of its moisture as it cooks, so you end up with an incredibly rich cake. <h3>Bundt Cake Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you need:<ul> <li>1 1/2 sticks butter</li> <li>1 cup flour</li> <li>3/4 cups sugar</li> <li>3 eggs</li> <li>1 cup confectioners sugar</li> <li>1/2 cup cocoa powder</li> <li>1 cup chopped walnuts</li> </ul> <h3>Combine the Bundt Cake Ingredients</h3> Begin by preheating the oven to 350. Now, grease and flour the cake pan. You want your butter to be soft, at room temperature. <br><br> We will begin by mixing it together with the sugar in a large bowl. When the butter and sugar are mixed together, after a minute or two, you will begin adding the eggs. Add them one at a time, beating them in before adding the next. <br><br> Add the confectioners sugar gradually, while continuously mixing the batter. Next, we will add the flour, the cocoa, and the walnuts, and stir these in by hand. <h3>Bake and Serve the Bundt Cake</h3> Pour the batter into the cake pan. Put the cake in the oven, and bake it for about 40 minutes. <br><br> Remove the cake from the oven, and let it cool in its pan for an hour or so. You can serve the cake as is, or glaze it with a mixture of one cup confectioners sugar and two tablespoons milk. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5511 Tue, 27 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Avocado-Stuffed-Chicken.htm Delight your dinner guests by pairing the fresh taste of avocados with moist chicken breasts. Zesty spices and sweet onion give this crowd pleaser an extra kick. avocado stuffed chicken,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. avocado stuffed chicken,recipes,videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I am going to show you how to make avocado-stuffed chicken. <h3>Avocado-Stuffed Chicken Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>4 chicken breasts, pounded flat</li> <li>2 avocados</li> <li>3 tablespoons lime juice</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon pepper</li> <li>1 teaspoon garlic powder</li> <li>1/2 cup fresh, minced basil leaves</li> <li>1 large diced tomato</li> <li>1/2 cup chopped sweet onion</li> <li>pepper mill</li> </ul> <h3>Slice the Avocados</h3> Preheat the oven to 350 degrees. Cut the avocados lengthwise all the way around. Twist the halves and using your knife, strike and remove the pit. <br><br> With a large spoon, scoop the avocado out of its peel. Then, with a small paring knife, slice the avocado lengthwise. <h3>Make the Stuffing Mixture</h3> Place the slices in a mixing bowl. Add the lime juice, the pepper, the garlic powder, the minced basil, the diced tomato, and the chopped onion. Mix this all together. <h3>Stuff the Chicken Breasts</h3> Next, lightly oil a baking dish with cooking spray. Now, lay a piece of chicken out on a flat surface. <br><br> Scoop out a spoonful of the mixture and lay it onto a chicken breast. Roll the meat over the mixture and tuck in the ends. <br><br> Place the stuffed chicken in the dish. Do this with all of the chicken; aim to use just about half of your avocado mixture. Then sprinkle the top of the chicken with the cracked peppercorns. <h3>Bake the Avocado Stuffed Chicken</h3> Place them in the oven and bake for 45 minutes. I like to serve this chicken with brown rice. Lay a piece of chicken against the rice and then spoon the more of the avocado mixture all around the chicken. Enjoy! <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5587 Fri, 28 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/animation/Create-a-Shape-Tween-in-Flash.htm You don't need to be David Copperfield to turn a square into a circle. By creating a shape tween in Flash, you can make one shape morph into another. shape tweening,flash animation,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. shape tweening,flash animation,videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to create a shape tween in Adobe Flash. <h3>What is a Shape Tween?</h3> A shape tween is when you turn one shape into another. In this video I'll show you how to make a square morph into a circle. <br><br> What's great about a shape tween is that you only have to specify what the beginning of the animation looks like and what the end looks like. Flash takes care of everything in between. <h3>Create the Starting Point of the Animation</h3> Once you have Flash open, go to the circle. Make sure that you are at your first keyframe. Click on the square. <br><br> I'll change the colors, and then drag out a square. This will be the starting point of the animation. <h3>Insert a Blank Keyframe</h3> Now I need to decide how long the animation is going to be. I'll click on a keyframe and insert a blank keyframe. <br><br> It's important that you don't choose to insert a regular keyframe. If you do, Flash will look back to the previous keyframe and copy the square into this position. <br><br> We want a circle to show up here, so we'd have to delete it, draw the circle, and do a bit more. A blank keyframe keeps the stage empty at this time. <br><br> Go up to 'Insert,' 'Timeline,' and 'Blank Keyframe.' <h3>Draw a Circle on the Stage</h3> Notice my playhead is now over my final keyframe. I'll select the oval tool and play with the colors. <br><br> I'll draw a circle on my stage. Notice that all my frames before this one contain the square. <h3>Turn On Shape Tweeing</h3> To make the square morph into the circle, I need to turn on shape tweening by clicking on the first frame in the animation. <br><br> In the properties inspector, I need to choose 'Shape' from the tween dropdown menu. Notice the change in my timeline. <br><br> All the frames between my first and last keyframe are tinted and there is an arrow that appears. <h3>Check the Animation</h3> Now we can see the shape tween by dragging my playhead through the timeline. I can preview the animation and watch the effect. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_3926 Wed, 23 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/Croissant-Recipe.htm Whether you're planning a special breakfast or are craving a buttery treat, these croissants are quick and easy to whip up. croissants,breakfast,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. croissants,breakfast,videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make croissants from scratch. This recipe is from Red Star Yeast. <h3>Ingredients for Croissants</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1/2 cup water</li> <li>1/3 cup evaporated milk</li> <li>3 tablespoons butter, room temperature</li> <li>2 eggs, one at room temperature</li> <li>1 1/2 teaspoon salt</li> <li>3 tablespoons sugar</li> <li>3 cups bread flour</li> <li>2 1/4 teaspoons active dry yeast</li> </ul> <h3>Mix the Croissant Ingredients</h3> In one bowl, combine the yeast, salt, sugar, and 1 cup of flour. Set aside. <br><br> In another bowl, mix the water and milk. Warm up the mixture on the stove or in the microwave until it is between 120 and 130 degrees. <h3>Make the Dough</h3> I'm going to use my stand mixer to make the dough. In a mixing bowl, first combine the dry mixture, then the milk and water mixture, and then the butter. <br><br> Now I'm going to attach the beater. Beat for about four minutes on medium speed. Next, add 1 egg and beat for another minute. <h3>Knead the Dough</h3> Then, switch the beaters to a dough hook attachment. Gradually add the remaining flour, and knead for five to seven minutes, until the dough is smooth and elastic. <h3>Grease and Refrigerate the Dough</h3> While the dough is kneading, lightly oil a bowl a mixing bowl. Remove the dough hook, and place the dough in the bowl. Rotate the dough so the top is also greased. <br><br> Cover and refrigerate the dough for two hours. Most croissant recipes call for a lot of folding and refrigerating, sometimes totaling 12 hours or more. <br><br> Since this recipe takes less time, the croissants will look a little like crescent rolls. But they'll still taste like croissants. <h3>Divide and Cut the Dough</h3> After the dough has rested, lightly flour a rolling surface and rolling pin. Put down the dough and knead about six times to release all the air bubbles. <br><br> Then, divide it into three parts. Roll each part into a 14-inch circle. With a sharp knife or pizza cutter, cut the circle into eight pie-shaped wedges. <h3>Shape the Croissants</h3> Now, roll each wedge, starting with wide part and rolling towards the point. Place them on a paper-lined sheet, with the point side facing down. Then, curve them into a crescent shape. <br><br> Preheat the oven to 350 degrees. Let the shaped croissants rise for another 15 minutes while the oven reheats. <h3>Bake the Croissants</h3> The last step is to combine a slightly beaten egg and 1 tablespoon of water. Brush the croissants with the egg mixture; this will give them a nice golden color. <br><br> Bake for 15 to 18 minutes. When they are golden brown, remove the croissants from the sheets and place them on a wire rack to cool. Serve with butter or jam, and enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4865 Wed, 11 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/candy/Peanut-Butter-Eyeballs.htm Scare up some fun in the kitchen with candy peanut butter eyeballs, a fun and tasty confection for Halloween or any spooky occasion. peanut butter, eyeball candy, candy, hallween 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. peanut butter, eyeball candy, candy, hallween Hi, I'm Elizabeth LaBau with About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make peanut butter eyeballs for Halloween. <h3>Peanut Butter Eyeball Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need: <li>1/2 cup smooth peanut butter</li> <li>3 tbsp. butter, softened</li> <li>1 1/4 cups powdered sugar</li> <li>1 tsp. vanilla extract</li> <li>6 oz. white chocolate candy coating</li> <li>1 small bag M&Ms</li> <li>red decorator frosting</li> <h3>Mix the Peanut Butter Eyeball Ingredients</h3> In the bowl of a large mixer, blend peanut butter and butter until creamy. Add the powdered sugar and vanilla to peanut butter mixture and continue beating until it comes together and looks like a thick cookie dough. <h3>Form the Candy Eyeballs</h3> Using a spoon, scoop out balls of peanut butter candy and roll between your palms to get them as round as possible. Place them on the cookie sheet and put them in a refrigerator or freezer for at least 30 minutes. <h3>Coat the Peanut Butter Balls</h3> In separate bowls, melt the white chocolate coatings in the microwave. Stir after every minute until it is smooth throughout. Use two forks to dip the peanut butter balls into the chocolate coating. <h3>Decorate the Candy Eyeballs</h3> While the chocolate is still wet, press an M&M candy in the center for the iris. Return the eyes to the refrigerator to harden. Once the eyeballs are firm, use a knife to cut the excess chocolate from around the base. Use the red decorator frosting to make squiggly or straight blood vessels. <br><br> And that is how you make peanut butter eyeballs. Thanks for watching, to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6767 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/autorepair/Cleaning-Your-Battery-Posts.htm Learn how to clean and maintain your car battery posts with these simple tools. Keep your car running safely and efficiently. car battery,batter posts,car corrosion,auto maintenance,car maintenance 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. car battery,batter posts,car corrosion,auto maintenance,car maintenance Hi, I'm Barbara Terry for About.com Autos. It is essential to keep corrosion off of your battery posts in order to keep your vehicle running properly. <br/><H3>Traditional Car Battery Cleaning</H3>There are traditional ways to do this, then there is a trick of the trade that will simply amaze you. Before anti-corrosion sprays were invented, people would refer to the old wire brush in order to get the corrosion off your battery post. <br/><H3>Sprays and Brushes for Car Battery Cleaning</H3>I've already loosened my battery cable today so I'm going to simply slip it on and twist it around until you get all the corrosion off your post. Or, if you prefer, use an anti-corrosion spray. This is a really simple thing to do also. You're going to spray it on, wait a minute or so, and then wash it off with warm water. <br/><H3>Car Battery Trick of the Trade</H3>Or, a little trick of the trade that I was talking about earlier, it's really a cool amazing trick, is literally a can of Coca-Cola. What you'll do is open it up and pour it onto the corrosion. Watch it bubble up, it literally eats the corrosion off of there. Again, wait a minute and wash it with warm water. And it's just that simple. <br/><H3>When to Check your Car Battery</H3>If you're having a hard time getting your car started it may just be that there's corrosion on the battery post. If so, try one of the 3 methods that we demonstrated today, then try starting your car again. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Autos.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_5395 Fri, 17 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/interiordec/Wrap-an-Extension-Cord.htm Don't leave your extension cord tied up in knots. Watch how to wrap it up, so the cord won't bind or twist. interior decorating videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. interior decorating videos Hi, my name is Keith Stephens for About.com Home. Today I'm going to show you how to wrap an extension cord properly. Let's get started. <h3>How Improper Wrapping Can Damage a Cord</h3> Do you have an extension cord that is twisted and distorted? It probably has been wrapped around your hand and elbow a few too many times. <br><br> This will mess up the PVC cord that contains filler fibers within the cord. These filler fibers are there to separate the wires within the extension cord, but will bind and twist if wrapped improperly. <h3>Wrap the Extension Cord</h3> The first thing we will need is an extension cord, Velcro tie or zip tie <br><br> Begin by holding the cord with either end facing away from you. Start by folding the cord over hand, then twist your hand palm facing up to wrap under. <br><br> Then back to over and then to under. You repeat the process until wrapped. <br><br> The great thing about this way of wrapping is that it protects the wiring on the inside from twisting and is easy to unwrap. <h3>Secure the Cord With a Tie</h3> Once wrapped, do not tie the cord off with the end of the extension cord, as this bends the wires inside. You can use a zip tie, or a Velcro wrap to keep it secured. <br><br> Using this technique will guarantee a longer life for your cords. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at homegarden.about.com. aboutvideo_5535 Wed, 19 Mar 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/kidscooking/Homemade-Apple-Ices.htm Apple ices are a sweet treat that will cool down your little ones on those balmy summer days. See how to make this simple apple slush at home! apple, ice, dessert, slush 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. apple, ice, dessert, slush Hi, I am Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I am going to show you how to make homemade apple ices. <h3>Apple Ice Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 cup sugar</li> <li>1/2 cup water</li> <li>2 cups of apple juice</li> <li>2 tablespoons of lemon juice. </li> </ul> <h3>Make a Sugar Syrup</h3> First place a saucepan on the stove top over medium high heat. Pour in the sugar and water. Stir until the mixture comes to a gentle boil. Then turn the heat down to a simmer until the sugar dissolves. After about 3 minutes, and the syrup is slightly thickened, remove the saucepan from the heat and let it cool. <h3>Mix the Apple and Lemon Juice</h3> Pour the apple juice into a shallow pan or glass baking dish. Pour in the lemon juice and give it a stir. <h3>Sweeten the Apple Ice Mixture</h3> Measure out 3/4 of a cup of the sugar syrup. Pour it into the dish with the apple and lemon juice. Stir it again. If you prefer sweeter ices, add more sugar syrup. <h3>Freeze the Apple Ice</h3> Place the glass dish in the freezer. After 20 minutes, remove the apple ice from the freezer. Break up the frozen bits and make slush. Place it back in the freezer and scrape again after another 30 minutes. Another method is to just leave the apple ice in the freezer overnight and scrape it from the solid block. <br><br> Collect a bowlful of scrapings for a cool treat. Enjoy! <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5815 Tue, 20 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/golosangeles/LA-s-Topanga-Canyon.htm Topanga Canyon is a natural refuge far from the freeways of L.A. topanga, canyon, los, angeles, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. topanga, canyon, los, angeles, california Topanga Canyon is a natural refuge far from the freeways of L.A. aboutvideo_6079 Thu, 15 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/japanesefood/Tempura-Fried-Ice-Cream.htm Ever think a cool treat like ice cream would make a good tempura? See how to fry ice cream with just a few simple ingredients. fried ice cream, tempura, japanese food, dessert 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. fried ice cream, tempura, japanese food, dessert Hi! My name is Ivan from Sushi Twist in New York City, and for About.com, I'm going to show you how to make tempura ice cream. <h3>Tempura Fried Ice Cream Ingredients</h3> You will need:<ul> <li>clear wrap <li>2 scoops of ice cream</li> <li>12 oz. flour</li> <li>6 oz. water</li> <li>1 egg</li> <li>4 slices of pound cake</li> </ul> And as an optional topping, wafer cookie, whipped cream, cherry, chocolate sauce and strawberry sauce. <h3>Start the Ice Cream Roll</h3> First, lay four thinly sliced pieces of pound cake two-by-two on a square. Then, place the ice cream in the middle of the pound cake. <h3>Roll and Freeze the Ice Cream</h3> Then roll the pound cake onto clear wrap. Wrap tightly and place in freezer, and let sit until completely frozen. <h3>Mix and Batter the Fried Ice Cream Tempura</h3> When you are ready to eat, first you have to mix the water and flour and egg into a bowl until consistent. Remove wrap and roll in dough and batter. <h3>Fry the Ice Cream</h3> Next, drop the batter covered ice cream into the deep fryer for 20 to 30 seconds. If you do not have a deep fryer, you can just use a hot pot of oil. Next remove and let cool for a few seconds, then cut into five or six pieces. If you prefer, you can add chocolate syrup, ice cream for extra flavor. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more please visit us at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5176 Tue, 18 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/osteoporosis/Fractures-2.htm Fractures can occur when too much pressure is applied to a bone. Learn about the different types of bone fractures. bone fracture, compression fracture, open fracture, 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. bone fracture, compression fracture, open fracture, <h3>The Human Skeletal System</h3>The skeletal system is made up of 206 bones and provides support, allows for movement, and protects the internal organs of the body.<BR> <h3>What Is a Fracture?</h3>Sometimes, too much pressure is applied to a bone that results in what is known as a fracture. Fractures are often classified as either open or closed.<BR> <h3>What Is an Open Fracture?</h3>An open fracture is a fracture where a piece of the broken bone pierces through the skin. This can be dangerous because the bone is exposed, increasing the risk of infection. <BR> <h3>What Is a Closed Fracture?</h3>A closed fracture is a fracture where the bone is broken, but does not come through the skin.<BR> <h3>What Is a Compression Fracture?</h3>A compression fracture is a closed fracture that occurs when two or more bones are forced against each other. It commonly occurs to bones of the spine and may be caused by falling into a standing or sitting position, or a result of advanced osteoporosis.<BR> <h3>What Is an Avulsion Fracture?</h3>An avulsion fracture is a closed fracture where a piece of bone is broken off by a sudden, forceful contraction of a muscle. This type of fracture is common in young athletes and can occur when muscles are not properly stretched before activity. This fracture can also be the result of an injury.<BR> <h3>What Is an Impacted Fracture</h3>An impacted fracture is similar to a compression fracture, yet it occurs within the same bone. It is a closed fracture that occurs when pressure is applied to both ends of the bone, causing it to split into two fragments that jam into each other. This type of fracture is common in falls and car accidents.<BR> <h3>If You Fracture a Bone</h3>All fractures must be taken seriously. If you think that a bone has been fractured, you should seek immediate medical attention.<BR><br>Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_4954 Tue, 11 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homerepair/Assemble-a-New-Sink.htm A new sink can revive the decor of an older bathroom or kitchen. Watch this step-by-step guide to assembling a new sink. home repair videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. home repair videos Hi, I'm JJ Burkart for about.com. I'm going to show you how to assemble a kitchen sink to prepare it for installation. <br><br> You can buy faucet sets that should include all of the necessary hardware. <h3>Mount the Escutcheon Plate</h3> Begin by mounting the Escutcheon plate. This is the plate that houses the faucet and spout stems. <br><br> Make sure that the spout stem goes into the center hole on your sink. The fourth hole on this sink will be for a sprayer. <h3>Attach the Sprayer Plate</h3> Place the deck washers on top of the mounting nuts, and screw the nuts onto the faucet stems. <br><br> Slide the gasket over the sprayer plate and place it in the hole. Attach the plate with the locking nut provided in your kit. <br><br> Place the spout in the stem and screw on the plate. <h3>Insert the Faucets</h3> If your faucets have handles, you will need to insert them now. The handles in this kit are attached by screwing then into the threads in the handle hubs. <br><br> Apply some thread sealant to the threads of the spray hose attachment. Attach the hose. <h3>Mold a Putty Ring Around the Sink Drain</h3> Take some plumbers putty and form a ring shape. Mold this ring around the drain. Place the drain in the hole. <br><br> Place the gasket and washer on the bottom of the drain and screw on the large nut. Use a tool to hold the drain in place while you snug the nut with a pliers. <h3>Remove the Excess Putty</h3> Carefully remove the excess putty from the top side of the drain using a very small regular screwdriver. Be careful not to scratch the surface of your sink. Your sink is now assembled and ready for installation. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at homegarden.about.com. aboutvideo_5302 Mon, 01 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/vision/Astigmatism.htm Astigmatism is a deformity of the eye's cornea. Learn more about astigmatism and how it affects vision. astigmatism, nearsighted, farsighted 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. astigmatism, nearsighted, farsighted <h3>Healthy Vision</h3> During normal vision, light first enters the eye through the cornea, then passes through the pupil and the lens where it is focused at a point on the retina at the back of the eye. <h3>What Causes Astigmatism?</h3> Astigmatism is caused by a deformity of the eye in which the shape of the cornea is more oval and asymmetric than the normal round shape. This deformity causes light to focus on points in front of and/or behind the retina instead of on the retina itself, causing images to be blurred or distorted. <h3>Effects of Astigmatism</h3> People with astigmatism may also report frequent headaches or eyestrain. Astigmatism is a very common disorder, and it can occur with either nearsightedness or farsightedness. Blurred or distorted vision caused by astigmatism can be improved by wearing glasses or contact lenses. <br><br> Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_6890 Tue, 13 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Movie-Maker-video-capture.--48.--48.htm Take control of your raw footage. Learn how to capture video in Windows Movie Maker, and take the first step to editing the video into a completed project. windows movie maker videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. windows movie maker videos Hi. I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll teach you how to capture video in Windows Movie Maker. <br/><h3>Movie Maker-Camera Connection</h3> I'll need my Mini-DV video camera which has a firewire connection here. There are multiple types of firewire connections. Cameras require a 4 pin firewire cable on one end, while computers can have a 4 or a 6 pin connection. <br><br>My laptop has a 6 pin connection. I'll connect the firewire cable to my laptop and then to my camera. Make sure that you remember to turn on your camera and set it to its VCR mode for playback. <br/><h3>Capturing from your Camera</h3> Either open up your Movie Maker project file, or start a new one from scratch. Go to File, Capture Video. If everything is plugged in properly, you should see your camera listed. Make sure it's highlighted, and click, Next. <br/><h3>Saving Captured Footage</h3> Enter a name for the video we are about to capture and click Browse to set where the captured footage will be saved. I'll choose my project directory, under C Drive, Movie Maker Projects, and Movie 1. <br><br>I created these folders on my own in my C Drive, but if you have an external drive with lots of space, use that instead. Video takes up a lot of hard drive space. Now click OK and click Next. <br/><h3>Capture Quality</h3>Now we have to choose the Capture Quality. I'll choose Digital Device format, DVAVI, to capture at full quality. And click Next. <br/><h3>Capture Method</h3Now we select the Capture Method. We can capture the entire tape or individual clips. I'll click Capture Parts of the Tape Manually to save space. <br/><h3>Movie Maker Preview</h3>You can show preview during capture, although some computers can't capture and preview at the same time. If you have problems during capture, de-select this option. Click Next. We have playback controls to capture. We can play, pause, stop rewind and fast forward. <br/><h3>Capture Start and Stop</h3>I'll hit Play to start my tape and hit the Start Capture button. When I want to stop I'll hit the Stop Capture button. I can capture one, or multiple clips. <br/><h3>Organize Captured Clips</h3>If you capture multiple clips without closing the capture window and hit Finish, an import window pops up. After a few moments, all the clips you captured will be made into one longer clip. If you capture one clip and hit finish. Then go back and do it for a second clip, each of the captured clips will be saved in a separate video. Let me show you. <br><br> Click on the Collections Window. Here is our first clip, here is our second clip. If you find this confusing you can always capture the entire tape and cut it up later. <br/><br>Our captured video now shows up in our collection and is ready to be edited. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_4316 Wed, 29 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Record-Narration-in-iMovie.htm Add a personal touch to your videos by narrating scenes. Watch how to record narration in iMovie. imovie videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. imovie videos Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for about.com computing, and I am going to show you how to add narration to a project in iMovie. <h3>Types of Microphones</h3> You can use the microphone built in to your computer, or, for better sound quality, pick up a USB mic. <br><br> These can be plugged right into your computer and generally cost less than $50 at electronics stores. <h3>Adjust the Audio Settings</h3> To record narration in iMovie, click on 'media,' and then click 'audio.' The narration record section is at the bottom of this window. <br><br> Before recording narration, you will need to adjust the settings of your computer so that it picks up audio from the right microphone. From the Apple menu, select 'system preferences,' then select 'sound.' <h3>Adjust the Volume</h3> Click on 'input,' and you will be given a selection of microphones. Test the microphone by speaking into it and adjust the input volume if necessary. <br><br> You want the volume to go into the high part of the green, but never hit the red. When you have made your adjustments, exit out of system preferences and return to iMovie. <h3>Record Narration in the Microphone</h3> Place the playhead in the timeline where you want your recording to start, and then click on the red button by microphone. <br><br> Speak into the microphone to record your narration. When you are done, click the red button again to stop recording. <h3>Listen or Move the Narration</h3> Drag the playhead to the beginning of the narration, and press 'play' to listen to what you have recorded. <br><br> You can move your narration around within the timeline by clicking on the audio clip and dragging it forward or backward. <h3>Split the Narration Into Separate Clips</h3> You can also split your narration into separate clips by clicking 'edit,' 'split audio clip.' That will give you two narration clips that you can move around independently within the timeline. <br><br> If you are not happy with how your narration sounds, select the clip and click 'delete.' Then, you can begin recording all over again. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4934 Wed, 29 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/How-to-Peel-a-Peach.htm Avoid any mess by peeling peaches the easy way, and you'll be all set for making yummy desserts like Peach Mebla. fruits,food videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. fruits,food videos Hi! I'm Jonathon Stewart for About.com Food with today's 90-second quick tip. <br><br> Peach skins can be tough, chewy, or bitter when left on for recipes like Peach Melba or peach salsa, and removing them the wrong way can result in nothing but a bruised, gooey mess. <br><br> Try this simple peeling method and you'll be on your way to creating amazing peach dishes in no time. Check it out. <h3>Select Ripe Peaches</h3> Start by selecting peaches that are fragrant and give just a little to the touch, and that are free of bruises or soft spots. <br><br> To properly peel a peach we're going to use a technique called, "blanching," which actually comes up pretty often the more explore new recipes. <br><br> Never blanched anything before? Don't sweat it - it's basically just boiling stuff. <h3>Boil the Peaches</h3> Set a small saucepan of water on your stove top burner and set it to high. While you wait for the water to boil, take another dish and fill it with ice, then add water. <br><br> Once the water on the stove reaches a boil, turn off the heat and submerge your peach for about 45 seconds. <br><br> Carefully remove the peach with a spoon and plunge it into the ice-bath, which halts any cooking of the actual fruit. <h3>Cut Into the Peach Peel</h3> Carefully cut into the peel with a paring knife; it should easily fall right off the fruit as you make your incision. <br><br> Return the fruit to the ice water, which activates an enzyme that will keep the peach from discoloring right away. <h3>Remove Stubborn Peach Peels</h3> If the peel is still giving you trouble, toss it back in the hot water for another 30 seconds, and give it another shot. <br><br> Or, you could also try microwaving your peach for 15 seconds on high, then letting it sit for about two minutes before removing the peel. And that's a peach, hon. Oh golly, I'm hot today! <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4868 Mon, 16 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/scrapbooking/Wooden-Block-Photo-Puzzles.htm With a favorite photo and some simple supplies, you can make a lovely puzzle to keep on a desk or side table. scrapbooking videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. scrapbooking videos Hi, I'm Rebecca Ludens for About.com Home. Today I'm going to show you how to make a photo scrap block puzzle. <h3>Wooden Block Photo Puzzle Supplies</h3> You will need:<ul> <li>4 2 1/2- to 3-inch wooden blocks</li> <li>6 photos</li> <li>a variety of solid and patterned paper or cardstock</li> <li>flat embellishments, like punch-out printed die-cuts</li> <li>scrapbook adhesive</li> <li>photo tape</li> <li>a trimmer</li> <li>a pencil</li> <li>scissors</li> </ul> <h3>Cut the Background Paper</h3> To start, you will want to trim a piece of paper to use as your first page background. Because the wooden blocks may not be perfectly square, you will want to measure each side as you work with it. <br><br> To determine the size of paper you need, simply lay the paper on top of the blocks and mark with a pencil. Use your trimmer to cut the paper to size. <h3>Crop the Photo</h3> Crop your photo so that it fits on your background paper. Check to see that faces will not be on the seams of the blocks, so that they are not cut as you complete the puzzle. <h3>Attach the Photo to the Paper</h3> Mat the photo using a solid color paper and add this to your background paper. Keep in mind that you will be cutting this page into four pieces, so you need plenty of adhesive near the middle of the layout. <br><br> Add embellishments to complete your mini scrapbook page. <h3>Cut the Photo Into Four Pieces</h3> Place the finished page back on the blocks, and use a pencil to mark the seams. Cut the page in half, and then cut each half in half again until you have the four pieces. <br><br> Use an aggressive adhesive, such as photo tape to adhere the cut squares of your scrapbook page to the wooden blocks. <h3>Cover All Sides of the Blocks</h3> Continue these steps until you have made all six scrapbook pages and cover all sides of the blocks. <br><br> To create a base for your blocks, cut a piece of thick chipboard or mat board slightly larger than the four-block square. Cover it with sticky backed felt to protect the photos on your squares as the blocks get moved around. <br><br> The completed puzzle is a perfect gift for any occasion. Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at homegarden.about.com. aboutvideo_4321 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Fish-and-Chips.htm Fried cod and potatoes complement each other perfectly in this hearty dish. Serve with malt vinegar or tartar sauce. fish and chips,dinner,cod,potatoes,fried food,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. fish and chips,dinner,cod,potatoes,fried food,recipes,videos Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I am going to show you how to make fish and chips. <h3>Fish and Chips Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need: <ul> <li>three russet potatoes</li> <li>1 1/2 pounds cod, cut into evenly sized pieces</li> <li>oil</li> <li>1 1/2 cups beer</li> <li>1 1/4 cups flour</li> <li>1/4 cup cornstarch</li> <li>1 teaspoon salt</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon black pepper</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon paprika</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon cayenne pepper</li> </ul> You will also need a large pot or a wok for frying, a thermometer, and a slotted spoon. <h3>Cut the Potatoes</h3> First, we will cut the potatoes into evenly sized fries. Slice off the long edges of the potatoes to form rectangles. <br><br> Now, we will cut the potatoes into 1/2-inch slices, then turn them and cut them again. This gives us uniformly-sized fries, which will cook evenly. <h3>Prepare the Potatoes</h3> In a large bowl, mix together the potato slices and 1/4 cup of vegetable oil. Cover with waxed paper and microwave on high for about six minutes until the potatoes become pliable. <br><br> Rinse the potatoes, then pat them dry with a paper towel and let them sit for at least 10 minutes. <h3>Fry the Potatoes</h3> Pour about three inches of oil into the pot, and turn the burner up to about medium-high heat. We will let the oil get to 350 degrees. <br><br> When the oil is hot enough, we will add the potatoes, about a handful at a time, and let them fry for two minutes. Use a slotted spoon to remove the potatoes from the oil and let them drain on paper towels. <br><br> After the potatoes are done, turn up the heat and let the oil get up to 375 degrees. <h3>Coat the Fish in Batter</h3> We will make the batter for the fish by mixing together the beer, flour, cornstarch, and spices. Dip the fish pieces into the batter and let any excess drip off. <h3>Fry the Fish</h3> Then, gently drop the fish into the oil. Fry the fish for about seven to eight minutes until it turns golden brown. <br><br> Remove the fish from the oil with a slotted spoon and let it drain on paper towels. <h3>Serve the Fish and Chips</h3> Now we will return the potatoes to the oil and let them fry for another three minutes until they turn golden brown. <br><br> You can serve the fish and chips with malt vinegar, which is traditional, or with tartar sauce. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_10253502 Mon, 10 Jul 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://home.about.com/z/cg/vp.htm?ch=style&l=style/v/7&ap=1 Style expert Kim Johnson Gross shows you easy style tips for accentuating your best features and camouflaging your less desirable ones. 2006 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Home/Consumer Information/Clothing and Accessories Shopping/Clothing Got a nice asset? Show it off. Style expert Kim Johnson Gross shows you easy style tips for accentuating your best features and camouflaging your less desirable ones. aboutvideo_4789 Mon, 31 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/How-to-Eat-Lobster.htm With their hard shells, lobsters aren't the easiest crustaceans to eat. Here, a chef shows you how to open a lobster and locate its sweet, succulent meat. lobsters, home cooking, videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. lobsters, home cooking, videos Hello, I am Rich Vellante, executive chef of Legal Sea Foods in Boston, MA, for About.com Food. Today I am going to show you how to eat a lobster. <h3>Supplies Needed to Open a Lobster</h3> Now, these are fully cooked, hard shell lobsters, but what we will need is obviously the lobsters. We will need the ubiquitous lobster cracker. You see these all the time. <br><br> You can find a small fork. I like some shears. These are poultry shears but they also work well with lobster, or any type of heavy-duty scissors would work. If you have them, gloves are always helpful. <h3>Twist the Lobster's Claws</h3> Now the first step is to segment the lobster. Now what we'll do -- this is very easy -- we will grab the claw. <br><br> This is the crusher claw. You can see the difference. This is the pinching claw, and this is the crusher. <br><br> You just take this by the knuckle this is the knuckle area. It comes out very easily; it is like a hinge you just twist and pull. And you do the same thing with the pincher claw -- twist and pull. <h3>Pull the Lobster's Tail</h3> The other piece is the tail. The tail is again on a hinge. What you want to do is you want to grab the cavity, and you twist and you pull. <br><br> And you see this is a female lobster; you can pull out some of the red roe. <h3>Open the Cavity of the Lobster</h3> Now we also have the cavity and we also have the legs. What you do again another hinge, is you take the cavity and you pull off. You want to open this up and twist it and open it. <br><br> There is some meat in here, if you are really adventurous and want to pick through it. <h3>Cut Open the Tail</h3> With the legs, you can take a wine bottle or pepper mill or take anything that can roll. Now you have the tail. <br><br> Take the shears and just cut right down the middle. You can also cut this with a knife if you like, but I think it's a lot easier with the shears. <br><br> And it just opens up the lobster and you can pull the tail right out. <h3>Open the Knuckles and Claws</h3> This is the crusher claw. You take that first piece off; you twist and take it off. And then I want to show you with these crushers here. You just crush it. <br><br> And what it does is it just cracks the shell so that you can get at the lobster. Now this leaves you left with the knuckles. <br><br> Now the knuckles you can get out with the lobster crackers and you just crack it like that. The other way is to use the shears. I find the shears to be much easier if you just cut along the edges. And it is much easier to get at the meat. <h3>Serve the Lobster With Butter</h3> What we've done here is we've got all of the meat out of the lobster, and now we'll go get some butter. I have melted some butter on the back. <br><br> What you can do with that butter is you can microwave it or just cook it over a low heat. And lobster is really a vehicle for butter because you need to just dip it right in. <br><br> So you dip it in there. And there is probably nothing better when you marry the two of them. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5174 Wed, 26 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/backandneck/Neck-Pain.htm Neck pain is caused by muscle strain or soft tissue sprain in the neck. Find out more about neck pain. neck pain, cervical spine, 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. neck pain, cervical spine, <h3>The Healthy Spine</h3>The spine consists of 33 vertebrae that protect the spinal cord and provide stability to the torso. The first seven vertebrae comprise the cervical spine. Surrounding these vertebrae are muscles, ligaments, blood vessels, and nerves. In addition, intervertebral discs between the vertebrae act as shock absorbers for the spine.<BR> <h3>What Causes Neck Pain?</h3>The most common cause of neck pain is due to a muscle strain or other soft tissue sprain of the neck structures. These types of injuries can result from a car accident or from straining the neck, such as from sleeping in the wrong position or from carrying a heavy suitcase.<BR> <h3>Treating Neck Pain</h3>If you have neck pain that lasts longer than a few days or is associated with numbness or tingling in the arms, you should see a physician for a proper diagnosis.<br><br>Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_4727 Thu, 19 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/chinesefood/How-To-Make-Scallion-Pancakes.htm Scallion pancakes are a savory treat that you can serve as an appetizer or snack. Fry up some scallion pancakes today! scallion pancakes, chinese food, recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. scallion pancakes, chinese food, recipe Hi, I'm Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I'm going to show you how to make scallion pancakes. These are great with a dipping sauce, on their own as a snack, or served as a side dish with a stir fry. <h3>Scallion Pancake Ingredients</h3> For the scallion pancakes, you will need:<ul> <li>1 cup of flour</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon salt</li> <li>1 whole egg</li> <li>1 egg yolk</li> <li>1 cup of water</li> <li>1 green chili</li> <li>1/8 teaspoon black pepper</li> <li>1/8 teaspoon sesame oil</li> <li>vegetable oil for cooking</li> <li>4 scallions</li> <li>1/4 cup cilantro leaves</li> </ul> <h3>Scallion Pancake Dipping Sauce Ingredients</h3> For the dipping sauce, you will need:<ul> <li>1/3 cup soy sauce</li> <li> 2 tablespoons rice vinegar</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon sesame oil</li> <li>1 teaspoon sesame seeds</li> </ul> <h3>Mince the Chili Peppers</h3> Begin by mincing the chili pepper into tiny pieces. Be sure to remove all of the seeds. <h3>Mix the Scallion Pancake Batter</h3> Separate one egg and get rid of the white. Mix the yolk together with another whole egg. In a bowl, mix together the flour and the salt. Add the egg, water, chili, black pepper and sesame oil. Whisk these ingredients together to form a thin batter. Heat three quarters tablespoons vegetable oil in a large skillet over medium high heat. <h3>Chop the Scallion</h3> While the oil is heating up, mince the cilantro and slice the scallions. You can use all of the white part and about one inch of the green. <h3>Fry the Scallion Pancakes</h3> Add one half cup of the batter to the hot oil and sprinkle the top with one quarter of the scallions and one quarter of the cilantro. Fry the pancakes for about two minutes on each side until it is golden brown. Then remove it from the pan and transfer it to a paper towel. <h3>Continue Frying the Pancakes</h3> Add a little more oil to the skillet and then use another half cup batter and some of the cilantro and the scallions to make another pancake. Repeat this process until you have used all of the batter. <h3>Mix the Scallion Pancake Dipping Sauce</h3> While the pancakes are frying, mix together the soy sauce, rice vinegar, sesame oil and sesame seeds to make the dipping sauce. Serve the pancakes hot or at room temperature, sliced into triangles with the dipping sauce on the side. Enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4876 Tue, 17 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/bbq/Grilled-Pineapple.htm Wow your barbecue guests by grilling up this sweet and simple pineapple recipe that's lightly marinated in a sugary rum mixture. grilled pineapple, rum pineapple, grill, fruit, recipes 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. grilled pineapple, rum pineapple, grill, fruit, recipes Hi, I'm Derrick Riches for About.com Food, and today I'm going to show you how to grill pineapple. <h3>Grilled Pineapple Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 pineapple</li> <li>1 cup of rum</li> <li>1 tablespoon of cinnamon</li> <li>2 cups of water</li> </ul> <h3>Cut the Pineapple</h3> Cut the pineapple by first cutting off the bottom, cut down the sides removing the outer skin of the pineapple. Cut pineapple into 1/2-inch slices. <h3>Mix the Rum Marinade</h3> In a bowl, combine 2 cups of water, 1 tablespoon of ground cinnamon, and 1 cup of rum. If you prefer not to use rum, use 1/2 cup of dark brown sugar dissolved in water. <h3>Marinate the Pineapple</h3> Add the pineapple slices. Marinate pineapple slices in mixture for 30 minutes to 1 hour. <h3>Grill the Pineapple</h3> Grill pineapple slices over a high heat for approximately one minute per side. Serve pineapple slices with a scoop of ice cream or cut into slices and enjoy. <br><br> And that's how you grill pineapple. Thanks for watching, to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4662 Thu, 19 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/mideastfood/Tahini-Sauce.htm Learn how simple it is to make tahini sauce, a popular Middle Eastern topping for falafel, and an ingredient in both baba ganoush and hummus. Tahini Sauce Recipe, How to Make Tahini, Sesame Tahini 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Tahini Sauce Recipe, How to Make Tahini, Sesame Tahini Hi, Lea Elleseff here for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how easy it is to make tahini sauce. Tahini sauce is a very popular addition to many Middle Eastern foods. It is a topping for falafel, and an ingredient in baba ganoush and hummus. <h3>Tahini Ingredients</h3> Here's what we'll need:<ul> <li>4 c. white sesame seeds</li> <li>1/4 c. olive oil</li> <li>blender</li> <li>1-2 baking sheets</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Sesame Seeds</h3> Begin by spreading the sesame seeds over the baking trays. Place the trays into an oven that has been preheated to 350 degrees for at least 10 minutes. Stir with a spatula from time to time, making sure they get golden but not brown. <h3>Blend the Tahini Mixture</h3> Pour the toasted sesame seeds into a blender and add the quarter cup of olive oil. Blend them together until the mixture is smooth and pour-able, adding more oil in if the mixture is too thick to pour easily. <h3>Storing and Using Tahini</h3> And just like that your tahini sauce is ready to be served or stored. The great thing about this sauce is that it can be kept fresh in the refrigerator for up to a month. <br><br>Today I'm going to use it right away, as a dressing on a simple tomato and cucumber salad. Maybe tomorrow I'll use it as a sandwich spread. The possibilities for using tahini sauce are numerous, so don't hesitate to experiment. <br><br> Thank you for joining me, to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4704 Fri, 08 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/dogs/Healthy-Snack-for-Your-Pet.htm Treat man's best friend to a healthy snack that both of you can enjoy. See how to prepare a plate of apples and peanut butter. dog snacks,healthy pet food recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. dog snacks,healthy pet food recipes,videos Hi, my name is Christie Shaver, and I am the Healthy Pet Gourmet, founder of The Healthy Pet Gourmet, for About.com Home. Today we are going to make apples with peanut butter as a snack for your pets. <h3>Ingredients Needed to Make the Pet Snack</h3> To make this healthy nutritious snack, you'll need:<ul> <li>1 apple</li> <li>some natural peanut butter with no added sugar</li> </ul> <h3>Cut the Apple</h3> If you've ever wanted to share a nutritious snack with your favorite pet, here is one that both you and your dog will enjoy. <br><br> All you have to do is cut an apple into small enough pieces so that you and your pet can both easily take a few bites. Cut out the core and have a little natural peanut butter standing by for the dipping. <h3>Health Benefits of the Dog Snack</h3> Apples are a great snack with added sweetness that your pets will love, and the peanut butter adds protein into the diet. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at homegarden.about.com. aboutvideo_6115 Wed, 05 Mar 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/gonyc/New-York-City---East-Village.htm Follow Anna for an insider's tour of the East Village. east, village, new, york, city, manhattan, nyc 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. east, village, new, york, city, manhattan, nyc Follow Anna for an insider's tour of the East Village. aboutvideo_6664 Tue, 17 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Ken-Davitian-on-Get-Smart.htm Ken Davitian burst onto the scene with a co-starring role as Sacha Baron Cohen's sidekick in 'Borat.' In the comedy movie 'Get Smart,' Davitian plays one of the main villains, a KAOS agent named Shtarker. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the World Premiere of <i>Get Smart</i>.<p> <h3>Ken Davitian ('Shtarker')</h3><p> <b>So tackling the role of a bad guy in a <i>Get Smart</i> movie, what do you do? How do you approach that?</b><p> Ken Davitian: "You follow Terence Stamp. You do whatever he tells you to do because you work for him. But the only thing that has to be done all the time is causing chaos. It's like you're a three year old. You're just causing chaos."<p> <b>When you get that script and you see this character on the page, how does that transfer in your head to what comes out on screen?</b><p> Ken Davitian: "Well, I knew the character because I had seen the series. And I really wanted to be in the movie so they called and said, 'Listen, we've got a part for you.' And I was going to play Burly Man and I said, 'Hey listen, I want to meet with these people. I want to play Shtarker.' And I went in, I read for it, I went to a table read, and I got the job."<p> <b>I read somewhere that you actually went into the audition using an accent and they didn't know you spoke English. Is that true?</b><p> Ken Davitian: "Yes. At both auditions for <i>Get Smart</i> and <i>Borat</i> I did that."<p> <b>Why would you do that for <i>Get Smart</i>?</b><p> Ken Davitian: "I just wanted to hit it out of the park."<p> <b>And obviously you did.</b><p> Ken Davitian: "See, I'm here so it worked. Because they didn't know&#133; Peter Segal the director was told, 'No, Ken speaks English.' So [<i>speaking with an accent</i>] Ken go in there and he talking like this and Peter thinking, 'What are we going to do with this guy?' So it worked."<p> <b>And you weren't afraid that that would cost you the role?</b><p> Ken Davitian: "No, because I could break, you know? That was the whole thing. When I saw in his eyes that he was thinking, 'Oh what am I&#133; The guy's perfect for the part but how do I tell him where to go, how to stand, what to do? Do I need to get a handler for him?' And then I broke character and I said, 'Listen man, I'm born in America, in Los Angeles. I want this job.' And so it was great."<p> <b>So you were a fan of the series. How does this movie capture the tone of the series and bring it to the 2008 audience?</b><p> Ken Davitian: "It sprinkles some nostalgia. It doesn't impersonate or copy the series. It's much more of a comedy action film than the series was. And it's just full of action. I keep telling people, 'While you're cracking up, things are blowing up.' So it's really done well. I mean, I really surprised by how well it's done and put together where laugh, blow up, shoot, laugh, laugh, blow up, shoot&#133; It's perfect, and you don't have to have seen the series at all. You can be eight years old and watch this and say, 'Wow, that's a great movie.' But if you're 40 and you watch it, you'll feel some of that nostalgia because you know they've got a lot of things in there, little things that are in there like the sayings that he does and the little gadgets that he has, and the shoe phone. So it really pays a compliment to the series and to Mel Brooks."<p> <b>What's up next for you?</b><p> Ken Davitian: "I just finished a movie called <i>Soul Men</i> with Bernie Mac and Samuel L Jackson."<p> <b>That ought to be fun.</b><p> Ken Davitian: "Yes, it's hilarious."<p> <h3>More Coverage of <i>Get Smart</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/getsmart/a/getsmartsc61108.htm">Steve Carell, Anne Hathaway, Alan Arkin, and Director Peter Segal Discuss <i>Get Smart</i></a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/getsmart/a/getsmartdj61108.htm">Dwayne Johnson on <i>Get Smart</i> and Comedy</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/library/weekly/blgetsmartpicsa.htm"><i>Get Smart</i> Photo Gallery</a></li><br><li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/getsmart/"><i>Get Smart</i> Trailer, Video Clips, Cast List and Interviews</a></li><br> <li>More on the Stars of <i>Get Smart</i> - <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/carellsteve/">Steve Carell</a> and <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/hathawayanne/">Anne Hathaway</a></li><br> aboutvideo_3710 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/frenchfood/Cleaning-Fresh-Leeks.htm Demonstration of a simple method for thoroughly cleaning leeks leek,clean,cut,slice,vegetable,onion,cooking 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. leek,clean,cut,slice,vegetable,onion,cooking Hi, I'm Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I am going to show you how to clean leeks. Leeks have a flavor very similar to onions, but more delicate. They are delicious in soups, stir-fries and salads. <br/><br/>Because of the way the plant grows, it is virtually impossible to avoid dirt between the leaves. Therefore, we need to be very careful to clean the leeks thoroughly so you do not find yourself biting down on sand. <br/><br/> <H3>Cutting the Leek</H3> We use the white part of the leeks and about an inch above, right up to the place where it starts to turn dark green. So cut the leaves off here and discard them. We are also going to cut off the roots, but be careful and try to keep the leek attached at the base. <br/><br/>Next, slice the leek vertically in half, until just about an inch above the base. <br/><br/> <H3>Pre-wash the Leek</H3> Now, we are going to rinse this under cold water. Be sure to fan the leaves apart so we can wash away any dirt that might be hiding between them. <br/><br/> <H3>Slice the Leek</H3> Next, we will slice the leek, and then rinse it again to get rid of any remaining dirt. <br/><br/> <H3>Rinse the Leek</H3> Place the chopped leeks in a bowl of cold water. Swirl them around so that any sand will go to the bottom of the bowl. You will have to fish the leeks out with your fingers so that the dirt remains in the bottom of the bowl. Now your leeks should be clean and ready to enjoy in your cooking. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching, and to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5768 Tue, 20 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/golosangeles/Los-Angeles--Sexy-Culture.htm What's sexy to you? Find out what is sexy in LA! sex, sexy, los, angeles, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. sex, sexy, los, angeles, california What's sexy to you? Find out what is sexy in LA! aboutvideo_5625 Wed, 14 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/financialsoft/Online-Checking-in-Quicken.htm Now that you have your Quicken software set up, you can have it automatically updated with your bank account information. Learn how to set up online checking in Quicken. quicken, online, bank, checking, account 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. quicken, online, bank, checking, account Hi! I'm Don Schechter for About.com Money. Today I'll show you how to integrate your online checking account into Quicken. <h3>Start Up Quicken</h3> Open up Quicken. If you already have an account register or transaction list, open that up by clicking 'account list' at the bottom of the screen. Select your account from the list and click 'set up online services' on the toolbar. <h3>Type Your Bank Information in Quicken</h3> Type in your id and the password that you use on your bank's website, and click 'next.' Quicken will download some information then ask you for your account number and router number. If you want to set up online banking for a different kind of account it may ask you for different information. <h3>Set Up an Account</h3> If you don't already have an account set up, click add account on the bottom left. Type in your bank or financial institution, then click 'next.' This screen asks if I want to connect to my account through Quicken. Chose 'yes' and click 'next.' On the next screen, if you already do online banking, select 'yes' and click 'next' to fill in your ID and password for your bank's website. <br><br>Quicken will download some information then ask you for more information about your account including your account and checking router numbers. Click next when you're done. Keep following the prompts. <h3>View Your Online Bank Account in Quicken</h3> If you do not already do online banking, click 'no.' Choose the type of account and enter a name for it. On the next screen, you will have to enter the ending date and balance from your most recent statement. Click 'done.' The window will close and under cash flow on the left sidebar, you'll see your account. Now you can update your transactions online and keep all your finances up to date. <h3>Manually Linking Quicken to a Bank Account</h3> If you want to link Quicken to your online bank account, manually go to you online bank service and see if you can download a web connect file for quicken. Back in Quicken go to file import and choose web connect file. find your file then click yes to activate the Quicken one step process. You have to enter your username and password then click activate to connect your bank directly to Quicken. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at money.about.com. aboutvideo_4430 Thu, 24 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/spreadsheets/Find-and-Replace-in-Excel.htm Get some help navigating large spreadsheets with the find and replace function in Microsoft Excel. You can also use it to check for duplicates. Excel tutorials,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Excel tutorials,videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to find and replace data in Microsoft Excel. <h3>Open the Spreadsheet</h3> Open Microsoft Excel. I'll open a saved spreadsheet. <br><br> I accidentally typed the wrong name for this row of data. If my Excel sheet was much longer and repeated names, instead of going through and finding each one, I would go to edit and choose replace. <h3>Find the Data</h3> I'll type in the name I want to find, and click 'find all.' And there you see, in cell A6, the name I was looking for, Don S. <br><br> In the 'replace with' box, I'll type the correct name, Rachel G. Click on the 'options' button. I can search within the sheet or workbook, or I can search by rows or columns. <h3>Replace the Data</h3> Clicking 'replace all' will replace all the places where it says Don S. with the correct name. If I click 'replace,' the name will be replaced just in the cell I selected. <br><br> Since there is only one cell that has Don S., I will click 'replace.' Now the correct name is in the cell. Click 'close' on the replace window. <h3>Find Duplicates in the Spreadsheet</h3> Say I want to find certain numerical data in my spreadsheet. I'll go to 'edit' then 'find,' and now type in the number I'm looking for. <br><br> This time I want to find 46. As you can see, I have two entries that have the value 46. Click 'next' to see where the other one is. <h3>Search by Background Color</h3> Say I want to find a numeric value that has a certain background color. Click the format dropdown menu, and click on 'format.' <br><br> Click on the Pattern tab, and I'll choose the light green color. Click 'OK.' Now when I click find all it will only find that number with that color background. <h3>Use the Go To Tool</h3> Another handy tool is the Go To box. If I want to find all the blank cells in my spreadsheet, I'd go to 'edit,' and select 'go to.' I'll click 'special.' <br><br> You can see all the different things I can find. Right now, I just want to find the blank cells, so I'll click 'blanks' and then 'ok.' Now all of the blank cells have been highlighted. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us on the Web at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4634 Wed, 13 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/mideastfood/Falafel.htm Made from spiced fava beans or chickpeas, falafel is great as a quick meal or snack. Watch how to make this delicious dish. falafel,Middle Eastern food,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. falafel,Middle Eastern food,recipes,videos Hi, I'm Natasha Levitan for About.com Food. Today, I'm going to show you how to make falafel. <h3>Falafel Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 can chickpeas</li> <li>1 large onion</li> <li>2 cloves garlic chopped</li> <li>1 teaspoon coriander</li> <li>1 teaspoon cumin</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon baking powder</li> <li>5 cups oil for frying</li> </ul> <h3>Blend the Ingredients</h3> Open a can of chickpeas and drain the liquid. Into a medium bowl, place the chickpeas, garlic, onion, coriander, cumin, salt, pepper, and baking powder. <br><br> Using a hand-held blender, mash the ingredients together until they form a thick paste. <h3>Fry the Falafel</h3> Shape the mixture with your hands into small balls about size of a ping pong ball. <br><br> Heat five cups of oil in your frying pan. Place your balls into the oil until they're golden brown - about 5-7 minutes. Make sure to turn them with a slotted spoon so they brown evenly. <br><br> With a slotted spoon transfer, the fried balls onto your bowl lined with a paper towel. <h3>Serve the Falafel</h3> To make a pocket sandwich out of falafel, cut the pita and add salad, tomatoes, and your ready falafel balls. Pour tahini over the top. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6842 Wed, 21 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/REFLECTION-TEXT-IN-PHOTOSHOP.htm Create a text reflection effect in Adobe Photoshop and make text contents pop from their background. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Text Effects,Text,Graphic Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Text Effects,Text,Graphic Design Hi. I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. Today I'll teach you how to add reflections to text in Photoshop. <br><br>I'll start by creating a new document by going to File, New. I'll select preset 800 X 600 to make things easy. And click, OK. <br><h3>Text Reflection Background</h3>First I'll start by making my background black. Hit the D key to set the foreground and background colors to default black and white. And then click and hold down the Gradient button on the left hand toolbar until you see Painbucket tool. Select Paint bucket and fill the screen black. <br><br>Now click on the switch foreground background color button on the lefthand toolbar to make the foreground color white. <br><h3>Entering your Text</h3>Now click on the horizontal type tool and click on the background. Type the word REFLECTIONS. If the type is too small, highlight the typed text and raise the size on the topbar. If you're not happy with the font you can also change it at this time. If the text isn't centered move it to the middle of the background. <br><h3>Adjustment Layer</h3>Now duplicate our reflection text layer by dragging the text layer to the create a new layer button on the layer pallete. We can't see the new layer because it's in the exact same spot as the first. Don't worry about that. <br><h3>Resizing your Layer</h3>Now go to Layer, Rasterize, and select Type. Now go to Edit, Free Transform to change the shape of the copy layer. A rectangle with points pops up over our rasterized text. Click the top middle point of the rectangle and drag it downward exaggerating it's shape a little. When you're satisfied hit Return. <br><h3>Positioning your Text</h3>Now you'll see that the copy text doesn't quite line up with the original text. Select the move tool on the left-hand toolbar and move the text up to match. You may need to use the zoomtool on the left-hand toolbar to get close and aid your matching. After you're finished matching zoom back out by double clicking the zoom tool. <br><h3>Adding Reflection</h3>Now go to Edit, Transform, and hit Perspective. We're going to change the perspective to imitate a reflection. Choose a point on the bottom left or right side of the rectangle and drag towards the sides of your screen. <br><br>When you're happy with the perspective change hit return to commit the changes. <br><h3>Reflection Opacity</h3>With the reflections copy layer selected lower the opacity in the layer palette to about 75 percent. That looks pretty good to me. <br><br>And that's how you create reflections with text. With a little practice you can use this method over pictures and for creating titles. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_6882 Wed, 31 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Export-your-movie.htm Do you want to post videos on the Web? Learn how to export your movies from Final Cut Pro into a Web-friendly format. Computing,Programs,Software,Fianl Cut Pro,Export,Quicktimes,Videos,Web 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Fianl Cut Pro,Export,Quicktimes,Videos,Web Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll teach you how to export your movie for the web using Final Cut Pro. Once you've created your movie in the timeline there are multiple ways to export your film. <br><h3>Final Cut Pro High Quality Export</h3>The first way is for exporting your film at full quality. Go up to File, Export, Quicktime Movie. We'll click on Setting, and keep it on Current settings to match our project. Let's make sure to Include, Audio and Video. And I'll ignore the markers tab since I didnt set any. <br><br>Make sure the Make Movie Self-Contained button is checked, otherwise other computers wont be able to open the file. <br><br>If I hit the save button it'll export the movie fullsize. A full size movie clip is useful when giving someone a DVD, but not for the web. I'll hit cancel. <br><h3>Final Cut Pro Export Format</h3> We need to compress and encode our video for the web. Let's go back to File, Export, and choose Using Quicktime Conversion. I'll name the file, make sure the format is Quicktime movie, and I'll click on options. I'll click on the settings, and under compression type I'll select H264. This is the latest quicktime compression. <br><br>Another popular compression setting is Sorenson Video. I'll keep the settings as is and click ok. <br><h3>Final Cut Pro Web Export Size</h3>Now I'll click Size. I'll click the dimensions tab and click on custom. Web videos are seldom encoded at the videos original size, because the larger the size the longer it takes to watch and download. <br><br>The resolution of fullsize standard definition video is 720 X 480. Were going to export at 480 X 360, which retains the aspect ratio of our movie video. I'll click OK. <br><h3>Final Cut Pro Web Export Audio</h3>Now we'll encode the audio. Make sure Sound is checked and click on settings. Under format I'll select IMA 4:1. <br><br>Under rate I'll select 22.05. These settings will help shrink the file size. And I'll hit OK. And OK one more time. <br><h3>Completing Web Export</h3>And finally hit save. You have to wait a few minutes for the movie to export. And there's our video ready for the web. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com<br> aboutvideo_4713 Fri, 06 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/onlineadvertising/Ian-Schafer--CEO--Deep-Focus.htm Ian Schafer, CEO and founder of Deep Focus, was the keynote speaker at the IAB's Leadership Forum on User-Generated Content and Social Networking. Schafer said that asking users to create content doesn't mean that marketers don't have to stay creative themselves. user-generated content, social networking, creative 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. user-generated content, social networking, creative <p>When you see more than three advertisers using the same promotion for the Super Bowl, for example, it starts feeling old before it even had the chance to be new. In that case, it could be a little over hyped. But I think it's over hyped for the wrong reasons. I think there's a lot of good hype and good buzz that it brings about. And now it's just a matter of marketers trying to figure out exactly how to use it without co-oping it. So it's a challenge for everybody. The users that have used user-generated content the best have tended to be the record labels, which it behooves them to use that because their marketing budget is typically zero, or at least very small. The way that they can tap into an impassioned user base or an impassioned audience and get them to get behind that album for that matter, and basically exclaim to their peers how much hey love that particular artist or how well they know this particular song. That's had the potential, and I've actually seen it go incredibly broad in terms of its reach. A lot of companies are tapping into the music industry to inspire user generated content and that makes sense. Music is one of the things that's left that humans feel very passionate about, almost universally. The music industry has made great use of user-generated content.</p> <p>I hope that user-generated content doesn't become a bullet point on a marketing strategy. I would hope that user-generated content is just another tactic that can be employed, but it needs to be a custom application of user generated content and it's going to require agencies to cleverly create ways in which to inspire consumers and inspire audiences to create content around the brands that they re responsible for managing. It's creativity and at the end of the day, you can ask every one of your consumers to be creative, but it s not their job to do it. Creative agencies are trained professionals, supposedly. If they can come up with new and exciting ways, to not only create a traditional advertising campaign and around something, while at the same time getting consumers to participate in that brand campaign, you've got success.</p> <p>I think user-generated content will be a portion of any brands traditional advertising campaigns. I think they ll always be an outlet that they'll provide consumers to interact and create around their brands. There is some greater potential for user generated content in terms of how much of a campaign that it makes up in local markets. I think people feel very passionate about their local bar, or their local hot dog vendor, or the local car dealership, or their local sports team. And I think there are tremendous opportunities for those local brands especially as local media gets easier and easier to purchase. I think there's going to be a lot more potential for user generated content in the local advertising space as time goes on.</p> aboutvideo_6775 Sat, 27 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/usedcars/Looking-for-Paint-Work.htm See what to look for in a car's paint job to detect that the car paint has been redone or replaced, revealing clues about the car's accident history and resale value. car paint,paint job,used cars,resale value 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. car paint,paint job,used cars,resale value Hi, I'm Barbara Terry for About.com Autos. Just because a car has had paint work does not necessarily mean it's going to be a problem for you in the future. When shopping for a car, there are a few ways to determine if a car has had prior paint work. <br/><br/><H3>Missing Pieces of Car Paint</H3><br/>A body shop will typically tape off a panel before painting on it. To determine this, you'll simply take your finger and run it along the door jamb. If you can feel a ridge, in the industry we call that a tape line. It means that the panel was painted on. You'll want to repeat that process on all the panels, the hood, the 2 front fenders, and of course the deck lid. <br/><br/><H3>Car Paint on the Molding</H3><br/>Another way to determine paint work would be if the body shop got overspray on the molding. Sometimes panels have to be removed and re-mounted. You can tell if the panels have been removed or replaced if the paint on the screws like this one is chipped off. <br/><br/><H3>VIN Plates Missing</H3> <br/>Also, all cars have VIN plates like this one on all the panels. If you come across a panel that does not have a VIN plate it may mean that the panel was replaced with an aftermarket one. <br/><br/><H3>Car Paint Caveats</H3><br/>I've owned a ton of cars in the past, some with paint work. And of participated in accidents, causing me to get parts of my cars repaired and painted. Just because a car has paint work I would not be leery of it. And you may be able to get a better deal when purchasing it. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Autos.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_4945 Mon, 28 Apr 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/japanesefood/How-to-Prepare-Fresh-Wasabi.htm Real wasabi can be a little tricky to find, but once you do, your palate will be opened to a whole new sensation. Learn how to prepare real wasabi, and settle for no imitation. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Hey guys! Jonathan Stewart here for About.com. You know that little dollop of green paste that comes with your sushi? You've probably come to know it as "wasabi," even though in most places it's more likely than not to be a mixture of horseradish, Chinese mustard, cornstarch and green food coloring. So what's the deal with real wasabi? Take a look at the following tips, and you'll never go back. Check it out. <h3>Wasabi Root</h3> Also known as wasabia japonica - wasabi root, the rhizome is expensive and typically hard to find in the States, and can even be rare to find in Japan. When shopping for one, keep an eye out for a root that looks like a cross between a miniature green pineapple and a potato. Or a nubby, little green carrot. <h3>Types of Wasabi</h3> There are two kinds of wasabi - sawa wasabi, which is grown in mountain streams, and oka wasabi, which is grown in fields. Like a good coffee berry, the shaded, mountain-grown sawa wasabi tends to be the wasabi of choice. A single root, which should be about an inch and a half in diameter and around six inches long, can be pretty pricey - nearly 30 bucks - but then again, so can a couple martinis at a bar in Manhattan. <h3>Storing Wasabi Root</h3> Wrap your wasabi root in a damp paper towel and keep it in your refrigerator for up to 30 days - it's a good idea to rinse it with water once a week while it's being stored. But of course, the sooner you use it, the better. <h3>Grating Wasabi</h3> The traditional Japanese tool for grating wasabi is a piece of sharkskin stretched over a block of wood. And you thought the wasabi was hard to find... for those of us with access to a Target, these work just as well. A wasabi or ginger grater is ideal for grating your wasabi, but just know you can always use a fine cheese grater or a zesting rasp. <br><br>Rinse the root one last time under cold running water and peel the outer skin using a paring knife or peeler. Remove any knobs or bumps to attain a smooth surface for grating, and give it one more rinse and scrub to ensure that all dirt is gone. Hold the root at a 90 degree angle to the grater and grate, using a circular motion. <br><br> Shark-skin grater aside, we are now participating in a thousand-year-old tradition. Neat! <h3>Serving Wasabi</h3> Once you've grated enough wasabi to satisfy your tastes, gather the grated wasabi into a ball and let it sit for at least 10 minutes, during which the famous wasabi flavor will develop. Within 15 minutes of grating, serve the wasabi at room temperature. If you have to serve it later, try covering it with plastic, which will help preserve the flavor as long as possible. Be sure to store any unused root back in the fridge, wrapped in damp paper towels. <br><br> Wasabi is obviously a little spicy, and should be treated like a fresh chile pepper - be sure not to touch your eyes or sensitive skin after handling it. The fresh wasabi leaves are also edible and share some of the same hot flavor of the root. Boil them quickly with a little soy sauce for a wasabi salad or do it up the 'merican way, and deep-fry 'em into chips. Yum! <br><br> Thanks for watching! To learn more, visit us on the Web at About.com. aboutvideo_5591 Tue, 11 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/netforbeginners/What-are-Internet-Cookies-.htm You may have heard the phrase &quot;Internet cookies,&quot; but do you know what it means? Find out what these little bits of information do and how to get rid of them. internet cookies,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. internet cookies,videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll talk about what Internet cookies are and how you can get rid of them. <h3>Definition of Internet Cookies</h3> Internet cookies are, in fact, pretty harmless. They are little bits of information your Internet browser remembers to make it easier for you to shop online by remembering the information you fill in and filling it in automatically next time. <br><br> Similarly, at weather websites, your hometown area can be called up faster because the information from the last time you visited the site is stored in the cookies. <h3>How Cookies Work</h3> Ever wonder how you can automatically log into your web-based email? Your username and password is stored information. <br><br> In addition to remembering personal information, cookies also remembers what websites you visit and can track the kind of advertisements you might stop and click on. <br><br> For example, if you frequently visit video game websites, you might get more banner ads for video games or gaming equipment. <h3>Ways to Avoid Cookies</h3> The good news is, if you don't enter personal information into your computer, it can never have access to it. <br><br> For example, if you don't want anyone to know your phone number, don't type it in any forms online. <h3>Delete Cookies in Internet Explorer</h3> But if you do enter personal information that you don't want to get out, you can always delete your cookies. <br><br> If you're using Internet Explorer 6 or later, click on 'Tools' in the browser, then select 'Internet Options.' On the general tab, click 'Delete.' Click 'OK' to confirm and all your cookies will be erased. <h3>Turn Off Cookies in Internet Explorer</h3> If you decide that you never want your Internet Explorer browser to remember cookies, click on 'Tools' and click 'Internet Options.' <br><br> On the privacy tab, click 'Advanced.' Check the override automatic cookie handling box. Click 'OK' to confirm and 'OK' to complete. <br><br> Now cookies will not be able to track the pages you browse or remember personal information. This means that you will have to fill in any online form, which could become tiresome if you are involved with e-commerce. <h3>Remove Cookies in Firefox</h3> If you primarily use Firefox and you want to remove cookies, click 'Tools' and select 'Options.' On the cookies menu, click 'View Cookies.' Click 'Remove Cookies,' or 'Remove All Cookies.' Click 'OK' to confirm. <br><br> It will erase all the cookie files stored on your computer. <br><br> To prevent future cookies, click the checkbox next to 'Allow Sites to Set Cookies.' Then click 'OK' to confirm. Now cookies will not be tracked and your personal information will not be remembered. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6948 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Apple-iMovie-4-video-effects.htm Adding special effects to your video can make it look more professional and entertaining. Learn how to add Apple iMovie's Effects to your clips with ease. Computing,Software,iMovie,Editing,Effects,Movies,Videos,Film,Television 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Software,iMovie,Editing,Effects,Movies,Videos,Film,Television Hi. I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. Today I'll teach you how to add video effects to clips in Apple's iMovie. <br><br>First open up your movie project or create a new project and import video clips. I've already placed clips on the timeline. After arranging your video you might want to add effects to your project. <br><h3>Find iMovie Effects Window</h3>To add effects, click on the Effects icon. This brings up the Effects window. Here you'll see a list of different effects. <br><h3>Effect Preview</h3>If you click on an effect it previews in the small preview window in the right corner. If you press the Preview button you can watch the effect in the large preview timeline. <br><h3>Options</h3>You can adjust when the effect starts and ends in a clip by adjusting the Effects In and Effects Out sliders. Depending on the effect you choose there are various additional settings that appear below the list of effects. <br><h3>Add Effect to iMovie Timeline</h3>To add an effect, select a clip you want to add an effect to, and then click an effect in the list and hit the Apply button. When you apply the effect a red line appears below the effect. The computer needs to process the effect and the redline shows the progress. <br><h3>Deleting</h3>If you want to delete an effect, just click on the clip and press Delete. <br><br>After it's done press play to watch your clip with the new effect.There are plenty of effects to choose from which offer creative and artistic editing choices. And that's how you work with effects in Apple iMovie. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_4755 Fri, 29 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/landscaping/How-to-Mow-Your-Lawn.htm The grass doesn't have to be greener on the other side. Check out these tips on how to properly mow your lawn. mow a lawn,landscaping videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. mow a lawn,landscaping videos Hi, I'm Isaac Stephens with About.com Home. Today I'm going to show you how to mow your lawn. <h3>Guidelines to Mowing the Lawn</h3> There are a couple of guidelines to follow. Remove no more than one-third of the grass blade at a time, and mow at the upper range of the recommended cutting height for your grass. <h3>Supplies Needed to Mow the Lawn</h3> Here are a few items you will need:<ul> <li>eye protection</li> <li>lawn mower</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Lawn and the Lawn Mower</h3> First, let's check and make sure our mower is full of gas and oil and that the blades are clean. Once the mower is checked, we can begin. <br><br> We will start by walking through and picking up any broken tree limbs and debris in your yard. <h3>Make Header Strips</h3> Once the yard is clean of any debris, begin by mowing header strips at the ends of the lawn and around flowerbeds and shrub beds. The headers give you room to turn and work around any curves. <h3>Mow Between the Header Strips</h3> Then mow back and forth between the header strips. Lastly, overlap each cut by 1 or 2 inches; this helps you avoid leaving ridges of uncut grass. <h3>Try These Mowing Tips</h3> Here are a couple of mowing tips that will help. First, be sure the mower blade is sharp. A sharp blade cuts cleanly and helps mulch clippings into small pieces. <br><br> Second, change the direction and pattern each time you mow. If you don't, the mower tends to push the grass over rather than cut it cleanly. <br><br> These are just a few simple guidelines to follow that will help you cut a clean-looking lawn. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at homegarden.about.com. aboutvideo_6933 Wed, 24 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Lighting--Three-Simple-Setups.htm Improve your videos and photos by learning the three basic lighting set-ups: three point lighting, beauty light, and the Rembrandt effect. photography,videography,lighting,lighting set up 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. photography,videography,lighting,lighting set up Hi, I'm Leann Bello with About.com Gadgets.<br/><br/><h3>3-Point Lighting Set Up</h3>The standard lighting setups for interview and portraiture consists of three elements: the key light, the fill light, and the backlight:<ul><li><b>Key light-</b> Main lighting source</li><li><b>Fill light-</b> defines intensity of shadows</li><li><b>Backlight-</b> separates subject from the background</li></ul><h3>Key Light</h3>The key light is the first light you set. It is the strongest light and usually comes from a high angle and from the side.<br/><h3>Fill Light</h3>The fill light is either a weaker light or a bounce card. It fills in the shadow for the key light. The difference between the key light and the fill is your contrast ratio.<br/><h3>Backlight</h3>The backlight serves to separate your subject from the background. It creates an edge light which can either be distinct or soft. Try not to make it too strong as this light may distract from the subject or cause a lens flare.<br/><h3>"Beauty" Lighting Set Up</h3>Standard beauty lighting (soft frontal, something in the hair).<br/><br/>For headshots and portraits, use a soft frontal light positioned high or level with the lens. A slight overexposure will help disguise imperfections in your subjects skin.<br/><br/>For a back light, either place the light above the persons head for a top light, or place it directly behind the person to create a ring or halo of light behind the persons hair.<br/><h3>Chiaroscuro or Rembrandt Lighting Set Up</h3>The Rembrandt effect is a classic portraiture setup. It is a high contrast lighting scheme and is achieved by placing the key light at a 45 degree angle to your subjects face. The Rembrandt effect is characterized by a triangular light underneath the subject's eye. It also allows the nose shadow to blend in with the shadow on the dark side of the face.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, please visit us on the Web at Gadgets.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_5126 Wed, 12 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/lungdiseases/Bronchodilators.htm When bronchi are constricted mucus levels increase. Bronchodilators are medications that treat constricted bronchi. bronchodilators, constricted bronchi, mucus 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. bronchodilators, constricted bronchi, mucus <h3>Constricted Bronchi</h3> During normal respiration, air travels through the nose, down the trachea, and into smaller and smaller airways called bronchi. In some cases the smooth muscle that wraps around the bronchi may constrict and mucus levels can increase. This makes breathing difficult. <h3>What are Bronchodilators?</h3> Generally this condition is treated with medications called bronchodilators. <h3>Types of Bronchodilators</h3> The most common types of bronchodilators are anticholinergics and beta-2 agonists. These drugs are inhaled, travel down the airway and bind to bronchial smooth muscle cells. This results in muscle relaxation and decreased levels of mucus, which allows for easier breathing. <br><br> Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_4765 Thu, 16 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/cocktails/Pomegranate-Martini.htm It's out with the Cosmopolitan, and in with the pomegranate martini. Watch how to make this cocktail that's loaded with antioxidants and flavor. cocktail videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cocktail videos Hi, I'm Jonathon Stewart for About.com Food, and today, it's all about the pomegranate martini. <h3>Benefits of Pomegranate</h3> Now, have you ever dreamed of having a cocktail that not only takes the edge off of awkward conversation, but also lowers your cholesterol and blood pressure, slows the aging process, and inhibits colon, breast, skin, and prostate cancer? <br><br> Lofty goals indeed, but the pomegranate martini aims to achieve. <h3>Pomegranate Martini Ingredients</h3> For today's recipe, here's what you'll need. Check it out:<ul> <li>2 tablespoons natural cane sugar</li> <li>2 tablespoons water</li> <li>2-3 ounces top-shelf vodka</li> <li>2-6 ounces freshly squeezed or organic pomegranate juice</li> <li>half of a lime</li> <li>2 slices lemon</li> <li>a martini shaker and glass</li> <li>ice</li> </ul> <h3>When to Buy Pomegranates</h3> Pomegranates are a sweet and tart fruit that are only in season from about late August through the beginning of January. <br><br> Their juice comes from these tiny edible ruby-colored seeds, which serve as the basis for this delicious and beautiful cocktail. <h3>Make the Simple Syrup</h3> Start by making what's known as "simple syrup," by pre-warming a pan over high heat on your stove top, and adding the sugar and water. <br><br> Heat and stir until all the sugar is dissolved and you're left with the sticky, sweet syrup. Remove from the heat and set aside to cool. <h3>Set Your Proportions</h3> If you're keeping tabs on your blood sugar, or if you just prefer a less sweet cocktail, you can always substitute Stevia for the sugar, or just skip it all together. <br><br> Likewise, if you're making a number of these tasty libations, you can always whip up a larger batch of the simple syrup. Just make sure that your sugar to water ratio remains one to one. <h3>Coat the Martini Glass in Sugar</h3> Next, take a small plate and spread a thin layer of sugar over its surface. Run one of the lemon slices around the rim of your glass, wetting it with the citrus juice as you go. <br><br> Turn the glass over and carefully rotate it in the sugar. <br><br> This step might take a little practice to master, but presenting your pomegranate martini in a perfectly sugared glass is sure to impress. <h3>Combine the Vodka and Pomegranate Juice</h3> Fill your martini shaker almost to the top with ice, and add your vodka and pomegranate juice, using a ballpark ratio of two parts pomegranate juice to one part vodka. <br><br> How much you use of each is completely up to personal preference, and you may need to play with the total volume a bit to match your martini glass. <br><br> A standard shot glass measures about an ounce and a half, so keep in mind that even a relatively weak pomegranate martini still packs a pretty good wallop. <h3>Add the Lime Juice and Simple Syrup</h3> Squeeze the juice from your lime into the shaker, and add in the simple syrup, and shake for about 30 seconds. <br><br> Some bartenders prefer to use Cointreuax or Triple Sec to add flavor. But using real fruit will not only give your cocktail a zesty bite, the pulp from the lime will also give it an appealingly full body. <h3>Pour the Martini Into a Glass</h3> Pour the cocktail into the glass, being sure not to drip over your carefully sugared rim. For an elegant final touch, make a tiny cut into the radius of your final lemon slice, twist into a spiral and hang from the side of the glass. <br><br> After sipping one of these, you might never order a Cosmopolitan again. They're so last millennium anyway, aren't they? <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4583 Wed, 13 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/southernfood/Honey-Roasted-Almonds.htm Almonds roasted with honey and spices are an excellent addition to any party menu. Watch how to make this simple but delicious recipe. honey roasted almonds,recipes,snacks,videos,almonds 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. honey roasted almonds,recipes,snacks,videos,almonds Hi, I am Natasha Levitan for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make honey roasted almonds <h3>Honey Roasted Almonds Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you'll need:<ul> <li>1 cup honey</li> <li>2 teaspoons Chinese five spice powder</li> <li>3 cups whole almonds with skin</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Honey Mixture</h3> Preheat the oven to 300 degrees. Line the baking pan with parchment paper; it will keep your almonds from sticking to the pan. <br><br> In a medium sauce pan, pour in 1 cup of honey. Put the heat on medium so the honey warms evenly. Stir the honey until it becomes thin and easy to pour. <br><br> Add two teaspoons of Chinese five spice powder and almonds, and stir until the almonds are fully coated <h3>Bake the Almonds</h3> Use a slotted spoon to transfer almonds to the baking pan in single layer. Place the baking sheet in the oven. Twenty minutes into baking, rotate your pan. <br><br> When the nut mixture has darkened in color, about 45-55 minutes into baking, take the baking pan out. <h3>Serve the Honey Roasted Almonds</h3> Spread the almonds in a single layer on a parchment paper and set aside to cool. The almonds will keep in an airtight container for two weeks. You can serve them to your guests as an appetizer or a snack. <br><br> Thank you for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com aboutvideo_138982960 Mon, 10 Jul 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://home.about.com/z/cg/vp.htm?ch=health&l=health/v/12&ap=1 Personal Trainer and Fitness expert Leslie Nesbit gives us a quick informative lesson in warming up 2006 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Health/Fitness Personal Trainer and Fitness Expert Leslie Nesbit gives a quick informative lesson in Warming Up. Hi, I'm Leslie Nesbit for About.com Health. One of the most important things you can do before working out is warming up, definitely don't skip this step... if you want more dynamic moves... alternating those legs... don't forget to cool down gradually... For more, visit us on the web at Health. About.com aboutvideo_18584113 Mon, 10 Jul 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://home.about.com/z/cg/vp.htm?ch=health&l=health/v/2&ap=1 The most recent strain of avian influenza has scientists speculating about a worldwide pandemic. Find out how concerned you should be. 2006 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Health/Conditions and Diseases/Infectious Diseases/Viral/Influenza/Avian [open] Pandemic. Now there's a word guaranteed to inspire dread. Pandemics occur when a new flu virus emerges, causing serious illness and death around the world. There have been four in the last hundred years. The most recent killed about 1 million people in 1968 and 1969. The 1918 flu pandemic took 40 million lives. All are thought to have originated with flu strains that normally affect only birds know as avian flu or bird flu. Unfortunately, a new strain of avian flu has public health officials worried about the potential for a new pandemic, even though by the start of the 2005 flu season, only about 100 people had come down with this new strain since it first appeared in 1997. [body] While there is genuine cause for concern, a pandemic isn't inevitable. Medical advances since the last pandemic can make a big difference. Better flu tests, anti-viral drugs, and the likelihood that a vaccine can be developed quickly are all powerful weapons. So what exactly is avian flu? Avian flu is an infectious disease that usually causes only minor symptoms in birds. But there are two types that researchers refer to as "highly pathogenic," which means they are capable of spreading rapidly through a flock and killing most of the birds that become ill. While normally, avian flu infects only birds, in 1997, 18 people in Hong Kong came down with an avian flu strain known as H5N1. Six of them died. To control the outbreak, 1.5 million chickens, ducks, and geese were destroyed. By the fall of 2005, outbreaks of H5N1 in birds had been reported in nine countries in Asia and two in Europe. More than half of the 100 people that had been infected had died. That's the bad news. The good news is that so far, H5N1 does not jump easily from birds to people, or from person to person. Most of the people who had been infected were poultry farmers who had direct contact with infected birds. Unless H5N1 changes into a form that infects humans more easily, the chances of catching avian flu remain extremely low. If you travel to a country where H5N1 has been detected in birds, it's a good idea to stay away from live poultry. Avian flu is not a food-born illness and the virus is sensitive to heat which means it's safe to eat poultry if you follow normal procedures for cooking and handling poultry. The obvious question, then, is why all the concern about a possible pandemic? It has to do with the tendency for flu viruses to change as they reproduce. There's a chance H5N1 will mutate until it acquires the ability to infect humans more easily. A second possibility is that if a person comes down with a garden variety version of the flu and H5N1 at the same time, the two strains could merge into a new variety capable of moving from person to person. It's that second scenario that worries researchers most. To prepare, governments are stockpiling anti-viral medications like Tamiflu and work is underway on a vaccine for H5N1 flu. [close] There is a strong worldwide effort to control the spread of avian flu in birds and monitor its affect on humans to prevent it from spreading quickly if it does mutate into a form that moves easily from person to person. The best news so far is that it hasn't happened yet. And there's a chance it never will. I'm Dr. Mona Khanna, About Health. aboutvideo_6785 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/autorepair/Applying-Carpet-Protection.htm Learn how to protect your car's carpeting and upholstery to keep the interior looking brand new and guarantee the highest possible resale value when it's time to sell. car interior,car upholstery,car carpeting,resale value,car protection 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. car interior,car upholstery,car carpeting,resale value,car protection Hi, I'm Barbara Terry for About.com Autos. Food and drink spills have always been a nuisance by staining your car's interior, and causing your car's resale value to depreciate even more than necessary.<br/><br/><H3>Products to Protect your Car's Interior</H3><br/>After using a ton of different products in my life, I've narrowed it down to Metro Guardian's Fabric and Upholstery protector to be my favorite. And it's really easy to use on your car's interior. <br/><br/><H3>Preparing your Car's Interior- Cleaning</H3><br/>So let's get started and see how it works. You'll first want to vacuum and shampoo your car's interior, or apply the product to your carpets before those spills accidentally happen when you first purchase your car. <br/><br/><H3>Applying Products to your Car Interior</H3><br/>To apply the product, simply spray onto the surface and repeat this process throughout the whole vehicle. Make sure to let it dry for at least 4 hours before putting anything on top of it, such as your feet or a car mat. Future stains will simply blot up with a damp cloth. <br/><br/>By spending approximately an hour to apply the carpet and upholstery protector, you will thank yourself over and over again by not having to drive around in a car with Kool-Aid stains or other food spills. It will also prevent future fading. <br/><br/>To learn more, visit us on the Web at Autos.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_6902 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/iMovie-project-setup.htm When you start new projects in Apple's iMovie, it's important to get your project settings set appropriately. Learn how to begin a new iMovie project the right way each time. Computing,Gadgets,Programs,Apple iMovie,Apple,Capture,Editing,Videos,Movies 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Gadgets,Programs,Apple iMovie,Apple,Capture,Editing,Videos,Movies Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. <br/><br/>Today I'll teach you how to set up a new project in Apple's iMovie. Each time you start a new project in iMovie you need to set up project settings. To start iMovie I'll click on the iMovie icon on the dock. If you don't see the icon on the dock, open up your hard drive, go to the Applications folder, look for iMovie, and double click on it. <br/><h3>Create iMovie Project</h3>On the Welcome Screen I'll click Create Project. I need to name my project and also set save folders for clips. I'll select the Movies folder and I'll name my project, My Movie, and hit Save. <br><br>If you don't have much space on your hard drive, you can choose to set your project to an external drive with more space. It's up to you. <br/><h3>iMovie Project Preferences</h3>Now I'll set Personal Preferences by going to iMovie Preferences. Here you can customize settings. I'll set iMovie to play a sound when export is completed. I'll make sure new clips go to the Clips Pane. <br><br>I'll set new projects to NTSC. NTSC is the format for my camera, which is the standard in the United States. PAL is for Europe. <br><br>Playback quality is set to high, and I'll close the Preferences Window. <br><br> Now I'll import some clips into iMovie. You can import clips, photos, and audio for editing. <br/><h3>Media Management</h3>I'll click the Clips icon and go to File Import to select clips. I'll browse to a folder with clips and select a few, then I'll click Open. It may take a few minutes to import clips. Our clips appear in our clip window. You can also drag and drop video directly to the clip window. <br/><br/>One of the useful features of iMovie is that it automatically adds imported video into your project folder. <br><br>If I go to my Movies folder on my hard dive, click on my project, I see a folder labeled Media. I'll click on it. There's our imported media. <br/><br/>Keep in mind that if you import media you have two copies on your hard drive. You can quickly eat up hard drive space if you don't delete the duplicate clip. Keep that in mind. I'll finally go to File, Save Project. <br/><br>It's a good habit to save often when you work on a project. Things can go wrong. <br/><br/>And that's how you set up a project for editing in iMovie. Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_6756 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/email/Signatures-in-Outlook-Express.htm Email signatures are a great way to express your personality. Learn how to create and manage email signatures in Outlook Express. Computing,Outlook Express,Email,Signatures,Videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Outlook Express,Email,Signatures,Videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'm going to show you how to set up signatures in Outlook Express. <h3>What is an Email Signature?</h3> A signature is a small piece of information that will be added to all of your outgoing emails. Some people include their contact information, while others put a link to a Web site or an interesting quote. <h3> Create an Email Signature </h3> To get started, go up to Tools and click on 'options.' Go to the Signatures tab, and click 'new.' Type the text that you want to appear in the box under Edit Signatures. Click on 'rename,' and give your signature a name. <br><br> Now click on 'new' to create a second signature. Type in some text, and don't forget to give it a name as well. You can click on 'set as default' for this signature, and hit 'apply.' <h3>Insert Text or an HTML File</h3> Now, if you have a Text or an HTML file, you can also use that as your signature. Just click on 'new,' and instead of typing something in, click on the File button. Click 'browse' and locate your file. Click 'open,' and now give it a name. <h3>Use Signatures for Multiple Email Accounts</h3> If you have multiple email accounts set up, you can specify which signature goes with which email account. <br><br> First, click on the signature you want to use. Click on the Advanced tab. Choose the email account that you want the signature to belong to. Choose as many as you'd like. When you're done, click 'OK.' <h3>Add Signature to Outgoing Messages</h3> Now, make sure to click on the box that says 'Add Signatures to All Outgoing Messages.' Now you can choose whether you want to add signatures to replies and forwards. Click 'OK,' and go up to Create Mail. <br><br> There's your signature, all ready to go. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4426 Fri, 25 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/spreadsheets/Borders-and-Shading-in-Excel.htm How to create borders and use shading in Microsoft Excel excel tutorials, spreadsheets videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. excel tutorials, spreadsheets videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to create borders and use shading in Microsoft Excel. <h3>Preview the Excel Data</h3> Open Microsoft Excel. I want to add borders and shading to help with the aesthetic presentation of my data. If I got up to 'File' and click on 'print preview,' you can see how it will look printed. Without lines or borders, the data looks a bit jumbled. Let's see what we can do to help this. Close the print preview window. <h3>Select Cells to Format</h3> First I'll select just the list of names in the left column. Right click and choose 'format cells.' Select the border tab at the top of the window. Here you can see different line styles and thicknesses. I'll choose the normal thickness. <h3>Format the Right Side Border</h3> Now I need to choose where I want that line to be. I'll click on just the right hand side of the cells. You can see that you can choose any side of the cell to apply a border. You can even choose a line on the interior walls of a cell or a 45 degree angle going in both directions. <br><br>I can also remove all the borders with one click up here. Or add borders to the entire outside of the cells or the insides of the cells. You also can change the color of the lines using the drop down menu. For now I'll leave the lines as black. Click 'ok.' <h3>Format Top Row Borders</h3> For the top row titles, I want to add a line to separate them from the data. I will select them first and go to the format icon on the toolbar. Here I can choose what side of the cell for the border. I'll click the line on the bottom of the cell. <h3>Add Shading to the Worksheet</h3> I want to add some color shading to my worksheet. Click and drag to highlight the range of cells to shade. I will select the top row titles and while holding the control key I will also select the left column. Up in the toolbar go to 'format' and click 'cells.' Select the pattern tab, and here you can change the color of the cells. <br><br>I'll choose a light cyan color and click ok. Another way to format the cell shading is to use the paint bucket tool at the top. Just select your range and click on the paint bucket to select the color. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6857 Mon, 17 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/wordprocessing/Edit-Pictures-in-Word.htm Want to learn how to insert and manage images in Microsoft Word? See how to crop, rotate, and format photos in this program. Computing, Programs, Software, Program, Microsoft Word 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing, Programs, Software, Program, Microsoft Word Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. Today I'll teach you how to insert and use pictures in Microsoft Word. <h3>Create a Word Document</h3> I've opened a sample letter to insert pictures into. To insert a picture go to 'Insert, Picture, From File.' <h3>Choose a Photo</h3> I'll find a photo from a folder, select the picture, and hit 'Insert.' Our picture is in the sample letter. We could stop there, but let's play with settings. <h3>Adjust the Picture Settings</h3> To adjust settings click on the picture. This should bring up the picture toolbar. If you don't see it, go up to view, toolbars, and select picture. <br><br>The picture toolbar has several icons with setting features. The mountain icon allows you to insert more pictures. The second icon allows you to change the photo from color to grayscale, black and white, or washed out. <br><br>The black and white half moon icons affect the contrast of the picture. Let me play around with them a little. <h3>Crop the Photo</h3> The two sun icons affect the brightness of the picture. After the sun icons you have the crop tool, for trimming your picture. Go to one of the little circles and drag inward to crop. If you make a mistake, you can go to edit, undo. <h3>Rotate the Picture</h3> After crop is the rotate tool, in case you need to turn your picture. Every time you click the button it rotates the picture 90 degrees. <h3>Format the Picture</h3> Feel free to experiment with all the options. If you double click on the picture, it brings up the format picture box. Here, you can affect settings such as the size, the layout, and how text interacts with it. <br><br>If you forget what any of the icons are, place your mouse over it to bring up a feature line explaining what it is. <h3>Manually Adjust the Photo</h3> You can also adjust the size of the picture by clicking on the small circles surrounding the picture. The top middle green circle adjusts the rotation. The corner circles adjust the height and width equally, while the left and right and bottom middle circle points adjust height and width in one direction. <br><br>Play around with inserting pictures to get comfortable. And that's how you import pictures into documents. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4621 Mon, 26 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/windows/Burn-a-CD-in-Media-Player.htm Put your DJ skills to the test by burning your own CD or mix in Windows Media Player. Burned music CDs make an inexpensive but thoughtful gift, and they're really simple to copy. burn a cd, copy, windows 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. burn a cd, copy, windows Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'm going to show you how to create a music CD with Windows Media Player. You can copy your older or dirty CD, or create a cool mix with Media Player by creating a CD playlist. <h3>Choose Windows Media Player to Burn the CD</h3> First insert a blank CD-R into your computer. An auto play button will appear and ask you if you want to create an audio CD with Media Player or iTunes, or burn files onto the disk using windows or Roxio. Select 'create audio CD with Windows Media Player' and Windows Media Player should open up to the burn tab. <h3>Select Windows Media Player Options</h3> Go ahead and click the burn tab. In the drop down menu, there are several options such as creating an audio CD or a data CD or DVD. You can also select eject CD after it is done burning. You can also apply volume leveling across tracks, so that all of the songs are playing at the same volume. <h3>Adjust the CD Burn Speed</h3> Click on 'more options,' and here you can used the dialog box to change the burn speed. The slower the burn speed, the more reliable the information is. Click 'OK' when you are done. <h3>Add Music to the CD</h3> Now click on 'library' in the left pane. You can add music to your audio CD by dragging the icon to the right pane. Above the list of songs to be burned on the CD you will see a meter that will go up as you add more songs. The maximum time is 75 minutes of music. You can also change the order of music by dragging the clips up and down. <h3>Burn the CD</h3> Click the 'X' to clear you entire list, or right click a single track to remove it from the list. When you are done, click 'start burn.' Your CD will eject when it is done unless you have choose not to eject it. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, visit us online at About.com. aboutvideo_6869 Sat, 03 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/spreadsheets/Sorting.htm Microsoft Excel allows you to manage large amounts of data on spreadsheets. Learn how to sort that data so you can organize and retrieve exactly what you need. Computing,Programs,Software,Excel,Data,Information,Organize,Spreadsheets 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Excel,Data,Information,Organize,Spreadsheets Hi. I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today, I am going to show you how to sort any information you want with Microsoft Excel. <br><h3>Sample Excel Sort </h3>Let's start with a list of first and last names, phone number, town, and state. If I want to sort this list by last names, I need to highlight all the data I am using. Now, I will go up to Data, and click on Sort. This brings up a list that asks what I want to sort by. <br><h3>Sorting Alphabetically in Excel</h3>I want to view the list by last names, so I'll look for my column for last names, Column B. I want to start at the end of the alphabet so I will click on descending. <br><br>For now, let's just click OK. There's my sorted list, starting with S and working its way up to A. Look at the bottom of my list. I have three people with the last name of Arkin. <br><h3>Secondary Sort Columns</h3>Suppose I want to sort out all my Arkins by the town they are located in AND I want to start with Last names beginning with A and work my way down. <br><br>Well, with my data still highlighted, I will go back up to Data, and click on Sort. <br><br>I still want to sort by Column B, but now I will click on ascending. That will put the last names in alphabetical order. <br><br>To sort out the Arkins by town I then need to go to the next field. After it sorts the list in ascending order by last name I need to tell it to sort by Column D, my list of towns. I'll choose ascending order for the towns as well. <br><br>If I wanted to sort the list even further I could choose yet another option. Let's click OK. Now my list is sorted by last name and all the people with a last name of Arkin are sorted by their town name. <br><h3>Excel Sort With a Header Row</h3>Now let me show you another trick. Highlight all of the text, including the top row. <br><br>Let's go back to Data, Sort. If I click on the button that says my list has a header row, the words under Sort by change. Instead of saying Sort by Column A, B, C D, or E, it now says sort by First, Last, Phone Number, Town, and State. Just watch out. <br><br>If I choose sort by First and click OK, it sorts my list just fine. However it got rid of that empty row. To put it back in I have to click on the first name and go up to Insert, Rows. <br><br>Sorting is a very powerful tool that allows you to maintain and view databases efficiently. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_4950 Tue, 11 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/southernfood/No-Cry-Onion-Chopping.htm Does cutting onions turn you into a weeping mess? Avoid a teary scene the next time you're chopping onions by using this simple, surefire method. cooking techniques,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cooking techniques,videos Hi, I'm Jonathon Stewart for About.com Food with today's 90-second quick tip. <br><br> Do you weep like you're watching "Life is Beautiful" every time you're faced with the task of chopping an onion? Well, try this easy method and keep those tears at bay for good. <h3>Cut Into the Onion</h3> Start by locating the root end of the onion. Just beneath the surface lies the onion bulb, which contains the greatest concentration of the onion's tear-producing enzymes. <br><br> With a sharp paring knife, make an angular cut about one-third of the onion's diameter deep, and proceed to cut in a circular direction, always being sure to cut away from your other hand. <h3>Remove the Onion Bulb</h3> Remove the cone-shaped piece of onion in one big chunk, which should contain the bulb, and move this part of the onion as far away from your eyes as you possibly can, or at least into the trash. Do not put this in your garbage disposal. <h3>Peel and Chop the Onion</h3> Proceed to peel the onion, then make one big slice lengthwise with a large knife. Turn the onion on its side and make three or four cross-cuts, and chop lengthwise for the big finish. <h3>Alternative Tear-Free Methods</h3> You can also wear a pair of swimming goggles and cut the onion and old way you want, or try putting it in the freezer for about 20 minutes prior to chopping. <br><br> Remember to use a sharp knife and always breathe through your nose, or your ears... if you can. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4472 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/housekeeping/How-to-Clean-an-Oven.htm Get rid of the grime and baked-on food inside of your oven. Learn a quick and easy way to get your oven sparkling clean. cleaning ovens,oven,cleaning the kitchen,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cleaning ovens,oven,cleaning the kitchen,videos Hi, I'm Debbie Anderson for About.com Home. Cleaning up the grime and leftover, baked-on food inside your oven can be a real chore that requires a lot of time and elbow grease. <br><br> Today I'm going to show you a fast and simple method for cleaning the baked-on grease, grime, and food from the inside of your oven. <h3>Supplies Needed to Clean Your Oven</h3> For this task, you will need:<ul> <li>a pair of rubber gloves</li> <li>a light, non-abrasive liquid cleaner</li> <li>oven cleaning spray</li> <li>a sponge</li> <li>a soft cleaning towel</li> </ul> <h3>Soak the Oven Racks</h3> After putting on your rubber gloves, remove all the oven racks from the inside of the oven. Place them in a nearby sink filled with light, non-abrassive liquid cleaner and hot water. Allow the racks to soak while you clean the rest of the oven. <h3>Spray the Oven Cleaner in the Oven</h3> Next, start by preheating the oven to 200 degrees. Once the oven has reached the desired temperature, which should take about 10 to 15 minutes, turn the oven off and spray the inside of the oven with oven cleaner. <br><br> Close the door to the oven and allow the cleaner to work for 10 minutes. <h3>Wipe the Dirt From the Oven</h3> Next, using a damp sponge, wipe the cleaner and dirt from the inside of the oven. <br><br> While doing this, remember to rinse your sponge frequently under warm water to prevent smearing the grime around. <h3>Dry the Oven With a Soft Cloth</h3> Once inside of the oven is clean, dry the inside of the oven with a soft cloth. <br><br> Finally, wipe down the oven racks with a sponge, and dry each rack with a soft cloth. Place the clean racks back inside the oven. That looks much better! <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at homegarden.about.com. aboutvideo_6952 Sat, 27 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Camtasia.--5a.--5a.htm Use Camtasia to capture your computer screen-- You'll learn how to present tutorials, tours, and other materials to colleagues and friends straight from your desktop. Computing,Programs,Software,Camtasia,Capture,Video Production,Videos,Graphics 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Camtasia,Capture,Video Production,Videos,Graphics Hi. I'm Don Schechter for About.com computing.<br><br>Today I'll teach you how to record a computer screen in Camtasia. <br><h3>Set Up Camtasia for Capture</h3>First open up Camtasia. When you first open Camtasia you may see a welcome screen. Uncheck the show this screen at startup box and hit close. <br><br>Camtasia features a handy Task List on the left side. If you dont see the task list click View, Task List to bring it up. The task list is a shortcut to the options in Camtasia. To record the screen, the record button at top of the taskbar. You could click File, Record the Screen instead. Its up to you. <br><h3>Camtasia Capture and Recording Wizard</h3>This brings up the Recording Wizard screen. Here you can choose to record a region of the screen, a specific window, or the entire screen. <br><br>I'll click record the entire screen and click next. <br><h3>Camtasia Capture Recording Options</h3>This brings up recording options. If you wanted to record audio while recording your screen you select the record audio feature.<br><br>You could also use Camtasia to capture through your camera. Since I don't want audio or to capture through my camera I'll leave both settings unchecked and click next. <br><br>Next we have the begin recording screen. This lists two shortcuts for recording. We can hit F9 to start recording and F10 to stop I'll keep those in mind and click finish. Now were ready to capture. <br><h3>How to Capture Desktop in Camtasia</h3>The Camtasia recorder appears on screen. To record I can hit the red record circle button or hit F9. I'll hit F9. <br><br>The camtasia recorder minimizes to my windows toolbar. I'll wait a few seconds and hit F10 to stop recording. <br><h3>Review and Save Camtasia Capture</h3>The Camtasia recorder window pops up and I can preview my screen recording. I'll hit the save button to save the recording for use later on. I'll browse and save it on my desktop as screen record and hit save. <br><h3>After you Capture Desktop in Camtasia</h3>A post save options box pops up with options. I can edit my recording, produce my video in a shareable format, or create another recording.<br><br>I'll hit cancel and I'll close the camtasia recorder and program. Now I'll go my desktop. <br><br>There's my screen record file that I can open later on. I just need to double click it and it opens up in Camtasia. And that's how you record your screen in Camtasia. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_4741 Wed, 25 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/familycrafts/Make-an-Origami-Elephant.htm Bring a bit of the zoo into your home with this cute origami elephant. Watch how easy it is to make an origami elephant. origami videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. origami videos Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Parenting, and I am going to show you how to make an origami elephant. <br><br> For this project you will need two sheets of origami paper. <h3>Form the Origami Elephant's Head</h3> We will use the first sheet of paper to make the head of the elephant. Begin by folding it into a triangle to form a crease down the center. Then, fold it the opposite way to make another crease. <br><br> Take the top corner and fold it down so that it hits right in the center. Take the bottom corner and fold it up just a tiny bit. <h3>Form the Origami Elephant's Trunk</h3> Now, take the outside corners and fold them in right along this line here, and do the same on the other side. Now we will take this corner and fold it out like so. Do the same thing on the other side. <br><br> Flip the paper over. Fold the bottom part up here so that we have a straight edge along the bottom. Now fold it down, leaving a little space right here. This will be the trunk of the elephant. <br><br> We will fold it accordion style just to give it some texture and some creases. <h3>Soften the Shape of the Head</h3> At the top of the paper, take the corners and fold them just slightly back like so, so that our elephant does not have quite such a square head. <br><br> If you want now, you can take a pen and draw some eyes on the elephant. <h3>Make the Origami Elephant's Body</h3> Now we will use the other piece of paper to make the body of the elephant. Fold it in half to make a rectangle. This will give it a nice crease up the center. <br><br> Then fold it in half the other way to get another crease. Take the bottom edge of the paper and fold it up about halfway toward the center. Now flip the paper over. <br><br> Fold the edges in so that they meet up in the center. <h3>Assemble the Origami Elephant</h3> Now we will put the elephant together by just sliding the body right in underneath this flap in the head. And there you go, you have an origami elephant. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at parenting.about.com. aboutvideo_4406 Thu, 17 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/familycrafts/How-to-Make-Paper-With-Kids.htm Looking for a fun project to do with your kids? Try making decorative paper at home with flower petals and bits of recyclable paper. crafts,paper,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. crafts,paper,videos Hi, I'm Lisa Jo Rudy for About.com Parenting. Today, my daughter, Sarah, and I are going to show you how to make paper. <h3>Supplies Needed to Make Paper</h3> You'll need:<ul> <li>2 identical wooden frames, the cheapest you can find</li> <li>a piece of screening</li> <li>duct tape</li> <li>scissors</li> <li>sponge</li> <li>bucket or tub</li> <li>blender</li> <li>any kind of paper to recycle</li> <li>flower petals or other add-ins</li> <li>several pieces of felt</li> <li>newspaper to soak up excess water</li> </ul> <h3>Make a Mold</h3> To make paper, you'll need a mold and a deckle. One of the frames is your deckle. The other frame will become your mold. <br><br> To make your mold, cut a piece of screening to fit your frame, stretch it tightly across the frame, and attach it with duct tape. <h3>Blend the Pieces of Paper</h3> Next, rip the paper you've chosen into small pieces, and put the pieces into a blender. You can use any kind of paper, including toilet tissue, construction paper, and even newspaper. <br><br> Add warm water to the blender. Your blender should be about 2/3 full of the paper and water mixture. <br><br> Turn the blender on "high," being sure to hold the lid on tight. Blend until the paper is completely broken down into watery pulp. <h3>Stir the Mixture</h3> Pour the pulp into your tub or bucket. The mixture should be about 4inches deep, and there should be plenty of room to dip your mold and deckle. Pour in your mixture, and stir it around. <h3>Dip the Deckle and Mold Into the Pulp</h3> Place your deckle (the empty frame) on top of your mold (the frame with the screen on it). Hold them together as you dip them into the pulp. <br><br> Allow the pulp to settle on the screen, and give the water a chance to drip through the screen and back into the tub. Remove the deckle from the mold. <h3>Remove the Excess Water From the Paper</h3> In one quick move, turn the mold upside down onto a piece of felt that you've placed on a pad of newspaper. <br><br> Press a sponge onto the back of the mold, and squeeze it out several times to remove excess water. <br><br> Lift your mold off your paper. Start in one corner and lift quickly. <h3>Separate the Paper From the Felt</h3> Leave your paper on the felt to dry. It may take a few hours for your paper to dry out, but when it does, it will be easy to separate from the felt. <br><br> Here are few pieces of paper we made before. The ones with the uneven edges were made without a deckle. The different colors came from different types of construction paper and add-ins. Try your own experiments! <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at parenting.about.com. aboutvideo_6698 Thu, 03 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Hellboy-2-Cast-Interviews.htm Luke Goss and Anna Walton star as siblings Prince Nuada and Princess Nuala in the second 'Hellboy' movie - 'Hellboy II: The Golden Army.' At the film's premiere, Goss and Walton talked about working in the 'Hellboy' world. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the Los Angeles Film Festival and Universal Pictures' World Premiere of <i>Hellboy II: The Golden Army</i>.<p> <h3>Luke Goss ('Prince Nuada')</h3><p> Luke Goss: "I have to admit playing a bad guy that's written by this guy, Guillermo del Toro, it's not about money or ruling the world like that, this character's about honor. It's romance and love and heritage, and all the great things. You're never given just an A and a B with this guy or black and white. It's mysterious and beautiful. As an actor, the complexity of playing Nuada is wonderful."<p> <b>You've worked with him before so how has he evolved over the years?</b><p> Luke Goss: "I worked with him in <i>Blade 2</i>. I played Nomak. You could see the filmmaker. Even after working with him on <i>Blade</i>, I was like every other filmmaker I worked with afterwards you kind of &#150; his sureness when he's on set, his utter knowledge of what he's doing, and he's devoid of guesses &#150; he knows what he's doing &#150; I missed it. The second time working with him on <i>Hellboy</i>, he'd just come off the Academy Awards and all the nominations for <i>Pan's Labyrinth</i>, and I'm like, 'Okay.' He had a bit of a swagger, but never even close to arrogance. I've done a lot of movies and I think I've shown I can do them consistently and rightfully so they gave him the reins this time. And I was blessed to be a part of that."<p> <b>How are <i>Hellboy</i> fans going to like this one? The first one was really accepted by them. Where does this one take it?</b><p> Luke Goss: "They're getting more. Like the first movie, for whatever reason, it didn't have wings, literally and metaphorically, to speak. And this one has a great deal of freedom, based upon Guillermo. And all of us really not doing anything but utterly respecting the genre and keeping the fans happy. There's more monsters, there's more action. There's more peripheral. The sets are more vivid. There's more color. It's more magnificent. Everything is bigger, but it's not gaudy. It's not like typical summer. It's just magnificent, I think."<p> <b>What's the makeup process like for you because you don't look anything like your character?</b><p> Luke Goss: "This is makeup. I look like the other guy. This is five hours to get like this. That was five hours every day. You know why? It was very thin and tiny. You couldn't just put it on. It's millimeter by millimeter. So normally makeup speeds up. When I did <i>Blade</i> - that's the only other movie I've really done it on &#150; it gets quicker. But this process, because it was so intricate, I didn't have a speeding up process. It was five hours a day."<p> <h3>Anna Walton ('Princess Nuala')</h3><p> Anna Walton: "I think it's going to be bigger. It's going to be just more action, more color, more creatures, more monsters."<p> <b>What was that makeup process like for you?</b><p> Anna Walton: "It was quite hard work. It was four hours but then I can't really complain because there were a lot of people who it was a lot worse for, like Ron [Perlman] for example or Doug [Jones]."<p> <b>And at least your character's still pretty in the movie, don't you think so?</b><p> Anna Walton: "I do. Obviously I loved her and I think she was pretty in a very ethereal, otherworldly sense."<p> <b>What's the appeal of a character like this for you?</b><p> Anna Walton: "Just sort of investigating that sort of fantasy world and otherworldly-ness, but still finding the truth and the fact that you can be somebody like that or a creature and actually we all still have the same hearts and the same soul."<p> <b>And getting to work with Guillermo del Toro.</b><p> Anna Walton: "Getting to work Guillermo? You know, it was all right. No, that was definitely a bonus."<p> <h3>More on <i>Hellboy II: The Golden Army</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/hellboy2/ig/Hellboy-2-Photos/index.htm"><i>Hellboy II: The Golden Army</i> Photos</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/hellboy2/"><i>Hellboy II: The Golden Army</i> Credits, Trailer, Interviews and Poster</a></li><br> aboutvideo_4498 Fri, 25 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/mideastfood/Baklava-Recipe.htm Baklava is a sticky, delicious Greek dessert that combines nuts, sugar, cinnamon, and honey. Find out how to make this sweet treat, plus how to handle phyllo dough. desserts,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. desserts,recipes,videos Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I am going to show you how to make baklava. This is a delicious, sticky Greek dessert that is fun to make at home. <h3>Baklava Ingredients</h3> For the baklava, you will need:<ul> <li>1 cup melted butter</li> <li>phyllo dough</li> <li>2 cups chopped walnuts</li> <li>1/2 cup sugar</li> <li>1 teaspoon cinnamon</li> </ul> We will top the pastry with a syrup made from:<ul> <li>1 cup honey</li> <li>1 cup water</li> <li>1 cup sugar</li> <li>1 tablespoon lemon juice</li> <li>1 teaspoon vanilla</li> <li>1 teaspoon cinnamon</li> </ul> You will also need a baking pan and a pastry brush. <h3>Prepare the Baking Pan</h3> Thaw out the phyllo dough ahead of time according to the manufacturer's directions. Brush some melted butter along the bottom and the sides of the pan so that nothing sticks. <h3>Add the Phyllo Dough to the Baking Pan</h3> Now, we will add the phyllo dough to the pan, one sheet at a time, and brush each one with butter before adding the next. <br><br> Keep the unused sheets covered with a clean, damp towel to prevent them from drying out. The phyllo dough is very delicate, so try not to tear it as you are moving it into the pan. <br><br> Keep laying down the dough until you have about 10 sheets in the bottom of the pan. <h3>Make the Baklava Filling</h3> In a small bowl, mix together the nuts, sugar, and cinnamon. Spread about one-third of the nut mixture out over the phyllo dough. <br><br> Now, we will cover this with two more sheets of dough, brushing each one with butter. Add another third of the nut and sugar mixture, and cover it again with two sheets of dough. Now add the remaining nut mixture. <h3>Cut the Baklava Into Diamonds</h3> We will cover this with another 10 sheet of phyllo dough. Be sure to brush each one with butter before adding the next. <br><br> Brush butter over the top sheet of dough, and then cut the baklava into diamonds. If you have any remaining butter, you can pour this over the baklava now. <br><br> Bake the dish at 350 degrees for about 30-35 minutes until it turns golden brown. <h3>Make the Honey Syrup</h3> While the baklava is baking, we will make a honey syrup that we will pour over it afterward. <br><br> In a small saucepan, mix together the honey, water, sugar, vanilla, lemon juice, and cinnamon. Bring these ingredients to a simmer on the stove, and let them cook until they form a syrupy consistency. <br><br> Remove the syrup from the heat and let it cool. <h3>Serve the Baklava</h3> When the baklava comes out of the oven, pour the syrup over the dish. Let everything cool before serving. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4285 Thu, 09 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/dogs/Choose-Toys-For-Your-Dog.htm Dog toys don't just provide entertainment for our furry friends. See how dog toys can help pets stay fit, healthy, and clean. dogs, dog toys, safe dog toys, chew toys 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. dogs, dog toys, safe dog toys, chew toys Hi, I'm Nicole Chmura for About.com. This is Lady. She's energetic and loves to play, and we encourage her by choosing the right toys. <h3>Dog Toy Benefits</h3> The American Veterinary Medical Association considers mental stimulation a big part of keeping a puppy healthy. Toys are great for exercising both the brain and all four legs. It's as easy as throwing a ball. <h3>Using Toys to Train Dogs</h3> Sometimes toys can be used a training tools - at the park, or teaching them how to use a doggie door. <h3>Dog Toys for Exercise</h3> Fetching a Frisbee is always fun. Lady is crazy about this soft one - perfect for the pool. She wears herself out jumping in and out to catch it &#150; a real workout in the water. <h3>Chew Toy Varieties</h3> When she's a little calmer, you're sure to find a chew toy in her mouth. Some are silly and squeaky. Others are simple and cheap-- like this plastic water bottle. It gets her undivided attention, no matter what's going on. We just have to be sure she doesn't eat the plastic. <h3>Toys for Clean Teeth</h3> Tug of war is another of Lady's favorite games. Besides exercise, this rope also helps keep her teeth clean. <h3>Edible Bubbles for Dogs</h3> Here's a unique interactive toy-- she's chasing edible bubbles flavored just for furry ones - BBQ chicken or bacon. <h3>Toys to Pass the Time</h3> When a dog has time alone, rawhide and other chew toys help them pass the time. A Kong is another great way to prevent boredom. Putting a treat or a little peanut butter inside keeps them occupied for hours. <h3>Stuffed Animals as Dog Toys</h3> Lady loves stuffed animals, too. But before she gets them, we make sure to remove plastic eyes and noses that could pose a choking hazard. Really, that's good advice for anything small. <h3>Cleaning Dog Toys</h3> Toys will probably dirty during playtime, so be sure they get at least a rinse when you're done. <h3>Rotating Dog Toys</h3> Here's a great tip from the American Kennel Club: rotate toys. Put some away for a few weeks. Then, when you bring them out again, she'll love them like they're new. <h3>Dog Walking as Play</h3> This may be the best toy of all-- a leash. Endless sights and smells on regular walks are all but guaranteed to keep your four legged friend active and happy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us here on the Web at dogs.about.com. aboutvideo_4585 Fri, 29 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Shrimp-Scampi.htm If you're pressed for time but still want a delicious dinner, try this recipe for shrimp scampi. Serve the seasoned shrimp with rice or pasta. shrimp scampi,seafood recipes,cooking videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. shrimp scampi,seafood recipes,cooking videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make shrimp scampi. <h3>Shrimp Scampi Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you'll need:<ul> <li>1 1/2 pounds large shrimp</li> <li>1/3 cup butter</li> <li>4 tablespoons minced garlic</li> <li>6 green onions</li> <li>1/4 cup dry white wine</li> <li>2 tablespoons fresh lemon juice</li> <li>2 tablespoons fresh parsley</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Shrimp</h3> First, rinse the shrimp and remove all of the shell but the tail. At the market, these shrimp were already deveined, which leaves a cut at the top of the shrimp. <br><br> With your fingers, pull the shell from the top and feel all the way around the body of the shrimp. Hold on to the tail and break off the shell. <br><br> Rinse it off and place the shrimp on a towel to dry. Do this for all of the shrimp. <h3>Prepare the Vegetables</h3> Next prepare the vegetables. Thinly slice the green onions. You can also cut them with kitchen shears. <br><br> Then chop 2 tablespoons of parsley. <h3>Cook the Shrimp</h3> Now, heat a large skillet over medium heat. Put in the butter, and let it melt and cook so there is almost no white foam left. <br><br> Next, pour the shrimp into the pan and quickly arrange them in a single layer. I'm going to cook the shrimp in two batches. <h3>Add the Garlic</h3> After about a minute, add the minced garlic all around the pan. One minute later, flip over the shrimp. They should look nice and pink. <br><br> Another 2 minutes and they are done. Remove them from the pan and place to the side. Cook all of the shrimp. <h3>Make the Shrimp Scampi Sauce</h3> In the pan, add the green onions, the wine, and the fresh lemon juice. Bring to a boil and cook for about 30 seconds. <br><br> Remove the sauce from the heat, and mix in the parsley. Pour the shrimp and garlic back into the pan, and coat the shrimp with the sauce. <br><br> Once its done, add to your favorite pasta or arrange on a serving plate with some parsley garnish. Enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6858 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/wordprocessing/Tables-in-Microsoft-Word.htm Microsoft Word tables serve as an attractive way to organize information. See how to create and edit tables in Word. Computing,Software,Microsoft Word,MS Word,Tables,Charts,Graphs,P 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Software,Microsoft Word,MS Word,Tables,Charts,Graphs,P Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. Today I'll teach you how to create and utilize tables in Microsoft Word. Tables are useful tool for sorting information. <h3>Start a Table</h3> To create a new table go to 'Table' on the top bar and click on 'draw table.' This brings up the tables and borders box. <h3>Table Options: Insert or Draw</h3> On the left side of the tables bar, you have the option to draw or insert a table. Drawing a table allows you to use a pencil tool to outline text. I prefer to use the insert table feature because it allows you greater control over options. <br><br>Click on the insert table icon. You have several options to change, but I mainly change the column and row settings. <h3>Word Table Columns and Rows</h3> Column settings refer to the horizontal cells and row settings changes the vertical cells. <br><br>I'll insert 2 in the column, and 3 in the row setting and click, 'OK.' <h3>Adjust Table Breaks in Word</h3> You can adjust the table break, the space in between the cells, by holding your cursor over the table break and dragging it left or right. I'll drag this to the left to leave just enough space for a header name. <h3>Sample Word Table</h3> I'll start a resume and type a few header names in the left table box. I'll type 'EDUCATION,' 'EXPERIENCE,' and 'SKILLS.' I'll move the tables down by clicking on the top left corner of the table box and click holding the mouse and dragging down. Now I'll type 'Sample Resume' above the table. I will center it by clicking on this icon. <h3>Previewing the Word Table</h3> Now go to the print preview icon or go to file, 'print preview.' The table is noticeable in the print preview. I don't want it visible in my final sample resume. I'll close the print preview. <h3>Table View Options</h3> Right click on the left upper corner of the table to bring up options and click on borders and shading. Under setting I'll select none and click, 'OK.' Now when I go to File, Print Preview, my table box is invisible. I'll close the print preview. <h3>Adjust the Word Table</h3> If you scroll over the table and borders box you'll see other options for working with tables. By moving the mouse and holding it over icons the feature of the icon is revealed. Spend some time experimenting with these options to get familiar with the tools and to get the most out of working with tables. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4468 Thu, 10 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/bbq/BBQ-Chicken-Wings.htm Barbecue chicken wings are great at parties or as a snack. And chances are, you have all the ingredients you need in your pantry. barbecue wings, bbq, chicken wings, grilling, recipes, videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. barbecue wings, bbq, chicken wings, grilling, recipes, videos Hi, I'm Chris Chmura for About.com food. Chicken wings don't have to be spicy. This money-saving recipe for barbecue wings is sweet, scrumptious, and a little bit sticky. <h3>Ingredients for Barbecue Chicken Wings</h3> For this recipe, you'll need:<ul> <li>as many chicken wings as you'd like</li> <li>some olive oil to lightly coat them</li> <li>salt and pepper for flavor</li> <li>a small bottle of your favorite barbecue sauce</li> </ul> <h3>Cut and Wash the Chicken</h3> Begin by cutting each wing at the joint to separate it into two pieces. Now wash them under cold water, and pat them with a paper towel until they're dry. <h3>Cook the Chicken Wings</h3> Season the chicken with salt and pepper, then brush on a thin coat of olive oil. <br><br> I'm going to grill them until the skin is crispy and the meat is fully cooked--usually 10 to 15 minutes, occasionally turning them. <br><br> If you don't have a grill, don't worry. You can cook the wings in oil or in the oven by following the directions on the packaging. Try to be sure the skin crisps a little. <h3>Brush on the Barbecue Sauce</h3> When the meat is fully cooked and the juices run clear, brush on a conservative amount of barbecue sauce until the wings are coated lightly and evenly. I'm using a silicone brush because it's easy to clean, and virtually stainless. <h3>Heat the Barbecue Chicken Wings</h3> Leave the glazed wings over the flames for just a minute or two to get the sauce sizzling. But don't let them go too long or they'll blacken, and we're not talking Cajun here! <br><br> Turn off the gas, and place them on a plate. <h3>Serve the Barbecue Chicken Wings</h3> I mince a little onion and add it on top as a garnish, but also for some flavor. Now they're ready to serve as a side dish or as the main event. Either way, you can't go wrong with barbecue wings. Just be sure to have plenty of napkins handy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit on here on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3689 Thu, 01 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Add-Menu-Buttons-in-iDVD.htm If you want to create a DVD of your video, but skip using iMovie, you can still create fun menu buttons. Learn how it's done in iDVD. iDVD, Menu Buttons, mac, dvd, movie 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. iDVD, Menu Buttons, mac, dvd, movie Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I will show you how to create menu buttons in iDVD. <h3>Why Create iDVD Menu Buttons?</h3> If you create chapter markers in iMovie, menu buttons will automatically be created in iDVD if you export it from iMovie. However, you may have a movie or clip that you don't want to bring into iMovie. I will open up iDVD and one of the templates will open. <h3>Create a Linking Menu Button</h3> To create a button that links to my movie all I need to do is drag the movie from my finder into the iDVD menu. Make sure not to put it in a drop zone. Now you will see that a button has been created that, if I double click on it, will play my movie. <h3>Adjust the iDVD Menu Buttons</h3> I will click stop and go back to my design. If I click on the text I can rename it. If I click on the buttons box on the bottom right I can design the button. I can click on any of these shapes to change what the button looks like. I can resize it and play with the alignment, font, and more. <h3>Position the iDVD Menu Buttons</h3> If you are having problems moving the button to where you want it, click on free positioning instead of snap buttons to grid. You can always click once on the button and click delete to remove it. <h3>Add Additional Menu Buttons</h3> To create a second button to a different movie, I will go to the media Pane and then drag the movie to the menu. Just as before, a title menu will appear which I can customize by going to buttons. <h3>Create an iDVD Submenu</h3> Now I am going to create a submenu to show different movies. I will click on the plus sign and choose add submenu. Let's call this 'My Movies.' I will double click on it and it will bring me to a new menu. Now I will drag and drop two of my movies in and it will create the buttons. To create a button that, when clicked, will automatically go back to the main menu, I can go up to 'project' and click on 'add title menu' button. <h3>Create an iDVD Motion Button</h3> Finally, I can create a motion button. I will change one of these buttons to a shape. If I hit the motion button you can see that my video plays. If I highlight the button a movie slider will appear. I can choose what frame to start the button on. If I uncheck the box, it will turn into a still frame. Finally, if I click on the menu pane, I can change the length of time before it, and the entire submenu, loops. <br><br> Thanks for watching for more information please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4492 Tue, 13 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/italianfood/How-to-Make-Bolognese-Sauce.htm Transform a big bowl of pasta into a hearty and delicious meal with this easy recipe for Italian Bolognese sauce. Beef, pasta, italian food, bolognese, sauce, recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Beef, pasta, italian food, bolognese, sauce, recipe Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I am going to show you how to make bolognese sauce. This is a delicious, hearty sauce that is great on all types of pasta. <h3>Bolognese Sauce Ingredients</h3> For this recipe you will need: <ul> <li>4 tablespoons olive oil</li> <li>1 cup finely chopped onion</li> <li>1 tablespoon finely chopped garlic</li> <li>3/4 cup finely chopped carrots</li> <li>3/4 cup finely chopped celery</li> <li>2 tablespoons tomato paste</li> <li>1 pound ground meat (A mix of one third beef, one third pork and one third veal is best, but you can also use all ground beef)</li> <li>1 cup of whole milk</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon salt</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon ground pepper</li> <li>1/8 teaspoon nutmeg</li> <li>1 cup of dry white wine</li> <li>1 twenty-eight-ounce can of whole tomatoes</li></ul> <h3>Cook Liquid Bolognese Ingredients</h3> Heat the oil in a large stockpot over medium high heat. Add the onion, garlic, carrots and celery and cook them for about two minutes, stirring constantly. Add the tomato paste, mix it in, and cook the ingredients for another minute or so. <h3>Add Meat & Milk to Bolognese Mixture</h3> Now we will add the meat and cook it, stirring constantly, for about five minutes or so until it browns. Add the milk, salt, pepper and nutmeg to the mixture and cook it, stirring constantly, until most of the milk is evaporated. This should take about ten minutes or so. <h3>Last Steps- Tomatoes and Wine</h3> Now add the wine and stir it in. Cook this for another ten minutes or so, stirring occasionally, until all of the liquid is evaporated. <br><br> Meanwhile, pour the tomatoes into a blender and puree them for just five or ten seconds until they are coarsely chopped. Add the tomatoes to the sauce and bring it to a simmer. Turn down the heat down to low and let the sauce cook for about an hour and a half uncovered. Then you can toss it with your favorite pasta and enjoy.<br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the web at food.about.com. <br> aboutvideo_4340 Thu, 29 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Photo-Tags-in-Elements.htm Want to make sorting through your photos a little bit easier? Learn how to search using tags in Photoshop Elements. photos, tags, photoshop, elements 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. photos, tags, photoshop, elements Hi I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I will show you how to search in Photoshop Elements using tags. <h3>Select a Photo Tag to Search</h3> <ul> <li>OPEN Photoshop Elements</li> <li>CLICK 'View and Organize icon</li> <li>CLICK box next to the Favorites icon to choose only favorites*</li> <li>SELECT the 'Not Box' next to the Favorites icon to see all pictures that aren't tagged as favorites </li> </ul> *If you are searching for a different and/or personalized tag (i.e. family photos) select the box next to that folder. You can also select multiple tags, narrowing your search by cross referencing. <h3>Excluding Photos From Tag Search</h3> <ul> <li>RIGHT CLICK a tag</li> <li>CHOOSE 'Exclude Photos' which helps for finding photos with one person/subject</li> </ul> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4493 Thu, 17 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/greekfood/Greek-Salad.htm If it's warm outside, cool down with a fresh Greek salad. This zesty mix of vegetables, olives, and feta cheese is hearty enough to be a meal. Greek food,Greek salads,feta cheese,olives,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Greek food,Greek salads,feta cheese,olives,recipes,videos Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I am going to share with you a simple recipe for Greek salad. This is a delicious, light salad with fresh ingredients that can easily be adapted to your tastes. <h3>Greek Salad Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need: <ul> <li>4-5 large ripe tomatoes</li> <li>1 large red onion</li> <li>1 green bell pepper</li> <li>1 cucumber</li> <li>1/4 pound of feta cheese, sliced or crumbled</li> <li>1 1/4 teaspoons dried oregano</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon salt</li> <li>3 tablespoons olive oil</li> <li>a dozen or so kalamata olives</li> <li>1 tablespoon water</li> </ul> <h3>Cut and Peel the Vegetables</h3> Begin by cutting all of the vegetables into bite-sized pieces. If the tomatoes or the cucumber have thick, tough skins, you may want to peel them. Otherwise, you can leave the skin on. <h3>Season the Vegetables</h3> After they have been chopped, lightly sprinkle the tomatoes, cucumber and pepper with salt. Combine the vegetables in a large bowl and toss them together with 1 teaspoon oregano and 2 tablespoons olive oil. <h3>Add the Cheese, Olives, and Oil</h3> Top the salad with the cheese and olives, then lightly sprinkle on the remaining 1/4 teaspoon of oregano. <br><br> Mix together the remaining 1 tablespoon olive oil with the water, and drizzle this over the salad. You can serve this Greek salad by itself or as an accompaniment to a meal. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6878 Wed, 31 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/southernfood/Cantaloupe.htm A subtly sweet melon, cantaloupe is a refreshing summertime snack. See the different ways to cut a cantaloupe, from chunks to slices. cantaloupe,cut,fruit,slice,open,dessert,breakfast,smoothie 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cantaloupe,cut,fruit,slice,open,dessert,breakfast,smoothie Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you two easy ways to cut a cantaloupe. To get started you will need a large knife and a large melon ball tool.<br/><br/> <H3>Choosing Cantaloupes</H3> You know your cantaloupe is ripe when it:<ul> <li>yields to slight pressure</li> <li>has yellowish skin</li> <li>has a fresh aroma at the end where the stem was attached</li> <li>has a healthy outer rind free of tears or cuts</li> </ul> <H3>Prepare the Cantaloupe</H3> First, thoroughly wash and scrub the melon under running water to remove dirt and bacteria. Next, cut off the top of the melon where the stem was attached. <H3>Scoop Cantaloupe Balls</H3> If you d like to make melon balls, turn the melon so that the cut side is down on your cutting board. This will help keep your melon stable as you cut. With your knife, push down and cut the melon in half. Remove and discard the seeds. With your melon-ball tool, scoop out the melon and place it on to your plate. Continue scooping until you've gotten all the fruit that you need. <H3>Cantaloupe Slices and Rings</H3> You can also cut slices of melon with the rinds still on. Another way to cut your melon is to remove the ring first. To do this, first cut off where the stem was and then cut off the bottom. <H3>Cantaloupe Chunks</H3> To make chucks or slices of melon, you can remove the rind first. To do this, first cut off the bottom of the melon. Stand your melon on one of the cut ends. Take your knife and slice downward all round the melon until all the skin is removed. Make sure you get all the green spots and the rind that was near the bottom or the top of your melon. <br><br>Next, cut the melon in half and take out the seeds. Instead of scooping out the seeds you can hold the melon in your hand and slide the seeds out. Use your knife to cut thin slices. Slices like this are great for a fruit platter. To make chunks, cut thick slices and then cut those slices into pieces.<br/><br/> <H3>Storing Cantaloupe</H3> Be sure to refrigerate the sliced melon in plastic bags or airtight containers within 2 hours of cutting it.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6943 Wed, 27 Dec 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/separating-eggs.htm Demonstration of how to separate the egg white form the yolk for making meringues and other dishes eggs,separate,separate eggs,cooking technique,baking,egg white,egg yolk 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. eggs,separate,separate eggs,cooking technique,baking,egg white,egg yolk Hi, I am Ben Kurtzman for About.com Food, and today I am going to show you how to separate an egg.<br/><br/>Separating egg whites from egg yolks is absolutely essential if you are making anything that requires a meringue. Removing the egg yolks and cooking only with the egg whites is also a healthy way to enjoy your favorite egg dishes, such as omelets and scrambled eggs. <br/><br/> <H3>Crack the Egg</H3>You will need two bowls, one for the whites and one for the yolks. Grip the egg firmly in your hand and crack it on the side of one of the bowls. You want to hit it hard enough so that it breaks cleanly, but you also want to keep the yolk whole. If the yolk gets runny, you are in big trouble. It will be very difficult to separate from the egg white. <br/><br/><H3>Separate the Egg</H3>Using the two halves as cups, pass the yolk from one to the other, and let the white drizzle into the bowl. When you have separated out as much of the egg white as possible you can put the yolk in the other bowl, and you will be all set. Remember, it is ok to have some of the white in with the yolk, but you do not want to have any of the yolk in with the white. If this does happen it will be impossible to whip the whites into a meringue. <br/><br/>This trick may take a couple of tries to master, but once you do you will be well on your way to lemon meringue pie and healthy egg white omelets. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching, and to learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com<br/> aboutvideo_5244 Tue, 09 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/asthma/Asthma.htm Asthma is chronic disorder that restricts breathing. Here's more information on how asthma affects the lungs and what happens during an asthma attack. asthma, asthma attack 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. asthma, asthma attack <h3>What Is Asthma?</h3> Asthma, or reactive airway disease, is a chronic disorder that results in restricted breathing due to inflammation of the bronchial tubes, the main air passages in the lungs. Asthma affects 3 to 5 percent of adults and 7 to 10 percent of children in the United States. Severe asthma attacks cause approximately 5,000 deaths per year.<BR> <h3>What Happens During an Asthma Attack?</h3> Three changes occur inside the airways of the lungs in people with asthma: <ul><li>The first change is inflammation, or swelling, whereby the airway becomes inflamed and produce a thick mucus.</li><br> <li>Inflammation then leads to constriction of the muscles around the airways, causing the airways to become narrow. This narrowing is also referred to as bronchospasm.</li><br><li> The third change is increased sensitivity of the airways, causing the asthma patient to become overly sensitive to animal dander, pollen, cold air and tobacco smoke, to name a few.</li></ul> <h3>Treating Asthma</h3> Asthma patients need to work together with their doctors to develop a medication action plan to control symptoms and minimize attacks. <br><br> Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_3688 Thu, 26 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Add-Chapter-Markers-in-iMovie.htm Adding chapters to your movie is great because your audience can go right to their favorite scenes. Learn how to add chapter markers in iMovie HD. imovie videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. imovie videos Hi, I am Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I will show you how to create chapter markers in iMovie HD. <br><br> If you plan to burn your movie to a DVD or create a Quicktime movie file, you can create chapter markers so viewers can select different scenes. <h3>Decide on Your Chapters</h3> First, open up your iMovie project. Move your playhead to where you want to add a new chapter. <br><br> Keep in mind that you cannot add a marker to the very beginning or end of your movie. You will see that when we export to iDVD, there will be an initial marker automatically set up. <br><br> iMovie recommends that you also do not add chapter markers within a transition or within one second of a transition. <h3>Add and Name Chapter Markers</h3> Now, I will go to Chapters and click on 'Add Marker.' The marker will appear on top, and I can give it a name. I'll create a few more markers. <br><br> If you want to delete a marker, just click it and press 'Delete.' Or you can click it and press 'Remove Marker.' <h3>Share Your Movie in iDVD</h3> Once you finish editing your movie and adding markers, you are ready to share your movie. I will go up to share and click on 'iDVD.' Now, I will click 'Share.' <br><br> This will automatically launch iDVD with my movie in a template. I will ignore the template for now and click 'Play Movie.' I can skip between my scenes using the arrows on the remote. <h3>Select a Chapter to Watch</h3> If I go back to the menu and go to Scene Selection, you will see that iDVD took those chapter markers and made what is called a chapter index. <br><br> From here, I can choose any scene to jump to. Also notice that a marker was placed at the beginning, and it is called 'Beginning.' If I stop playback of the simulated DVD, I can click on that first marker and rename it. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6715 Thu, 10 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/culinaryarts/How-to-Braise-Meat.htm If you've got a tough piece of meat and a whole afternoon, there's no better way to cook than braising. Find out how to braise a succulent, tender pot roast that will be well worth the time. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Hi! My name is Danilo Alfaro and I'm the About.com Guide to culinary arts and today I'm going to show you how to braise. <h3>What is Braising? </h3> Braising is a great technique for cooking really tough cuts of meat like chuck, or shank, or brisket. What braising is all about is cooking a piece of meat really slowly under moist heat, which helps to break down the tough connective tissues in the meat, at the end of which we have something that is really deliciously tender. <h3>Sear the Meat Before Braising</h3> The first step to braising is to sear or brown the meat in a small amount of oil or fat. So I'm just going to add a little bit of oil here - we want to get this kind of hot so that we get a nice brown crust on the outside of the meat. Brisket is a great piece of meat - it takes a very long time to cook at very low, slow temperatures. Can they smell this? I'm not sure if they can smell this at home, but it really smells nice, too, and that's also part of the whole deal. <h3>Brown the Vegetables</h3> I'll just take that out of the pot, and just set it here for a minute. We're going to lightly saute some aromatic vegetables here, some carrots, celery, and onion - actually we're using shallot here right now - and just kind of brown these off a little bit. <h3>Braise the Meat</h3> And then, I'm going to take the meat, put it back in, cover it with some beef stock, and then I'm going to put the lid on and out the whole thing into a 300 degree oven. Basically, the idea with the amount of moisture you want to use is, you want to be able to cover the item that you're cooking. <br><br> I just want to bring that back up to a little boil here - I just want to see it simmer a little bit, very gently around the edges. Now that is one nice little simmer there. We're bubbling. And so I'm just going to cover that back up, and transfer the whole thing to the oven, a 300 degree oven, where it's going to sit for the next four, four and a half hours. <h3>Check the Braised Meat</h3> I'm just going to pull this out and here's a tip: use something other than your bare hands to lift that out because it's hot. I'm going to check out what's been happening inside - careful of the steam. I like to open it away from me so that the steam doesn't hit me in the face. And you can just see, the stock in there has just thickened - the fat and other moisture from the meat has kind of cooked out of it and has mixed in with the stock there. Just look how tender that is - it's going to flake right apart. It's just been braising away for five hours - look at that. That is some succulent, braised pot roast right there. Wow. <br><br> You can't not go make this right now. It's tender, succulent, it's like heaven. If you have five hours, and you have a piece of brisket, this is the thing to do with it. <br><br> Thanks for watching! To learn more, visit us on the Web at About.com. aboutvideo_4128 Fri, 16 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/macs/Remove-Red-Eye-with-iPhoto.htm Save your favorite photos from scary-looking red-eye with just a few simple steps in Apple iPhoto. red-eye, apple, mac, computer, photo, iphoto 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. red-eye, apple, mac, computer, photo, iphoto Hi. I am Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to remove red eye using Apple iPhoto 6. <h3>Setting up your Target Photo</h3> First I'll open up iphoto and drag my photo into the library. Now I'll double click on it to bring up editing options. You'll see a bunch of buttons on the bottom ranging from rotating and cropping to red-eye. <h3>Fast iPhoto Red-Eye Fix</h3> For a quick and easy way to remove red-eye, just click the red-eye button. It will ask you to click the center of each eye. <br><br> That does not look too bad but sometimes it wont look as good as you want because its not that precise. I'll go to edit-undo to undo the changes. <h3>Best-Quality Red-Eye Fix</h3> To get a better look at my picture I'll make it full screen by clicking on this icon. Now I will zoom in by using the slider to get a good look at my eye. If I highlight just my eye and then press red-eye, I'll get a pretty good effect. <h3>Check out the Results</h3> To compare the edited photo with the original, press the control key. I'll leave full screen mode by clicking here. I'll double click on my photo one more time. There's my picture with the red-eye removed. If I click done my changes will be saved. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6821 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/babyparenting/About-Potty-Training-Preparedn.htm Sooner or later, every parent is faced with the task of toilet training a toddler. About dot com video expert Kathy Moore provides tips on getting ready. Follow along with her potty training preparedness checklist and learn how to tell if your child is ready to make the big step out of diaperland. potty training,potty,toddler 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. potty training,potty,toddler Hi, I am Kathy Moore for About.com Parenting. Sooner or later, every parent is faced with the task of toilet training a toddler. We are about to embark on this journey with our second child and I've been going through my checklist in order to get ready for what I hope will be a smooth passage out of diaperland. <br/><br/> <H3>Potty Training Readiness</H3> If you are facing the same situation you might want to follow along with my potty training readiness checklist. A first step is to assess your child for signs that he is disposed to give up diapers. <br/><br/> 1. Does he know when he is wetting himself? <br/> 2. Is he dry when he wakes from a nap? <br/> 3. Does your child show any interest in growing out of diapers? <br/><br/> If you answered yes to two of these three questions, your child may be ready.<br/><br/> <H3>Potty Training Home Checklist</H3> Now it is time to assess your home.<br/><br/> 1. Do you have a child's potty-chair or a step-stool to make it easy for your little one to get on the toilet?<br/> 2. Is the door to your bathroom easy for a child to open?<br/> 3. Have you made arrangements to make it easy for your child to wash his hands after going to the bathroom?<br/> 4. Are you dressing your child in clothes that are easy to remove when it is time to go?<br/><br/> <H3>Preparing for Potty Training</H3> Last but not least you need to assess your own readiness to undertake toilet training for your child at this time. Experts agree you should avoid trying to train your child if there are other stressful activities going on such as a move or change of childcare provider or especially the arrival of a new sibling.<br/><br/>It is a good idea to coordinate your potty training effort with your childcare provider so everyone is on the same page.<br/><br/> <H3>Communicating With Your Kids</H3> Before you begin toilet training conduct an awareness campaign by telling your child each time you use the toilet and announce the steps as you perform them. This way your child will understand what is involved from start to finish.<br/><br/>Lastly, every mom I know who has toilet-trained a child has a story to tell about some potty training accident so prepare yourself for some mishaps. Keep a sense of humor and offer positive encouragement to your child along the way. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at parenting.about.com. aboutvideo_3811 Wed, 07 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/babyproducts/Choosing-a-Diaper-Bag.htm Having the right gear when you leave the house with your baby in tow is essential. Learn how to choose the best diaper bag for you. diaper bag,diaper 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. diaper bag,diaper Hi I am Kathy Moore for About.com Parenting. Leaving your home with a baby in tow does not need to be a complicated or difficult experience, but having a good diaper bag is essential. This program will help evaluate the many features of diaper bags to help choose the best one for your needs.<br/> <H3>Diaper Bag Options</H3> When shopping for a diaper bag, you will quickly discover a wide assortment of prices and options. Before beginning your search, think of where you will be traveling with your baby most often, such as the grocery store, shopping mall or back and forth from a childcare provider. This will help determine the scope of your packing needs. <br/> <H3>Diaper Bag Essentials</H3> Essential elements of any good diaper bag are a diaper changing mat, a pocket for diapers and diaper wipes, and a large enough compartment to hold other essentials, such as a spare outfit, a few small toys and feeding supplies.<br/> <H3>Diaper Bag Categories</H3> Diaper bags fall into three basic style categories, messenger bags, backpacks and tote style. Regardless of the style, make sure the shoulder straps are comfortable and stay put.<br/> <H3>Diaper Bag Features</H3> Bags can offer features such as bottle holders, cell phone holders and an array of clips and pockets for just about everything. I especially like having a few zippered pockets. For awhile, I condensed the items from my purse into a wallet and a few other essentials and just housed them in the zippered pouch of the diaper bag. This allowed me to carry around one less item.<br/><br/>I have also found having a diaper bag that can stand up by itself is important. This feature allows you to set the bag down and search for something all while holding onto your child. <br/> <H3>Diaper Bag Size and Fabric</H3> Selecting the size and fabric of a diaper bag is similar to that of picking a new purse. After all, you will be using it daily and really need to like it. I sought out waterproof or water resistant material. I knew my diaper bag would be set down on a wide variety of surfaces and exposed to every sort of weather possible, so durability and clean ability are important to me.<br/> <H3>Diaper Bag Styles</H3> I also chose a style that my husband would not feel odd carrying. If you find a very stylish bag, it might be better to have two bags, one for each of you.<br/><br/>Whatever style of diaper bag you choose, remember to pack just a bit more than you think you will need. Then, as the days and weeks go on, you will discover what you and your baby need to make that trip away from home a happy one. <br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at parenting.about.com. aboutvideo_4125 Thu, 19 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/google/Search-Effectively-Online.htm These search engine tips will help you narrow down your online searches, so you find exactly the information you want. search engine,searches,Google,search terms, video 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. search engine,searches,Google,search terms, video Hi, I'm Don Schecter for About.com Computing. Today, I'll give you some tips for searching effectively online. <h3>Type in Specific Phrases</h3> Let's say I want to get more information on a vacation where I can go scuba diving. If I type in 'scuba,' there are too many results to weed through. <br><br> The first step to effectively searching is narrow your search by typing in 'scuba diving.' Google automatically searches for variations on words, so it will include 'dive' and 'diving.' <h3>Add Quotes Around the Phrase</h3> To narrow the search more, we can search for just pages with the exact phrase 'scuba diving.' Just put quotes around the phrase. <br><br> And to narrow it further, I'll type the word 'vacation.' It doesn't need to be a 'scuba diving vacation,' so the word 'vacation' is not in quotes. <h3>Use a Minus or Plus Sign</h3> Also, if you had results you want to exclude, like 'scuba certification,' just type 'scuba' then a space and a minus sign, followed by the word 'certification' with no space in front of it, like this: "scuba diving" vacation &#150;certification. This tells the search engine that you want to search for 'scuba' without the word 'certification' on the page. <br><br> Google does not include common words in searches, such as 'the,' 'and,' or 'a'. If a common word or digit is essential to your search, simply type a space, a plus sign, and then the word or digit. I do not need this feature for my scuba dive search. <h3>Try a Similar Phrase</h3> You can also try to think of other ways to say it, like another word for a place that has what you're looking for. I will try 'beach resort.' Use the uppercase 'OR' between words or phrases to search either one term or another. I will search for 'scuba diving vacation' OR 'beach resort.' <h3>Check Your Results</h3> Another quick tip you can do to search effectively is look at your results. If one Web page is indented, it means that it is located on the same Web site as the page listed above it. <br><br> Also notice the cache link. If you click on that, it will show you exactly what page it found the words you searched for, with your keywords highlighted. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us on the Web at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6903 Tue, 13 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Apple-iMovie-video-capture.htm Learn how to log and capture movie footage in Apple iMovie so you can begin to transform your raw footage into a completed movie. Computing,Software,iMovie,Capture,Digitize,Tape,Video,Camera,Deck,Videos,Movies 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Software,iMovie,Capture,Digitize,Tape,Video,Camera,Deck,Videos,Movies Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. Today I'll teach you how to capture footage in Apple's iMovie. <br><h3>Transferring Footage- Firewire</h3>To capture video I'll use my Mini DV video camera which has a firewire connection here. There are multiple types of firewire connections. Cameras require a 4-pin firewire cable on one end, while computers can have a 4 or a 6-pin connection. <br><br>My laptop has a 6-pin connection. I'll connect the firewire cable to my laptop and then to my camera. Make sure that you remember to turn on your camera and set it to its VCR mode for playback. <br><h3>iMovie Setup</h3>Open up your iMovie project or create a new project. My camera is already on and set to VCR mode. To capture, I'll click the Switch icon to change from Edit mode to Camera mode. This brings up camera playback controls and a bluescreen saying my camera is connected. There are controls for rewinding the camera, stop, play, pause, and fast forward. <br><h3>Play and Import</h3>To capture hit the Play button. When you find footage you like click the Import button. An icon appears in the clip window showing the clip capturing. I'll hit the Stop button to stop capture. I'll doubleclick the clip in the clip panel and rename it to Movie Clip 1 and click Set. <br><h3>iMovie Capture Preview</h3>When I selected the captured footage in the clip window iMovie switched from Camera mode to Edit mode. I can preview the clip by pressing the Play button in the Preview Window. You can scrub through the clip by moving the playhead on the preview window. <br><h3>Multiple Capture</h3>I'll switch back to Camera mode to capture another clip. I'll hit Play, and click Import, and I'll hit Stop after a few seconds. I'll double-click the second clip and name it Movie Clip 2. I'll stop there but you can capture as many as you want for your project. <br><h3>Full Screen Preview</h3>If you want to view your clips in fullscreen mode, click on the Fullscreen Mode button. To get out of Fullscreen Mode hit the Escape key. <br><br>And that's how you capture footage in iMovie. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_5365 Mon, 07 Apr 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/frenchfood/French-Onion-Soup.htm You may order it every time you hit up your favorite bistro, but have you ever tried to make French onion soup in your own kitchen? See how to make this classic and hearty soup at home. french onion soup, soup, recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. french onion soup, soup, recipe Hi, I'm Keith Dunlop for About.com Food. Today, I'm going to show you how to make the staple of fine bistros everywhere, French onion soup. This soup is quite simple to make, and it's a light, yet surprisingly hearty soup that really satisfies, whether it's for lunch or dinner. <h3>French Onion Soup Ingredients</h3> To make this soup, you'll need:<ul> <li>8 medium Vidalia onions</li> <li>4 cloves of garlic</li> <li>8 cups of beef, chicken, or vegetable stock (traditionally beef is used) </li> <li>1/3 of a cup of olive oil</li> <li>2 tbsp. of all-purpose flour</li> <li>1/2 cup of dry white wine</li> <li>1/2 tsp. of herbs de Provence</li> <li>1 bay leaf</li> <li>salt and pepper to taste</li> <li>2 cups of croutons</li> <li>2 cups of grated gruyere</li> <li>some oven-safe bowls</li> </ul> <h3>Chop the Soup Ingredients</h3> We're going to do 95% of our cooking in one pot, so grab a nice medium to large saucepan or cooking pot. Slice your onions into half moons and chop your garlic coarsely and throw them in the pot. Add your olive oil and saute over low heat until the onions are translucent. <h3>Add the Soup Stock</h3> Now add your stock. Traditionally, this soup is made with beef stock, but you can use other stocks to accord with your diet and it's still delicious. Pour in your wine &#150; and add your spices, the herbs, the salt and pepper, and the bay leaf. Bring this to a boil, then back off the heat, cover with a lid, and simmer for around 15-20 minutes. <h3>Top the French Onion Soup</h3> At this point, your soup can be served - all it needs are the toppings. Ladle your soup into an oven-safe crock or bowl and add a handful of croutons. Top it off with a layer of cheese and then melt the cheese under the broiler for about 3 to 5 minutes. Be careful handling the bowl after it;s been in the oven, as it will be hot, I highly recommend oven mitts! <br><br> And there you have it, the only thing that could make it more authentic would be a view of the Eiffel Tower. Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5272 Fri, 27 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/pms/PMS.htm PMS is caused by hormonal changes during a woman's menstrual cycle. Learn more about the symptoms of PMS and how to alleviate them. pms, menstruation, prementrual syndrome, period 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. pms, menstruation, prementrual syndrome, period <h3>A Healthy Menstrual Cycle</h3> Every month, a woman's body prepares itself for the possibility of conception and pregnancy by going through a menstrual cycle. During the menses phase of the menstrual cycle, commonly called a period, the endometrial lining of the uterus is sloughed off and is later replaced. <h3>Causes of Premenstrual Syndrome (PMS)</h3> This process is triggered by a shift in the levels of hormones generated by the pituitary gland and the ovaries. These hormonal changes can cause the physical and emotional stresses of premenstrual syndrome, or PMS, including headaches, cramping, breast tenderness, nausea, and mood swings. <h3>Reducing Symptoms of PMS</h3> Exercise, rest, stress reduction, and a healthy diet may help alleviate some symptoms of PMS. A doctor or healthcare provider can also prescribe medication to help alleviate severe PMS symptoms.<br><br>Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_3701 Mon, 22 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Add-Blog-Images-with-Picasa-2.htm Want to spice-up your blogging? This video demonstrates how to add images to your blog with Picasa. Computing,Online Publications,Blogger,Blogs,Picasa 2,Google,Pictures,Photography 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Online Publications,Blogger,Blogs,Picasa 2,Google,Pictures,Photography Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing.<br><h3>Introduction to Picassa Images</h3>Today, I'll show you how to publish images to a Blog using Picassa 2. Picassa 2 is a free downloadable picture program provided by Google.<br><h3>Picasa Images and Blogger Blog</h3>It includes a free program called Blogger which lets you create your own Blog with words and images.<br><h3>How to Add Blog Images with Picasa</h3>Select the pictures you want to piublish on a Blog. Click the hold button to keep them in the holding tray. Now click on the "Blog This" button at the bottom of your screen.<br><h3>Set up a Blog for Picasa Images</h3>If you don't already have a Blog set up, you'll need to create one. Click the orange button that says "Create You Blog Now." Here you'll need to fill in information to create your Blog, including a username and password that you'll use to sign in to your Blog. Don't forget to click the "Accept Terms of Service" box. Now click the orange "Continue" button.<br><br>The next screen will ask you to enter a Blog title and a desired web address. Click "Continue" at the bottom of the screen. <br><br>The next screen will ask you to choose a template. Click on one of the options and click "Continue."<br><br>Now click the "Start Posting" button to write in your new Blog. Once you've set up your Blog you can sign in any time. <br><h3>Picasa Images and Alignment in Blog</h3>After you click "Blog This" in Picassa, click "Sign in to Blogger" Use your username and password. A screen will come up where you can choose where to align your picture and text. I'll choose to keep my picture on the left side and I'll click "Save Settings." This next screen allows you to write next to the picture. Write your Blog and click "Publish." <br><br>Picassa will automatically open a new window and show you your Blog. <br><br>Thanks for watching! To learn more, visit us at Computing.About.com.<br> aboutvideo_4611 Fri, 30 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/windows/Set-up-Windows-Live-Mail.htm This video demonstrates how to use the Windows Live Mail feature in Vista vista, windows mail, set up, windows 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. vista, windows mail, set up, windows Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I will show you how to set up Windows Live Mail in Vista. Windows Live Mail is an updated version of Windows Mail, and will soon be replacing Outlook Express in Windows XP. <h3>Open Windows Live Mail</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK Start menu</li> <li>TYPE 'Windows Live Mail' in search box at bottom</li> <li>CLICK Windows Live Mail at the top of menu </li> <li>CLICK Sign Up (choose free version of Hotmail or Hotmail Plus for $19.95/year)*</li> <li>TYPE personal information and Windows ID (it will be denied until you pick an ID, no one else already has)</li> <li>CLICK 'I Accept'</li> <li>CHOOSE Classic or Full Version**</li> </ul> *The free version holds 2GB and expires only if you don't use it for 120 days. The Plus version holds 4GB and does not expire. You can attach a 20 MB file in the Plus version and a 10 MB file in the free version.<br><br> **The classic option allows you to read and manage your mail simply. The full version allows you to preview, drag and drop or auto-fill email addresses. <h3>Sending Email in Windows Live Mail</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK 'New' on the toolbar to write an e-mail</li> <li>TYPE the e-mail address of the person you want to contact</li> <li>TYPE a subject</li> <li>TYPE a message in the large text box</li> <li>CLICK Send</li> </ul> <h3>Deleting Email in Windows Live Mail</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK the box next to the message(s) you want to delete</li> <li>CLICK the 'Delete' button on the tool bar</li> </ul> <h3>Moving Mail to Different Folders</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK to check box next to email you want to move</li> <li>CLICK 'Move To' from the tool bar</li> <li>CLICK on the folder you would like you e-mail to go to</li> </ul> To check your drafts or sent mail, go to your left side panel and click on 'Drafts' or 'Sent.' <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_5210 Mon, 01 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/std/Pubic-Lice.htm Pubic lice are small insects that feed on human blood and infest pubic hair. Learn how lice thrive and reproduce and how to treat them. pubic lice, pediculosis, crabs 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. pubic lice, pediculosis, crabs <h3>What Are Pubic Lice?</h3>The genital areas of mature men and women are often covered by thatches of coarse pubic hair. These hairs can become infested with a small insect, called pubic lice (or crabs), through sexual contact, or sharing clothing or bedding with an infested individual.<BR> <h3>What Do Pubic Lice Look Like?</h3>Pubic lice are generally tan in color and are about the size of the head of a pin. They are relatively flat and when seen on the skin they often look like small scabs.<BR> <h3>How Do Pubic Lice Survive?</h3>The lice have claws that help them attach to the pubic hairs where they lay their eggs. The eggs, called nits, look like small brown dots and are attached firmly to the base of the hairs near the skin. Adult lice feed on human blood by inserting their mouthpieces into small blood vessels in the skin. While the lice feed on human blood, proteins in their saliva are transferred into the skin.<BR> <h3>What Happens if You Get Pubic Lice?</h3>After a person has been infested for several days, or if the person has had a previous infestation, the proteins are recognized by antibodies in the skin and release chemicals that cause itching and inflammation in the pubic area - the first sign of infestation. Fortunately, infestation with pubic lice, a condition called pediculosis, pubic lice can be treated with over-the-counter medications.<br><br>Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_4510 Wed, 08 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/housekeeping/How-to-Clean-Grout.htm It may not be the most glamorous job, but scrubbing grout leaves your tile looking brand new. Watch how to properly clean grout. clean grout,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. clean grout,videos Hi, I'm Carrie Wise for About.com Home. While cleaning grout is not my favorite chore, it is definitely a job worth doing. Let me show you how it is done. <h3>Supplies Needed to Clean Grout</h3> Here is what you will need to clean the grout:<ul> <li>a mop</li> <li>a pail</li> <li>store-bought grout cleaner</li> <li>rubber gloves</li> <li>a rag</li> <li>a brush for cleaning the grout</li> </ul> <h3>Apply the Grout Cleaner</h3> For best results you want to mop and clean the area first. We will start with an area of ceramic tile. Spray on the grout cleaner. <br><br> It is best to work in a section of your floor, and then finish that area and move onto another section. This way you will not get ahead of yourself. <h3>Brush the Grout</h3> Let the grout cleaner set into the floor for about five to 10 minutes. Then you want to use your brush - with a little elbow grease - and target the spot. You should begin to notice a difference immediately. <br><br> At this point, you want to wipe up the grout cleaner with a rag. Notice the finished product. This process works for all types of tile areas. <br><br> It may seem like a pain to clean grout, but the finished product makes it worth your while. Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at homegarden.about.com. aboutvideo_4916 Wed, 30 Jan 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/indianfood/How-to-Make-Poori.htm Poori is an Indian fried bread that's easily recognized by its signature puff shape. See how to make poori from scratch. poori, bread, indian food 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. poori, bread, indian food Hi, my name is Natasha Levitan for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make poori, and Indian bread. <h3>Poori Ingredients</h3> You will need:<ul> <li>1/3 c. white flour </li> <li>1/3 c. whole wheat flour </li> <li>1/4 c. water </li> <li>1/4 tsp. salt </li> <li>2 tbsp. vegetable oil</li> <li>oil for frying</li> </ul> <h3>Make the Poori Dough</h3> Put the whole wheat flour in a large mixing bowl or platter. Add white flour to it and salt and mix together. Now add a little water at a time and mix the flour to form dough. Knead it all together until you get a proximity of soft dough. <br><br>Then add 2 tbsp. of oil. When you do, the dough starts coming together very well until you get a nice consistency. <h3>Shape the Poori</h3> Oil your working surface. Then take the dough out of the bowl and knead it for another 5 minutes. Pinch about a quarter of your dough and shape it into a ball. Roll each ball into a 3 inch round. Repeat the same with the rest of your dough. Each poori is made right before frying. <h3>Fry the Poori</h3> Fill your wok/deep fry pan with oil and heat it on high. Deep fry the pooris one at a time, pressing very gently on each side with a slotted spoon. Keep pressing it under the oil until the poori puffs up. <br><br>Then, turn over and fry the same way on the other side. Place it on a plate lined with paper towel to absorb excess oil. Pooris are made right before they're eaten. <br><br> Thank you for watching. To learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6849 Sun, 28 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/layers.htm Try light graphic work or picture re-touching without any worry of damaging your original images by using Layers in Adobe Photoshop. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Photography,Graphic Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Photography,Graphic Design Hi. I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I am going to show you how to best edit your photos in Adobe Photoshop CS 2. <br><h3>Why Use Adobe Photoshop Layers?</h3> We will be using layers to make sure we do not destroy our original pictures. First, open up Adobe Photoshop. Go to file, open and select a digital picture. Let's say I want to draw on this picture with a brush. I am going to go over to the toolbox, select the brush tool and draw a little. Whoops. I did not want to do that. Let's try using the eraser to erase this. Now I have erased my original picture and I definitely do not want to do that. <br><br>Well, if I want to undo the last thing I did I can go up to edit, undo. If I want to go back even further, I can always go up to edit, step backward. If I make too many mistakes, I can go to file and revert. This will bring up the last saved picture. However, using the undo or revert tool only works if you haven t already saved your picture. If you save, make a mistake and don't realize it, there is nothing you can do. <br><br>What makes photoshop so useful is layers. Layers allow you to work on one element of an image without affecting the others. <br><h3>How to Use Adobe Photoshop Layers</h3>To avoid saving mistakes and destroying an original picture, we need to use layers. The first layer we'll create will protect our original. Create a copy of the background picture by dragging it to the create a new layer icon. Next, create a new blank layer by clicking on the create a new layer icon on the layers pallete. The create a new layer icon looks like a blank page. <br><br>I can now go to the brush tool, draw all over my picture and not damage the original. If I click on the eye next to this new layer, the layer disappears. If I click on the empty box, it reappears. <br><br>I can also move and hide it below the background copy. <br><br>I'll bring it back above the background copy because I want to show how to delete it. Click and hold down on the layer icon and drag it to the little trash icon. There's our background copy and background original untouched. <br><br>There is a lot more you can do with layers. But first you should practice creating them and moving them around.<br><br>Thanks for watching, for more information please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_4295 Fri, 29 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/Meringue-Cookies.htm Meringue cookies strike the perfect balance of sweetness. Try whipping up a batch of these delectable treats at home. meringue cookies,cookie recipes,dessert videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. meringue cookies,cookie recipes,dessert videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make meringue cookies. <h3>Meringue Cookie Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need: <ul> <li>2 eggs</li> <li>1 teaspoon white vinegar</li> <li>dash salt</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon almond extract</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon clear vanilla extract</li> <li>1/2 cup granulated sugar</li> </ul> <H3>Mix the Eggs, Vinegar, and Salt</H3> Preheat the oven to 250 degrees. Crack open the eggs and separate them, so only the whites are in your large mixing bowl. <br><br> Pour in the vinegar and salt. Place a hand held mixer on high speed and beat them all together. Keep beating until the mixture is foamy and has doubled in volume. <H3>Add the Extracts and Sugar</H3> For flavor, add the almond extract and the vanilla. Clear vanilla helps keep the meringues a whiter color. <br><br> Then, add the sugar 1 tablespoon at a time. Keep beating until all the sugar is in. You'll see that there are firm peaks when you lift the mixer. That means it's ready to be baked. <H3>Create the Meringue Cookie Shapes</H3> For a freeform cookie, take a teaspoon of the meringue and drop it onto a paper-lined cookie sheet about 1 inch apart. <br><br> For a designed cookie, use a pastry bag or just a cut plastic bag. Squeeze the meringue onto the sheets. <h3>Bake the Meringue Cookies</h3> Bake them for 25 minutes, or until they are crisp. Remove the brown paper with the cookies to a cooling rack. Let them cool completely before you remove them from the paper. <br><br> Store the meringue cookies in a tightly covered container. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5211 Wed, 19 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/deafness/Hearing-Test.htm The Rinne test uses a tuning fork to test for hearing loss. Learn how to test for hearing impairment. hearing test, hearing loss, rinne test, outer ear, middle ear, 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. hearing test, hearing loss, rinne test, outer ear, middle ear, <h3>The Outer Ear</h3> When sound waves reach the ear, they are gathered by the funnel-shaped outer ear and are channeled into the middle ear.<BR> <h3>The Middle Ear</h3>At the entrance to the middle ear, sound waves hit the tympanic membrane, or eardrum.<BR> <h3>The Inner Ear</h3>The resultant vibrations then travel through the middle ear and into the fluid filled inner ear where they are converted to signals that are sent to the brain.<BR> <h3>How Hearing Is Tested</h3>In order to test a person's hearing, an audiologist, or hearing specialist, will perform a series of hearing tests.<BR> <BR>Today these tests are often performed by using a combination of electronic equipment and a tuning fork. A tuning fork is a fork-like instrument made of aluminum or metal that makes a musical note when struck. The hearing test where a tuning fork is used is called a Rinne test.<BR> <BR>During this test, the tuning fork is struck and is held close to the ear but without touching the head. This tests whether sound waves are able to enter the ear and travel through the middle ear to reach the cochlea via air conduction, which is normal hearing.<BR> <BR>Next, the tuning fork will be struck and then held against the skull behind the ear. This test bypasses the conduction of sound through the outer and middle ear and focuses on the reception of vibrations by the cochlea via bone conduction.<BR> <h3>What Hearing Tests Show</h3>Through the use of this test combined with speech testing, an audiologist can determine whether a hearing impairment exists and what the cause may be.<BR><BR>Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_6481 Thu, 10 Apr 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/dairyfreecooking/How-to-Make-No-Milk-Cookies.htm Don't let milk or butter get in the way of making some of the best chocolate chip cookies you've ever tasted. This dairy-free recipe rocks the house. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Hey guys - Jonathon Stewart here for About.com. For some people, there's nothing better than a couple chocolate chip cookies and a big ol' glass of milk. For others, that just doesn't quite fit the bill. But give this non-dairy recipe a shot, and you'll have yourself some chocolate chip cookies so good, you won't even need that nasty glass of milk. Check it out. <h3>Dairy-Free Chocolate Chip Cookie Ingredients</h3> For today's recipe, here's what you'll need: <ul> <li>1 cup of dairy-free margarine (or an equal amount of pureed banana)</li> <li>1/2 cup of brown sugar</li> <li>1/2 cup of cane sugar</li> <li>1/4 cup of soy or rice milk</li> <li>2 teaspoons of vanilla</li> <li>2 1/4 cups of flour</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon of salt</li> <li>1 teaspoon of baking soda</li> <li>12 ounces of dairy-free semi-sweet chocolate chips or chopped chocolate</li> </ul> If you're feeling really bold, try substituting about three quarters of your dairy-free margarine with applesauce or apple butter. Just don't be surprised when your cookies taste a little... apple-y. <h3>Prepare the Chocolate</h3> Start by preheating your oven to 350, and begin prepping your ingredients. If you're not using non-dairy chocolate chips, try chopping a dark chocolate bar into chip-sized morsels on a cutting board, and set aside for later. <br><br>The darker you go, the less chance your chocolate will have an trace of dairy in it. Generally any chocolate that has a greater than 71% cacao content, is not likely to contain any milk or milk fat. But to be sure, always check the ingredients. You do read all your product labels for ingredients, right? <h3>Mix the Cookie Wet Ingredients</h3> Next, mix together your margarine or banana puree with the brown and cane sugar until they reach a smooth, fluffy consistency. Add in your soy or rice milk, then your vanilla. <br><br> If your mixture looks a little weird and curdled right now, that's okay. Don't panic. There's definitely no Lacto Bacillus Acidophillus bacteria coagulation going on here - it's just the solids separating temporarily from the liquids, which will all come together in the end with your piping hot delicious cookies. Mmm. I can't wait. <h3>Combine the Cookie Ingredients</h3> In a separate bowl, combine all your dry ingredients, then blend into the creamy mixture. Finally, add in your chips or chocolate chunks. Using a proper electric mixer definitely cuts down on the elbow grease needed in this recipe, but since you're soon to indulge yourself in some sugary sweet loveliness, why not earn it a little? <h3>Bake the Chocolate Chip Cookies</h3> Next it's time to drop your dough batter onto a lightly greased or oiled cookie sheet in spoon sized dollops a couple inches apart, and pop 'em into the over for about 9 minutes. Remove them from the over and place on racks to cool. The ideal cookie should be a little crispy and browned, but soft and sumptuous at every bite. <br><br> Mmm. Wow. And who said you can't have a big glass of soy milk to dip in? Not me... <br><br> Thanks for watching! To learn more, visit us on the Web at About.com. aboutvideo_6461 Tue, 25 Mar 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/japanesefood/Prepare-Perfect-Sushi-Rice.htm You can't make great sushi without perfectly cooked sushi rice. See how to prep, cook, season, and cool sushi rice, and you'll be rolling in no time! sushi, rice, cook 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. sushi, rice, cook Hi, I'm Chef John Mitzewich for About.com. Today I'm going to show you my method for making perfect sushi rice. <h3>Prep the Sushi Rice</h3> And the first ingredient is of course sushi rice. A special medium-grain rice, it's beautifully pearlescent. We're going to need 2 cups of that. Very important we're going to rinse that in a strainer very well for a few minutes, and then we're going to let that drain and dry for 1 hour. <h3>Cook the Sushi Rice</h3> After an hour pour, the rice in a heavy bottomed pot with a lid, and add 2 1/4 cups water. Bring that to a simmer and set you timer for 10 minutes. So we're going to cook that covered for 10 minutes on low heat. <h3>Mix the Rice Vinegar</h3> While we're waiting I'm going to get the rice vinegar ready. I have 1/4 cup of seasoned rice vinegar. You can make your own by using a 1/4 cup of regular rice vinegar, 1 1/2 tbsp of sugar, and 1 tsp of salt. Mix it until it dissolves. <h3>Cool the Sushi Rice</h3> So when the timer rings, turn off the heat and let it sit covered for 10 minutes. All right we're going to need something to fan the rice with. I just use this folder. After the 10 minutes pour it on a tray and drizzle over the rice vinegar a few teaspoons at a time. We're going to use 4 tablespoons all together. <br><br> Using the tip of a fork, we're going to fan and fluff, and fan and fluff so all the grains kind of dry and cool. They should be sticky, but separate. I'm going to drizzle over the rest of the rice vinegar. The fanning also gives the grains a cool shine, and a perfect texture if done correctly. <h3>Sushi Rice Texture</h3> Once that's been fanned and cooled, it's ready to work with. Now here's the key to how you know you have perfect sushi rice. You can form it into any shape you want, but when you go to bite into it, it just collapses. <br><br>So you want it to hold a shape for when you are making something like a California roll like I have here. You want it to hold together so you can eat it, pick it up with chopsticks, but when you bite into it you want it to just crumble, so it has that nice light airy texture. <br><br> And that it! Sushi rice - so easy to make. By the way, sushi is the name of the rice preparation. Sushi is not raw fish. Raw fish is what you put on sushi. I'm glad we got that cleared up. I hope you give this a try. Roll some sushi, and enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit About.com. aboutvideo_4917 Thu, 29 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/indianfood/Vegetarian-Samosas.htm A popular Indian snack, samosas are tasty stuffed pastries. In this vegetarian samosa recipe, the filling is a heavenly blend of potatoes, peas, onions, and spices. vegetarian samosas,indian food recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. vegetarian samosas,indian food recipes,videos Hi, I'm Natasha Levitan for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make vegetarian samosas. <h3>Vegetarian Samosas Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 packet of spring roll pastry</li> <li>3 large potatoes</li> <li>3/4 cup peas</li> <li>1 teaspoon ground coriander</li> <li>1 teaspoon ground cumin</li> <li>1 small onion, chopped</li> <li>2 teaspoons red chili flakes</li> <li>2 tablespoons chopped cilantro</li> <li>2 tablespoons lemon juice</li> <li>1 tablespoon flour</li> <li>1 tablespoon water</li> </ul> <h3>Make the Vegetarian Samosas Filling</h3> Pour in your water into a small bowl with flour, and mix with a brush until it has a thin, glue-like consistency. <br><br> Chop the potatoes into small bite-sized pieces. Put them in a medium bowl, then add peas, chopped onions, spices, coriander, and lemon juice. Mix everything together. <h3>Stuff the Vegetarian Samosas</h3> Place your pastry sheet on the cutting board. Lift one corner of half of the pastry sheet towards the center. Brush it with our flour glue. <br><br> Lift the other edge of half cookie and lay over the previous. Press to seal. Now, you have formed a dough cone. <br><br> Hold the cone in your hand, and take about a tablespoon of filling and stuff the samosa. Seal the open lip with sealer. Fold the edge over. Press and seal. <h3>Fry the Vegetarian Samosas</h3> Heat the oil in a deep pan on medium heat. Put in three samosas, and fry them on one side until they brown. Then turn them over and fry on the other side. <br><br> Lift them out of the pan on a plate lined with a paper towel to absorb the excess oil. You can serve them as an appetizer or as part of the main meal. <br><br> Thank you for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4351 Fri, 25 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/coffeetea/Mayan-Cherry-Frappe.htm A delicious way to cool off, the Mayan Cherry Frappe is a blend of chocolate, vanilla, and cherry flavors. Top it off with whipped cream and cherry sauce. frozen drinks,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. frozen drinks,recipes,videos Hi, I'm Heather Perry with the Coffee Klatch for About.com Food. Today we're at the Ultimate Barista Challenge, and I'm going to show you how to make the Mayan Cherry Frappe. <h3>Mayan Cherry Frappe Ingredients</h3> To make the Mayan Cherry Frappe, you're going to need a few ingredients:<ul> <li>pint of cherry vanilla ice cream</li> <li>1/2 ounce Scharffen Berger chocolate, or any dark chocolate</li> <li>1/2 ounce 60 percent cacao Mayan chocolate, or any bittersweet chocolate</li> <li>chocolate sauce</li> <li>cherry sauce</li> <li>16-ounce cup of ice</li> <li>6 shots espresso</li> <li>whipped cream</li> <li>vanilla powder</li> </ul> <h3>Combine the Chocolate and Vanilla Powder</h3> We're going to start off by putting our chocolate at the bottom of the blender. You then want to add two scoops of your vanilla base. <h3>Add the Espresso</h3> Next, you're going to add your espresso. You want to make sure you are using shots of really good crema base, as you can see here. We're going to add that right on top. <br><br> By using the chunk chocolate as I did, it's going to give you a nice texture in the drink. <h3>Blend the Ingredients</h3> Next, you're going to want to add your cherry vanilla ice cream, along with your ice. And we're just going to blend this together. <br><br> You can give that a second to rest, and go ahead and lace your cup with your chocolate sauce. Pour your drink right in, nice and creamy and frothy. <h3>Top the Drink With Whipped Cream</h3> You then just want to top it with a little whipped cream and a little bit of your cherry syrup. And there you have the Mayan Cherry Frappe. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4214 Mon, 23 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/Peanut-Butter-Cookies.htm Chewy, creamy peanut butter cookies are a crowd favorite. Find out how to whip up a batch of these delectable treats from scratch. dessert videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. dessert videos Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I am going to show you how to make peanut butter cookies, which are a big favorite in my house. <h3>Peanut Butter Cookie Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you need:<ul> <li>1 1/4 cups brown sugar</li> <li>3/4 cup peanut butter (creamy or crunchy)</li> <li>3 tablespoons milk</li> <li>1 teaspoon vanilla</li> <li>1 egg</li> <li>1 3/4 cups flour</li> <li>3/4 teaspoon baking soda</li> <li>3/4 teaspoon salt</li> </ul> <h3>Combine the Peanut Butter Cookie Ingredients</h3> Preheat the oven to 375 degrees. Combine the brown sugar, peanut butter, milk, egg, and vanilla in a large bowl. Use an electric mixer to beat the ingredients together. <br><br> In a separate bowl, combine the flour, baking soda, and salt. Gradually add the dry ingredients to the wet ones, mixing as you go. <h3>Put the Batter on a Cookie Sheet</h3> Spoon the cookie dough onto an ungreased cookie sheet. These cookies are already plenty greasy, so you do not have to worry about them sticking. <br><br> Use a fork to press down the batter, making the crisscross pattern that is distinctive to peanut butter cookies. <h3>Bake and Serve the Peanut Butter Cookies</h3> Bake the cookies for seven to eight minutes, until they begin to brown. Remove them from the oven and cool before serving. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3694 Mon, 22 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Magic-Extractor-in-PS-Element.htm Make your digital photos picture-perfect. Learn how to extract images with Adobe Photoshop Elements. Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Re-touch,Graphic Design,Videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Re-touch,Graphic Design,Videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to use the Magic Extractor feature in Photoshop Elements. This feature is particularly useful if you wish to isolate an object and put it on a different background. <h3>Choose an Image to Extract</h3> First, open Photoshop Elements. Go to 'file' then 'open' to open the picture from which you want to extract an object. I'll choose one of a dog. Now go to Image, and click on 'Magic Extractor.' <br><br> A new window will open up with your photo in the middle. Also, a toolbar is located on the left side of the screen. <h3>Select Your Brush</h3> The Foreground Brush tool is the first tool you will need. On the right side of the screen, you can adjust the color of the foreground and background brush colors and the brush size. <br><br> Make sure the colors of the brushes are different, and select a brush size smaller than most parts of your object. <h3>Extract the Image</h3> Now click around on the inside of your object using the Foreground Brush tool. Be sure to adjust the size of the brush if you need to. <br><br> Select the Background Brush tool. Click and drag it around your subject carefully, without overlapping the image you want to extract. <br><br> Click the 'preview' button at the top right side of the screen. It is OK to have some of the background still there. We can erase it later. <h3>Smooth Away the Image's Background</h3> On the toolbar, you will see a tool called the Smoothing Brush. Adjust the size of the brush if you need to. Go around the line of your subject, and it will smooth out the line between your image and what is left of the background. <h3>Erase the Rest of the Background</h3> Now select Remove From Selection tool. You can erase the rest of the background that you don't want. <br><br> Be careful not to get too close to your subject, unless you have a small brush. In case you do happen to erase a bit of your image, select the Add To Selection tool. Use this to add your picture back where you erased it. <br><br> When you are satisfied with your extraction, click 'OK' at the top right side of the screen. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_5890 Tue, 27 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/fashion/How-to-Minimize-Hips.htm Do you love your curves but want to downplay your hips? A Boston-based clothing designer shows you how to use clothes to minimize larger hips. minimize hips,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. minimize hips,videos Hello, I am Cibeline Sariano from my boutique, Cibeline, in Davis Square, Somerville MA, for About.com. Today I am going to give you some tips on how to make your hips look slimmer. <h3>Wear Wide-Legged Pants</h3> A great way to hide your hips, ladies, is wearing a wide-legged pant, generally known as a trouser cut. This basically means that as you get closer to your knee, your leg opening gets wider. <br><br> You still want to have the pant come in slightly at the knee, but ultimately you have a wider legged pant. <h3>Things to Avoid to Minimize Hips</h3> You absolutely want to avoid any slim-legged pant if you are trying to deemphasize your hips. You absolutely want to avoid pleats &#150; no pleats, ladies! That definitely will accentuate your hips. <br><br> We also want to avoid pockets. However, a good pocket is one that is closer to your pant, closer to the front zipper. The further over it goes on your waist, the further it will accentuate your hips. <br><br> Also avoid a side zipper pant. We love to break up the front of the pant with a front zipper detail. <h3>Wear Dark Colors</h3> Another aspect of making your hips look slimmer is to focus on dark colors. The lighter the color, the bigger your hips will look. <br><br> When needing to make your hips look slimmer, avoid back pockets on pants. Pocket bags on pants always makes your hips look slimmer. <h3>Try a One-Button Jacket</h3> A minimal shoulder pad is a great way to minimize your hips. We want to go minimal with the shoulder pad, so avoid anything too bulky. <br><br> Also a perfect detail for minimizing your hips is a jacket with one button. This just draws your attention, slims out your waist, and just balances out your shoulder pads and your waist to create a more hourglass figure. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit fashion.about.com. aboutvideo_5255 Mon, 17 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/lungdiseases/Emphysema.htm Emphysema a respiratory disease caused by toxic vapors like cigarette smoke. Learn more about this disease and its effects. emphysema, lung disease, smoking risks 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. emphysema, lung disease, smoking risks <h3>Healthy Respiration</h3> During normal respiration, air travels through the nose, down the trachea, and into smaller and smaller airways called bronchi. The bronchi divide into bronchioles and finally into tiny grape-like clusters of thin, fragile sacs called alveoli. In alveoli, oxygen is exchanged for carbon dioxide in the blood. <h3>Causes of Emphysema</h3> Inhaled toxic vapors, such as those found in cigarette smoke, can lead to the development of emphysema, an irreversible disease that jeopardizes the lungs' ability to function. <h3>Short-Term Effects of Emphysema</h3> In the early stage of emphysema, the alveoli are destroyed, resulting in "holes" in the tissue of the lower lungs. These holes cause the collapse of the bronchioles, preventing airflow from reaching the remaining alveoli. <h3>Long-Term Effects of Emphysema</h3> The exchange of carbon dioxide for oxygen is thereby reduced, causing shortness of breath that progressively worsens and results in damage to the lungs and the heart.<br><br>Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_5611 Tue, 02 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/financialsoft/Create-a-Family-Budget.htm By the end of the month, are you wondering where all of your money went? Keep track of your family's expenses by setting up a budget in Microsoft Money. family budgets,microsoft money,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. family budgets,microsoft money,videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter with About.com Money. Today I will show you how to create a family budget using Microsoft Money. <h3>Download Microsoft Money</h3> Microsoft Money is a downloadable program from microsoft.com. You can download a free version if you want to try it out, or purchase it for your home or office at www.microsoft.com money. <br><br> I am using the Money essentials version but you can create budgets in any version of MS Money to keep track of expenses or only what you spend in certain categories, like eating out. <h3>Select the Type of Budget</h3> To create a budget click on the 'Budget' tab and then click 'Next.' Here you can choose how detailed you want your budget to be. <br><br> If you want to track all of your family spending, click 'Set up a budget to track my monthly income and expenses.' <br><br> If you only want to track expenses in certain categories, click 'Track monthly spending only in my spending tracker.' I'll choose to set up a budget for my family. Click 'Next.' <h3>Enter Your Net Income</h3> On the next screen, enter your regular net income. Net income is the amount of money you take home. <br><br> If you have more than one source of income, enter them separately. They will be totaled for one monthly amount. If you have more than three incomes, click 'Add income item' at the bottom. When you're finished, click 'Next.' <br><br> Here, you can check off which specific categories you want in your budget. I'll select a few. Click 'Next.' <h3>Decide How Much You Spend Each Month</h3> The next page will take some time to fill out. You should think carefully about how much you regularly spend each month on each category. <br><br> Fill in how much you spend on these items. It is a good idea to leave a little wiggle room in case you end up getting Mom a more expensive gift this year or your insurance rates go up. <br><br> MS Money calculates your spending average in each category based on the amount you actually spend each month during the last year. Click 'Next.' <h3>Select Categories to Watch</h3> On this screen, you can check off categories that you want to watch closely. Some that I like to keep an eye on include entertainment and dining out. Click 'Finish.' <h3>View Your Family Budget Summary</h3> Now you can view your budget summary, which includes totals for income, expenses, and the remainder for your family budget, as well as transactions of what you've actually been spending. <br><br> If you get in the habit of categorizing transactions when you enter them, the spending tracker makes it easy to see where your money goes on your MS Money home page. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, visit us at money.about.com aboutvideo_4297 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/chinesefood/Shrimp-Wontons-Recipe.htm Whether you boil or fry them, shrimp wontons hit the spot every time. Learn how to whip up this delicious dish at home. chinese food, wontons, shrimp, seafood, recipes, videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. chinese food, wontons, shrimp, seafood, recipes, videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make your own shrimp wontons. <h3>Shrimp Wonton Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 pound uncooked shrimp, shelled and deveined</li> <li>1 egg white </li> <li>2 tablespoons fresh cilantro leaves, chopped</li> <li>1 teaspoon soy sauce</li> <li>ginger root</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon sesame oil</li> <li>cornstarch (for dusting baking sheet) </li> <li>1 8-ounce package wonton wrappers, (use 2/3 package; thaw if frozen) </li> </ul> Unwrap the wontons and keep them covered with a moist cloth so they don't dry out. <h3>Shrimp Wonton Dipping Sauce Ingredients</h3> You will also need:<ul> <li>2 tablespoons soy sauce</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon sugar</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon hot chili flakes</li> <li>water</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Shrimp Filling</h3> Pour the shrimp into a food processor, and pulse shrimp until they're finely chopped. <br><br> Then transfer the cut shrimp into a large bowl, and mix in the egg white, cilantro, soy sauce, and sesame oil. Peel some ginger, and grate about 1/2 teaspoon into the mixture. Mix everything together. <h3>Fill the Wontons</h3> Lightly dust a baking sheet with cornstarch. Take one wonton from the plate, and put it on the baking sheet. <br><br> Fill wontons one at a time. Place 1 teaspoon of shrimp filling on one side of wonton wrapper. Moisten the edges with water. <h3>Fold the Shrimp Wontons</h3> Fold the wrapper diagonally over filling to form a triangle. Firmly press to seal the sides. <br><br> You can make a different shape for the wonton. Place 1 teaspoon of filling in the wrapper. Pick up all the sides, and squeeze it to seal. You can even twist it a little, so it looks like a money bag or a purse. <h3>Boil the Shrimp Wontons</h3> Bring a large pot of water to a boil. Add the wontons, about six at a time. The wontons are done when they rise to the surface. This may only take three minutes. <br><br> Remove them with a slotted spoon or a strainer. Place on a tray in a single layer, cover and keep warm. Cook remaining wontons. <h3>Prepare the Shrimp Wonton Sauce</h3> In a small bowl, stir together the soy sauce, sugar, and chili flakes. <h3>Fry the Shrimp Wontons</h3> Instead of boiling, you can deep-fry the wontons. Heat oil in a pan to about 360 degrees. Add the wontons in small batches. <br><br> Fry them, turn them occasionally, and after about two minutes on each side, they'll be golden brown. <br><br> Remove with tongs or a slotted spoon and drain on paper towels. Serve the wontons warm or at room temperature with the dipping sauce. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4218 Tue, 13 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/coffeetea/Hot-Chocolate.htm When it's cold outside, nothing warms you up like a mug of steamy hot chocolate. But don't settle for the boxed variety - watch how to make your own at home. hot chocolate,coffee and tea,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. hot chocolate,coffee and tea,videos Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I am going to show you how to make hot chocolate. <h3>What Is Hot Chocolate?</h3> There is a difference between hot cocoa and hot chocolate. The first is made from cocoa powder, which is chocolate with all of the fat pressed out of it. <br><br> The second is made from real, rich chocolate. That is what we are going to be making today. <h3>Ingredients Needed to Make Hot Chocolate</h3> Begin with some nice, rich chocolate. The better the quality, the better your final product will be. You will also need some milk. <br><br> For true hot chocolate you always want to use milk, and never water. Whole milk will give you the richest drink, but you can also use skim or low fat. <h3>Measure and Heat the Milk</h3> Begin by putting the milk in the saucepan. I do not bother with measuring cups. Instead, I just pour it straight into the mug to figure out how much I need. Heat the milk over medium until it starts to get warm. <h3>Combine the Milk and Chocolate</h3> While the milk is heating, chop the chocolate into small pieces. When the milk begins to get warm, add the chocolate. It will begin to melt right there in the pan. <br><br> Be sure to leave aside a few pieces of chocolate to garnish the drink at the end. Stir together the milk and chocolate and let it get warm enough, though make sure it does not boil. <h3>Add Sweetener to the Hot Chocolate</h3> If you are using unsweetened chocolate, you will also need to add a sweetener. White sugar is fine, but you can use brown sugar, honey, or maple syrup if you want to add a little extra flavor. Plan to use about one tablespoon per serving. <h3>Whisk the Hot Chocolate and Serve</h3> Before serving, use a whisk to beat the hot chocolate until it is foamy. Now, ladle the chocolate back into the mugs, garnish it with some chocolate pieces, and it is ready to serve and enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3670 Thu, 01 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/How-to-Use-Magic-iMovie.htm Magic iMovie is designed to import a movie from your camera and create a movie file with an opening title and other options. Learn how to use Magic iMovie. Magic iMovie, mac, video, movie 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Magic iMovie, mac, video, movie Hi! I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I will show you how to use Magic iMovie HD. Magic iMovie is designed for importing a movie from your camera and creating a movie file with an opening title and other options. <h3>Start a Magic iMovie File</h3> Open iMovie. Go up to 'file' and click on 'Make a Magic iMovie.' A window will open with lots of options. First, give your movie a title. This is the title that will appear as the opening title of your movie. <h3>Rewind the Video</h3> I will check off rewind the tape before capturing the movie as my tape isn't rewound in my camera. If you know you only want the first bit of your tape, you can check the box next to stop capturing after, and select how many minutes. I'll opt to stop capturing after 1 minute. <h3>Choose Magic iMovie Transitions and Music</h3> The next option asks what kind of transition to use between clips. I'll use cross dissolves. If you want to use music as a soundtrack over the video check this box then click 'Choose Music.' Drag songs from your iTunes Library or Garageband into the playlist. If there is more music than video the music will stop when the video ends, so be mindful of how long your video is and how long the songs are that you add to the play list. <h3>Adjust the Music</h3> Under the list there is a slider, which will control how loudly or softly the music plays. If you have dialog in your movie, you may want to make the music quite a bit softer. Click 'ok' when you're done. <h3>Create a DVD From the iMovie File</h3> The last option is sending the video to iDVD when its imported so you can design and burn DVDs. I will check that off and then click 'create.' <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit computing.about.com. aboutvideo_3787 Mon, 22 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktoppub/3D-Shapes-in-MS-Publisher.htm Create 3-dimensional objects to jazz up any publication using Microsoft Publisher. Computing,Programs,Microsoft,MS Publisher,Create,Design,Style,3D shapes,Publish 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Microsoft,MS Publisher,Create,Design,Style,3D shapes,Publish Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll show you how to create a 3D object in Microsoft Publisher. This is a great tool to jazz up your publication. First open Microsoft Publisher. I will choose a document from the pre-designed publications for print. Under layout in the left task pane, I will choose the blank one. <br><h3>Selecting Shape to Make 3D</h3>To insert a shape go to the left toolbar and click the shape you want to make 3D. I will just draw a circle. Make sure your object is selected and go up to the toolbar at the top and click the 3D style icon. A drop down menu will appear where you can choose the type of 3D effect. <br><h3>Adjust the 3D Effect</h3>To adjust your 3D effect, go to the 3D icon and select 3D Settings. A tool bar will appear with different options. You can tilt the object different ways and adjust the depth as well as the direction and the lighting. <br><h3>3D Object's Style and Texture</h3>You can also choose from different surface settings such as plastic or metal. Change the color of the object by clicking on the 3D color drop down menu at the end of the 3D Toolbox. <br><h3>Fixing 3D Objects</h3>To delete the 3D Effect, select the object and go up to the 3D icon and click NO 3D. To delete the whole object, select it and press Delete or right-click and choose Delete Object.<br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Computing.About.com.<br> aboutvideo_5732 Fri, 05 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/onlineadvertising/David-Moore.htm David Moore, the Chairman &amp; CEO, of 24/7 Real Media talks about changes to the industry and new innovations. search engine marketing, real media 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. search engine marketing, real media The industry is changing rapidly. There has been a lot of consolidation. As a result the bigger are getting bigger whereas the small are becoming less significant and that was one of the reasons why we were recently acquired by WPP, was to achieve critical mass that would allow us to compete and deal with some of these challenges. The challenges are that the audiences are fragmenting more than ever before, it's tougher for an advertiser to find the right ad for the right person at the right time. There are new technologies that are springing up day in and day out and our challenge is to continue to innovate and insure that we continue to have a viable position in the future. The bigger you are the harder it is to maintain the same kind of growth as a percentage year after year as it was in the past. Regardless of how the economy reacts, we see good growth for the digital advertising marketplace now and in the future. The advertising agencies are doing a much better job than they have in the past in terms of creating advertising that is displayed on the web and in other digital mediums. So you are seeing a lot of innovation there that you haven t seen before. But additionally we are seeing more and more innovative techniques that are used for targeting and at 24/7 Real Media we are very focused on being able to target as well or better than anyone else in the marketplace. Ultimately it comes down to your technology and Open Add Stream which is technology that was developed back in 1995 is now in it s 6.0 version is licensed by over 400 companies, serves over 1000 websites and as a result we have a lot of experience at being able to target well, i.e. putting the right ad in front of the right person at the right time. In the past advertiser would spray their announcement to an entire demographic, along with other demographics, in an attempt to find those customers who were most interested in their product. Now today with search, it's all about the pull, the consumer is looking for information and provides a whole new avenue for advertising in that you know that the customer is interested in your product if they are in fact searching for it. However I think it is short sighted to the think that the search will be the end all and be all to consumer control because consumers don't search for stuff that they don't know about. Display advertising will always be important in terms of creating awareness so that people do know what to go to the web to search for. aboutvideo_4748 Thu, 31 Jan 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homerepair/How-to-Use-a-Vise-Grip.htm A vise grip is an inexpensive and useful tool that you will make your life a lot easier. See how to operate a vise grip. vise grip, tool 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. vise grip, tool Hi! Steve Crider here for About.com Home and Garden. I'm a big believer in multi-purpose tools. The vise grip is one of my favorites and here's why. <h3>How to Work a Vise Grip</h3> To use the vise grips adjust the jaw width with the knob on the back. Then clamp with the lever. And to release, simply pull the trigger. <h3>Ways to Use a Vise Grip</h3> You can use your vise grips to securely fasten onto pipe or tubing. Unstick a stubborn nut. Or back out that stripped screw. The vise grip is an adjustable set of locking pliers that should be in everyone's tool kit. <br><br> Hey, thanks for watching all about vise grips. To learn more, visit us on the Web at homegarden.about.com. aboutvideo_5005 Wed, 14 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/macs/iDVD-Themes.htm Personalize and professionalize your iDVD movies by adding themes. Create custom and multiple themes that fit any TV size and shape. Apple, computing, iDVD, Themes, movies 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Apple, computing, iDVD, Themes, movies Hi, I am Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I will show you how to use themes in iDVD. <h3>Setting up in iDVD</h3> Open iDVD and select Create New Project. Then give your project a Title. In iDVD you will see different themes or templates you can apply to your DVD menus. <h3>Choosing an iDVD Theme</h3> Scroll down in the right sidebar to see different themes. Some have music that plays along with the menu but you won't hear it until the theme is applied to your project. To see older themes, click the drop down menu at the top right and you can see themes dating back to before the 4.0 version of iDVD. <h3>Choosing your Theme's Aspect Ratio</h3> Some themes are set to widescreen, so if you apply one, you will be alerted that the aspect ratio will change from widescreen 16:9 to 4:3, the standard TV aspect ratio. If I click Keep, the aspect ratio will be still be 4:3 but it will be blown up so that some of it may be cut off when viewed on televisions. <h3>Fitting your iDVD Theme to a Standard TV</h3> Go up to View and click Show TV Safe Area. Now I can see how much will be cut off. Now I will choose a standard-sized theme and double click on it to apply. The TV safe area is still on which is helpful for me to know what the menu will look like on a standard TV. <h3>Multiple Themes for Chapters & Extras</h3> If I click on the arrow next to a theme, more will drop down that you can use for chapters and DVD extras menu. Click the Menu button at the bottom right side. Here you can control the loop duration and the menu volume. If you don t want any sound in your menu, bring the slider all the way to the left. <h3>iDVD Drop Zone Themes</h3> You can also personalize your drop zones. Drop zones are the areas in the menu that contain your content, whether it is pictures or video. <br><br> To choose content to put in your drop zone, click Edit Drop Zones. Here you can select Audio, Photos, or Movies to add to your menu. I will click on Movies and click on Don's Movie. To add it to your drop zone, click and drag the file to the gray editing bar and into one of the drop zones. To delete a drop zone, select the media in the editing bar and press delete, or click and drag it outside of the editor. <h3>Alternate Ways to Add Drop Zone Content</h3> Another way to add content to your drop zones is to click Autofill, which will automatically fill in all the drop zones with the files that you may have already imported into iDvd. You can also click on the Media button, and select audio, photos or movies, in the same way you did with the Edit Drop Zones button. <h3>Completing Drop Zone Personalization</h3> After you fill the drop zones, don't forget to change the title text. Double click so the text is highlighted, then you can type in your text. In the Menu window you can change the font, style, size, alignment, and color. <h3>Changing iDVD Themes</h3> If you decide to change your theme, click the themes button and double click on a different theme. All of your drop zone content will carry over. However, if you choose a theme that already has audio and you have already changed the audio in the last theme, you may need to drag that back in. <h3>Removing the Apple Logo</h3> If you want to get rid of the apple logo on the bottom right corner of the menus, go up to iDVD on the toolbar and click preferences. Under the General tab, deselect the option that says, Show apple logo watermark. <br><br> Once you choose a theme, it's easy to design the rest of your DVD menu. Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us on the Web at computing.about.com. <br><br> aboutvideo_4407 Thu, 12 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/cocktails/Salty-Swede-Recipe.htm In a Salty Swede cocktail, pear vodka and triple sec perfectly balance red sea salt and lemon. Learn how to mix this drink like an expert. recipes,cocktails,Salty Swede,pear vodka,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. recipes,cocktails,Salty Swede,pear vodka,videos Hi, I'm Sheree from Good World Bar & Grill in New York City for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make a Salty Swede. <h3>Salty Swede Ingredients</h3> To make the Salty Swede, you'll need:<ul> <li>2 ounces Absolute pear vodka</li> <li>1 ounce triple sec</li> <li>1 ounce sweet and sour mix</li> <li>2 ounces soda water</li> </ul> You'll also need Hawaiian red sea salt to rim the glass and a few squeezes of fresh lemon. <h3>Combine the Salty Swede Ingredients</h3> First, you'll need to take a lemon around the glass and rim the glass with red sea salt. Fill the glass with ice. <br><br> In a shaker filled with ice, add your ingredients: Absolute pear vodka, triple sec, sweet and sour mix, soda water, and a squeeze of fresh lemon. <br><br> Shake, and strain into a rocks glass. Garnish with a fresh lemon wedge. That's how you make a Salty Swede. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6841 Thu, 01 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/MARQUEE-TOOL-IN-PHOTOSHOP-.htm Use the marquee tool in Photoshop to create backgrounds that can make any image or photo look professional or transform it into the perfect gift. Marquee tool,photoshop,adobe,backgrounds 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Marquee tool,photoshop,adobe,backgrounds Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. Today I'll teach you how to create quick creative backgrounds using the marquee tool in Photoshop.<br/><br/>I've already opened Photoshop and have a photo open. If you have a photo available open it now by going to File, Open, and selecting it on your computer. <br><h3>Locating Marquee Tool</h3>Click on the single column marquee tool on your lefthand toolbar. You need to hold down your mouse button on the icon to reveal more tool options and you'll see the single column marquee tool at the bottom. Select it and click on the middle of your picture. This brings up a blinking line.<br/><br/>Go to Edit, then Free Transform. A small blinking square appears in the middle of the line. Click and hold on the square and drag it to the left. Hit return to commit the changes. And go to Select, Deselect to release the line.<br/><h3>Custom Backgrounds with Marquee Tool</h3>We just chose a line of pixels and dragged the color information all the way to the left. It's a cool little effect for making creative backgrounds with little work. <br/><br/>Now click on the marquee tool on the lefthand toolbar again and this time select single row marquee tool. Click on a spot in your picture to create a line. Go to Edit, Free Transform and drag the little rectangle upward. Hit return again to commit the changes. <br/><h3>Add Background Filters with Marquee Tool</h3>With the rectangle still selected you can go further by adding filters. Go to Filter, Texture, and hit Stained Glass. Click OK to accept the defaults. Go to Select, Deselect to remove the rectangle. <br/><br/>With a little experimentation you can create abstract pictures and backgrounds from your photos.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_3675 Sat, 20 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/How-to-Make-Pie-Crust.htm Instructions and recipe for easy homemade pie crust. pie,pie crust,homemade,dessert,bake,baking,thanksgiving,holiday 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. pie,pie crust,homemade,dessert,bake,baking,thanksgiving,holiday Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and today we are making pie crust. Homemade pie crust, though it may seem complicated, is actually quick and easy to make. The ingredients you will need are:<ul><li>2.5 Cups of flour</li><li>1 Tbs each of sugar and salt</li><li>1 Cup vegetable shortening</li><li>6 to 8 Tsps ice water.</li></ul>I am making an apple pie, so I need a double crust. IF you are making a single crust pie, such as pumpkin, you can cut this recipe in half. <br><h3>Combining Pie Crust Ingredients</h3>Begin by combining the dry ingredients. Now, we will add the shortening. It is best to but it in in small chunks, rather than one big glob. We will mix together the shortening and flour using two butter knives. Cut through the flour in opposite directions to mix in the shortening. You want to cut it up and coat the fat with the flour. <br><br>When you have small, pea-sized chunks, it is time to add the ice water. Drizzle six tablespoons of water over the flour. Use a rubber spatula to cut this in, but again, do not mix too much. <br><h3>Testing Pie Crust Dough</h3>At this point, pick up a little bit of the dough in your fingers. If you can get it to stick together, you have enough water. If it still crumbles apart, add one or two tablespoons more. <br><h3>Top and Bottom Pie Crusts</h3>Now we are going to separate the dough into two parts, one for the top crust and one for the bottom crust. We will form the dough in to two balls, and wrap each one in plastic wrap. Now press down on the balls so they are flat discs. This will make them easier to roll out later on. <br><h3>Prepping Pie Crust Dough</h3>We are going to put the dough in the refrigerator now so that it becomes firm. Leave it in for at least half an hour but up to a couple of days. When the crust has been properly refrigerated, remove it from the refrigerator, unwrap the plastic and place it between two sheets of wax paper. This prevents the crust from sticking to the counter or the rolling pin, and makes it easier to transfer to the pie plate. <b3><h3>Rolling Pie Crust Dough</h3>When rolling, always begin in the center so that you are rolling out from the middle instead of in from the edge. You can measure it you have rolled the crust out far enough by placing the pie pan over it. <br><br>When the circle of crust is larger than the pan, it is time to stop rolling. Remove the top sheet of wax paper from the crust. Now, it should easy to transfer the bottom crust to the pie plate. <br><h3>Pie Crust Top and Filling</h3>Now, add whatever filling you are going to have in your pie, and then put on the top crust. Trim around the edges of the pie pan so you do not have any dough hanging over. Seal the bottom and top crusts together. I use a fork, because it is simple and I like the way it looks, but there are other fancier methods you could use. <br><h3>Pie Crust Finishes</h3>If there is a tear in the crust patch it with a piece of extra dough, and use some water to hold it together as glue. Do not forget to cut vents in he top crust. This will let steam escape from the middle of the pie. I am also going to sprinkle some cinnamon sugar on my top crust. Now this is ready to cook. <br><br>To learn more, visit us on the Web at Food.About.com. aboutvideo_4413 Thu, 30 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/bbq/How-To-Grill-Great-Hamburgers.htm America's favorite barbeque food, hamburgers are an easy but satisfying meal. Learn the ins and outs of burger grilling. burgers, hamburgers, bbq, barbeque, grill 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. burgers, hamburgers, bbq, barbeque, grill Hi, I'm Chris Chmura for About.com Food. I'm here with one of my favorite finger foods, grilled hamburgers. <h3>Choose Hamburger Meat</h3> To make hamburgers, you'll need about 1/5 to 1/4 pound of ground beef per patty. Today we're using really lean meat that's just 4% fat. There are tons of other choices in the meat department. <h3>Dressing a Hamburger</h3> Be sure to grab some fresh buns, like these scrumptious ones with sesame seeds, and your favorite condiments. Cheese and bacon are at the top of my list, followed by the usual suspects-- tomatoes, ketchup, mayonnaise, and for us southerners, some yellow mustard. <h3>Prepare the Hamburger Meat</h3> Before you begin working with the meat, this is a great time to add herbs or spices. Some folks add steak seasoning, and sauces. Salt and pepper is perfect for me. <h3>Form the Beef into Burger Patties</h3> Now, start forming the ground beef into balls. Really compact them with your hands, so they stay together over the flames and you don't end up with broken clumps on the barbeque. Place your finished product on a plate and repeat. <br><br> Next, squish them down one by one down and even out the edges using the inside of your hand. Depending on your taste, you'll want to make sure the height is a half inch to an inch. My family favors thin patties, so these are kind of short. <h3>Prep the Grill</h3> Fire up the barbie--- I've always wanted to say that. Let it warm up to medium high before moving on. In the meantime, you can give the grates a quick scrub. <h3>Grill the Hamburgers</h3> OK, plop each patty over the flames... and let the heat do its thing. Try to flip the patties only once after about five minutes. Resist the temptation to press down. Early on, you could push the raw meat in between the grates. Later on, you cold burn your burgers. Either way, you're asking for trouble. <br><br> Toasting the buns a bit will help pass the time, but don't wander. They take just a few minutes. The U.S. Agriculture Department recommends cooking burgers' until the internal temperature reaches at least 160&#176;F. <br><br> When they're just about ready, add a slice of cheese and let it melt. Minutes later, you're ready to move to the real hamburger helpers. <h3>Dress and Serve the Burgers</h3> Stack 'em however you like -- and don't let anyone tell you you're doing it wrong. Serve with a side of chips and your all American meal is ready to eat. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us here on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6887 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Windos-Movie-Maker-vid-effects.htm Use Windows Movie Maker Effects to liven up your videos- add authenticity, motion, and distinction to your projects. Computing,Gadgets,Programs,Windows Movie Maker,Editing,Effects,Videos,Movies 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Gadgets,Programs,Windows Movie Maker,Editing,Effects,Videos,Movies Hi. I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. <br/><br/>Today I'll teach you how to add video effects in Windows Movie Maker. First open up your movie project. I've already placed clips on the timeline. If you can't see the timeline, and see the storyboard instead, click on the Show Timeline button. <br><br>Video effects can be simply fun, they can also be useful when you're trying to tell a story, and they can give your clips a distinct look. <br/><h3>Movie Maker Effects Menu</h3>Next to the Collections button is a drop-down menu. Click it and select Video Effects. Here is a list of various effects you can use. <br/><h3>Preview Effects</h3>One of the useful aspects of Movie Maker is that it will show you what each effect does. To see what an effect will look like, click on one of the effects and click Play in the preview window. If the preview window is too big or too small click and drag it. <br/><h3>Choose Movie Maker Effects</h3>I'll scroll down and find an effect I like. Let's try the Film Age Oldest Filter. Click on it and press Play in the preview window. This gives our clip the look of an old silent film. <br/><h3>Add Effects to Timeline</h3>To add this effect to one of our clips, I can drag and drop it onto a clip. A Star appears in the video track under the clip's name. You can add multiple effects to one clip. Let's drag another effect onto our clip. Now there are two stars overlapping one another. <br/><h3>Undo Effects</h3>To remove a filter, right click on the clip and select Video Effects. Here we can actually add more effects by selecting them from the list and clicking Add. If we want to remove an effect, just click on its name and hit Remove. When you're satisfied, click OK. <br/><h3>Movie Maker Motion Effects</h3>We can also add motion effects. So far we've just changed the look of the clip. To change the speed of the clip you can drag and drop one of the speed filters. There are two: Slow Down, half, and Speed Up, double. <br/><br/>Video filters can be a lot of fun to play with and a great way to add some style to your movies. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_4341 Thu, 19 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Import-Photos-Into-Elements.htm Learn how to get started in Photoshop Elements by importing digital photo files from your files and folders or off of CDs. Import Photos into Photoshop Elements 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Import Photos into Photoshop Elements Hi I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I'll show you how to import photos into Photoshop Elements. <H3>Open Photoshop Elements</H3> <ul> <li>OPEN 'Photoshop Elements' </li> <li>CLICK 'View and Organize Photos' icon.</li> <li>CLICK 'File,' 'Get Photos,' or the 'Get Photos' icon in the toolbar.</li> </ul> <H3>Find Photos by Searching</H3> <ul> <li>CLICK 'By Searching'</li> <li>CLICK 'Search'</li> <li>CLICK 'Select All' to import all files and folders, or HOLD the 'Ctrl' key and CLICK on specific files/folders</li> <li>CLICK 'Open'</li> </ul> <H3>Import Specific Photos to Elements</H3> <ul> <li>CLICK 'From Files and Folders'</li> <li>HOLD the 'Ctrl' key and CLICK files/folders you want</li> <li>CLICK 'Open'</li> </ul> You could also CLICK on files in a folder and DRAG them into the organizer. <H3>Import Photos From a CD/DVD</H3> When you select photos from a CD/DVD, either click the box if you only want to view photos offline (requires the CD to view), or do not click the box, saving the photos to your computer.</li> <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4306 Mon, 18 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/candy/Peanut-Brittle.htm Satisfy your sweet tooth with a batch of yummy peanut brittle. This crunchy candy uses just a handful of ingredients and is a cinch to make. peanut brittle,candy recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. peanut brittle,candy recipes,videos Hi, I'm Keith Dunlop for About.com Food. Today I am going to show you how to make peanut brittle, a classic all-American treat for your family. <h3>Peanut Brittle Ingredients</h3> To make peanut brittle you'll need:<ul> <li>1 cup water</li> <li>2 cups sugar</li> <li>2 cups roasted peanuts</li> <li>1 cup light corn syrup</li> <li>1/2 cup peanut butter</li> <li>1/4 stick butter</li> <li>1 teaspoon salt</li> <li>parchment paper</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon baking soda</li> </ul> In addition to the handful of ingredients you'll need to make peanut brittle, you'll also need one specialized piece of equipment - a candy thermometer. <h3>Combine Some of the Peanut Brittle Ingredients</h3> First combine the sugar and water in a heavy saucepan over medium heat. Stir the mixture until the sugar dissolves in the water, about five minutes. <br><br> Next, add the corn syrup and salt, and keep heating until it starts to boil. <h3>Monitor the Temperature of the Mixture</h3> At this point, you'll want to add your candy thermometer, and while continuously stirring, monitor the temperature of the mixture. <br><br> Don't let the tip of the thermometer touch the bottom of the pan, since that's hotter than the mixture. <h3>Add the Peanuts and Other Ingredients</h3> When the sauce gets to between 225 and 230 degrees Fahrenheit, add the peanuts and keep on stirring. <br><br> Keep heating, and when the temperature gets to 290 degrees, remove it from the heat. <br><br> Add your remaining ingredients - the butter, baking soda, and peanut butter - and stir until the butter is melted. <h3>Let the Peanut Brittle Cool</h3> From here it's really simple: pour the mixture onto a parchment paper-lined cookie sheet and spread it around with a spatula. Once it cools, you've got peanut brittle. Now that's great brittle. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5850 Wed, 02 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/womenshair/Simple--DIY-Updo.htm A classic look that anyone can pull off, the updo can be fancy or understated depending on how your rock it. Find out how to give yourself an updo at home. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Hi, my name is Antonio Gonzalez from Eva Scrivo Hair Salon and welcome to About.com. Today we'll be working with my model Leila and we'll be doing an updo on her, working from a ponytail just to keep it really simple. <h3>Start the Updo From a Ponytail</h3> I feel that working from a ponytail for an updo is the easiest because it takes care of the bulk of the hair. Rather than starting from hair that's all down and trying to twist it up, that's the challenge women face. <h3>Section the Hair</h3> From a ponytail, you'll see that it takes care of length and bulk and it allows you to create your shape a lot easier. Well be working from sectioning the hair from ear to ear, and sectioning off the top of the hair. Main reason is that this is going to be the base of our ponytail and the length in the front of the head we'll be using to create the most of our updo. Polishing the hair a bit - it's important to decide how high or how low you'd like to have your updo. <h3>Curl the Ponytail</h3> I'm just going to take a small curling iron and curl the ends of the ponytail. So that I am able to create my design. Then I am going into my first top section, just reinforcing some of the curl. Just start twisting the hair as you feel comfortable. Its nice working from side to side because it allows you to keep the shape of the updo balanced. <h3>Pin the Top</h3> When I am completed with the ponytail then, I'll incorporate the top. According to how long or thick your hair is you can use your ponytail in three to four sections. At this point you can stop using your hand mirror and make sure you are balanced. You can reinforce the ponytail with hairpins as we go along. <h3>Sculpt the Updo</h3> Now that I have the base of my updo in place, I am taking the sections that sectioned off prior off to the side, with a small curling iron and curling the ends. This will make it a lot easier to work with. And complete half of your design even prior to pinning up your hair. So, as you can see already just taking away the bulk of the hair with a ponytail and curling the rest of the hair already it looks really dressy. <h3>Twist the Updo Into Place</h3> I'll be working from top and then side to side, taking sections, even sections, as I go along. And like the base of the ponytail I am taking a section of hair, putting in my bobby pin, and then twisting it in place. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more please visit us on the Web at About.com. aboutvideo_6174 Tue, 05 Feb 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/studenttravel/Take-the-Jersey-Sopranos-Tour.htm Take a tour of the real-life &quot;Sopranos&quot; locations with Vito Spatafore-- if ya' know what's good for ya'. sopranos, new, jersey 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. sopranos, new, jersey Take a tour of the real-life "Sopranos" locations with Vito Spatafore-- if ya' know what's good for ya'. aboutvideo_32365155 Mon, 10 Jul 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://home.about.com/z/cg/vp.htm?ch=homegarden&l=homegarden/v/11&ap=1 Has your closet fallen into disarray? Check out these easy organization tips for creating a closet you'll love. 2006 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Home/Personal_Organization/ Home/Home Improvement/Decorating [Intro] When I ask about closets, most people's answer is simple: yuck. Closets are the doors you never open when giving a tour of your home. But is there anything you can do to organize yours, short of installing an expensive wall system? There is... if you invest a little time and are willing to let go of items whose best days have come and gone. [Body] First off, make organizing your closet a priority. You'll dress better, because you can see your clothes. You'll vary your accessories, because you can find them. You'll care more about how you present yourself, because your closet motivates you. Now, on to preparing the closet itself... .Be sure it is properly lit, even if that means adding bulbs or wattage. If you have the option of adding a window to a walk-in, do it... natural light makes dressing much more fun. Install a full-length mirror nearby-wall-mounted ones like this one are affordable and can be found at your local hardware store. If you can, store your ironing board in your closet as well. Also, hooks are critical... you'll use them for everything from robes to purses to a quick change of clothing. Drawers or other custom storage solutions can be pricey. A cost-effective way to keep small, loose items like stockings and underwear in check is to add 4-inch fronts to shelving. Fancy closet organizers are fine, but a less-expensive solution is do-it-yourself storage using fake MDF wood. It's paintable, it's attractive and it can be made into shelving and floor-length shoe dividers. The hardest part of any closet overhaul is deciding what to get rid of. One idea that takes the sting out of the first pass is asking someone close to you to go through your wardrobe and remove anything she thinks is unattractive, dated or ill-fitting. Then, ask yourself... have I worn this in the past year or two? If the answer is no, give it to someone who will... either a charitable organization or a friend. Next, go through everything that made the cut and organize it into categories. I like to keep it simple: shirts, dresses and skirts, sweaters and jackets, pants. Put like colors together, especially shirts. You'll feel so much better about your wardrobe when everything in it fits, flatters you and can be found. You can really improve your closet's look and function by discarding unwieldy wire hangers. Turn all your remaining hangers to face the same direction, and hang your clothing the same way. Button at least the top button on every item, and hang pants on trouser hangers so you don't get a crease... you'll save time on ironing later on. Some items are better stored in bins. Lingerie, winter sweaters and your mother's wedding dress are all best folded and tucked away, leaving room for everyday necessities. When it comes to jewelry, correct storage is absolutely critical. I recommend adding small nails across the back of your shelving. You can hang necklaces and other jewelry there for easy access and visibility. Making slots in the tops of shelves or adding storage bins is a great way to divide rings, watches and bracelets. [Close] Tackling closets can really improve your everyday life. Faced with a closet full of manageable, visible choices, you'll feel and look better, mornings will go smoother, and you might even crack open that door on the next tour of your home. I'm Anne-Marie Barton, About Home & Garden. aboutvideo_4900 Wed, 02 Apr 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/frenchfood/Honey-Madeleine-Cookies.htm Madeleines are delicate, light cookies that have a consistency similar to sponge cakes. Try making these honey madeleines at home to dunk in your tea, coffee, or a tall glass of milk. madeleine, cookie, recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. madeleine, cookie, recipe Hi, I'm Natasha Levitan for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make honey madeleine cookies. <h3>Honey Madeleine Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>3/4 c. white flour</li> <li>1 tsp. baking soda</li> <li>4 tbsp. unsalted butter</li> <li>1 tbsp. honey</li> <li>1/2 tsp. vanilla</li> <li>2 eggs</li> <li>1/3 c. granulated sugar</li> <li>1/4 c. confectioners sugar</li> </ul> <h3>Mix the Cookie Ingredients</h3> Turn the heat to low, and in a small saucepan, melt the butter. Add honey to it and vanilla extract. Stir and let the mixture cool to room temperature. In a medium bowl, add the eggs and sugar and using a mixer beat them on high speed until the eggs are foamy and light in color. In a small bowl, mix the flour, baking powder and salt together. <h3>Fold the Cookie Ingredients</h3> Add your flour mixture into the egg mixture slowly to minimize the eggs deflating and mix together with a wooden paddle spoon until no flour is visible. Then, pour butter-honey mixture and continue mixing until all ingredients are combined. <h3>Bake the Madeleine Cookies</h3> Preheat the oven to 425 degrees. Brush your madeleine mold with melted butter then take a spoon of the batter and fill each mold to about 3/4 full. As the cooking will rise during the baking process, you don't want to overfill your molds so the cookies maintain their shape.<br><br> Place the mold on the center rack of the oven and bake for 8-10 minutes until the cookies have puffed up above the edge of the mold. When the edges turned golden brown take them out. <h3>Serve the Madeleine Cookies</h3> Flip the mold over your working surface and the cookies will fall out. Serve them warm with confectioners sugar or without. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us online at About.com. aboutvideo_4219 Thu, 14 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/southernfood/Cheesecake-Recipe.htm You don't have to fork over lots of money for cheesecake. Learn how to make this decadent dessert - including a rich graham cracker crust - at home. cheesecake,desserts,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cheesecake,desserts,recipes,videos Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I am going to show you how to make a simple cheesecake with a graham cracker crust. <h3>Graham Cracker Crust Ingredients</h3> For the crust, you will need:<ul> <li>1 cup graham cracker crumbs</li> <li> 3 tablespoons melted butter</li> </ul> You will save yourself a lot of mess by crushing the graham crackers in a plastic bag. <h3>Cheesecake Ingredients</h3> For the cheesecake, you will need:<ul> <li>24 ounces cream cheese</li> <li>3/4 cup sugar</li> <li>5 tablespoons lemon juice</li> <li>1 teaspoon vanilla</li> <li>3 eggs</li> </ul> Preheat the oven to 325 degrees. <h3>Make the Crust</h3> To make the crust, combine the crackers and the butter, and press this mixture into the bottom and sides of a pie pan. We will prebake the crust for about 10 minutes. <h3>Mix the Cheesecake Ingredients</h3> To make the cheesecake, combine the cream cheese, lemon juice, vanilla, and sugar in a large bowl. Mix these ingredients together until they are well blended. <br><br> You need to separate the eggs before adding them to the cheesecake. First, add the yolks and blend them into the cream cheese mixture. <h3>Prepare the Egg Whites</h3> Clean off the electric mixer before you beat the egg whites. We will beat the egg whites until they get stiff and form peaks. <br><br> Now, gently fold the egg whites into the cream cheese mixture. <h3>Bake the Cheesecake</h3> Pour this mixture into the pie crust and bake it at 300 degrees for 45 minutes. Let the cheesecake cool, and serve it as is or topped with fruit. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6302 Mon, 31 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/babyparenting/Teach-a-Baby-to-Sign.htm Signing with your baby is a great way to start early communication. Learn simple techniques for teaching your baby to sign. sign, baby, sign language 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. sign, baby, sign language Hi I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com. Signing with your baby is a great way to start early communication with your infant. It's a great idea to learn to learn a few signs before, so today I'll show you how to teach a sign to your child. <h3>When Can a Baby Start Signing?</h3> A child's first spoken word is often around a child's first birthday. But a child may produce a sign 3-5 months earlier. <h3>Teaching a Sign to a Baby</h3> For infants, start with just a few key words that you can use often throughout the day. For example, this is the sign for MORE. Bring your fingers together on both hands. In front of you, in a horizontal repetitive motion, tap your hands together. Say the words out loud as you sign it. MORE, do you want some MORE? Make sure that you sign when your baby is looking - this is one of the most important things about teaching an infant sign - if they can't see it, they can't learn it. <br><br> A great way to introduce MORE to your child is by using your child's favorite cereal. Put out a few pieces, then when they are eaten, say Do you want some MORE? Want MORE cereal? Then, after a little delay, give them another small handful. <h3>Sign Language Repetition</h3> Continue doing this, over and over and throughout the day for a few days. Some babies may pick up on the sign the first day and other babies may take a while - so keep it up even if your child doesn't start right away. <h3>Sign Teaching Tips</h3> When teaching signs to your child, here are some tricks to help them watch your hands. You can sign with one hand if you need to, like this - hold the item with one hand and sign on the object with the other hand. Also use signs with things that they like or enjoy to do. <h3>Sign Teaching Tools</h3> Now I'm going to use my bear, which I often use when I teach parents signing. You can also encourage your child to the sign with their own, by moving their hands for them. Or, you can do the sign directly on your child. For instance, HAT what a nice HAT. <br><br> Start with a few signs when you and your child are engaged in an activity, don't worry about signing all day long. Have fun with it, and enjoy communicating with your baby. <br><br> Thanks for watching, to learn more, visit us on the Web at parenting.about.com. aboutvideo_5177 Sun, 23 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/backandneck/Low-Back-Pain.htm The lower part of the spine is the most common site for back pain. Learn about the types of low back pain. low back pain, lumbar spine, back strain 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. low back pain, lumbar spine, back strain <h3>The Spine and Low Back Pain</h3>The spine consists of 33 vertebrae that protect the spinal cord and provide stability to the torso. The lower section of the spine is called the lumbar spine. This section of the spine is the most common site for back pain.<BR> <h3>Types of Low Back Pain</h3>Low back pain is generally classified as either mechanical or compressive.<BR><ul><li><h3>Mechanical Pain</h3> Mechanical pain is usually referred to as "back strain" due to its association with the movement of the spine. This type of pain is a result of injuries to the spine's facet joints, discs, ligaments or muscles.</li> <li><h3>Compressive Pain</h3> Compressive pain is irritation or pressure placed upon the nerves, most likely due to ruptured, herniated or bulging discs.</li></ul> <h3>Treating Low Back Pain</h3>If you have low back pain, it is important to visit your physician for a proper diagnosis in order to determine the type of pain you may be experiencing. The physician can then recommend appropriate treatment.<br><br>Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_5179 Wed, 26 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/orthopedics/MRI.htm An MRI uses a magnetic field to take images of the inside of your body. Here's more information on how MRIs detect internal ailments. MRI, MRI technology 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. MRI, MRI technology <h3>When Is an MRI Necessary?</h3>When someone suffers from an internal ailment that cannot be detected by a traditional office examination, an MRI may be necessary.<BR> <h3>What Happens During an MRI?</h3>When an MRI is administered, the patient lies on a retractable platform which enters the center of the machine. Upon entering the machine, the patient is scanned by one of several magnetic coils that emit a radio frequency pulse targeted at the specific region to be examined. This creates a magnetic field that runs down the center of the tube.<BR> <BR>There are billions of hydrogen atoms within the body, which rotate on a natural axis. When the magnetic current is introduced, the atoms align to it like a compass and spin on a new axis.<BR> <BR>When the magnetic force is removed, the atoms return to their natural alignment. As they relax, they emit energy and act as a small radio transmitter. Different tissues release different energy levels and the computer recognizes their distinct pulses.<BR> <BR>The difference in energy is determined by the atoms realignment time. Dense tissue takes longer to realign than soft tissue.<BR> <h3>How MRI Images Are Produced</h3>So, when the computer receives the different energy levels it creates an image, which shows dense areas as white and less dense areas as black. With this procedure the MRI can show, organs, tendons, ligaments, etc. It is only because of the sheer number of hydrogen atoms in your body that MRI technology is possible.<br><br>Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_4398 Wed, 25 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/greekfood/Make-Yogurt-at-Home.htm Is yogurt a staple in your diet? Then try making your own yogurt at home using this simple recipe. yogurt, yogurt recipes, greek, videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. yogurt, yogurt recipes, greek, videos Hi, my name is Lea Elleseff and I'm here for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make yogurt in your very own kitchen. <h3>Homemade Yogurt Ingredients</h3> Here are the things you will need:<ul> <li>2 cups milk </li> <li>2 tablespoons plain yogurt (make sure it says 'active live cultures' on package) </li></ul> You'll also need:<ul> <li>16oz. airtight jar</li> <li>a cooking thermometer</li> <li>a handy picnic cooler</li> </ul> <h3>Sterilize the Yogurt Jar</h3> Before you start, make sure to sterilize your jar. You can do this by rinsing it with boiling water, or soaking it in a mild bleach to water solution. Now we're ready to go. <h3>Heat the Milk</h3> Start by pouring your 2 cups of milk into a medium-sized saucepan. Now you want to set your burner to a medium heat, and bring the milk to 180 degrees, or right under boiling. I'm going to use my cooking thermometer to give me an exact measurement. <br><br> Once it has reached the correct temperature, turn the burner off, and let the milk cool to between 105 and 110 degrees. <h3>Mix and Flavor Yogurt</h3> Next, we're going to mix in the yogurt. Then, this is optional, I'm going to mix in some honey because I like my yogurt slightly sweet. <h3>Set the Yogurt Mixture</h3> Now we're ready to transfer our mixture into the jar. Closing the lid tight afterwards, then pick up the jar and gently place it in the cooler. Now, fill the cooler with the hottest hot water from the tap which should be between 110 and 120 degrees. <br><br> Yogurt doesn't like to be jostled, so ever so gently pick up the cooler and place it where it won't be disturbed. In 3-4 hours your yogurt will be thick and creamy and should e refrigerated immediately. <h3>Avoid Common Yogurt-Making Mistakes</h3> Now if your yogurt didn't thicken properly, you may have overheated it and killed the cultures, or maybe it wasn't fresh. In cases such as this the old adage 'Try, try again' really works best. <br><br> Otherwise, you're ready to eat. But before you dig in remember to save 2 tablespoons for your next batch. Now you can keep making yogurt forever. <br><br> For more information, visit us a food.about.com aboutvideo_6818 Mon, 18 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/The-Liquify-filter-.htm Get creative with digital images by using the liquify filter in Adobe Photoshop. This handy filter lets you push, pull, rotate, and reflect an image. Adobe Photoshop,distort pictures,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Adobe Photoshop,distort pictures,videos Hi I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I am going to show you how to use the liquify filter in Adobe Photoshop CS 2. This filter lets you push, pull, rotate, reflect, pucker, and bloat an image. <H3>Find a Picture to Liquify</H3> <ul> <li>OPEN Adobe Photoshop</li> <li>CLICK 'File' > 'Open'</li> <li>SELECT picture</li> <li>CLICK 'Filter' > 'Liquify'</li> <li>CHOOSE size, density, pressure, rate of bruch on right side of new screen</li> <li>CHOOSE distorting effects on left side of new screen (listed from top to bottom, below)</li> </ul> <H3>Liquify Filter Effect 1: Warp</H3> This warps the image in the direction you click and drag. <H3>Liquify Filter Effect 2: Retouch</H3> If you select this effect and click once, the image will slightly undo its warping. If you hold it down, this process will go faster until you get back to the original picture. <H3>Liquify Filter Effect 3: Twirl</H3> Click and drag to rotate the picture. Hold 'Alt' or 'Option' button to twirl counterclockwise. <H3>Liquify Effect 4 & 5: Pucker and Bloat Tools</H3> The pucker tool moves objects within the brush closer to the center of that brush area, making it skinnier. The bloat tool moves objects further from the center, widening it. <H3>Liquify Effect 6: Push Left Tool</H3> This moves pixels to the left when you drag up and moves pixels to the right when you drag down. Hold 'Alt' or 'Option' button to reverse this effect. <H3>Liquify Effect 7: Copy Pixels to Brush Area</H3> Drag to mirror the area perpendicular to the direction of the stroke. <H3>Liquify Filter Effect 8: Turbulence Tool</H3> Shaped like a wave, this smoothly scrambles pixels. It's good for making clouds and waves. <H3>Liquify Effect 9 & 10: Freeze Mask Tools</H3> This is used to protect areas of your picture from adjustments. Just paint over the areas you want to protect and the filters will not adjust those sections. Click the liquefy erase mask icon below it to undo/erase masks. <H3>Liquify Effect 11: Zooming In on Pictures</H3> The zoom tool allows you to look at your picture closely. <H3>Liquify Effect 12: Hand tool</H3> The hand tool helps you navigate around. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4196 Wed, 08 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/housekeeping/Hide-Unsightly-Wires.htm Are ugly wires crowding the back of your entertainment center? Watch how to expertly hide them using a few simple supplies. home decor videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. home decor videos Hi, I'm Jennifer DeCristofano for About.com Home. <br><br> No one likes to see a messy tangle of wires in their home. So, today I'm going to show you a couple of simple solutions for cleaning up those messy wires around your home entertainment center, desk, or area with multiple wires. <h3>Supplies Needed to Hide Wires</h3> To clean up these messy wires, you will need:<ul> <li>a pair of scissors</li> <li>cable wrap</li> <li>a cable wrap clip</li> <li>wire ties</li> </ul> For this demonstration, we're going to organize and hide these unsightly wires behind this entertainment center. <br><br> However, depending on the set-up of your wires, you can use the cable wrap and wire ties in any combination to hide or organize cables and wires. <h3>Bunch and Tie the Wires</h3> First, we're going to clean up the wires that run down the back of the entertainment center from the components located near the top of the unit to the components located in the bottom of the unit. <br><br> Bunch these wires together, and wrap a wire tie around them every 10 to 12 inches, all the way down. <h3>Bunch the Power Cords</h3> Next, we need to clean up the power cords running out of the components in the entertainment center to the main surge protector or power source. <br><br> Since not all of the power cords from these components are the same distance from the power source, bunch each set of wires so that higher up wires bunch together with other wires that are located higher up on the entertainment center. <h3>Lay Wires Inside the Clip</h3> Starting from the top and working our way down, bunch these power cords together and lay them inside the cable-wrapping clip. Insert the pointy end of the clip inside the cable wrap, and slide the clip down to lay this group of cables inside the wrap. <br><br> Continue this process until you reach the surge protector or the end of the shortest power cord. Twist the wrap or use a pair of scissors to break the cable wrap off at the correct length. <h3>Bunch the Cords Near the Bottom</h3> Next, bunch together the power cords that are located near the bottom of the entertainment center with the other power cords that are located near the lower part of the unit. <br><br> Repeat the cable wrap process until these wires reach the surge protector or the end of the shortest power cord. <br><br> Plug all of your power cords into the surge protector. <h3>Tie the Remaining Loose Wires</h3> Now, you may still have a few wires dangling around the back because maybe they're running in a diagonal or irregular direction from the other wires, such as speaker wires. <br><br> You can always use a wire tie to secure these cables to the cable wraps or other tied cables for a portion of the distance. <br><br> Or you can use any poles or beams on the back of the entertainment center furniture itself, depending on the style of the furniture you own. <br><br> And there you have it - no more messy wires. Thank you for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at homegarden.about.com. aboutvideo_4906 Mon, 20 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/japanesefood/Japanese-Green-Tea-Pound-Cake.htm This yummy Japanese pound cake has a light consistency and a subtle green tea flavor. If you'd like a stronger tea taste, double the amount of powder required in this recipe. grean tea pound cake 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. grean tea pound cake Hi, I'm Natasha Levitan for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make Japanese green tea pound cake. <h3>Green Tea Pound Cake Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>2 large eggs </li> <li>1 cup flour </li> <li>2/3 cup sugar </li> <li>1/2 cup butter </li> <li>1 tbsp maccha (green tea powder) </li> <li>1/2 tsp baking powder</li> </ul> <h3>Combine Dry Ingredients</h3> In a large bowl combine together flour, baking powder and green tea powder and mix them with a wooden paddle. <h3>Cream the Butter</h3> Soften the butter at room temperature. Mash it slightly with a fork so it's easier for the mixer to handle it. Insert the mixer and turn it on high, then slowly add the sugar and continue mixing it until they're combined. Then gradually add beaten eggs until you get a mousse consistency of a batter. <h3>Combine All Ingredients</h3> With the mixer running add your flour mixture to your butter-egg bowl and continue mixing until the batter is smooth. <h3>Bake the Green Tea Pound Cake</h3> Preheat the oven to 340 degrees. Oil your loaf pan and pour the batter into it. Place your loaf pan in the oven for 30-40 minutes. You will see the pound cake is done when the sides of it turn golden brown and pull away from the pan. Take it out and cool it. <br><br> Serve it with a sprig of mint. <br><br> Thanks for watching! To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5846 Wed, 19 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/candy/Make-a-Chocolate-Santa.htm Celebrate the holiday season with your very own edible Santa Claus! Learn from seasoned chocolate pro Jacques Torres how to make a chocolate Santa from a candy mold. santa, candy, mold 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. santa, candy, mold Hello, I'm Jacques Torres from Jacques Torres Chocolates. Welcome to About.com! Today I am going to show you how to mold a Santa Claus in chocolates and in different chocolate colors. <h3>Make a Chocolate Santa From a Mold</h3> The techniques are applied to any kind of mold. So if you buy a mold for home, you will be able to duplicate that. <h3>Color in the Dark Chocolate Details</h3> So the first thing is to work with a paper cone, and I'm going to put a little bit of dark chocolates in the paper cone. And that's used to make little details. So let me show you how I do that. I cut the tip of the cone and now you can see chocolates coming out of it. So, using that, I can make the eye, the center of the eye, then this part here and the eyebrow and the button, and the cane. <h3>Add the White Chocolate Details</h3> And white chocolate is very interesting, white chocolate is not really chocolate. White chocolate is made with milk powder, sugar, cocoa butter and lecithin - so not much from the cocoa plant there except the cocoa butter. <br><br>So I take the white chocolate and I paint all of the surfaces that are going to be white into the mold. And again, you can buy a mold for home and the techniques will be exactly the same. Very simple. So this is how the Santa looks like from the back. Now I am going to start to work on the front. And I am going to paint his mustache and his beard and all those white parts. Just like that. <h3>Fill the Santa Mold With Milk Chocolate</h3> I am going to put milk chocolate to mold. I need to pour the chocolates in here. So you can put as much chocolate or as little as you want. I need more like that. <h3>Spin the Santa Mold</h3> Then you're going to put on the top of the mold. And now as you can see, I spin the mold to ensure that chocolate goes everywhere. And I have cold air coming out of the machine, and what's going to happen here is, the movement is going to make the chocolate go on the side, this way the inside is going to stay hollow. That's why we call that a hollow figure. <h3>Refrigerate the Chocolate Santa</h3> Then you put it in the fridge. So, it takes a few minutes for the chocolates to retract from the mold, so when that happens what we do, we just open the mold and you can see now the center coming out. It's very shiny. And all the detail that we made with the brush shows up. <br><br> Thanks for watching. If you want to learn more please go to the Web at About.com. Merci. aboutvideo_3693 Tue, 12 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/spreadsheets/Create-Excel-Pivot-Tables.htm Pivot tables are great tools for comparing data, especially when dealing with long lists. See how to create pivot tables in Excel. excel tutorials, spreadsheet videos, computing videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. excel tutorials, spreadsheet videos, computing videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to create a pivot table in Microsoft Excel. Pivot tables are great tools for comparing data, especially when dealing with long lists. <h3>Start a Pivot Table</h3> I'm working on Microsoft Vista, but the process for setting up a pivot table should be the same on Microsoft Windows. First, open Microsoft Excel. I'm going to open a saved document that has a long list of data. <br><br> To make a pivot table, go to 'Data' and choose 'Pivot Table' and 'pivot chart report.' I'll choose Microsoft Excel list or database. Pivot table report provides a chart with your data in it but today I'll just choose 'Pivot Table.' Click 'next.' <h3>Select Pivot Table Data Range</h3> Now you'll have to select the range of my chart. I will select the whole chart by clicking and dragging the cursor. Click next. I will choose to open the pivot table in a new worksheet. Click 'finish.' <h3>Analyze Data Columns in Pivot Tables</h3> You can see the pivot table field list with all of your columns in it. I'll drag the 'coast' column up here. Now choose the two columns that you want to compare and drag them to the row and column drop fields. You'll see the results. <br><br> I want to see how much I paid each employee, so I'll drag the employees to the column and 'payment' to the drop field. Now if I want to see how much the employees on the east coast made, go up to the coast drop down menu and choose 'east' and click 'ok.' <h3>Adjust Data to Analyze</h3> Now if I want to see how much a certain employee made, I'll change it back to 'all coasts,' then under the employee drop down menu, deselect 'show all' and then select the employee. Click 'ok.' And there is how much they made. <br><br> You can also drag up the 'days worked' column to see how much money I paid employees on a certain date. And you can always drag a category back to the field list if you don't want to look at that data. <br><br> Pivot tables make it easy to analyze long lists of data without the use of formulas. Thanks for watching. For more information, visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4895 Thu, 29 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/busycooks/How-to-Make-the-Wedge-Salad.htm These popular salads are tasty, easy to make, and a favorite for kids big and small. Try this recipe that cuts down on fat and cholesterol, but not flavor. wedge salads,video,busy cooks 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. wedge salads,video,busy cooks Hey guys. Jonathon Stewart here for About.com, and today it's all about a salad that's as controversial as it is tasty, as simple as it is ubiquitous on fancy steak house menus, either you love it or you hate it, the wedge. <br><br> But even if you are iceberg averse, give this recipe a shot. It's full of flavor, and it won't clog your arteries. <h3>Wedge Salad Ingredients</h3> To get you going, here's all you'll need. Check it out:<ul> <li>1 medium-size or 2 small-size heads of iceberg lettuce</li> <li>1 cup plain yogurt</li> <li>1 tablespoon balsamic vinegar</li> <li>2 tablespoons Dijon mustard</li> <li>2 cloves minced garlic</li> <li>1 cup crumpled blue cheese</li> <li>2 slices cooked and diced turkey bacon</li> <li>1 de-seeded and diced tomato</li> <li>salt</li> <li>fresh ground pepper</li> </ul> <h3>The Benefits of Iceberg Lettuce</h3> Iceberg lettuce may get a bad rap for lacking the nutrition of other lettuces or spinach, but it is - far and away - the most popular lettuce in the United States. <br><br> The average American consumes over 22 pounds of this stuff a year. And, it is super-low-calorie, a great source of vitamin K, and even the late, great James Beard noted "it adds good flavor and a wonderfully crisp texture to a salad." Who's to argue with the big JB? <h3>Core the Head of the Iceberg Lettuce</h3> Start by coring and slicing your lettuce heads into quarters or halves, rinse thoroughly, and pat dry. Never cored a lettuce head before? It's pretty much my favorite part. <h3>Prepare the Salad Dressing</h3> In a bowl off to the side, mix together your yogurt, balsamic vinegar, mustard, and garlic until smooth. Then stir in about half to three-quarters of your blue cheese. <br><br> Sprinkle in some salt and pepper, and your dressing is all set to go. This dressing is low in fat and relatively high in protein, so you can feel free to indulge a little with your serving size. <br><br> Likewise, the turkey bacon is as delicious as it gets, and lower in cholesterol and saturated fat than pig bacon. <h3>Top the Wedge Salad With Dressing</h3> Sprinkle your bacon, tomatoes, and remaining blue cheese on your lettuce wedges, and drizzle with your dressing for the fancy finish. Serve with a steak knife and fork, and watch your family or guests polish their plates. <br><br> Remember that these salads are meant to be served individually, and, as an added bonus, I think they might be the only salads on record to take less time to make than they do to eat. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5825 Wed, 18 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/losangeles/California---LA-MacArthur-Park.htm Everything is everything in the friendly, undiscovered neighborhood of MacArthur Park in Los Angeles. macarthur, park, los, angeles, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. macarthur, park, los, angeles, california Everything is everything in the friendly, undiscovered neighborhood of MacArthur Park in Los Angeles. aboutvideo_3918 Wed, 24 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/cocktails/Purple-Rain-Martini.htm A specialty among select Miami bars, Purple Rain is a sweet martini with a layering technique that gives the drink its signature purple glow. martini,purple rain,layered drink,cocktail,vodka 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. martini,purple rain,layered drink,cocktail,vodka Hi, I'm Mauricio for About.com Food. Today, at The Studio in South Beach, Florida, I'm going to be showing you how to make a purple rain. <br><br> <H3>Purple Rain Ingredients</H3> To make the purple rain you will need: <ul> <li>2 ounces of vodka</li> <li>2 ounces of wild berry martini mix</li> <li>2 ounces of cherry juice</li> <li>a shaker filled with ice</li> <li>a spoon for the layering effect</li> <li>a purple orchid</li> </ul> <H3>Layer the Purple Rain</H3> Add the cherry juice to the bottom so that it settles because it's a little thicker than the rest. After that you pour the vodka into the shaker with ice, give it a good shake. Next you use the spoon for the layering. Next your going to add the two ounces of wild berry martini mix, and this should make the purple effect. And to top it off, you add the orchid. <br><br>Thanks for watching, and to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com aboutvideo_3700 Sun, 22 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/presentationsoft/Add-Sound-to-PowerPoint-Slide.htm Putting sound in PowerPoint can be both practical and engaging. See how easy it is to add sound to PowerPoint. powerpoint slides, powerpoint sounds, powerpoint, add sound to powerpoint, video 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. powerpoint slides, powerpoint sounds, powerpoint, add sound to powerpoint, video Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I will show you how to insert sounds into your PowerPoint presentation. This is a great tool for playing sound effects, music, or narration. <h3>Add Sound to PowerPoint</h3> To insert a sound, select the slide that you want, then go to 'Insert,' 'Movies' and 'Sound,' and then select 'Sound' from file. Find your sound file on your computer and click 'OK.' A window will appear asking if you want the sound to start automatically or when you click the slide. Choose which one will suit your needs. I am going to choose 'Automatically.' A sound icon will appear with 4 dots around it. <h3>Adjust the Sound in PowerPoint</h3> To adjust the settings, right click the sound icon and then choose 'Custom Animation.' In the side bar, double-click your sound file and a window will appear with various options. Here you can adjust when the sound starts and stops playing under the Effects Tab. Under the Timing Tab, you can further adjust the timing. And under the Sound Settings Tab, you can hide the sound icon and adjust the volume. Click 'OK.' To delete the sound file, left click and press 'Delete.' <h3>Add Effects to Sound in PowerPoint</h3> To add a sound effect, go to 'Insert,' 'Movies,' and 'Sound,' and then select 'Sound' from Clip organizer. A right sidebar will appear where you can see a list of sound effects. Move your mouse over one and click to see a drop down menu. Select 'Preview,' 'Properties' to hear the clip. Click close when you're finished listening. <br><br>Double click the clip to insert it to your presentation. Select if you want the sound to start automatically or when you click on it. <h3>Create a Sound Bed for PowerPoint</h3> To keep your sound playing through the whole slide show, right-click the sound icon and on the drop down menu click 'Edit Sound Object.' In the 'Sound Options' box that appears select the 'Loop Until Stopped' check-box to repeat the sound continuously. Click 'OK.' Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4225 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/cocktails/Manhattan-Cocktail-Recipe.htm One of the finest and oldest cocktails, the Manhattan was the first cocktail that used vermouth as a modifier. manhattan,manhattan cocktail,recipe,drink,bartender,vermouth 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. manhattan,manhattan cocktail,recipe,drink,bartender,vermouth Hi, I'm Sam from Pete's Candy Store in New York City for About.com Food, and today I'm going to show you how to make a Manhattan. <h3>Manhattan Ingredients</h3> For the Manhattan you'll need:<ul> <li>1 1/2 ounces of whiskey</li> <li>1/2 an ounce of sweet vermouth</li> <li>a cherry</li> <li>2-3 dashes of bitters</li> </ul> <h3>Mix the Manhattan</h3> First thing you're going to need is a cocktail glass. Fill it with ice, then fill it with water to cool the glass. In another glass, you're going to want to pour your whiskey. Add sweet vermouth, your bitters, and fill it with ice, then shake it or stir it. Empty the ice and the water, add a cherry, and that's a Manhattan. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more visit us at food.about.com. <br><br><br> <b>More About the Manhattan:</b> One of the finest and oldest cocktails, the Manhattan was the first cocktail that used vermouth as a modifier. aboutvideo_4350 Tue, 01 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/coffeetea/Penny-s-Delight-Frappe.htm Live from the Ultimate Barista Challenge in New York, Greg teaches you how to make his signature espresso frappe, Penny's Delight. frappes, coffee, recipes, drinks, videos, espresso 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. frappes, coffee, recipes, drinks, videos, espresso Hi, I'm Greg Suekoff with Caffe Pronto for About.com Food. I'm here at the Ultimate Barista Challenge, and I'm going to show you how to make a Penny's Delight. <br><br>Penny's Delight is a frozen drink, a frappe made with espresso and fresh apples. It's sort of a more refreshing version of an espresso frappe, and it's good all year round. <h3>Penny's Delight Espresso Frappe Ingredients</h3> To create Penny's Delight you're going to need:<ul> <li>2 granny smith apples, peeled and cored</li> <li>50cc (2oz.) frappe powder</li> <li>35 cc (1 oz.) brown sugar</li> <li>caramel sauce</li> <li>4 scoops of vanilla ice cream</li> <li> ice</li> <li>dash of cinnamon</li> <li>8 shots espresso</li> <li>whip cream for a topping</li> </ul> <h3>Cut the Apples</h3> So to prepare a Penny's Delight you're going to need two granny smith apples. You're going to want to peel them, core them, and chop them into four pieces. <h3>Garnish the Frappe Glass</h3> To prepare your glass for the drink, you're going to want to take it and rub it along half of an apple to get it moist and then rim the glass with cinnamon. At this time it's also a good idea to slice a few apples as a garnish. Put a little slit in it to put it around the glass. <h3>Prepare the Espresso</h3> After that you're going to need to pour eight shots of espresso. You'll want the pour to take between 20-30 seconds to accentuate the body and acidity. You'll want to add the shots to the blender. <h3>Mix the Frappe</h3> Then you're going to want to add an emulsifier, whether its ice cream or a frappe powder. I use a little of both, brown sugar, a dash of cinnamon, caramel, ice, and then blend till smooth. Then you'll want to pour the drinks, add a little bit of whip cream. Garnish with cinnamon on top of the whip cream. <br><br>Add a slice of red apple around the rim, and serve it with a straw. And that's how you make a Penny's Delight. Enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3825 Tue, 23 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/cocktails/Chocolate-Martini.htm If you love chocolate, then this is the cocktail for you. Learn to make a simple chocolate martini with an added chocolate garnish. martini,chocolate,chocolate martini,cocktail,vodka,recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. martini,chocolate,chocolate martini,cocktail,vodka,recipe Hi I'm Darlene for About.com Food, and I'm here at The Studio in Miami Beach, Florida. Today I'm going to show you how to make a chocolate martini.<br><br> <H3>Chocolate Martini Ingredients</H3> All you need for a chocolate martini is: <ul> <li>2 ounces of vodka</li> <li>2 ounces of chocolate martini mix</li> <li>2 ounces of coffee liqueur</li> <li>chocolate garnish of your choice</li> </ul> <H3>Add Chocolate Martini Ingredients to Shaker</H3> So first you start with a shaker filled with ice. Add two ounces of vodka. You can use the top (of the shaker). 2 ounces of chocolate martini mix, and now add two ounces of baileys, for some extra flavor, make it a little bit thicker. <br><br> <H3>Shake and Serve</H3> Once you have everything in, you shake it up for about 20 seconds. Then you can add some kind of chocolate garnish. We have some peanut butter cups, you can throw about three in, and enjoy. <br><br>Thanks for watching, and to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5520 Wed, 28 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/vegetarian/Avocado-Fruit-Smoothie.htm This smoothie mixes the distinct flavor of avocado with strawberries, vanilla ice cream, and natural sweeteners, creating a delicious drink that any avocado-lover will relish. drink, smoothie, avocado, juice, recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. drink, smoothie, avocado, juice, recipe Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make an avocado smoothie. <h3>Avocado Smoothie Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 cup vanilla ice cream</li> <li>1 avocado</li> <li>1 1/3 cups of frozen strawberries</li> <li>1/3 c low fat milk</li> <li>1 tbsp honey</li> <li>1 tsp nutmeg</li> <li>1 tsp cinnamon</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Avocados</h3> First cut the avocados lengthwise all the way around. Twist the halves and remove the pit. With a large spoon, scoop the avocado out of its peel. Place it into a blender. <h3>Mix the Smoothie Ingredients</h3> Next, place the ice cream, the milk, and the strawberries into a blender too. Then, add the honey, nutmeg, and cinnamon. <br><br> Turn on the blender, and blend until the mixture is smooth. You may need to mix it around a little with a spoon. <h3>Serve the Avocado Smoothie</h3> Now, pour the mixture into serving cup. Top with some whipped cream, an extra sprinkle of cinnamon, and a strawberry to serve. <br><br> Thanks for watching, to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5927 Wed, 09 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/losangeles/California---LA-s-Echo-Park.htm Located between North Hollywood and downtown L.A., Echo Park had a bad rep, but it's now a magnet for hipsters and celebrities. los, angeles, echo, park, california 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. los, angeles, echo, park, california Located between North Hollywood and downtown L.A., Echo Park had a bad rep, but it's now a magnet for hipsters and celebrities. aboutvideo_5033 Fri, 21 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/fatherhood/How-to-Burp-a-Baby.htm Since babies swallow air when they eat, you'll need to burp them to give them relief. Watch how to properly burp your little one. burp a baby, fatherhood, videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. burp a baby, fatherhood, videos Hi, I'm Ben Kurtzman for About.com, and I am here with my daughter, Clare. We are going to show you some different ways to burp an infant. <h3>Why You Need to Burp Babies</h3> Babies swallow air when they eat, which can give them uncomfortable gas. You will need to burp your baby to relieve her. <br><br> Burp your baby midway through each feeding and again at the end. If your baby gets fussy while she is eating, that is probably a sign that she needs to be burped. <h3>Prepare to Burp the Baby</h3> Before you burp your baby, make sure to have a cloth handy in case she spits up. Drape the cloth over your shoulder, and then position the baby. <h3>Burp the Baby</h3> Burp the baby by patting her firmly on the back. You do not need to be super gentle. You can also rub your baby's back to help release any gas in her abdomen. <br><br> There are other positions for burping your baby that you may want to try. Sit her up in your lap, supporting the front of her torso, and then pat and rub her back. You can also lay your baby down on her tummy and burp her that way. <br><br> Try all of these methods and find the one that works best, and is most comfortable for you and your baby. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the web at parenting.about.com. aboutvideo_4680 Thu, 09 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/mideastfood/Sesame-Halvah.htm A classic Middle Eastern confection, halvah often appears at banquets and ceremonial occasions, but you can enjoy it at any time. Learn how to bake this tasty sesame version of halvah. halvah, sesame halvah, candy, recipes, dessert 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. halvah, sesame halvah, candy, recipes, dessert Hi, my name is Natasha Levitan for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make sesame halvah. <h3>Sesame Halvah Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 1/2 cups of granulated sugar</li> <li>1/2 cup rose water</li> <li>1 tsp cream of tartar</li> <li>1/2 lemon and a citrus reamer</li> <li>1 1/2 cup of tahini</li> <li>candy thermometer</li> </ul> <h3>Extract Lemon Juice</h3> First, extract lemon juice with a citrus reamer over a strainer to keep out seeds and pulp. <h3>Make Halvah Sugar Syrup</h3> Next, we'll make sugar syrup. In a medium sauce pan, combine sugar, rosewater and lemon juice and stir. Insert a candy thermometer, turn the heat on medium and heat the mixture until it boils and the temperature reads 240 degrees. Turn the heat off and cool the syrup for a couple of minutes. <h3>Heat the Tahini</h3> In a small saucepan, insert thermometer. Heat tahini on a medium heat until the thermometer reads 120 degrees. <h3>Combine the Halvah Ingredients</h3> Slowly add tahini to the hot sugar syrup. Mix it with a whisk until everything is combined. Add vanilla flavoring and mix again until the mixture starts to thicken. <h3>Pour Halvah in the Mold</h3> Line your baking pan with a parchment paper. Pour your mixture into the pan. Cover it with aluminum paper or cling wrap and leave it refrigerator for 36 hours. Then take it out and cut into squares. <br><br> Thank you for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4732 Wed, 25 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/familycrafts/Make-an-Origami-Dinosaur.htm Is your little one fascinated by dinosaurs? Learn how the two of you can make this prehistoric giant out of origami paper. origami videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. origami videos Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Parenting, and I am going to show you how to make an origami dinosaur. <br><br> For this project you will need one piece of origami paper. <h3>Fold the Origami Paper Into a Triangle</h3> Begin by folding the paper into a triangle to form a crease down the center. Open it up, and fold the edges in so that they meet up in the center of the paper. <br><br> Turn the paper over, and we will fold it so that this point on the bottom meets up with this point on the top. <h3>Fold the Top Flap Down</h3> Turn the paper over and pull these flaps out, and fold in the edge right to the middle. Take this top flap here and fold it down to the bottom. <br><br> Now we will flip the paper over and fold it in half. Take these flaps here on the sides and fold them up like so. Do the same thing on the other side. <h3>Make the Dinosaur's Head</h3> Now we will take this top part of the paper, and fold it over like so to form a crease. Fold it back the other way to make the crease even stronger. <br><br> Open this up, and we will take this flaps on the side and invert the fold, opening the flaps to give our dinosaur a head. <br><br> Take this point here and fold it back in on itself just slightly so his head is not quite so pointy. <h3>Make the Dinosaur's Arms and Tail</h3> So we have the head of the dinosaur and we have the legs, and about halfway between we are going to make a fold just like this to make a crease that will help us make his arms. <br><br> Make another fold on the diagonal to form a second crease. Now we will take these two creases that we made and just pull them out to give our dino a little pair of arms that stick out like so. <br><br> Now, take this end, which is the tail, and invert it, folding it back upon itself. And there you go. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at parenting.about.com. aboutvideo_4205 Thu, 29 Mar 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/chinesefood/How-to-Make-Cold-Bubble-Tea.htm Demonstration of how to make bubble tea at home. bubble tea,tea,drink,recipe,bubble tea recipe,tapioca,tapioca pearls 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. bubble tea,tea,drink,recipe,bubble tea recipe,tapioca,tapioca pearls Hi, I'm Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I'm going to show you how to make bubble tea. <h3>What is Bubble Tea?</h3> The bubbles in the tea are actually large tapioca pearls, which add an interesting consistency to the drink. This is a cold drink, so you need to make the tea well ahead of time so it has plenty of time to chill. Bubble tea is very popular in Asia, and it is beginning to gain popularity in the United States. <h3>Bubble Tea Ingredients</h3> For this recipe you need:<ul> <li>black tea</li> <li>large tapioca pearls</li> <li>milk</li> <li>ice</li> <li>sweetener</li></ul> You also need a cocktail shaker for mixing together the drink, and extra wide straws for drinking up those bubbles. <h3>Prepare the Tea</h3> Begin by making a pot of black tea. While the tea is still hot sweeten it with sugar or honey. Generally, you will want to use about 1 tbsp. of sweetener per cup of tea. It is better to use less than more, because you can always add more later. Now, chill the tea in the refrigerator. <h3>Boil the Tapioca Pearls</h3> Tapioca is very delicate, so you want to make it right before putting the bubble tea together. Boil some water in a large saucepan. When the water is boiling, add one cup of tapioca pearls. Stir them up so they do not stick to the bottom. Follow the cooking directions for the type of tapioca that you are using. Generally, you want to let the tapioca boil for 25 minutes, then turn off the heat and let them sit covered in warm water for another 25 minutes. <h3>Assemble the Bubble Tea</h3> Drain the tapioca and rinse it with warm water. Add the tapioca pearls to the bottom of the cups. Pour one part tea, one part milk and some ice into the cocktail shaker. Give it a good shake so everything gets mixed up. Pour the milk, tea, and ice over the tapioca and enjoy the drink through one of the thick straws. <br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com aboutvideo_3540 Fri, 23 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homerepair/Fixing-A-Squeaky-Door.--8j.--8j.htm Learn how to fix any type of door hinge and quiet your home's squeaky doors. DIY,home,repair,how to,fix,door, 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. DIY,home,repair,how to,fix,door, Hi! I'm Ami Young with About.com Home. Does Your Door Hinge Squeak? Today we're going to show you how to get rid of those squeaky door hinges.<br/><br/>There are two ways to do this. The first way that I'm going to show you is probably the quickest way. The second way is for those more stubborn hinges.<br/><h3>Quick Fix Materials</h3><br/>The first thing you are going to need is s spray can of petroleum based lubricate. If for some reason you don't have a can of spray lubricant, you can use liquid drip form of lubricant. <br><h3>Using your Lubricate</h3>What you want to do is take your can of spray lubricant; most will come with a straw you can put into the nozzle. Now the straw is going to help you get right down into the hinge. Spray the top of the hinge and the sides. Now we're going do that with all three hinges. And then we want to go ahead and open the door a little bit. Open and close it and let it work its way down into the hinge. Do you hear that? Quiet.<br><h3>Materials for Stubborn Squeaks</h3>Some hinges, no matter how much you put on the outside of the hinge, they just are not going to quiet down. Now if your hinge is being stubborn, you are really going to want to work the lubricant on the inside of the hinge. In order to do this, you will need to remove the pin. The tools you are going to need in order to accomplish this are:<ul><li>Either a hammer or a rubber mallet</li><li>Screwdriver</li><li>A good work rag</li></ul>You want to make sure that this is something you don't mind getting dirty.<br/><h3>Dismantling your Hinge</h3>First, I need to pull the pin out of the hinge. It should come out pretty easy, but if it sticks or has been painted into position, you may need to tap underneath the head of the pin with a screwdriver and hammer or rubber mallet to loosen it up.<br/><h3>Adding Lubricant</h3>Now that I have the pin removed, I'm just going to spray some lubricant inside the hinge and rub it on the outside of the pin to make sure I've got everything covered.<br/><br/>Replace the pin in the hinge, and repeat these steps on the other hinges of the door if it's necessary.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at HomeGarden.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_4615 Fri, 30 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/windows/How-to-Use-Vista-Photo-Gallery.htm Windows Vista Photo Gallery allows you to view, organize, and edit your digital photos in an easy-to-use interface. Learn the basics to using Windows Photo Gallery. vista, windows, photo gallery 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. vista, windows, photo gallery Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I will show you the basic features of Microsoft Windows Photo Gallery. Windows Photo Gallery helps you view and organize your digital photos that have been imported onto your computer from a digital camera. <h3>Open Windows Vista Photo Gallery</h3> To open Windows Photo Gallery, go to the start menu and click 'Windows Photo Gallery.' If its not in your start menu, type 'photo' in the search box at the bottom of the start menu, then click on 'Windows Photo Gallery.' <h3>Viewing Pictures in Vista Photo Gallery</h3> You will be able to view all of your photos when the program opens. They will be grouped by date. To see a larger view of a photo, double click on it. <br><br> To move to the next or previous photo, click on the arrows under the photo. You can rotate the photo by clicking the round arrows. You can go back to the gallery by clicking 'Back to Gallery' on the upper left corner of the window. <h3>Adjusting Pictures in Windows Photo Gallery</h3> You can adjust your photo by using the tools in the tool bar. Click on the fix button. You can choose to crop, adjust the color, fix red eye, or adjust other settings by clicking on the options on right side of window. <br><br>To crop the photo, click on 'Crop Picture.' You can move the crop box around the photo to the correct place. You can also adjust the size of the box by clicking and dragging on the white boxes on the outline of the box. Click 'Apply.' <br><br>To adjust the color, click on the adjust color button, and use the sliders to change the colors. To fix red eye, click on the red eye button, and use the mouse to click and drag a small box around the area that needs to be fixed. <h3>Photo Information In Windows Photo Gallery</h3> To see the photos information, click on the info button in the tool bar. You can also email, burn the photo to a CD, print, make a movie, or open the photo in another program by clicking on the corresponding buttons. <h3>Searching for Pictures in Vista Photo Gallery</h3> You can find a specific photo by typing in a keyword in the search box of the gallery window. I will type flower and a few photos will appear in the window. These photos are samples that have been tagged or given a caption with the word, flower. <h3>Rating Photos in Windows Photo Gallery</h3> You can also rate your photo by clicking on the stars under the photo information. I will rate this photo by clicking on 3 stars. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_3931 Thu, 26 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Mashed-Potatoes.htm Not sure what side dish to serve tonight? Homemade mashed potatoes are always a crowd pleaser. Learn how to make fluffy, creamy mashed potatoes. mashed potatoes,potato,side dish,recipe,video 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. mashed potatoes,potato,side dish,recipe,video Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make simple mashed potatoes. <h3>Ingredients for Mashed Potatoes</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 1/3 pounds baking potatoes</li> <li>2 tablespoons butter or margarine</li> <li>2-4 tablespoons milk</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon salt</li> <li>pinch of pepper</li> </ul> <h3>Peel and Cut the Potatoes</h3> First, peel the potatoes. Use a vegetable peeler to take off all of the skin. Use the tip of the peeler to remove any deep parts. <br><br> Next, cut the potatoes in half and then into large chunks.. <h3>Boil and Mash the Potatoes</h3> Place the potatoes into a pot of boiling salt water. Cover and cook for 15 to 20 minutes, or until potatoes are tender. Drain the potatoes in a colander. <br><br> Put the potatoes in a bowl and mash until no lumps remain. You can mash with a fork, a masher, or a potato ricer. <h3>Add Ingredients to the Potatoes</h3> Add the milk in small amounts, beating after each addition, until your desired consistency is reached. Add the butter or margarine, salt, and pepper. Beat until mashed potatoes are light and fluffy. Serve with your favorite meal. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6162 Tue, 12 Feb 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/queens/The-Rockaways--Queens.htm Once a playground for the rich, the Rockaways are now a favorite of hardcore surfers and New Yorkers looking for a beach close to home. new, york, city, rockaways 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. new, york, city, rockaways Once a playground for the rich, the Rockaways are now a favorite of hardcore surfers and New Yorkers looking for a beach close to home. aboutvideo_4226 Tue, 20 Mar 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/cocktails/Sazerac-Recipe.htm The Sazerac cocktail originally used absinthe, which is outlawed in many countries, but can be substituted with Herbsaint, Pernod, or Absente. sazerac,cocktail,recipe,absinthe,drink 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. sazerac,cocktail,recipe,absinthe,drink Hi! I'm Sam from Pete's Candy Store in New York City for About.com Food, and today I'm going to show you how to make a Sazerac. <h3>Sazerac Ingredients</h3> For the Sazerac, you're going to need:<ul> <li>1 1/2 ounces of rye whiskey</li> <li>a dash of absinthe or absinthe substitute</li> <li>a couple dashes of bitters</li> <li>1/2 ounce of simple syrup</li> <li>a lemon twist</li> </ul> <h3>Mix the Sazerac</h3> To make a Sazerac, you're going to want to begin with a martini glass filled with ice and water. In another glass, you're going to want to add your rye, bitters, simple syrup, and then ice. You'll want to stir this. Empty out the ice and water. <br><br>You're going to add your absinthe or absinthe substitute, and what you're going to do is coat the glass, then discard. Add a lemon twist, and fill. And that's how you make a Sazerac. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more visit us at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5783 Thu, 29 May 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/gocanada/Canada---Toronto-s-Chinatown.htm This is the quintessential Chinatown that rivals all other chinatowns. toronto, chinatown, canada 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. toronto, chinatown, canada This is the quintessential Chinatown that rivals all other chinatowns. aboutvideo_4213 Wed, 13 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/southernfood/Red-Velvet-Cake.htm The perfect way to end a meal? Serve up a slice of red velvet cake topped with cream cheese or vanilla frosting. red velvet cake,desserts,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. red velvet cake,desserts,recipes,videos Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I am going to show you how to make red velvet cake. <h3>Red Velvet Cake Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 ounce red food coloring</li> <li>1/2 cup butter</li> <li>2 eggs</li> <li>2 1/4 cups flour</li> <li>1 teaspoon baking soda</li> <li>1 teaspoon vanilla</li> <li>3 tablespoons cocoa powder</li> <li>1 1/2 cups sugar</li> <li>1 cup buttermilk (if you do not have buttermilk, you can combine 1 cup regular milk with 1 teaspoon vinegar)</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon salt</li> <li>1 tablespoon vinegar</li> </ul> You will also need two round eight-inch cake pans for baking the cake. <h3>Combine the Ingredients</h3> Begin by mixing together the butter, sugar, and eggs in a large bowl. Add the buttermilk, salt, cocoa powder, flour, and vanilla, and mix them in. <br><br> In a small bowl, combine the vinegar and baking soda. Mix these together and let them fizz, then add them to the cake batter. Finally, add the food coloring and mix it in thoroughly. <h3>Bake the Red Velvet Cake</h3> Grease the cake pans and pour in the cake batter. Put the cake in the oven, and let it cook for 30 to 35 minutes until a fork comes out clean. Let the cake cool before removing it from the pan. <br><br> Traditionally, red velvet cake is frosted with a white, vanilla, or cream cheese icing, but you can use whatever you would like.<br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com.<br><br> <b>More</b>: <a href="http://video.about.com/southernfood/Cream-Cheese-Frosting.htm">Cream Cheese Frosting</a> Recipe aboutvideo_4422 Tue, 26 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Macaroni-Salad-Recipe.htm A delicious macaroni salad recipe is something you will enjoy for years to come. Bring this tried and true northern-style macaroni salad to your next cookout or picnic. macaroni salad, recipe, picnic recipe, videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. macaroni salad, recipe, picnic recipe, videos <b>Chris:</b> Hi, I'm Chris Chmura for About.com Food. I'm here with my mom, say 'hi,' mom.<br> <b>Mom:</b> Hi.<br> <b>Chris:</b> She's going to share her recipe for northern-style macaroni salad. It's simple, right?<br> <b>Mom:</b> Pretty easy. I don't usually measure everything because I've been making it so long. 45 years, in fact. <h3>Macaroni Salad Ingredients</h3> I use:<ul> <li>1 pound box of elbow macaroni</li> <li>about 1/2 a medium green pepper</li> <li>1 large plum tomato</li> <li>1/2 a medium yellow onion</li> <li>2 cups of mayonnaise</li> </ul> <h3>Cook the Macaroni</h3> Begin with a large pot. Fill it with water and bring to a boil. Follow the directions on the box. I cook it a little longer for softer macaroni. <h3>Prepare the Macaroni Salad Vegetables</h3> While that's cooking, wash the vegetables under cold water, move to a cutting board and chop. You can combine everything in the same bowl. <h3>Mix, Then Cool the Salad</h3> Drain the macaroni and rinse to remove all the excess starch. This way, the mayonnaise is sure to stick. Now, let it cool for a bit. Next transfer the macaroni to a large serving bowl. Add the vegetables, cover with plastic wrap, and refrigerate. <h3>Dress the Macaroni Salad</h3> About an hour later, remove from the fridge, and add my secret ingredient: pickle juice. About a third of a cup will do. Now about two cups of your favorite mayonnaise. I think the name brands make a big difference in taste. Mix well. <h3>Refrigerate the Macaroni Salad</h3> Cover and refrigerate. For best results, I think it needs to sit overnight for the flavors to blend. <br><br> <b>Chris:</b> So, what if I don't want to wait. Can I eat it the same day?<br> <b>Mom:</b> It really tastes better the next day.<br> <b>Chris:</b> Ok, thanks mom. Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us here on the Web at food.about.com.<br> <b>Mom:</b> Bye! aboutvideo_4212 Tue, 10 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/italianfood/How-to-Make-Almond-Biscotti.htm Biscotti is a tasty afternoon snack and also goes great with a steaming cup of coffee. Learn how to make almond biscotti at home. biscotti,recipe,video,Italian food 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. biscotti,recipe,video,Italian food Hi, I am Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and today I'm going to show you how to make biscotti. These cookies get their crunch from being baked twice, and they are great for dipping in drinks like coffee. <h3>Biscotti Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you need: <ul> <li>1 cup almonds</li> <li>1 teaspoon baking powder</li> <li>1/8 teaspoon salt</li> <li>2 cups flour</li> <li>3/4 cup sugar</li> <li>3 eggs</li> <li>1 teaspoon vanilla extract</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon almond extract</li> </ul> <h3>Toast the Almonds</h3> Begin by heating the oven to 350 degrees. Place the almonds on a cookie sheet, and let them toast in the oven for 8-10 minutes. Remove the almonds from the oven, and let them cool. Lower the oven temperature to 300 degrees. <br><br> When they have cooled down, chop the almonds into coarse pieces. <h3>Combine the Ingredients</h3> In a small bowl, beat together the eggs, the vanilla, and the almond extract. In a large bowl, combine the baking powder, flour, salt, and sugar. Gradually add the egg mixture to the flour. <br><br> When the dough is halfway mixed, add the almonds, then finish mixing everything together. <h3>Divide the Dough</h3> Divide the dough in half, then roll each half into a log about 10 inches long and 2 inches in diameter. The dough will be very crumbly, so you will have to use your hands to get it to stick together. <h3>Bake the Biscotti Logs</h3> Place the logs on a greased cookie sheet, and bake them for about 35 to 40 minutes until they are firm to the touch. Remove from the oven and let cool for 10 minutes. Now, cut the logs on the diagonal into pieces about 1/2-inch wide. <br><br> Return the slices to the cookie sheet, and bake them for another 10 minutes. Now, flip them over, and cook them for another 10 minutes. The biscotti should be done now. Let it cool before serving. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5723 Mon, 24 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Amanda-Bynes-and-Joe-Nussbaum.htm Amanda Bynes heads off to college in Sydney White, an updated take on the classic Snow White and the Seven Dwarfs fairy tale we all know and love. red carpet interviews,videos,amanda bynes 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. red carpet interviews,videos,amanda bynes Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the Los Angeles Premiere of <i>Sydney White</i>.<p> <h3>Amanda Bynes ('Sydney White')</h3><p> <b>Tell me about playing Snow White. That's kind of an iconic role to tackle.</b><p> Amanda Bynes: "It was iconic and it definitely was stressful because I wanted to do a good job. But I had fun and I worked with the greatest guys. I'm sure you've met some of the dorks. They're all so sweet and funny so it's been a lot of fun, definitely."<p> <b>And they have nothing but nice things to say about you.</b><p> Amanda Bynes: "Oh well, thank you. I say nothing but nice things about them. They are all so talented and funny."<p> <b>I was asking them, you hung out with these seven guys and they said they never even played a practical joke on you. Did they?</b><p> Amanda Bynes: "No, they didn't that whole time. I don't know why they didn't, but I appreciate it."<p> <b>How did you get them to be so well-behaved?</b><p> Amanda Bynes: "I don't know. I really don't know. Maybe I'm just scary."<p> <b>What are teen audiences going to get out of this film, and why is it so important to you to get a positive message out there?</b><p> Amanda Bynes: "Well, it's a funny movie for all ages about accepting yourself with all your differences. Even if you're dorky, it doesn't mean that you can't be cool and can't succeed. And that's what really the message of this movie is."<p> <b>And you're going to go on to more college type of roles now? What are you hoping for?</b><p> Amanda Bynes: "We'll see. Whatever is good quality. I don't really look at what age it is. I just feel like as long as it's a good script and it seems to be funny or dramatic, whatever it may be."<p> <h3>Director Joe Nussbaum</h3><p> <b>Why are you so attracted to these teen movies?</b><p> Joe Nussbaum: "Oh man, you know I love teen movies because I loved teen movies growing up. I would love to do an adult movie as well, don't get me wrong. I don't mean an <i>adult</i> movie &#150; I mean, you know, a grown-up movie."<p> <b>Well, this is getting there because it's college.</b><p> Joe Nussbaum: "I'm working on it. My first movie was about kids going from junior high to high school. My second movie was about a bunch of high schoolers visiting college. So this movie is now about a freshman in college. It's tough, though. I don't know about a lot of grad school movies, but I assume that my next movie will be in grad school.<p>But no, I love teen movies because I loved teen movies. I think that we all have that feeling that when we were developing our love of movies and we were developing a taste for making movies, those were the ones we were watching. And for me it was John Hughes and it was <i>Revenge of the Nerds</i>, and it was those movies that made me &#150; along with <i>Star Wars</i> and the big action movies and the big comic book movies &#150; that made me want to get into it. I think there's always a soft place when one comes along."<p> <b>This one has a lot of clever <i>Snow White</i> references. Were there any that you couldn't get in that you wanted to get in?</b><p> Joe Nussbaum: "Yeah. There was one clever <i>Snow White</i> thing that we actually shot. It's just another line where she says, 'It's off to work we go,' which I thought would have been nice. But yeah, we got the apple and we got the fairest of them &#150; the vanity - and we got the&#133;"<p> <b>Hi ho.</b><p> Joe Nussbaum: "Hi ho, of course. And the seven dorks are all cognates to the seven dwarfs if you look carefully. And yes, the horny guy is Happy."<p> <b>You know, that was the one I couldn't figure out. There's no Horny in Disney.</b><p> Joe Nussbaum: "He's happy. He's Happy. What's not to be happy about?"<p> <b>And working with Amanda Bynes, what does she bring to a movie like this?</b><p> Joe Nussbaum: "The great thing about Amanda for any director who works in comedy is that she has great comic timing. She has a natural ability to find the joke and find the humor in every scene. Even in every line. It's interesting when you audition someone, a lot of times when I'm auditioning people I know there are x number of potential laughs in an audition scene. And a great actor, or a great comedic actor, will come in and not only hit every one of those, but add one or two. And an actor who doesn't have it comedically might be a great actor, but they'll come in and they'll miss every joke. Now Amanda didn't audition for this obviously, but she is an actress who can find every joke and play every funny moment the way it's supposed to be played. And that, for me, makes my life a lot easier."<p> <h3><i>Sydney White</i> Resources:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/sydneywhite/a/sydney091607.htm">Exclusive Interview with Amanda Bynes</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/sydneywhite/ig/Sydney-White-Photos/index.htm"><i>Sydney White</i> Photo Gallery</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/bynesamanda/">Amanda Bynes Movies and Photos</a></li><p> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/sydneywhite/"><i>Sydney White</i> Credits, Poster and Trailer</a></li><p> aboutvideo_6828 Fri, 13 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/frenchfood/Poach-a-Pear.htm Pears, while delicious on their own, can transform into an elegant dessert in a few simple steps. See how easy it is to poach pears in wine. pears, poached pears, wine recipes, desserts, video 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. pears, poached pears, wine recipes, desserts, video Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman, for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to poach a pear in wine. Pears, while delicious on their own, when poached in wine can make simple but elegant dessert in just a few steps. <h3>Cooking Utensils Needed</h3> To get started, you will need:<ul> <li>a peeler</li> <li>a large knife</li> <li>a melon baller</li> <li>a slotted spoon</li> <li>a saucepan</li> </ul> <h3>Poached Pear Ingredients</h3><ul> <li>red wine</li> <li>sugar</li> </ul> <h3>Choosing Pears</h3> The color and texture of pears vary. Pears are usually ripe when they are mostly firm with some give at the top. <h3>Peel and Cut the Pear</h3> First cut off the stem. Then peel the pear completely. Make sure you get every spot. Now cut the pear in half and scrape off any non-edible parts. With the tip of your peeler, take out the bottom of the core. With the melon baller, scoop out the center of pear where the seeds are. <h3>Poach the Pear in Wine</h3> Place the pear halves in the saucepan. Fully cover the pears with the wine. Add a couple of spoonfuls of sugar. <br><br>Turn on your stove to a moderately high setting to bring the wine to a boil. Once boiling, reduce to a simmer. Simmer until the pears are soft. This could take up to 30 minutes. I'm going to gently poke it with my peeler to test its tenderness. Remove the pears from the pot with a slotted spoon, and cool in the refrigerator. <h3>Create a Wine Syrup Topping</h3> Increase the heat on your saucepan to cook the wine. This will reduce it down to a syrup. The middle of the pear is a great place to put a scoop of ice cream, whipped cream or a homemade filling. For your final steps, put in a cookie and drizzle the syrup over the pears.<br><br> Thanks for watching, to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4959 Wed, 01 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Bradley-Cooper-Interview.htm Bradley Cooper stars as a photojournalist who tries to track down a serial killer in the thriller Midnight Meat Train, directed by Ryuhei Kitamura. red carpet interviews 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. red carpet interviews Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2007 San Diego Comic Con.<p> <h3>Bradley Cooper &#150; 'Leon' in <i>Midnight Meat Train</i></h3><p> <b>Tell me about this movie &#150; everything about it.</b><p> Bradley Cooper: "Everything &#150; A to Z. All right, done. So I was reading the script, no. I really loved it. I just think it was like 9am, I hadn't eaten&#133; The movie is <i>Midnight Meat Train</i>, based on Clive Barker's short story from the collection of short stories called the <i>Books of Blood</i> series. It's about this guy, Leon, who is a photojournalist who catches on to this missing person on the subway system. He had taken photographs of her that night. He begins to piece together that this other guy that he's been photographing just on the street may have something to do with the fact that she's missing. And he slowly pieces together that&#133;and there have also been these murders on these subways, this specific late train&#133;and so he starts to follow this guy and stalk him. He becomes completely obsessed with this guy.<p> You sort of follow his descent into that madness and you're not quite sure whether it's him thinking it or it's really real. Then when you realize what it is, it becomes this cat and mouse game, which is why I like it so much because it's not just the typical genre where there's a killer and the guy hunting the killer. You're not sure if Mahogany actually wants him to follow him. And in the end that's revealed why."<p> <b>Interesting.</b><p> Bradley Cooper: "The reason why it's also awesome, I think, is because first of all, that Clive Barker loved it. But also it's not just a horror movie; it's not just a psychological thriller. It's likened to <i>Blade Runner</i> and <i>Se7en</i>, those kind of movies, I think. It has those noirish qualities to it. And it's brutal. It stays with you. It certainly was a brutal thing to shoot. It took me a while to recover from it, honestly."<p> <b>Just delving into a guy that gets that obsessive?</b><p> Bradley Cooper: "I mean actually just physically doing it because a lot of stuff goes on."<p> <b>Blood, guts and gore?</b><p> Bradley Cooper: "Oh yeah."<p> <b>Had you read the short story?</b><p> Bradley Cooper: "Not before I read the script."<p> <b>How closely does it follow it?</b><p> Bradley Cooper: "It has the same essence of it entirely. We changed a couple things about it. Leon's an accountant in the short story and he's a photographer. That was just done for more visual reasons. But Clive said it today, which I was really happy about, the thing that matters is you capture the essence of the short story and the brutality and the horror of it, and the sadness. It's a very sad movie."<p> <b>Sad?</b><p> Bradley Cooper: "Yeah, I think so. I think the character Mahogany is actually quite sympathetic in a weird way."<p> <b>That's interesting. You sympathize with a guy who's killing people.</b><p> Bradley Cooper: "I do but maybe something's wrong with me."<p> <b>Maybe that's just your interpretation of the movie.</b><p> Bradley Cooper: "Yeah, yeah. You're like, 'What?'"<p> <b>How tough is it to play someone who does get that obsessed about something? Is that in your personality?</b><p> Bradley Cooper: "Absolutely, I think it's in everybody's personality. I think it's really easy to play that actually, yeah. So that wasn't that hard. What was hard was acting out what that obsession does, you know, because he sort of physically changes and completely envelopes himself in it with his whole body."<p> <b>And you've got <i>The Comebacks</i> too, right?</b><p> Bradley Cooper: "Yeah, <i>The Comebacks</i> is coming out. I just did a day on that with Will Arnett and Dax Shepard."<p> <b>That's a lot different.</b><p> Bradley Cooper: "Totally, yeah. I just did this movie too called <i>The Rocker</i>, which is another comedy. I'm shooting a comedy right now called <i>All About Steve</i> with Sandra Bullock. So it's nice to jump back and forth."<p> <b>You do more comedies than you do anything else, right?</b><p> Bradley Cooper: "Yeah, yeah, probably. If you tally them up, yeah."<p> <h3>More Coverage of <i>Midnight Meat Train</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/thecondemned/a/condemn042607.htm">Vinnie Jones on <i>Midnight Meat Train</i> and <i>The Condemned</i></a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/midnightmeattrain/"><i>Midnight Meat Train</i> Resources</a></li><p> aboutvideo_6745 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/childparenting/About-Handwashing.htm tips to help your kids get into the handwashing habit children,hand washing,wash,hands,soap,bathroom,baby,germs 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. children,hand washing,wash,hands,soap,bathroom,baby,germs Hi, I'm Kathy Moore for About.com Parenting. Hand washing is one of the most important disease prevention skills you can teach your children. Little kids are especially susceptible to germs and bacteria because they do so much exploring with their hands and they have not built up immunity to many common germ types. <br/><br/> Some people like to use antibacterial soaps, but the kind of soap you use does not matter as much as how well you rub your hands together and create friction to remove soil and germs. Encourage your kids to wash between each finger and around their fingernails too.<br/> <H3>Hand Washing Water</H3> Wash hands in clean water. It doesn't matter if the water is warm or cold. In fact, washing with cold water may help reduce dry skin. <br/><br/>Using a mild soap and lather up for about 10 to 15 seconds. Since most kids won't time themselves, try teaching them to sing their ABCs while they are washing. When the song is over, they can rinse and dry their hands. <br/> <H3>Drying Hands</H3> After rinsing, teach your kids to dry their hands with a clean towel. Public health experts advocate using single-use paper towels to reduce the spread of disease. At home you may find it more convenient and economical to use cloth towels but consider changing them daily. <br/> <H3>Hand Washing With Sanitizers</H3> Many people like to use alcohol-based hand sanitizers that don't require water. While these products do a great job of killing bacteria and viruses, they're not so great at removing plain old dirt and soil. Also when using hand sanitizers with small children you need to be extra careful that they don't ingest the sanitizing solution.<br/> <H3>When to Wash Hands</H3> Now that we've covered how to wash your hands lets review when hand washing should be required. <br/><br/>Teach your kids to always wash their hands after using the toilet, before eating or cooking, after blowing their nose or sneezing, and any time they have touched or cared for one of the family pets. <br/><br/>Don't forget that kids pick up on your habits so be sure to make them aware of when you are washing your hands too. Hopefully you can use these tips to help your kids get into the hand washing habit. Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at parenting.about.com. aboutvideo_5482 Mon, 10 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/spanishfood/Tortilla-Espanola.htm In this tasty Tortilla Espanola recipe, potatoes are blended with onions, eggs, and salt to create a perfect meal or snack. tortilla espanolas,spanish food,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. tortilla espanolas,spanish food,videos Hi, I'm Natasha Levitan for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make Tortillas Espanola. <h3>Tortilla Espanola Ingredients</h3> To make Tortillas Espanola, you will need:<ul> <li>6 potatoes</li> <li>1 whole yellow onion</li> <li>6 eggs</li> <li>2 cups olive oil</li> <li>2 teaspoons salt</li> </ul> <h3>Combine the Tortilla Espanola Ingredients</h3> Peel the potatoes and slice them into thicker slices, about 1/8 inch. Peel the onion and chop it. Crack the eggs into a large mixing bowl and whisk them. <h3>Cook the Onions and Potatoes</h3> In a large, heavy, non-stick frying pan, heat a tablespoon of olive oil on medium high heat. Add in the onions and fry them until they turn golden brown. Set them aside. <br><br> Then add your remaining oil and potatoes, so that the oil almost covers the potatoes. Fry them until you can poke the potato and it breaks into two. <br><br> Your potatoes should be done. Remove from the pan and place the potato in a colander for a few minutes to allow more oil to drain. <h3>Cook the Tortilla Espanola</h3> Add your fried potatoes and onions into your bowl of whisked eggs, and mix them together so potatoes are well coated. <br><br> Pour 1-2 tablespoons of olive oil into the pan, and heat on medium heat. When hot, pour your egg-potato-onion mixture into the pan and spread out evenly. <br><br> Allow it to cook until the egg browned around the edges. The inside of the mixture should not be completely cooked. <h3>Flip Over the Tortilla Espanola</h3> When the mixture has browned on the bottom to the degree you can slightly move it around the pan, carefully take the frying pan to a sink. Place a dinner plate large enough to cover your pan upside down over the frying pan. Quickly turn the frying pan over. <br><br> Be careful because the pan is very heavy. Slide the omelet into the frying pan to cook on the other side. Let the omelet cook for 3-4 minutes. <h3>Serve the Tortilla Espanola</h3> Carefully slide the omelet onto a plate. You can slice the omelet the same you would a pie. Serve it with toasted bread on the side. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4136 Tue, 12 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/cocktails/Sheree-s-Special-Mai-Tai.htm Translated from Tahitian, Mai Tai means 'good,' but many claim it's really 'out of this world.' See why this fruity version is worthy of such a title. cocktail videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cocktail videos Hi, I'm Sheree from Good World Bar and Grill in New York City for About.com Food, and today I'm going to show you how to make a Mai Tai. <h3>Mai Tai Ingredients</h3> To make my special Mai Tai, you will need:<ul> <li>1/2 ounce of amaretto</li> <li>1 ounce dark rum</li> <li>1 ounce light rum</li> <li>1/2 ounce of grenadine</li> <li>a spoonful (1 tbsp) of powdered sugar</li> <li>squeeze (1/2 oz.) of simple syrup</li> <li>2 lime wedges</li> <li>1/2 ounce pineapple juice</li> <li>garnish with an orchid</li> </ul> <h3>Mix the Mai Tai</h3> First you'll add the liqueur: amaretto, dark rum, light rum. Then the grenadine, squeeze of simple syrup, spoon of powdered sugar, two good squeezes of lime, top with pineapple, and shake. <br><br> Finally, garnish with an orchid. And that's how you make my special Mai Tai. <br><br> Thanks for watching, and to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com aboutvideo_4814 Tue, 04 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/spreadsheets/Hide-Info-in-Microsoft-Excel.htm In some cases, you may not want to display certain information on your Excel spreadsheet. You can simply hide information in specific rows, columns, and even cells. See how it's done! rows, columns, excel, hide 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. rows, columns, excel, hide Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'm going to show you how to hide information from your worksheets in excel. In some cases, you may not want to display certain information on your spread sheet. You can simply hide information in specific rows, columns and even cells. <h3>Hide Columns of Information in Excel</h3> Let's open a previously written document in Excel. Here, I have some data that is in three columns. To hide columns of information, select a column at the top of the screen. Go up to the menu bar and select 'format, columns.' From here you can unhide or hide information in column. Click on it and that information will disappear. <h3>Unhide the Information</h3> To unhide your information, go back to format, columns and click 'unhide' or go to the top of the column bar and dragging the bolded edge to reveal the column. <h3>Hide Rows in Excel</h3> You can also do this with rows by selecting the row and then format, rows, hide. <h3>Hide Specific Information in Excel</h3> To hide specific information in cells, first select the information. Go to 'format,' and then 'cells.' In the new window under the numbers tab, select 'Custom' from the category options. In the text box provided, type three semicolons and then click 'OK.' The information will disappear. <br><br>To redisplay cell information, select the cells, go back to format, cells, and select the numbers tab. Under the category options, select 'general' and then 'OK.' <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_3718 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/busycooks/Cook-Fish-in-Foil.htm If you're grilling or baking fish, consider wrapping it in aluminum foil. Not only does this method make clean-up a snap, it also helps seal in the fish's flavor. fish,filet,foil,recipe,quick 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. fish,filet,foil,recipe,quick Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. It's really convenient and tasty to take fish wrap it up in aluminum foil, then grill it or bake it. Plus, it's a really easy clean up. <br><br> Today I'm going to show you how to make a fish and vegetable dish all wrapped up. <h3>Ingredients Needed to Cook Fish in Foil</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>fillets of white fish, like tilapia or cod</li> <li>1 white onion</li> <li>1 red or orange bell pepper</li> <li>1 lemon </li> <li>3 tablespoons fresh cilantro</li> <li>salt</li> <li>black pepper</li> <li>chili powder</li> <li>1 1/2 minced garlic</li> <li>3 tablespoons olive oil</li> </ul> <h3>Cut the Aluminum Foil</h3> Preheat a grill at medium-high heat, or preheat the oven at 425 degrees. Cut two large pieces of aluminum foil. <h3>Prepare the Seasonings for the Fish</h3> First prepare the seasoning for the fish. Roughly chop the cilantro and place about 3 tablespoons into a bowl. Add 3 tablespoons of olive oil and 1 1/2 half teaspoons of minced garlic. <br><br> Roll a lemon to get the juices flowing. Cut the lemon and squeeze one half into the bowl. For additional seasoning, I'm using chili powder. You can also try jerk or Spanish seasoning. With a brush, combine all of the ingredients. <h3>Combine the Fish and Seasonings</h3> Wash the fish fillet and pat it dry. Place the fish in the center of the aluminum foil. Brush the sauce on both sides of the fish. <h3>Cut the Vegetables</h3> Now, cut the vegetables to go with the fish. Cut and seed a red or orange bell pepper. Cut the pepper into thin slices and place a few on top of the fish. <br><br> Next, quarter an onion. Remove the skin, and mince it with a chopper or by hand. Add a few tablespoons to the top of the fish. Season the fish lightly with salt and pepper. <h3>Wrap and Cook the Fish in the Foil</h3> Next, make the foil into a packet around the fish. Fold over each side, and crimp the edges over the top of the fish. Fold the sides and seal the packet well. <br><br> If you are grilling, cook for 10 minutes on each side. To bake, place the packets on a baking sheet. Place them in the oven and cook about 15 minutes per inch of the filet. <h3>Open the Foil Packets and Serve</h3> When the fish is opaque and the vegetables are tender, remove from heat. Allow the packets to stand for about 5 minutes before opening. <br><br> Be careful of the hot steam when you open up the foil. Place the meal on a plate and enjoy! <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6905 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Apple-iMovie-editing.htm Learn basic video editing in Apple iMovie and begin transforming your raw footage into tight and focused movies. Computing,Software,Apple iMovie,Videos,Editing,Movies,Videos,Film,Television 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Software,Apple iMovie,Videos,Editing,Movies,Videos,Film,Television Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll teach you how to do basic editing in Apple's iMovie. I've got a project open. You can open yours or create a new one and capture or import clips. I'll click on the Clips icon to choose my footage for editing. There are two different steps involved in editing in iMovie, arranging and trimming. <br><h3>iMovie Arranging</h3>To arrange your clips click on the Arrange Video Clips icon. Now click and drag your clips onto the timeline. To arrange the order of them click and drag them into whatever order you want. <br><h3>Trimming your Footage</h3>If you click the clock icon, the timeline viewer appears. Here you can trim your arranged clips for more precise editing. <br><br>If you don't see both clips, drag the zoom tool until they both appear onscreen. To trim a clip, go to the edge of a clip and drag to change the length of it. <br><h3>Changing Speed</h3>If you want to speed up or slow down a clip, first click on the clip you want to alter and drag the speed bar toward the Turtle to slow it down, or toward the Rabbit to speed it up. <br><br>Keep in mind that when changing the speed you also change the length of the clip. The faster the speed, the shorter the length of the clip. The shorter the speed, the longer the clip. And speed changes also affect the speed of the audio. <br><h3>Audio Editing</h3>If you want to adjust the volume of an entire clip, click on the Edit Volume box, select a clip, and then drag the volume slider up or down. You can also click on the volume line to create volume keyframes. Volume keyframes are a good way to raise or lower the volume on specific parts of a clip in case your audio was recorded too soft or too loud. <br><br>To delete audio keyframes, click on the keyframe and hit Delete. <br><h3>Undoing Edit Changes</h3>When the Edit Volume box is checked you cannot trim your clip. Once you uncheck the box you can go back and trim the clip. If you make one mistake go to Edit Undo. <br><br>If you want to restore your clip to before you made any trims, press Ctrl and click on the clip. Go to Restore Clip and hit OK. <br><h3>iMovie Preview</h3>To preview your movie, drag the Playhead Triangle to the beginning of the timeline and hit the Spacebar or the Play button. <br><br>And that's how you edit in Apple iMovie. Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_6971 Fri, 02 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Beets.htm Beets are a root vegetable that can be boiled, baked, steamed, fried, or grilled. See how to choose and prepare beets, and also how to cook a spiced beet dish. beets,vegetable,cook,boil,root,peel,slice 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. beets,vegetable,cook,boil,root,peel,slice Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to prepare and cook beets. I'm also going to show you how to make a delicious spiced beet dish. <h3>Choosing Beets</h3> Look for beets that are small and firm with a deep maroon color. They should have unblemished skin and bright green leaves. Also try to choose beets that are about the same size for an even cooking time. <h3>Wash and Prepare the Beets</h3> Now, gently wash the beets. The skin will be removed after we cook them, so you don t have to scrub too hard. Next trim the tops to about 1 inch of the stem. Leave the tail on. Everything will be removed after cooking. <h3>Boiling Beets</h3> For this recipe, I'm going to boil the beets for about 30 minutes. Beets can also be baked, steamed, fried, or grilled. Once they are soft, remove the beets from the heat. You may need to leave some of the larger beets in for a longer time. Pour out the beets into a colander. Cool the beets under cold running water. <h3>Simple Spiced Beets Recipe</h3> Peel off the skins. This should be very easy to do with a knife or a peeler. Next, trim off the ends of the beets. Whole beets can be refrigerated for 1 week or frozen for up to 10 months.<br/><br/>You can serve sliced cooked beets just as they are in a salad or as a side dish. However, I'm going to dice the beets for my spiced beet dish.<br/><br/>Put the beets in a medium saucepan. Add: <ul> <li>1 quarter of a cup of butter</li> <li>a pinch of salt and a pinch of pepper</li> <li>1/4 of a cup of light brown sugar</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon of ground ginger</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon of ground cinnamon</li> <li>2 tablespoons of lemon juice</li> </ul> Mix everything together. Set your burner to low and simmer the beet mixture for 2 to 3 minutes. Spoon the beets out of the saucepan and put them into a serving dish. Serve warm and enjoy!<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4624 Fri, 30 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/windows/How-to-Create-an-XPS-Document.htm If you have a Microsoft Word document that you'd like to send in a PDF-like format, then this demo is for you. Learn how to make an XPS document, or a flat file format, in Word. xps, document, windows, vista 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. xps, document, windows, vista Hi, I am Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'm going to show you how to create an XPS document in Microsoft Word. An XPS document is Microsoft's latest flat file format that acts much like PDFs. However, XPS is not as recognizable as the PDF format, so I would take caution in using them. <h3>XPS Document Software</h3> If you have Windows Vista, your XPS Viewer will be pre-installed onto the computer. If you are working on an older version of Windows, you will need some add-in software to allow you to create XPS. <br><br> To find the add-in, go to about.com and search XPS document. This should take you to a page about XPS documents and then a link to a Microsoft download page. If you do not have the add in, click on Microsofts free save as PDF or XPS add-in. <h3>Save Your Word Document as an XPS Document</h3> Now, open up a previously written word document. Go up to file, and then to print. In the next menu, under Printer Name, select 'Microsoft XPS Document Writer.' Then click 'OK.' A new menu will open up and ask you where to save and name your document. I will save my document on the desktop and call it 'Test.' <h3>View the XPS Document</h3> The new XPS icon will appear on the desktop. To open and view the document, first open up Internet Explorer, and then open up a new tab or window. Click on the XPS document and it will open in the Internet Explorer window. The XPS should be able to be sent over email much like a PDF file. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at advertsing.about.com. aboutvideo_6950 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Apple-iMovie-4-web-export.htm Now that your video's edited, learn how to export it in the most efficient and appropriate way for your medium- whether web or email, share the highest quality product with your audience. Computing,Software,iMovie,Videos,Editing,,Export,Quicktimes,Videos,Web 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Software,iMovie,Videos,Editing,,Export,Quicktimes,Videos,Web Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll teach you how to export your movie from Apple iMovie to the web. <br><h3>iMovie Export - Email</h3>After you've completed your editing and have everything arranged on your timeline to export to web go to file share. This brings up the export window with a bunch of options. The first option is email your movie to friends and family. You can choose which email program to use and you can give it a name. <br><br>Keep in mind that this compresses the movie a lot, shrinks the size, and lowers the quality. iMovie even estimates the filesize of the final clip. <br><h3>Exporting to a Mac Account</h3>The next option is to publish your movie on an online dot mac account if you've purchased one. The videocamera option is for going back to a digital video camera and the iDVD option is for going to DVD. <br><h3>iMovie Quicktime Web Export</h3>But I'll skip those and go to the quicktime option since were going to web. We can select click on the compress movie for dropdown menu and choose from various default settings. If you wanted a full size movie at full quality, not ideal for web, you'd select full quality DV. If you want to do quick and easy web settings, choose the web option. A description of the compression and filesize appears below. <br><h3>Customizing your Export Settings</h3>But I want more control so I'll select expert settings and click share. A window pops up asking me to name and set a location for my file. In the export dropdown menu there are options for exporting to flash, ipod, and many others. I'll keep it on quicktime movie and click on options. If I click settings I can adjust options. <br><h3>Custom Compression</h3>Under compression type I'll select H264 and hit ok. If I wanted to change the size I'd click the size button and change the dimensions. I'll go to custom and insert 480 by 360 and click OK. <br><br>I'll leave the sound on the default setting and click ok. And I'll hit save. <br><br>After a few moments my movie will be complete. And after it's finished I'll find my movie, double click on it and there's my movie. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_16920296 Mon, 10 Jul 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://home.about.com/z/cg/vp.htm?ch=gadgets&l=gadgets/v/4&ap=1 Need some help sorting through the world of digital music? See comparisons of the top online music stores from Apple's iTunes to Yahoo! Music. 2006 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computers/Multimedia/Music and Audio/Software/ Shopping/Entertainment/Recordings/Audio/Music [INTRO] If your music library reads like a 1980's top 40 chart - you know who you are - there's no faster way to freshen your collection than downloading digital music. Thanks to high-speed Internet access from Cable and DSL connections, getting music online has become easier and faster. It now only takes minutes, even seconds, to download your favorite tunes. It might take you more time to decide which online store you're going to use. There are a half dozen or so out there. And, the best part, they're legal. Here's a breakdown. [BODY] Apple's Music Store or "iTunes" dominates the market.having sold some 350-million songs. Apple charges 99 cents per song. You can get most full albums for about 10 bucks. Both PC and Macintosh users can use the store to download songs onto their computer. The music can then be loaded onto your iPod through software or burned onto a CD, but the number of times you can make that transfer is limited. But, once you buy a song, you own it. The store also has one of the largest song libraries of the bunch with one and a half million songs. Microsoft's music store, "MSN music," is very similar. It also offers a pay-per-song plan at the same rate as Apple, 99 cents a tune. But, the library is a little smaller, with just over a million songs. And, you can't put these tunes onto an iPod, only MP3 players that support the Windows Media format, like the Creative, or the Rio. The newest kid on the music block... is "Yahoo Music Unlimited." What makes this subscription-based service unique---? It's charging less than the competition. You only pay about 5 bucks a month, if you sign up for a one-year membership. That gives you unlimited access to a song library of more than one million songs, about the same size as iTunes. With Yahoo Music Unlimited, you can transfer tracks to portable music players that are compatible with the Windows Media "plays for sure" brand. You can also share tracks through Yahoo Messenger. But, you don't 'own' the songs. As with any subscription service, once you stop paying, the music stops playing. Other major subscription-based services, like Napster 2.0 and Real Network's "Rhapsody," charge about 15 bucks a month for comparable services. Rhapsody also offers a free service hoping to lure in new users called Rhapsody 25. You can stream up to 25 'complete' songs a month for free; instead of the 30-second samples you get with iTunes and MSN Music. The company hopes that this service will lure you into buying a subscription. Napster and Rhapsody are only supported by a few music players; none of which are named iPod. [CLOSE] Basically, the music store you use, depends on the player you use. One last note, while you're shopping around, make sure you avoid person-to-person music sharing sites. Not only can they give your computer a nasty virus, they're also illegal. I'm Brett Larson, About Gadgets. aboutvideo_5600 Wed, 21 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/macs/PC-Mac-2-Way-File-Sharing.htm Overcome hardware differences in just a few simple steps- share files between your mac and PC and make your network truly seamless. File-Sharing, computing, Mac, PC, compatible, files, network 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. File-Sharing, computing, Mac, PC, compatible, files, network Hi. I am Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I will show you how to share files between a Mac and a PC. <h3>Mac Set-up for PC Access</h3> First, on your mac, go up to the apple and select system preferences. Click sharing. Check off the box that says windows sharing At the bottom it shows you which accounts have access and how windows users can access your files. Close the preferences window. <h3>Set-up PC to Access Mac Files</h3> Now I'll go to my PC and click My Computer. In the address bar you can type in the name of the drive of the mac computer you want to connect to. We just saw this information on the bottom of my mac's system preferences window. Press enter and a window will appear. Type in your username and password for the computer. Click ok. <h3>View Mac Files on your PC</h3> You now have access to the mac computer. I'll click on desktop to view the files that are on the Macs desktop. <h3>View PC Files on your Mac - PC Set-up</h3> Let's say I wanted to share files on this PC with the Mac. I can right click on the folder I want to share and select properties Click the sharing tab. Now click the share this folder button. You can rename the folder if you want or give a comment. <br><br>Below you can limit the number of users or have them ask permission before viewing the folder. Click apply then ok when youre done. <h3>Access PC Files from your Mac</h3> Let's go back to my mac. Go down to the finder on the menu bar. Click on network in the left sidebar. Select your network. Mine is called MShome. There's the PC I am looking for. Click connect. In the window that appears, select which shared volume you want to connect to from the drop down menu then click ok. now in the left sidebar you will see the name of the volume you chose, click on it to see the files it contains. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at Computing.about.com.<br><Br> aboutvideo_4132 Fri, 01 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/pcsupport/Open-a-Stuck-Drive-on-Your-PC.htm We've all been there: The CD or DVD drive on your PC gets stuck and traps your disc. Before you call tech support, try this simple trick for opening a jammed drive. PC support,stuck drives,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. PC support,stuck drives,videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to open a stuck drive on your PC. <br><br> This is really useful if you have a disk in your drive that you need and your drive is stuck closed. <h3>Unfold a Paperclip</h3> First, you'll need a paperclip. Unfold it so there is 1 to 2 inches that is straight, like this. <br><br> Now, look closely at your drive door. There should be a very small pinhole either above or below it. <h3>Insert the Paperclip Into the Drive Door</h3> Insert the paperclip. There is a very small gear that when rotated, will manually open the drive door. <br><br> Retract and reinsert the paper clip as many times as it takes to eject the drive enough so you can hold onto it. <h3>Pull Out the CD or DVD Drive</h3> Now slowly pull the drive out until it is fully retracted. Remove your stuck CD or DVD, and slowly push the drive bay back until the door is closed. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4811 Wed, 14 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/italianfood/Chicken-Piccata.htm Chicken Piccata is a traditional Italian favorite that even your pickiest eaters will love. It combines citrus and spices with warmth and simplicity. chicken piccata, lemon, capers, sautee, italian food 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. chicken piccata, lemon, capers, sautee, italian food Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food and today I'm going to show you how to make Chicken Piccata. <h3>Chicken Piccata Ingredients</h3> For this recipe you will need:<ul> <li>5 to 7 chicken breast halves, boneless, no skin</li> <li>1/2 cup flour</li> <li>1 1/2 teaspoons salt</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon freshly ground pepper</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon paprika, or to taste</li> <li>3 tablespoons butter</li> <li>2 tablespoons olive oil</li> <li>1/4 cup chicken broth or water</li> <li>3 tablespoons fresh lemon juice</li> <li>8 thin slices of lemon</li> <li>3 tablespoons capers (optional)</li></ul> <h3>Prepping your Chicken</h3> Put chicken breasts between 2 sheets of waxed paper or plastic wrap. pound to flatten to about 1/4-inch. In a shallow bowl, combine flour, salt, pepper and paprika. dredge chicken breasts to coat well. <h3>Pre-Cook Chicken for Piccata</h3> Heat butter and olive oil in a large skillet. Saut&#233; chicken breasts in batches, about 3 minutes on each side. Drain off all but 2 tablespoons of fat. <h3>Combine Chicken with Piccata Ingredients</h3> Stir in chicken broth, scraping to loosen browned bits. Add lemon juice and heat through. Return chicken to the skillet with the lemon slices. heat until sauce thickens. Add capers. Serve with your favorite pasta and vegetables and enjoy. <br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Food.About.com. aboutvideo_139041076 Mon, 10 Jul 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://home.about.com/z/cg/vp.htm?ch=homegarden&l=homegarden/v/20&ap=1 Easy, step-by-step instructions for growing colorful perennials from seed. 2006 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Home/Gardening/Plants Home/Gardening/ Easy, step-by-step instructions for growing colorful perennials from seed. aboutvideo_6817 Sat, 27 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/The-Pattern-Maker.htm Use the Adobe Photoshop pattern maker tool to create patterns out of graphics and photos. Generate original designs and special effects for your projects. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Effects,Graphic Design,Design,Art 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Effects,Graphic Design,Design,Art Hi. I am Don Schechter for About.com Computing.<br><br>Today, I am going to show you how to create your own pattern to use with the pattern stamp tool in Adobe Photoshop CS 2. <br><h3>Choose a Pattern</h3>First, open up Adobe Photoshop. Go to file, open, and pick the picture you want to take a pattern from. <br><h3>New Layer for Photoshop Pattern Maker</h3>Let's create a copy of this background layer. Go to the layers tab and drag the background layer to the create a new layer icon. <br><h3>Choose Area of Pattern in Photoshop</h3>Now you need to select the area from which you want to generate the pattern. Go to the rectangular marquee tool and click and drag a section to use. I just want to use this little area. Now go to edit, copy. <br><h3>Create Pattern with Photoshop Pattern Maker</h3>Under Filter, go to pattern maker. This brings up an entirely new screen. First you should click on the box next to use clipboard as sample. If you didn't copy a section in the previous screen, you can go the rectangular marquee here and make a selection. <br><br>Here, you can specify the width, height, and other options for the tile. Once you've made your decisions, click on the generate button. After a few seconds your new pattern will appear.<br><br>In the tile history region your pattern has just appeared. If you want to make any changes, just change whatever options you want and hit generate again. <br><h3>Manage Photoshop Pattern Maker Patterns</h3>You can scroll through the different tiles you made by clicking on these arrows. And you can click on the trash icon to to delete the current tile.<br><br>If you want to save this pattern click on the little disc icon next to this arrow. Now give it a name and click ok. If you just want to save a pattern for use later, just hit cancel to go back to your picture.<br><br>If you want to fill in this pattern over your entire picture, click ok. I don't want to cover it up so I will go to edit, undo. <br><h3>Use Photoshop Pattern Maker</h3>Now we're ready to use our new pattern. Go to the pattern stamp tool, go to the options near the top of the screen, click on the patterns drop down icon, and at the bottom is our new pattern. We can now paint with this pattern on this or any other picture. Just remember to hit save if you want to keep your pattern for later use. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_6277 Wed, 05 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Oxtail-Stew.htm This old-fashioned stew is from the days when every inch of the animal was used. This little-known cut of meat actually comes from beef and makes for an incredibly rich, tasty dish. oxtail stews,home cooking,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. oxtail stews,home cooking,videos Hi, I'm Chef John Mitzewich for About.com. Today we're making a very old-fashioned recipe, and it's called oxtail stew. <h3>Definition of Oxtail </h3> Now first of all, no oxen were harmed in the filming of this video. Those are actually cow tails. So they're not ox, they just call them oxtails. <br><br> We need 2 pounds of oxtails. I guess it's a marketing thing; people wouldn't buy cow tails. <h3>Brown the Oxtails</h3> So, we're going to take a tablespoon of oil, and we're going to brown those oxtails over medium-high heat, as brown as you can get them. About 10 minutes. They are kind of oddly shaped, so move them around so they brown on all sides. <h3>Saute the Onions</h3> Remove them and add 1 chopped onion and 1/2 teaspoon of salt. We're going to saut&#233; the onions for about five minutes to get a little brown color on them and soften them up a little bit. <br><br> We're going to add 1 tablespoon of butter and 2 tablespoons of flour. So we're going to make a quick little roux here to thicken this really rich, really delicious stock. Reduce the heat to medium, and cook the flour for about three minutes. <h3>Combine the Oxtail Stew Ingredients</h3> Then we're going to add two cloves of minced garlic and give that a stir. Then 2 tablespoons of tomato paste, which will give it some color and some nice acidity. Then put the oxtails back into the pot. Add 1 quart of beef broth. <br><br> And our seasoning is very simple: 2 bay leaves, 1/2 teaspoon of dried rosemary, and 1 teaspoon each of salt and pepper. Give it a stir, and that's pretty much it. <h3>Simmer the Oxtail Stew</h3> We're going to add a little bit of water, about a cup to bring up the level to the top of the oxtails. Reduce the heat to low and simmer for 5 hours covered. It's a long time, I know. <br><br> In the meantime, we're going to get 2 pounds of potatoes ready; quarter those. Then get 1 cup of celery and 2 cups of carrots sliced. <h3>Combine the Vegetables and Oxtails</h3> Five hours later, those oxtails are fork-tender. It really does take that long. They are really tough pieces of meat, but the tougher the meat, the better the meat. Just like shanks, really great flavor. <br><br> We're going to add our veggies in there, and we're going to cook those potatoes, carrots and celery for about 30 minutes or until tender. <h3>Serve the Oxtail Stew</h3> When those are tender, skim off the fat. Turn off the heat, go ahead and add a 1/4 cup of parsley which will give it some nice color and flavor. <br><br> And then we're going to put it in a bowl and you're going to taste the most succulent, sweet, just sticky delicious stuff you've ever had. <br><br> This is such a great old-fashioned stew. Really, really good for you with all that collagen. You may think that is fat, but it's actually collagen, which is a protein that gives it that great stickiness. I think this is a recipe you can really get "behind!" Enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4139 Thu, 15 Mar 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/cocktails/Mint-Julep.htm The drink of the Kentucky Derby, mint juleps combine bourbon with sugar and fresh mint leaves, making them taste similar to a mojito. mint julep,recipe,cocktail,bourbon,mint,drink,kentucky derby 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. mint julep,recipe,cocktail,bourbon,mint,drink,kentucky derby Hi I'm Brice from Bubble Lounge in New York City for About.com Food, and today I'm going to show you how to make a mint julep. <h3>Mint Julep Ingredients</h3> To make a mint julep, you're going to need: <ul> <li> 4 oz. of bourbon</li> <li>2 tsp. sugar</li> <li>4-6 mint leaves</li> <li>soda water (an option if you prefer it lighter) </li> </ul> And a muddler to mix the sugar and the mint together. <h3>Muddle the Mint and Sugar</h3> So first you need to put the mint leaves in the mixing glass, at the bottom. Put 2 teaspoons of sugar on top. Muddle it, just to get the oil aroma of the mint and sugar mixing together. <h3>Mix in the Bourbon</h3> After a few twists you can add the bourbon, 4 ounces. Add the ice and shake it. So after shaking it you pour it straight into the Collins glass full of ice. And as we do it here at the Bubble Lounge we pour soda water on top of it to make it smoother and lighter and very refreshing. <h3>Garnish the Mint Julep</H3> As a decoration you can use a mint sprig, and voila. That's how to make a mint julep. Thanks for watching and to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3592 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/southernfood/peeling-apples.--9Y.--9Y.htm Demonstration of a quick and easy way to peel apples peel,apple,knife safety,apple skin,rind 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. peel,apple,knife safety,apple skin,rind Hi, I'm Ben Kurtzman for About.com Food and today I am going to show you a quick and easy way to peel an apple. <br/><H3>Prepare to Peel the Apple</H3>The first thing that you will need is a sharp paring knife. Now, before we continue, a quick safety tip: Whenever you are using a sharp knife you always want to cut with the blade facing away from you. If you are cutting with the blade toward yourself and you slip you will increase your chances of an accident. <br/><H3>Peeling the Apple</H3>Pick up the apple in your nondominant hand. I am a righty, so I will use my left hand to grip the apple. You want to get a pretty good grip on it so it provides resistance to the knife. Slice through the skin at the top of the apple, and then you can push the apple around the knife blade. By doing it this way you can remove the skin in large segments without taking too much of the fruit.<br/><br/>If you are the most perfect person in the world and the greatest apple peeler ever, it will all come out in one long slice. But, if you are like me it will probably take a couple runs to get the whole peel off. This way may take you a couple of tries to master, but I think that once you do you will see it really is the simplest way to peel apples, and the quickest too. You will thank me at Thanksgiving. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching, and to learn more, visit us on the Web at Food.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_17013927 Mon, 10 Jul 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://home.about.com/z/cg/vp.htm?ch=gadgets&l=gadgets/v/6&ap=1 We'll help you compare portable gaming systems side-by-side so you can choose the best gaming device for you. 2006 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Kids and Teens/Games/Computer and Video/Handhelds/ Games/Video Games/Console Platforms/ [INTRO] The portable gaming industry is so massive.it's expected to rake in 9 billion dollars worldwide this year alone. Staggering figures for an industry that's just a couple of decades old. Part of the reason for the big numbers is the wide variety of age groups playing video games and the exciting new games and devices attracting attention. [BODY] There are three major portable video game players on the market now: Game Boy Advanced SP, Nintendo DS and the Playstation portable. Let's start with the newest on the market, the Playstation portable or PSP. The Sony PSP brings a 3-D gaming experience to a small, lightweight handheld device. You can see it's about twice the size of Apple's iPod. The PSP plays games specifically made for the Playstation portable on yet another new Sony format, the universal media disc. There are about two dozen games to choose from right now, with plenty more on the way. The PSP also has loads of fun extras, like wireless Internet access and the ability to play feature films. You can also view your photos and play music stored on memory sticks. And, you can communicate with other PSPs without wires, so you can get your multi-player game on. The PSP costs $250. The Nintendo DS has a different design. It folds in two like a flip-top cell phone. It also has two, 3-inch LCD screens so you can see two different perspectives at the same time. And the really cool feature, instead of just pushing buttons to get to the next level, you can actually play the game with your finger. The DS has a touch screen that allows you to draw your way through the game, and control characters through touch or the stylus pen. The DS has about two-dozen games available that cost up to 50 bucks. But, you can also play 100's of Gameboy games on the DS. Plus, the Nintendo DS has multi-player gaming as well. The cost-about 150 bucks. Now, onto the granddaddy of portable gaming, the device that's been around since 1989--Gameboy. And, it still has game! The latest edition, the Gameboy Advance SP, is so tiny it will fold up and fit in your pocket! It offers the most games, including some video game classics like Super Mario Brothers. And, the Gameboy only costs about 80 dollars. For the phone-aholic, there's Nokia's N-Gage QD. This device will allow you to not only play games on the go, but you can also call mom. "Hi Mom!" (brett holding phone) We're still waiting for this little guy to climb the portable gaming ladder. The N-Gage costs about $99 bucks with a new service plan. [CLOSE] If you're debating which system to buy, my advice is to first figure out your budget. The PSP is a little pricier than the Nintendo systems. Also, make sure the games you're most interested in are available for the system you want to buy. I'm Brett Larson, About Gadgets. aboutvideo_3677 Fri, 23 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/presentationsoft/Family-Trees-with-PowerPoint.htm Want to share your family history and ancestry with future generations? Learn a unique way to create a personalized Family Tree in PowerPoint. Computing,Software,Programs,PowerPoint,Family,History,Ancestry,Share,Tradition 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Software,Programs,PowerPoint,Family,History,Ancestry,Share,Tradition Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing.<br><br> Today I'll show you how to create a family tree using PowerPoint. This can be something fun to do for family reunions and you can use the skills you learn to make other kinds of organizational charts. <br><h3>Choosing Chart Type</h3>First open PowerPoint. Type in a title slide and then add a new slide. Now under the Slide Layout sidebar on the right, choose a layout that will allow an organization chart. The icon looks like this. Click it and choose the organization chart option. Click OK. A chart will appear along with the organization chart toolbox. <br><h3>Starting your Family Tree</h3>In the top most box, type the name of whomever you would like to start your family tree. Now click Insert Shape in the toolbox and choose assistant for the person to whom they are married. If they have children write their names in the boxes below. <br><h3>Adding Family Members</h3>To add a box, simply select the box next to where you'd like to add one and click Insert Shape and choose Subordinate. <br><h3>Undo</h3>To delete a box, select it and press Delete. <br><h3>Extra Slides</h3>To continue the family line you might need to create another slide and follow the previous steps.<br><br>For example you could have a slide for every sibling s family. To add a box quickly right click on the box from which you would like it to stem from and choose Subordinate, Assistant or Co-worker. These are just names for how the boxes are connected. Subordinate would be someone's child. Assistant would be someone who married into the family, and Co-worker would be someone s brother or sister. <br><h3>Family Tree Layout</h3>On the organization toolbar, you can change the layout of the boxes. Select the topmost box and under the Layout drop down menu select a layout. You can also place the boxes where you would like by switching off the Auto Layout. Simply select the topmost box and under the Layout drop down menu select Auto Layout. <br><h3>Text Sizing</h3>The Fit Text button on the toolbar will make sure that all your text will fit within the boxes. <br><h3>Custom Design</h3>Finally, choose a background for your family tree slideshow by clicking the design button at the toolbar on the top of the screen. Design Templates will appear on the right sidebar. Choose one that suits your taste. <br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_5548 Tue, 06 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/weblogs/How-to-Increase-Blog-Traffic.htm Not happy with the number of hits your blog receives? If you'd like to increase your blog's audience, then try these simple tips that often help increase blog traffic. blog, traffic, views, page view 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. blog, traffic, views, page view Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to increase traffic on your blog. <br><br>After you have posted a few times on your blog, told all your friends about it, and emailed them your URL, you still have only a few hits. There are a few ways you can increase traffic on your blog. <h3>Update Your Blog Often</h3> First, see how often you update your blog. Typically the more often you update the more there is for your readers to look at. They will come back again and again if they like what you write. Write more often and you will soon have a following. <h3>Encourage Participation</h3> Take a look at your posts. There are tons of blogs on the internet that involve different topics that can be discussed. Blogs are appealing because there is reader participation. Does your content lend itself to conversation or discussion? Leave open questions or inquiry for feedback. You may get more hits because people will want to read your blog and comment on it. <h3>Increase Traffic by Commenting on Other Blogs</h3> Another way to increase blog traffic is to post comments on other people's blogs. This way you can write your URL address in your comment and other viewers will click it to see what its about. If you want people to click on your link you might want to post comments on blogs with similar interests and topics. <h3>Increase Traffic Through Social Media Sites</h3> If you write a particularly good post, you can submit it to social media sites like Digg.com, or netscape.com. Some of these social media sites are geared toward specific interests, for example, ScoreGuru is clearly for sports fans and is quite popular. <br><br>There are media sites for many topics ranging from medicine, and environmentally minded folks, to video game pros and business topics. On most of these sites, people vote on articles and the ones with the most votes are featured on the homepage. So don't expect a bunch of hits right away, but if your blog is compelling it will gain attention. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4904 Mon, 14 Apr 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/breadbaking/How-to-Make-Fougasse.htm Typically associated with Provence, fougasse is an herbed French bread molded into a beautiful leaf shape. See how to bake a fresh loaf of fougasse in your home. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Hi, I'm Natasha Levitan for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make fougasse bread. <h3>Fougasse Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 tsp dry yeast</li> <li>1/2 cup water </li> <li>2 cups flour </li> <li>1 tsp salt </li> <li>1 tbsp Herbes de Provence</li> <li>1/4 cup olive oil </li> <li>1 tsp sugar</li> </ul> <h3>Activate the Yeast</h3> Sprinkle the yeast into water in a small bowl, add teaspoon of sugar and stir to dissolve. Leave for 5 minutes until the yeast mixture is bubbly. <h3>Prepare the Fougasse Dough</h3> Mix the flour, salt in a large bowl. Make a well in the center of the mixture, then pour in the dissolved yeast. Use a wooden spoon to to mix the flour into the dissolved yeast to form a soft paste. Cover the bowl with a dish towel and wait until it rises for about 20 minutes. <h3>Mix in the Herbs</h3> Take the dish towel out and add the oil and herbes de provence to the flour well. Flour your working surface and knead the dough on it until smooth and elastic for about 10 minutes. Put the dough in an oiled bowl, turning it to coat evenly with the oil, then cover it with a dish towel. Let rise until doubled in size, about 1 1/2 hours. Punch down, then let rest for 10 minutes. <h3>Shape the Fougasse Dough</h3> On a lightly floured work surface, use the palms of your hands to flatten the dough into a tear shape, about 14in long and 3/4in thick. Oil your baking sheet or place a piece of silicon lining on it. <br><br>Form the dough into a leaf shape, and make three diagonal slashes across each piece of the dough. Pull out each slash gently with your fingers. Cover the shaped dough, then proof until an imprint of your finger springs back slowly for about 45 minutes. <h3>Bake the Fougasse Bread</h3> Preheat the oven to 400 degrees and bake for 40-46 minutes, until crisp and golden brown. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us at About.com. aboutvideo_5706 Mon, 01 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/candy/Fudge-Dipped-Marshmallows.htm Perfect for kids and adults alike, fudge-dipped marshmallows are fun and easy to make. Watch how to make them in your kitchen. fudge-dipped marshmallows,candy,desserts,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. fudge-dipped marshmallows,candy,desserts,videos Hi, I'm Kimberly Reiner of Momma Reiner's Fudge to talk about fudge-dipped marshmallows for About.com Food. <h3>Fudge-Dipped Marshmallows Supplies</h3> What you'll need to make fudge dipped marshmallows is:<ul> <li>a clean, dry work surface</li> <li>a tray, or you can put parchment paper down on your table</li> <li>marshmallows</li> <li>some type of stick, either lollipop sticks or barbecue skewers</li> <li>a bowl of <a href="http://video.about.com/candy/Chocolate-Fudge.htm">fudge</a>, piping hot, at approximately 234 degrees F</li> </ul> You can buy marshmallows at the store, or if you make your own marshmallows, I suggest that you cut them into one inch by one inch, into square shapes. <h3>Dip the Marshmallow in Fudge</h3> Mix your fudge, so that it is nice and thick and liquidy. Take your marshmallow, dip it in the fudge, and scrape it against the bowl so you have a flat edge. <br><br> Place it on your parchment paper, push the stick out, and let your marshmallow rest. <br><br> Dip your marshmallow, scrape it against the edge, and place it on the parchment paper. <br><br> Let it rest, trying not to make too much of a gooey mess on the sides of the marshmallow. <h3>Try Different Flavors of Fudge</h3> If you would like a variation, you can leave your marshmallows plain. Or while they're still hot, you can decorate them for the holidays. <br><br> You can use a different flavors of fudge, and you can do the same thing and have a different flavors of fudge-dipped marshmallows. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, go to food.about.com. aboutvideo_4999 Thu, 16 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/kidsclubs/How-to-Catch-a-Fly-Ball.htm Want to help sharpen your child's fielding skills? In this video, a coach shows you how to properly catch a fly ball. baseball videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. baseball videos Hi, my name is Keith Stephens for About.com Parenting. Today I'm going to show you how to teach your young athlete the proper way to catch a fly ball. Let's get started. <h3>Equipment Needed to Catch a Fly Ball</h3> Before we begin, here's what you will need:<ul> <li>a baseball</li> <li>a baseball glove</li> <li>a safe area to throw and catch</li> <li>someone to throw and catch with</li> </ul> <h3>Get Into the Proper Position</h3> First, let's look at the proper position to catch a fly ball. When the ball is hit directly at you, you will center yourself on the approaching ball. <br><br> If you are right-handed, you will want your left foot to be in front and the right foot will be back. <h3>See Where the Ball is Coming Down</h3> The natural tendency when the ball is hit is to immediately run in. Mistake. <br><br> Until you have a lot of experience, you need to hesitate just a moment before you move to see for sure where the ball will be coming down. <br><br> You will want to align yourself a step or two back further than where you believe the ball will come down, and then step forward and catch the ball. <h3>Catch the Ball With Two Hands</h3> As you catch the ball, you will use both hands. Your gloved hand will catch the ball, your other hand will protect it from coming out of your glove before you are ready to throw. <h3>Throw the Ball to the Target</h3> After you catch the ball, you will grab the ball with your throwing hand. As you step forward, you'll do what's called a crow hop. You begin the motion to throw the ball to the intended target. <br><br> If the ball is hit to either side, you will have to catch it backhanded or forehanded. Then you must begin your motion to throw to your intended target. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at parenting.about.com. aboutvideo_5347 Thu, 30 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/babyparenting/Prepare-Siblings-for-Pregnancy.htm Preparing siblings for a new arrival in the family is a delicate task. Learn how to prepare the whole family for a baby. parenting,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. parenting,videos Hi, I'm Kathy Moore for About.com Parenting. A pregnancy is a big change for the entire family, not just Mom's tummy. <br><br> This program offers some simple tips on how to prepare your young children for the arrival of a new baby. <h3>Tell Your Children First</h3> When you have decided it is time to share your happy news with the world, tell your kids first. Family and friends will want to talk to your children about it, so make sure they are in the know. <h3>Look at Old Baby Photo Albums</h3> As your pregnancy progresses, talk with your kids about when they were babies. Get out photo albums and watch home movies to relive their baby days. Explain to them what the baby will and will not be able to do. <h3>Encourage Kids to Talk to the Baby</h3> Later in the pregnancy, you can let the kids feel the movement of the baby. Encourage them to talk, read or sing to the baby. <br><br> Our kids enjoy helping to think of potential names for the baby and like to try them out and see if the baby kicks when hearing a certain name. <h3>Involve Kids in the Nursery Set Up</h3> Show your kids how large the baby is by comparing it to one of their toy dolls. This really helps them to understand what is going on inside your belly. <br><br> Involve your kids in the pregnancy and preparations for baby by having them help set up the baby's crib; preview the baby's car seat, toys, or books; and help sort baby clothes. <h3>Read Books With Your Kids</h3> Find some kid's book about becoming a big brother or sister to read with your children. <br><br> Reading is important to every child's development and books about babies offer a great opportunity to answer questions they might have and gives you a chance to talk about how the family's routine will change. <h3>Give Kids a Small Gift</h3> You might also give the kids a new toy or small gift just before or when the new baby arrives. I found some themed bed sheets for my kids as a way to remind them that they are extra special. <h3>Keep Kids Involved</h3> Most kids are eager for the baby to arrive. You can harness that enthusiasm into extra help for you, and a great learning experience for them. Just remember to make it fun, and keep them involved. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at parenting.about.com. aboutvideo_6271 Mon, 17 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/americanfood/Homemade-Steak-Sauce.htm Why pay money for a bottled steak sauce when you can easily make one that tastes even better at home? Check out this recipe for homemade steak sauce. steak sauce,american food,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. steak sauce,american food,videos Hi, I'm Chef John Mitzewich for About.com. No more bottles for us. Today I'm going to show you how to make you own homemade steak sauce. <h3>Steak Sauce Ingredients</h3> Now I don't want to name brands, but I think this is going to be just a good one that you are familiar with at the store. We're going to start this really simple recipe with:<ul> <li>1/2 cup cold water</li> <li>1/4 cup raisins</li> <li>1/2 cup aged balsamic vinegar. I say aged because it tends to be a higher quality. This is going form the base, the sweet and sour of this great steak sauce. The whole idea of a steak sauce is to bring out the meaty favor in whatever you serve this with. <li>1/4 cup Worcestershire sauce</li> <li>1/4 cup ketchup. It will give us a nice color and also sweetness and acidity.</li> <li>1/4 cup Dijon mustard. Don't substitute or you won't get the same product.</li> <li>a pinch of cayenne for some heat</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon black pepper</li> <li>1 garlic clove cut in half. Don't crush it; we just want a hint of garlic.</li> </ul> <h3>Combine the Steak Sauce Ingredients</h3> Give that a mix and we're going to put that on the stove on low heat and we're going to simmer that for 15 minutes. When I say low simmer, I mean we want the bubbles just breaking the surface. You don't want a rolling boil or it may get too thick. <h3>Adjust the Seasoning of the Steak Sauce</h3> After 15 minutes, we're going to strain this through a fine mesh strainer. Squeeze out all the juice. <br><br> Before you adjust the seasoning, you have to let this cool completely. If you season this hot, it will taste different when it's cold. <br><br> So, once it's cool, then taste for salt and pepper. I don't give amounts at this point because everyone's tongues are different. Tongues are like snowflakes. So adjust for your own taste. <h3>Serve the Steak Sauce</h3> Now, as far as serving suggestions, I really like this with steak. Look at how delicious that looks. Looks at that, let me try this&#133;mmm&#133;unbelievable. You can't fake pleasure-full steak sauce noises like that. <br><br> This is a really simple easy recipe to make, one that I think you'll enjoy making at home. I hope you give it a try. Enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5439 Tue, 11 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/greekfood/Watermelon-and-feta-salad.htm Unsure about combining feta cheese and watermelon? You'll be convinced after one bite of this salad. The creamy, salty cheese is a perfect match for the sweet, juicy melon. salad videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. salad videos Hi, I'm Chef John Mitzewich for About.com Food. Today we're doing a very unusual dish, but incredibly delicious and refreshing: watermelon and feta salad. <h3>Watermelon and Feta Salad Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you'll need:<ul> <li>1 seedless watermelon, sweet and delicious</li> <li>3ounces feta cheese, which is creamy and salty</li> <li>some aromatic fresh mint</li> <li>1/4 cup olive oil</li> <li>1/4 cup rice vinegar</li> </ul> <h3>Ways to Remove Watermelon From the Rind</h3> Now, this salad is incredibly delicious and very unusual. There are three ways we can liberate this watermelon from the rind. <br><br> There's what's know as the spooners. They don't mess around with any fancy tools; they just scoop it out. <br><br> There are the cubers - you might be a cuber. They cut off the rind and cut it into squares. It's kind of cool. <h3>Use a Melon Scoop to Remove Watermelon</h3> But I'm a traditionalist. I'm what's know in the business as a baller. I use a melon baller, melon scoop, the Parisian scoop if you what to be all French. I'm going to use the melon baller to do mine. <br><br> By the way, I'm not going to throw away the other melon I showed; I'll add all together. But, I think the melon baller looks nice, looks fancy. <h3>Make the Salad Dressing</h3> So, scoop out your watermelon and put it in a bowl, and you're going to add your dressing, which is so simple, it's unbelievably easy. <br><br> Add your oil, your vinegar, and a couple grinds of black pepper. Yes pepper - this is a savory dish. <br><br> What about salt? No salt, the feta is salty enough. Mix this all together and chill for 15 minutes, which will give you time to prep your mint and final plate. <h3>Cut the Mint Leaves</h3> Were going to chiffanade the mint, which means cut it into fine ribbons. Why didn't I just say that? Because I wanted to use the fancy French term. Like Steve Martin said, 'The French have a different word for everything." <h3>Combine the Watermelon and Feta Cheese</h3> Now we line our plate with light, crispy butter lettuce. Using a slotted spoon arrange the watermelon nicely on the plate. <br><br> Then crumble over that delicious creamy sheep's milk feta cheese. The salty contrast with the sweet melon is unbelievable. <br><br> You have to try this. You have to taste this. I know it seems weird, but this will be the hit of the picnic. <h3>Add Fresh Mint to the Salad</h3> To finish were going with that aromatic fresh mint, which brings it all together. And a little more black pepper at the end so there's a little on the feta. <br><br> That is a superstar, cold summer salad. You're probably thinking, Does it taste as good as it looks? No, it tastes better! <br><br> Again, the reason it's so spectacular is the contrast between that salty creamy cheese and that sweet juicy watermelon. Give this a try. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com aboutvideo_4174 Tue, 26 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/thaifood/Quick-and-Easy-Pad-Thai.htm You can customize your favorite pad thai at home with this quick and easy recipe. Grab a box of rice noodles and get cooking! pad thai, thai food, recipes, videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. pad thai, thai food, recipes, videos Hi, I'm Gretchen Siegchrist for About.com Food, and I'm going to show you how to make pad thai. You may be used to ordering this dish in restaurants, but it is actually quite quick and easy to make at home. <h3>Pad Thai Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need a box of rice noodles, which are the base of pad thai. Next, you will need some vegetables. I am using red pepper, carrots, broccoli, green beans, and zucchini, but you can substitute whatever vegetables you like. <h3>Pad Thai Sauce Ingredients</h3> For the pad thai sauce, we will mix together:<ul> <li>1/4 cup fish sauce</li> <li>1/4 cup lemon juice</li> <li>3 tablespoons brown sugar</li></ul> You will also need oil for cooking, two eggs, and chopped peanuts and cilantro to top the dish. Lastly, you can add tofu, shrimp, or chicken. It is best if these are cooked ahead of time. <h3>Soak the Pad Thai Noodles</h3> Begin by soaking the noodles in a bowl of hot water for at least half an hour. This will make them soft and pliable. <h3>Fry the Egg</h3> Heat one tablespoon of oil in a wok. Crack the eggs into a bowl and beat them well. Add the eggs to the wok and scramble them until they are cooked. When the eggs are done, remove them from the wok. <h3>Stir Fry the Vegetables</h3> Now we will add a little bit more oil and put in our vegetables. Stir-fry the vegetables until they are almost done. Drain the noodles and rinse them with cold water. <h3>Combine the Pad Thai Ingredients</h3> Now we will add the noodles, the egg, the chicken and the pad thai sauce to the wok. Mix the ingredients together and cook the dish until everything is heated through and the noodles are soft. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6650 Wed, 11 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/celebritystyle/Get-the-Look--Twiggy.htm Mod is back, and it's Twiggy Two Thousand. Find out how to get a mod style with simple hair and makeup tips. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Hi I'm Kate McCarthy with About.com and today we're going to learn how to do a Twiggy-style look. <h3>Twiggy Hair Tips</h3> So the first thing you want to do is just brush through your hair. And then you're going to want to set it. You can use a hairspray but I prefer to take a little bit of mousse and put it into a spray bottle and mix it with water. It tends to work and hold a lot better than hairspray. So coat the whole head pretty good. And then you're going to take a rat-comb. You can use a full plastic one but I prefer the metal one so you can separate sections very, very easily. <br><br> So, Twiggy would normally have a pretty big puff at the crown of her head. So you're going to take small chunks at a time. And when you rat your hair, it's very important, a lot of people make this mistake - they keep the comb in the hair. And what you want to do is every time you rat down, remove the comb from the hair, and rat down again. And you know you have a good rat when the hair stands straight up. And you're going to continue to do that until you reach the crown of the head, which is basically right where the back of your head starts. And now you're going to grab the un-ratted pieces of hair from the front and cover the sections that you just ratted. That way it looks smooth and clean. <br><br> Now we're going to take our mousse and water again and spray. Smooth it out. And if you notice, Twiggy would always have the front pieces pretty slicked back behind her ears. And really pull the little pieces from behind your ears forward so they kinda stick out. And then really get the back with your hairspray or mousse spray. <br><br> Now to finish off the hair take some shine serum - it can be any brand that you like. Get some in your hand and lightly brush over your hair. You don't want to use too much because then your hair is going to look greasy. You just want enough to give a really nice shine. And it's also going to help keep the fly-aways down.And then comb through the hair one more time. And there you go - you have a very nice modern Twiggy look. <h3>Twiggy Mod Makeup Tips</h3> Now to finish off the look, if you want to go for that mod all-over look,you can just take some eye shadow, start off with a white base, and put it all over the eye. And then, you can take any bright color you want to use. Today I'm going to go with some orange and you're going put it in the crease. And then I'm going to take a lighter pink, and put it all over the lid and over the orange to kind of smooth everything out. <br><br>Now you're going to get some black eyeliner, and you're going to do a pretty thick line over the top. And don't line the lower lid - just keep it clean. Now we're going to do mascara, and use a black mascara, and you can really get in and coat those lashes. Same thing, keep the lower lashes clean. Then you're going to move onto the blush - use again a bright color. And just leave the lips glossy and nude - basic. <br><br> And now, here we have it: the finished Twiggy look. We have the hair, the makeup, and the fabulous dress, and she's ready to go out on the town and live it up like it's the mod-fashion world. <br><br> Thanks for watching, and to learn more visit us on the Web at About.com. aboutvideo_4342 Mon, 23 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Photoshop-Tags-and-Collections.htm Do you have hundreds of digital pictures but no way to organize them? Whip your photo collection into shape with tags and collections from Photoshop Elements. Photoshop Elements,photos,pictures,tags,collections,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Photoshop Elements,photos,pictures,tags,collections,videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to organize your photos using tags and collections in Photoshop Elements. <h3>Delete Unwanted Photos</h3> First, open Photoshop Elements, and click on the View and Organize icon. If there are any pictures you want to delete while you're organizing, right-click and choose 'delete from catalogue.' <br><br> A confirmation window will appear. If you want to delete that photo from your computer as well, click the checkbox. I still want it on my computer, just not in my catalogue, so I'll just click 'OK.' <h3>Add Tags to Photos</h3> Adding tags to your pictures makes them easy to find. On the right side of the screen there's an Organize toolbar. Select 'Tags,' if it isn't already selected. <br><br> You will see a list of default tags that you can use for your pictures. I'll go ahead and tag my favorite photos by dragging the icon to the photo and dropping it. <br><br> Now you can add a caption below your picture. If you email this picture, the caption is now part of the file and will also be emailed. <br><br> Under the Favorite tag, you can also choose different star ratings for your photos. Under the People tag, you'll notice tags for friends and family. Use the other tags according to your preferences. <h3>Select Categories for Photos</h3> I have a lot of pictures of skies, so I am going to make a separate tag for the sky photos. Go to 'new' under the Organize sidebar, and click 'new tag.' You can now select a category; I'll choose 'Places.' I'll name the tag 'Skies.' And you can also add a note, if you'd like. <br><br> The icon will be the first picture you place the tag on. You can edit the icon later, if you wish. Now I can look at just the sky pictures by clicking the box next to the tag. <h3>Organize Photos by Collection</h3> A collection is a more general way to label pictures. I would use this feature when I import pictures from an event to keep them grouped together. <br><br> Click on 'Collections' at the top of the Organize sidebar. Now click 'new' and select 'new collection.' I am going to create a collection for all my vacation pictures. Click 'OK' after you name your collection. <br><br> Now I'll drag the vacation icon to all of my photos that belong in that collection. To view all the photos in a collection, click the box next to the icon in the Organize sidebar. To go back to the catalogue with all your photos in it, click 'back to all photos.' <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_5205 Thu, 13 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/pregnancy/Chorionic-Villus-Sampling.htm Chorionic villus sampling tests the placenta for chromosomal abnormalities in a fetus. Learn more about CVS. chorionic villus sampling, CVS, placenta 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. chorionic villus sampling, CVS, placenta <h3>A Healthy Pregnancy</h3> During pregnancy, a woman's uterus houses and protects a developing fetus for about nine months. Within the uterus, the fetus is surrounded by a sac called the chorionic membrane. Special cells extend from this membrane into the placenta; these cells are called chorionic villi. <h3>What Is Chorionic Villus Sampling?</h3> Chorionic villi cells have the same genetic makeup as the growing fetus and can be analyzed to identify genetic and chromosomal abnormalities. This procedure is called Chorionic Villus Sampling, or simply CVS. <h3>Procedure for Chorionic Villus Sampling</h3> The placenta can be in several different locations within the uterus. Therefore, an ultrasound is performed to locate the placenta and determine the best approach for the procedure. A catheter is then guided through the vagina and cervix to the placenta. With suction from the catheter, a small piece of the placenta is gently removed. <h3>Getting Results of Your Chorionic Villus Sampling</h3> The chorionic cells are sent to a laboratory for examination and final test results can be expected in one to two weeks.<br><br>Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical aboutvideo_6888 Wed, 31 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Editing-in-Final-Cut-Pro.--44.--44.htm Learn how to edit movie clips together in a Final Cut Pro timeline so you can do your own professional-style video editing all by yourself. Computing,Gadgets,Software,Final Cut Pro,Editing,Movies,Videos,Film,Television 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Gadgets,Software,Final Cut Pro,Editing,Movies,Videos,Film,Television Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com computing. Today I'll teach you how to do basic editing in Final Cut Pro. Once you've captured your footage, your clips appear in the Browser Window. <br><h3>Basic Final Cut Pro Editing</h3>The basic method for editing is to highlight the clip, and drag it onto the timeline. <br><br>You can do this for how ever many clips you want. To watch our movie you need to move our play head to the beginning of the timeline and hit the spacebar key to watch the clips. However, we want to trim our clips before we drop them on the timeline. So let's delete them. I'll select the clips and hit delete. <br><h3>Final Cut Pro Log</h3>I'll select our first clip and double-click it. The video now appears in the Viewer Window. Here we have play controls. I can press the play button, scrub frame by frame by clicking the jog wheel and dragging. Or I can skip ahead by clicking the viewer timeline. This is where I want the clip to start. <br><h3>Marking in Final Cut Pro</h3>I'll click the Mark In icon, or click the letter i for a shortcut. Now I'll create an outpoint by moving the play head to the appropriate spot. And click the Mark Out icon, or press the letter O for a shortcut.<br><br>Now I'll drag the clip from the viewer to the timeline. You can also drag the same clip from the browser.<br><br>And I'll quickly doubleclick my second clip. Set Mark In and Mark Out, points and drag it to the timeline. <br><h3>Final Cut Pro Insert and Overwrite Edits</h3>Let's say we want to insert a third clip in between these on the timeline. First set the playhead to where you want to insert the new clip. Then double click a third clip, I'll set an In and Out point, and drag the clip to the playhead. You should see an arrow pointing down. If you release the clip it'll drop it and overwrite anything in it's way.<br><br> I'll hit Edit, Undo. <br><br>If you click and drag it down and slowly move the mouse until you see the arrow pointing right, this means that when I drop the clip, it'll shift everything from the playhead on right, and no footage will be erased.<br><br>And those are the basic ways for editing clips on a timeline. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com.<br> aboutvideo_3588 Fri, 26 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/shortbread.htm Shortbread makes a delicious breakfast or coffee treat. See how shortbread is prepared from start to finish. shortbread,ingredients,easy,recipe,snack,treat,sweet,dessert,breakfast,coffee 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. shortbread,ingredients,easy,recipe,snack,treat,sweet,dessert,breakfast,coffee Hi. I'm Camila De Onis for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make shortbread. <br/><br/><H3>Shortbread Ingredients</H3> Here are the ingredients for shortbread. You're going to need: <ul> <li>1 stick of butter</li> <li>3/4 cup salted mixed nuts </li> <li>1/3 cup sugar</li> <li>1 cup flour</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon of vanilla extract</li> </ul> <H3>Prepare Shortbread Dough</H3> First, I'm going to preheat my oven to 375. Then I'm going to put one stick of butter into a medium sized bowl and add 1/3 of a cup of sugar. Next I'm going to take a wooden spoon and start mixing it together. It takes a little patience to have the sugar combine with the butter. <br/><br/>After a few minutes it's going to turn creamy, and then you know you're ready to add your flour and vanilla. This is the texture you want before you add the flour and the vanilla. So I'm pouring my one cup of flour into the bowl and I start mixing. Now I'm going to add half a teaspoon of vanilla extract. Now stir just a little bit. The next step is that we're going to be mixing with our fingers so make sure you wash your hands. <br/><br/>Whenever I have to make dough I always feel in the first few minutes that I'm not doing it right, but after a few minutes it turns into a soft dough. <H3>Pan Greasing Tip</H3> I often will use the wrapper of the butter to grease the pan. That way I don't have to waste paper towels. <br/><br/> <H3>Add Shortbread Dough to Pan</H3> So now I've greased my pan and I'm going to transfer the dough and start pressing down gently with my fingers to form an eight-inch square. Next I'm going to add mixed nuts. This is totally optional, so if you don't like nuts you don't need to do this. But I do suggest adding salt because what makes this really good is the mix of salty and sweet. I'm going to gently pat this down, and sprinkle one tablespoon of sugar. <br/><br/> <H3>Bake the Shortbread</H3> So I'm all set to put my shortbread in the oven at 375. I'm going to leave it in for about 20-25 minutes or until it's a light golden brown. I'm going to let my shortbread cool for about 10 minutes. <br/><br/> <H3>Cut and Serve</H3> You can cut your shortbread any way you like. I decided to go length-wise and cut it into three rows. So there you have it, shortbread. I like mine with coffee in the morning, but it's really great for any time at all. <br><br>Thanks for watching, to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com aboutvideo_6893 Fri, 02 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/pcsupport/IDE-Harddrive.htm DDo you need more drive or storage space in your computer? Learn how to install an IDE hard drive in a desktop PC in just a few simple steps. DIY,Computing,Gadgets,Computer Hardware,IDE Hard Drive,Disk Space,Drive Space 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. DIY,Computing,Gadgets,Computer Hardware,IDE Hard Drive,Disk Space,Drive Space Hi. I am Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I am going to show you how to install a hard drive in a desktop PC. It is really easy to do and all you need is the hard drive and a screwdriver. <br><h3>Before You Install an IDE Hard Drive</h3>To get started, power down the PC and pull the power cord. The cases of computers may vary. To remove the case you may need to remove the back screws. With some cases all you need to do is push a button and pull off. <br><h3>Setting the Jumper</h3>Now we need to set the jumper on the back of the new hard drive. If you are going to have just one hard drive connected to the IDE cable, set the jumper on the cable select option. <br><h3>IDE Hard Drive Installation</h3>Consult the hard drive's user manual. Push any cables out of the way and gently slide the hard drive in. Some cases have rail mounts while others just have the hard drives screw directly into them. All I need to do is screw it directly in. <br><br>Now we need to plug in the 4 pin power connector. There are usually a few of them free. Take one and attach it. Now take a free IDE cable the long ribbon and connect it to the hard drive. <br><h3>After You Install an IDE Hard Drive</h3>Slide your case back on and don't forget all your screws. Installing anything in a computer is really not that hard to do. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_5354 Mon, 31 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/Classic-Holiday-Fruitcake.htm Filled with fruit, sugars, and spices, this classic fruitcake is a delicious addition to any dessert table. For extra flavor, wrap and store it in a brandy-soaked cheesecloth. fruit cake,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. fruit cake,videos Hi, I'm Heidi Dehncke-Fisher, and welcome to About.com. Today I am going to make the holiday classic, fruitcake. <br><br> Fruitcake originated in the Mediterranean around Roman times and has enjoyed worldwide popularity ever since. <h3>Fruitcake Ingredients</h3> To make my holiday fruitcake, you will need:<ul> <li>3/4 pound dates, finely chopped</li> <li>1/2 pound raisins</li> <li>2 pounds fruit and peel mix</li> <li>1 cup brandy</li> <li>1 cup butter</li> <li>1 lemon, grated rind and juice</li> <li>1 3/4 cups light brown sugar, firmly packed</li> <li>4 eggs</li> <li>3 cups flour, sifted</li> <li>1 teaspoon baking powder</li> <li>1 teaspoon cinnamon</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon salt</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon baking soda</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon nutmeg</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon allspice</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon cloves</li> <li>1/2 pound salted walnuts, coarsely chopped</li> </ul> <h3>Soak the Fruits in Brandy</h3> Combine the dates, raisins, citron, orange peel, cherries, pineapple, and lemon peel. Add brandy and let the fruits stand, covered overnight. <h3>Combine the Butter, Sugar, and Eggs</h3> Cream the butter with juice and grated rind of one lemon. Gradually add the light brown sugar, and beat the mixture until it is light and fluffy. <br><br> Beat in the eggs, one at a time, beating well after each addition. <h3>Add the Flour and Spices</h3> Sift the flour with the baking powder, cinnamon, salt, baking soda, nutmeg, allspice, and cloves. <br><br> Add the flour to the creamed mixture with the walnuts and the brandied fruit, undrained. Stir the batter with a wooden spoon or with the hands until the fruits are thoroughly distributed. <h3>Prepare the Fruitcake Pans</h3> Butter two bread baking pans, 9&#215;5&#215;3 inches. Line them with wax paper and butter the paper. <br><br> Pour in the batter, pressing it down firmly in the middle and at the corners. Put a shallow pan filled with hot water on the bottom of the oven beneath the cakes. <h3>Bake the Fruitcake</h3> Bake the cakes in a slow oven (300 degrees F) for about 2 1/2 hours, or until they test done. <br><br> Cool the cakes in the pan for 30 minutes, then transfer them to racks, and peel off the paper. <h3>Store the Fruitcake</h3> When the cakes are thoroughly cool, wrap them in cheesecloth soaked with brandy and store them in tightly covered containers. <br><br> Moisten the cloths from time to time with brandy and let the cakes age for at least one month. Anything this good is worth waiting for <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more visit us on the web at about.com. aboutvideo_6848 Tue, 20 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/TEXT-BLENDING-IN-PHOTOSHOP.htm Use Adobe Photoshop to create text with a sand-like texture, using the same displacement effect design pros use to blend text or objects seamlessly into picture backgrounds. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Text Effects,Text,Graphic Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Text Effects,Text,Graphic Design Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll teach you how to use displacement maps to seamlessly blend text and objects into backgrounds. Displacement maps are a useful tool for helping to wrap text or objects into backgrounds. <br><h3>Sand Texture</h3>I've already opened Photoshop and I'll start by opening a texture to use for displacement. So I'll click File, open, and select my texture. This is a picture I took of sand. You can use anything you want to displace text, but keep in mind that a picture with a lot of random objects won't displace properly. <br><h3>Setting your Texture Contrast</h3>To get started I'm going to create a displacement map from this image. To do this I'm going to click on the Channels palette and click on each individual channel until I find the one with the most contrast. The channel with the most contrast will give me the best displacement map. For this image the blue channel has the best contrast. Next I'll make a document from this channel by right clicking on the channel, ctrl click on the mac, and selecting duplicate channel. This brings up the duplicate channel box. <br><br>Under Destination, Document, select new. Click OK. This creates an untitled file. <br><h3>Blur Effect</h3>Go to Filter, Blur, and select Gaussian Blur. I'll blur the image about .5 and hit OK. <br><h3>Combining your Layers</h3>Now I'll save this as a file named displacement by going to File, Save As and naming it displacement. Close the file and go back to your original file. Under channels click the top RGB channel to activate all the channels, and then click on the layers tab to bring up your layer palette. <br><h3>Entering Text</h3>Now select the, Type tool and pick a point in the middle of your picture to write out a word. <br><br>I'll type out the word SAND. Don't worry about the color, we can change it later. Now we re ready to displace the word. Make sure your text layer is selected and go to Filter, Distort, Displace. Photoshop pops up a warning that you're about to Rasterize the text, click, OK. <br><h3>Using Displacement Map</h3>Now a box pops up asking us to choose our displacement map. Go to the directory where you saved your displacement file, select it, and click open. <br><h3>Final Touches</h3>Our text file has been displaced with the files texture, but it doesn't blend in seamlessly. To help it blend in I'll change the blending mode on the text layer to overlay. The blend is much better, but still a little harsh. Lower the opacity on the text layer a little to help blend the text. I'll lower mine to about 70. And that's it. We've managed to realistically displace our text to blend it into a background. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_4874 Mon, 16 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/bbq/How-to-Grill-Asparagus.htm Perk up your meal by tossing fresh asparagus on the grill. Watch how to properly prepare asparagus on an outdoor grill. grilling,cooking videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. grilling,cooking videos Hi, I'm Derrick Riches for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to grill asparagus. <h3>Prepare the Asparagus</h3> Boiling asparagus can be a waste of flavor. Grilled asparagus however is a different story. <br><br> Cut off dry ends of the asparagus about half an inch. Next soak the asparagus in cold water for 30 minutes. <h3>Grill the Asparagus</h3> Place the asparagus on a clean grill surface. Be careful not to let them fall through. Turn and roll perpendicular across the grill, and continue cooking for another five minutes. <br><br> Be careful not to over cook or let the ends of the asparagus burn. And that's how you grill asparagus. <br><br> Thanks for watching, to learn more visit us on the web at food.about.com. <br><br> <b>Shopping List</b><br> For this recipe, you will need asparagus, cold water, a large bowl, and a knife. aboutvideo_3604 Thu, 08 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/landscaping/planting-shrubs.htm Demonstration of how to plant a shrub in your yard shrub,yard,plant,bush,landscaping,summer,outdoor,garden 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. shrub,yard,plant,bush,landscaping,summer,outdoor,garden Hi, I am Charlie Siegchrist for About.com Home and Garden, and today we are planting a shrub. The tools you need for this project are a round point shovel, standard steel garden rake, and water. <br/><H3>Digging a Hole for the Shrub</H3>We want a hole this deep, just the height it grew at the nursery, and twice as wide as the root ball. The first maneuver is to slice the sod around the plant. We will set the plant aside. Always handle the plant by its container. If you grab the plant and pull up you stress the connection between the plant and its roots, whereas if you pick it up by the burlap you are cradling it as you lift it.<br/><br/>Now just take a thin under cut of that sod, and lift it like a scalp and deposit it in the wheelbarrow. We are cutting off the roots just below the soil surface. You like to have a professional looking job, so plunge the shovel in vertical. So you get a nice clean wall on the edge of the hole. <br/><H3>Placing the Shrub in the Ground</H3>So we now have our hole excavated to the depth of the root ball and twice the diameter. All the soil taken out of the hole is in the wheelbarrow, neat and tidy -- and that we blend with the shovel just to get it into a fine, easily dispersed consistency. <br/><br/>With the plant in the hole, the burlap is either untied or cut away then rolled down as far on the sides of the root ball as is practical without disturbing the roots. You want to maintain the integrity of the root ball. And then we are ready to start backfilling the hole. <br/><H3>Covering the Shrub With Soil</H3>Sop that first batch of soil we installed we can rake around, and get the hole half filled. At this point the plant gets a complete saturation. What we want to do is avoid any air pockets in the soil. We want to make sure we have excellent soil condition -- uniform consistency, not aerated -- all around the plant. <br/><H3>Water the Shrub</H3>Our final maneuver is to take the loose garden soil and fill in all around. What we want to do is create a little moat around the plant so that its subsequent watering can be done easily. Rather than dump this whole pail in at once, you want to take it slow, a little bit at a time, and keep coming until you get to the point where things might overflow. <br/><br/>That, other than the final cleanup, represents the end of the sport of shrub planting. Thanks for watching. To learn more about shrub planting, visit us on the Web at homegarden.about.com. aboutvideo_6987 Wed, 14 Mar 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homerepair/Tuck-pointing-basics.htm Learn how to fix your home's brick walls with a technique called Tuck Pointing. tuck,point,basic,home repair,fix,brick,wall,mortar 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. tuck,point,basic,home repair,fix,brick,wall,mortar Hi I'm Steve Crider for About.com Home. You know if you live in a brick house, chances are that sooner or later you're going to find out that brick is low-maintenance, not no-maintenance. <h3>Brick Wall Mortar</h3>Over time, the mortar starts to come out of these brick joints and they have to be refilled in a process called tuck pointing. Once upon a time you had to mix your own mortar. Now it comes in these handy tubes.<H3>Prep the Brick Wall</H3>First clean out the old joint with a brush and make sure it's clean and dry. Next, load up the tube in the caulk gun and go to work. Make sure that joint gets good and full. You'll also need one of these- this is called a jointer. Ask for it at your local home store. They'll know exactly what you are talking about.<H3>Tuck Point the Brick Wall</H3>Next, pull the tool along that joint and get a nice concave finish. Once it's dry, it will a lot like this.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more visit us on the Web at homegarden.about.com. One down, and a lot to go! aboutvideo_5001 Fri, 17 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/kidsclubs/How-to-Shoot-a-Basketball.htm Does your budding athlete want to try out for the basketball team? Before that first practice, watch how to properly shoot a basketball. basketball videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. basketball videos Hi, my name is Keith Stephens for About.com Parenting. Today I'm going to show you how to properly shoot a basketball. Let's get started. <h3>Items Needed to Shoot a Basketball</h3> Before we begin, here's what you will need:<ul> <li>a basketball</li> <li>a safe level area with a hard surface</li> <li>a basketball goal</li> </ul> <h3>Hold the Basketball Properly</h3> First, let's look at the proper position in holding a basketball. <br><br> Hold the sides of the ball with both hands. Now, as you go to shoot, put your shooting hand on top of the ball and your other hand slightly on the side of the ball. <br><br> The side hand is very important in keeping the ball in your shooting hand. <h3>Release the Basketball</h3> When you release the ball, you want to have backspin on it. It's believed that the backspin will keep the ball on the rim longer in case of a miss, which allows your offensive rebounders more time to get to the ball. <br><br> It is easier to control your shot with backspin. <h3>How to Do a Set Shot</h3> We are going to look at the two most basic shots: the set shot and the jump shot. <br><br> The set shot is mostly used at the foul line. You square your body with the rim, you bend your knees, and as you straighten up, you direct the ball toward the rim, guiding it with your fingers. <h3>How to Do a Jump Shot</h3> The jump shot is the most common outside shot in basketball. When your ready to shoot, you square your body with the rim. As you jump into the air, you follow through with your shot to the goal. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at parenting.about.com. aboutvideo_6922 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/exercise/torso-stretch.htm Learn how to properly stretch your torso before and after working out to ease tension and prevent injury. torso stretch,upper body,cool-down,injury preventon,stretch 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. torso stretch,upper body,cool-down,injury preventon,stretch Hi, I'm Leslie Nesbitt for About.com Health. <br/><br/>Today I want to show you a great stretch for the sides of the torso that you can do seated, and you definitely want to do this after your workout when your body is warmed up. <br/><br/><H3>Positioning your Body for Torso Stretching</H3><br/>So we're going to take this leg and extend it to the side. Lift yourself up nice and tall so that your back and spine are tall and your abdominals are pulled in. <br/><br/><H3>Stretching Torso Sides</H3><br/>Now we're going to take the same arm as the leg. Reach out with these 2 fingers and grip that toe. If you can't get that far, that's okay. Just slide your hand underneath your calve or even slide your hand underneath the knee. <br/><br/>Take the first 2 fingers and wrap them around your toe in a yogi grip. We're going to take this hand and just lightly touch the back of the head. Now, as much as you can, open up that chest and shoulder toward the ceiling. So right away you're going to feel a great stretch here along the hips and the ribs. <br/><br/><H3>Advanced Torso Stretching</H3><br/>Breathing deeply, don't stop that airflow. Let's add 1 more element here. We're going to extend that arm up. The palm is facing down toward the outstretched foot. If you're able to, lift up and over. If you're a little more flexible you can probably touch the foot. If you're not so flexible just keep stretching, reaching tall and lengthening, increasing that stretch. Feels so great. <br/><br/><H3>Recovery</H3><br/>Come out very slowly, then of course you want to change sides. Re-lengthen that spine, reaching out, finding the appropriate place for you. Take this hand and lightly touch the back of the head, opening up here. So picture a light in the center of the chest where the heart is and you want to shine that light on the ceiling. <br/><br/>Add the arm, curving the elbow over, and you want this arm to line up with this ear. Hold the position with deep breaths for about 15 to 20 seconds, approximately 5 long, deep breaths. <br/><br/>To learn more, visit us on the Web at Health.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_5563 Wed, 02 Apr 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/browsers/Modify-Text-Size-in-a-Browser.htm Does the text on your browser screen make you squint? You can easily change the text size in Internet Explorer. See how it's done! text, size, explorer 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. text, size, explorer Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to modify the size of your text in the Internet Explorer browser. <h3>Why Modify Browser Text? </h3> Sometimes text on the screen seems too small or too large for that matter. Depending on your tastes you can change the size of the text so you can read easier. <h3>Change the Text Size</h3> When you've got Internet Explorer open, go up to the page drop down menu on the top right. Go down to text size and then in the submenu you will see some choices. By default the size is set to medium. To make the text larger, click larger or largest if you want it to be really big. If you want the text to be smaller, click smaller or smallest so you can fit more in a window. <h3>Adjust the Text Size</h3> However, if you choose smallest you might have a really hard time making out the words. You don't want to be squinting at your screen at all. The size of your text should be comfortable at a comfortable distance. The changes that you make will update right away, so make as many adjustments as you want so you can see your screen without squinting. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4850 Mon, 27 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/gardening/Grow-an-Avocado-Plant.htm Next time you eat an avocado, hang on to the seed because you can grow it into a fruitful plant. Try this fun project with your kids. gardening videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. gardening videos Hi, I'm Stephen Haskell for About.com Gardening. Today, I'm going to show you how to turn an ordinary avocado into a thriving plant for your home or garden. <h3>Location of the Avocado Seed</h3> The avocado is shaped like a pear. It has a leathery, rough skin on the outside, soft, edible green flesh on the inside, and a hard seed at the center. <br><br> People usually throw avocado seeds away, but we can use it to grow a whole new plant. <h3>Supplies Needed to Grow an Avocado Plant</h3> For this project, you will need:<ul> <li>a soft avocado</li> <li>small toothpicks</li> <li>a glass</li> <li>water</li> <li>potting soil</li> <li>a pot</li> </ul> <h3>Germinate the Avocado Seed</h3> First, we need to germinate the seed so that it sprouts a green shoot upwards and white roots down. <br><br> Stab the seed with three toothpicks, spaced evenly around the seed's middle. Next, secure the seed on top of the glass, propping the toothpicks on the glass rim. <br><br> Now fill the glass with water, so about an inch of the seed is submerged. Finally, place the seed somewhere warm with lots of indirect light, and not too much direct light. <h3>Water the Avocado Plant</h3> In about a week's time, you will see thin white roots growing down into the water. You'll also notice a green shoot cracking through the top of the pit's shell. <br><br> Always maintain the same level of water by adding fresh water to the glass as it evaporates. You don't need to replace, just add. <h3>Put the Avocado Plant in a Pot or Garden</h3> When the green shoot has grown about six inches long, it's time to plant it in a pot. <br><br> If you live in a warm climate, you can plant the avocado plant in your garden. Otherwise, it's best to keep it in the pot. <h3>Keep the Soil Damp</h3> Pot the plant, and water it every few days in small amounts. You want the soil to be damp but not wet. Lots of drainage is important here, so make sure your pot has holes on the bottom. <br><br> Don't count on producing a harvest of avocados, because it could take years for this plant to grow into a fruit-bearing tree. But enjoy the exciting process of turning an ordinary avocado seed into a beautiful addition to your home and garden. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at homegarden.about.com. aboutvideo_3600 Fri, 26 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/wordprocessing/header_183-mov.htm Learn how you can make your Microsoft Word documents look professional and polished by managing the header and footer content that frames each page. Microsoft Word,Word Processing,Headers,Footers 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Microsoft Word,Word Processing,Headers,Footers Hi. I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br/><br/>Today I will show you how to use the header and footer in a Microsoft Word Document. <br><h3>Finding Headers & Footers</h3>First open a new document by going to File, New. Or you can open an old document by going to File, Open, and choosing your file. I will open a pre-existing document. Once your file is open, go to View and click on Header/Footer. <br><br>A box will appear at the top and bottom of every page in your document. Also notice a toolbox will appear on your page. The rest of your document will go gray and you will not be able to change it while the Header and Footer toolbox is open. If you want to change something in the body of your document, click Close on the toolbox. <br/><h3>Format Headers & Footers- Page Numbers</h3>Now, to format your header and footer, click on Insert AutoText. A drop down menu will appear and you can choose from the list what you want on your header and footer. If you do not want AutoText, you can choose to put just the page numbers by clicking the Insert Page Number button. This will number your pages in the top left corner. <br><h3>Format Headers & Footers- Alignment</h3>If you prefer, you can change the alignment using the alignment buttons at the top of the screen. To delete anything in your header/footer, press the backspace key twice. <br><h3>Custom Numbering</h3>The Format Page Number button will be important if you do not want any header or footer on the first page of your document. Click it and a window will appear. Click the type of page numbers you want, then click on what page number you would like the counting to begin, (usually the second page, but it could start on the third or fourth depending on if you have a table of contents etc.) <br><h3>Date & Time in Headers & Footers</h3>You can also insert the Date or the Time with buttons on the Header/Footer tool bar. In addition, you can adjust your page setup with the page setup button. <br><h3>Tips for Working in Headers & Footers</h3>There is a button to show or hide your main body of text, if that is distracting to you while making your Header/Footers. The next button will switch between the header and footer of the page you are on. Notice that you can also use the last two buttons to switch to the next or last Header/Footer. Using Headers and Footers are important when writing long documents for school or work. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Computing.About.com.<br> aboutvideo_6339 Mon, 05 May 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/mobileoffice/How-to-Clean-Your-Laptop.htm Regular cleaning of your laptop computer is easy, and might save you tons of trouble in the long run. Learn how to clean your laptop with a homemade solution. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Weather, 90046, January 18... Five degrees and sunny? Ah. SEVENTY-five and sunny. Hey guys - Jonathon Stewart here for About.com. Most of us wash our heads at least every day or two, so why neglect your second head, or as you may refer to it, your laptop computer. But no matter what you call it, there's a very good chance it could use a good cleaning - check it out. <h3>Laptop Parts to Clean</h3> There are five general parts to your laptop that warrant cleaning: the case, the keyboard, the screen, ports, and vents. To do the job at home, you'll only need a few things: isopropyl alcohol, some purified or bottled water, a lint-free cloth, and some compressed air if you've got some. And of course a computer to clean - this is Bork. <br><br>Bork, like all laptops, is susceptible to dirt, dust, pet hair, and other gooky residue, and the more often you take a few minutes to remove all of it, the less likely you'll run into any sort of operational issues with your computer. Well, dirt-related ones anyway. <h3>Prepare the Laptop for Cleaning</h3> Start by shutting down your computer and detaching any cables or wires from the main body. Close the cover and use your lint free cloth to remove any obvious dirt or dust. Next, mix a 50/50 solution of isopropyl alcohol and water into a small spray bottle if you've got one - if not, just dab your cloth into the solution. (Make sure you do all of this away from your computer.) After all, the last thing you want to do is spill a bunch of liquid on your laptop while you're cleaning it. <br><br>For the next several steps, use the same alcohol/water solution, which evaporates quickly, and won't damage your computer. Just remember if you're dabbing the liquid onto your cloth, go easy so you don't drip any unintentionally. <h3>Clean the Laptop</h3> After cleaning the outer case, open your screen so that your keyboard is exposed. Wipe off all the dust you see, and pay close attention to the outer edges where your hands usually sit. Using a fresh cloth, do the same with your screen, being careful not to press down too hard and damage the LCD. If you have a can of compressed air, aim at the cracks between your keys on the keyboard - you might be surprised just how much gunk comes out. <br><br>After clearing the loose dirt, attack your keys with the cloth as well. Finally, close your case once again, and spray a few blasts of air into your ports and vents. Be sure to spray from an angle, especially with your vents, so that you don't inadvertently blow any dirt into your computer. <h3>Avoid These Materials</h3> Be sure not to use either paper towels, which can leave lint and other fibers, or solutions like window cleaner, which can degrade your display. You might also want to keep things like soda and babies out of the general vicinity of your laptop - although kids these days are whizzes on the internets. <br><br> Thanks for watching! To learn more, visit us on the Web at About.com. aboutvideo_3460 Wed, 27 Dec 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/greekfood/pitting-olives.htm Olives come in many delicious varieties at the grocery store, but most still have the pit intact. Learn how to remove the pit from olives in three different ways. food videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. food videos Hi, I am Ben Kurtzman for About.com Food and I am going to show you how to pit an olive. <br/><br/>You can find many different kinds of flavorful and exotic olives at your grocery store. The problem is, most still come with their pits intact. If you are going to use these olives in your cooking, you need to get the pit out of there. <br/><br/> <H3>Pitting Different Olives</H3> How easy or difficult this task is depends on how ripe the olive is. You should have less difficulty with a black olive, as opposed to a green olive, because they are more ripe. <br/><br/> <b>Method 1: Easy Olive Pitting</b><br/>The first thing you can do is to try to squeeze the olive between your thumb and forefinger, and maybe the pit will pop out. <br/><br/> <b>Method 2: Pitting Difficult Olives</b><br/>If the pit does not come out easily when you squeeze the olive, try this next method. Place you olives on a cutting board, and then apply pressure with the blade of a large knife. This should separate the flesh of the olive from the pit. <br/><br/> <b>Method 3: Pitting Very Stubborn Olives</b><br/>Now if you are working with a particularly stubborn olive, take a paring knife and make an incision lengthwise around the olive. Then you can use your fingers or some other instrument to pry out the pit. <br/><br/>One of these three methods should work for you as a successful way to pit olives. Thanks for watching, and to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com.<br/> aboutvideo_6820 Mon, 03 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Photoshop-Pattern-Stamp-Tool.htm Photoshop's pattern stamp tool lets you paint with a pattern in one of the Photoshop libraries or with a pattern that you create. Learn how to use the pattern stamp tool to edit your photos. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Effects,Graphic Desi 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Effects,Graphic Desi Hi. I am Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I am going to show you how to use the pattern stamp tool in Adobe Photoshop CS2. This tool will let you paint with a pattern in one of the Photoshop libraries or with a pattern that you create. <h3>Photoshop Project for Pattern Stamp</h3> <br>First, open up Adobe Photoshop. If you have a picture you want to draw on, CLICK File / Open and select your digital picture.<br> <br>If you want to start with a blank page, CLICK File / New. Here you can give your new picture a name.<br> <br>You can specify the width, height and resolution of the picture.<br> <br>You can decide between different color mode options and what the background will look like. Here you can chose between white, another color, or a transparent background. These presets work for me, so I'll just click 'OK.' <h3>Find Photoshop Pattern Stamp Tool</h3> <br>On the left side of the screen is your toolbox. The pattern stamp looks just like a stamp. But be careful.<br> <br>There are two types of stamps the clone stamp and the pattern stamp. Click and hold down the mouse and make sure you choose the right one.<br> <h3>Photoshop Pattern Stamp Options</h3> Near the top of the screen are options for this tool. Here you can choose the size of the brush, how hard or soft the brush is and what kind of tip to use. <h3>Photoshop Pattern Stamp Mode</h3> There are a lot of options you can play with for mode. Mode stands for blending mode. Normal works for me. <h3>Photoshop Pattern Stamp Opacity</h3> You also have options for opacity, the flow of the brush, as well as airbrushing. <h3>Photoshop Stamp Pattern Picker</h3> <br>Click here to open the pattern picker. You can choose any one of these patterns by clicking on them.<br> <br>You can also click on this little arrow to choose another set of patterns. With this list you can also reset your pattern lists, load patterns you have created, and save a new pattern set. <br> <br>I'll load the color paper set. When I click on any set it'll ask me to either append this new set to the current set or replace the old set with the new one. I'll click okay to replace sets. Now I'll choose a pattern. Let's see what this looks like. <br> <h3>Photoshop Pattern Stamp Final Touches</h3> If I go back up to my options I can click on impressionist to give my drawing a softer look. <h3>Photoshop Pattern Stamp Undo Tips</h3> Finally, there's one last box to check, 'aligned.' If aligned is checked then if you release the mouse and then start painting again, it remembers where you left off.<br> <br>Let me erase my picture and show you. See? If I uncheck it and draw a little, release the mouse and draw over it, see how it overlaps? There is a lot you can do with this one tool.<br> <br>Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_5197 Wed, 12 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/nutrition/Botulism.htm Botulism is a rare type of food poisoining with serious side effects. Learn how to recognize the symptoms of botulism. botulism, food poisoning, botulism symptoms 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. botulism, food poisoning, botulism symptoms <h3>What is Botulism?</h3> Botulism is a rare, but serious type of food poisoning caused by an organism called Bacterium clostridium. The organism generally exists in a dormant state as a spore. In conditions of low oxygen and acidity, such as improperly canned food, it flourishes in a bacteria form. In high numbers it produces a powerful toxin.<BR> <h3>Contracting Botulism</h3> The toxin enters the body through contaminated food, though in the case of biological warfare, it could be inhaled. Once the toxin has passed through the stomach and reaches the intestines, it is absorbed into the blood stream. <BR><br> The toxin then leaves the circulatory system. At the point where a nerve joins a muscle, botulism toxin binds to the nerve ending and blocks normal signals for muscle contraction. This results in paralysis of the muscle. <h3>Symptoms of Botulism</h3> Symptoms develop in 1 to 3 days and include paralysis of the muscles that control vision, swallowing, and breathing. <h3>Effects of Botulism</h3> If untreated, symptoms can progress to respiratory failure resulting in death. Botulism is not contagious. If you believe you have been exposed to botulism, please contact your physician immediately. <br><br> Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_5251 Wed, 19 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/deafness/Hearing-Loss.htm Hearing loss has various causes. Learn more about the two different types of hearing loss. hearing loss, deafness, sensorineural hearing loss 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. hearing loss, deafness, sensorineural hearing loss <h3>How We Hear</h3> During normal hearing, sound waves travel through the ear canal and strike the eardrum causing it to vibrate. The eardrum is attached to three tiny bones in the middle ear. The last bone, the stapes, pushes on a fluid-filled chamber in the inner ear, called the cochlea. This fluid movement causes sensitive hair cells within the cochlea to bend. <br> <h3>What Causes Hearing Loss?</h3> When the hair cells bend, they generate an electrical signal that is sent to the brain. Age, disease, injury, or repeated exposure to loud noise can damage the various structures of the ear and interfere with hearing.<br> <h3>Types of Hearing Loss</h3> There are two specific types of hearing loss: conductive hearing loss, which is caused by a mechanical problem in the ear canal or middle ear that blocks the conduction of sound; or sensorineural hearing loss, which is caused by damage to the inner ear, auditory nerve, or auditory nerve pathways in the brain. Conductive hearing loss is often reversible; sensorineural hearing loss is not.<br><br>Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_17013940 Mon, 10 Jul 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://home.about.com/z/cg/vp.htm?ch=gadgets&l=gadgets/v/7&ap=1 Digital video recorders (DVRs) are changing the way people watch TV. Check out this comparison of the top DVRs on the market. 2006 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Shopping/Consumer Electronics/Video ? Arts/Television/Interactive/Technologies [INTRO] Whether you're working late, on vacation, or just out on the town, with today's digital video recording technology, there's no reason to miss your favorite TV shows. [BODY] Digital video recording or DVR enables you to record, pause, slow down, and even rewind LIVE TV. No need to endure anymore annoying commercials! Unlike the analog format you use with your VCR, a DVR records digital video and stores your shows on a hard drive instead of a tape. The hard drive comes in different sizes, the larger the drive, the more shows you can record, and the more you can record at a higher quality than the standard VCR. Generally, one gigabyte equals one hour of programming. So make sure you buy the size that fits your needs. DVRs also include some type of programming guide that allows you to choose what shows you want to record... up to several days in advance. If your two favorite shows are on at the same time, don't panic, new DVRs have the ability to record one channel while you watch another. Some will also allow you to record two programs at the same time. The two most recognizable brands are TiVo and ReplayTV. Both are separate boxes that hook up to your TV like a VCR. A monthly subscription will enable you to download information for your programming guide through a phone jack or the Internet. Both TiVo and ReplayTV work with cable or satellite. So, which is better? Well, it depends on what features are most important to you. TiVo has been praised for its simple interface and easy scheduling while ReplayTV is the choice for power users who will appreciate the progressive scan and wireless capabilities. If you don't want to fork over the cash for a set top unit, contact your cable company or satellite dish provider as they too may offer a DVR with many of the same features. Some DVRs even have built-in DVD recorders, which allow you to not only record your favorite shows, but also save them forever by burning them onto a DVD. [CLOSE] Whether you decide on TiVo, ReplayTV or your cable provider's service, expect to be wowed by digital video recording. It'll put 'YOU' in control of your TV viewing like never before. I'm Brett Larson, About Gadgets. aboutvideo_3465 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/kosherfood/matzo-balls.htm Matzo balls are usually eaten at Passover, but you can enjoy them year-round. Watch how to whip up fluffy matzo balls from scratch. matzo recipes, passover recipes, food videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. matzo recipes, passover recipes, food videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make homemade matzo balls. <h3>Matzo Ball Ingredients</h3> You will need:<ul> <li>4 eggs</li> <li>1/2 cup club soda</li> <li>3 tablespoons vegetable oil</li> <li>1 teaspoon salt</li> <li>a pinch of black pepper</li> <li>1 cup matzo meal</li> <li>2 tablespoons parsley</li> </ul> <h3>Tips for Fluffy Matzo Balls</h3> Start with four eggs. Some people say that separating the egg whites makes fluffier matzo balls. So, let's do that and beat the egg whites until they are stiff. Now let's add the yolks to the whites. <br><br> Another trick for fluffier matzo balls is using club soda instead of water. So now, I'll add 1/2 cup of club soda and 3 tablespoons of vegetable oil. If you d like a meatier flavor, you could use schmaltz or chicken fat instead of oil. <h3>Combine the Matzo Ingredients</h3> Next, add 1 teaspoon of salt and a pinch of freshly ground black pepper. Remember, you can always add more salt to the soup later. Lastly, add 1 cup of matzo meal. If you want to add a little color, chop up 2 tablespoons of parsley and add it to the mix. <br><br> Cover and refrigerate this mixture for about 1 hour. <h3>Form the Matzo Balls</h3> When the matzo balls are almost ready, bring about five quarts of water to boil. Take the mixture out of the refrigerator and set up a workspace so your bowl is next to the pot. <br><br> Rub vegetable oil on your hands; this will prevent them from getting to sticky. Now, gently form matzo balls with about 2 tablespoons of mixture. Remember that the balls will about double in size while cooking. <h3>Boil the Matzo Balls</h3> Carefully place the ball into the boiling water. Use a slotted spoon to reduce splashing. Cover and simmer the matzo balls for about 30 minutes. Try not to peek. <br><br> Remove the matzo balls with a slotted spoon. Serve them right away with soup, or store in the refrigerator in a single layer with a little water or broth. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3949 Thu, 12 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/busycooks/How-to-Safely-Use-a-Crockpot.htm Next time you make dinner in your crockpot, be sure to follow these crockpot safety tips. crockpots,crockpot safety,crocktip cooking, videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. crockpots,crockpot safety,crocktip cooking, videos Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you some important safety tips for when you're using a crockpot. <h3>Cook Food at a Safe Temperature</h3> The temperature should be at least 140 degrees. Food needs to cook at this temperature or higher to prevent the growth of bacteria. <br><br> Do not put frozen foods into a crockpot. All foods should be defrosted before cooking, so the temperature can reach 140 degrees as quickly as possible. <h3>Adjust Recipes as Needed</h3> Liquids do not boil away in a crockpot. So if you're making a recipe that wasn't specifically developed for the crockpot, you may need to use one-third to one-half less liquid. <h3>Do Not Lift the Crockpot's Lid</h3> Do not lift the lid to stir, especially if you are cooking on the lowest setting. Each time you lift the lid, heat escapes and you'll need to cook the meal longer. <br><br> To check progress without lifting the lid, spin the cover until the condensation falls off. Then it's easy to see inside. <h3>Throw Away Food if the Power Fails</h3> If the power goes out while you're cooking, throw away the food. It's no longer safe to eat, even if it looks OK. <h3>Store Food in a Separate Container</h3> Remove cooked food from the crockpot or liner before you store it. Because the liner is made of thick material, the food won't cool down quickly enough to prevent the growth of harmful bacteria. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4858 Fri, 17 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homerepair/How-to-Replace-a-Wall-Outlet.htm Is it time to repair a busted wall outlet or replace an old one? Watch how to perform this simple task quickly and safely. home repair videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. home repair videos Hi, I'm Isaac Stephens with About.com Home. Today I'm going to show you how to replace a wall outlet. <br><br> Whether you want to change out a busted wall outlet or just update your old one, I'm going to show you how quick and easy it can be. <h3>Supplies Needed to Replace a Wall Outlet</h3> Here are just a few items you will need:<ul> <li>outlet</li> <li>outlet cover</li> <li>flathead screwdriver</li> <li>Philips screwdriver</li> <li>wire stripper</li> </ul> <h3>Turn Off the Electricity</h3> When working with electricity, the first step is always to shut off the power to the circuit you're working with. <br><br> First, locate your fuse box and shut off the switch to the area you will be working in. <br><br> One way to make sure the power is off is to have an appliance plugged into the wall outlet you wish to replace. If the item shuts off then you know the power is disconnected to that area. <h3>Remove the Old Outlet Cover</h3> Remove the outlet cover with a flathead screwdriver. Then remove the two outlet screws. <br><br> Make a note where the wires attach to the old outlet because the new outlet will be wired the same way. <br><br> The easiest way to do that is to remove one wire at a time and attach the wire to the new outlet. <h3>Attach Wires to the New Outlet</h3> It's always best to re-strip the wire before attaching it to the outlet. After attaching wires to the new outlet, screw the outlet back into the wall box. <br><br> Place the new cover over the outlet and screw in with a flathead screwdriver. Turn the power back on and test the outlet. It's that easy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at homegarden.about.com. aboutvideo_3578 Fri, 13 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/carving-mov.htm Carving pumpkins is a seasonal tradition in many families. Learn how to carve shapes into a pumpkin freehand or using a stencil. pumpkin carving, Halloween, pumpkins, carve, video 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. pumpkin carving, Halloween, pumpkins, carve, video Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman, for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to carve a pumpkin. <h3>Choose a Pumpkin</h3> If you can, it's fun to pick your own pumpkin at a pumpkin patch. You can also get a fresh pumpkin at a market or farm stand. Choose a pumpkin with a bright orange color that has no bruises, soft spots, scars or mold. The stem should be attached and be dried or slightly brittle. <br><br> Sit up the pumpkin on a flat surface to see what it will look like on your display. Until you are ready to carve, keep your pumpkin in a dry cool place. <h3>Pumpkin Carving Utensils</h3> In order to carve, you will need:<ul> <li>a long thin knife</li> <li>an ice cream scoop</li> <li>a poking tool</li> <li> a saw knife</li> </ul> A beginner pumpkin carving kit will work fine, or you can get more professional tools at a hardware or craft store. If you are drawing freehand, you will need a crayon. If you want to use a template, have your drawing and tape ready. <h3>Prepare the Pumpkin for Carving</h3> First, put down newspaper. This will help with an easier clean-up. Now use the long knife to cut a large hexagon opening out the top of the pumpkin around the stem. As you cut, angle the knife so the piece removed will be cone shaped, this will prevent the top from sliding back into the pumpkin when you are done.<br><br>Remove the top and take out all the seeds with your ice cream scoop. You also may need to use your hands. If you want to put in a candle, be sure to scrape out a flat surface at the bottom. <h3>Carving Pumpkins Freehand</h3> Look all around the pumpkin and choose where you want to carve the face or the picture. If you are drawing freehand, take your crayon, and draw your picture. When you're happy with what your picture looks like, carefully cut along the lines. After you cut each piece gently push it out of the pumpkin. <h3>Carving Pumpkins Using Stencils</h3> You may want to use a picture or a drawing which is often referred to as a pumpkin template. Cut out the picture. Tape the picture onto the pumpkin. Use the poking tool to outline the picture on the pumpkin. <br><br>With one hand hold the picture steady against the pumpkin. With the other hand, poke the dots. These dots will act as a guide to help you cut out the pieces. <br><br>When you are done outlining the picture on the pumpkin, remove the paper and use the saw tool to cut along the dots. Gently cut along the dots for each piece. When you're done push out the pieces. With your knife, trim the sides of the picture to help the light come through cleanly. <h3>Preserving Carved Pumpkins</h3> Place your candle inside and display your pumpkin in a safe place. A cut pumpkin may last anywhere from 1 day to a week. Use a sealant such as petroleum jelly or a cooking oil to help lock in the moisture and prevent wrinkling. <br><br>Thanks for watching, to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3915 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Mushroom-Horseradish-Prime-Rib.htm This delicious prime rib is coated with a mushroom and horseradish crust, giving it a spicy and flavorful layer to compliment the juicy meat. prime rib,ribs,recipe,food,cooking,meat,dinner,holiday 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. prime rib,ribs,recipe,food,cooking,meat,dinner,holiday Hi, I'm Heidi Dehncke-Fisher, and welcome to About.com Food. Today I'm making a tasty prime rib. <h3>What is a Prime Rib?</h3> Prime rib refers to a roast cut from the small loin end, rib section of beef. It can be standing with the bone in or cut as a rib eye &#150; boneless. <br><br> If you use a butcher, only have them trim fat that exceeds a 1-inch thickness on the meat. The fat helps flavor the beef. The other flavor factor is how long the meat has aged. <h3>Determine the Prime Rib Servings</h3> To serve four people you will need one two-rib prime rib roast. Today I am making a three-rib roast. Usually one rib feeds two people, but I include the extra one in case someone wants a whole rib, like me. <h3>Prime Rib Ingredients</h3> To make my prime rib with mushroom-horseradish crust you will need:<ul> <li>1 3-rib standing rib roast, bone in (approximately 7 1/4 lbs.)</li> <li>1/2 cup of olive oil for the crust rub</li> <li>salt and pepper to taste</li> <li>3/4 of a cup of prepared horseradish sauce</li> <li>6 garlic cloves, chopped</li> <li>1 cup mushrooms finely chopped</li> <li>3/4 cup breadcrumbs</li> <li>1/2 cup of parmesan cheese</li> <li>4 sprigs thyme, chopped</li> <li>4 sprigs rosemary, chopped</li> </ul> Preheat your oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit. <h3>Prepare the Prime Rib Crust Mixture</h3> Mix and grind together the olive oil, horseradish, parmesan, breadcrumb, mushroom, garlic, and herbs, salt, and pepper until it has a pasty consistency. Coat the entire roast with this mixture. <h3>Cook the Prime Rib Roast</h3> Cook the roast for 15 minutes per pound for medium rare. The meat is medium rare when the meat thermometer reaches 135 degrees Fahrenheit and you can remove the roast from the oven and let it rest. <h3>Cover With the Prime Rib Juice</h3> The natural drippings from the meat make an excellent juice to pour on the finished plates &#150; "au jus," or "with juice." <br><br> Wow... that looks and smells incredible. Thanks for watching, and to learn more you can visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3652 Thu, 08 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/italianfood/Creamy-Risotto.htm An elegant comfort food, this creamy risotto is a warm and cozy dish for a cold day. risotto,rice,recipe,creamy,cheese,butter,Italian,creamy risotto 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. risotto,rice,recipe,creamy,cheese,butter,Italian,creamy risotto Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make a traditional creamy risotto. <H3>Risotto Ingredients</H3> For this recipe you will need: <ul> <li>3 tbsp. olive oil</li> <li>1 diced onion</li> <li>2 cups short grain Arborio rice</li> <li>1/2 cup dry white wine</li> <li>parmesan cheese </li> <li>2 tbsp. butter</li> <li>5 cups ready-to-serve chicken broth</li> </ul> <H3>Cook the Chicken Broth</H3> First place chicken broth in a heavy saucepan and bring to a gentle simmer. <H3>Saute the Onions</H3> On medium heat, in a separate saucepan, heat the oil and cook the onions, stirring frequently. Be careful not to let the onions brown, and if the pan seems too hot, lower the temperature a little bit. <H3>Prepare the Cheese</H3> While the onions are cooking, grate the parmesan cheese and measure out half of a cup to use later. <H3>Add in the Rice</H3> Next, pour in the rice and stir it into the onions. Keep stirring constantly for about 3 minutes, until you see that some grains begin to look translucent. <H3>Add the Liquids</H3> Now add the wine. Stir until the wine is absorbed, so you don t see any liquid sitting on top or under the rice. First add half of a cup of the simmering chicken broth to the rice mixture. Stir constantly, until the liquid is absorbed. Then keep adding more broth, about a cup at a time until it is all absorbed. <H3>Taste and Flavor the Risotto</H3> Taste the rice to see if it is done. It should be tender, but firm in the center. When the rice is done, remove the pan from the heat. Pour the grated cheese and the butter, and then stir. When the cheese and butter have melted, spoon out the risotto and serve.<br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6805 Tue, 04 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Wrap-Text-Effect-in-Photoshop.htm Wrapping text in creative ways adds a fun and playful quality to a picture. Learn how to wrap text around an object using three different effects in Adobe Photoshop. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Graphic Design,Desig 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Graphic Design,Desig Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I am going to show you how to take text and wrap it around an object using Adobe Photoshop. There are actually a few ways to do this, some easier than others. Here is an easy way. <h3>Add Text to a Photo</h3> <ul> <li>OPEN Photoshop</li> <li>CLICK File / Open</li> <li>SELECT Picture</li> <li>CLICK New Layer icon on the bottom right of the screen. </li> <li>CLICK Window / Character and choose font, character size and color (this can be changed again at any time)</li> <li>CLICK Text Tool in the toolbox (left) </li> <li>CLICK on you image and type text</li> <li>CLICK the Move tool then CLICK and DRAG text to where you want it </ul> Don't be afraid to try something and go to File/ Edit / Undo if you don't like it. <h3>Wrap Effect 1: Bending Text</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK Layer / Type / Warp Text</li> <li>CHOOSE option from the Style pop-up menu. </li> </ul> <h3>Wrap Effect 2: Horizontal and Vertical Text</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK Arch</li> <li>CLICK "Horizontal" or "Vertical" box</li> <li>ADJUST Horizontal and Vertical Distortion in their respective sliders</li> <li>ADJUST Bend Slider to change bend</li> </ul> <h3>Wrap Effect 3: Rotating Text </h3> <ul> <li>CLICK File / Edit / Transform / Rotate</li> <li>CLICK and DRAG outside of text box to rotate</li> <li>DOUBLE CLICK inside box to keep rotation</li> </ul> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6665 Wed, 02 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/tattoo/How-to-Choose-a-Tattoo-Shop.htm Thinking about getting a tattoo? Before you go and get inked, know what to look for in a tattoo shop by taking a look at important tips from the pros. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Hey - I'm Berry Konijiski and I'm with Artistic Skin Designs and this is About.com and we're going to talk about what to look for in a tattoo shop. <h3>Check the Tattoo Shop Appearance</h3> If I was going into a shop, the first thing I would do is appearance - the very, very first. When you're looking for a shop, you want to definitely go in and make sure it's a nice clean studio and that they're certified with the local board of health, which do inspections to make sure everything is up to par. If it smells bad, or looks bad, I would definitely turn around and leave. <br><br> That means no food, no drink, no cosmetics, no animals, anything. No smoking. And make sure that's always kept clean - you want to bag your machines, keep your area clean. After one customer is done, you dispose of everything that's disposable - you get rid of it, you throw it in the trash. And then you clean your room with betacide and let that soak, and you just want to make sure it's safe and well-lit for the next person. <h3>Ask About Tattooing Equipment</h3> Everyone has their own particular equipment they think about - needles and tubes, the machines, power supplies, and supplies - all of our razors are throwaway razors. The ink-caps are throw away, the aprons and baggies are all one single use. The inks are different - a lot of them are organic inks that are safe that they use. They always pout it into a cup and it's thrown away when they're done. <h3>Find Tattoo Shops Through Referrals</h3> Referrals are really important to me because that's how you build up your clientele base. If you're not very good, and you're not good people, people aren't going to refer you. And sooner or later, if you're not any good - if you're bad with people - they'll know that. <h3>Note the Tattoo Artist's Demeanor</h3> You should look for people being courteous, kind, and help you with any kind of questions you might have concerning your tattoo. I would think that they'd be very knowledgeable if you have questions about your after care and that type of thing. And they should be willing to work with you and draw, and be able to help you out with whatever you want. <h3>Don't Assume Anything</h3> When you're looking for a shop, it's really important not to assume anything until you go in. Check for it being clean, and well lit, and they have really nice artwork, and seem compassionate about what they do, then I would say that would be the way to go. <br><br> Thanks for watching! To learn more, visit us at About.com. aboutvideo_6924 Mon, 22 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/exercise/bicep-moves.htm Learn the proper technique for quick and effective bicep toning and great-looking, stronger upper arms. Biceps,bicep toning,bicep workout,upper arms,free weights 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Biceps,bicep toning,bicep workout,upper arms,free weights Hi, I'm Leslie Nesbitt for About.com Health. Today we're looking at bicep curls. <br/><br/><H3>Bicep Workout Position</H3><br/>Now I'm holding a pair of 5-pound weights. If you're a little more advanced, you could go with 8 or 10-pound weights. If you're a beginner, don't worry, just make a nice, tight fist and follow with these bicep curls that I will show you.<br/><br/><H3>Bicep Curls</H3><br/>Now we're going to start with a bicep curl up to the shoulder, control the drop- don't let those weights swing down on their own. Also, you want to pin those upper arms in next to the ribs. A common mistake with these bicep curls is lifting forward with the elbows. That becomes a shoulder move- we want to isolate that bicep muscle. <br/><br/>So, breathing, 15 reps if you're just starting. Two times that for intermediate, and three times that for advanced. <br/><br/><H3>Bicep Curl Variation</H3><br/>Let's move on- We're going to roll out with the shoulders, pinning those elbows in again, squeezing up and down. Same bicep curl, just adding a little bit of deltoid work here, breathing as you go. <br/><br/>Then, let's finish up. Knuckles up and in against the thighs and we're going to lift, opening up with those elbows. Knuckes coming up and into that underarm area and controlling the drop. Don't let those weights drop on their own. That can be tough on the shoulder.<br/><br/>To learn more, visit us on the Web at Health.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_6830 Mon, 22 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/exercise/triceptoning-mov.htm Learn how to strengthen and tone your triceps muscles with these easy and effective triceps exercises. triceps,arm strengthening,arm toning,exercise 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. triceps,arm strengthening,arm toning,exercise Hi, I'm Leslie Nesbit for About.com Health. <br/><br/>Tricep toning is definitely a great area to work on. It's this part right here, that sometimes flaps in the breeze when waving goodbye to friends. <br/><H3>Positioning to Target your Triceps</H3>So let's tone it up today. I'm going to show you 3 different variations on tricep toning. Now I have 5 pound weights. You may have less, you may have more. I'm going to sit myself down on a workout step. You can use a chair or you can use a staircase in your home. It doesn't matter. <br/><H3>Triceps Workout Move 1</H3>So first, we're going to pull ourselves nice and tall. The back is nice and tall, the abs are pulled in tight to support. We're going to shoot those arms up overhead. Line those arms up with the ears so your biceps should be right in toward your ears and you're going to drop the thumbs straight back and up again. So the elbows continue to point to the ceiling. Don't let those shoulders move. <br/><br/>I'm going to show you the wrong way to do this- that would be here and here. We're going to keep those shoulders stationary so you can bend back and press straight back up. <br/><H3>Advanced Triceps Workout Move</H3>Now if you want to you can keep the weights together and press back and do the same thing, dropping straight back and up again. Go for 15 and go for heavier weights as you go stronger. <br/><H3>Triceps Dips</H3>Now let's move in to a tricep dip. I'm going to put the heel of my hands on the corners of the step, and walk my feet out just a few inches. I'll scoop my bottom out. Now watch how the elbows bend back and then straighten up again. This is a great move. It's challenging, so just go for 10 or 15. Take a little break and go for it again. <br/><H3>Advanced Triceps Dips</H3>Now if you're stronger, you can take 1 or 2 weights, plcae them in your lap, same thing, just adding a little more resistance here. Remember to keep your bottom close to the step or wherever you're situated so that you're not too far forward, with elbow bending back, and breathing. <br/><br/>Then take a little break when you're done. <br/><br/>To learn more, visit us on the Web at Health.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_4675 Mon, 11 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/indianfood/Naan-Recipe.htm Spice up your batch of naan with cumin, garlic, melted butter, or ghee. This leavened Indian bread can also be topped with meat, vegetables, or cheese. naan,indian food,bread,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. naan,indian food,bread,recipes,videos Hi, I'm Natasha Levitan for About.com Food. Today, I'm going to show you how to make naan. <h3>What is Naan?</h3> Naan is a leavened Indian bread with yogurt cooked in large tandoor ovens. It usually enhanced with cumin or garlic and have melted butter or ghee on it. <br><br> Naan can also be covered with various toppings of meat, vegetables, and/or cheese <h3>Naan Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>4 cups white or all-purpose flour</li> <li>1 teaspoon baking powder</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon salt</li> <li>4 tablespoons warm milk</li> <li>2/3 cups plain yogurt</li> <li>2/3 cups milk</li> <li>1 beaten egg</li> <li>2 tablespoons ghee</li> <li>1/2 cup chopped coriander</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Naan Dough</h3> Mix together yeast, warm milk, and sugar, and leave it in a warm place until the mixture becomes frothy. In a medium bowl, mix together flour, baking powder, and salt. <br><br> Make a depression in the center, and pour in your frothy yeast mixture. Then add milk, yogurt, egg, and ghee. Mix everything together until you get a smooth ball of dough. <h3>Let the Dough Rise</h3> Knead the dough well for 10 to 15 minutes. Oil a medium bowl, and place the dough into the bowl and turn the dough over so it is well covered in oil. <br><br> Cover the bowl with a towel, and place it in a warm place for two hours until the dough has doubled in size. <h3>Shape and Roll Out the Dough</h3> Preheat the oven to 400 degrees. Flour the surface, rolling pin, and your hands. Knead the dough for 2-3 minutes until it is smooth. <br><br> Divide the dough into eight pieces. Shape each piece into a ball. Then roll out the ball to make an oval about 6 inches long. Pull the ends to stretch the dough into an oval shape. <h3>Bake the Naan</h3> Brush your naan with melted butter or ghee and sprinkle it with chopped coriander. <br><br> Oil your baking sheet, and place your naan sprinkled side up. Place your baking sheet into the oven for 10-12 minutes until the naan turns golden brown. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3472 Thu, 26 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/mp3/itunesimportmusic-mov.htm Are you ready for your CD library to go digital? Learn how to import your music collection to iTunes. iTunes Library, Import CDs, iTunes, digital music 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. iTunes Library, Import CDs, iTunes, digital music Hi. I'm Don Schechter for About.com computing. Today I'm going to show you how to add music from a CD into your iTunes library. <br><h3>Choose a CD to Import into iTunes</h3> First I will open up iTunes. When you insert a CD into your computer's CD or DVD drive, an icon for that CD pops up. Here is a list of all the music on the CD. It lists all 15 tracks. We also see the length of each song. <br><br>To play a song, all I need to do is click once to highlight the track and then hit the 'play' button. You can also double click a track to play it. <br><h3>Add Songs to the iTunes Library</h3> Now I want to add all the songs to my library so I don't have to have the CD in my computer to play music. To do this, all I need to do is click on the 'import CD' button. On the top of the iTunes window, we can see the progress of the importing. <br><br>Once the first is successfully imported, the song will play. To stop it from playing, just hit the stop button on the top left side of the iTunes window. The green check marks show which songs have been imported, and the orange icon shows which song is currently being imported. <h3>Cancel Music Import to iTunes</h3> If you need to cancel the importing, click on the 'X' at the top of the screen. I'll click it and there are the songs I have imported. <h3>Eject the CD</h3> I can now eject the CD by clicking the small eject icon next to the audio CD icon. After a few seconds, my CD tray pops open with my CD and here in my music library are the songs I've just imported. I can now put my CD away and double click on any song to play it. <h3>Import Single Songs to iTunes</h3> Now I will show you a way to add just one song. Insert your audio CD back into the computer. Under 'file,' choose 'import.' Browse to your CD and select the track you want. The orange icon appears showing that the song is being imported and the check mark appears when the process is complete. <br><br>Once again, I will eject my CD, and when I look at my library, there are my imported songs. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com aboutvideo_4875 Mon, 16 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/bbq/Grilled-Corn-on-the-Cob.htm Fresh, sweet corn on the cob is a tasty way to load up on veggies. Watch how to prepare corn on an outdoor grill. grilling videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. grilling videos Hi, I'm Derrick Riches for About.com Food, and today I'm going to show you how to grill corn on the cob. <h3>Prepare the Corn on the Cob</h3> When grilling corn on the cob, try finding corn that still has the husk intact. If you can't, you can use aluminum foil to replace the corn husks. <br><br> When grilling corn on the cob without the husks, start by cutting the corn in half and placing the skewer in one end. <h3>Add Butter to the Corn</h3> Place the corn on a sheet of aluminum foil. Place a couple of pats of butter on there - you can add whatever seasoning you like. Then wrap tightly. <h3>Grill the Corn on the Cob</h3> Place the corn cob on the warming rack of your grill, or to one side that's not heated and allow it to cook indirectly for about 15 to 20 minutes. And that's how you grill corn on the cob. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5412 Mon, 17 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/ibdcrohns/Digestion.htm We get nutrients from the foods we eat through a process called digestion. Learn more about the stages of digestion and where in the body they take place. digestion, stomach, mouth, esophagus, mastication, 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. digestion, stomach, mouth, esophagus, mastication, <h3>What Is Digestion?</h3> Digestion is the process by which the gastrointestinal system retrieves important nutrients for the body and chemically changes the unused food into waste. <h3>Digestion 1: The Mouth</h3> Mastication, or the chewing of food in the mouth, is the first step of digestion. Saliva initiates digestion and changes the chewed food into a soft mass, or bolus. Saliva makes the bolus slippery, making it easier to be swallowed and slide down the back of the throat and esophagus. The bolus passes through the esophageal sphincter before it enters the stomach. <h3>Digestion 2: The Stomach</h3> Inside the stomach, hydrochloric acid is released, breaking down large food molecules into smaller ones and liquefying the bolus. <h3>Digestion 3: The Small Intestine</h3> The liquefied bolus, now called chyme, then passes through the pyloric sphincter and enters the duodenum, the first section of the small intestine. It is here that enzymes released from the pancreas, liver, and gallbladder further breakdown chyme into elements that can be easily absorbed and used by the body. The small intestine is lined with a heavily folded inner mucosa and small fingerlike projections called villi. The villi enable digested food to enter the bloodstream. It is here, in the small intestine, where all nutrients and vitamins are absorbed. <h3>Digestion 4: The Large intestine</h3> Chyme can travel through up to 20 feet of small intestine before it passes through the ileocecal valve to enter the large intestine. Very little digestion occurs in the large intestine. Undigested chyme that enters the large intestine is considered waste. The waste becomes more and more solid as it passes through the large intestine because water is continuously being reabsorbed from the waste. <h3>Digestion 5: The Rectum</h3> Waste collects in the rectum, or end of the large intestine, until the brain signals for it to be expelled from the body. <br><br>Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_5288 Mon, 17 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/pediatrics/Down-Syndrome.htm People with down syndrome are born with an abnormal number of chromosomes. Learn more about down syndrome and its effects. down syndrome, genetic disorder, mental retardation 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. down syndrome, genetic disorder, mental retardation <h3>Normal Inherited Chromosomes</h3> The human body is made of millions of cells. Inside the nucleus of each cell is genetic information, found in chromosomes, that determines all of a person's inherited features. Normally, each cell contains 23 chromosomes inherited from each parent, totaling 46 chromosomes per cell. The cell then divides so that all cells contain identical genetic information. <h3>What Is Down Syndrome?</h3> A person with Down Syndrome has an additional chromosome 21, so that there are 3 chromosomes instead of 2 on chromosome 21. <h3>Effects of Down Syndrome</h3> In addition to altered physical features, Down Syndrome is often associated with cardiovascular problems and mental retardation. <h3>Causes of Down Syndrome</h3> There is no known cause for Down Syndrome, but research shows that women who give birth over the age of 40 are at an increased risk for having a baby with this genetic disorder.<br><br>Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_3747 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/gourmetfood/How-to-Make-Shrimp-Cocktail.htm Shrimp cocktails are a perfect party staple and an easy weeknight treat. Watch how to make tangy shrimp cocktail sauce. shrimp,shrimp cocktail,appetizer,recipe,sauce,video 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. shrimp,shrimp cocktail,appetizer,recipe,sauce,video Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make a shrimp cocktail sauce. <h3>Shrimp Cocktail Sauce Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 1/2 cups of ketchup</li> <li>1 1/2 tablespoons horseradish</li> <li>1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce</li> <li>1 tablespoon lemon juice</li> <li>1 1/2 teaspoon sugar</li> <li>1 squeeze of hot sauce </li> <li> pinch of salt and pepper</li> </ul> <h3>Combine the Shrimp Cocktail Sauce Ingredients</h3> In a blender or mixer, pour in 1 1/2 cups of ketchup. Next, add 1 tablespoon of Worcestershire sauce, 1 1/2 tablespoons of horseradish, and 1 1/2 teaspoons of sugar. <br><br> On a cutting board, roll a lemon to help get the juices flowing. Cut the lemon in half, and squeeze one piece over the blender. If you hold it with the cut side up, you can help prevent the seeds from falling into the sauce. <br><br> Then add the hot sauce and the salt and pepper. Remember, you can always add more hot sauce or salt and pepper if you would like. <h3>Blend the Shrimp Cocktail Sauce Ingredients</h3> Put the lid on the blender. Turn the blender on, and blend on low. You can see how fast the blender mixes it all up. <br><br> Use a spatula to scrape the sides of the blender, and then turn it on one more time. Once the mixture becomes very thick, turn off the blender and pour the sauce into a serving bowl. <h3>Serve the Shrimp Cocktails</h3> I am pouring the cocktail sauce into a candy dish to make a fancier presentation. Use cooked and shelled jumbo shrimp with the tails still on. <br><br> Hang the shrimp on the side of the bowl. Place it all on a few pieces of lettuce for a beautiful serving platter. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6928 Fri, 26 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/housekeeping/Car-Wash.htm Save money and give your car a professional car wash at home using a hose and two simple products. DIY,Home,Wash,Car,Car Wash,Clean,Wash Mit,Car Wax 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. DIY,Home,Wash,Car,Car Wash,Clean,Wash Mit,Car Wax Hi, I'm J.J. Burkart for About.com Home. I'm going to show you how to wash and wax your car. <br/><H3>Car Wash Tools</H3>You will need:<ul><li>a garden hose with spray nozzle</li><li>car wash soap</li><li>wash mitt</li><li>car wax</li><li>clean cotton towels</li></ul><H3>Position Your Car for Washing</H3>The first thing to do is to park your car in the shade to prevent spotting.<br/><H3>Car Wash Pre-rinse</H3>First mix the car wash soap and water in the bucket. Follow the portion instructions on the bottle. Now hose down the entire vehicle. Dip your wash mit in the bucket. <br/><H3>Car Wash Mitt</H3>Working from the top down, thoroughly wash every inch of your vehicle. Rinse your mitt frequently, and change your soap and water to avoid scratching your car with dirt and sand particles. Double- sided wash mits are ideal. The cloth side won't scratch your paint job and the mesh side works great for headlights and windshields. <br/><H3>Car Wash Rinse</H3>Rinse with the hose. Dry the car with cotton towels. Use one dry towel to wipe up most of the water, and then go over it with a second dry towel. Spread the car wax evenly using a circular motion. Allow the wax to dry to a haze. Then buff the wax off with a cotton towel using the same circular motion. Wax on, wax off. <br/><H3>Washing Car Windows</H3>Lastly, wash your windows with glass cleaner to remove streaks and spots. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching, to learn more visit us on the Web at homegarden.about.com.<br/><br/> aboutvideo_4803 Wed, 19 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/vegetarian/Stuffed-Tomatoes.htm Want to turn regular tomatoes into a smashing side dish? Bake up a batch of these vegetarian stuffed tomatoes filled with a flavorful but light rice mixture. vegetarian, Stuffed Tomatoes, recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. vegetarian, Stuffed Tomatoes, recipe Hi! I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make vegetarian stuffed tomatoes. <h3>Stuffed Tomato Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>4 medium to large firm tomatoes</li> <li>1/2 cup chopped onion</li> <li>2 cups cooked rice</li> <li>1/3 teaspoon allspice</li> <li>2 tablespoons olive oil</li> <li>salt and pepper </li> </ul> Preheat oven to 350 degrees. <h3>Core the Tomatoes</h3> First, using a small paring knife core the tomatoes and be sure to leave a nice round open top where we will put the stuffing later. Next, with a spoon or melon baller, scoop out insides of the tomato, including the seeds. Be sure not to scoop out the bottom too much, we want that to stay sturdy to hold the stuffing while it is in the oven. <h3>Drain the Tomatoes</h3> Then, rinse each tomato with water and the place them upside down to drain on a paper towel. <h3>Make the Tomato Stuffing</h3> In a small saute pan, pour the olive oil. Then add the onions. Cook the onions until they are tender and light brown. Next, mix the onions to the rice. Add allspice and some salt, and then some pepper. Mix well. <h3>Stuff the Tomatoes</h3> With a small spoon, scoop the rice mixture and stuff each tomato. Gently pack in the rice, so the whole tomato is full. You can leave a little mound of rice right on top. <h3>Bake the Stuffed Tomatoes</h3> Next, rub the outside of tomatoes with some olive oil and place them casserole dish. I'm putting a ramekin dish in the center of my baking dish, to help provide some structure for the tomatoes to stay standing. <br><br> Bake for 25 minutes, or until tomatoes are tender. You can see that some of the skin has broken while cooking, that helps you know that it is done. <br><br> This is a great vegetarian dish for you and your family. Enjoy! Thanks for watching, to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6920 Tue, 06 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/exercise/thigh-toning.htm Learn how to tone the thighs, hips, and entire lower body with a resistance band and these expert techniques. thigh toning,lower body,exercise,hip toning 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. thigh toning,lower body,exercise,hip toning Hi, I'm Leslie Nesbit for About.com Health. <br/><br/>Today I'm going to show you 2 great ways to tone up those outside thighs and hips, and I'm going to be using a resistance band. So I've got one here. You might want to get one for yourself. They're inexpensive and you can work out your entire body with them. They're also very portable so you can travel with them or you can even take them with you to work, play or school. <br/><br/><H3>Positioning for Thigh Toning</H3><br/>So grab the tube, one handle in each hand. We're going to step into the center of the tube. Make sure the tube is right underneath the center of the shoe, not forward to the toes or back to the heel of the shoe. <br/><br/><H3>Thigh Toning with Resistance</H3><br/>We're going to put the handles together. Now we're going to grab just beneath the handle and pull the tube into the body. Keep it in tight. I recommend that you hold it with both handles. <br/>Now we're simply going to step side to side. If your tube has greater resistance, your steps will be smaller, less resistance your steps will be a little wider. You can even do 2 to the side, 2 to the other side. <br/><br/>Keep breathing as you do this, keep the knees slightly soft. If you want the move to be a little tougher, pull up on the tube. But keep the shoulders relaxed and down. The neck is nice and long. <br/><br/>So go for a set side-to-side of 15 if you're just beginning, 20 for intermediate, and 25 for advanced. <br/><br/><H3>Advanced Thigh Toning</H3><br/>Now let's take a little more advanced move here, don't try this until you're ready. We're going to squat back to the heels and as you can see my feet are about hip distance apart. I'm going to bring the handle of the tube right up to the shoulder. It's important here that you don't let the wrists bend. Keep those wrists lined up with the back of the arm. Ok so check that before you begin. <br/><br/><H3>Power Lifts for the Thighs and Legs</H3><br/>Now we're going to squat back and power lift to the side, then switch to the other side. So this move is definitely going to build your cardio endurance and tone up those buns and of course tone up those outside thighs. Try for 10, maybe take a little break, and go for another 10. <br/><br/>To learn more, visit us on the Web at Health.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_5675 Fri, 20 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/laundry/Remove-Chocolate-Stains.htm Dark and messy chocolate stains can really ruin your sweet tooth - try these simple laundry tips and be rid of them forever. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Hi! I'm Jonathon Stewart for About.com Home and Garden with today's 90 second quick tip. A little known fact about Alfred Hitchcock's 1960 classic, "Psycho," is that instead of using fake blood, he substituted nothing other than chocolate syrup in that famous shower scene. And over the seven days it took to shoot, you can bet a bunch of crew members got covered in that chocolate-y mess, which begs the question: how'd they get rid of all those chocolate stains? Well, stick around and I'll show you how I do it... check it out. <h3>Inside a Chocolate Stain</h3> Chocolate stains might seem at first like a tough animal to tackle. They're comprised of both cocoa and milk proteins, can be sticky, gooey, or even caked in, and the stains usually don't just come out in the wash. <h3>Rub the Stain With Heavy Cream</h3> But here's what I always say: fight milk proteins with milk proteins! Pour about a quarter to a half pint of heavy cream into a bowl, dip in a clean toothbrush, and lightly rub your stain for a minute or so. <h3>Check the Garment Cleaning Instructions</h3> Always check your tags before digging in too far - the last thing you want to do is complicate a stain that really should be treated by a professional dry cleaner from the start. But for every fabric except the most delicate or non-washable, this should do the trick every time. <h3>Soak the Chocolate Stain in Cream</h3> After lightly brushing, dip your stain into the bowl of cream and let it sit for about twenty minutes. In all likelihood, your stain will already be gone, but either way you should finish up by laundering as usual. <h3>Wash the Garment</h3> Once your garment is through the washer, take a close look to make sure the stain is completely removed. If there are traces left, try soaking it in a solution of one part dish-washing liquid to two parts hydrogen peroxide, being wary of the bleaching action of the peroxide on non-colorfast fabrics. And always, always, always make sure that your stain is gone for good before tossing anything in the dryer. <br><br> And that's all there is to it - nothing to fear from chocolate ever again. Like you've ever been afraid of chocolate before... <br><br> Thanks for watching! To learn more, visit us on the Web at homegarden.about.com. aboutvideo_5480 Mon, 10 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/spanishfood/Mantecados-Recipe.htm These Spanish Christmas cookies are small, light, and downright delicious. Enjoy mantecados during the holidays, or whenever you have a craving for something sweet. mantecados,spanish food,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. mantecados,spanish food,videos Hi, I'm Natasha Levitan for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make mantecados, which are Spanish Christmas cookies. <h3> Ingredients Needed to Make Mantecados</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1 cup shortening</li> <li>1/2 cup vegetable oil</li> <li>3/4 cup sugar</li> <li>2 eggs</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon baking soda</li> <li>1 teaspoon anise extract</li> <li>1 lemon</li> <li>citrus peeler</li> <li>2 teaspoons lemon juice</li> <li>1/4 teaspoon ground cinnamon</li> <li>3 1/2 cups flour</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Eggs and Lemon Zest</h3> Separate the egg yolks from the whites. You will use yolks for the dough and the whites to brush the cookies to give them a golden color. Whisk the egg whites to break them apart. <br><br> Peel the lemon zest with a citrus peeler. But if you don't have one, you can use vegetable peeler and get the yellow part of the lemon. <h3>Make the Mantecado Dough</h3> In a very large mixing bowl, whip the vegetable shortening with a mixer. Then add in oil, and when it incorporates into the shortening, add sugar, then egg yolks, anise, lemon peel, juice, and cinnamon. Mix together. <br><br> Add flour and baking soda to mixture and be sure to mix well. At the end of your mixing, the dough will become a texture of wet crumbs. <h3>Bake and Serve the Mantecados</h3> Preheat the oven to 325 degrees. Take enough dough to form walnut-sized balls, and roll them between your hands. Place the cookie onto a cookie sheet sprayed with oil. <br><br> Lightly press down on each ball to flatten slightly. Brush the egg white on top of each cookie. Place the cookies in the oven and bake until they turn light brown. Let the cookies cool 2-3 minutes and serve. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4784 Mon, 12 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/gourmetfood/How-to-Open-Clams.htm With their salty and sweet flavor, clams are a delicious addition to any meal. But how do you open them? Legal Sea Foods' executive chef shows you how to shuck a clam. how to open clams,gourmet food,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. how to open clams,gourmet food,videos Hello, I'm Rich Vellante, executive chef of Legal Sea Foods in Boston, Massachusetts, for About.com Food. Today I am going to show you how to shuck a littleneck clam. <h3>Tools Needed to Open a Clam</h3> What you need to start out with this is, obviously, you need clams that you can buy at your local fishmonger. <br><br> And really, the only other things you need depend on your preference. But first of all, you need a shucking knife for clams. And I am going to show it to you here as opposed to the oyster knife. <br><br> These can be purchased at any food equipment store like a William and Sonoma; they'll carry these. But you see the difference. This one is flat, and this is for the clams. <br><br> The only other thing you might want to consider purchasing, and one of the things those stores might have, is a glove. I do not personally need one to open clams, but I will use them when opening oysters. <h3>Inspect Both Sides of the Clam</h3> So let's start to open these. First of all, with these hard-shell clams, when you look at it from afar, you can see that here is one section that is very, very tight, and that's on this right-hand side. <br><br> But as you start moving over to the left-hand side, it separates just enough to get this flat knife into it. <h3>Slide the Knife Into the Opening</h3> What I've done is I've placed the knife over that area where it is open. Now I have supported it in the palm of my hand, and what I'll be doing is pushing and supporting it with the palm of my hands. <br><br> And see how I just made that incision? I got into the clam, and that is very, very important. <h3>Run the Knife Along the Top of the Clam</h3> Do not just go straight into it because the clam essentially is attached to the top of the shell and the bottom. <br><br> And it is connected at four points: four abductor muscles - two at the top and two at the bottom. So it is our goal here to run the knife along the top of the clam. <h3>Twist Off the Top Part of the Clam</h3> Now what I have done is I have opened it up. One of my goals also is, you will notice, that I have cupped it and I have tried to hold as much liquid in there as possible. <br><br> Because the liquor of the clam has that beautiful ocean flavor and that is really what is important. <br><br> I'll sever the muscle that connects the clam to the top. Now I'll just twist it. This is very easy. I just twist the top part off and now I can discard this. <h3>Sever the Clam's Muscles</h3> So now I have my clam, but it is not finished yet because it is stuck. If you can see closely here, there are two muscles that are holding it together. <br><br> What I need to do is just sever those two muscles. So there is the first one. And you can see the other one, pinkish in color on the other side, and I will sever that one as well. Now my clam is totally loose. <br><br> Thanks for watching to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5553 Tue, 11 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/nintendo/Nintendo-Wii-Review.htm Nintendo's Wii has gotten gamers off the couch, but is it worth all the hype (and money)? Find out what makes Wii different, and see this reviewers opinion on its games. wii, nintendo, games 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. wii, nintendo, games <b>Reviewed</b>: 11/6/07<br><br> Hi! I'm Don Schechter for About.com. The Nintendo Wii is a video game system like no other. It's a console made for the whole family and can be both fun and exhausting. Other game systems are designed for serious gamers and excel in graphics and intense storylines. <h3>What Comes in Wii?</h3> The Wii, on the other hand, is perfect for casual gamers and is very family friendly. My Wii bundle came with Wii Sports which includes baseball, tennis, boxing, and my two favorites - bowling and golf. <h3>What Makes Wii Different?</h3> The graphics may be simple, but the game play is nearly revolutionary. For the most part, you don't just sit on your couch moving your thumbs on a controller. Depending on the game, you might swing the controller like a bat, tennis racquet, or golf club. You can add the nunchuck adapter to box with both arms. <br><br>It can be quite a work out. The first night I played with the Wii I bowled for hours and was quite sore the next day. In fact, there is even a Wii Fitness game that determines your Wii age based on your performance. <h3>Wii Controllers</h3> The controller is light so you have to get use to how your body and the games interact. There is a speaker inside the controller and you can feel physical feedback from some games. <h3>Classic Games in Wii</h3> If you want to play more traditional style games, they are out there. Games like Zelda can be played incorporating classic standard motions with the controller. But when it comes time to fish or attack with your sword, the Wii remote can be swung around and Linx more or less mimics your fighting motions. <h3>Wii Mii Avatars</h3> A fun and unique aspect of the Wii is the ability to create Miis. Miis are avatars that you can create to look like you or anyone else you know. Miis are your persona while you play and, in some of the Wii games, you'll see other Miis interacting in the background. <h3>Nintendo Wii: The Bottom Line</h3> The Wii is a great party system and is a lot of fun at first. I have found that over time I have lost interest in playing the casual games by myself since there aren't really many levels of difficulty to the Sports games. <br><br>If you are looking to break into some gaming without paying an arm and a leg you might want to consider purchasing a Wii. But keep in mind to stretch otherwise you might strain an arm and a leg. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at gadgets.about.com. aboutvideo_5332 Mon, 08 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/alzheimers/Alzheimer-s-Disease.htm Alzheimer's disease tangles the brain's nerve cells and can cause memory loss, confusion, and disorientation. Learn more about the effects of Alzheimer's disease. alzheimers disease, 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. alzheimers disease, <h3>A Healthy Brain</h3> The healthy brain is made up of millions of interconnecting nerve cells, called neurons. Neurons constantly communicate with each other by sending signals through tentacle-like connections called axons and dendrites. <h3>How Alzheimer's Disease Affects the Brain</h3> The brain of a patient with Alzheimer's disease is much different. The orderly, organized arrangement of nerve cells found in a healthy brain become entangled, full of senile plaques and neurofibrillary tangles. The plaques and tangles interfere with the normal activity between neurons in the area of the brain responsible for intellectual thought. <h3>Symptoms of Alzheimer's Disease</h3> Alzheimer's disease affects people in different ways. The disease is slowly progressive from onset. Memory loss, confusion, disorientation, and poor judgment are a few of the symptoms of Alzheimer's disease. <br><br> Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_4763 Tue, 11 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/coffeetea/Yerba-Mate-Latte.htm Yerba Mate is a traditional South American beverage that is quickly gaining popularity around the world. Try this highly caffeinated, highly nutritious drink for yourself. latte recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. latte recipes,videos Hi, I'm Jonathon Stewart for About.com Food, and today it's all about yerba mate lattes. <h3>What Is Yerba Mate?</h3> Yerba mate is a beverage made from the leaves of a South American tree and is considered one of the six major naturally occurring stimulants of the world. <br><br> And, according to the Paris Scientific Society in 1964, it contains "practically all of the vitamins necessary to sustain life." <h3>Yerba Mate Latte Ingredients</h3> While I wouldn't recommend cutting say, food, out of your diet, yerba does pack a caffeinated, delicious, and nutritious punch. Here's all you'll need:<ul> <li>1 heaping teaspoon loose-leaf yerba mate</li> <li>a single-serving tea strainer</li> <li>1 bag organic peppermint tea</li> <li>1 cup water</li> <li>1/2 cup low, non-fat, or soy milk</li> <li>a martini shaker</li> <li>1 tablespoon honey</li> <li>1 nice, big mug</li> </ul> Yerba mate also comes in pre-packaged tea bags, which eliminates some of the fuss. Or if you're a tea-head and have them on hand, you can create your own tea bags with individual paper tea filters. <h3>Heat the Water</h3> Start by heating at least one cup of water either on the stove or in your microwave, but be careful not to let it boil so as not to destroy any of the naturally occurring antioxidants and amino acids. <br><br> The ideal temperature is about 180 degrees Fahrenheit. <h3>Fill the Tea Strainer With Yerba</h3> While the water is heating, fill your tea strainer with yerba, and douse it with cool water, which helps to seal in all the mineral nutrition. <br><br> Yerba, which technically refers to the ball of wet leaves that provides the basis for the drink, is traditionally served in a hollowed out gourd, or mate. <br><br> But with its growing popularity in places like Syria, Lebanon, and California, you won't be committing a "metida de pata" by serving your yerba mate in a mug. <h3>Let the Yerba Steep</h3> Once the water is heated, slowly pour it over the yerba and peppermint tea, and allow it to steep for 3-10 minutes, depending on how strong you like your mate. <br><br> Remove the strainer and the tea bag, and add a tablespoon of honey to sweeten. <h3>Shake the Milk in a Martini Shaker</h3> And now it's time for the latte. While using an espresso machine or frothing wand is a convenient way to give your milk a rich, foamy texture, this method can work just as easily, without the extra equipment and messy cleanup. <br><br> Pour about a half cup of milk into your martini shaker, and shake vigorously for about 30 seconds. <h3>Benefits of Different Types of Milk</h3> Low-fat and non-fat milk are often fortified with protein, which actually allows for a more frothy result than with whole milk. <br><br> Using vanilla or almond soy milk will not only cut down on the fat content of your mate latte, but can provide for an even more tasty treat. <h3>Combine the Milk and Yerba Mate</h3> Pour your agitated milk into a microwavable container, and heat for about 30 seconds. Remove the milk from the microwave, slowly pour over the yerba mate, sip, and enjoy! <br><br> Driving and drinking yerba mate is illegal in Uruguay because of accidents caused by motorists burning themselves with this delectable hot beverage. So be sure to take appropriate precautions. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6196 Tue, 05 Feb 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/studenttravel/Downtown-Austin--Texas.htm Kinky Friedman, the largest independent record store in the United States... what else do you need? austin, texas, downtown 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. austin, texas, downtown Kinky Friedman, the largest independent record store in the United States... what else do you need? aboutvideo_5229 Mon, 10 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/womenshealth/Breast-Lift.htm A mastopexy lifts breasts that are low-hanging, lack firmness, or have downward-pointing nipples. Learn more about breast lift surgery. breast lift, mastopexy, 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. breast lift, mastopexy, <h3>What is a Breast?</h3> A woman's breast is primarily composed of fatty tissue and mammary glands. Mammary glands drain into the lactiferous sinus, which connects them to the nipple. The nipple is encircled by a pigmented ring called the areola. <h3>Getting Breast Lift Surgery</h3> A woman may elect to have breast lift surgery if she has breasts that are of a suitable size but are low-hanging, lack firmness, or have nipples that point downward. <h3>Incisions For a Breast Lift</h3> The number and size of surgical incisions for a breast lift, or mastopexy, vary according to the size and shape of the breasts, and position of the nipples prior to surgery. <br><br> In some cases, an incision is made above the areola and the nipple and the areola are shifted to a higher position, lifting the breast and tilting it upward. <br><br> However, more extensive breast lifts can require several incisions. For example, an incision is first made above and around the areola. Then, incisions below or to the sides of the areola, and along the crease line underneath the breast are made so that excess skin and fatty tissue can be removed. <br><br> The areola is then shifted with the nipple to a higher position, usually without severing attachment to the functional tissues below. <br><br> Finally, the skin of the lower breast is closed and sutured below the areola to lift the breast and give it its new contour. <h3>Effects of Breast Lift Surgery</h3> After a period of bruising and swelling, the incision lines begin to fade and the breasts take on a more natural shape. <h3>Risks of Getting a Breast Lift</h3> There are several potential complications associated with this procedure that should be discussed with a doctor prior to surgery. <br><br> Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_5278 Wed, 12 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/dentistry/Cavities.htm Poor dental hygiene can result in tooth decay, also known as cavities. Learn how cavities form and how to protect your teeth against decay. cavities, tooth decay, dental hygiene, 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. cavities, tooth decay, dental hygiene, <h3>Reasons to Brush Your Teeth</h3> Whenever a person eats or drinks, food and liquid, which contain sugar and starches, are often left behind on the teeth. Bacteria, which also live in the mouth, combines with the left-over food substances and forms acid. <h3>How Do Cavities Form?</h3> The acid can eventually destroy the protective enamel covering on the teeth, causing holes or cavities, called tooth decay. Tooth decay can lead to infection, causing pain and inflammation. <h3>Preventing Cavities</h3> Regular brushing and flossing helps rid the mouth of remaining food particles and helps reduce the risk for tooth decay. It is also important to receive regular dental check-ups. <br><br> Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical aboutvideo_5941 Tue, 01 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/skincare/Tips-for-a-Great-Shave.htm Tired of nicks and irritating razor burn after you shave? Check out these tips for a great shave and your skin will be smooth as a baby. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Hey guys - Jonathon Stewart here for about.com. Stubble works well if you're Clint Eastwood or Jake Gyllenhall, but for the rest of us, things like jobs and inlaws tend to frown upon the unshaven and scruffy. Today, it's all about tips on giving yourself a great shave, without getting burned. Check it out. <h3>Prepare the Face for Shaving</h3> Step one: Preparation. First, make sure your face is wet. Facial hair can absorb moisture up to 30 percent of its volume, and that makes it soft and plump and much easier to cut. A technique barbers use is to rinse your face with warm water and then apply a warm moistened towel to your face for a couple of minutes. Do not shave your face with cold water before shaving, or even worse, shave with a dry face. You might as well rub your face against a tree... <h3>Apply Shaving Cream</h3> Next, use a high quality shaving cream that contains a lot of lubricants and moisturizers. The best ones make a creamy lather, rather than foam up. The main function of this lather is to lubricate your face so your razor glides smoothly across. so you don't nick yourself. Leave the shaving cream on your face for at least a minute before shaving. <br><br> If you really want to go old school, use a shaving brush to apply your shaving cream. It helps raise your facial hair to get a closer cut, and creates a creamy lather that stays close to your skin and exfoliates your face, which reduces the chance of blemishes or razor burn and makes your skin look and feel smooth. And, it does look pretty cool. <h3>Keep a Sharp Blade</h3> Step Two, technique. Use a good, sharp blade. A dull blade traumatizes your skin and will make it feel scratchy and look blotchy. Be sure to change your shaving blades every four or five shaves. Rinse your blade under hot water before you start and after every few swipes. <h3>Shave the Face</h3> The order you want to shave is 1) the sides of your face, 2) your moustache, 3) your chin, and 4) your neck. Never shave your forehead. Be sure to shave in the direction your hair grows, known as shaving "with the grain." If you're not sure which way your hair grows, let your beard grow for a day or two and watch it. You don't have to watch it the whole time, go out and have a life, and check in a few times and you'll see what I mean. Get those hard to cut hairs by shaving against the grain but be careful, doing this carelessly will cause you to look like you just got out of a knife fight. <h3>Shaving Aftercare</h3> Immediately after you shave is when your skin is most vulnerable. Think of your face as being stuck naked in the middle of the woods on a cold night. Now you want to cover it with a warm blanket and give it some hot cocoa. <br><br> Step three, recovery. Rinse your face with warm water and try using a facial wash that contains tea tree oil or witch hazel. Next, rinse your face with cool water and pat your face dry with a towel. Aftershave now is your best friend. Get one that is a balm and a moisturizer and be sure that it's made specifically for guys. Aftershave will replace moisture, soothe, refresh, and cool your skin. <br><br> And that's how to get a shave so smooth, you might even make a baby jealous. Thanks for watching! To learn more, visit us on the Web at style.about.com. aboutvideo_4175 Mon, 18 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/southernfood/Southern-Grits.htm A plate of warm grits is a must-have for any traditional Southern breakfast. Learn the secrets to making a perfect batch of grits. grits,breakfast food,southern food recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. grits,breakfast food,southern food recipes,videos Hi, I'm Linda Leon with About.com Food, and today we're going to make a comfort food called grits. <h3>Ingredients Needed to Make Grits</h3> So, let's take a look at some of our ingredients. You will need:<ul> <li>2 cups water</li> <li>1/2 cup grits</li> <li>1 tablespoon butter</li> <li>1 teaspoon salt</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon pepper</li> <li>1/4 cup bacon fat</li> </ul> <h3>Boil the Water</h3> To begin, we're going to add 2 cups of water to our pot, and bring it up to a high boil. Once the water has reached a high boil, add your butter, salt, and pepper, and reduce the heat. <h3>Reduce the Heat</h3> Now, it is very important that you reduce the heat because grits have a tendency to pop when they boil. They have a tendency to puff up, and you can get scorched. So, you have to be very careful with hot water while you're making your grits. <h3>Secret to Delicious Grits</h3> Now the key to good grits is not as much the ingredients, but it's the constant stirring. <br><br> When you read most packages on grit preparation, they will say stir occasionally. But my success has been with stirring constantly. <h3>Add the Grits</h3> Then slowly pour in the grits, and add them just a little at a time. This will help to reduce some of the bubbling that takes place. <br><br> As you notice, it's beginning to boil up. What I do is just lift the pot gently and let it cool off just a little. Keep stirring. <h3>Stir the Grits Constantly</h3> Continue to stir until the grits reach the consistency that you like. Now, this is an excellent consistency. They are not too thick, and they are not too runny. They are just right. <h3>Add Bacon Fat to the Grits</h3> Here's what you add to grits to give them a restaurant-style quality and a real Southern flair. It's bacon fat. You're going to add about 1/4 cup of that to your grits. <br><br> Now, I would not recommend adding bacon fat on a regular basis, but if you really want Southern flavor, it is what you must do. <br><br> Well, that's all to it. We're going to turn off our flame, and plate these up. Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5122 Mon, 10 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/breastfeeding/Breastfeeding.htm Milk is produced in the breasts through a process called lactation. Learn the best way to breastfeed an infant. breastfeeding, lactation, latch-on position 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. breastfeeding, lactation, latch-on position <h3>A Healthy Breast</h3> The outer breast consists of a nipple and areola. The tip of the nipple contains several hole openings allowing for milk to flow through during lactation. The areola is the pigmented area around the nipple. It is covered with Montgomery glands that secrete oil to lubricate the nipple and areola. <h3>Producing Milk for Breastfeeding</h3> The primary function of female breasts is to produce milk in order to nourish an infant, a process called lactation. The breasts, which are composed primarily of fatty tissue, also contain milk producing glands called lobules. <br><br> Lobules are connected to the nipple by a network of tubes called milk ducts. The breasts produce milk from water and nutrients removed from the bloodstream. The milk is stored in the lobules until the hormone oxytocin signals the tiny muscles in the lobules to contract, and push the milk through the ducts. This process is called let-down reflex or the milk-ejection reflex. <h3>How Babies Learn to Breastfeed</h3> Though babies are born with a natural sucking reflex, they must still learn to breastfeed. <h3>How to breastfeed</h3> During breastfeeding, it is important that the infant maintain appropriate mouth-nipple placement; this assures that the baby is receiving a proper amount of milk and that breastfeeding experience will be successful. <br><br> The appropriate latch-on position is for the nipple be placed far in the back of the baby's mouth, almost to where the hard palate meets the soft palate. If a baby sucks only on the tip of the nipple, or does not have enough breast tissue in the mouth, it can cause the mother to have sore, or cracked nipples. <br><br> Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_5135 Fri, 14 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/backandneck/Complications-of-Spinal-Surger.htm Here's information on spinal surgery's risks and complications. spinal surgery, spinal surgery risks, thrombophlebitis, 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. spinal surgery, spinal surgery risks, thrombophlebitis, <h3>Risks Associated With Spinal Surgery</h3> There are risks of complications associated with any surgery. A surgery performed near the spine is a delicate procedure in which both mechanical and biological complications may occur with varying frequency and severity. <h3>Risk 1 - Thrombophlebitis</h3> A common problem that can develop after surgery is thrombophlebitis. This is a condition in which a vein becomes inflamed as a result of a blood clot, irritation from an IV needle, or infection near a vein. This usually leads to tenderness and pain in the tissue surrounding the affected vein. <h3>Risk 2 - Abnormal Breathing and Infection of Lungs</h3> Complications related to the lungs also may develop following surgery. These problems can result from anesthetic medications or from extended stays in bed, that can lead to abnormal breathing and infection. <h3>Risk 3 - Movement of Implanted Screws, Rods, Plates</h3> In time, surgically implanted metal screws, rods, or plates may break or move. This can be painful and require a second surgery to replace or repair the damaged hardware. <h3>Other Risks of Spinal Surgery</h3> Other complications may include: infection, persistent pain, Transitional Syndrome, pseudoarthrosis, and spinal cord injury. <br><br>Copyrighted animations provided by Blausen Medical. aboutvideo_6919 Mon, 22 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/exercise/hip-lift.htm Build your core and abdominal muscles with these 2 modified yoga poses and skip the crunches altogether. ab muscles,core strength,exercise,stomach toning 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. ab muscles,core strength,exercise,stomach toning Hi, I'm Leslie Nesbitt for About.com Health. <br/><br/>Today we're going to look at 2 stationary abdominal moves that you can hold and use to strengthen that core area. I know many of us think of traditional crunches when we think of the abdominals so this will give you a little variety in your workout. <br/><H3>Guide to Ab Muscles</H3>Now in the abdominal area- Here we have oblique muscles and sometimes those are known as the internal girdle so they're really strong, it's a short muscle group. So let's use them to hold in this first move. <br/><H3>Positioning to Target Ab Muscles</H3>Come over to your side to 1 hip and place your elbow just below your shoulder. Let those fingers spread wide for support. Now you're going to take those knees back and stack them. The knees are almost lined up with the hips and the feet are stacked one on top of the other. <br/>From here lift up out of that shoulder so you're not putting too much stress on it. <br/><H3>Holding for Ab Muscle Strength</H3>Now here's the abdominal part. We're going to use those obliques to lift and hold. <br/>If you can hold for 5 or 6 breaks, that's great, or approximately 15 to 20 seconds, that's great. Do what you can. If you want to reach up, you can add a little bit of lift here. And also you can reach that arm forward to stretch out that side of the torso. You may not be ready for that at the beginning- Don't worry about it. Just do your best. <br/><br/>And when you come down, come down slowly, taking it easy on that shoulder joint. And of course you want to repeat that on the other side. <br/><H3>Modified Plank Pose for Ab Strength</H3>Now I'm going to show you something else that's great for abdominals. This is a modified plank hold. We're going to come down on our bellies. The elbows are underneath the shoulders. The middle finger is straight forward. <br/><H3>Positioning your Feet</H3>I want you to curl your toes under and lift using your abdominals. See if you can get your hips level with your shoulders. You don't want to let the back sway, or sag, and you don't want to lift up too high. <br/><H3>Holding for Core and Ab Strength</H3>So as you come into this pose, you're going to feel those abdominals supporting you. I recommend that you look down at the space between the thumbs. If you're ready for a little bit more, you can take 1 leg, lift it, and hold it, but don't hold your breath, keep that air flowing. <br/>If this feels like too much, just drop the knees to the mat and take a little break. <br/><H3>Stretching out the Ab Muscles</H3>Otherwise, we're going to come on up to a cross-legged position. Reach the fingertips back, lifting the heart and the chest to stretch out that abdominal area. <br/><br/>To learn more, visit us on the Web at Health.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_3774 Fri, 26 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Pork-Ribs-and-Sauerkraut.htm Learn how to make traditional German pork ribs with sauerkraut. ribs,sauerkraut,german,recipe,traditional,new year,dinner,pork,pork ribs 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. ribs,sauerkraut,german,recipe,traditional,new year,dinner,pork,pork ribs Hi, I'm Heidi Dehncke-Fisher and welcome to About.com Food. Today we're going to make my father's recipe for Pork Ribs and Sauerkraut. <br><br><H3>Pork Rib and Sauerkraut Origins</H3><br>Both the Germans and the Pennsylvania Dutch eat this dish on New Year's Day believing that it brings good luck.<br/><br/><H3>Pork Ribs and Sauerkraut Ingredients</H3>To make a pan of pork ribs and sauerkraut (approximately six servings) you will need:<ul><li>4 pounds of sauerkraut</li><li>1 1/2 onions, chopped</li><li>2 medium red-skin potatoes for the sauerkraut</li><li>7 pieces of bacon</li><li>2 large McIntosh apples</li><li>garlic</li><li>paprika</li><li>pepper</li><li>2 pounds pork ribs, country style or the cut of your choice.</li></ul><H3>Prep the Ingredients</H3>As you begin to prepare your sauerkraut, you can also cook your bacon and potatoes at the same time. I rinse the sauerkraut to get rid of some of the salt and reduce the sourness. Make sure to squeeze the water and juice out &#150; though you can control the flavor by how much you leave in.<br/><br/>You can either mash or grate the potatoes which are then added into the sauerkraut. Add the chopped apple and the onion and bacon and then your spices &#150; paprika, pepper, and garlic.<br/><br/><H3>Prepare the Pork Ribs</H3>Begin to prepare your ribs by rinsing them. Layer the seasoned ribs on top of your sauerkraut mixture, but I'm going to put them fat side down so that the juice and the flavor from the fat actually helps to season the sauerkraut &#150; and flavor them with your favorite spices. I still like the combination of paprika, pepper, and garlic on mine. <br/><br/><H3>Bake the Pork Ribs and Sauerkraut</H3>Bake uncovered in a 375 degree oven for 90 minutes to 2 hours &#150; or until the ribs are tender. Serve generous portions with a side of boiled potatoes.<br/><br/>Pork ribs with sauerkraut - it looks delicious. Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6877 Sun, 21 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/autorepair/Car-ergonomics-long-trip-mov.--3o.--3o.htm Are you used to feeling stiff and uncomfortable when you drive for more than a few minutes? You'll be amazed how large an effect proper seat-adjustment can have- make your road trips ergonomically correct in just a few minutes. ergonomics,road trips,cars,seat position 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. ergonomics,road trips,cars,seat position Driving long distances can bring about fatigue and discomfort if you're not careful. <br/>Hi. I'm Pam Smith with About.com Autos and I am going to talk to you today about car ergonomics for long driving trips.<br/><H3>What is Car Ergonomics?</H3>Car Ergonomics simply defines keeping the fatigue and discomfort levels low by avoiding stress to the body while driving.<br/><H3>Defining a Road Trip</H3>What is a long driving trip? Some experts say 15 minutes is considered a long travel time in a car especially when you are not sitting properly and comfortably. <br/><H3>Seat Position for your Road Trip</H3>Positioning is the most important aspect of driving without fatigue and discomfort. Let's start with the seat. Make sure the height of the back rest reaches your shoulders. It is best to sit back into the seat to get better back support. Assume a fairly upright position. <br/><H3>Knees and Legs for your Road Trip</H3>Your knees should not be higher than your hips. The low-riding driver with a reclined seat could get side aches and lumbar pain over time.<br/><H3>Arm Position for your Road Trip</H3>Keep both hands on the steering wheel and avoid hanging one arm partially out the window while driving. This will prevent shoulder and or arm aches.<br/><H3>Foot Position for Road Trips</H3>The left foot should be positioned on the dead-pedal and the right foot should be able to reach the break and accelerator without stretching the legs.<br/><br>Finally, take regular breaks when traveling long distances so that you can stretch your legs.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Autos.About.com.<br> aboutvideo_6440 Fri, 29 Feb 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Anne-Hathaway-Interview.htm Anne Hathaway joined Steve Carell and director Peter Segal to talk about the big screen version of 'Get Smart' in front of an enthusiatic Wonder Con crowd. Hathaway takes on the role of Agent 99 in the film version, with Carell playing Maxwell Smart. Anne Hathaway, get smart, movie, interview 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Anne Hathaway, get smart, movie, interview Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2008 San Francisco Wonder Con.<p> <h3>Anne Hathaway ('Agent 99' in <i>Get Smart</i>)</h3><p> <b>Are you freezing?</b><p> Anne Hathaway: "No, I'm nervous, sorry."<p> <b>You're nervous? What are you nervous about?</b><p> Anne Hathaway: "Oh, I'm always nervous about doing these things. Oh, yeah."<p> <b>After all these years of doing interviews, you're still nervous?</b><p> Anne Hathaway: "Oh, completely. When I was up there doing the panel, my heart was just &#150; I was having palpitations. At the moment I was like, 'Please, another question for Steve. My heart needs to calm down.'"<p> <b>Tell me about taking on a role that was made famous by another actress. Is that an extra weight on your shoulders or do you even think about that when you're doing it? </b><p> Anne Hathaway: "Oh, of course you do. I loved Barbara Feldon growing up too, I knew how the fans must feel with the idea that she was being recreated so that was very much in my mind. Not as kind of an insurmountable obstacle, but more as just like a really friendly challenge. I was very excited to try&#133; I mean, you could never recreate what Barbara Feldon did. She was so magical and created an iconic role. But I love the path that she left open for my 99 to follow. So I really, you know, I just tried to do justice to her as well, humbly acknowledging that it was never going to be as good."<p> <b>How tough was that to find your own take on her?</b><p> Anne Hathaway: "You know, I don't want to sound flippant about it, but it wasn't as tough as you think &#150; only because we're in a different time period. You know, Barbara Feldon herself said that she felt 99 was written to be a very traditional woman. It was just that amazing magical quality that Barbara Feldon had that I think made 99 so iconic. I think that, you know, the character 99 influenced women of the generation that passed laws that affected my generation to allow me to play 99 as a totally independent woman. So that's what I mean, just living in the world we live in, it was just easier to create an independent character. It was much harder for her to."<p> <b>When they're throwing out the improv, which we know Steve Carell does so much, how tough is that for you to hang onto? </b><p> Anne Hathaway: "Well, there's that initial moment where you feel&#133; You know on a plane when you feel like you've lost altitude? There's that moment, and then once that's over, you just have to listen really carefully to what the other person is saying and just trust that if you don't know exactly where it's going to go, that the other person has you. I'm lucky because where I fingerpaint, Steve is an extract expressionist with improv. But it was really nice. But with it, somehow I fit in there. I was just very thrilled to get to do it."<p> <h3>More on <i>Get Smart</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/getsmart/a/getsmart011808.htm">Behind the Scenes of <i>Get Smart</i></a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/getsmart/a/getsmart072807.htm">Interview with Director Peter Segal</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/getsmart/"><i>Get Smart</i> Photos, News, Credits, and Trailer</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/carellsteve/">Steve Carell Films, Photos, and Interviews</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/hathawayanne/">Anne Hathaway Photos and Movies</a></li><p> aboutvideo_3898 Tue, 06 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/entertaining/Thanksgiving-Family-Tradition.htm Thanksgiving isn't just about home cooking and a hearty meal with your family -- it's also about giving thanks. Make the holiday more meaningful by giving back to the community with your children. Home,Family,Entertaining,Holidays,Thanksgiving,Charity,Donations 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Home,Family,Entertaining,Holidays,Thanksgiving,Charity,Donations Hi I'm Anne-Marie Barton.<br><br>If you ask your children their favorite holidays, they're sure to answer Halloween, Christmas or maybe even Easter. You almost never hear Thanksgiving. Of course it's likely because they're no pillow cases full of candy or fancy gifts to unwrap.<br><h3>Find a Thanksgiving Tradition</h3>With turkey, my mom's famous cream potatoes and my grandmother's banana cake, our Thanksgiving is pretty outstanding! But, it seems we need to look for more traditions in order to make this holiday unforgettable.<br><h3>Giving as a Thanksgiving Tradition</h3>Just as the word says, Thanksgiving is about giving and showing gratitude. So why not take this time to focus your family on serving others. There is a more unique, fulfilling joy when giving than when receiving. It's important that your children know the difference!<br><h3>Create a Thanksgiving Collection</h3>Even with the range of ages amongst my children, as Thanksgiving approaches they begin to gather up their money in preparation of the night we'll all go and buy turkeys for the poor. Try setting a jar out in the kitchen labeled "Thanksgiving Turkeys." It will help the children remember what's coming and how to spend their money, adding dollars and change until you have enough.<br><h3>Donate as a Family</h3>Bundle up the children, go as a family to the store and let them load up the cart! Followed by a drive to the local food shelter, unloading the turkey's ready to go out to the poor. You've created a memory and you've let them feel the real power in giving.<br><br>I'm Anne-Marie Barton, About Home. aboutvideo_6850 Mon, 29 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/WEB-BUTTON-IN-PHOTOSHOP-.htm You don't have to be a graphic designer to make your Website look professional. Use Adobe Photoshop tools to create custom buttons that differentiate your site from its competition and encourage user interaction. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Web Design,Online Publishing 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Web Design,Online Publishing Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing.<br><br>Today I'll teach you how to create web buttons in Photoshop for use on websites. Let's create a new document by going to File, New. I'll select preset 800 X 600 to make things easy. And click OK. <br><h3>Choose Web Button Size in Photoshop</h3>Now click on the rectangular marquee tool on the left hand tool-bar. On the top bar, change the style to fixed aspect ratio. And insert 160 for width, and 30 for height. And drag a rectangle on the screen. I'll make mine big for you to see. We can always size it down later on for our website. <br><h3>Color Web Button in Photoshop</h3>Click on the create a new layer icon on the layer palette. Now click on the gradient tool on the left hand toolset. We need to change the foreground color. Click on the foreground color box. This brings up the color picker. Under the color number box type in 33366 and click ok. <br><br>Now click the gradient box on the top bar to change the gradient. This brings up the gradient editor. We're going to change to change the gradient rectangle at the bottom of the box. It currently goes from blue to white, but we want it to go from blue to white in the middle and then back to blue at the end. Click on the color stopper on the right side of the rectangle and drag it to the middle of the rectangle. Now we'll click on the far right bottom side of the rectangle to create a new color stop. <br><br>After creating it double click on it. This brings up the color picker again. Once again we'll fill in the color number box with the number 33366 and click OK. And click OK again. <br><br>Now we re ready to create a gradient inside our rectangle. With our gradient tool selected click on the left side of our rectangle, and drag towards the right side of the rectangle. To drag a straight line hold down the shift key when clicking and dragging. Release the mouse on the right side of the rectangle edge to create a gradient rectangle. That looks pretty good. <br><h3>Stylize Web Button in Photoshop</h3>Now press down Ctrl + D on a PC, cmd + D on a mac to release the rectangle. <br><br>Now right click on our button layer in the layer palette or cmd click on a mac to select blending options. Click on stroke on the bottom blending options. Make sure stroke is highlighted so you can adjust settings. Click on color in the settings. Under color number type in 999999 and click ok. <br><br>Raise the size to 10. And click ok. <br><h3>Add Text to Web Button in Photoshop</h3>Now click on Horizontal Type tool on the left-hand toolbar, and position the tool in the middle of our button. I'll type the word HOME to make a home website button. You may have to adjust the text and move it around. <br><h3>Finalize Web Button in Photoshop</h3>Now select the rectangular marquee tool on the left-hand toolbar. Under style select normal. And draw a rectangle around the button. Make sure the rectangle hugs the button closely.<br><br>Now go to Image, Crop, to isolate our button. If you want to resize the button for web, go to Image, Image Size, to specify your own size. <br><br>Once you save this button you can import it into whatever website program you use. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com<br> aboutvideo_6399 Tue, 29 Jan 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/kidscooking/Kid-Approved-Hot-Dog-Soup.htm Get your kids involved in the kitchen when you whip up this tasty hot dog soup! Your little ones can cut up the hot dogs and other ingredients with plastic knives while you get the stew going. hot dog, soup, kid friendly, recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. hot dog, soup, kid friendly, recipe Hi, I'm Chef John Mitzewich for About.com. Today we have a delicious recipe for kids of all ages. It's called Hot Dog Stew. <h3>Prepare the Hot Dogs and Potatoes</h3> Alright, kids love hot dogs. So we're going to use 8 of them. We're going to cut them in 6 pieces each - have the kids help you with these. They can use a plastic knife - get them involved. You're probably going to do this - this is 2 pounds of potatoes. Peel them and cut them in 2-inch pieces. <h3>Heat the Hotdogs</h3> We're going to take the hot dogs and add them to a kettle with 1 tbsp of butter. And on medium heat give them a nice little saut&#233;. To that add 1 clove of garlic, of this was for adults we would add more, maybe some onion, but this is for the kids. We're going to cook that about a minute. <h3>Stir in the Soup Ingredients</h3> We're going to add 3 cups of tomato sauce or puree, I'm using plain tomato puree. Then add 3 cups of water or stock, a teaspoon of salt, pepper to taste, and we're also going to add 1 tsp of Italian seasoning which is going to give this a little bit of a pizza sauce aroma which is going to fool the kids. Add a little dash of sugar, 1/2 tsp, and add the potatoes, and bring to a simmer. <h3>Prepare Vegetables for the Hot Dog Soup</h3> While that's simmering, we're going to prep our beans. So the potatoes are going to get a 5 minute head start. We're going to take 8-oz of green beans and cut them in thirds. Again, the kids can help you with this using a plastic knife. Add the beans and give it a stir, and while that's simmering we're going to prep our zucchini. <h3>Slice the Vegetables Into Fun Shapes</h3> Now, kids don't like zucchini, but they will in this because we're going to do some tricks. The first one, is we are going to make it into an interesting shape. We're going to cut it in half and then cut in at 45-degree angles. Each time we cut, just turn it and cut it making triangles. Kids love pointy food. So there you go. <br><br> We're going to take a bell pepper and trim it up. Remove the seeds and cut out the white membrane. This is the bitter part of the pepper and why some kids don't like peppers. We're going to cut that in the triangle shape also. Kids love the geometric stuff going on. Hey, you can talk geometry while you're cooking. <h3>Add Veggies to the Soup</h3> Stir the zucchini and the peppers into the potato mixture that had about a 10-minute head start. We're going to cover that and simmer it for about 15-20 minutes, until everything is tender. The kids will like the vegetables is they are cooked through and tender and sweet. Don't make them eat crunchy, bitter vegetables. <h3>Make a More Mature Hot Dog Stew</h3> The reason this is so good for kids; it reminds them of tomato soup, it reminds them of pizza, kids love potatoes, kids love hot dogs, and hopefully they had fun cutting things up. If you want to make this a little more adult you can add some Italian sausage instead, add a little sprinkle of Italian parsley. <br><br> I really hope you give this a try. You're going to love it. It's easy, it's fast, and it's fun to make. Enjoy. Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us at About.com. aboutvideo_6594 Fri, 13 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Jon-Favreau-on-Iron-Man-2.htm Jon Favreau directed one of the summer of 2008's biggest hits, 'Iron Man,' and he's ready to step back behind the camera for more 'Iron Man' adventures with Robert Downey Jr. The only hold up: he hasn't been hired for the job. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the World Premiere of <i>The Incredible Hulk</i>.<p> <h3><i>Iron Man</i> Director Jon Favreau</h3><p> <b><i>Iron Man</i> opened so huge, but it was not just fans of <i>Iron Man</i> that turned out. Was that what you were expecting?</b><p> Jon Favreau: "Yeah, I mean, what was nice about <i>Iron Man</i> I think because of the humor, because of the cast that we had, it opened itself up to an audience beyond just the core comic book audience. I think that's important when you're making movies that are supposed to be big summer movies. You have to include everybody. And so we started off with our core fans and then it sort of spread as word of mouth spread that the movie was actually good. And even if you didn't know who Iron Man was, you might have a fun time."<p> <b>And Comic Cons and things like that really helped this movie, didn't they?</b><p> Jon Favreau: "Comic Con helped put us on the map because <i>Iron Man</i> wasn't really a mainstream Marvel hero. But the fans of Comic Con knew who he was and by the word of mouth spreading on the internet, and the trailer going on the internet, it eventually spread and then the general public became curious about the guy."<p> <b>This one's so successful. Is it going to be tough to top it with the next one? You set the bar so high.</b><p> Jon Favreau: "Well hopefully I'll get to work on the next one. If I do, I think those are good problems&#133;"<p> <b>What do you mean 'hopefully' you'll get to? </b><p> Jon Favreau: "I'm not really involved with it yet officially. Hopefully we'll all work it out. We'll see where their priorities are."<p> <b>You know the direction it wants to go, right?</b><p> Jon Favreau: "Oh yeah. I mean, creatively we definitely have been excited talking about it. Even when we were making this first one, we're talking about what would we do in <i>Iron Man 2</i> and in <i>The Avengers</i>. And I know Robert (Downey Jr) and I did a lot of discussing of different plotlines when we were traveling promoting the film. So hopefully everything will get worked out and we'll get to work soon."<p> <b>What would stop you from being the director?</b><p> Jon Favreau: "Them not hiring me."<p> <b>Oh come on &#150; there's no way.</b><p> Jon Favreau: "I don't know. I don't know where their head's at. We'll see. It's been a month now so I was hoping I would have been working on it already. But you know it's a small company, it's a new company. They have to choose the way they want to go about their business. And hopefully now that <i>The Hulk</i> is coming out, I'm sure it's going to do very well and then their next priority is going to be <i>Iron Man 2</i> at that point."<p> <b>Is there a director's cut for <i>Iron Man</i> or was this your director's cut? Will we see anything different on the DVD?</b><p> Jon Favreau: "There will be additional stuff on the DVD that we couldn't put in, but it's not stuff that I would have put into my cut. The movie plays as it is and you have to make choices to&#133; I think the movie wanted to be about two hours so I chose not to really make a longer film. I didn't think the content really warranted it. But there are cool things that would not fit in the film that might be fun for the fans to see, so we're including that on the DVD."<p> <b>And you get to act next in <i>Four Christmases</i> with Vince Vaughn.</b><p> Jon Favreau: "That's right, I'm in <i>Four Christmases</i>."<p> <b>Is that relaxing?</b><p> Jon Favreau: "Yeah, yeah, it is nice. <i>Four Christmases</i> and <i>I Love You, Man</i> I also just acted in. So hopefully we'll start working on this next film and I'll be back to directing, back to my day job."<p> <h3>More Coverage of <i>Iron Man</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/ironman/fr/ironman050108.htm"><i>Iron Man</i> Movie Review</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/ironman/"><i>Iron Man</i> Trailers, Video Clips, Photos, Poster and Credits</a></li><p> <h3>More on <i>The Incredible Hulk</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/theincrediblehulk/ig/The-Incredible-Hulk-Photos/index.htm"><i>The Incredible Hulk</i> Photo Gallery</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/theincrediblehulk/"><i>The Incredible Hulk</i> Trailers, Video Clips, Poster and Credits</a></li><br> <li>More on the Stars of <i>The Incredible Hulk</i> - <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/nortonedward/">Edward Norton</a> and <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/tylerliv/">Liv Tyler</a></li><p> aboutvideo_6690 Mon, 07 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Hancock-Premiere-Interviews.htm The stars of 'Hancock' - Will Smith and Charlize Theron - practically ran down the red carpet but the film's director Peter Berg, producer Akiva Goldsman, and a few members of the cast stopped to chat before taking in the special Hollywood screening. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the Hollywood Premiere of Columbia Pictures' <i>Hancock</i>.<p> <h3>Director Peter Berg</h3><p> Peter Berg: "I think we all wanted to try and do something different, wanted to make a different kind of superhero film, and that was nerve-wracking. Fortunately we had a great movie star in Will to go for it."<p> <b>What's the appeal of bringing an anti-hero story to the big screen?</b><p> Peter Berg: "It just felt fresh, you know? It felt like there had been a lot of superhero films that had attempted to do that, or have done it. Certainly Spider-Man or Batman have dark sides. And we wanted to explore that in a slightly funner way."<p> <h3>Producer Akiva Goldsman</h3><p> <b>In this summer of superheroes, what makes this one stand apart?</b><p> Akiva Goldsman: "Alcohol consumption. Yeah, yeah, there's a lot of it. And breakage, damage, property damage &#150; a lot of that. Crying&#133; There's a lot of crying."<p> <b>All important things to a superhero movie.</b><p> Akiva Goldsman: "Yeah, that's about it."<p> <b>So, what was the appeal of bringing this story to the screen?</b><p> Akiva Goldsman: "Oh it's a wonderful&#133; It's always been a wonderful idea, this notion of superheroes who are flawed."<p> <b>This script has been around a while.</b><p> Akiva Goldsman: "Forever. It took 15 years, when this script sort of first appeared. It's taken a long time to get to the screen."<p> <h3>Jason Bateman ('Ray') and Thomas Jane</h3><p> Thomas Jane: "Hey, hey, whoa, whoa pal. Easy on the clothes here. Just ask, you know? Just ask."<p> Jason Bateman: "I play a PR agent that saves Thomas Jane's life in the film."<p> Thomas Jane: "That's right. Too bad I got cut out. But he's still in the movie for some reason."<p> Jason Bateman: "But he's in a DVD extra that will be worth the price."<p> Thomas Jane: "Somehow they replaced him with a guy named Will Smith."<p> Jason Bateman: "He's a comer. You keep your eye on him."<p> <h3>Liz Wicker ('Female Cop')</h3><p> <b>Working with Will on this, your character is in trouble and you get rescued. What was it like being rescued by Will Smith?</b><p> Liz Wicker: "Everybody keeps asking me that. They're like, 'Did he smell good?' I'm like, 'Of course, yeah.'"<p> <b>Even with that hot uniform he had on?</b><p> Liz Wicker: "I know. Well we both had really hot, thick, crazy uniforms on. It was really funny. Well, he had on leather and that was kind of fun. I don't know&#133;"<p> <h3>Daeg Faerch ('Michel')</h3><p> <b>You have to be mean to Will Smith, so how tough is it to be mean to Will Smith?</b><p> Daeg Faerch: "Well, as an actor you just got to kind of get into your zone and just, 'I am Michel. I am a bully. I don't care who it is.'"<p> <h3>Chris Daughtry</h3><p> <b>Chris, who's your favorite superhero?</b><p> Chris Daughtry: "Batman. Hancock tonight."</b><p> <h3><i>Hancock</i> Resources:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/library/weekly/blhancockpicsa.htm"><i>Hancock</i> Photo Gallery</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/hancock/ig/Hancock-Premiere-Photos/index.htm"><i>Hancock</i> Premiere Photos</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/hancock/"><i>Hancock</i> Trailer, Video Clips, Credits, and Poster</a></li><br> <li>More on the Stars of <i>Hancock</i> - <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/smithwill/">Will Smith</a> and <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/theroncharlize/">Charlize Theron</a></li><p> aboutvideo_4608 Fri, 30 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/windows/Schedule-Daily-Automatic-Task.htm Need some help keeping up with your busy calendar? These handy automatic tasks will help you stay on top of everything. Learn how to schedule a daily automatic task in Windows. tasks, schedule, daily automatic, windows, vista 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. tasks, schedule, daily automatic, windows, vista Hi I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I'm going to show you how to schedule an automatic daily task in Windows. <h3>Open the Start Menu</h3> <ul> <li>RIGHT-CLICK start button</li> <li>CLICK 'Properties'</li> <li>CLICK Start tab</li> <li>CLICK Start Menu option</li> </ul> <h3>Start a Task</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK Start button</li> <li>CLICK Search</li> <li>TYPE 'man' in search box</li> <li>DOUBLE-CLICK on 'Computer Management'</li> <li>CLICK 'Continue'</li> <li>CLICK 'Task Scheduler' on left panel</li> <li>CLICK 'Create Task' on right panel</li> <li>TYPE name and information about task </li> <li>CLICK the Triggers, Action, Condition or Settings tab based on what you want to do</li> </ul> <h3>Set an Automatic Task Date</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK Triggers tab</li> <li>CLICK New</li> <li>TYPE start and end time/date for the task and whether it occurs once, daily, monthly, etc.</li> <li>CLICK 'OK'</li> </ul> <h3>Choose an Action for the Task</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK Actions tab</li> <li>CLICK New button</li> <li>CLICK Start a Program</li> <li>CLICK Browse to find program you want</li> <li>OPEN program you want</li> </ul> <h3>Adjust the Daily Task Conditions</h3> <ul><li>CLICK Conditions tab to adjust more preferences, such as limiting the task to when your computer is not idle or on AC power.</li> </ul> <h3>Adjust the Daily Task Settings</h3> <ul> <li> CLICK Settings Tab to adjust additional options for your task. </li> </ul> <h3>Edit the Task</h3> <ul> <li>DOUBLE-CLICK Task Scheduler on left panel of the Computer Management Console window</li> <li>DOUBLE-CLICK Task Library</li> <li>DOUBLE-CLICK on you task on the list to edit it. </li> </ul> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_3739 Fri, 26 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Indoor-Home-Video-Tips.htm Our home videos are prices records of our personal histories. Unfortunately most of us don't have the time or equipment to make professional-quality home movies, but by following these tips, your videos will be as fun to watch as they were to make. Home Video,Video Tips,Video Camera,Video Lighting 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Home Video,Video Tips,Video Camera,Video Lighting Hi, I'm Leann Bello with About.com Gadgets. <br/><br/><h3>Indoor Home Video</h3>Home videos are priceless records of our personal histories. They help us to keep our memories alive, or to share important events with friends and family.<br/>Most of us don't have the time or equipment necessary to properly shoot, light, and edit our videos, but that doesn't mean our videos can't look great and be entertaining for all our friends and family. When shooting home videos inside, there are several steps you can take to make them look and flow better.<br/><br/><h3>Home Video Lighting</h3>First, don't shoot against a window, turn the person around and stand in front of the window. Joey is much easier to see when he is being lit by the window. or use a backlight button. Joey is much easier to see when he is being lit by the window.<br/>Natural light coming from a window is more flattering than overhead light.<br/>If you don't have enough light in the room, get a camera light or lamp or check if your camera has a manual exposure button. Manual exposure brightens the image.<br/>A great way to make your subject brighter is to use a lamp coming from the direction of the camera to provide fill light for the subject.<br/>Try to stay close to the subject so you can see her face.<br/><br/><h3>Home Video Editing</h3>Make Cuts. Remember to turn off your camera when not in use. For example, Barbara wants to share old photographs of her family. A great way to make this home video exciting is to have the narrator speak while shooting each photograph individually.<br/>"These photographs and letters are so precious to me. They mark my family history. They're from my great grandmother and document what she exchanged with my cousin in England." <br/>Video shot without Cuts vs. Video shot with Cuts. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, please visit us on the Web at Gadgets.About.com.<br/><br/> aboutvideo_6897 Tue, 13 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Music-in-Movie-Maker.htm The right music can add interest and flow to any video. Learn how to add this essential production element to your videos with Windows Movie Maker. Computing,Programs,Software,Windows Movie Maker,Import,Music,Videos,Music 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Windows Movie Maker,Import,Music,Videos,Music Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll teach you how to add music to projects in Windows Movie Maker. Once you've created your movie in the timeline you may want to add music or sound effects. Music and sound effects are a good way to increase the production value of your film. <br><h3>Movie Maker Music Import</h3>To add audio click on the task button, and click on Import Audio or Music, under the Capture Video task. You can also go to File, Import Into Collections, to select audio. This brings up the Import File window. Under file types click the dropdown menu and select Audio and Music Files. <br><br>I'll find some of my original music and hit the Import button. Our music is imported into the Collections folder. <br><br>If you have a lot of music, click on the collections button and right click on collections and click new collection. I'll rename this collection... music. <br><h3>Organize Music Imports</h3>Next I'll drag my music file from the general collections folder to the music folder. I do this to keep my collections folder organized. In a project with lots of files it's easy to lose track of files and organizing them into folders helps me keep track of them. <br><h3>Incorporate Music into Timeline</h3>Now I'll drag my music onto the timeline. The music is much longer than my video, so I'll hit the unzoom tool a few times. Next I'll position my mouse on the edge of the music file and drag it to the left to fit my project. <br><h3>Music Properties- Transitions</h3>You can right click on the music to change properties. You can mute the music, and add a fade in and fade out to make the music seamlessly merge into the video. <br><h3>Music Volume</h3>And you can adjust the volume. <br.<br>You can also change the audio properties on your video clips so that just your music is present. I'll right click on my video clip ad choose mute. To play your music, drag the play head to the beginning and press the play button. <br><br>And that's how you add and work with music in windows movie maker. Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_3497 Thu, 01 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/videocardr3-mov.htm Wondering how you can output your video files to your television and other AV screens? Learn how you can install a video card into a desktop PC in just a few minutes. DIY,Computing,Gadgets,Computer Hardware,Video Card,Television,Video Capture,AV 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. DIY,Computing,Gadgets,Computer Hardware,Video Card,Television,Video Capture,AV Hi I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing and today I'm going to show you how to install a video card in a desktop PC. <br><h3>Before You Install a Video Card</h3>First, turn off the computer and unplug the power cord. <br><br>Next, open the computer. Some computers have a button or buttons that you press to open the box. Some have screws on the rear of the case which must be removed. I just need to remove the screws on the back of the case. <br><br>Slide the casing back. Now you have access to the inside of your computer. <br><h3>Locate AGP Slot to Install a Video Card</h3>First, you must locate your AGP slot which is the special video card slot on your mother board. Sometimes these can be hidden below wires, so you may need to gently push those aside. <br><br>It is normally located at the top of all the slots on your motherboard and is slightly shifted to the right. <br><h3>How to Install a Video Card</h3>Remove the PC card slot cover. Some computers have easy lift-off slot covers while most have screws. I'm just going to remove the screw and pull off the cover. <br><br>Let's take a look at the video card. As you can see there is a little hook at the end. This will either be hooked or clamped at the end of the slot. <br><br>Next, align the video card directly over the slot in the motherboard. First, hook or clamp the end of the card. Now, gently press down on both the front and back of the card into the slot until it is snug. <br><h3>After You Install a Video Card</h3>Once the card is seated in the slot, screw or fasten down the card to the case at the PC card slot. <br><br>Close up your computer and plug in all of your cables. <br><br>Attach your monitor cable to the new video card and boot up your computer. <br><br>When you start up the computer, the screen should function normally. If your computer came with any software, install it once your operating system has loaded to optimize the performance of your video card. <br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_6739 Tue, 29 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Brendan-Fraser-Mummy-3.htm 'Mummy' newcomer Luke Ford called his onscreen dad Brendan Fraser the &quot;number one green screen actor in the world.&quot; Green screen king Fraser returns for more fights and another tangle with a vengeful mummy in 'The Mummy: Tomb of the Dragon Emperor.' 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2008 San Diego Comic Con.<p> <h3>Brendan Fraser &#8211; 'Rick O'Connell' in <i>The Mummy: Tomb of the Dragon Emperor</i></h3><p> <b>Going back into this franchise, how easy is it to fall into this character?</b><p> Brendan Fraser: "Piece of cake. Like falling off a log. I couldn't wait to do this and had to for seven years. And I was running out of excuses. People were going, 'Hey Brendan, when's the next <i>Mummy</i> movie? When's the next <i>Mummy</i> movie?' I said, 'I don't know! I'm waiting for the call.'"<p> <b>What took so long?</b><p> Brendan Fraser: "You know, honestly, that's someone farther up the food chain than I am to be able to answer that question. But it doesn't really matter so much as the fact that that time has gone by. CGI has come to such a place right now - as we discussed - with the advent of 3D, if you can imagine it, you can put it on the screen. And so where do you go from there? Well, you bring the audience into the world of the movie, and that's what we did with <i>Journey to the Center of the Earth</i>. But with <i>Tomb of the Dragon Emperor</i>, again it's endowed with incredible CGI. That's what the audience expects. That's an element of the entertainment value that they paid for to come and see. So during the interim, the seven years that it's been since we did the last picture, like I said anything at all is possible."<p> "That also gave us enough time to take advantage of a new audience also coming of age. It's not compulsory to have seen the first two pictures. This one stands on its own. I know I'm supposed to say this stuff, but it's really exciting, dynamic filmmaking. It has a sense of humor about itself. Never fails to deliver on the cliffhanger moments. It's a happy coincidence that it's set in China and the eyes of the world are upon it at the moment."<p> <b>Great timing.</b><p> Brendan Fraser: "Yeah. Call that dumb luck or whatever you want but the point is, we're able to take advantage of a lot of really positive energy. And in creating the heavy in a despotic emperor who ruled some 2,000 years ago and his army was cursed for doing a naughty thing&#8230; Usually it has something to do about a girl, like in those movies, and they became the Terra Cotta warriors. So, those of us who do know &#8211; who are archaeology buffs or wannabes like myself &#8211; hey, those really exist. And it's a little bit creepy to me, this is just me, that they all have different faces. You know, it's a little [<i>makes freaky noises</i>]. Why? Well maybe because they took 40 years to make different faces. I don't know. Whatever. But it's fun source material for a movie."<p> <b>You mentioned the CGI but it doesn't overwhelm the character development, the character story in this, right?</b><p> Brendan Fraser: "You can't have that. You can't. If you don't care about the people in the movie, then you're just watching a CGI exhibition. That's fun on the 4th of July, you go watch fireworks. But if you don't care about the people in the movie, if you don't have something to identify with &#8211; in this case it's fathers and sons knocking skulls... I mean, come on, who can't identify with that? It's about searching for lost love. It's about reuniting a family, saving the world. You know, who are you going to call?"<p> <b>And you have a new director [Rob Cohen] on this one so how difficult was it to make the transition to a new guy, or was it?</b><p> Brendan Fraser: "There was no difficulty whatsoever given that Rob&#8230; Well, Steve Sommers godfathered the picture and devised the premise, and executive produced it from afar. He did what the best directors do which is hire the right people, stand aside, and let them do the job and do it well. And in that he chose a director, who's Rob, who knows how to move big set pieces just like Steve does. Oh, I should mention also it's interesting, it's no coincidence that when Rob was a student at Harvard, he was an archaeology major with an interest in Chinese studies. So it was a passion piece for him to be able to bring this together. So what can I say? On top of that, he's fearless. This is the largest picture ever shot on Chinese soil. It's a Western production. The cooperative elements that go into that&#8230;if you think about the hurdles and the red tape and things that I really can't answer to, but I just do know that there's a common vocabulary in filmmaking that to my eye and experience seems to be universal. It transcends the boundaries of the fact that there were five working languages on the set, the locations were difficult to get to. In the end filmmaking is about, 'Hey, we're only here once. Suck it up. Do this the right way. Get the job done,' because it's going to last forever if you're doing the job right."<p> <b>One last question: Is there a <i>Mummy 4</i> in you?</b><p> Brendan Fraser: "I'll see if there's enough fluid in my knees."<p> <b>If your body can take it.</b><p> Brendan Fraser: "Right. I'm leaving my options open. Thanks for asking though."<p> <h3>More on <i>The Mummy: Tomb of the Dragon Emperor</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/themummy3/ig/The-Mummy-3-Photos/index.htm"><i>The Mummy: Tomb of the Dragon Emperor</i> Photos</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/themummy3/"><i>The Mummy: Tomb of the Dragon Emperor</i> Trailer, Video Clips, Posters, and Cast Interviews</a></li><br> <li>More on <i>The Mummy</i> Star <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/fraserbrendan/">Brendan Fraser</a></li><p> aboutvideo_6799 Mon, 29 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Sepia-tone-look-in-photoshop.htm There's a quaint and beautiful look to older, black-and-white photos. With Adobe Photoshop, you can mimic that sepia-toned, antiqued appearance for your images in just a few easy steps. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Effects,Graphic Design,Design,Art 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Effects,Graphic Design,Design,Art Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing.<br><br>Today I'll teach you how to give your photos a sepia tone antique effect in Photoshop. <br><br>I've already opened Photoshop and have a picture of myself open. If you have a color photo available, open it right now. <br><h3>Common Way to Create Photoshop Sepia Effect:</h3>I'm going to show you two methods for creating sepia toned photographs. I'll show you how a lot of people do it, and then I'll show you my method.<br><br>For the first method first make a copy of your picture by dragging your picture onto the create a new layer button.<br><br>Now select the copy layer and de-saturate it. Click on image, adjustments, and select de-saturate.<br><br>Now create a new layer by clicking on the create a new layer button.<br><br>Now double click on the foreground color. And click on the Red channel box and type in a value of 65. That s a good rich brown for sepia. Now click OK. <br><br>Now click on the gradient tool on your toolset and hold it down. Select paint bucket tool under gradient and click on the layer to fill it brown. Now click on the blending layers over your layers toolbox and select color. Now select opacity on your brown layer and take it down to about 35 percent.<br><h3>Recommended Way to Create Photoshop Sepia Effect:</h3>That's the first method for creating a sepia effect. The method I prefer is much simpler. First trash the brown layer and de-saturated copy. For the second method click on create a new fill and adjustment layer and select hue/saturation.<br><br>Click on the colorize button. Now adjust the Hue until you find a rich sepia brown. I'll settle on a setting of 14. And now lower the saturation a little to 18. Click on OK.<br><br>With this method you can easily adjust the color and saturation in realtime by double clicking the adjustment layer. Click OK.<br><h3>Difference Between Sepia Methods in Photoshop</h3>With the first method you de-saturated your picture and destroyed it in the process. With my method you can make changes in realtime without affecting your original picture.<br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com.<br> aboutvideo_4610 Mon, 26 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/windows/Useful-Accessories-in-Vista.htm If you're learning the ins and outs of Windows Vista, then these useful accessories are ones you should try out. Learn how to use Vista's calculator, paint, and sticky note accessories. Useful Accessories, vista, windows 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Useful Accessories, vista, windows Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I'm going to show you some useful accessories in Vista. Accessories are tools that allow you to do basic activities on your computer such as making calculations, painting, and creating sticky notes. <h3>Open the Vista Accessories Folder</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK Start menu / All Programs / Accessories Folder</li> <li>CHOOSE accessory to use (i.e. calculator, paint, sticky note)</li> </ul> <h3>Windows Vista Calculator Accessory</h3> You can type in numbers by using your keyboard or clicking on the numbers with your mouse. Click on the backspace key on the computer or keyboard if you make a mistake. Click on the function you want to use on the computer. Press the equal button to get your result. <br><br> <b>Complex Calculations</b><br> To make complex calculations, click 'Scientific' from the view button in the tool bar of the calculator. You can choose to use a different numbering system by clicking on degrees, radians, or grads. Enter your numbers and click on the function you want to use to calculate. <br><br> <b>Statistical Calculations</b><br> You can do statistical calculations by clicking on the 'Sta' button. A window will appear. Type your number into the calculator then click the Dat button to add it to the statistic box. To delete an entry from the box, click 'CD.' To get the average of the numbers, click 'Ave.' To get the sum, click on 'sum,' and click on 's' for the standard deviation. Close the box when you're finished. <h3>Windows Vista Paint Accessory</h3> You can paint in this window by using the pen or airbrush tool. You can type by clicking on the 'A.' Create a textbox by clicking and dragging your mouse to form a rectangle. Then start typing. To change the size or font of your text, click on the text box and a tool bar will appear that will allow you to adjust the text settings. You can color the background by clicking the bucket tool. Then choose a color to paint your background by clicking here. Then click on the palate with your bucket tool. <h3>Windows Vista Sticky Notes</h3> To write a sticky note, go back to your accessories menu and click on the Tablet PC folder&#61664;sticky notes. You can use this application to write a quick note. For example, I will write pick up milk. You can keep the sticky note up on your desktop to view at all times. To write a new note, click 'New Note.' You can also drag and drop your note into a Word document like this. <p></p> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6891 Wed, 31 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Final-Cut-Pro-video-capture.htm Once you have video footage that you're ready to edit, you can capture and log segments easily in Final Cut Pro. See how to log and capture videos and learn tricks to make this process easier. Computing,Gadgets,Software,Final Cut Pro,Capture,Digitize,Tape,V 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Gadgets,Software,Final Cut Pro,Capture,Digitize,Tape,V Hi, I'm Don Schecter for About.com Computing. Today, I'll teach you how to log and capture your video footage in Final Cut Pro. <h3>Supplies Needed to Log and Capture Videos</h3> I'll need my mini DV camera, which has a firewall connection here. There are multiple types of firewire connections. Cameras require a 4-pin firewire cable on one end, while computers can have a 4- or 6-pin connection. My laptop has a 6-pin connection. <h3>Connect Your Camera and Computer</h3> I'll connect a firewire cable to my laptop, and then into my camera. Make sure you remember to turn on your camera, and set it on its VCR mode for playback. <h3>Begin Log and Capture in Final Cut</h3> After you've connected your camera to your computer, open up Final Cut Pro. Under 'File,' go to 'Log and Capture.' This brings up the log and capture window. On the top, you'll see how much free space there is on your hard drive and how many minutes you can capture. <h3>Simple Capture in Final Cut Pro</h3> The most basic capture method is to click the play button, and under 'Capture' on the right side, click on 'Now.' A capture screen pops up playing what's being captured. To stop capturing, hit the ESC button. This creates an untitled clip in our browser window. You can click on it to rename it. <h3>Set Capture Reference Points in Final Cut</h3> A more versatile way to capture is to press play again, and when you get to the beginning of what you want to capture click on the 'Mark In' icon. You can also press the letter 'i' for a shortcut. <br><br>When you get to the end of what you want to capture, click 'Mark Out' icon, or press the letter 'o' for a shortcut. Hit the play button to pause the video. We haven't actually captured the video, just set two reference points. To capture, click on the clip button under capture. <br><br>A window pops up. Give the clip a name - if you want you can give a log note description, and hit 'OK.' Now Final Cut will automatically rewind the tape and capture that one clip. <h3>Batch Capture in Final Cut Pro</h3> A space-saving method for capturing is to log your tape and to batch capture. This means you'll make a list of everything on your tape and you can decide later what parts you want to capture. <br><br>First, make sure you give each tape a number or name in the reel field. Now I'll press play again, set your 'In and Out' markers for the clip. Hit the play button to pause. And now I'll click on the log clip button. Now we'll name our clip (we can also give it a description) and click 'OK.' <br><br>We'll do this one more time. I'll hit the play button, set 'In and Out' points and hit pause again. And hit Log Clip. I'll name it and give a description. <h3>Choose Clips to Batch Capture</h3> In our browser window, you'll see captured clips which we can click on and view, and our newly-created log clips. These clips have a red line through them. This means they haven't been captured yet. <br><br>If you double-click on them, they say media offline. We need to batch capture our logged clips to use them. If you don't want to capture all of your logged clips select the ones you don't want and hit delete. I want them both so I'll go to edit, undo. <br><br>To capture the clips go back to the log and capture window and hit 'batch' under 'capture.' Let's change the drop-down menu to capture all offline clips and hit 'OK.' <br><br>It asks you to insert the right tape and hit continue. Final Cut will now rewind and capture those two clips. And once it's done, the red lines are gone and your clips are ready for editing. On a big project, this can save you a lot of time. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6885 Tue, 13 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Windows-Movie-Maker-editing.htm The difference between an effective and a boring video is tight editing. Learn the basic steps to get started editing your raw footage with Windows Movie Maker. Computing,Software,Windows Movie Maker,Editing,Movies,Videos,Film,Television 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Software,Windows Movie Maker,Editing,Movies,Videos,Film,Television Hi. I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. Today I'll teach you how to edit your clips in Windows Movie Maker. <br/><h3>Edit Timeline</h3>When you start up Movie Maker, you may see the storyboard on the bottom. I like editing on a timeline, so click on the Show Timeline button. <br><br>When you capture your video, it's stored in the Collections Folder. Click on it to view your clips. <br/><h3>Basic Movie Maker Clip Edit</h3>To do basic editing, click and drag a clip into the timeline. Make sure you drop your video into the video track. If the video appears too small, click on the zoom tool. You can add a second clip and drop it next to the first clip. <br/><h3>Trim Edits</h3>If you want to trim the length of the clip, click on the edge of a clip and drag it. Click on top of the timeline and drag to move around a play head. <br/><h3>Split Edits in Movie Maker</h3>If you want to split a clip into two clips, make sure the clip is selected, and move the play head to where you want to cut. Now click on the Split Clip icon. <br/><h3>Deleting</h3>We can now delete one of these two new clips by pressing delete or we can move it to another spot. <br/><h3>Adding Transition in Movie Maker</h3>If you take a clip and drag it over another clip in the timeline, Movie Maker automatically inserts a dissolve between the clips. <br><br>That's the shaded area. If you right click on the dissolve, you can select fade in, fade out or other video effects. <br/><h3>Clip Preview</h3>The default preview screen is on your right. If it's too big or too small you can drag the edge. Now I want to watch my movie. You can position the play head at the beginning of the timeline and press the Play button or you can right click and choose Play Timeline. <br/><br/>And that's how you edit clips in Windows Movie Maker. Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_6530 Wed, 16 Apr 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Rainn-Wilson-Interview.htm Rainn Wilson plays Dwight in the hit TV series 'The Office' which keeps him fairly busy (now that the strike's over). But he had time to take on a starring role in 'The Rocker' and is lending his voice to the animated film 'Monsters vs Aliens.' rainn, wilson, interview 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. rainn, wilson, interview Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the World Premiere of <i>Leatherheads</i>.<p> <h3>Rainn Wilson ('Dwight' in <i>The Office</i>)</h3><p> <b>Did the break reinvigorate you?</b><p> Rainn Wilson: "Yeah, look at me. Don't I look reinvigorated? I'm filled with vigor. I am reinvigorated."<p> <b>How is it to be back with <i>The Office</i> cast?</b><p> Rainn Wilson: "It's my second family. It's like John Krasinski, tall guy plays Jim, and Jenna [Fischer] are my brother and sister I never had, and Steve [Carell] is like my crazy drunken uncle that touches me in inappropriate places."<p> <b>I've always wondered watching the show, how do you guys keep it together?</b><p> Rainn Wilson: "We don't. We laugh constantly. We laugh all the time. There's a million outtakes of laughing and if we can get two or three where we don't laugh, those are the ones that make it into the show."<p> <b>And you've also got <i>The Rocker</i>, right?</b><p> Rainn Wilson: "<i>The Rocker</i> is coming out August 1st. I play a former heavy metal drummer who gets a second chance at fame. It's a really awesome family rock and roll comedy."<p> <b>How easy is it to tap into your inner rock star?</b><p> Rainn Wilson: "You know what? It was easy. I loved it. You look at this face and you just see rock and roll, right?"<p> <b>And you're also doing a voice in <i>Monsters vs Aliens</i>?</b><p> Rainn Wilson: "Yes, I am. I'm doing the voice of&#133;I play an evil alien warlord named Gallaxhar."<p> <b>Do you get to look at the character while you're doing it so that you can get into the evil?</b><p> Rainn Wilson: "Yeah, they show pictures of him all over. And they film you when you do it so you can kind of get into character. Oh my god, it's Jonathan Pryce, oh my god..."<p> <b>Do you change up your voice much?</b><p> Rainn Wilson: "Yes, I have a crazy alien voice. I can't give you a sneak peek though because I signed a confidentiality agreement."<p> <b>But you came up with it yourself?</b><p> Rainn Wilson: "Yes, I came up with it myself. The fun thing is I get to be like I was five years old pretending to be an alien, only now I get paid for it."<p> <b>That's always a nice perk.</b><p> Rainn Wilson: "Yeah, it's a good thing."<p> <h3>Also of Interest:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/therocker/"><i>The Rocker</i> Resources</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/monstersvsaliens/">More on <i>Monsters vs Aliens</i></a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/leatherheads/">Coverage of <i>Leatherheads</i></a></li><p> aboutvideo_6228 Tue, 29 Jan 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/apartments/Humane-Mouse-Removal.htm The unexpected visit you get from a mouse probably makes your skin crawl, but you might not feel comfortable killing these unwanted guests. Learn easy and organic tricks for preventing, repelling, and removing mice from your home, the humane way. mice, mouse, mouse trap, remove mice, get rid of mice 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. mice, mouse, mouse trap, remove mice, get rid of mice Hi my name is Danielle Lessovitz for About.com. Mice may be cute and furry, but they make horrible pets. In fact they carry disease. Snap traps, glue traps, and poison are all relatively effective and available at your local grocery store, but some of us may not like the blood and gore that come along with them. <br><br> So what alternatives are there for those of use who want to get rid of mice without killing them? In the next few minutes I'll show you how to get ride of mice the friendly way. <h3>Supplies to Get Rid of Mice Humanely</h3> Here's what you will need:<ul> <li>peppermint oil</li> <li>cotton balls</li> <li>steel wool</li> <li>3 brick-shaped items</li> <li>peanut butter</li> <li>a five-gallon bucket</li> </ul> <h3>Clean the Mouse-Infested Area</h3> First we will want to eliminate the reason for why the mice are here in the first place: food. Make sure to clean your countertops thoroughly and never underestimate the power of a good sweep. <h3>Repel the Mice With Peppermint Oil</h3> Next we will want to repel the mice, for this we will need our peppermint oil. Pour a generous amount of peppermint oil onto a single cotton ball. You'll want to place the cotton ball in the area the mice frequent, in the living room, on countertops on the kitchen floor. The peppermint is simply too strong for their noses. Continue this process until there is a cotton ball with peppermint oil present in every problem area. <h3>Close Off Mouse Entry Areas</h3> Next we'll want to prevent the mouse from reentering the house. The easiest entry points are along access lines such as water, gas and electric lines. This simplest and most effective way to plug up these holes is to simply insert steel wool in the hole. Tear off a piece of wool that you think is appropriate amount and stuff it into the empty space. Common alternatives to the steel wool are wire mesh and spackle and foam. And that should do the trick now. <h3>Construct a Humane Mouse Trap</h3> I'm going to show you what to do if you still have mice, and that of course is to make a trap that catches mice without killing them. It is not the most beautiful decorative piece, but it will work. Place your bucket in an area where mice frequent, grab your peanut butter and spread a small amount on the inside of your bucket. This is the bait, now take your bricks, or in my case, cigar boxes and stack them vertically. This will be our mouse staircase. The mice will be lured to the bucket and will fall in while trying to eat the peanut butter. Then you can pick up your bucket and set your mice free in whatever natural environment you think suits them the best. <br><br> Thanks for watching, to learn more please visit us on the Web at homegarden.about.com. aboutvideo_6421 Fri, 01 Feb 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Matthew-McConaughey-Interview.htm Matthew McConaughey reunites with Kate Hudson for Fool's Gold, their second romantic comedy together. On the red carpet at the film's world premiere, McConaughey talked about teaming up again with Hudson and life on the very interesting set. Matthew McConaughey, interview, fool's gold 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Matthew McConaughey, interview, fool's gold Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the World Premiere of <i>Fool's Gold</i>.<p> <h3>Matthew McConaughey ('Finn')</h3><p> <b>Why is your shirt on in that poster?</b><p> Matthew McConaughey: "You can see a little bit."<p> <b>And Kate has a bikini.</b><p> Matthew McConaughey: "You don't want to advertise everything up front."<p> <b>But it's a movie for women.</b><p> Matthew McConaughey: "No, I wear a T-shirt throughout this thing. I had to steal that one T-shirt though."<p> <b>Did you?</b><p> Matthew McConaughey: "Yeah, because my boat blows up at the beginning and everything I have is on it. And I steal the next T-shirt, too. And then the suit is given to me."<p> <b>Yes, but this is a movie for women so why aren't you naked or practically naked?</b><p> Matthew McConaughey: "Come and check it out! Come and have a look! What do you want me, up there in a Speedo so you can laugh? No."<p> <b>That would be fine.</b><p> Matthew McConaughey: "No. Come and see it. She looks good in a bikini, doesn't she?"<p> <b>How was working with Kate again?</b><p> Matthew McConaughey: "We had a ball."<p> <b>It's been a couple of years, right?</b><p> Matthew McConaughey: "It's been four years, yeah."<p> <b>Has she changed much?</b><p> Matthew McConaughey: "Not really. Things have changed in her life. She's a mother now and stuff but she didn't change that much. No."<p> <b>Was it easy to reconnect?</b><p> Matthew McConaughey: "You know, we didn't have to work at it. Part of what works for her and I is you feel us connected, but then we're very disconnected. You feel us get together, but then we're in a fight. You feel us, you know, love each other and then we can't stand each other. And that works the same way with her and I in real life. It's great. We come [together] and then we're a pain in each other's backside, but then we come back together. There's a brother and sister thing that we kind of&#133;I don't know. It kind of works."<p> <b>And then she hits you with a cane.</b><p> Matthew McConaughey: "And then she hits me with a cane. But then she wants to divorce. I've just got to get her head right. I've got to get her head right. She's off in Neptune. I don't know where she is."<p> <b>And this whole diving thing is comfortable for you?</b><p> Matthew McConaughey: "Yeah, I've done that before. But I got over 100 dives in this one, on the show. On the show."<p> <b>Wow. How do you keep in shape to do that?</b><p> Matthew McConaughey: "Want some of these M&Ms?"<p> <b>Why did someone give you M&Ms?</b><p> Matthew McConaughey: "I got handed these very early. Want some? Diving, no, you don't have to be in that good a shape to dive. No, not to dive you don't."<p> <b>Were you afraid of the jellyfish and the sharks? That's a very dangerous place.</b><p> Matthew McConaughey: "Irukandji, sharks&#133; I had two pythons in my tree where I was living. Two pythons &#150; 8 &#189; foot amethystine pythons living in a coconut tree right out in front of my spot. Everything's cool when I see he's in the tree everyday, but then I come home after a month and he's gone. Now you don't sleep so well. Checking under the bed, under the mattress, in every single closet and I couldn't find that SOB. So, it was a wild shoot. We had sharks. I'm diving and I see bull sharks coming by. Thankfully we weren't on the menu. The one thing that ran us out was this little jellyfish called the Irukandji. It's this little thing the size of your pinkie nail. It came in these waters; it spawns at this certain time of year when the water is a certain temperature. It attacks the central nervous system and you have to go, the pain is so much you have to go to the hospital and get on a morphine drip for 72 hours. Well, that doesn't sound like too much fun so we moved locations twice. But that was part of the fun of it is that it was a pretty good adventure in the making of it, you know?"<p> <b>You knew that's what you were signing on for.</b><p> Matthew McConaughey: "Yeah, yeah."<p> <h3>More Coverage of <i>Fool's Gold</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/foolsgold/ig/Fool-s-Gold-Premiere-Photos/index.htm"><i>Fool's Gold</i> Premiere Photos</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/foolsgold/"><i>Fool's Gold</i> Trailer, Credits, Interviews and Poster</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/mcconaugheymatt/">Matthew McConaughey</a> and <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/hudsonkate/">Kate Hudson</a> Resources<p> aboutvideo_7945 Wed, 30 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Gerard-Butler-RocknRolla.htm Gerard Butler, a Comic Con crowd favorite (and no, not just the ladies like him even though it may seem that way), returned to San Diego to talk about his role in Guy Ritchie's action-comedy 'RocknRolla.' 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2008 San Diego Comic Con.<p> <h3>Gerard Butler &#8211; 'One Two' in <i>RocknRolla</i></h3><p> <b>No codpieces, no masks, just you?</b><p> Gerard Butler: "I know, it's weird, huh? I feel a little bit naked, even though in <i>300</i> I was actually naked &#8211; and my face, I had my beard, my&#8230; In this I don't have any of that. I have to rely on my personality, that's not something I'm very good at."<p> <b>Working with Guy Ritchie, he has such a specific sensibility, what was this movie like for you?</b><p> Gerard Butler: "It was very specific. You kind of knew you were in a Guy Ritchie movie right from the start and the only thing that was different was&#8230;"<p> [<i>Idris Elba is being interviewed next to Butler and Elba calls Butler his twin brother</i>]<p> Gerard Butler: "This guy is talking&#8230; I don't understand how that happened. Can you imagine the two of us popping out together? That'd be a little&#8230; Mom's like, 'What the hell happened there?'"<p> <b>There'd be some questions asked.</b><p> Gerard Butler: "You get on a set, it's full of boys quipping jokes, you know like ripping the shit out of each other. And then you've got Guy Ritchie with a script that's hilarious. I mean, you can't wait for these scenes to start because you know you're going to have a blast together. So it was kind of like that. It's kind of different for me. You do movies that are so intense and then you do a&#8230; Now this was intense because of the kind of stuff that you're pulling off. It's a blast, you know?"<p> <b>Really?</b><p> Gerard Butler: "Oh yeah. It's so much fun."<p> <b>But it's action-packed?</b><p> Gerard Butler: "It's a lot of action but it's a comedy. It's a lot of dialogue. It's a lot of personality and character. It's Guy Ritchie. It's not all action. It's kind of got a mix of all of those things and that's why it's great because you know people are climbing into you and the boys and relationships and fun, and the shit you get up to and the trouble you get yourself into. That's what he does best. Genius."<p> <b>And he really counts it down for you&#8230;5, 4, 3, 2?</b><p> Gerard Butler: "Oh, you heard about that? I've never&#8230; I tell other directors now, 'You want to get a move on? Just start shouting out 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, because I'll tell you what, no matter what, they'll be ready.' It's kind of insane."<p> <h3>More on <i>RocknRolla</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/library/weekly/blrocknrollapicsa.htm"><i>RocknRolla</i> Photos</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/rocknrolla/ig/RocknRolla-Photos/index.htm">The <i>RocknRolla</i> Cast at Comic Con Photo Gallery</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/rocknrolla/"><i>RocknRolla</i> Trailer, Credits, and News</a></li><br> <li> More on <i>RocknRolla</i> Stars <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/butlergerard/">Gerard Butler</a></li> and <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/pivenjeremy/">Jeremy Piven</a><p> aboutvideo_6910 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Broccoli.htm After you buy a fresh bunch of broccoli, there are many ways you can prepare it at home. Learn how to cut up broccoli and cook it in water, on the stovetop, and in the microwave. broccoli,cook,prepare,vegetable,side dish,vegetarian,cooking,recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. broccoli,cook,prepare,vegetable,side dish,vegetarian,cooking,recipe Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you 3 different ways to cook fresh broccoli. <h3>Choosing Broccoli</h3> First, you need to wash your broccoli. At the store, look for broccoli with lively green leaves and firm, thin stalks. The tree or florets should be closed and a dark green color. <h3>Cutting Broccoli</h3> Pull off any of the green leaves and cut the florets off the stalk. Try to separate or cut the florets into pieces of equal size for even cooking. You can eat the stalk and use it in your cooking as well, but remember that it cooks at a different rate than the florets. <h3>Steaming Broccoli</h3> There are two ways to use boiling water to cook your broccoli. To steam it, boil 1 to 2 inches of water, put on your steamer, add the broccoli and cover. Take off the cover every once is a while to release the steam to preserve the broccoli's color. Steam the broccoli for 5 to 7 minutes so it's soft on the outside, but still with a slightly crunchy on the inside. <h3>Blanching Broccoli</h3> You can also blanch your broccoli, this will really bring out a bright green color. Heat a quart of water (or enough to cover your broccoli). Once boiling, add your broccoli and cook for about 1 minute. Drain the broccoli, and pour cold water over it to stop it from cooking any further. <h3>Stir Frying Broccoli</h3> You can also Saut&#233; or stir fry your broccoli with some spices. Today I'm going to use garlic, oil and some red pepper flakes. First I'm going to put in the stalks, wait one or two minutes and then add the florets. Cook for 5 minutes and serve. <h3>Microwaving Broccoli</h3> Another easy way you can cook broccoli and keep all its nutrients is to microwave it. Put your broccoli and some water in a microwave safe dish and microwave for about 4 minutes.<br/><br/>Loaded with vitamin C and vitamin A, broccoli is a great dish to add to any meal. Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6812 Sun, 28 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/The-Photo-Filter.htm It's all too common for our photos to seem great if not for an unflattering yellow, green, or other tint. With Adobe Photoshop's Photo Filter, you can adjust the color of your digital pictures, reconciling them with the memories they document. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Re-touch,Graphic Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Re-touch,Graphic Design Hi. I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I am going to show you how to use the photo filter with Adobe Photoshop CS 2 to make your digital pictures look nicer. <br><h3>Choose a Picture for Photoshop Photo Filter</h3>First, I am going to open up Adobe Photoshop. Go to File, Open and select your digital picture. <br><br>One of the many problems with this picture is that it is too green. See those walls? They would look better if they were white or had some orange sunlight hitting them. <br><h3>New Layer for Photoshop Photo Filter</h3>On the bottom right of the screen click on the Create New Fill or Adjustment layer. <br><h3>Locating Photoshop Photo Filter</h3>It's the icon that looks like a half-filled-in circle. Choose Photo Filter. If the Preview button is already checked, you'll see your image adjusted right away. A Warming filter has been automatically applied to it. <br><h3>Choosing Photoshop Photo Filter Features</h3>If you click on the tab next to filter, there are actually many presets, ranging from various warming and cooling filters to a sepia filter.<br><br>If you want to create your own filter you can click on the square next to the word Color. Here you can choose what color to make your filter. I will choose a shade of orange. <br><br>You can move the density slider to make the effect more or less pronounced. Click on the preview box to see your effect before, and after.<br><br>When you're happy with what you've done, just click OK. <br><br>The Photo Filter is a quick and easy way to change the overall color of your digital pictures.<br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at Computing.About.com.<br> aboutvideo_4847 Tue, 17 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Larry-Miller-Interview.htm Funnyman Larry Miller showed up to have some fun at the premiere of Evan Almighty and was more than willing to talk about two of his upcoming movies - Bee Movie with Jerry Seinfeld and Blonde Ambition starring Jessica Simpson and Luke Wilson. larry miller interview, red carpet interview, blonde ambition, bee movie 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. larry miller interview, red carpet interview, blonde ambition, bee movie Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the World Premiere of <i>Evan Almighty</i>.<p> <h3>Larry Miller</h3><p> <b>What's happening with <i>Bee Movie</i>?</b><p> Larry Miller: "<i>Bee Movie</i>'s going to be really, really good. Look, in comedy there's only funny and not funny and Jerry Seinfeld is funny. The guy's been funny in everything he's ever done, and this is a funny idea. I love all this work. Acting, comedy writing, I really love it a lot so sure. The call came in and said, 'Let's do this thing,' and who wouldn't? You would. Everyone would. It's going to be funny."<p> <b>Were you allowed to improv doing this character?</b><p> Larry Miller: "Some yeah, but remember when he writes&#133; He used to write for the TV show and when he and Larry David wrote together those were meaty words. That's already funny so all you have to do is show up, as Spencer Tracy used to say, 'Just show up and don't bump into the furniture.'"<p> <b>Who do you play in <i>Bee Movie</i>?</b><p> Larry Miller: "I play Mr Belson, the owner of the honey company Honex. I should know that, shouldn't I?"<p> <b>Is he a good guy?</b><p> Larry Miller: "He's not only a good guy but he's very, very powerfully attractive to women (laughing). It's not written that way but I certainly think I bring that to it. It's very, very potent for the 18 to 49 women. Again, not conventionally seen that way, but that's certainly what I feel (laughing). "<p> <b>You've also got <i>Blonde Ambition</i> with Jessica Simpson. That's a remake so were you leery of that?</b><p> Larry Miller: "No. Remake? Oh goodness no. Are you kidding? You can remake <i>Richard the Third</i>. That's a remake. This is off of <i>Working Girl</i>. And it's got really great people&#133;Penelope Ann Miller, Jessica Simpson. And also Luke Wilson. We had a really good time there and Scott Marshall directed it. I worked for him in <i>Keeping Up With the Steins</i>. I've known him for years. He's Garry Marshall's son. This is a really solid pedigree they have. More people who know what's funny. "<p> <b>So it's not a remake then, it's a re-envisioning of it?</b><p> Larry Miller: "It's taking the concept of a woman going into a large company and making her way. An innocent in the big city. I play her boss who is very surprisingly attractive to the women in the 18 to&#133; I'm just going to keep saying that by the way. (laughing). 'Gee, that's not at all what the part is.' 'Yes, it is. It is now.'"<p> <h3><i>Bee Movie</i> Resources:</h3> <li><a href="http://video.about.com/movies/Evan-Almighty-Cast-Interviews.htm"><i>Bee Movie</i> Trailers</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/beemovie/"><i>Bee Movie</i> Credits, Poster and Movie Photos</a></li><p> <h3>More Coverage of <i>Evan Almighty</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://video.about.com/movies/Evan-Almighty-Cast-Interviews.htm">Steve Carell, Tom Shadyac, Johnny Simmons and Graham Phillips Interviews</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://video.about.com/movies/Evan-Almighty-Interviews.htm">Interviews with Wanda Sykes and John Michael Higgins</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/evanalmighty/"><i>Evan Almighty</i> Trailers, Poster and Credits</a></li><p> aboutvideo_3602 Mon, 03 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Organize-and-Share-Picasa-Pics.htm It's easy to share digital photos, artwork, or pictures with family and friends when you know how to organize them in Picasa! See how to organize and share pictures in Picasa. Computing,Programs,Publications,Picasa 2,Pictures,Photography,Gr 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Publications,Picasa 2,Pictures,Photography,Gr Hi I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I will show you how to organize your pictures using Picasa 2, a free photo organization, editing, and sharing tool provided by Google.com. It is an easy way to view, share and save your digital photos. <h3>Choose Pictures to Share in Picasa</h3> <ul> <li>OPEN Picasa</li> <li>SCROLL through folder on left side of screen to find photos</li> <li>CLICK on picture and it will appear larger on right</li> <li>CLICK buttons on top of screen to scroll through other photos in that album</li> </ul> <h3>Add Photos to Picasa From Devices</h3> <ul> <li>INSERT CD</li> <li>CLICK Import (top left) </li> <li>CLICK Select Device</li> <li>CHOOSE which device (CD, Camera, folder, etc) to get photo</li> <li>SELECT photos to import individually and CLICK Import Selected or CLICK Import All for all the photos in that device/folder</li> <li>NAME the picture's folder</li> <li>CLICK Finish</li> </ul> <h3>Create New Picasa Album</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK icon for new album (top left sidebar) </li> <li>FILL-IN album's name, date, location, etc. </li> <li>CLICK OK</li> </ul> <h3>View Photos in Picasa</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK Slideshow button on top of screen</li> <li>CLICK Timeline to search for picture taken at a certain time</li> </ul> <h3>Favorite Pictures in Picasa </h3> <ul> <li>CLICK photo on screen so it is in photo tray</li> <li>CLICK Star Button on bottom of screen when photo is selected to add it to your favorites</li> <li>CLICK Add To button where you can add a photo to your screensaver album or favorites</li> </ul> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4163 Tue, 21 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/webdesign/Formatting-Text-in-HTML.htm If you want to create headings or add emphasis by using bold or italicized text, then these simple HTLM tags will do the trick. Learn how to format text in HTML. Format Text in HTML - How to Format HTML Text - Bold - Italics 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Format Text in HTML - How to Format HTML Text - Bold - Italics Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to format text using HTML. <h3>Open an HTML Document</h3> First open Notepad. I'll open an HTML document that I saved by right clicking the file, selecting 'open with' and, choosing Notepad. Make sure that your HTML document has the proper tags for HTML, head and body. <h3>Create HTML Headings</h3> First we'll create headings within the body of the document. Between the body tags, type 'h1' in brackets, followed by the end tag. Between the two tags type 'This is heading 1.' H1 through H6 are headings in different sizes. It is a great way to organize your webpage. <br><br> Type the rest of the headings in to see what they look like. Different browsers may display headings differently. <h3>Format Text in HTML: Bold</h3> To make your text bold, type 'strong' in brackets. Close the tag and type 'This text is bold.' This tag will look the same on any browser. The physical tags like 'b' for bold and 'i' for italic looked different on different browsers, so they shouldn't be used anymore. <h3>Format Text in HTML: Italics</h3> To make your text italic, use the 'em' tag, for emphasis. Type 'This text is italicized' and your end tag. Again, this will look the same on any browser. <h3>Format Text: Bold and Italic</h3> You can also nest your text to make it both bold and italic. Type 'This text is bold and italic.' Type the em tag on either side of the text. Now type the strong tags outside of the em tags. It helps to write your start tags and end tags at the same time so you're not missing anything when you view it in a browser. <h3>Preview the HTML-Formatted Text</h3> Make sure to save your document with an .html file type and close Notepad. Now click on your document to see it in your browser. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6970 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/lowfatcooking/Sweet-Potato-Fries.--6F.--6F.htm A healthier substitute for traditional fries, these sweet potato fries are cut into slices, seasoned, then baked to perfection. sweet potato fries,french fries,bake,snack,side dish,low fat,vegetarian,potato 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. sweet potato fries,french fries,bake,snack,side dish,low fat,vegetarian,potato Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you a healthy version of sweet potato fries. <h3>Sweet Potato Fries Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>2 or 3 sweet potatoes</li> <li>2 egg whites or 1/4 cup egg substitute</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon cumin </li> <li>1/2 teaspoon chili</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon garlic</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon onion powder</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Sweet Potatoes</h3> First preheat the oven to 425 degrees. Wash and scrub your sweet potatoes. Do this especially well if you want to keep the skin on for the fries. Today I'm going to peel the potatoes. Use 2 or 3 sweet potatoes to make the fries. Look for potatoes that are smooth, plump, dry, and clean of cuts and dents. <h3>Cut the Sweet Potatoes Into Strips</h3> Using a stainless steel knife, cut the potatoes in half and then into strips. For thinner fries, cut those strips in half again. Keep cutting so they are as thin as you like. Put your strips into a plastic bag for later. <h3>Season the Sweet Potato Fries</h3> Whisk 2 egg whites or 1/4 cup of egg substitute. This will help give your fries a crispy taste. This will also help our seasonings stick to our fries. For seasoning, you could just mix in some salt and maybe a little paprika, or you can flavor them with some spices. <br><br>Today I'm going to make a spicy Mexican-flavored mix using half a teaspoon each of cumin, chili, garlic, and onion powder. Whisk your egg mixture again and pour it into your bag. Shake the fries all around the bag so they are coated evenly. <h3>Prepare to Bake the Fries</h3> I like to line the pans with parchment paper for easy clean up. Coat your pans with non-stick cooking spray. Pour your fries on the pan, and try to spread out a single layer on each pan. When the fries are more crowded, they are not as crispy. <h3>Bake the Sweet Potato Fries</h3> Put them in the middle of the oven for 15 minutes. Pull out the pans and flip over the fries. If you can't flip them, just move them around a bit to make sure they are cooking on all sides. Put them back in the oven for another 15 minutes. Take out the pans, remove the fries, and serve while they are nice and hot! <h3>Serve and Enjoy the Sweet Potato Fries</h3> You can dip them in ketchup, guacamole, mayonnaise, or whatever your family enjoys. Be sure to refrigerate any leftovers.<br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4432 Tue, 04 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/spreadsheets/Export-Data-From-Excel-to-Word.htm Copying Excel cells into a Word document is just one way to transfer data between the two programs. Find out how to easily export data from Microsoft Excel to Word. export, data, excel, word, sheet, document 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. export, data, excel, word, sheet, document Hi I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I'll show you how to export data in Microsoft Excel to a Word document. <h3>Copy Excel Cells to a Word Document</h3> <ul> <li>OPEN Excel and Word</li> <li>SELECT the range of the table you want in Excel</li> <li>CLICK Edit / Copy </li> <li>CLICK Edit / Paste in Word*</li> </ul> *The sizes of the cells are different, but you can play with the size of the table. <h3>Export Excel Data to Word</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK File / Save As for Excel document</li> <li>CLICK 'CSV (comma delimited)' or 'Text (tab delimited)' option for its file type</li> <li>RENAME File, now it is a .csv file</li> <li>CLICK File / Open in Word and open the .csv file you just made</li> <li>CLICK Table / Convert / Text to Table</li> <li>SELECT at bottom to separate text by commas</li> <li>CLICK OK</li> </ul> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_7949 Wed, 30 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Rain-Ninja-Assassin-Comic-Con.htm Rain's very enthusiastic about his lead role in the Warner Bros/Dark Castle action thriller 'Ninja Assassin' and his appearance at the 2008 San Diego Comic Con brought out equally enthusiastic fans. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2008 San Diego Comic Con.<p> <h3>Rain &#8211; 'Raizo' in <i>Ninja Assassin</i></h3><p> <b>Tell me about getting ready physically. How do you play a ninja assassin?</b><p> Rain: "You know, I killed too many in <i>Ninja Assassin</i>, my film. Maybe it's a big martial arts film for international and for martial arts guys, you know? I think you're going to like it. Please wait for <i>Ninja Assassin</i>. It's very fantastic."<p> <b>Did you know any martial arts before you started the film?</b><p> Rain: "Yes. I learned Tae Kwon Do, it's Korean martial arts, and I learned for this movie I learned so many martial arts and ninja expressions and ninja techniques and ninja martial arts. You're going to like it."<p> <b>Are you going to keep practicing now that you're done with the film?</b><p> Rain: "No. Never work out. I hate work out. That's enough. Just kidding."<p> <h3>More on <i>Ninja Assassin</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://video.about.com/movies/Matthew-Fox-Speed-Racer.htm">Another Interview with Rain on <i>Speed Racer</i> and <i>Ninja Assassin</i></a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/library/weekly/blninjaassassinpicsa.htm"><i>Ninja Assassin</i> Photos</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/ninjaassassin/"><i>Ninja Assassin</i> Credits and News</a></li><p> aboutvideo_6896 Tue, 13 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Export-in-Movie-Maker.htm Once your video's on the Web you can share it with friends and family in an instant. Learn how to export with Windows Movie Maker so the best possible version of your video is shared. Computing,Programs,Software,Windows Movie Maker,Export,Quicktimes,Videos,Web 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Windows Movie Maker,Export,Quicktimes,Videos,Web Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. Today I'll teach you how to export your movie for the web using Windows Movie Maker. <br><br>Once you've created your movie in the timeline you may want to export your movie. We can export our movie for the web, and in other formats. To export go to File, Save Movie File. <h3>Where to Save Windows Movie Maker Export</h3> Under location select My Computer and click next. I'll enter a file name, and click Browse to choose a place to save my movie. I'll choose the desktop and click, OK. Now I'll click Next. <h3>High Quality Export</h3>Now we'll set our export settings. I'll click the first setting for best quality, and click on Next. It takes a little time to export, so be patient. <br><br>When it's done make sure the, Play movie when I click finish, box is selected and click Finish. And there's our project at full video quality. This is useful if you want to import your video into a DVD authoring program. <h3> Windows Movie Maker Export for Web</h3> Now I'll show you how to encode and shrink your film for the web. I'll close the movie file and again go to File, Save Movie File. <br><br>I'll select my computer and click Next, I'll name the file Movie web. Since I just saved to the desktop its still listed, so I'll click next. Under Movie settings click Show more choices. And then click Other settings. <br><br>When I click the dropdown menu I see lots of choices for exporting. I'll click High quality video large. <br><h3>Web Video Sizing</h3>If you look at the setting details, the display size is 640 by 480 pixels. This setting is good for high quality web video. I'll click the dropdown menu and click High quality video small. <br><br>When you look at settings, the display size is 320 by 240 pixels, half the size of the high quality setting. This setting maintains high quality with a smaller filesize. I'll use this one and click Next. <br><br>Now it's exporting. After its finished I'll click, Finish to watch it. That looks pretty good to me. And that's how you export your video from Windows Movie Maker. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_7874 Thu, 07 Aug 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Jared-Padalecki-Interview.htm Jared Padalecki is used to dealing with supernatural beasts and otherworldly creatures on a weekly basis on the TV series 'Supernatural,' but he has to face off against a real psycho - Jason Voorhees (played by Derek Mears) - in 'Friday the 13th.' 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2008 San Diego Comic Con.<p> <h3>Jared Padalecki - <i>Friday the 13th</i></h3><p> <b>Is that really truly the first time you've seen the poster?</b><p> Jared Padalecki: "It's really the first. This is the first time I've seen the poster. I have been crazy and all over the place so finally I got a chance to."<p> <b>Your opinion?</b><p> Jared Padalecki: "Bad ass."<p> <b>Your face isn't on it.</b><p> Jared Padalecki: "Maybe I'll add like in a marker just write like, 'Jared Padalecki.'"<p> <b>Or draw your own face on there.</b><p> Jared Padalecki: "If I saw this, I'd see the movie. If I saw my face, I'd be like, 'Nah.' This is so much cooler. Nice. <i>Friday the 13th</i>, nice."<p> <b>What is the appeal of starring in a <i>Friday the 13th</i> movie?</b><p> Jared Padalecki: "I actually got involved in this, I'd been a fan of the other movies that the production company had made &#8211; like <i>Amityville Horror</i> and <i>Texas Chainsaw Massacre</i>. And I was actually a big fan. When I did the <i>House of Wax</i>, the director had us watch the <i>Chainsaw Massacre</i> with Jessie Biel. We all sat around and watched it and were like, 'Man, that's really cool.' They paid homage to the original but also did their own thing. It was new and it was raw. It was kind of gritty and earthy. I remember thinking, 'Man, that was a really cool movie. I wish I could have been a part of it.' And then this was years ago, long before they announced they were doing <i>Friday</i>. And then when this came up and I sort of started looking up who's doing it and I saw it was the same company and the same director even. I was like, 'Dude!,' a no-brainer."<p> <b>Is it that kind of tone, the dirty and gritty, or is it more like the original <i>Friday the 13th</i>?</b><p> Jared Padalecki: "It's sort of a mixture. It's not the faded film, I don't think, unless they color treat the film. But it's a lot more real. Like, the original <i>Friday the 13th</i>'s pretty cheesy. I love them for what they are but they're pretty campy and corny. This is definitely more a real raw, scary, edge of your seat scare, like real nerve-wracking. Not sort of like, 'Ewww, cool!' I mean there's going to be a lot of 'Ewww, cool kill,' and cool moments, but it's not just about waiting around till the next kill happens. There's some cool stuff that happens."<p> <b>Does it stick with the original storyline or are you guys revamping it?</b><p> Jared Padalecki: "It's sort of a remake and sort of a new revamp. Obviously the original <i>Friday the 13th</i> the killer was not even Jason, it was his mom. So here, as you see from the mask, we're fighting Jason so that's different enough. But also, we go back to Camp Crystal Lake. The outline is there but what happens in the script is a lot different."<p> <b>Do you actually fight Jason?</b><p> Jared Padalecki: "I do fight Jason. I fight him more than once."<p> <b>How cool is that to fight Jason?</b><p> Jared Padalecki: "So cool. So weird. There'd be times when we'd be doing a scene and I'd kind of be like, 'This is so cool,' and then getting back ready to do it. And then Derek, the guy who plays Jason, the actor who plays Jason, is such a physical presence&#8230; Like he, I'm not a small guy and he is big. He's taller than I am and just muscular and very coordinated. It's rare to see a big guy who can all of a sudden move and dance around like a butterfly. So there'd be times when we'd be doing a fight scene and I'd have dirt in my eyes, all cut up, and I'd sort of start to fall. He'd just grab me and set me right back up, and then we'd carry on. It was really nice. I've gotten some experience with stunts. I'm on a show that does a lot of stunts."<p> <b>One of my favorite shows.</b><p> Jared Padalecki: "Oh really? Thank you."<p> <b>I'm a huge <i>Supernatural</i> fan.</b><p> Jared Padalecki: "Thank you. I just came from that so that's awesome. We do a lot of stunt stuff there, but it was really an honor to work with somebody who was so versed and so knowledgeable and really watched out and took care of me. So that was really nice."<p> <b>What was it like the first time you saw the mask on set?</b><p> Jared Padalecki: "It was bizarre. The first time I saw the mask on set was actually on Derek, and so that was really weird. We started out shooting exteriors, sort of all the night-time stuff &#8211; running through the woods, Jason kind of like stalking through the woods. And it was weird because Daniel Pearl, our DP, had lit the woods in such a way where it was kind of creepy. You're like, 'Ewww, I feel like I'm in a horror movie.' And then all of sudden you kind of look around and there's Derek standing in his get-up with his machete. You're like, 'Man, if he just wandered around for a little bit some little kid would have nightmares for the rest of his life, if he didn't drop dead of fear.' But it was really cool to see. It almost didn't hit you at first. You're like, 'I'm on set. I've seen a lot of cool stuff.' But thinking about it afterwards, it's like, 'Man, that was a cool experience.'"<p> <h3>More on <i>Friday the 13th</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/library/weekly/blfridaythe13thpicsa.htm"><i>Friday the 13th</i> Photos</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/fridaythe13th/"><i>Friday the 13th</i> Credits, Poster and Interviews</a></li><p> aboutvideo_3786 Tue, 06 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktoppub/Add-Word-Art-to-Publisher.htm Add some personal style to any calanders or newsletters you may have created- Learn how to use Microsoft Publisher to Add WordArt to all of your Publications. Computing,Software,Microsoft Publisher,Publications,Graphic Design,Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Software,Microsoft Publisher,Publications,Graphic Design,Design Hi. I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll show you how to add WordArt to your document in Microsoft Publisher. This is a great way to add flair to newsletters, calendars, or any other publication. First open Microsoft Publisher. You can use a pre-designed publication, but I will start with a blank one. <br><h3>Publisher WordArt Tools</h3>To insert WordArt, click the word art icon on the left sidebar. A box will appear where you can choose the style you want. I'll choose this one. Now click OK. <br><h3>Publisher WordArt Text</h3>Type in your text. Here I can adjust the font. I can also change the size and style. Click OK. Now your word art will appear on your document. Notice the WordArt toolbox. <br><h3>Publisher WordArt Fonts</h3>If you want to change the font, size or style of your text, click Edit Text. <br><h3>Publisher WordArt Type</h3>To change the type of WordArt you chose, click the WordArt Gallery icon. <br><h3>Publisher WordArt Color</h3>To change the color of the word art, click Format WordArt. Click on the color drop down menu to change the color. Click ok when you're done. <br><h3>Publisher WordArt Orientation</h3>If you'd like to rotate your text so it s diagonal, move your mouse over the green circle, click and rotate. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_4114 Thu, 15 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/windows/Free-Up-Space-in-Windows-XP.htm When you manually clean out your temporary folder, you can clear up a lot of space for your computer. See how easy it is to delete these files and folders in Windows XP. free space, space, files, folders, windows xp 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. free space, space, files, folders, windows xp Hi, I'm Don Schechter with About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to free up some space on your WinXP computer by manually cleaning out your temporary folder. <h3>Enter the Temporary Folder</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK Start Menu / Run</li> <li>TYPE %temp%</li> <li>CLICK 'OK'</li> </ul> <h3> Delete Files and Folders to Clear Space</h3> <ul> <li>HOLD CTRL key</li> <li>CLICK items to delete</li> <li>RELEASE CTRL key</li> <li>CLICK delete key</li> </ul> <h3>Delete Temporary Content to Clear Space</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK Edit / Select All (or CTRL A)</li> <li>CLICK 'OK' if you get a message saying there are hidden files</li> <li>CLICK delete key</li> </ul> If you get a message while files are being deleted that says 'Error deleting file or folder,' it just means that it is in use by a program right now. Click 'OK'. Close all your programs and try again. If you still get a message you may need to reboot and repeat the process. <h3>Empty the Recycle Bin to Finish Freeing Space</h3> After all the files have been deleted, you can go to your recycle bin and empty it, deleting the files permanently. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information visit us on the Web at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6528 Wed, 02 Apr 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Jodie-Foster---Abigail-Breslin.htm Two-time Oscar winner Jodie Foster stars as an agoraphobic writer who reluctantly sets out on an adventure to help a little girl named Nim (played by Oscar nominee Abigail Breslin) in the family-friendly film, 'Nim's Island.' Jodie Foster, Abigail Breslin, Interviews, Nim's Island 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Jodie Foster, Abigail Breslin, Interviews, Nim's Island Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the World Premiere of <i>Nim's Island</i>.<p> <h3>Jodie Foster ('Alexandra Rover' in <i>Nim's Island</i>)</h3><p> <b>What's the importance of doing a comedy that empowers females, especially little girls?</b><p> Jodie Foster: "You know, it's a great thing. There's the lightness of it, I think, for me, interested me with the character. But you're right. It's the empowerment issue with the young kids. Here's a young girl, Nim, who climbs coconut trees and wears a tool belt and fixes things, and makes her own food. In some ways the thing that's the most heroic about her is that she can take care of herself. And I can't think of a more important message for young girls, that you don't have to wait for someone to take care of you. You can take care of yourself. And it doesn't require like being a robot and having a laser or lots of CGI, that it's actually about learning, reading, and being active and coming up with stuff at the last minute &#150; and being the hero of your own life story. I think that's a very grassroots message and it kind of harkens back to those movies from the 1970s that I did, the Disney films from the 1970s, so it's exciting for me."<p> <b>And working with young Abigail Breslin?</b><p> Jodie Foster: "I knew she was good so I wasn't surprised by how good Abigail is. But it's amazing to me what a deep well of emotion that she's able to access that I really could not do at her age. That side of acting I just had no idea what that was about until I hit my late 20s, I think. It was a mysterious to me, and probably because I wasn't a born actress the way Abigail Breslin is."<p> Jodie Foster: "I love the physical part of making films. I think that's the thing that draws me over and over again because you find everything else through the physical stuff. I get excited on a day when I know I'm going to be working in a water tank or I know that I'm going to be having to repel up a building or something that requires that kind of physical concentration. So I'm always going to be looking for that."<p> <b>And the comedy part?</b><p> Jodie Foster: "And the comedy part was too fun. It was great."<p> <h3>Abigail Breslin ('Nim' in <i>Nim's Island</i>)</h3><p> Abigail Breslin: "I love animals and I think that it's really cool that there's a lot of animals in it. There's a sea turtle&#133; Well, it was an animatronic but he looks really real. And then there's two sea lions and five lizards. It was really cool &#150; and two pelicans."<p> <b>How tough was it doing all the outdoor things being that you're a city kid?</b><p> Abigail Breslin: "Well, they had to teach me how to run. Not run like a girl because apparently I do, so that was a little bit hard."<p> <b>And the underwater scenes?</b><p> Abigail Breslin: "That was fun. I thought that I was a really good swimmer until I got there and then I figured out I wasn't really that [good]."<p> <h3>Producer Paula Mazur</h3><p> Paula Mazur: "The reason I was so possessed with making <i>Nim's Island</i> was I felt that there weren't any movies that showed young girls as empowered and can do and indomitable. You know, a lot of the movies have them interested in boys and what are they wearing, and kind of more petty concerns. And here was this girl who just was running her island. And I felt like it was really important to show those type of characters. She goes beyond gender and I really wanted to get that into the world."<p> <h3>More Coverage of <i>Nim's Island</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/nimsisland/a/nimsjf032408.htm">Jodie Foster Shows Off Her Comedy Skills in <i>Nim's Island</i></a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/nimsisland/a/nims031108.htm">Curse Words Cost Gerard Butler Cash</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/library/weekly/blnimsislandpicsa.htm"><i>Nim's Island</i> Photo Gallery</a></li><br> aboutvideo_6803 Mon, 23 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/black-and-white-photo-making.htm There's something special about the classic look of black and white photos. Learn how to convert your color pictures into black and white using Adobe Photoshop. Computing,Adobe Photoshop,Graphic Design,Photos,Videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Adobe Photoshop,Graphic Design,Photos,Videos Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. Today I'll teach you how to convert your color photos to black and white in Photoshop. <h3>Turn the Color Photo Into Grayscale </h3> First, open Photoshop. Click on 'file,' select 'open' and open your picture. There are several ways to convert photos to black and white. I'll show you the simplest way, and what I feel is the most effective way. <br><br> The simplest way to make a color photo black and white is to make it grayscale. Click on 'image,' then 'mode,' and then select 'grayscale.' We've made the picture black and white - quick and simple. Most people would stop here. <h3>Take a Snapshot of the Photo</h3> If you notice, the image looks washed out. Making the image grayscale doesn't allow much room for control. I personally like my black and white photos to be rich in dark and light tones. <br><br> Let's take a snapshot of the grayscale method. Click on 'snapshot' under the History palette. We'll use it to compare our methods later on. <h3>Adjust Colors With the Channel Mixer</h3> Click on the first layer in the History palette to select your original picture. Now click on the 'create a new fill' or the adjustment layer icon, and select Channel Mixer. Click on the monochrome box. <br><br> Now adjust the red, green, and blue channels. I'll lower the red to about 36, the green to 110, and the blue channel to -6. I'll change the constant level to -10. I like how that looks. Click 'OK.' <br><br> Let's take another snapshot to capture the Channel Mixer black and white method. <h3>Compare the Photos</h3> If you look at the difference between the snapshots done with the grayscale method and the channel mixer method, you can see that the channel mixer has a more contrasted, richer look. <br><br> I prefer to use the channel mixer for black and white because it provides more control, and I can make changes in real time by clicking on the channel mixer adjustment layer. <br><br> It takes a little practice to get good results in black and white using my method, but once you get your feet wet, you'll no longer be satisfied with using the grayscale method for black and white. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_5577 Thu, 29 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/netsecurity/Create-a-Secure-Password.htm From email to online banking, you never want someone poking around in your personal information. Learn what to avoid when creating passwords, and try these tips to keep your passwords safe and secure. password, security, create password 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. password, security, create password Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to create a secure password. <h3>Why Are Secure Passwords Important?</h3> Secure passwords are necessary because there are lots of different websites that hold your personal information. Personal information is easy for attackers to find because you might use passwords that are easy to remember like birthdays, addresses, or names of children. <br><br>This is all information that a good investigator can find online or in public records. Other than being educated about identity theft and spyware, an obvious defense is having a good, easy to remember password that will be difficult to hack. <h3>Avoid Personal Info in Passwords</h3> First, do not use any personal information as your password. Things like your pets name, or the date of birth of your child can be easy to find. <h3>Avoid Actual Words in Passwords</h3> Second, try not to use real words. Some hackers have the tools and ability to guess your password. It is easy to use a program and go through all the words in the dictionary to find a match. <h3>Types of Secure Passwords</h3> You should mix different character types if it is allowed on the website you are using. You can mix uppercase letters with numbers and if possible some special characters like ampersand or pound symbols. <h3>Remembering Secure Passwords</h3> It may be difficult to remember a password if it is made up of random letters and characters, so you may want to come up with what is called a passphrase. A passphrase is usually much longer than a password, 20-30 characters, however websites limit the length of a password. <h3>Passphrase Passwords</h3> The theory of a passphrase can still be used. It can be created using the first letter from each word in a phrase, a sentence, a song lyric, or line of a poem that you like and will remember. It should be long enough to be difficult to guess. Try to stray away from famous quotes and holy book phrases.<br><br> For example, Live long and Prosper Mr. Spock <br><br> Then take the first letter of each word from that phrase. <h3>Replacing Letters in Secure Passwords</h3> Where you can, replace letters with numbers or other characters. You could switch out an L for an exclamation point or the number 1 and the letter a replaced with an ampersand. Use other standard shorthand for other words like the letter U instead of the word you. It might be a good idea to mix the cases. I used uppercase letters for Mr. Spock. <br><br> Now all you need to remember your password is that sentence or phrase. Every time you log in, you can think of that phrase. Passphrases are great because hackers won't find them in any dictionary, and its not obvious information about your life. <h3>Keeping Passwords Secure</h3> You should change your passwords every once in a while and do not reuse the same password for at least a year. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6883 Wed, 31 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Settings.htm Whether you're a professional video editor or playing around with home movies, managing Final Cut Pro Settings can make your video edit workflow a great deal more efficient. Computing,Gadgets,Software,Final Cut Pro,Media,Video,Disk Space,Hard Drive 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Gadgets,Software,Final Cut Pro,Media,Video,Disk Space,Hard Drive Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. Today I'll teach you to manage settings in Final Cut Pro. <br><br>Each time you run Final Cut Pro you need to check most of these settings for your project. <br><h3>How to Change Settings in Final Cut Pro</h3>First go to the Final Cut Pro menu, and click System Settings. This is where we tell Final Cut where to save our video clips captured from our camera. <br><h3>Media Storage Settings in Final Cut Pro</h3>For each project or movie you make you should create a new folder for all your media. If you fail to do so and keep each project set to one folder, you might lose or forget where files are down the road. <br><br>So click on the top, Set button. I'll click on the, New Folder button and call it New Movie Files, and hit Create. <br><br>There's my new folder, and I'll hit Choose. The Cache folders and autosave vault need to be set to the folder I just created. I'll click the set button for each, find the folder, and hit choose. And now I'll click OK. <br><h3>Capture Settings in Final Cut Pro</h3>Now well select our Audio/Video settings for our project. This tells Final Cut how to recognize and capture from our camera. I'll click the Final Cut Pro menu and select Audio/Video Settings. <br><br>If I'm capturing from a MiniDV camera, I'll click on the drop down menu under sequence preset and choose the DV NTSC 48kHZ setting. And make sure the capture preset is the same. <br><br>My camera connects to the computer with firewire, so I'll select Firewire NTSC under Device Control Preset. I'll make sure that Video Playback is set to Apple Firewire NTSC. <br><br>It's listed but says it's missing because my camera is not plugged in yet. I'll just click OK. <br><h3>User Preference Settings in Final Cut Pro</h3>Finally, I'll click on Final Cut Pro and click User Preferences. Here we can adjust personal preferences. <br><br>For instance, I can change the number of undo levels, or decide to save a copy every ten minutes. Once youre done click OK. <br><h3>Save Setting Template in Final Cut Pro</h3>And last well save our project. Go to File, Save Project as, and I'll select the project folder. I'll name it New Movie, and hit save. <br><br>Now we've set up our project to properly capture and manage video. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_4229 Thu, 31 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktoppub/Import-Styles-in-Publisher.htm Strapped for time? Learn how to quickly format a Microsoft Publisher document so it looks like your other word processing files. Microsoft Word,Microsoft Publisher,styles,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Microsoft Word,Microsoft Publisher,styles,videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to import Word styles into Microsoft Publisher. <br><br> This is a great way to quickly format a Publisher document to look like the rest of your word processing files. <h3>Open Documents in Publisher and Word</h3> First open Microsoft Publisher. I'll open a saved Publisher document that I would like to format. <br><br> Now, I'll open a Word document containing the style I want. To ensure that the style is saved, highlight it and go to Format, Styles, and Formatting. <h3>Create the Style in Microsoft Word</h3> On the right side, click 'new style,' and make any changes to your text. I'll change the font, color, and make it a heading. Name it, and click 'OK.' <br><br> Now you can select your style, and it will format your text. Save and close your Word document. <h3>Import the Style Into Microsoft Publisher</h3> Back in Publisher go up to Format, and choose 'styles and formatting.' On the left side, click 'import styles.' <br><br> Select the Word document containing your style, and click 'OK.' <h3>Format Text in Microsoft Publisher</h3> Under the Show dropdown menu, select 'all styles,' and you will see your style in the list. Select the text box you want to format, and then click on your new style. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_5570 Tue, 19 Feb 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/netsecurity/Protect-Yourself-From-Spyware.htm Unlike viruses and spam mail, spyware is specifically designed to monitor and track websites you visit. See how to protect your computer from spyware with just a few easy steps. spyware, protection, computer, security 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. spyware, protection, computer, security Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to protect yourself from spyware. <h3>What is Spyware? </h3> Unlike viruses and spam mail, spyware is specifically designed to monitor and track websites you visit. If it is particularly malicious, it can even identify your keystrokes and capture passwords for websites containing your personal information. <br><br>Even if you have anti-virus software, your computer may still be susceptible to spyware which will run quietly in the background all the time. There are some steps you can take in order to protect yourself from risky spyware programs. <h3>Spyware and Downloads</h3> Whenever you download a program online you may unwittingly be downloading a spyware program that comes with it. You should always read the End User License Agreement or EULA, which is the the legal document you always hit agree with in order to download a shareware or freeware program. <br><br>Many downloadable programs come with benign spyware programs to see what kinds of websites you visit so they can get a better idea of marketing strategies. If you read the EULA carefully before hitting accept, you may find that it will install spyware. If it is not worth the risk to you, you may want to choose disagree or no I do not accept. <h3>Spyware and Pop-Ups</h3> On some websites a text window will pop up and many users will not bother to read it but click Yes or Ok to make it disappear. Many of these pop-ups are essentially asking you if you want to install spyware. Its a good idea to stop and actually read the messages in these boxes. <h3>Spyware and Antivirus Software</h3> If you do have antivirus software, make sure you keep it updated. Many antivirus programs now protect your computer against trojans, worms, hoaxes, adware and spyware. Check your antivirus software to see what it covers. If it does not include spyware, you can try Adaware Pro which specializes in protecting against spyware and adware. Visit Lavasoft.com and click on Adaware for more information. <br><br> Using this program or another one like Spybot Search and Destroy you can perform system scans of your computer and remove any spyware you find. <br><br> Protecting your computer from spyware may take a little effort but its worth it to protect your identity and personal information. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6865 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/vegetarian/Eggplant-Parmesan.htm Eggplant Parmesan is a delicious and filling dinner that's easy to make at home. Learn how to make Eggplant Parmesan from scratch. eggplant parmesan,eggplant,dinner,vegetarian,fruit,italian,recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. eggplant parmesan,eggplant,dinner,vegetarian,fruit,italian,recipe Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Eggplant is a healthy and popular fruit that can be used for your entire meal. Today I'm going to show you how to prepare and bake an eggplant. I'll be making eggplant parmesan. <h3>Eggplant Parmesan Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>medium sized eggplant</li> <li>cornflake crumbs</li> <li>eggs</li> <li>garlic</li> <li>tomato sauce</li> <li>Parmesan cheese</li> <li>mozzarella cheese</li> <li>salt</li> </ul> To get started, you'll need a large knife, a vegetable peeler, a medium-sized eggplant, and some salt. <h3>Choose an Eggplant</h3> The eggplant should spring back when you apply pressure to it. There should be a green stem. <h3>Prepare the Eggplant</h3> First rinse the eggplant and cut off the stem and the base. Now you need to peel it. You can use a vegetable peeler or take a knife and just cut it down the sides. I use a peeler to get off the last little bits. Now cut thin strips about 1/4 inch wide. <h3>Salt the Eggplant</h3> Place the slices on a solid surface without overlapping them. Next generously salt the pieces. Leave them for 30 to 60 minutes, this helps reduce the moisture inside the eggplant. Then rinse off and pat dry each slice. <h3>Bread the Eggplant</h3> Next we bread the eggplant. Beat some eggs and dip your slice fully in the egg. I'm using cornflake crumbs as my breading. Use your other hand to coat the wet slice with the breading. You want one hand to be wet from the egg and one hand to be drier with the breading. For this tutorial, I am going to make a small two serving dish with just these 6 slices. <h3>Fry the Eggplant</h3> Pour some oil into a pan over medium heat. Throw in some garlic and place your slices in the pan. Give each slice plenty of room to cook and every once in a while take a peek to check the color. When they're a nice golden brown, flip them over. <h3>Layer the Eggplant Parmesan</h3> Now spray your baking pan and pour down a layer of tomato sauce. Place a layer of eggplant. Top with parmesan, and a layer of mozzarella cheese. Throw down some more sauce and keep layering the eggplant, parmesan and mozzarella. <h3>Bake the Eggplant Parmesan</h3> Put it in the oven and bake at 350 degrees for 30 minutes. And there it is. Enjoy! <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3541 Sat, 03 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/pcsupport/PCIcard-mov.htm Learn how to install a PCI Card in a Desktop PC so you can connect new hardware or devices to your computer's central processors, all by yourself. DIY,Computing,Gadgets,Computer Hardware,PCI Card,Installation,Connection 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. DIY,Computing,Gadgets,Computer Hardware,PCI Card,Installation,Connection Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><h3>Before You Install a PCI Card</h3>Before you begin, make sure that you read your manual to see if you have to install any hardware drivers before installing your new PCI card. <br><br>First, turn off the computer and unplug the power cord. <br><br>Next, open the computer. Some computers have a button that you press to open the box. Some have screws on the rear of the case which must be removed. I just need to remove the screws on the back of the case. <br><br>Slide the casing back. Now you have access to the inside of your computer. <br><h3>Locate Slot to Install a PCI Card</h3>Desktop PCs have several PCI slots for you to use. Sometimes these can be hidden below wires, so you may need to gently push those aside. <br><br>Depending on how your computer was put together, there might already be cards in a few of the PCI slots. <br><br>Find an open one which gives you plenty of space above and below to insert your new PCI card. <br><h3>Installing a PCI Card</h3>Remove the card slot cover. Some computers have easy lift off slot covers while most have screws. I'm just going to remove the screw and pull off the cover. <br><br>Next, align the PCI card directly over the slot in the motherboard. Once this is in place, gently press down on both the front and back of the card until it is snug. <br><br>Once the card is seated in the slot, screw or fasten down the card to the case at the PC card slot. <br><br>Close up your computer and plug in all of your cables. <br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_4669 Mon, 12 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/gourmetfood/Tomato-and-Rosemary-Butter.htm This classic flavored butter is made with sun-dried tomatoes, goat cheese, and fresh rosemary. Try it with tea sandwiches or paired with hors d'oeuvres. tomato and rosemary butter,gourmet food,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. tomato and rosemary butter,gourmet food,videos Hi, I'm Natasha Levitan for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make sun-dried tomato and rosemary butter. <h3>Tomato and Rosemary Butter Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>10 sun-dried tomato halves</li> <li>1 stick unsalted butter at room temperature</li> <li>1/2 cup goat cheese at room temperature</li> <li>1 tablespoon chopped rosemary</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Sun-Dried Tomatoes</h3> Put the tomatoes in a medium bowl, and pour enough hot water to cover them. Soak the tomatoes until they are softened, about 5-10 minutes. Drain the tomatoes and chop them into fine pieces. <h3>Chop the Fresh Rosemary</h3> Rinse the rosemary sprigs, and pat them dry. Remove the needles - they're the part of rosemary that gives the flavor. Chop them into fine pieces. <h3>Combine the Ingredients</h3> Add the butter, goat cheese, and rosemary to your bowl with sun-dried tomatoes. Use back of the fork to combine all ingredients. <br><br> Place a sheet of parchment paper or wax paper on your cutting board. Transfer the butter cheese mixture into the sheet of paper. <h3>Chill the Tomato and Rosemary Butter</h3> Shape the butter into a one-inch log. You can use your hands to do it. Fold it into the parchment paper, and store it in refrigerator until you're ready to use it. <br><br> You can serve it on crackers with cucumbers or as an addition on sandwiches. Thank you for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food. about.com. aboutvideo_4958 Tue, 31 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Frank-Miller-300-DVD-Interview.htm 300 author Frank Miller joined the film's producers Gianni Nunnari and Mark Canton at a special event at Petco Park adjacent to the 2007 San Diego Comic Con. red carpet interviews 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. red carpet interviews Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the <i>300</i> DVD Release Event.<p> <h3><i>300</i> Author Frank Miller</h3><p> <b>I'm glad that you were in the <i>300</i> DVD bonus material. Did they request that of you? What happened?</b><p> Frank Miller: "Oh sure. Sure. They were filming away, and they brought a crew to my studio and we talked things over."<p> <b>Your portion is a lot of interviews about your past, and I thought that that was very interesting. Do you like to be involved in that?</b><p> Frank Miller: "Sure. I'm a little bit of an evangelist when it comes to comic books and things like that, especially when it comes to the story of <i>300</i> because that's my favorite story of all time."<p> <b>Is it really?</b><p> Frank Miller: "Yes."<p> <b>Is it the one you connect to the most or just your favorite period?</b><p> Frank Miller: "It's one I encountered when I was five years old and never forgotten and had to tell it as a book. And then these other lunatics made a movie out of it."<p> <b>And they did a great job.</b><p> Frank Miller: "Yes, they certainly did."<p> <b>Because they copied your work exactly. What did you think about the success of the film? Did you expect audiences to embrace it that much?</b><p> Frank Miller: "I didn't know what would happen. It obviously touched a nerve. And I was very, very gratified by that. I think that the study of what a hero is is kind of a lifelong journey for me, and that's as heroic as any story you're going to find."<p> <b>Absolutely. How's <i>The Spirit</i> coming?</b><p> Frank Miller: "It's coming great. We start shooting in October."<p> <b>But you haven't announced any casting yet, have you?</b><p> Frank Miller: "I've only announced one."<p> <b>Who did you announce?</b><p> Frank Miller: "Samuel Jackson as the Octopus. Everybody else is either unknown or secret."<p> <b>Unknown? So, you are going to go with some unknowns in it?</b><p> Frank Miller: "Well you've never met The Spirit before&#133;"<p> <b>Visually can you describe it at all or are you giving too much away?</b><p> Frank Miller: "Visually, I'm going to do my best to capture Will Eisner's love of New York City. That's a preponderate theme in it. I intend to use a lot of black and white plus a lot of color to rocket the story along. So it's going to be one more step. You see these digital movies, and it's almost like you're watching a stop-motion of a supernova. And every one of these movies that's any damn good is going to be taking things to another level."<p> <b>It's tough to keep topping that, isn't it?</b><p> Frank Miller: "No, because of these CGI wizards. I learned a while back you never say, 'Can you do this?' You simply say, 'I want this,' and they eagerly attack the problem and have the answer by next Tuesday."<p> <h3><i>300</i> Producers Gianni Nunnari and Mark Canton</h3><p> Mark Canton: "It's time for Gianni and I to figure out the sequel."<p> <b>Have you been working on a sequel?</b><p> Gianni Nunnari: "Of course."<p> <b>What can we expect?</b><p> Gianni Nunnari: "<i>301</i>. No, we're working. It's such an important movie with such a great personal filmmaker. The same way that we took time to do the first movie, we need to be careful that we're going to top the first movie. So we're working on it. We're thinking, because that's our job."<p> <b>Well, that's just it. Because you guys have set the bar so high with that one, you have to really top that in order for the fans to appreciate and want a sequel.</b><p> Mark Canton: "Well you know, we've been around the whole world from Brazil to Tokyo and the thing that's amazing is that everyone responded to the movie the same way everywhere, in terms of emotional context and in terms of the action. And with Zack [Snyder] and with Frank, you know, it's our responsibility to make sure we get the next one right. We don't want to make one of those sequels that people come out and they're not satisfied."<p> Gianni Nunnari: "They didn't kill all of the 300. Twenty one were captured&#133;"<p> Mark Canton: "They've given San Diego a clue right now."<p> <h3>More Coverage of <i>300</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/300/fr/300review030707.htm"><i>300</i> Movie Review</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/library/weekly/bl300picsa.htm">Photos from <i>300</i></a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/300/a/300lh030307.htm">One on One with Lena Headey</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/300/v/300premgb030507.htm"><i>300</i> Premiere Coverage</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/300/a/300butler072406.htm">Exclusive Interview with Gerard Butler</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/300/"><i>300</i> Trailer, Posters, Interviews and Cast List</a></li><p> aboutvideo_3672 Thu, 28 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Final-Cut-Pro-Advanced-Trim.htm Do you finally have the editing basics down in Final Cut Pro? Learn these advanced editing techniques that will make your video project even smoother. Final Cut Pro, Advanced Editing, desktop video 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Final Cut Pro, Advanced Editing, desktop video Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you some advanced editing features in Final Cut Pro. <h3>Set In and Out Points in Final Cut Pro</h3> Once you've captured clips, you can edit them in the viewer window by double clicking them. You may already know that you can set in and out points by clicking these icons. You can then drag down the clip into your timeline or press the insert or overwrite buttons. The insert button will put the clip down where the playhead is in the timeline. It will move any clip past that point over. The overwrite button will put the clip down and then delete any clip or clips that are in the new clips way. <h3>Insert and Overwrite in Final Cut Pro</h3> You can also take the clip and click and drag it into the canvas window. A list of options will appear. You can insert or overwrite by letting go of the mouse in the corresponding area. A great little trick is that you can also insert or overwrite and add a transition as well. The default transition is a cross fade. If you drop a clip in one of the with transition boxes, it'll drop the clip in and add both a video and audio dissolve. <br><br> If you drop a clip in the replace box, the clip will replace whatever clip is currently under the playhead in the timeline. Just make sure to set in and out points of the new clip that are shorter to or equal in duration to the clip you are replacing. <h3>Fit to Fill in Final Cut Pro</h3> You also have an option to fit to fill. To use this, set in and outpoints on your timeline by pressing the letters 'I' and 'O' or by pressing mark in and mark out in the canvas. If you then drag the clip on fit to fill, Final Cut will either speed up or slow down the clip you have in order to make it the exact length you specified with your in and out points. Here my clip is sped up to fit the space. If I make my clip's in and out points closer together and then drop it in fit to fill, you'll see the clip has been slowed down. <h3>Superimpose</h3> Finally, there is the superimpose option. This is an easy way to put a clip on top of another clip in the timeline. If you do it once, you ll see the new clip placed above the clip in the timeline and the audio placed on an audio track below it. If I take another clip and drop it in superimpose again, it ll add a third video track with my clip placed at the playhead. Keep in mind that whatever video clip is on top takes precedence but that editing programs mix the audio from all of the clips. <br><br> These are just some of the more advanced features in final cut that will help make editing your movies faster and easier. Thanks for watching. For more information, visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6533 Tue, 29 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Isabella-Leong-Interview.htm She's beautiful, intelligent, and she learned English just for 'The Mummy: Tomb of the Dragon Emperor.' Isabella Leong's also a newcomer to Hollywood films. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2008 San Diego Comic Con.<p> <h3>Isabella Leong &#8211; 'Lin' in <i>The Mummy: Tomb of the Dragon Emperor</i></h3><p> <b>You're working on your very first huge American film. What was that experience like?</b><p> Isabella Leong: "Well for me, it's a great experience because it's my first Hollywood movie. At first it's pretty hard because I couldn't speak one word of English. It's very, very difficult and it's hard to communicate with all the actors and director. But, yeah, I learned English every day and yeah, I think it's getting more better. It's great to have the opportunity to work with all the cast, like Brendan [Fraser], Maria [Bello], and the director. I'm really happy."<p> <b>How easy was it for you to do action scenes?</b><p> Isabella Leong: "For me at first it's really hard because we used like four months to learn martial arts, weapons, wires. And yeah, it's very hard but after a few weeks later, then we started to get into it and it goes pretty well."<p> <b>You not only had to do action but you had a love story going on too. How easy was that?</b><p> Isabella Leong: "Well, you know, it's a great experience because it's my first time to fall in love with a guy because before I played [in] lesbian movie in Hong Kong. It's a new experience for me, yeah."<p> <b>You'd do that again, right?</b><p> Isabella Leong: "Yeah."<p> <h3>More on <i>The Mummy: Tomb of the Dragon Emperor</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/themummy3/ig/The-Mummy-3-Photos/index.htm"><i>The Mummy: Tomb of the Dragon Emperor</i> Photos</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/themummy3/"><i>The Mummy: Tomb of the Dragon Emperor</i> Trailer, Video Clips, Posters, and Cast Interviews</a></li><br> <li>More on <i>The Mummy</i> Star <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/fraserbrendan/">Brendan Fraser</a></li><p> aboutvideo_3854 Thu, 01 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/compnetworking/Cable-Versus-DSL.htm Are you looking to upgrade from that clunky dial-up connection to high-speed Internet access? Find out who comes out on top when DSL and Cable go head-to-head. Gadgets,Cable,DVD,High-Speed Internet,Inernet,Security,Installation,Buy 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Gadgets,Cable,DVD,High-Speed Internet,Inernet,Security,Installation,Buy <h3>Introduction to Cable and DSL</h3>If you're looking for life in the fast lane, and are interested in delving into the world of high-speed internet access for your home or office, there are two main contenders:<ul><li>DSL</li><li>Cable</li></ul>The services are similar in that they'll offer you super-fast Web surfing; at least three times as fast as dial-up. They'll also allow you to download files, stream video or send sizable emails multiple times faster than dial-up. So, you can finally send those pictures of your kiddies to mom and dad.<h3>Differences Between Cable and DSL</h3>But, there are differences between cable and DSL that may affect which of these services you select.<br><h3>Cable Versus DSL on Bandwidth</h3>Winning the bandwidth or speed battle is usually 'Cable' modem Internet services. Cable download speeds are up to 2 times faster than DSL. But cable services can slow down significantly if many people are accessing the Internet at the same time in the same area. Basically, the same cable line often connects to many households in your neighborhood, so if you and your neighbor are both using the service at once, your speed may suffer and become more sluggish. That's also the reason why cable modem services may not always be as secure as DSL.<br><h3>Cable Versus DSL on Security</h3>Since cable uses a shared line, anyone in your neighborhood could potentially access the same local area network or LAN that you use, and be able to click on your Windows Network. That means they could see your personal information or even download copies of your data. Make sure to put the proper security measures in place - like a firewall and anti-virus software - no matter which service you decide on.<br><br>So, winning the battle over best security, definitely DSL!<br><h3>Cable Versus DSL on Installation</h3>When it comes to installation, cable has a leg up. All you have to do is call the cable guy and get the new line installed and then you connect the line to your modem. It's as easy as hooking up your VCR to your television.<br><br>With DSL you'll need a phone line and it may require you to take multiple steps on your computer after you install the DSL modem that the phone company provides. You may also be required to put filters on all of your additional phone jacks.<br><h3>Buy Cable or DSL</h3>The last thing to consider is cost. DSL tends to be less expensive than cable. With DSL, look for package deals through your phone company that may also reduce your phone bill. Here's the catch with cable modem services, if you don't subscribe to cable then you may have to pay an additional monthly fee for the service. But cable subscribers should also search for package deals. The champ in the cost arena is DSL.<br><br>Again, you can't go wrong with either service, and not all cities or locations offer both so your choice may be limited to one or the other. But, my pick for the overall winner in what is a very close match? CABLE. I'm Brett Larson, About Gadgets.<br> aboutvideo_4605 Fri, 30 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/windows/Screen-Capture-With-Snip-Tool.htm Need to capture an image from your desktop? Learn how to use the snipping tool in Windows Vista, and you can grab an image from anywhere on your computer screen. windows, vista, snip, screen grab, screen capture 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. windows, vista, snip, screen grab, screen capture Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I'm going to show you how to use the snip tool in Vista. Use the snipping tool to capture an image from anywhere on your computer screen. <h3>Open the Snipping Tool</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK Start button</li> <li>TYPE 'snip' in the search box</li> <li>CLICK on Snipping Tool</li> </ul> or <ul> <li>CLICK Start Button / All Programs / Accessories / Snipping Tool</li> </ul> <h3>Screen Grab an Image With Snip</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK arrow (next to the 'New' button)</li> <li>CHOOSE type of snip you want to make</li> <li>DRAG shape onto the snipping window</li> </ul> <p> <h3>Snipping Tool Functions</h3> In the Snipping tool window, you can save, copy, send, or modify your image. You can use the pen tool to draw on your image, the highlighting tool to highlight parts of your image, or send your image by clicking the envelope button here. From here, type the email address where you want your image to go. <h3>Save the Screen-Captured Image</h3> You can choose to save your image as a JPEG, PNG, GIF, or MHT file. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4452 Tue, 19 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/personalweb/Add-Songs-to-Your-MySpace-Page.htm You can listen to music in your car and on your mp3 player - why not on your MySpace page, too? Learn how to find the tunes you want and add them to your profile. myspace,adding music to a web page,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. myspace,adding music to a web page,videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'm going to show you how to add music to your personal MySpace page. Adding music allows other users to listen to your chosen song every time they visit your page. <h3>Log In to MySpace</h3> First, open your Web browser. Go to myspace.com. In order to add a song to MySpace, you need to be a member of MySpace. <br><br> If you are already a member, enter your email address and password in the member login box. If you are not registered, click 'sign up' next to the login button. <h3>Edit Your Profile</h3> Once you are logged in, you will be at your homepage. Click on the 'edit profile' button. Next, click on the 'song and video on profile' tab. Here, you can choose to add a profile song or video. <h3>Search for a Band on MySpace</h3> Many musicians are on MySpace already, so you can search for the band or artist you want by clicking 'find a band in MySpace Music.' <br><br> The MySpace Music page will pop up. From here, you can type in a keyword of the musician you are looking for. <h3>Select the Band and Song You Want</h3> MySpace will generate a list of bands matching your keywords. Once you find the band you're looking for, click on the link to their page. <br><br> Once you arrive at the band's homepage, there will be a play window where you can play the available songs. <h3>Add the Song to Your MySpace Profile</h3> Click the 'add' button under the song that you want on your profile. You will be asked if you want to add that song to your profile. Click 'add song to profile.' <br><br> Then, you can choose to go back to the band's profile or go to your own. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6838 Wed, 27 Dec 2006 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/southernfood/Baked-Chicken.htm Baking is one of the easiest ways to cook chicken because you can just put it in the oven and forget about it until it's done. Try this simple lemon-garlic baked chicken. main dish,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. main dish,videos Hi, I am Ben Kurtzman for About.com, and today I am going to share one of my favorite recipes for baked chicken. <br/><br/>Baking is one of the easiest ways to cook chicken, because you can just put it in the oven and forget about it until it is done. We are going to be baking a double chicken breast. I am also going to show you how to make a lemon sauce that is quick and adds a lot of flavor to the dish. <br/><H3>Lemon Chicken Marinade</H3>For the sauce we are going to need the following ingredients: <ul><li>juice of 2 lemons</li><li>1/4 cup olive oil</li><li>2 tablespoons chopped garlic</li><li>1 tablespoon mustard</li><li>1 teaspoon thyme</li><li>salt and pepper</li></ul>Fresh lemon juice is always best, and to get fresh lemon juice you will need an inexpensive juicer, which can be picked up at any kitchen store. Slice the lemons in half, like so, and then twist on the top of the juicer to get the juice. <br/><h3>Mixing the Marinade</h3>So now let us add the rest of our ingredients into the lemon juice. Quarter cup of olive oil, tablespoon of mustard, 2 tablespoons of minced garlic, and finally a teaspoon of thyme. We are also going to add a little salt and pepper, and now let's mix it all together. <br/><h3>Preparing the Lemon Chicken</h3>Now this is ready to go on our chicken. Pick a pan that the chicken will fit into snugly. Pour the sauce on top of the chicken, but make sure you get some underneath as well. At this point, you can put the chicken in the refrigerator if you want to let it marinate for a little while, or it will be just fine if you want to pop it in the oven right away. <br/><h3>Baking Lemon Chicken</h3>When you are ready to bake the chicken preheat the oven. Cook the chicken for 40 minutes at 400 degrees. After 40 minutes, test the lemon chicken. If it is firm to the touch, you will know it is done. <br/><br/>Thanks for watching, and to learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6914 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/vegetarian/Spread-.htm Spread on a sandwich or scooped up with a cracker, this sun-dried tomato recipe will delight your taste buds. Try it today! sun dried tomato spread,tomato,spread,olive oil,vegetable,sun dried tomato 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. sun dried tomato spread,tomato,spread,olive oil,vegetable,sun dried tomato Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman, for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make an easy and delicious sun-dried tomato spread. <h3>Appliances Needed:</h3> You will need: <ul> <li>a food processor</li> <li>a scraper</li> <li>a can opener</li> <li>a spoon</li> <li>measuring utensils</li> </ul> <h3>Sun-dried Tomato Spread Ingredients</h3> <ul> <li>2 cans tomato paste</li> <li>2 tablespoons fresh basil</li> <li>1 clove crushed garlic</li> <li>3/4 tomatoes</li> <li>1 teaspoon sugar</li> <li>pinch of salt</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon of garlic salt</li> </ul> <h3>Tomato Spread Ingredient Variations</h3> I'm going to use 2 cans of tomato paste as the base for my spread. But you could use a variety of ingredients such as tofu, beans or cream cheese as the other main ingredient to compliment the sun dried tomatoes. <h3>Prepare the Basil and Garlic</h3> Wash and dry some basil. Use about 4 to 6 leaves to make two tablespoons. Put the basil in the mixer. Next add 1 clove of crushed garlic. <H3>Add the Sun-Dried Tomatoes</H3> Take your sun dried tomatoes of their container and drain out some of the oil. Measure 3/4 of a cup of tomatoes and add them into the mixer. Add a pinch of salt, a teaspoon of sugar and 1/2 teaspoon of garlic salt. <H3>Mix the Ingredients</H3> Put on your lid and turn on the mixer. You want to aim for a medium consistency that looks like it will be easy to spread with a knife. <br><br> You may need to stop mixing and use your scraper to take food off of the sides. If the spread seems thick, slowly add 1/2 a cup of olive oil. There we go, it looks good. <h3>Serve or Store the Spread</h3> Scoop your spread out of the mixer and place into a service dish or storage container. Be sure to refrigerate it if you are not serving it right away. <br><br> This is a lovely spread to bring to a party or to have at a picnic. Thanks for watching, to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4245 Wed, 14 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/financialsoft/Customize-Quicken-Home-Page.htm You already know that Quicken helps keep track of your spending habits and accounts. Find out how customizing the home page can help you work faster. customize quicken homepage,videos,financial software 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. customize quicken homepage,videos,financial software Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I will show you how to customize the home and office versions of Quicken. <br><br> Quicken can help you manage your budget, credit information, and various accounts. To make Quicken easy for you to use, you can customize it for your own use <h3>Benefits of Quicken View</h3> Although the home page for Quicken 2007 cannot be edited, you can create views to help you manage all of your information. <br><br> After you create a Quicken View, it is easily accessed by clicking on its tab, which will appear next to the Home tab. <h3>Create a Quicken View</h3> To create a view, first open Quicken. On the Quicken home page, which is the main page, click on 'Create New View,' located above the Update button on the upper right. <br><br> A window will appear. Here, you can enter a name for the new View in the space provided next to View Name. I will type About.com Finances. <h3>Select Categories for Quicken View</h3> In the list below, you can select the items you want to see in your View. The different categories include Overview, Business, Cash Flow, Investments, Planning, Property and Debt, and Tax. <br><br> When you click on one of the options, a short description of the selected item will show up below the list box. <h3>Add Categories to the Quicken View</h3> To add an item you want to display in the View, select the item then click 'Add.' I will choose to add All Accounts, Your Business Status, and Expenses. My items are now in the Chosen Items box. <h3>Remove or Move Categories</h3> If you want to remove an item from your view, select it in the Chosen Items box, and then click 'Remove.' <br><br> You can also move the items around in the Chosen Items box by selecting an item there, and then clicking 'Move Up' or 'Move Down.' <br><br> When you're finished choosing your items, click 'OK.' You will now see the tab for your View next to the Home tab on the top of the Quicken home page. <h3>Edit the Quicken View</h3> If you want to go back and edit the View, go to 'Customize' on the top right of the View page. <br><br> From this drop-down menu, you can choose to Customize This View, which will bring you back to the editing window; Create a New View; or Delete this View. <br><br> Once you've created a View in Quicken, you can continue to enter in your financial information and be able to access relevant information. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4127 Thu, 19 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Replace-a-Dull-Sky.htm Don't let a dull and boring sky ruin the background of your photo. Learn how to replace the skies using Photoshop Elements. replace skies, photo editing, photoshop elements, replace sky in photoshop, vide 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. replace skies, photo editing, photoshop elements, replace sky in photoshop, vide Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to replace a dull sky in your photo using Photoshop Elements. <h3>Open Photos With Different Skies</h3> First, open Photoshop Elements. Now open a photo with a dull sky that you'd like to change. You should also have a photo of a sky you'd like to replace it with. I'll open that one too. In order to preserve both images, go to 'file,' 'save as,' and choose 'copy.' Double click the background layer and rename it. Click 'ok.' <h3>Delete the Sky You Want to Replace</h3> Now click on the magic wand tool and click on the dull sky image. It probably won't select all of the sky. Go to 'select,' 'similar,' and the rest of the sky should be added. If not, simply click on one part of the sky and delete it one part at a time. Press 'delete' on your keyboard to erase it. <h3>Copy the Desired Photo's Sky</h3> Now go to your new sky image. As long as your new sky image is most of the photo, you can press 'control C' to copy and then select the dull sky photo, and press 'control V' to paste. <h3>Layer the New Sky in the Photo</h3> The new sky is now covering up the subject of our photo. Go to the layers palette and drag the sky layer below the subject photo. Double click 'layer one' and rename it to "sky". <h3>Add an Adjustment Layer to the Sky</h3> If needed, you can adjust your new sky by adding an adjustment layer. Usually the sky is lighter the closer it is to the horizon, and it darkens when it's farther away from the horizon. In the layers palette, click on the 'sky' layer. Go to 'layer', 'new adjustment layer,' and select a hue/saturation adjustment layer. Click 'ok' without changing the settings. <br><br> Click on the mask next to your adjustment layer in the layers palette. Select the gradient tool from the toolbar. The mode should be normal, opacity is at 100%, leave 'reverse' unchecked, and check the 'dither' and 'transparency' options. <br><br> Click on the edit button to bring up the gradient editor. Double click the lower left marker on the gradient preview, and in the HSB section of the color picker change the B value to 20%. This will change the black to a dark gray. Click 'ok' twice. <br><br> Now click at the top of the sky and while pressing the shift key drag straight down. Release the mouse when you reach where you want the bottom of the sky to be. Now in the mask there should be a gradient. But your image has not changed. <h3>Adjust the Sky</h3> Double click the layer thumbnail for hue/saturation adjustment layer. A window will appear where you can adjust the hue and saturation. Drag the hue slider to a negative number and saturation to a positive number. <br><br>You can also adjust the lightness. The lower part of the sky will lighten because on your mask it is white. The sky will remain unchanged where the gradient is black in the mask. Click 'ok' when you're happy with the adjustments. <br><br> And here's my sky before, and after. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4228 Tue, 04 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Photo-Backup-in-Elements.htm If you take a lot of digital pictures, then you probably don't print them all at once. Be safe, not sorry, and back up your photos using these simple methods. backup, photos, digital, photoshop, elements, organizer 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. backup, photos, digital, photoshop, elements, organizer Hi I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I'll show you how to backup photos using Photoshop Elements. <H3>Back Up Photos With Elements</H3> <ul> <li>OPEN Photoshop Elements</li> <li>CLICK View and Organize Photos</li> <li>CLICK File > Backup Catalog</li> <li>CHOOSE Full Backup or Incremental Backup*</li> <li>CLICK Next</li> <li>SELECT a CD/DVD, Network/External Drive or My Computer</li> </ul> *Choose full backup if this is the first time backing up your Photoshop Elements files. Choose incremental backup, which is quicker, only if you've already done a full backup. <br><br> In the latter case, you'll need to also CLICK 'Browse' to navigate for the 'Previous Backup File' and select your last full backup (so Photoshop Elements can continue from where it left off). <H3>Back Up Photos to a CD/DVD</H3> <ul> <li>INSERT blank CD/DVD into drive</li> <li>CLICK on CD/DVD drive</li> <li>CLICK Verify</li></ul> Photoshop Elements will prompt you for additional disks as needed, for space. <H3>Back Up Photos to a Drive</H3> <ul> <li>CLICK Browse</li> <li>FIND drive/folder for you backup files to go or create new folder</li> <li>CLICK Ok</li> <li>CLICK Done</li> </ul> Thanks for watching. For more information, visit computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4762 Mon, 16 Jul 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/wine/Sparkling-Wine-and-Champagne.htm Whether you're celebrating or simply enjoying a good bottle of wine, here are the basics you should know about opening and pouring sparkling wine and Champagne. champagne,cocktail videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. champagne,cocktail videos Hi, I'm Jonathon Stewart for About.com Food, and today, it's all about opening and pouring sparkling wine. <br><br> Now, everybody knows that when it's time to celebrate, it's time to drink champagne. Weddings, births, New Year's Eve, Friday... But if you're the one who's doing the serving, here are a couple pointers to help you out. <h3>What is Champagne?</h3> First, a pretty common question: Champagne, sparkling wine &#150; what's the big difference? <br><br> Well, Champagne, which is actually type of sparkling wine, refers specifically to a region of France and the wine-making process developed there called M&#233;thode Champenoise. As the saying goes, "Champagne isn't Champagne unless it's made in Champagne." <h3>Drink Sparkling Wine in a Flute</h3> Flutes are the glasses in which sparkling wine is best served. They reduce the surface area of the wine, limiting its contact with the air and potential loss of bubbles. <br><Br> Always hold a flute by its stem, so that your hands don't accidentally warm the wine (assuming it sits in your glass long enough to get warm anyway). <h3>Open Sparkling Wine and Champagne</h3> Probably the biggest misconception about sparkling wine and Champagne, other than the name confusion, is with regard to how it's opened. <br><br> Now, while shaking up bottles, popping corks off into the night, and spilling bubbly all over the bow of your yacht may seem like fun on TV, there's just one problem - it's a waste of good wine! <h3>Chill the Sparkling Wine or Champagne</h3> Start by making sure your sparkling wine is chilled to the right temperature by either putting it in the fridge for at least an hour and a half, or chilling it in a bucket with ice for about 30 minutes. Never put your wine in the freezer. <h3>Remove the Cage From the Bottle</h3> It might be a good idea to have a towel on hand if you're a newbie to opening sparkling wine. Make sure your glasses are out and ready for action, and we're all set to go. <br><br> Remove the foil from the cork so that the wire housing called the "cage" is entirely foil-free. Flip up the wire ring of the cage, and turn it exactly six half-turns counter-clockwise, which should free the cage from the neck of the bottle. <h3>Cover the Cork With a Towel</h3> Some people will actually tell you to remove the cage at this point, but it's actually much easier to control the cork (which is the goal) by leaving it on. <br><br> It's also not a bad idea to cover the cork with a towel at this stage, but if you open your bottle successfully, you won't even need one. <h3>Ease the Cork Out of the Bottle</h3> With your thumb still guarding the top of the cork, turn the neck to a 45 degree angle and hold the bottle at the base. Now, while firmly holding the caged cork in one hand, slowly twist the bottle from its base. Do not twist the cork. <br><br> Take your time with this. The goal is to ease the cork out slowly, without a pop, which connoisseurs consider gauche, and is also less likely to break a window across the room. <br><br> Continue slowly twisting the base in half turns until the cork is fully released from the neck of the bottle. You might hear a small "whoosh" on the final twist, and then you're ready to pour! <h3>Pour the Sparkling Wine or Champagne</h3> Aim to fill the first flute about halfway full so the bubbles don't overflow. Try as much as possible to pour down the side of the glass, which will result in a smaller head. <br><br> At the top of the pour, give a little turn of the wrist and you'll avoid spilling even one drop of the good stuff. All that's left is to sip and enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3502 Thu, 01 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/email/GmailManageSettings-mov.htm Learn how to manage your Gmail settings to get the maximum utility out of your Gmail account whether it be for work, play, or curiosity. Computing,Programs,Gmail,Webmail,Gmail,Organize email,Keyword Search,Organize 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Gmail,Webmail,Gmail,Organize email,Keyword Search,Organize Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today, I'm going to show you how to manage your settings in Gmail. <br><h3>Find Settings in Gmail</h3>Log into Gmail with your username and password. Click on the Settings link in the upper right corner next to your email address. The General Settings section is now open. <br><h3>Options and Features of Gmail Settings</h3>Gmail has many of the features that modern email users have come to expect. Let's take a look. <br><br>There are some basic settings like display language and conversations shown per page. A conversation is Gmail s word for an email. <br><h3>Gmail Keyboard Shortcut Settings</h3>Keyboard shortcuts are unique to Gmail because they allow you to quickly do repetitious actions. Click Learn more. As you can see there are many shortcuts. <br><br>Let's go back to Settings. <br><h3>Gmail Picture Display Settings</h3>My picture lets you add a small image of yourself that will be appear to other Gmail users when they get email from you. Likewise, you can set the Contacts pictures to show all pictures or just those you've chosen for your contacts. <br><h3>Gmail Signature Settings</h3>There is the signature feature which will add a custom note to the bottom of every email that you write. I'll just put in one of my favorite quote, "KAAAAAAAAAAHN!" <br><h3>Gmail Level Indicator Settings</h3>Next, Personal level indicators are a special feature of Gmail. A single arrow next to your name means that you an email was sent to you and others. A double arrow means that you are the sole receiver of that email. <br><h3>Gmail Snippet Settings</h3>Snippets are also a feature unique to Gmail. When you look at your inbox you will notice that there are literally snippets of the incoming message show next to the subject line. This allows you to see what you re receiving without having to open it first. <br><h3>Gmail Vacation Indicator Settings</h3>The Vacation responder (or out of office reminder for those of us that travel for business) is another common email setting. This allows you to automatically notify people that you will not be around to respond to their email. <br><h3>Gmail Message Encoding Settings</h3>You will notice that there is an overly technical sounding setting called Outgoing message encoding at the end of the list. <br><br>The first option is set by default. However, in the off chance that Gmail messages can t be read by the people you are writing to, select the Unicode option. <br><br>Thanks for watching! To learn more, visit us at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_3778 Tue, 06 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktoppub/New-Projects-in-Publisher.htm Learn the basics of starting brand new projects in Microsoft Publisher - you'll be create custom designs and publications in no time. Computing,Software,Microsoft Publisher,Publications,Publishing,Templates,Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Software,Microsoft Publisher,Publications,Publishing,Templates,Design Hi. I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll show you how to create a publication from scratch using MS Publisher. This is a great tool if you enjoy making your own designs for your company or your home. First, open Microsoft Publisher. Now in the task pane on the left choose Blank Publications. <br><br>You will see many options to choose from depending on what you would like to create. I'll choose a full sheet. <br><h3>Background for a Publisher Project</h3>Now you can insert a background. Go to Format and choose Background. <br><br>For more options to adjust your background, click More Backgrounds at the bottom of the task pane. Click OK when you re done. <br><h3>Text for a Publisher Project</h3>To add your text, click the Text button on the toolbar on the right. Now click and drag to create a text box on your document. <br><br>Type your text. To format your text, select it and change the font, style and size at the top like you would in MS Word. To change the color of your text click the Text Color icon and choose your color. <br><h3>Add a Picture to a Publisher Project</h3>To insert a picture or clip art, click the Picture icon on the toolbar to the right. I will choose a picture on file. When you ve got you picture click OK. <br><br>You can format your picture using the picture toolbar. To resize a picture click a corner circle and drag your mouse. <br><br>To delete a picture, select it and press Delete, or right click on it and choose delete object. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_4152 Thu, 20 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/webdesign/Add-Internal-Web-Links.htm Adding internal links across your site is a great way to draw attention to certain information and make it easier to maneuver around your site. Learn how to link pages within a website. links, html, web design, web page, website 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. links, html, web design, web page, website Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to add links to other pages or places within your website. It's a great way to draw attention to certain information and makes it easier to maneuver around your site. <h3>Choose Two HTML Pages to Link</h3> I have two html pages of a website that I want to link. Right click on the page where you want the link to appear and choose open with Notepad or the editor you usually use. <h3>Link Two Pages HTML in the Same Folder</h3> To make links between your pages, you do not need an entire URL address like you would use if you were linking to another website. Because I have both pages of my HTML pages saved in the same folder, all I have to type is an a tag, href equals quote the name of the page I want to link to.htm then the link goes here and then close the a tag. <h3>Link Pages in Different Subfolders</h3> If you have your HTML pages in a subfolder, like this, your link would look a little different. Type the a tag, href equals quote the name of the subfolder goes here slash page2.htm close the brackets then Page 2 and the end tag <br><br> These are both considered relative paths because they aren't the full URL address. If you type in the full URL address and check your html files in a browser before your website is uploaded to the web, it won't work because it is looking for your linked pages through the web and not through your computer. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, visit computing.about.com. aboutvideo_7959 Thu, 07 Aug 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Derek-Mears-Interview.htm Derek Mears takes over the iconic role of Jason Voorhees, the hockey mask-wearing killer of screaming teens, in the remake of 'Friday the 13th' starring Jared Padalecki and Amanda Righetti. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2008 San Diego Comic Con.<p> <h3>Derek Mears - <i>Friday the 13th</i></h3><p> <b>You're done posing I think. Or you can pose throughout the interview.</b><p> Derek Mears: "That's one thing I'm worried about. I was like, 'Be myself,' like being a giant goofball. I'd be like, 'That's the guy who's playing Jason? He's totally not scary now.' 'No, it's called acting. I can switch over. I'll switch over to killing people later!'"<p> <b>How quickly can you switch?</b><p> Derek Mears: "Pretty quick. I have a lot of daddy issues so I can switch over pretty quick."<p> <b>Any mommy issues?</b><p> Derek Mears: "Not so much. In the character, yes. You switch it, you replace mommy issues to daddy issues &#8211; and I'm ready to fight."<p> <b>How much did you delve into that part of the character?</b><p> Derek Mears: "A lot, actually. That's what I'm really excited about because it wasn't that difficult myself because the writers have written an amazing script. Mark [Swift] and Damian [Shannon] have really added an intensity and an integrity to the character where you understand where the character comes from and you understand his vulnerability and his inner torment, which I really liked."<p> <b>And donning that mask for the first time, what did that feel like?</b><p> Derek Mears: "Oh my gosh. Funny story, I actually went into the shop when they were still having the masks made before we had done anything. No shooting or anything else like that. And Scott Stoddard, the makeup effects creator of Jason, which is amazing, was like, 'You're here now. Why don't we try the mask on?' I go, 'Okay,' and he opened this giant case and he had like five masks in there. He pulled it out and it was almost like the scene from <i>Excalibur</i>. You heard like the [high-pitched choir]. Everyone in the shop who were making different parts of the film &#8211; making dead bodies, you know, slit throats &#8211; just stopped, looked over, stopped what they were doing and just kind of stood there and watched. I put the mask on and just got completely tingly. The way I can describe it as a child watching &#8211; or still as an adult &#8211; when <i>Star Wars</i> the opening [score] comes on and you start to see the scrolling letters. That's what it felt like and it was amazing."<p> <b>How much extra weight did you feel bringing a franchise back to life like this because everybody knows this character and now you're him?</b><p> Derek Mears: "It was crazy. I mean, being a fan myself&#8230; I mean, with other projects I scrutinize myself. 'Who's going to be the who? What? The new James Bond? Well I like Sean Connery. Let's see what this guy does. I don't know.' So it's wild switching to the other side and seeing exactly what that is like. 'Oh my gosh, now I'm the one who's going to be in the spotlight&#8230;' But a lot of responsibility, especially to the fans who I consider my peers. I really want to do a good job and make sure it's good for them, because hopefully they like what I like."<p> <h3>More on <i>Friday the 13th</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/library/weekly/blfridaythe13thpicsa.htm"><i>Friday the 13th</i> Photos</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/fridaythe13th/"><i>Friday the 13th</i> Credits, Poster and Interviews</a></li><p> aboutvideo_4688 Mon, 01 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/bbq/Crockpot-Pulled-Barbecue-Beef.htm Slow-cooked in a crockpot with a homemade barbecue sauce, this pulled beef dinner is amazingly tender and tasty. Learn how to make pulled BBQ beef. crockpot, bbq, barbecue, beef, dinner 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. crockpot, bbq, barbecue, beef, dinner Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make pulled barbecue beef in the crockpot. <h3>Pulled Barbecue Beef Ingredients</h3> For this recipe you will need:<ul> <li>3 lbs pot roast </li> <li>3 tbsp. barbecue rub</li> <li>2 tbsp. oil</li> </ul> <h3>BBQ Beef Sauce Ingredients</h3><ul> <li>1 1/2 cups cider vinegar</li> <li>1/4 cup packed brown sugar</li> <li>1/4 cup chili sauce</li> <li>1/2 teaspoon crushed red pepper</li> <li>1 1/2 teaspoons barbecue rub</li> <li>2 teaspoons salt</li> <li>black pepper</li> <li>3/4cup water</li> <li>dash of red pepper hot sauce</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Beef</h3> First rub the meat with the barbecue rub. Massage the meat and spread the rub all over. Then, put it in a plastic bag or covered container and refrigerate for several hours or overnight. <h3>Make the BBQ Sauce</h3> To make the sauce, pour the vinegar, sugar, chili sauce, crushed red pepper, barbecue rub, salt, pepper, hot sauce, and water into a storage container. Put on the lid and shake the container so it is well combined. Refrigerate the sauce until you are ready to cook the meat. <h3>Sear the Beef</h3> When it is time, pour some oil into a pan. When it is hot, sear the meat so it is brown on all sides. <h3>Cook the BBQ Beef in the Crockpot</h3> Then place the seared beef in the slow cooker. Add 1 1/2 cups of the barbecue sauce all around the meat. Plug in the slow cooker. Set the slow cooker on high for the first hour and then on low for 8 more hours. <h3>Serve the Crockpot Pulled BBQ Beef</h3> Remove meat from slow cooker, place on a large plate or bowl. Using a fork and butter knife, shred the meat into pieces. Add some of the barbecue sauce to moisten the beef. Serve on hamburger rolls topped with coleslaw. Enjoy! Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4291 Fri, 30 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/windows/Uninstall-Programs-in-WinXP.htm You might want to uninstall software on your computer to free up hard drive space or to replace old programs with new ones. See the simple steps you take to uninstall programs in Windows XP. uninstall, windows, programs, winxp 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. uninstall, windows, programs, winxp Hi, I'm Don Schechter with About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to uninstall programs on Windows XP. <h3>Why Uninstall Programs in Windows?</h3> You might want to uninstall software on your computer to free up hard drive space or if you are, for example, replacing one antivirus program with another. <h3>Enter the Window's Control Panel</h3> CLICK Start / Control Panel, or if in classic view, CLICK Start / Settings / Control Panel <br><br> To check what mode you are in, you can right click on the start menu and go to properties. Here you can choose the classic start menu which I actually prefer. <br><br> Once you click on the control panel, double click 'Add or Remove Programs.' <h3>Find a Program to Uninstall</h3> You can see that the top icon, 'change or remove programs' is selected. Scroll through the list until you find the program that you want to install. <h3>Uninstall the Program</h3> Highlight the program and click 'Change/Remove.' Depending upon the software you will be guided through a very quick wizard making sure that you want to uninstall or make changes to the program. Once the program is uninstalled you'll see it has been removed from the list. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4437 Mon, 12 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/spreadsheets/Headers-and-Footers-in-Excel.htm Headers and footers are useful tools to add to Microsoft Excel spreadsheets. Learn how to create and adjust headers and footers, including ones with automatically updated dates and times. microsoft, excel, header, footer, spreadsheet 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. microsoft, excel, header, footer, spreadsheet Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to apply headers and footers to your spreadsheet in Microsoft Excel. <h3>Open an Excel Spreadsheet</h3> To begin, open Microsoft Excel. I'll open a saved spreadsheet. <h3>Decide Header and Footer Purpose</h3> Let's say I want to add headers and footers to my spreadsheet so when I print it, it will already have page numbers and other information. I'll go up to 'View' on the toolbar and choose the 'Header and Footer' option. A dialog box will open and as you can see both the header and footer are blank. <h3>Excel Header and Footer Dropdowns</h3> There are header and footer drop down menus that have some typical things to use either one including page number, page of option if your file is long, a title, and some other useful information. <br><br> The footer drop down menu had the same options. You can also click on the custom header or footer buttons. I'll click on 'custom footer.' <h3>Type Text in the Header or Footer</h3> There are three sections where you can type the text you want. The left will automatically left justify your text, the center will center your text and the right side will right justify your text. You can also see buttons above the text boxes that will help you create your footer. There is the page button which will automatically print the page number on each sheet accordingly. <br><br> I'll click that and type 'of' and a space. Now I'll click the page of button which will show of how many pages there are total. <h3>Add Date and Time</h3> In the left section, I want to put the date and time. There are buttons for those too. I'll click the date button and a comma and a space. And now I'll click the time button. Both of these will be the current time and date when you place them as either header or footer. Click 'ok' when you re done. <h3>Preview the Excel Header and Footer</h3> Now I can see a small preview of what my footer looks like. I'm happy with that, so now I can click print to print from here or print preview to look at the whole document. That's all you need to create headers and footers. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us at About.com. aboutvideo_3779 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktoppub/Publication-Sets-in-Publisher.htm Apply a single, professional, design them to your business cards, calendars, newesletters, letterhead and any other publications with Microsoft Publisher publication sets. Computing,Software,Microsoft Publisher,Publications,Newsletters,Business Cards 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Software,Microsoft Publisher,Publications,Newsletters,Business Cards Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll show you how to create sets of publications with the same design using Microsoft Publisher. <br><br>This is a great if you would like to publish a few different documents such as business cards, calendars, newsletters, and letterhead, all with the same look for your business or home. <br><h3>Find Design Set</h3> First open Microsoft Publisher. Now click Design Sets in the task pane on the left. A list of subcategories appears and you can choose which will suit your needs. Most business type documents will be found under the category Master Sets. <br><br>There are many different designs to choose from. <br><br>Today I'll make an informational postcard for a business. Just double click the document with the design you want. <br><h3>Publication Set Text</h3>Now you can enter your information into the text boxes provided. Format text like you would in MS Word using the toolbar at the top to change the font, size and style. I'll change the title font. <br><h3>Publication Set Sizing</h3>In the task pane to the left you can choose the size of the postcard and what kind of information you want on the second side. I'll choose address only. You can also choose to have multiple copies per sheet if your document is less than a full sheet. <br><br>To switch between the sides click the page icon at the bottom of the screen. <br><h3>Publication Set Colors</h3>If you'd like to change the color scheme click Color Schemes on the task pane. Many options appear. Just click one to apply it. <br><h3>Changing Font</h3>If you'd like to change all of the fonts, click Font Schemes at the top of the task pane. Just click one of these options to see it applied to your document. <br><h3>Delete in Publisher</h3>To delete a text box or a picture select it, and press delete. <br><h3>Adding Pictures & Graphics</h3>To insert a picture or logo that you already have on your computer, click the Picture icon on the toolbar on the left. Find your picture or logo, and click ok. You can place it anywhere on your page and resize it. I'll put mine where the generic logo was. <br><br>Now that you know how to use the design sets feature in Publisher, you can create many different documents for your business or for home.<br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_6677 Tue, 24 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/American-Teen-Interviews.htm 'American Teen' follows five very different Indiana high school students around during their senior year, catching all the emotional turmoil associated with getting ready to leave high school behind and head off to college and the real world. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the Los Angeles Film Festival Special Screening of <i>Wanted</i>.<p> <h3>From the Cast of <i>American Teen</i> - Mitch Reinholt, Colin Clemens and Jake Tusing</h3><p> <b>Why did you agree to be part of the documentary? I've seen it and it really exposes everything.</b><p> Colin Clemens: "I think at the time it was kind of like boring Warsaw finally had something exciting. And so I kind of jumped in just for the excitement of it, just being on camera. That's initially why I joined."<p> Jake Tusing: "I'm pretty much with Colin in the respect that I didn't expect too much out of it. I think it would be more of a personal thing, and it would really add some excitement to our lives."<p> Mitch Reinholt: "I thought it would just be really cool to have like a living yearbook, like everything compiled into one DVD that I can show my grandkids."<p> <b>How long did it take before you forgot that the cameras were there and just acted like yourselves?</b><p> Colin Clemens: "For me, it was about a month before I didn't realize they were there. At first it was pretty tense and you were kind of like you didn't know what to do. Eventually I really did get to the point where I just didn't even think they were there until the mic poked me or something."<p> <b>After you saw the final cut is there anything you would have gone back and said, "Oh please, you should not have filmed that?" Or do you think they did a fair job of editing?</b><p> Mitch Reinholt: "Well, I break up with a girl in a text message. That's not&#133; Anybody can look back on that and say that wasn't smart. But I think that's kind of one of the themes of the movie. I mean, we all are confused, have conflicting issues. Obviously, that's not something I'm extremely proud of or would do again. But that's just part of life, I suppose. Hannah and I have made amends. Hanging out all summer, I think, will be pretty cool. Just good friends now, so it's nice."<p> <b>Is this something you would suggest other teens do, if they were offered the opportunity?</b><p> Jake Tusing: "I think this is definitely a great opportunity for anybody. I mean, for me, I never had anyone to talk to in high school and this was a great way for me to vent, or tell people my problems. It made me feel like someone actually cared about me, and it was really nice."<p> Colin Clemens: "I would definitely suggest doing it. It's just a whole new experience. Probably the best experience of my life so far. It's just unique because people, you can actually touch someone's life or inspire somebody so it's a unique thing."<p> <b>How has your life changed after doing it?</b><p> Mitch Reinholt: "In the last couple months it's been different because people recognize me. They're like, 'Hey, are you in a movie?' I'm like, 'Well, kind of, it's a documentary&#133;' I think it's going to keep changing the next year or so. Ultimately, I'll go back to school and then eventually it'll kind of die down. But it will definitely be different. And if nothing else, I'll be better at interviews."<p> <h3>In Related Movie News:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/americanteen/"><i>American Teen</i> Trailer, Credits, Poster and Photos</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/wanted/ig/Wanted-Premiere-Photos/index.htm"><i>Wanted</i> Premiere Photos</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/wanted/"><i>Wanted</i> Cast Interviews, Photos, Credits, Trailer and Video Clips</a></li><br> <li>More on the Stars of <i>Wanted</i> - <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/mcavoyjames/">James McAvoy</a> and <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/jolieangelina/">Angelina Jolie</a></li><br> aboutvideo_3490 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/pcsupport/SecondIDEharddrive.htm Do you need additional storage space on your PC? Learn how to install a second IDE hard drive in a desktop PC in just a few simple steps. DIY,Computing,Gadgets,Computer Hardware,IDE Hard Drive,Disk Space,Drive Space 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. DIY,Computing,Gadgets,Computer Hardware,IDE Hard Drive,Disk Space,Drive Space Hi. I am Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll show you how to install a second IDE Hard Drive in a desktop PC. <br><h3>Before You Install an IDE Hard Drive</h3>First, turn off the computer and unplug the power cord. <br><br>Next, open the computer. Some computers have a button or buttons that you press to open the box. Some have screws on the rear of the case which must be removed. I just need to remove the screws on the back of the case. <br><br>Slide the casing back. Now you have access to the inside of your computer. <br><h3>Check Jumper for Primary IDE Hard Drive</h3>First, you need to confirm the primary IDE drive or the drive that has your operating system has its jumper set to Master. You can check this by removing the hard drive and looking at the jumper. Next, set the jumper on your new IDE drive to Slave. <br><h3>IDE Hard Drive Installation</h3>Now, mount the it below the primary drive. Make sure that you are using hard drive screws. They are smaller than the screws used on your case. If you don t have any, buy some from you local computer store. Large screws can damage the drive. <br><h3>Data Connections</h3>Here's the most important part: Connecting the data cable. They are the large gray cables. <br><br>There are usually two types in your computer:<ol><li>80 wire</li><li> 40 wire</li></ol> 80 wire is used for hard drives that need higher transfer speeds. 40 wire is used for CD and DVD drives. Don t use the 40 wire for hard drives as it will alter the performance of your system. <br><br>Now, connect the Master drive to the end of the 80 wire IDE cable and the Slave to the center. They only connect one way so don't force them. Finally, connect the four pin power plug to each drive. <br><h3>After you Install an IDE Hard Drive</h3>Close up your computer and plug in all of your cables. <br><br>When you boot up your computer it should recognize the new drive. If it doesn't, confirm that the cables are firmly attached to each device and the IDE cable is firmly attached to the mother board. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_3699 Wed, 31 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/spreadsheets/Merge-Spreadsheets-in-Excel.htm You can easily combine and organize data from different spreadsheets into one Excel spreadsheet. Learn how to merge spreadsheets and automatically update them when you change the individual files. excel, microsoft, spreadsheets, merge, tutorial 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. excel, microsoft, spreadsheets, merge, tutorial Hi! I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to merge spreadsheets in Microsoft Excel. <h3>Open Excel Sheets to Merge</h3> First open Excel. I'll open three spreadsheets that have the same headers. I want to put all of this information in the same spreadsheet. Create a new spreadsheet by clicking the 'new' icon at the top. <h3>Merge the Separate Spreadsheets</h3> Now go up to 'data' and choose 'consolidate.' A window will open. Choose 'sum' as the function under the drop down menu. Now for the references, click the 'browse' button. Go up to window and choose your first spreadsheet. Click and drag an area with your information in it. Leave lots of room at the bottom. Now click the icon in the consolidation window and then click 'add.' Do the same with your other spreadsheets. <h3>Automatically Update the Merge Spreadsheet</h3> My spreadsheets all have the same headers, so I'll check off 'Use Labels In Top Row and Left Column.' If you plan on changing your data in their individual files, you can check this box so the merged spreadsheet will automatically update when you open it again. Click 'ok.' <br><br> Now you can see I have all my information in one spreadsheet. Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4133 Tue, 26 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Create-a-Vignette-Effect.htm Creating a soft fade around your favorite photo adds a lovely touch. Learn how to make a vignette effect in Photoshop Elements. vignette effect,Photoshop Elements,graphic design videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. vignette effect,Photoshop Elements,graphic design videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to create a vignette effect in Photoshop Elements. <h3>Open the Photo in Photoshop Elements</h3> First, open Photoshop Elements. Now, I'll open a photo I want to add this effect to. We'll use a non-destructive way to alter the picture, meaning that the pixels will remain the same. <h3>Select the Subject of the Photo</h3> Double-click the background to change it to a layer. You can name it if you want, and click 'OK'. <br><br> Now select the elliptical marquee tool on the tool bar, and select the subject of your photo. If you need to reposition it, you can do that by pressing the space bar while the mouse is still pressed down. <h3>Create a New Fill Layer</h3> Create a new fill layer by going to layer, new fill layer, and selecting 'solid color.' Use black as a fill color, and click 'OK'. Deselect by pressing 'control D.' <h3>Adjust the Amount of Blur</h3> Go to filter, blur, Gaussian blur, and adjust the radius until you are happy with the amount of blur. Click 'OK' when you re finished. <h3>Mask the Upper Layer</h3> Now, select the filled ellipse layer, and drag it below the photo layer. Click on the photo layer and go to 'layer,' 'group with previous.' <br><br> Now the lower layer will act as a mask for the upper layer. <h3>Add a Background</h3> To add a background, go to 'Layer' in the tool bar, and select 'new fill layer.' <br><br> Choose 'solid color,' and pick a color for your background. I'll pick white. <h3>Center the Vignette Photo</h3> Now drag the new fill layer to the bottom of the layer stack. Hold the control key down, and click on the ellipse layer. <br><br> Go to image in the tool bar and choose crop. This will center the vignette photo without clipping the faded pixels. Go to 'save as,' and save a new copy of your photo with a vignette effect. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4961 Thu, 02 Aug 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Greg-Rucka-Interview.htm Comic book writer Greg Rucka was in his element at the San Diego Comic Con. Filming recently wrapped on the movie adaptation of Rucka's Whiteout comics, and Rucka was ready to talk about it. red carpet interviews 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. red carpet interviews Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2007 San Diego Comic Con.<p> <h3><i>Whiteout</i> Author Greg Rucka</h3><p> <b>Were you leery at all about turning your comic book over to Hollywood?</b><p> Greg Rucka: "Yeah, but I think that you get over that real fast if you're going to cash the check. I think that's the rule. You know what you did. I created a comic book; Steve drew a comic book. We knew it was a comic book. We were proud of what we did. The second we agreed to see it be made into a movie, we agreed also that it was going to be changed. So whining about it was stupid. That's just childish."<p> <b>Were you involved at all in the screenwriting process?</b><p> Greg Rucka: "A little bit, yeah. They were very generous in giving me input and time and you know, I think they've made a great movie. I think that people are going to really love this film."<p> <b>Was there anything they changed that you fought to keep in?</b><p> Greg Rucka: "Not really. There were things that they changed that I knew they were going to change, that had I had my druthers, they wouldn't have changed. But you know, like I said, we cashed the check. If we weren't willing to lump it, we shouldn't have said, 'Go ahead and make it.'"<p> <b>What do you think about Kate Beckinsale playing the lead character?</b><p> Greg Rucka: "The artist and I had this conversation when we were told Kate's playing Carrie. We're both like, 'She's far prettier than we ever thought Carrie was.' She really was. It was sort of one of the things that we had in our mind for Carrie way back when 10 years ago is that she wasn't unattractive, but she was not a woman that when you saw her you found it hard to breathe for a moment. And the first time I saw Kate Beckinsale on the set, it was hard to breathe for a moment so&#133;"<p> <b>That's a pretty normal reaction I would think.</b><p> Greg Rucka: "So there's that. But I have to say any concerns about that get completely washed away in the face of her talent as an actress. She's supremely talented. It's the very unfair combination of beautiful and talented. Good job, thank you. The rest of us mortals will be over here. "<p> <b>And having Joel Silver involved in the production?</b><p> Greg Rucka: "That made it happen. And then having Dominic [Sena] shoot. It comes together in a beautiful way. This film is going to if nothing else, the visuals are going to make people's eyes pop out. It's going to be beautiful, beautiful film."<p> <h3>More Coverage of <i>Whiteout</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/whiteout/a/whiteout072808.htm">Interview with <i>Whiteout</i> Star Kate Beckinsale</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/whiteout/"><i>Whiteout</i> News, Interviews, and Cast List</a></li><p> aboutvideo_6466 Wed, 27 Feb 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Camilla-Belle-Interview.htm Camilla Belle's more familiar with the world of independent films, but now she's tackled her first big action film with a starring role in '10,000 BC,' written and directed by Roland Emmerich. Camilla Belle, Interview, 10,000 BC 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Camilla Belle, Interview, 10,000 BC Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2008 San Francisco Wonder Con.<p> <h3>Camilla Belle ('Evolet')</h3><p> <b>How do you get into this character with the hair, the makeup, and everything?</b><p> Camilla Belle: "It was actually a really refreshing experience for me because usually in modern films you're getting your hair blown out every day, getting some nice makeup done, wardrobe. But it was actually really fun to get dirty every single day. I don't even know why, but it was just a different experience and everything different is fun. We had to get the fake tan spray about once a week to get dark, and the lenses I had to wear and our wigs and the placement of dirt... It wasn't so unattractive; we could make it look somewhat good."<p> <b>She <i>is</i> the love interest.</b><p> Camilla Belle: "Exactly. She has to look good, obviously."<p> <b>What is it like working on a project like this, because this is a lot bigger than what you usually do?</b><p> Camilla Belle: "Definitely. It was an experience I was not accustomed to. <i>When a Stranger Calls</i> was somewhat of studio film, but still just me in a house. It was not on a big scale, so this was very challenging. We were gone for six months. There was 500 crew members; I didn't know who anyone was most of the time. But luckily the cast was the most amazing group of guys - I was the only girl - and we had the best time. We really became a small family."<p> <b>So they didn't pick on you and there weren't practical jokes?</b><p> Camilla Belle: "No. We really did become a close-knit family. We were really fortunate to have that."<p> <b>Working on these locations, Roland (Emmerich) was just saying that the set had snow when there wasn't supposed to be snow. What was that like?</b><p> Camilla Belle: "It was a nightmare. Especially New Zealand, that was the hardest, I think, because it was so cold. We were there and then it would snow and they had to rewrite to adapt to the snow. And then on days they were hoping it would snow for continuity, it didn't snow. They had to rewrite for that. It was kind of a nightmare. But I have to say it was beautiful, stunning. Steven (Strait) and I were just saying that a lot of times it looked fake. It didn't look real because it was so beautiful."<p> <b>Did you have to do much green screen or did they have stuff there on the set you were supposed to be reacting to?</b><p> Camilla Belle: "We were really fortunate because there wasn't a lot of green screen in the movie. I shot maybe a week max on green screen. That was it. It was really wonderful because we were working on location so it made everything even more realistic, even more personal. And then with the animals, they were fake. That's the only thing, but I didn't work too much with them. I was kind of lucky."<p> <b>How tough is it to react to a fake animal on set?</b><p> Camilla Belle: "You feel really silly. All the camera guys are there just kind of laughing. And then when they say, 'Cut,' we just had to burst out laughing. You feel really dumb running from things that aren't there, reacting to an animal that's not there. So you feel really silly a lot of times."<p> <b>This has been described as a Romeo and Juliet type of romance. Does that fit the relationship you two have?</b><p> Camilla Belle: "I guess it's Romeo and Juliet in it's the ultimate love story, and in a sense it kind of is because they should not&#133; The old mother of the tribe doesn't want Evolet to be with him because he really is the runt of the tribe. She wants him to be with&#133;"<p> <b>Steven Strait's a runt?</b><p> Camilla Belle: "Somewhat, because he's not a capable hunter. He's not the macho man of the tribe. He's kind of just a little guy who can't really do much. So she wants her to be with the great hunter of the tribe. But ultimately their love overpowers everything else."<p> <b>When you get a script like this and it's such a huge, massive production, are you scared of that type of thing?</b><p> Camilla Belle: "There's obviously a little bit of anxiety before you do a film like this. I think signing on you get a little bit nervous. 'If it doesn't do well, what will happen? It's a huge budget, so much is relying on this film.' But you just have to, at the end of the days, jump into it and not think about those things. And once you're filming, you're not thinking about anything except for your day-to-day job and what you're doing the next hour. You really don't think about that once you're filming."<p> <h3>More on <i>10,000 BC</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/library/weekly/bl10000bcpicsa.htm"><i>10,000 BC</i> Photo Gallery</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/10000bc/"><i>10,000 BC</i> Credits, Trailer and Poster</a></li><p> aboutvideo_6300 Tue, 29 Jan 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/kidscooking/Gingerbread-Man-Cookie.htm Gingerbread man cookies are one holiday treat your kids will love gobbling up, but not before they get to decorate them into unique characters. See how to bake gingerbread men from scratch. ginger, gingerbread, gingerbread man, cookie 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. ginger, gingerbread, gingerbread man, cookie Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for about.com. No cookie is more fun to make than the gingerbread man. Gingerbread man cookies are most popular during the winter season, and are a great way to celebrate the holidays. Plus, children love to decorate them. <h3>Gingerbread Man Ingredients</h3> To make the gingerbread man cookies, you will need:<ul> <li>2 1/2 cups flour</li> <li>1/2 cup dark brown sugar</li> <li>1/2 cup molasses</li> <li>1/4 cup butter</li> <li>1/2 tsp cinnamon</li> <li>1/2 tsp salt</li> <li>1/2 tsp baking soda</li> <li>1/2 tsp ground ginger</li> <li>gingerbread man-shaped cookie cutters</li> <li>raisins, or candies</li> <li>tubes of icing</li> </ul> <h3>Mix the Gingerbread Man Wet Ingredients</h3> In an electric stand mixer, add the butter and the brown sugar. The butter should be at room temperature. You see how this gets nice and creamy. Next, pour in the molasses and blend it in. Once the molasses have been added, sift in the flour a bit at a time, mixing as you go. <h3>Add the Dry Ingredients</h3> In a separate bowl, sift the cinnamon, the salt, the baking soda, and the ginger. Mix them together and then, add them to the bowl. Blend well. If you find that the dough is too crumbly, add 1-2 tablespoons of water to the mixture and blend again. <h3>Chill the Cookie Dough</h3> Once the dough has been mixed, wrap it in plastic and chill the dough for about 1-3 hours before cutting, so it's easier to work with. When the dough is ready to be cut, preheat the oven to 350 degrees. <h3>Roll out the Cookie Dough</h3> Place some dough on a flat surface, and use a rolling pin to flatten it onto wax paper. Next, flour your cookie cutter to prevent the dough from sticking to its sides. <h3>Cut Out Gingerbread Man Shapes</h3> Then, begin cutting the dough out in gingerbread man shapes. I have one larger cutter, and one smaller one. Use a knife to pull away any extra dough. <h3>Bake the Gingerbread Man Cookies</h3> Once you have cut all of the gingerbread men out of the dough, carefully transfer them to a parchment paper lined cookie sheet with a spatula. You could bake them just as they are and fully decorate them later. Or you could add raisins or small, round candies to the gingerbread men now. Buttons are always a nice touch. <br><br> Place the gingerbread men in the oven at 350 degrees. Bake for about 8 minutes, depending on the thickness of the dough. <h3>Decorate the Gingerbread Men</h3> After the gingerbread men have cooled, they're ready for the final decorating. Using the frosting, draw faces, clothes, and even hair - be creative. Remember, the more detailed the gingerbread men, the more likely they'll run off their plate and into your guests' mouths! <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at About.com. aboutvideo_6797 Fri, 19 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/frenchfood/Creme-Brulee.htm You don't have to wait until the next time you go to a restaurant to enjoy this sweet custard dessert! Follow these simple instructions for homemade creme brulee. creme brulee,dessert,french,recipe,custard 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. creme brulee,dessert,french,recipe,custard Hi, I am Ben Kurtzman for About.com Food, and today we are going to make creme brulee. Creme brulee is a delicious dish to order in any restaurant, but it is also surprisingly simple to make at home. <br/><br/> In order to create the burnt sugar glaze for the top of the cr&#232;me brulee we are going to need a special piece of equipment: this small hand held blowtorch. It is a lot of fun to use and can be purchased at any kitchen store.<br/><br/> <H3>Creme Brulee Ingredients</H3> The recipe we are making today will yield four servings. We are going to be using: <ul> <li>1 1/3 cups cream</li> <li>2 eggs</li> <li>1/3 cup of sugar</li> <li>1/2 a teaspoon of vanilla</li> </ul> <H3>Prepare the Cream</H3> The first thing that we are going to do is bring our cream to a near boil. You never want to bring any dairy product to a full boil, but with this cream in this recipe we are going to bring it right to the brink. Bring it up to medium heat, and we are going to keep a close eye on it so it does not boil over. <br/><br/> <H3>Mix Creme Brulee Ingredients</H3> While we are waiting for the cream to heat up we are going to mix the eggs, the sugar and the vanilla in a small bowl. Whisk the ingredients together until they are nicely blended. Now that the cream is hot enough we are going to add it to the mixture in the bowl, but we are going to be careful and do it very slowly. <br/><br/>Now that our mixture is this beautiful golden color we are going to pour it into another bowl, but we are going to strain it to make sure that we have perfectly smooth cr&#232;me brulee. <H3>Move to Custard Cups</H3> Now we have a perfectly smooth mixture that we are going to pour into our custard cups and bake. The custard needs to cook very gently, so we use custard cups on this baking rack so the mixture does not touch the hot bottom or sides. <br/><br/>To help the custard cook gently we are going to fill the baking pan with a warm water bath. You want it to be as hot as you can get it out of the tap, and we are going to add it until it comes about half way up our custard cups. <br/><br/> <H3>Bake and Refrigerate the Creme Brulee</H3> Turn up the oven to 250 degrees. After an hour check to see if the custard has solidified. Once it has, take it out of the oven and let it cool until the custard cups are cool to the touch. Now that our custard cups are out of the oven we are going to cover them completely in saran wrap and we are going to put it in the refrigerator until it has cooled all the way through. <br/><br/> <H3>Heat the Creme Brulee Candy Topping</H3> Now here comes the fun part. The custard has cooled off completely and we get to use the blowtorch. First, I am going to spoon a small layer of sugar over the custard cups. We are going to use the blowtorch to heat up and caramelize the sugar and create the hard, sweet topping that is associated with creme brulee. <br/><br/>It should brown up really quickly. You want to keep it moving so you do not burn the sugar. If you hold it in one place for too long it is going to blacken up on you. And you may get a little bit of smoke, but that is nothing to worry about.<br/><br/>As you can see, once you have applied the blowtorch to the sugar you get a nice, hard candy shell, and that is what makes it delicious when it mixes with the custard.<br/><br/> Thanks for watching, and to learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_5757 Mon, 07 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/herbsspices/Homemade-Rosemary-Salt.htm Making your own rosemary salt is an easy and inexpensive way to add a very versatile spice to your pantry. Rosemary salt is especially complimentary on roasted meats, and you can package it creatively as a great gift for the foodie in your family. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Hi, I'm Chef John Mitzewich for About.com. Today I'm going to show you how to make homemade rosemary salt. It's a great thing to have in the pantry and a wonderful gift idea. First of all is making your own gifts being cheap, no it's being "creative" so keep that in mind. <h3>Rosemary Salt Ingredients</h3> We need 3 cups of kosher salt, which is that flake style salt. It has a larger grain than regular table salt. There is a little close-up for you. We also need 1 cup of coarse salt, that's what we going to use to grind the rosemary. See how big that is, you can find them both in the store. So we need 1 cup of coarse and 3 cups of regular. There is 1 cup of rosemary leaves. <h3>Strip the Rosemary Leaves</h3> Now, how to strip rosemary. Hey, stop giggling. Stripping rosemary is very easy, see how the rosemary grows in this direction? We're going to pull our fingers down the stem in the opposite direction, against the grain, and all those leaves will strip off. <h3>Grind the Rosemary and Salt</h3> Add your cup of rosemary to a food processor, and the cup of coarse salt. We're going to pulse on and off, a few seconds at a time just to get it going. Once it starts to kind of come together you can pulse it longer, like 5 or 6 seconds at a time. <br><br>Once you see that rosemary get smaller and start to integrate, then you can leave in on for longer periods, and then you can just leave it on. Now be careful, we don't want a powder here. What we want is for the coarse salt and the rosemary to be the same size as the kosher salt. And that's exactly what I have right there. <br><br> So once that happens, add that mixture to the 3 cups of plain kosher salt, mix it up and you're done. <h3>Package the Rosemary Salt</h3> This makes such a great gift. How easy was that? Remember, you're not cheap, you're creative. Not to mention, even if you don't give this as a gift, which you should, since it saves you a lot of money, this is great for the pantry. It goes on so many things. Here are some creative ways to package it. <br><br> They sell these magnetic spice containers with the see through top. Very cool, you can put it in that. They also sell these stainless steel shakers, which I really like. You can spoon it in. That makes a great gift, wrap it up and throw a bow on it. One thing, make sure the holes are large enough for the salt to fit though, otherwise its turns into a gag gift. <br><br> And there you go. There are your 3 ways; one for you, one for Aunt Betty, and one for Uncle Joe. They are going to love it. It feels like a real gift, so when they open it, they are like "oh, wow this feels like jewelry... oh cool. I got salt." But, no, they are going to love it. I hope you give it a try. Enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit About.com. aboutvideo_3703 Mon, 29 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Straighten-Lines-in-Photoshop.htm Do some of your pictures appear just a little bit lopsided or skewed? Learn how you can make a skewed horizon or other line straight with Adobe Photoshop. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Photography,Graphic Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Photography,Graphic Design Hi, I'm Don Shechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today, I'll show you how to straighten a skewed horizon line using Adobe Photoshop CS. Basically if your picture isn't straight, I will be teaching you how to fix it. <br><h3>Choose a Picture for Photoshop Horizon Line Fix</h3> First open Photoshop. Then open the picture you wish to adjust. <h3>Make Straight Horizon Line in Photoshop</h3>Select the Crop tool and make sure no numbers are entered into any of the fields in the Options bar.<br><br>Click and drag out a rectangle that is much smaller than the overall size of your image, but do not hit Enter and crop the picture yet.<br><br>Next, click inside the Crop Rectangle, and drag it so that either the top or bottom middle control handle is right on top of the horizon line.<br><br>In this image, we are using an actual horizon in the sky, but this will work for any picture. In those cases, you can use any line that should appear horizontal. <br><br>Move your cursor to the corner of the crop box, it will change to a curved double pointed arrow. Now click and drag to rotate the photo until the edge of your crop box is aligned with the horizon line.<br><br>Now drag out the sides of your crop box as much as you can. The corners of your original photo will be cropped out. Let's crop it by hitting Enter.<br><br>The result is a straight horizon in our picture.<br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Computing.About.com.<br> aboutvideo_6662 Wed, 18 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Steve-Carell-Interview.htm Steve Carell, undeniably one of the nicest guys in Hollywood, takes on the role of secret agent Maxwell Smart in the comedy movie 'Get Smart' directed by Peter Segal. On the red carpet, Carell talked about action scenes and his take on Maxwell Smart. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the World Premiere of <i>Get Smart</i>.<p> <h3>Steve Carell ('Maxwell Smart')</h3><p> <b>You joke about being an action guy, but you actually took on a lot of action scenes in this. Was it much more difficult than you expected it to be?</b><p> Steve Carell: "It was fun. I mean, well, yeah, they rig you up so well and it's all so safety-driven you never feel like your life is in any sort of jeopardy. You're just a kid flying around on a wire having a good time. It's just fun."<p> <b>Was it easier to make this one your own being that it's kind of a prequel in that it's the beginning of him being an agent?</b><p> Steve Carell: "Well they tried to make it an origin story so you get a chance to see where Maxwell Smart came from and how he goes from analyst to spy. But it was daunting, too, because the original is so engrained and so well-loved and respected. But I think in order to do a remake you have to have an intrinsic love of the source material. I think everybody here did."<p> <b>That's really important. If they ask you to play the character again, are you signing up for another one?</b><p> Steve Carell: "If it goes well and people want to see another one, yeah, I'd love to do it again."<p> <b>So more action scenes?</b><p> Steve Carell: "I think the second one would be even bigger than this one, but that's my assumption."<p> <b>How is Anne Hathaway as Agent 99?</b><p> Steve Carell: "Fantastic. She's, you know, such a sweet person, funny, obviously very beautiful but a great actress. We hit it off immediately."<p> <b>I know that you said you don't think of him as a bumbling guy, so what is your take on Maxwell Smart?</b><p> Steve Carell: "I think he's very eager. I think he's a bit counterintuitive. He's smart. I see him as sort of an every man who is thrust into this world of spies. And he can handle himself fairly well, up to a certain extent. But he's eccentric and a little bit different."<p> <h3>More Coverage of <i>Get Smart</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/getsmart/a/getsmartsc61108.htm">Steve Carell, Anne Hathaway, Alan Arkin, and Director Peter Segal Discuss <i>Get Smart</i></a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/getsmart/a/getsmartdj61108.htm">Dwayne Johnson on <i>Get Smart</i> and Comedy</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/library/weekly/blgetsmartpicsa.htm"><i>Get Smart</i> Photo Gallery</a></li><br><li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/getsmart/"><i>Get Smart</i> Trailer, Video Clips, Cast List and Interviews</a></li><br> <li>More on the Stars of <i>Get Smart</i> - <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/carellsteve/">Steve Carell</a> and <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/hathawayanne/">Anne Hathaway</a></li><br> aboutvideo_4160 Thu, 31 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/webdesign/Choose-and-Register-a-Domain.htm One of the first steps to building your own website is registering a domain name. See how to choose a name, then register it using a web hosting service. domain names, build a website, computing videos, web hosting sites 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. domain names, build a website, computing videos, web hosting sites Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to choose and register a domain for a website. <h3>Choose a Domain Name</h3> When you're thinking about a domain try and keep it clear and concise. You might want to avoid long sentences, dashes, and hard to remember acronyms. <h3>Check Domain Name Availability</h3> You can type in the address to see if someone else already owns it, but keep in mind that someone may own the domain but not have anything up yet. <br><br> Your best course of action is to go to one of the many web hosting companies such as bluehost.com or godaddy.com. Today I'll actually go to verio.com and here &#150; like on many other sites- there is a box where I can enter in the name of the site I want. <h3>Test Domain Name Availability</h3> I'll type in "about" and hit go. That domain is obviously unavailable, but I am offered similar domains such as abouts.info. It's generally a good idea to stick with the more popular .com, .org, and .edu. .Com is often used for both business and personal uses, .org for organizations and non-profits, and .edu for educational institutions. <br><br> I'll click 'try another name,' and now type in my own name. Now I'll hit 'search.' <br><br> It's actually available, and for $9.95 a year I can register the domain. Keep in mind that this does not mean I have space to put up the website. I'm just laying a claim to that domain name for as long as I keep paying. <h3>Research Web Hosting Plans</h3> If I click 'order now,' I can buy it. As with many companies I can now add a web hosting plan. Here's one plan (the bottom one) that includes 10 gigabytes of disk space and 200 email accounts for 19.95 a month. Many sites offer many different rates and services, so you may want to shop around before settling on one. <h3>Register the Domain Name</h3> Once you purchase your domain and hosting plan you'll receive an email with instructions on how to access your site. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6979 Tue, 30 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/frenchfood/French-Toast.--6T.--6T.htm Nothing smells or tastes quite so good as warm french toast in the morning. Learn how easy it is to transform your bread into this delicious breakfast treat. french toast,recipe,breakfast,vegetarian 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. french toast,recipe,breakfast,vegetarian Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food.<br/><br/>Today I'm going to show you how to make French toast.<br/><h3>Mixing French Toast Batter</h3>In a bowl beat 2 eggs. Slowly add up to 1 cup of milk, until the mixture becomes a light creamy yellow. Add a pinch of salt. Sometimes I like to mix in some cinnamon.<br/><h3>Setting French Toast Heat</h3>Turn on the burner to medium high heat. Drop some water on the griddle to test the temperature. When it sizzles, grease it well with either butter or a non stick cooking spray.<br/><h3>Dip Bread in Batter</h3>Carefully dip the bread into the eggs and then flip it over to get both sides.<br/><h3>French Toast Bread</h3>You can use almost any kind of bread for French toast. I'm going to use a large whole wheat bread. <br/><br>Now place your piece on the griddle. Be careful not to soak up all the eggs with your first few pieces. For a special treat, use thick bread such as challah or texas sized bread. You want a slice that is at least half an inch thick<br/><br/>If you d like you can add a little cinnamon on the top of each slice.<br/><h3>Cooking French Toast</h3>After a minute or two, take a peek and see it if has browned on the bottom. Once the bottom is lightly browned, turn it over once. It should take half the time to cook the other side. Be careful that your griddle doesn't get too hot and burn the toast. When it's done remove each piece from the griddle and place them on your plate. <br/><h3>French Toast Accompaniments</h3>Serve hot with some maple syrup. Sprinkle some powdered sugar for an extra special treat.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the web at Food.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_3498 Sat, 03 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/pcsupport/dvdburner3-mov.htm Want to be able to create your own movie DVDs and music or other CDs? If your computer's existing functionality doesn't include CD and DVD burning, learn how easy it is to install a burner on your own. DIY,Computing,Gadgets,Computer Hardware,DVD Burner,CD Burner,Disk Space,Storage 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. DIY,Computing,Gadgets,Computer Hardware,DVD Burner,CD Burner,Disk Space,Storage Hi. I am Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I am going to show you how to install a DVD or CD burner in your desktop PC. <br><h3>Before you Install a DVD or CD Burner</h3>First, turn off the computer and unplug the power cord. <br><br>Next, open the computer. Some computers have a button or buttons that you press to open the box. Some have screws on the rear of the case which must be removed. I just need to remove the screws on the back of the case. Slide the casing back. Now you have access to the inside of your computer. <br><h3>Different Ways to Install a DVD or CD Burner</h3>Depending on your computer, there are several ways in which you can install your DVD or CD burner. You might have to use rails which clip onto the side of the device or you might be able to attach it directly to the case with screws. <br><h3>Set Jumper to Install a DVD or CD Burner</h3>Now, take a look at the back of the device. Make sure the jumper is set to Cable Select. Look at your manual to see exactly where this is located on your burner, but most likely it'll be just like this one. <br><h3>Installation</h3>It's time to mount the CD/DVD burner. Find an open slot in your computer. You may need to pop out the bay cover to make an opening for your new device. Screw or slide it into place. <br><h3>Data Connections</h3>Next, find an IDE cable in your computer. It is normally a large gray cable. It can only fit one way, so don't force it if it doesn't fit. <br><br>Once that is snug, find a 4-pin power cable and connect it to your device. <br><h3>After You Install a DVD or CD Burner</h3>Close up your computer and plug in all of your cables. <br><br>When you start up the computer, it should recognize your new CD/DVD burner. Install any software that came with the device at this time. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_3777 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktoppub/MS-Publisher--Predesigned-Pub.htm It's fast and easy to produce your own professional-looking publications for print, the web or email. Learn how to use predesigned publication templates in Microsoft Publisher. Computing,Software,Microsoft Publisher,Publications,Publishing,Templates,Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Software,Microsoft Publisher,Publications,Publishing,Templates,Design Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today, I'll show you how to use pre-designed publications in MS Publisher. This program is great if you want to quickly design publications for print, web or email. <br><h3>Publication Format</h3> First open, Microsoft Publisher. In the task pane on the left you'll see a few options including publications for print, web sites and email, design sets, and blank publications. <br><br>I'll choose publications for print. You will see a long list of different kinds of publications for business, school, or home. Click on the kind of publication you want and you'll see subcategories. <br><br>I'll make an announcement flyer. Double click which publication you want. <br><h3>Adding Text to your Publication</h3> Now you can type your information in the text boxes. Since I have tear-offs on the bottom of the flyer, I will have to enter my contact information there as well. <br><h3>Deleting in Publisher</h3> If you want to delete a graphic or text box simply click it and press Delete. <br><h3>Graphics in Predesigned Publications</h3> If you want to add a graphic, go to Insert, Picture, then choose either a clip art file or a picture from your computer. I'm going to choose a picture I have on file. You can adjust your image by selecting it and using the options on the Picture toolbar. <br><h3>Move Elements of Publisher Publication</h3> To adjust text simply select the text, and change it as you would in Microsoft Word. <br><h3>Preview</h3> To see a preview of your document, click the preview button at the top of the screen. <br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_4689 Tue, 12 Feb 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/americanfood/Easy-Caramel-Sauce.htm Learn how to make your own thick caramel sauce with just three ingredients, and you'll be serving it fresh with ice cream, apples, and over your other favorite desserts. caramel, sauce, dessert, recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. caramel, sauce, dessert, recipe Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make an easy caramel sauce. <h3>Caramel Sauce Ingredients</h3> For this recipe you will need: 1 cup of sugar 6 Tbsp butter 1/2 cup heavy whipping cream <h3>Set Up the Caramel Sauce Ingredients</h3> Before you begin, place the cream and the butter next to the pan, so it is ready to put in. It is important to work fast when making caramel or else the sugar may burn. <h3>Melt the Sugar</h3> First pour the sugar into a 2 or 3 quart pan over high heat. As the sugar begins to melt, stir constantly with a whisk. <br><br> As the sugar starts melting, you will see that small light brown crystals start to form. Once those crystals have melted, you will have liquid sugar, which is a dark amber color. <h3>Melt In the Butter</h3> Now add the butter to the pan and continue to whisk until the butter has melted. Once the butter has melted, take the pan off the heat. <h3>Mix in the Cream</h3> Slowly pour in the cream while continuing to whisk. You can see that the butter and cream causes bubbles and foam, which is why we needed to use such a large pan. <h3>Stir the Caramel Sauce</h3> Continue to whisk until caramel sauce is smooth. Let cool in the pan for a couple minutes, and then pour the caramel into a glass mason jar. You'll see I am using a pot holder, because the caramel sauce is still quite hot. <h3>Serving and Storing Caramel Sauce</h3> Let it sit until it is at room temperature and then store in the refrigerator for up to 2 weeks. Warm before serving. Enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching, to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4478 Tue, 22 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/spanishfood/Atun-With-White-Bean-Cassoulet.htm In this tasty Mediterranean dish, seared tuna steak is placed on top of a bed of white beans, collard greens, peppers, and bacon. Watch how to make atun at home. Spanish food,atun,tuna,recipes,videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Spanish food,atun,tuna,recipes,videos Hi, my name is Craig Wilson from Tasca restaurant in New York City for About.com Food. Today we'll be cooking atun. <h3>Atun Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you'll need:<ul> <li>number two tuna, seasoned lightly with pepper</li> <li>white bean cassoulet</li> <li>garlic aioli</li> </ul> <h3>White Bean Cassoulet Ingredients</h3> To make white bean cassoulet, combine:<ul> <li>1/2 can white beans</li> <li>1 teaspoon diced bacon</li> <li>1/2 ounce collard greens</li> <li>1 teaspoon diced peppers</li> </ul> <h3>Garlic Aioli Ingredients</h3> You'll use this for dipping when the tuna is seared and finished. For this recipe, you'll need:<ul> <li>4 whole eggs</li> <li>3 cups oil</li> <li>4 cloves garlic, minced</li> <li>1 tablespoon lemon juice</li> <li>salt and pepper to taste</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Garlic Aioli</h3> Beat eggs in a medium bowl with a wire whisk, then stir in the garlic. Gradually add oil in a thin stream, beating constantly until light and creamy. Season with salt and pepper. Stir in the lemon juice, and leave to cool in the refrigerator. <h3>Sear the Tuna</h3> We got a hot pan here, very hot and all you want to do is sear the outside of this tuna because you want the inside to be rare. Since our pan is so hot, we'll move it off the stove for a minute. <h3>Cook the White Bean Cassoulet</h3> And while were doing that, we can add our white bean cassoulet to the other pan. Put a little olive oil in there. <br><br> Cook beans for three to five minutes, or until warm. <h3>Slice the Tuna</h3> Make sure this tuna gets an even sear on it, and then we're going to be slicing it down and placing it over the white beans. It's a very simple Spanish dish. <br><br> Place the beans onto the center of the plate, then drizzle a little olive oil over that. Then take the tuna and slice it down into nice little slices like this. Place it onto the beans. <h3>Serve the Atun</h3> Add a little more olive oil, and then put the aioli on the top of the dish. There you have it--atun with white bean cassoulet and aioli. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6800 Sun, 28 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/How-to-fix-blemishes-.htm Would your pictures be perfect if you could just remove one or two blemishes? Well, with the Healing Brush in Adobe Photoshop, you can be your own professional air-brusher in just a few steps. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Air-brush,Graphic Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Air-brush,Graphic Design Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. Today I'll teach you how to correct facial blemishes using the healing brush tool in Adobe Photoshop. <br><br>First, open up Adobe Photoshop. Click on File, Select Open, and Select your Picture. My preferred method for fixing facial blemishes is with the Healing Brush Tool. <br><H3>New Photoshop Layer for Healing Brush Tool</h3>First make a duplicate of your photo by dragging it onto the Create a New Layer icon. Now make sure the copy layer is selected. Double-click on the copy layer and name it Healing. I made a duplicate to protect the original in case we want to make changes later on and also to compare my healing layer to the original. <br><H3>Understanding Photoshop Healing Brush Tool</h3>Now select the Healing Brush Tool on the toolset on the left side. The Healing Brush tool works like the Clone Tool, but instead of just cloning an area's texture, the healing brush also samples an area's color and blends the sample area into the destination seamlessly. <br><h3>Identifying Area to Fix with Healing Brush</h3>Select a section to heal by holding down the Alt key on PC's, the Option key if you're on a Mac. <br><h3>Using the Photoshop Healing Brush Tool</h3>Notice the target crosshairs? I want to remove blemishes over his left eyebrows. I'll hold down the Alt key and I'll click on a clear section of skin. And now I'll click on a blemish. I just healed a blemish away. I find it useful to keep one finger on the Alt key and to use my right hand to heal with the mouse. I'll heal a few more. If you make a mistake you can undo by going to Edit, and hitting Step Backward. <br><h3>Photoshop Healing Brush Features</h3>A great thing about the Healing Brush is that it's very forgiving. Click the Eye icon on the healing layer in the layer palette to compare the differences. See the difference a little healing can do to improve people's complexions. The Healing Brush tool is also useful for reducing wrinkles, and unwanted shadows. <br><br>Make a duplicate of the healing layer by dragging it to the Create a New Layer icon. Double-click the new Healing Layer and name it Wrinkles. Now I'll select my Healing Brush tool and sample a clear section of skin on his forehead. And I'll erase the wrinkles and shadows under his eyes. <br><h3>Making Healing Brush Results More Natural</h3>The result is kind of drastic and may look artificial at first. A good way to cut down on the drastic change is to lower the opacity on the wrinkle layer. I'll lower it to about 70 percent opacity. <br><br>The healing brush is a powerful method for removing blemishes and wrinkles and helping people look their best. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_6955 Mon, 12 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Apple-iDVD-4-project-setup.htm Learn how to create your own DVDs to share your favorite videos with friends and family. Get started by learning how to create a New Project. Computing,Gadgets,Programs,Apple iDVD,DVD Encoding,DVDs,Films,Movies,Videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Gadgets,Programs,Apple iDVD,DVD Encoding,DVDs,Films,Movies,Videos Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll teach you how to set up a new project in Apples iDVD 4. First open up Apple iDVD. Open up your harddrive, click on applications, and double click iDVD. If you've used iDVD before it opens with the last project. And whatever dvd template used will automatically play. <br><br>If you want to turn off the dvd template to stop the motion and sound click the motion button. <br><h3>Start New iDVD Project</h3>Let's start a new project. Well go to file, new project. I'll click on don't save the current project, and give my project a name and save location and click create. After hitting save the dvd template starts again, just hit the motion button to stop it. Now I want to adjust options. <br><h3>iDVD Project Preferences</h3>I'll go to iDVD, preferences. In the first tab there are various DVD options. If I deselect Dropzones, the drag and drop area on the menu disappears. Dropzones are places where you can drop photos or movies to play on the DVD menu. <br><br>To get rid of the apple logo click to deselect the second box. <br><h3>Encoding Preference</h3>Next I'll set my encoding settings to best quality. I'll make sure my video is set on NTSC, which is the standard for the United States. Pal is for Europe. <br><h3>Setting iDVD Movies Preferences</h3>Now I'll go to the movies tab. If you import a movie from iMovie and created chapter markers in iMovie, iDVD will automatically create a submenu with chapters. <br><br>If you don't want iDVD to automatically do this, you can set iDVD to Never create chapter marker submenus, or ask each time. We'll leave it on automatic. If you dont like a chapter marker you can always click on it once and press delete. <br><h3>Save New iDVD Project</h3>Well close the preferences window and save our project by going to File, Save. And that's how you setup a project in iDVD. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_6864 Fri, 26 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/vegetarian/Eggplant-Sticks.htm Eggplants are especially delicious fried into finger shapes that are both nutritious and fun to eat for the whole family. egg plant fingers,eggplant fries,eggplant,side dish,snack,vegetarian,fruit 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. egg plant fingers,eggplant fries,eggplant,side dish,snack,vegetarian,fruit Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food.<br/><br/>Eggplant is a popular fruit that can be served in a variety of ways. Today I'm going to show you how to prepare and fry eggplant sticks.<br/><br/>To get started, you'll need:<ul><li>A large knife</li><li>A vegetable peeler</li><li>A medium sized eggplant</li><li>Some salt</li></ul><h3>Choosing your Eggplant</h3>The eggplant should spring back when you apply pressure to it. There should be a green stem. <br><h3>Eggplant Prep</h3>First rinse the eggplant and cut off the stem and the base. Now you need to peel it. You can use a vegetable peeler or take a knife and just cut it down the sides. I use a peeler to get off the last little bits.<br/><h3>Eggplant Slicing</h3>To make sticks, cut long slices. Then cut each slice in thirds and then in half, we want them the size of a finger. <br><h3>Reducing Eggplant Moisture</h3> Throw them in a colander and salt them. Let the eggplant sit for 30 minutes, this helps reduce the moisture inside the eggplant. Then wash the sticks and pat them dry.<br/> <h3>Eggplant Breading</h3>Next we bread the eggplant. I'm going to use pancake mix with some salt and pepper. First dip the stick into the egg with one hand. Then use your other hand to coat the wet stick with the breading. So you'll have one wet hand and one dry hand. Make as many sticks as you'd like and refrigerate for 30 minutes.<br/><h3>Eggplant Frying</h3>Pour 1 inch of oil into a pan over high heat. When the oil is hot, place the eggplant pieces in the oil, and fry for 2 to 3 minutes until the bottom side is golden brown. Flip them over to do both sides. When both sides are brown, carefully remove the sticks and place them on paper towels to drain. <br/><br/>There they are, ready to be eaten plain, or dipped in your favorite sauce!<br/><br>Your friends and family will enjoy this crispy snack.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the web at Food.About.com.<br/><br/> aboutvideo_5496 Thu, 25 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/kosherfood/Chocolate-Chip-Mandel-Bread.htm Much like a biscotti, mandel bread is a delicious snack that is baked twice to give it a crispy crunch. Try this softer, cookie-like version of chocolate chip mandel bread. mandel bread, chocolate, dessert, kosher food, chocolate mandel 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. mandel bread, chocolate, dessert, kosher food, chocolate mandel Hi! I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com. Today I'm going to show you how to make chocolate chip mandel bread. <h3>Chocolate Chip Mandel Bread Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need: <ul> <li>1 cup of sugar</li> <li>1 cup of oil</li> <li>3 cups of flour</li> <li>1 tsp. baking powder</li> <li>1 tsp. of vanilla</li> <li>12 oz. chocolate chips</li> <li>4 eggs</li> </ul> Preheat the oven to 325 degrees. <h3>Mix the Mandel Bread Wet Ingredients</h3> First put the sugar, the eggs and the oil into a large mixing bowl. Mix with an electric mixer on medium speed. Using a recipe with 4 eggs will make this a more cookie-like rather than a brittle type of mandel bread. <h3>Mix in the Mandel Bread Dry Ingredients</h3> Next, add the baking powder to the flour and whisk them together. Now, a little bit at a time, mix the flour into the wet mixture. Once you've got the flour worked in, add the vanilla. Mixture will be thick and sticky. Finally, fold in the chocolate chips with a spoon. You can add walnuts at this time, but I will leave it as is. <h3>Bake the Chocolate Chip Mandel Bread</h3> Spoon about half the mixture onto each of the two parchment lined cookie sheets. Bake them for about a 1/2 hour. <h3>Cut the Chocolate Chip Mandel Bread</h3> Take them out of the oven and cut the loaf into 1-inch slices. If your loaf is wide like mine, I like to also cut the loaf down the middle. Then, put back in oven for another 5 minutes. <br><br>Take out of the oven, serve, and enjoy! <br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us at About.com. aboutvideo_5451 Mon, 22 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/coffeetea/Benefits-of-Whole-Leaf-Tea.htm Is there really a big difference between the types of tea you can buy at the store? Find out what whole leaf tea is, and what benefits come from brewing loose or whole tea leaves. whole leaf tea, tea, tea leaves, benefits of tea 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. whole leaf tea, tea, tea leaves, benefits of tea Hi, I'm Annelies Zijderveld with Mighty Leaf Tea for About.com Food, and today I'm going to explain why whole leaf tea is better than your usual supermarket variety. <h3>Whole Leaf Tea Harvests</h3> There are two ways of collecting the leaves off of tea bushes: by hand or by machine. To ensure the highest quality teas, the newest two leaves and a bud are plucked by hand off of tea plants. This practice of plucking takes time and low yields around 2 to 3,000 leaves only translates into a pound of finished product. <br><br> This repeated picking of the young leaves and buds promotes new growth throughout the year. Depending upon the origin, bushes are plucked anywhere from 3 to 12 times a year. Plucking is often referred to as flushes, so if your Darjeeling is a first flush - that means it was plucked during the first harvest of the year. <h3>Cut, Tear, Curl Tea Leaves</h3> The standard supermarket variety, known in the industry as CTC, means cut, tear, curl. CTC teas are comprised of leaves that are heavily broken. <br><br> Most of the teas found in paper bags are CTC. As you continue tasting tea, you will find that paper actually imparts some flavor to the tea. Whole tea leaves don't fit inside the bags made from paper. <h3>Benefits of Whole Tea Leaves</h3> The health benefits attributed to tea are found most prominently in whole leaves. As far as taste goes, you will get more of a nuanced and complex infusion with whole leaf tea. <h3>Tea Bags and Brewing</h3> It has become very en vogue to drink whole leaf tea in silken bags. They come in a variety of shapes like the pyramid, rectangle or square. An important thing to consider when you are evaluating whole leaf tea bags in the marketplace would be how they are sealed: with glue, heat sealing, staples or unbleached cotton stitching. <br><br> Next take into account the space inside the tea bag, since whole leaf tea needs a lot of space for the water and tea leaves to mingle and for the leaves to unfurl properly. Look at this tea pouch before it's been brewed and afterwards. The difference is pronounced. <h3>Tea Packaging and Protection</h3> One other important thing to consider is how protected the leaves are in their packaging. The enemies of tea are light, air and heat. Each of these elements will reduce the shelf life of your tea, so take care. You will want to make sure that they are packaged in a way that keeps out air. To store your tea at home, make sure to set it in a cupboard, out of the light and not on top of any contraption that will generate heat. <h3>Drinking Loose Tea Leaves</h3> Whole leaf tea bags make it convenient to drink and brew great tea anywhere and do not require the measuring and brewing tools necessary for steeping loose whole tea leaves. So whether you brew your whole leaf tea loose or in bags, drink in the goodness of a full-bodied, antioxidant-rich infusion that is both good for you and tastes great <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com aboutvideo_6809 Sun, 28 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/The-Dodge-Tool.htm Are some of your most precious memories stored on pictures that look too dark? Brighten or highlight parts of your digital pictures using the Adobe Photoshop Dodge Tool. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Photography,Graphic Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Photography,Graphic Design Hi. I am Don Schechter for About.com Computing.<br><br>Today I am going to show you how to use the Dodge Tool using Adobe Photoshop CS 2 to make people in your pictures appear brighter. <br><h3>Choosing your Photo to Brighten</h3>First, I am going to open up Adobe Photoshop. Go to File, Open and select your digital picture. Our faces are a little dark and I want to make this grainy picture just a little bit nicer. <br><h3>Finding Photoshop Dodge Tool</h3>On the left side of your screen is your toolbox. This is where we will find the dodge tool. If you don't know which tool this is, look for the sponge tool, which looks like a sponge, the burn tool, a hand, and there is the burn tool. Click on it and let the mouse go. <br><h3>Customizing the Dodge Tool</h3>On the top of the screen you will see a bunch of options. First, click on the size of the brush you want to use. Next to the range field, click on what you want to bring out more of. Shadows, midtones or highlights. I will choose highlights. The exposure is essentially the intensity of the effect. I will choose a relatively low exposure. You can click on this next tool to make the brush an air brush. <br><h3>Photoshop Dodge Tool in Action</h3>All you need to do is go to the parts you want to affect, click the mouse and drag it along. You can use this on skin tone as well as clothing or any other object. <br><h3>Undo Photoshop Dodge Tool</h3>If you make a mistake, just go up to Edit, Undo. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_3695 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Picasa-2-Slide-Shows.htm Slideshows are an attractive way to share and organize groups of photos with your friends and family. Watch how to create a slideshow in Picasa, a free program from Google. Picasa,pictures,Google,Computing,Slideshow,Videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Picasa,pictures,Google,Computing,Slideshow,Videos Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'm going to show you how to create a photo slideshow in Picasa2. Picasa is a free, downloadable program provided by Google.com. <h3>Select the Photos for Your Slideshow</h3> <ul> <li>OPEN Picasa</li> <li>CLICK green 'hold' button to keep pictures in holding tray for slideshow</li> <li>HOLD the CTRL key to select multiple pictures or CLICK and DRAG over them CLICK 'hold' button</li> </ul> <h3>Create a Picasa Album</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK 'Add To' dropdown menu</li> <li>SELECT 'New Album' and provide name, date, etc</li> <li>CLICK OK</li> <li>SELECT album and CLICK slideshow to view as a slideshow</li> </ul> <h3>Add Music to the Picasa Slideshow</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK Tools / Options / Slideshow</li> <li>SELECT to loop slideshow if you want it to run continuously</li> <li>CLICK 'Play MP3s during slidshow' box*</li> <li>CLICK 'browse' button to select music</li> <li>CLICK OK </ul> *Picasa will only play MP3s using Windows Media Player. <h3>Adjust the Slideshow Pace and Captions</h3><ul> <li>CLICK 'slideshow' </li> <li>ADJUST display time (bottom right)</li> <li>SELECT captions icon (green check mark) for them to show</li> </ul> Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_3681 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/presentationsoft/Format-Slides-in-PowerPoint.htm You can give your PowerPoint presentation a unique look by formatting the slides. Learn how to change the color, background, effects, and more in PowerPoint. PowerPoint, power point, Templates, Formats, Presentations, video 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. PowerPoint, power point, Templates, Formats, Presentations, video Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to add different backgrounds in your PowerPoint presentation. <h3>Format PowerPoint Slide Backgrounds</h3> I want to change the background on my slides. Click on Design on the toolbar at the top of the screen. <br><br>The design templates will appear in a sidebar to the right. Click on one to change the look of your whole presentation. Your charts and graphs will automatically adjust their color to go with the new design, but all your information will remain intact. <h3>Change PowerPoint Slide Color</h3> If you want to add more color to your background, right-click on a slide and choose 'Background.' Here you can choose a different background color by clicking on the drop-down menu. Choose 'More Colors' to look at many solid color options. <br><br>If you want to customize your own color, click the 'Custom' tab at the top of the window. You can find a color either numerically or by clicking on the color palette. Once you've chosen a color, click 'OK.' Click the preview button to see it with the template design you've already chosen. <h3>Add Effects to PowerPoint Slides</h3> To apply fill effects to your background color, go to the drop-down menu and select 'Fill Effects.' <br><br>There are 4 different tabs:<ul><li>Gradient</li><li>Texture</li><li>Pattern</li><li>Picture</li></ul> <h3>Adjust the Gradient in PowerPoint Slides</h3> On the 'Gradient' tab, you can choose between having one or two colors, and you can adjust the brightness if you only use one color. You can also select different shading styles at the bottom of the window. I am going to select this gradient so I'll click 'OK' and then 'Apply.' Now right-click on your slide and choose background again. <h3>Change PowerPoint Slide Texture</h3> Go back to 'Fill Effects' and click on the 'Texture' tab. Here are many different textures you can apply to your slides. You cannot change the color of the textures. <h3>Add Pattern to PowerPoint Slides</h3> The next tab is 'Patterns.' This has many different options for patterns to apply to your presentation. You can choose your foreground and background colors by clicking the drop-down menus. <h3>Format Pictures in a PowerPoint Slide</h3> Now click on the 'Picture' tab. Here you can set the background of your slide to a picture you have on your computer. Just click 'Select Picture' then choose your picture and then click 'Insert,' then 'OK.' <h3>Preview and Apply PowerPoint Slide Formats</h3>I can preview the picture by clicking the preview button. If I wanted to apply this to all my slides I would click 'Apply to All.' The gradient looks much nicer, so I'll hit cancel. <br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at computing.about.com aboutvideo_5514 Wed, 30 Jan 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Shrimp-Stuffed-Avocados.htm If you love avocados, then this simple and subtle stuffed avocado recipe will delight your taste buds. See how you can whip up a batch of shrimp-stuffed avocados at home in a few easy steps. avocado, shrimp, stuffed avocado, recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. avocado, shrimp, stuffed avocado, recipe Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I am going to show you how to make shrimp-stuffed avocados. <h3>Stuffed Avocado Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>3 avocados</li> <li>1/2 green onion</li> <li>2 tsp. mayonnaise</li> <li>1 lemon</li> <li>1/4 lb. cooked bay shrimp</li> <li>salt and pepper</li> </ul> <h3>Open the Avocados</h3> Cut the avocado lengthwise all the way around. Twist the halves and using your knife, strike and remove the pit. With a spoon remove the avocado from the peel and place it in a large mixing bowl. Do this with all the avocados. <h3>Mash the Avocado Pulp</h3> Use a potato masher to slightly mash the avocados so they still have chunks in it. Save the shells for later. <h3>Prepare the Avocado Filling</h3> Then, cut the green onion into thin strips. Add this to the mixture. Season the avocado with some salt and pepper. Squeeze half the lemon into the bowl. Next add the mayonnaise and combine this all together. <br><br> You can add the shrimp whole, or first give them a rough chop. Put the shrimp into the bowl, then mix it all together. <h3>Serve the Stuffed Avocados</h3> With a spoon, scoop the mixture back into the shells of the avocados. Chill for a few hours and then serve. Enjoy! <br><br> Thanks for watching, to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6596 Fri, 20 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/tvdramas/Jack-Coleman-on-Heroes.htm Jack Coleman ('Noah Bennet' aka 'Horn-Rimmed Glasses') promises the third Season of 'Heroes' is going to blow fans away. The action will be fast and furious, and the storylines will flow right along. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the World Premiere of <i>Get Smart</i>.<p> <h3>Jack Coleman ('Noah Bennet' on <i>Heroes</i>)</h3><p> <b> Now, your character is going to be in a totally different type of storyline next year or do you know?</b><p> Jack Coleman: "Well, I do know. We are shooting our fourth episode. Yeah, you know, you're going to see sort of more of a company man. You're going to see a guy on a mission that's called 'Villains'. The volume is called 'Villains' and there are some people who I want to settle scores with, and people who want to settle scores with me. So there's going to be a certain amount of bagging and tagging, hunting and gathering&#133; There's a lot of action."<p> <b>Will you interact with any of the 'heroes'?</b><p> Jack Coleman: (<i>pointing to Zachary Quinto &#150; 'Sylar'</i>) "Right down there. We're going to have a good little storyline."<p> <b>Now that you have Claire's blood in you, is that going to change how you are?</b><p> Jack Coleman: "That was a onetime fix. Yeah, that was sort of like a flu shot. You have to get it all the time. No, that's not going to stick."<p> <b>Is Season 3 going to reinvigorate the franchise? Will it take it back to where it was before last season?</b><p> Jack Coleman: "Where it was and beyond. The adrenaline factor in Season 3 is way up there. You're not waiting for answers. The stories are going to evolve with such a speed and with so much pace that I think the audience is going to be really swept along. Yeah, the scripts are pretty thrilling and what we've done so far is pretty great."<p> <h3>More Coverage of <i>Heroes</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://tvdramas.about.com/od/heroes/p/heroessynopsis.htm">What You Need to Know About <i>Heroes</i></a></li><br> <li><a href="http://tvdramas.about.com/od/heroes/Heroes.htm"><i>Heroes</i> Character Profiles, Episodes, and Photos</a></li><p> <h3>More on <i>Get Smart</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/getsmart/a/getsmartsc61108.htm">Steve Carell, Anne Hathaway, Alan Arkin, and Director Peter Segal Discuss <i>Get Smart</i></a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/getsmart/a/getsmartdj61108.htm">Dwayne Johnson on <i>Get Smart</i> and Comedy</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/library/weekly/blgetsmartpicsa.htm"><i>Get Smart</i> Photo Gallery</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/getsmart/"><i>Get Smart</i> Trailer, Video Clips, Cast List and Interviews</a></li><br> <li>More on the Stars of <i>Get Smart</i> - <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/carellsteve/">Steve Carell</a> and <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/hathawayanne/">Anne Hathaway</a></li><br> aboutvideo_6798 Fri, 26 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/BRIGHTENING-PHOTOS-in-photosho.--1k.--1k.htm Are some of your most precious memories stored on pictures that look too dark? This video demonstrates how to brighten digital pictures and photos using Adobe Photoshop. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Photography,Graphic Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Photography,Graphic Design Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com computing.<br><br>Today I'll teach you how to brighten your photos in Photoshop.<br><h3>Choose Picture for Photoshop Brightening</h3>First, open up Photoshop. Click on "File," select "Open," and select your picture to open. There are many ways to brighten photos. I'll show you a quick and simple way, and the method I use to brighten the exposure of photos.<br><h3>New Layer for Photoshop Brightening</h3>For the first method we'll create a brightness/contrast adjustment layer. Click the "Create a New Fill or Adjustment Layer" button and select "Brightness/Contrast."<br><h3>Photoshop Brightening with Brightness and Contrast</h3>Let's set brightness to -5, and contrast to about +27. Click "OK." That looks decent. For quick brightening this works. Unclick the layer eye icon on the brightness/contrast layer in the layer palate. <h3>Photoshop Brightening with Curves</h3>The second method involves a little extra work but involves a lot more control. Click the "Create a New Fill or Adjustment Layer" button and select curves.<br><br>Curves allow you greater control to adjust the tonal range of an image. To the bottom left of the graph is a gray-scale going from black to white. You see the diagonal line on the graph? The line represents the tonal values of an image. An easy way to understand tonal values is to look at a picture in three levels of light and dark. You have your shadows which are the darkest parts of the picture, your midtones are typically the skin of your subject, and your highlights are the whites or brightest parts of your picture.<br><br>Click in the middle of the diagonal to create an anchor point. Dragging the middle point up a little raises the midtone range. Let's move the midpoint down a little. Create an anchor point halfway between the middle anchor point and bottom of the graph. Create another anchor point halfway between the middle anchor point and the top of the graph. Let's drag the bottom anchor point down a little. See how it darkens the shadow tones a little? Now let s lift the top anchor point a little. See how the highlight tonal range was brightened? Click "OK."<br><br>Using curves is a little intimidating, but experimenting yields much more control and flexibility than simply using brightness contrast controls.<br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com<br><br><br> aboutvideo_6522 Mon, 07 Apr 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Luke-Ford-on-The-Mummy-3.htm The 3rd movie of 'The Mummy' franchise-'The Mummy: Tomb of the Dragon Emperor'-hits theaters this summer with a couple of new additions to the cast. Maria Bello takes over for Rachel Weisz and Australian Luke Ford plays the part of Alex O'Connell. The Mummy, Dragon Emperor, luke ford 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. The Mummy, Dragon Emperor, luke ford Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the World Premiere of <i>Leatherheads</i>.<p> <h3>Luke Ford ('Alex' in <i>The Mummy: Tomb of the Dragon Emperor</i>)</h3><p> <b>You're starring in one of the summer's big movies. What's it feel like to be a part of that?</b><p> Luke Ford: "Nervous. It feels very honored. It's a great experience. This is what I dreamed of as a kid, to make a big swashbuckling action film with Rob Cohen as the director and Brendan and Jet Li as the Mummy, and Maria Bello who's got a lot of spunk. It's quite humbling. I mean, every kid around the world would want to play my role so I'm grateful I got it. It's like winning the lotto. I won the lotto, just not financially yet."<p> <b>And being a part of this franchise?</b><p> Luke Ford: "It was big shoes to fill. Brendan's such a great entertainer and a great actor, and he had such a big impact and made these films, which were a huge hit. And then he's sharing it with me a little bit now, and with the rest of the cast. You know, I really enjoyed working with him and taking that onboard so I hope it does well. I hope I live up to the expectations of the fans, and everything like that. We'll see how we go."<p> <b>Is there a lot of wirework and greenscreen? What's it like for you to deal with that?</b><p> Luke Ford: "There was a lot of wirework because I mean Jet Li is the Mummy so that kind of means there's going to be a lot of martial arts involved, and flying and kicking. Yeah, I was wired up and that was great fun, the harness and spinning around. They really were thorough on it and made sure it was full of wirework. And Michelle Yeoh is in it and she's great with the wirework, so it was good."<p> <b>So you actually have to face off against Jet Li?</b><p> Luke Ford: "It's a tag team between me and Brendan, just quietly. Well, we couldn't beat him on our own. It's Jet Li you know, and that would be a bit unrealistic to fans. So I guess we're doing a little bit more of a tag team. Brendan kind of gets more of it because he's more the adult. He's fought a lot more than I have, you know? But I do get a fair share of crack the whip with him so hopefully it's good. I haven't actually seen it."<p> <b>So is this one passing the franchise on to you? Will we see a spin-off with you as the lead character?</b><p> Luke Ford: "I don't think that's where they want to go. I mean, if they do, they do. But I mean&#133;"<p> <b>You'd be okay with that?</b><p> Luke Ford: "I would be. It would be pretty hard because I respect Brendan a lot. I think Brendan's such a big entity with <i>The Mummy</i>. He is <i>The Mummy</i>, so I would rather like continue working with him. He's such a great actor, and Maria and the whole family relationship is so good in the film. There's a great banter between us, so I really hope that we can all carry it on together. But if they happen to ask me to do it, then, well, I'll probably have to do it. I'd love to do it."<p> <b>Did they sign you on for more than one film?</b><p> Luke Ford: "Yeah, they did. They did. They signed me on for three but they didn't say primarily it's for me to take over the series. I don't think that's where they want to go with it."<p> <b>So how does this one differ from the past <i>Mummy</i> films?</b><p> Luke Ford: "Oh this one differs very much so. Well, it's not Egypt anymore &#150; it's China. And I think there's a certain maturity about this film. It goes into a bit more darker and mysterious, and a little bit more rough around the edges in some ways. And it's changed directors &#150; Rob Cohen. I mean not that Stephen Sommers, he loves the project but he passed it on to Rob because he's got other projects to work on."<p> <h3>More on <i>The Mummy: Tomb of the Dragon Emperor</i></h3><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/themummy3/">Photos, News and Credits</a></li><p> aboutvideo_4758 Tue, 09 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/koreanfood/Learn-to-Make-Japchae.htm An easy to make, versatile dish that is loaded with flavor and color, japchae is perfect for guests and parties, or can be cooked ahead and savored at home throughout the week. Japchae Recipe, korean food, japchae 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Japchae Recipe, korean food, japchae Hi! I'm Jonathon Stewart for About.com Food and today, it's all about Japchae. <h3>What is Japchae? </h3> Japchae is a Korean dish so popular and delicious that it was featured at the United Nations Food Festival in 2006. Traditionally defined, Japchae is sweet potato glass noodles with vegetables and meat, but literally it means, "mixed everything," which makes it pretty tough to screw up! <h3>Japchae Ingredients</h3> Here's what you'll need:<ul> <li>1/2 pound of extra-lean, RBST-free sirloin</li> <li>12 ounces of Korean vermicelli</li> <li>a handful of thinly sliced shitake mushrooms</li> <li>1 cup each of julienned white onion, carrot, and cucumber</li> <li>1 thinly sliced red pepper</li> <li>5 tablespoons of soy sauce</li> <li>3 tablespoons of sesame oil</li> <li>1 tablespoon of honey</li> <li>3 cloves of minced garlic</li> <li>1 tablespoon of minced ginger</li> <li>salt and ground pepper</li> <li>sesame seeds</li> </ul> <h3>Alternative Japchae Ingredients</h3> There's a lot of room in this recipe for flexibility, so be creative with your ingredients. If you like spinach or green onions, toss 'em in! If you're a vegetarian, skip the beef. And if you're adventurous, try topping off your Japchae with fish cakes, fried egg, or oyster sauce. <br><br> There are four basic elements to this dish: the meat, the vegetables, the noodles, and the sauce. <h3>Prepare the Japchae Noodles</h3> Start by placing your noodles in a bowl of room temperature water to soften - about 30 minutes should work, just so long as the noodles become flexible. Next, it's time to marinate the beef. <h3>Make a Japchae Marinade</h3> In a small bowl, combine the following: soy sauce, sesame oil, honey, garlic, and minced ginger. Now, this mixture is also going to work as your sauce, so take about half and set it aside for later. If you decide to skip the meat altogether, remember to reduce the amounts of these ingredients by half. <h3>Prepare the Beef</h3> Cut your sirloin into medium-sized strips, about 2 inches across. Resist the urge to stab the beef with a fork, which can cause a loss of juices that keep it moist and tender, and submerge in the soy sauce mixture for about 30 minutes. <h3>Stir Fry the Japchae Ingredients</h3> And now it's time to fry! In a wok or large pan, add a thin layer of sesame oil and set your heat to medium high. As soon as the oil is hot, toss in your mushrooms and stir fry with a dash of salt, for about 3 minutes. Remove the mushrooms from the pan and set aside for final mixing. <br><br>If you're running short on time, you can always stir fry all your veggies together, but, cooking each ingredient separately will allow each to retain its own unique flavor and color for the final presentation. <br><br> Proceed with the onion, carrot, cucumber, and red pepper, adding oil as necessary. Next, stir fry the sirloin until it is no longer red, being sure to discard any marinade that has been in contact with the raw meat. <h3>Stir Fry the Noodles</h3> Remove your softened noodles from the water and cut into smaller pieces, then cook them in a pot of boiling water for 5 to 6 minutes, stirring frequently. Immediately drain and rinse with cold water, then stir fry the noodles in sesame oil for about a minute. <h3>Toss the Japchae Stir Fry in Marinade</h3> As we come down the homestretch, toss your noodles, beef, mushrooms and vegetables with the sauce you set aside earlier, adding salt and pepper to taste. Serve on a flat plate and sprinkle with sesame seeds for a final touch. This recipe should generously make about four servings . JapChae is a great "make-ahead" dish that will keep in your fridge for a couple days, but - I can never wait that long. <br><br> Thanks for watching! To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3686 Thu, 19 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Watermark-Images-in-Photoshop.htm You can protect photos that you distribute by adding a simple watermark to them. Learn how to create watermarks in Adobe Photoshop and give professional branding to your pictures. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Photography,Graphic Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Photography,Graphic Design Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to add a watermark to your digital photos. <h3>Chooses an Image to Watermark</h3> This is useful if you plan to post your pictures to the Web because it will identify them as your own and discourage people from copying them. First, open Photoshop, then open the image you wish to add the watermark to. <h3>Add Text to the Photoshop Watermark</h3> Now select the type tool and type the copyright symbol or other text you want to use for a watermark. <h3>Create the Watermark Color</h3> Highlight your text then click the color tab on the right side of the screen. Your colors should be set to RGB. Set all values to 128. This will make your text gray. <h3>Position the Watermark Text Placement</h3> Now re-size and position your text where you want it. Make sure you have the text layer selected. <h3>Emboss the Watermark</h3> Go to 'layer' at the top of your screen and click on 'layer style,' and then 'bevel' and 'emboss.' A window will come up with many different options. I am going to change the style to emboss, and adjust the depth and size. Click 'ok' when you're finished. <h3>Add Opacity to the Watermark</h3> Now go to the 'layers' tab at the bottom right side of your screen. Where it says 'opacity,' use the drop down slider to adjust your text. You can also adjust the fill located below the opacity. <h3>Rotate the Watermark</h3> To rotate your watermark, select the 'move' tool and check the box at the top of the screen that says 'show bounding box.' A box will appear around your text. Move your mouse to a corner of the box until a curved arrow appears. Now click and drag to rotate your text. <br/><br/> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_8027 Wed, 06 Aug 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/David-Goyer-The-Unborn.htm Writer/director David Goyer (writer, 'The Dark Knight' - director, 'The Invisible') takes another journey into the creepy world of the supernatural with 'The Unborn' starring Odette Yustman, Meagan Good Cam Gigandet, Idris Elba and Gary Oldman. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2008 San Diego Comic Con.<p> <h3> <i>The Unborn</i> Writer/Director David Goyer</h3><p> David Goyer: "My bar in horror is really high. I don't think in the last couple decades there have been that many really good truly scary horror films. <i>Session 9</i> is one of them. <i>The Mothman Prophesies</i> is one and the original <i>Ring</i>. I thought <i>Emily Rose</i> was really good and scary. These are also movies that are also intelligent, and I think that's what makes them scary. I think it's easy to shock people. It's easy to do gore. And I'm not&#8230; Look, I enjoy a good gory film as much as anyone, but I think it's much harder to genuinely disturb someone and scare them. And that's why there aren't that many of them made."<p> <b>Your mind seems to go to these weird places. Where did this story come from?</b><p> David Goyer: "You know, this story comes from I had a lot of&#8230; It's funny, I did a movie with Alex Proyas aways back called <i>Dark City</i> and it turned out that a lot of the images from <i>Dark City</i> came from these recurring nightmares that Alex and I shared in common. And it was really interesting to work that way, to sort of put these images on the screen that had come from your subconscious. And so I kind of did the same thing. I went back to the well and you know I had a series of just nightmares that I had as a kid. I started scribbling down things that I remembered, and that was the genesis of this film. And I think that's also what makes it scarier because there's things in the movie that you don't really understand. You don't know where they come from. You might have seen it &#8211; there's like a dog with a mask in the footage we showed. I don't know. That's just like a weird, disturbing image to me, like a dog with a human face is weird to me."<p> <b>There's a lot more stories like this that are still to come?</b><p> David Goyer: "Yeah."<p> <b>There's a well out there you could tap into?</b><p> David Goyer: "I had such a good time on this one I'm actually going to do another one next year, another original."<p> <b>How collaborative are you with your actors? Do you let them play around?</b><p> David Goyer: "Yeah. My deal when I'm working with the actors is, I put a lot of time into the script and I say&#8230; Well, a) I always want to hear their ideas. If I think it's good, fine, we'll incorporate it. And if I feel like we get what we scripted, then I'm happy to try something completely different and see where it takes us, and improvise. There's a little bit of improvisation in this film."<p> <h3>More on <i>The Unborn</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/library/weekly/bltheunbornpicsa.htm"><i>The Unborn</i> Photos</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/theunborn/"><i>The Unborn</i> Credits, Interviews, and News</a></li><p> aboutvideo_5547 Fri, 28 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/weddings/Wedding-Budget-Spreadsheet.htm From the DJ's down payment to the florist's fee, there are a lot of details to juggle in a wedding budget. Learn how to create a wedding spreadsheet that organizes your finances in one place. Organize, Wedding Budget, Spreadsheets, wedding planning, weddin 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Organize, Wedding Budget, Spreadsheets, wedding planning, weddin Hi, I am Rachel Edelman for About.com. One way to simplify your wedding planning is to keep a wedding budget spreadsheet. In this computer dependent world, it's key to have all of your wedding information and spending records in one place. <h3>Save a Budget Spreadsheet</h3> I like use a spreadsheet program like excel for this kind of note keeping. So, first thing to do is save the document on your computer in a safe place. I will just title it Wedding Budget. <h3>Compile a List of Wedding Vendors</h3> Next, set up the first column. This should be a list of your vendors. The main vendors that you will likely be starting with are:<ul> <li>caterer reception</li> <li>ceremony</li> <li>band</li> <li>photographer</li> <li>videographer</li> <li>florist</li> <li>bakery</li> <li>clergy</li> <li>dresses</li> <li>invitations</li> </ul> There will certainly be other things that come up and this list will become more detailed as you get closer to your wedding. The better you can record all of your purchases, the less likely there will be any surprises when you have those final payments to make in the final days before your wedding. <h3>Fill in Wedding Vendor Information</h3> Then name each of the columns based on the kinds of information you will need on each vendor. Start with contact information like:<ul> <li>company name</li> <li>address</li> <li>phone number</li> <li>contact name</li> <li>website</li> <li>email</li> </ul> You may also want to put in a column to use for any additional Notes. In the notes, you could put a brief description of your agreement with the vendor, or you could keep records of your recent phone calls. <h3>Organize the Wedding Budget Details</h3> Now fill the rest of the columns with the budget related items. Write in what the total cost will be, what kind of deposit is required and when the deposits are due. Next what the remainder will be and when that is due. Vendors like caterers and florists often need additionally information closer to the wedding that might affect your budget, like guest count and table count. Keep track of this here too. Finally, mark down who is paying each vendor. If you have multiple people helping to pay for your wedding, this column will help you keep track of multiple budgets. <h3>Add in Your Wedding Budget Totals</h3> If you have an idea of what you would like to try to spend on each of the big ticket items, fill in the Total Cost column so you can get an idea of how to break down your budget. Test a few different numbers so you can see what things you might want to spend more on, and where you want to be more thrifty. <h3>Calculate the Wedding Budget Totals</h3> The last thing that you want to set up on the spreadsheet is a calculation of your totals. The most important total is for the total cost. You can also keep track of how much each Payee is contributing. You could name these rows:<ul> <li>Total Bride's Family</li> <li>Total Groom's Family</li> <li>Total Personal</li> </ul> I am going to hide some of the other rows to make it easier to see who is paying. Click on the cell next to total cost. Use the sum function to highlight the numbers that are needed to create the total. Total will be all of the rows. If you want to find the cost for just one side of the family press control and click on just their costs. The great thing about these formulas is that as your costs change, the totals are automatically updated. <h3>Remember to Update the Budget Spreadsheet</h3> As you start choosing vendors for your wedding, fill in as much information as you can. Do not forget to save your changes. Setting up the spreadsheet is the first step - adding to it doesn't end until after your wedding. <br><br> Hopefully this helps you get started keeping your information organized during this wonderful and busy time. Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at style.about.com. aboutvideo_6465 Wed, 27 Feb 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Steven-Strait-Interview.htm '10,000 BC' star Steven Strait joined his co-star Camilla Belle and writer/director Roland Emmerich at the 2008 Wonder Con to talk about their film, an action epic set in a time when mammoths and saber-toothed tigers roamed the earth. Steven Strait, Interview, 10,000 BC 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Steven Strait, Interview, 10,000 BC Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2008 San Francisco Wonder Con.<p> <h3>Steven Strait ('D'Leh')</h3><p> <b>Camilla Belle described your character as the runt of the litter and I look over at you and you're a big guy. How are you the runt?</b><p> Steven Strait: "I think she was talking more a 'community runt' as opposed to a physical one. My character, in the beginning, is a bit of a black sheep in the community and he falls in love with the matriarch's daughter. She's taken away and he goes after her."<p> <b>So it is a Romeo and Juliet type of thing?</b><p> Steven Strait: "-ish, yeah."<p> <b>This basically rests on your shoulders, doesn't it? Aren't you in almost every scene of this movie?</b><p> Steven Strait: "I'm in a lot of them."<p> <b>How does that feel?</b><p> Steven Strait: "You know, being able to work with Roland (Emmerich)&#133; Initially the idea of doing it was incredibly exciting, but a little daunting as well. It's most certainly the largest film I've ever done. But you know, Roland, his directing is incredibly intimate. We took it step by step. And it was a chance for me to play with an incredible arc from the black sheep, or the runt, to the leader of an army. And it was absolutely amazing and we shot it pretty much in sequence. So we shot it from beginning to end, which really, really helped because it is such a large arc. But we did actually take it step by step."<p> <b>So it's a huge action epic but the characters aren't lost in this? This is a character-driven story?</b><p> Steven Strait: "Absolutely, absolutely. You know the CGI is absolutely amazing. The effects are absolutely amazing, but they're there anchored in the story. They are meant to be there to compliment the story and I think they do it well."<p> <b>You've done action before. How was it getting ready for this type of film? It's a lot different reacting to things that aren't there.</b><p> Steven Strait: "Yeah, I've done a bit of CGI in the past and reacting to blue screen and whatnot, but certainly nothing like this."<p> <b>No tigers coming at you.</b><p> Steven Strait: "No. You know, the prep for this was different than the ones I'd done before. When you prep for wirework or stuff like that, it's a certain type of training. For this, it was really about creating a character that was believable, that looks and acts and can perform as if he's living in that environment and hunting for his food, and being able to chase after a herd of mammoths &#150; and look believable."<p> <b>And get the girl.</b><p> Steven Strait: "And get the girl."<p> <h3>More on <i>10,000 BC</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/library/weekly/bl10000bcpicsa.htm"><i>10,000 BC</i> Photo Gallery</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/10000bc/"><i>10,000 BC</i> Credits, Trailer and Poster</a></li><p> aboutvideo_6766 Sat, 27 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Get-rid-of-redeye-in-Photoshop.htm You probably have some digital pictures that are perfect but for a common problem known as red eye. Use Adobe Photoshop to fix red eye and make your photos look professional. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Re-touch,Graphic Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Re-touch,Graphic Design Hi, I am Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Red eye can ruin many great pictures. Well, today I am going to show you how to get rid of that red eye using Photoshop. <br><h3>Coose a Picture for Photoshop Red Eye Fix</h3>First open up Photoshop. Click on the File Menu, select Open, and find your digital picture. <br><h3>Choosing Red Eye Target & Tools</h3>Click on the zoom tool and zoom in on the eyes. Next, click on the color replacement tool. This tool is located in the same place as the healing brush tool, shaped like a bandaid, and the patch tool.<br><br>Next choose a small brush size. Now we need to adjust options for the color replacement tool. Make sure that color is selected. <br><h3>Fixing Red Eye</h3>For the sampling option, choose once to erase only areas containing the color we will soon choose.<br><br>For Limits, choose discontinuous to replace the target color with what we will paint on.<br><br>Drag the tolerance slider to to about 70%. You will probably need to play with this slider to get your photo looking just right. <br><h3>Choosing Red Eye Replacements</h3>Next we need to choose a color to replace the red. Black might work, but for this woman, I am going to choose a greyish blue. Click on the foreground color swatch in the toolbox and choose the color you want. Click OK. <br><br>Now click once on the color you want to replace. In this case, I am clicking on this red. Drag the brush over the image to get rid of the red. If all of the red isn't replaced, increase the tolerance level.<br><br>One you are done, zoom out and look at the difference, before and after. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_6827 Fri, 26 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/homecooking/Kiwis.htm Kiwi fruit is as beautiful and delicious inside as it is rough and unappealing on the outside. Learn the best ways to choose, peel and slice this fragile fruit, while preserving the most possible kiwi for eating. kiwi,kiwifruit,fruit,cut,slice,dessert,healthy 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. kiwi,kiwifruit,fruit,cut,slice,dessert,healthy Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman, for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to cut and enjoy an exotic fruit - kiwis. This little egg shaped fruit is quite tasty, and it's a great addition for many types of food, from martinis to sauces.<br><h3>Kiwi Slicing Tools</h3>To cut a kiwi, all you will need is a small knife and a spoon.<br><h3>Selecting Kiwi</h3>You will know if your kiwi is ripe if it is not to firm and not too soft. Look to make sure there is no discoloration and no dents. To speed up the ripening process, place kiwis in a paper bag with a ripe apple, and keep that bag out on the counter.<br><h3>Quick Kiwi Prep</h3>Now, to eat the kiwi as fast as possible, cut off the top or cut it in half and eat it with a spoon.<br><br>Most people prefer not to eat the skin although some say that there is nothing wrong with it, they just remove the fuzz.<br><h3>Peeling Kiwi</h3>If you are preparing the kiwi for a certain dish, you'll need to peel it. Cut off both the top and bottom. Slide a spoon in between the skin and the fruit, very slowly start moving the spoon around the kiwi. The skin may break. If that happens, you can put your spoon back in and try again or peel gently with your fingers. Reinsert your spoon and move it around again. <br><br>Once the kiwi is out, slice it however thick you like. You can also cut each slice into halves or triangles. <H3>Health Benefits of Kiwi</H3>Kiwis are high in potassium, vitamin C, and fiber. This little guy packs quite the healthy punch. Plus, it adds great color to your fruit salad.<br><br>Thanks for watching, to learn more visit us on the Web at food.about.com.<br> aboutvideo_6681 Mon, 30 Jun 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Guillermo-del-Toro-on-Hellboy.htm Guillermo del Toro is not only one of the most successful directors working today, he's also just about the nicest man you'd ever want to meet. At the 'Hellboy II' premiere, del Toro talked about the appeal of Hellboy-and his upcoming 'Hobbit' films. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the Los Angeles Film Festival and Universal Pictures' World Premiere of <i>Hellboy II: The Golden Army</i>.<p> <h3>Writer/Director Guillermo del Toro</h3><p> <b>What is so appealing to you about the world of <i>Hellboy</i>?</b><p> Guillermo del Toro: "Well, I love the guy. I identify with the guy. I sometimes dress like the guy."<p> <b>With the horns and everything?</b><p> Guillermo del Toro: "In private. No, no, no. No, I love the guy. I know him. There's much of me in the movie <i>Hellboy</i>, not in the comic <i>Hellboy</i>. And you know, I'm just irresistibly attracted to the whole world of Abe Sapien, Liz... The beauty of it, the directness of it, I love it."<p> <b>How tough was it to figure out which direction to go with this one because you've veered away from the comics?</b><p> Guillermo del Toro: "Well, the reality is I feel it was our duty to be more free with this one, but at the same time embrace aspects of the comic that we did not embrace on the first movie, which was the idea of magic and folklore and so forth. But again, it's my take on those themes. But I was a lot more free, or allowed myself to be a lot more free thematically and visually on this one."<p> <b>So going the direction of the fairies and the cuter creatures that are still evil, that's just inside your brain and came out?</b><p> Guillermo del Toro: "Yeah."<p> <b>Where do you come up with these things?</b><p> Guillermo del Toro: "Frankly, it's hard for me not to come up with these things. I've done seven movies I think or eight, I don't know, and I believe that none of them has been fully free to create the worlds to the extent I would like to create them."<p> <b>Even <i>Pan's Labyrinth</i>?</b><p> Guillermo del Toro: "Even <i>Pan's Labyrinth</i>. I hope one day I will, but the scope and the madness of the imagination I would like to put on the screen, it's still ahead."<p> <b>How are you going to do that? What is going to be the catalyst that allows you to put that out there?</b><p> Guillermo del Toro: "I think that the movie's to come. I have <i>The Hobbit</i>, I have <i>Mountains of Madness</i>, I have <i>Hellboy III</i> &#150; knock on wood. Hopefully in the future I will find the day when the imagination, the budget, and the resources allow me to."<p> <b><i>The Hobbit</i> was actually my favorite. I liked <i>Lord of the Rings</i> but I was a huge <i>Hobbit</i> book fan. Are you going to follow the book?</b><p> Guillermo del Toro: "Yes."<p> <b>Absolutely?</b><p> Guillermo del Toro: "Yes, absolutely. There are moments in the book that will be, like everything, abridged, edited and so forth, but I'm following the spirit of the book I read when I was 11 years old. And in that, I'm faithful to that. There are certainly sequences in the book that are very uncommon in cinema that I plan to keep."<p> <b>Any casting yet or are we still not at that point?</b><p> Guillermo del Toro: "No, well, yes. Ian McKellen, Andy Serkis, the ones that have been reported. No one else."<p> <b>No James McAvoy?</b><p> Guillermo del Toro: "No, not yet."<p> <b>He would be somebody that would be good for it at least.</b><p> Guillermo del Toro: "Oh, I believe that there are many names that would be great, but all is speculation."<p> <b>Do you read everything that's on the internet about it?</b><p> Guillermo del Toro: "Not everything. I read enough to get a sense of what's going on. But I try not to be too immersive on it because you can get distracted."<p> <h3>More on <i>Hellboy II: The Golden Army</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/hellboy2/ig/Hellboy-2-Photos/index.htm"><i>Hellboy II: The Golden Army</i> Photos</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/hellboy2/"><i>Hellboy II: The Golden Army</i> Credits, Trailer, Interviews and Poster</a></li><br> aboutvideo_3740 Wed, 24 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktopvideo/Outdoor-Home-Video-Tips.htm Outdoor home videos are a special challenge- lighting, background, and subjects are often in motion. But, with these tips you'll be able to make your outdoor home videos as fun to watch as they were to make. Digital Video,Home Movie,Outdoor videos,Video camera,Camera Tips 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Digital Video,Home Movie,Outdoor videos,Video camera,Camera Tips Hi, I'm Leann Bello with About.com Gadgets.<br/><h3>Why Some Outdoor Home Video Tips Help</h3>Exterior home videos are a special challenge. When traveling or visiting public spaces, we want to capture as many of our memories as possible. Be sure to follow these tips if you want your home videos to be as fun to watch as they were to make. <br/><h3>Outdoor Home Video Color Temperature</h3>If your camera is not properly set, your outdoor video will look very blue. This is because daylight and indoor or tungsten light have different color temperatures.<br><br/>Many video cameras have an automatic feature to correct for this problem, but if your camera has a manual control for daylight/tungsten light, be sure to have it on the sunlight setting.<br/><h3>Outdoor Home Video Tripod or Monopod</h3>Tripod or monopod. The most important thing to remember when shooting home movies outside is to have a camera support. Home video cameras keep getting smaller, but even with image stabilizing features, the video image can get very shaky. A tripod or monopod, can help to make your videos smoother.<br/><h3>Camcorder Zoom for Outdoor Home Video</h3>Don't zoom. Zooming can make your home videos very shaky and uncontrolled, and in some cases can make the resolution of your image. <br><br>Zooming is also distracting when it is not motivated. If possible, turn off the camera and move closer to your subject to get the close up. When you move closer you are able to use a wider lens, which makes things look less shaky, and you also avoid digital zoom, which makes the pixels in your image larger, rather than changing the lens size.(Optical v. Digital zoom). Another way to avoid pixelation is to simply disable digital zoom on your camera.<br/><h3>Outdoor Home Video and Sunlight</h3>Try not to stand in front of the sun. This will cause your subject to be underexposed and sunspots or glares to appear in the video. Try to move your subject to a shadier area.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Gadgets.About.com.<br/> aboutvideo_6459 Thu, 13 Mar 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/americanfood/Waldorf-Salad.htm Invented in 1896 at the Waldorf-Astoria hotel in New York City, this is America's most famous fruit salad. One taste of this crunchy, juicy, sweet, and tangy salad, and you'll know why it's such a favorite. waldorf, salad, fruit salad 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. waldorf, salad, fruit salad Hi, I'm Chef John Mitzewich for About.com. Today we're making an American classic, the famous Waldorf salad. Waldorf Salad Dressing Ingredients So, this great fruit salad starts with a simple lemon and mayonnaise dressing. We have 1/3 cup of mayo, and the juice of one small lemon, about 2 tablespoons (use fresh if you can get it), and some fresh black pepper and salt to taste. It might seem weird using salt and pepper in a fruit salad, but it's very important to bring out the flavors. Origins of the Waldorf Salad This salad gets it name from the famous Waldorf-Astoria hotel in New York where the maitre d' invented this in 1896. So this has been around awhile, and for good reason. Chop the Salad Fruit So, we're going to use 2 apples: one green, one red. I like the contrast - the green's a little crisper, more tart - the red, a little sweeter. Here's my method for cutting these. I don't use an apple corer, which tend to be dull which bruises the apple. I like to cut them in half and then in thirds. Then I just make one diagonal cut in the center and that removes the core. <br><br>It's a really easy way to do it. Then, slice them in 1/2 thick pieces. You don't want them to small or they may break down in the dressing. So I like some fairly good size pieces. Chop the Celery So toss those in the dressing, and they won't discolor. For celery, I'm going to use one stalk per apple, so I have 2 stalks. We're going to wash it and slice it nice and thin, about 1/8th inch. Add that to the bowl, but don't toss it yet because we have 2 more ingredients to add. Toss the Waldorf Salad We have 1/2 cup halved grapes and 1/2 cup roughly crushed walnut. Toss that together until coated. You can do this a couple hours before serving and it's fine. Waldorf Salad Variations Modern versions of this salad have all kinds of crazy stuff in it. People put in pineapple, whipped cream, marshmallows... to which I say, no, no, and what?? So anyway, this is a semi-authentic version, the authentic version has only apples and celery, but I like to add the grapes and walnuts for a great crunch and a little extra dimension of flavor. Serve the Waldorf Salad I like to top with a few extra walnuts, put it on some lettuce - a nice soft Boston or Bibb lettuce. And that's it, a classic American salad - a delicious contrast of textures and flavors. So refreshing, crisp and sweet, you're going to love it. By the way, if you have some leftover chicken or turkey it's also good with it. I hope you give this a try. Enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us at About.com. aboutvideo_4721 Tue, 12 Feb 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/baking/Holiday-Pumpkin-Roll.htm Pumpkin and apple pie are favorites around the holidays, but this unique pumpkin roll has the potential to unseat them from the dessert throne. See how to make a family-tested pumpkin roll. pumpkin, roll, dessert, recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. pumpkin, roll, dessert, recipe Hi! I'm Keith Dunlop and welcome to About.com. Today, I've got a unique dessert for your holiday table that has the potential to unseat pumpkin and apple pie as your family's favorite holiday dessert. In fact, my family loves this dessert so much, my mom doubles the recipe and makes two! <h3>Pumpkin Roll Ingredients</h3> To make this delicious pumpkin roll, you will need:<ul> <li>2/3 c. of pumpkin (not pumpkin pie filling, but basic pumpkin in a can)</li> <li>1 c. sugar</li> <li>1 tsp. baking soda</li> <li>1 tsp. salt</li> <li>3/4 c. all-purpose flour</li> <li>3 eggs</li> <li>1/2 tsp. cinnamon</li> <li>about 1/4 c. powdered sugar</li> </ul> <h3>Pumpkin Roll Filling Ingredients</h3> For the filling, you will need:<ul> <li>16 oz. of softened cream cheese</li> <li>1 c. of confectioner's sugar, sifted</li> <li>1 tbsp. of vanilla</li> <li>2 tbsp. of softened butter</li> </ul> First off, preheat your oven to 375 degrees F. Now grease a 13 x 9 inch cookie sheet and line it with wax paper. <h3>Bake the Pumpkin Roll</h3> Combine the cake ingredients in a large bowl and mix well. Then pour batter in the pan and spread it out evenly with a spatula. Pop it in the oven and bake for 15 minutes. When it is done, remove it from the oven and let it cool for 5 minutes. <h3>Set and Refrigerate the Pumpkin Roll</h3> Take your 1/4 c. of powdered sugar and sprinkle it on a fresh piece of parchment paper, wax paper, or a clean dish towel. Invert your pumpkin roll onto that powdered surface and wait 2 or 3 minutes. Now, carefully remove the paper. If there are places that it sticks, carefully cut edge off with a knife. <br><br> Slowly roll your roll up and refrigerate for at least one hour or overnight. <h3>Mix the Pumpkin Roll Filling</h3> The filling is simple: just combine your ingredients - the cream cheese, confectioner's sugar, vanilla, and butter, in a bowl and mix well. <h3>Fill the Pumpkin Roll</h3> When you're ready to finish making the roll, unroll the cake part and spread the filling evenly. Roll it back up again and refrigerate the roll until serving. When you're ready to serve, give it a nice dusting of powdered sugar and it's ready to go. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at About.com. aboutvideo_3917 Mon, 29 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/vegetarian/Make-Homemade-Granola.htm Looking for a healthy snack that fills you up? Try whipping up a batch of homemade granola. With a few simple steps, you can adjust the ingredients and make a granola that suits your taste. granola, make granola, recipe, snack 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. granola, make granola, recipe, snack Hi, I'm Keith Dunlop and welcome to About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make your own granola. It's really easy, I'ts quite delicious, and best of all, it's really good for you. <h3>Homemade Granola Ingredients</h3> One of the nice things about making your own granola is that you can tailor it to your family's tastes. So feel free to add or substitute things you like for the dried fruits and nuts I'm using today. <br><br> To make granola, you'll need:<ul> <li>4 cups of rolled oats</li> <li>1 cup of wheat germ</li> <li>1 cup of wheat flakes</li> <li>1 cup of chopped pecans</li> <li>1/2 a cup of coconut</li> <li>1/2 a cup of raisins</li> <li>1/2 a cup of chopped dried apricots</li> <li>1/2 a cup of canola oil</li> <li>1/2 a cup of honey</li> <li>1/2 a cup of coconut</li> <li>1/2 a teaspoon of vanilla</li> </ul> <h3>Mix the Dry Granola Ingredients</h3> The first step is to measure your dry ingredients into a big bowl. So that's the oats, the wheat germ, the wheat flakes, the pecans, and the coconut. Give them a quick stir with a spoon, and you're done with step one. <h3>Combine the Granola Wet Ingredients</h3> Next, combine all of your wet ingredients in a medium saucepan: the oil, the honey, and the vanilla - and heat them together over low heat. You don't have to heat them long, just long enough to get them all combined. <h3>Mix the Granola Ingredients</h3> When the wet ingredients are warmed up, pour them into the dry ingredients and give them a good stir. At this point, your granola is ready to bake. While your oven preheats to 350, spread your granola mixture evenly onto a lightly greased cookie sheet or shallow pan. <h3>Bake the Granola</h3> Bake for about 10 minutes, then remove from the oven and turn the granola over with a spatula. Bake for another 5 minutes &#150; until the granola is lightly toasted &#150; then remove it from the oven. <br><br> While it's still warm, pour the granola into a big bowl and add the raisins and the apricots, and stir. Now it just needs to cool down a bit and it's ready to serve. <br><br> And that's it - your own homemade granola that the great Ewell Gibbons would be proud of! Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6524 Wed, 09 Apr 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Russell-Brand-Sarah-Marshall.htm Russell Brand may be a newcomer to American movies, but he's sure to have a long career in feature films. As a rock star in 'Forgetting Sarah Marshall', Brand steals scene after scene. And he's one of the most interesting celebs to interview. Forgetting Sarah Marshall, Russell Brand, Interview 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Forgetting Sarah Marshall, Russell Brand, Interview <h3>Russell Brand ('Aldous Snow' in <i>Forgetting Sarah Marshall</i>)</h3><p> <b>We spoke in San Francisco about this experience filming here in Hawaii. You had said most of the time you spent in a hospital because your co-star spit venom on you. What really happened in Hawaii?</b><p> Russell Brand: "Well, you know, a lot of the time I was able to work in spite of Kristen Bell's acrimonious and venomous attacks. But you know if you're working with someone like Kristen, it's very difficult to relax at any time. So if any of the scenes my acting is not convincing it's because maybe she was just off camera lurking, eyes rolling, tongue lashing. So I was obviously trying my hardest to enjoy acting, enjoying the experience of working on this wonderful production, but feeling very much under duress and menace."<p> <b>The whole entire time? Could you ever settle down?</b><p> Russell Brand: "No. And even now, today I've just met Bill Hader. He's another man, incredible store of eroticism within him. We just went on a golf cart ride, just the two of us, just to get to know each other. We played a couple of holes of golf. Well, that was the intention but instead it became very much about two men bonding through the medium of dance."<p> <b>This part was written for you basically because they reshaped it to fit your persona. How's that feel?</b><p> Russell Brand: "It feels very flattering but in a way insulting. You sort of think, 'Well that's nice. They've rewritten that part for me.' But then you sort of think, 'They obviously think I'm not capable of any actual acting.' So do you see it's a double-edged sword? Very flattering, insulting &#150; that's the other edge of this sword."<p> <b>Could you have done it another way?</b><p> Russell Brand: "Yeah. I could have played that character a whole number of ways. Like, perhaps I could be a Bavarian gentleman. Or I could have done him as Rasputin, a mad monk. I mean, you might say that was a bit like von Bismarck."<p> <b>So how easy was it to tap into your inner rock star?</b><p> Russell Brand: "Easy because, all right now then, in England I've got chums who are rock stars, notably the Gallagher Brothers &#150; Liam and Noel. Noel, with whom I'm very friendly, comes on my radio show quite a lot and larks around. From him I took his sense of humor, his effortless wit and charm. And from Liam I took an abstract sense of Liam Gallagher, always distracted. And he's got very potent sexuality. Even if, say for example me, I'm a heterosexual gentleman. You may find that difficult to believe because look at this gesture &#150; it's rather camp. But don't judge that. That's just because I'm lunging at your bosom. That's not gay, is it?"<p> <h3>More on <i>Forgetting Sarah Marshall</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/forgettingsarahmarshall/"> Interviews, Photos, and Trailer</a></li><p> aboutvideo_6765 Sun, 28 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/Photoshop-Shortcuts.htm Whether you're a professional Graphic Artist or you just want to re-touch your favorite photos, Adobe Photoshop Shortcuts can make your Photoshop workflow a great deal more efficient in just a few easy steps. Computing,Graphic Design,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Shortcuts,Hot Keys 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Graphic Design,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Shortcuts,Hot Keys Hi, I am Don Schecter for About.com Computing.<br><br>There are a lot of options to choose from when using a program like Photoshop. That's why knowing how to manage keyboard shortcuts is important. Today I will show you how to do just that with Photoshop CS. <br><h3>Locating Photoshop Shortcuts</h3>To create your own shortcuts in Photoshop CS or CS2, go to the Edit Menu and select Keyboard Shortcuts. The Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box serves as a shortcut editor, and includes all the commands that support shortcuts.<br><h3>Modifying Photoshop Shortcut Options</h3>To modify the keyboard shortcuts you'll have to create a new shortcut set. Click on the icon between the disk and trash icon at the top. Name your new shortcut list and hit save. <br><br>Now select a heading from the dropdown menu on the left that says Shortcuts For. This allows you to view all of the Photoshop commands in either the Application Menus, the Palette Menus, or the Tools. <br><br>I'll select the Tools. Commands that already have a shortcut will be indicated in the menu. You can change these if you'd prefer by clicking on the shortcut, typing in a new shortcut, and pressing Accept at the top right side of the dialog box. <br><br>You may get a conflict warning which means your shortcut letter is conflicting with another shortcut. It's up to you to accept those changes. <br><h3>Create Custom Photoshop Shortcuts</h3>To make a totally new shortcut, click on the blank space beside the menu command and type in the shortcut you'd like to use. Override the warning if there is one and click accept to save the shortcut. Hit ok and you're finished. <br><br>Shortcuts can save you a lot of time when working with Photoshop. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com.<br> aboutvideo_6758 Wed, 18 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/email/Address-Books-in-Outlook-Expre.--0Y.--0Y.htm Whether you want to keep some work contacts at home or upgrade your entire system, learn how to import and export address books in Outlook Express. Computing,Outlook Express,Address Books,Organize,Email Addresses,Video 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Outlook Express,Address Books,Organize,Email Addresses,Video Hi, I'm Isaac Brody for About.com Computing. Today I'll teach you how to import and export your addresses in Outlook Express for safekeeping and transferring to other computers. <h3>Open Your Email Address Book</h3> First, open up Outlook Express. Once Outlook is open, click on the 'file' menu, select 'export,' and choose 'address book.' An Address Book Export window pops up. You have two choices: select 'text file,' and hit the 'export' button. <h3>Save the Email Address Export File</h3> This brings up the Export window. Type in a name for your email address export file. Make sure you give it a name you'll easily recognize. <br><br> After giving it a name, click on 'browse' to specify where to save the file. I'm saving it in the My Documents folder. Click 'save,' then click 'next.' <h3>Export Your Email Address Book</h3> You have a choice of what information to export. I'm going to export the first and last name and email address. Click on 'finish.' <br><br> An Address window pops up saying it's complete. Click 'OK.' Close the Address Export window, and you're finished. <h3>Import Your Email Address Book</h3> Now that you've exported your email addresses, I'll show you how to import them into Outlook Express. This is helpful if you have a computer crash or need to set up a new computer. <br><br> In Outlook, click on the 'file' menu, select 'import,' and choose 'other address book.' You're given several choices. Select 'text file' on the bottom, and hit the 'import' button. <br/><br/> Click the 'browse' button, and select your email addresses. Mine are in My Documents folder. Hit 'open,' click 'next,' select 'finish,' and hit 'OK.' Close the Address Import window, and you've successfully imported your address list. <br/><br/> Thanks for watching. For more information, visit on the Web at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_3503 Sun, 28 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/email/GmailAliasForwarding-mov.htm Take better advantage of your Gmail tools -use aliases to organize your mail and forwarding to manage multiple email addresses and locations. gmail alias,gmail forwarding,gmail,email aliases,email 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. gmail alias,gmail forwarding,gmail,email aliases,email Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br/><br/>Today, I am going to show you how to create an email alias in Gmail and how to start forwarding your incoming mail to another email address.<br/><h3>Getting to Gmail Alias Options</h3>Log into Gmail with your username and password. Click the Settings link in the upper right corner. A new page should open where your inbox used to be. Click Accounts.<br/><h3>Gmail Account Information</h3>Your primary email address is shown here with your name and email address. This is what will be displayed when people receive email from you. What we want to do now is add another email address to make it appear as if you were sending email from another email address.<br/><h3>Adding Gmail Forwarding Destinations</h3>Click the link Add another email address. In the window that pops up, enter the name that you want to appear next to your email address and the email address that you want to use. In my example, I will use my name and my other email address for About.com. You can specify a Reply-to address by clicking this link. <br><br>Now when people reply to email coming to this address (point to Email address with mouse) it will actually go to this address (point to Reply-to email address) instead. <br><br>I don't want to do that at this time, so I'll clear it out and click Next Step.<br/><h3>Destination Verification</h3>In order to make sure you aren't trying to fake being someone else, Gmail requires you to verify that you actually own that other email address. Click Send Verification. An email will be sent to your other email address with a verification link. Once you receive that email, click the verification link. Gmail will add the new address to your account. Click save changes.<br/><h3>Using Gmail Aliases</h3>Click Compose Mail. As you'll notice, you can now select which email address you would like to send from. Email when received by others will appear as though it had been sent from this address. I'm going to send myself a message from the new address to my Gmail account. Gmail will only notify others that it was sent on behalf of Gmail.<br/><h3>Gmail Email Forwarding</h3>Now I'm going to discuss email forwarding. Let's go back to settings again. Click Forwarding and POP. You'll notice that Gmail gives you the option to forward your email to another address. Simply click here, enter the email address you wish to forward mail to, and then select what you want Gmail to do with the incoming mail. Some people like to keep a copy in Gmail as a backup, while you might like to delete it. Click save changes to start forwarding.<br/><br/>And that's how you set up an email alias and forwarding address in Gmail.<br/><br/>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Computing.About.com.<br/><br/> aboutvideo_3576 Fri, 02 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/peteye-mov.htm You probably have some cute digital pictures of your pets that are perfect but for a common problem known as red eye, or in this case pet eye. Use Adobe Photoshop to fix pet eye and make your photos look professional. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Re-touch,Graphic Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Re-touch,Graphic Design Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today you'll learn how to fix pet eye, that red, yellow, or green color in pets' eyes from the flash of a camera. First open Adobe Photoshop. <br><h3>Choose a Picture</h3>Next open the picture that you wish to adjust. I'll open a picture of a dog. <br><h3>Choose Pet Eye Target and Tools in Photoshop</h3>Find the zoom tool to zoom in to the eyes of your pet. In the Toolbox, find the Color Replacement tool. It may be hidden by the Healing Brush tool or the Patch tool. <br><br>Now in the Options bar at the top of the work area click on the current brush and a drop down menu will appear. Move the Diameter slider to make the brush tip smaller than the area you are fixing. <br><h3>Photoshop Pet Eye Fix Colors</h3>Now click the swatches tab on the right side of your screen. <br><br>If the palette isn't open, go to Windows, then Swatches. Click the black color swatch to use as your replacement color. <br><br>Replacing red eyes with black, the color of the pupil, works well for most photos. However, close-ups of light-colored eyes may require additional touching up to reduce the size of the pupil. <br><h3>Fix Pet Eye in Photoshop</h3>Now you are ready to click the red eye of your pet. Click with your mouse over the eye and drag the brush over the red area until you have fixed the eye. <br><br>There are many ways to fix the pet eye problem. This way is just one easy way to do it. <br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_6734 Mon, 28 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Jeffrey-Dean-Morgan-Watchmen.htm Jeffrey Dean Morgan transformed into The Comedian, probably the most difficult character to tackle, in Warner Bros Pictures' feature film 'Watchmen' based on the classic graphic novel. At Comic Con, Morgan talked about bringing the character to life. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2008 San Diego Comic Con.<p> <h3>Jeffrey Dean Morgan &#8211; 'Edward Blake' / 'The Comedian' in <i>Watchmen</i></h3><p> <b>Did you take him home at the end of the day or could you actually leave this guy behind?</b><p> Jeffrey Dean Morgan: "For probably the first time in my life, I did. Yeah. There was a couple scenes, if you read the novel you probably know what they are, that were hard. They were hard to film. And I made the mistake one day of, I was working with Carla [Gugino] and I went back and looked at a little bit of playback. I couldn't process what I was seeing. It was heavy. I mean, I knew when we were shooting it because I was having issues, but when you see it &#8211; when you see the viciousness of what this guy was capable of &#8211; it was crazy."<p> <b>Having gone through that, is it a character you would tackle again knowing now what you know?</b><p> Jeffrey Dean Morgan: "Well, the odd thing is I loved playing him. As an actor there's nothing better. That challenge is such a cool deal. Well, I mean every character is different. The Comedian, for me, was such kind of a departure from what I've done before so I found it just kind of an amazing experience to go through. Would I revisit it? If it was done right, yeah. Yeah."<p> <b>How important was that costume so that at least you were behind something?</b><p> Jeffrey Dean Morgan: "It was hugely important. I mean, for anything that we did in this movie I think the minute we put on those costumes&#8230;for me, I became The Comedian. As soon as that cigar was in my mouth, that's when I felt comfortable. That's when I knew everything was going to be okay. So, yeah, it was crazy. Literally, I would put on the costume and as soon as the cigar was in my mouth, that was it. I was good to go."<p> <b>And when you hear Dave Gibbons say that seeing you in the costume made it all come true to him, was that something you ever expected to hear from the guy who helped create it?</b><p> Jeffrey Dean Morgan: "No. No, not at all. I remember that day very, very well and we were shooting that scene and him there because we were all very nervous about Dave being there, you know? This is kind of his &#8211; it's Dave Gibbons, for God's sake &#8211; this is his vision. And seeing him and how he reacted to what he was seeing, it's pretty awesome. I've heard him tell that story before and I'll never get sick of hearing it. It was great."<p> <b>So at that point you guys knew that you were absolutely doing things right?</b><p> Jeffrey Dean Morgan: "We knew we were on the right track, for sure. I can't tell you how much care kind of went into making sure that we were making this as true as we could to the novel. I've never quite experienced anything&#8230;well, I've never experienced anything like it and I don't know that I ever would again. I don't remember ever seeing scripts on the set but the graphic novel was everywhere. Zack had one in his hands at all times. We had one in our little rooms. If there was ever a question, any questions we had as actors, always our frame of reference was the graphic novel."<p> <b>Did you add more of a backstory, at least in your own mind, to why he is the way he is?</b><p> Jeffrey Dean Morgan: "As much as I can. I mean, it's amazing there's a lot of&#8230; <i>Absolute Watchmen</i> kind of gave me some insight. You can find research on Wikipedia, and I did a lot of online research and I did find out a lot. You get as much as you can. You can kind of overload yourself with as much information as you can, and then you show up and you do your job. And all that stuff, it all helps. It all helps and I took everything to heart. For a year of my life, it was the life I lived was sort of Eddie Blake."<p> <b>It's got to be pretty gratifying now to hear the audience reaction.</b><p> Jeffrey Dean Morgan: "Yeah, it's awesome. I mean, I got chills, what I just saw and everyone's excitement. 'Screw your excitement, I'm so frigging excited!' I'm a huge fan of this now. I can step away as an actor and go, 'Holy God, I'm just a fan of this.' I'm so happy with what I'm seeing now."<p> <b>Have you seen the 3 hour cut that Zack's made?</b><p> Jeffrey Dean Morgan: "No, no, no. I sure would hope to see it. All I've seen is was you've seen today. I just got in town. I saw the trailer on my little computer in Thailand. I got here today and saw what you just saw."<p> <b>And got blown away.</b><p> Jeffrey Dean Morgan: "Blown away."<p> <h3>More on <i>Watchmen</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/watchmen/ig/Watchmen-Movie-Photos/"><i>Watchmen</i> Photos</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/watchmen/"><i>Watchmen</i> Credits, Trailer, News, and Poster</a></li><p> aboutvideo_3784 Tue, 06 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktoppub/Calendars-in-MS-Publisher.htm Learn how to make calendars in Microsoft Publisher, so you can create your own custom, personalized, gifts for friends, family, or just for yourself. Computing,Software,Microsoft Publisher,Calendars,Design,Pictures,Photos,Gifts 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Software,Microsoft Publisher,Calendars,Design,Pictures,Photos,Gifts Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll show you how to create a calendar using Microsoft Publisher. First, open Microsoft Publisher. Choose publications for print in the left task pane. <br><h3>Publisher Calendar Design</h3>Click on calendars, and double-click the style you like. The calendar will automatically date itself for the current month. Notice that you can change the orientation in the left task pane. You can also change it from a monthly to yearly calendar. <br><h3>Publisher Calendar Content</h3>If you want to change the month or year, go up to Format and Calendar Options. In the left task pane click Change Date Range. In the change calendar dates box enter a new start date and a new end date. <br><h3>Color for a Publisher Calendar</h3>To change the color scheme, click Color Schemes in the left task pane. Click on a scheme to apply it to your calendar. If you want to choose your own colors, click custom color scheme at the bottom of the task pane. <br><h3>Text in a Publisher Calendar</h3>To change all the fonts, click Font Schemes. Click on one of the options to apply it to your calendar. If you prefer to just change the month of the calendar, select the text and change it by going to the toolbar at the top of the screen. <br><h3>Publisher Calendar Pictures and Photos</h3>To change the picture, right-click the image and choose Change Picture and select clip art or a picture from your computer. I will choose clip art. <br><br>Search for a picture you want by typing in a keyword and clicking GO. Click a clip art item to insert it into your calendar. Adjust the size and style of your picture using the picture toolbar.<br><br>Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_5524 Thu, 25 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/busycooks/Easy-Apple-Stuffing.htm Tired of your run of the mill stuffing recipe? Try this quick and simple apple stuffing. The combination of sweet apple with savory flavors gives this holiday side dish a unique twist. apple, stuffing, thanksgiving, apple stuffing, recipe 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. apple, stuffing, thanksgiving, apple stuffing, recipe Hi! I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make apple stuffing. <h3>Apple Stuffing Ingredients</h3> For this recipe, you will need:<ul> <li>1/4 c. butter</li> <li>1 c. chopped onion</li> <li>1 c. chopped celery</li> <li>2 cans of condensed chicken broth</li> <li>16 oz. package of seasoned stuffing</li> <li>2 c. chopped apples</li> </ul> Preheat the oven to 375 degrees. <h3>Soften the Vegetables</h3> Place a Dutch oven on the stovetop over medium high heat. Place the butter in the pan and let it melt. Next add the onions and celery to the saucepan. Let them cook until they are tender, for about 2-3 minutes. <h3>Add the Broth</h3> Now add the broth to the saucepan. Heat until it comes to a boil. <h3>Mix in the Stuffing and Apples</h3> Remove the pan from the heat. Pour in the stuffing, then the apples. Mix the ingredients together well. <h3>Cook the Apple Stuffing</h3> Cover the pan and place it in the oven and cook for 30 minutes. Use the stuffing for a turkey or serve on the side. Enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6529 Wed, 02 Apr 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Gerard-Butler-on-Nim-s-Island.htm Gerard Butler ('300') plays dual roles in the family film 'Nim's Island' co-starring Jodie Foster. Butler plays the main character in a series of adventure books as well as dad to a young, independent girl named Nim (played by Abigail Breslin) . Gerard Butler, Interview, Nim's Island, Movie 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Gerard Butler, Interview, Nim's Island, Movie Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the World Premiere of <i>Nim's Island</i>.<p> <h3>Gerard Butler ('Jack/Alex Rover' in <i>Nim's Island</i>)</h3><p> <b>Working with kids and animals &#150; how tough was that?</b><p> Gerard Butler: "Not at all. I mean, I had less trouble with the animals than Abigail did, although I don't even think she had trouble with them. But I didn't have to work with them as much as she did. I had the pelican who came behind me one day and I thought was going to eat me. But he or she, I don't even know if it was a&#133; He didn't or she didn't, whatever. And to say Abigail's a kid, I'm more of a kid than Abigail. She was more professional than I am so that was never an issue. Just child hours &#150; you have to go shorter hours."<p> <b>And the swear jar?</b><p> Gerard Butler: "That damn swear jar. I was just talking to Cameron Diaz and she's doing a film with Abigail right now, and she didn't know about the swear jar on my film. She's like, 'She's got a bloody swear jar. It's costing me a fortune.' I went, 'What? She's doing it to you as well?' A lot of money, a lot of money from swearing. It's part of my language."<p> <b>$150 dollars which she donated.</b><p> Gerard Butler: "Pretty much. Pretty much, yeah, which was about 75% of my salary on this film."<p> <b>There's action in this film but when are we going to see you kicking some ass?</b><p> Gerard Butler: "In <i>Game</i>. Actually, no, wait a minute. In the Guy Ritchie film <i>RocknRolla</i>, I kick some ass in that. But I kick some serious ass in <i>Game</i> which is coming out next year. That's the boys from <i>Crank</i>. That's insane, insane, insane."<p> <b>How was visiting your fans [across the street]?</b><p> Gerard Butler: "You know what? It was great. They're awesome. They just give you such a wonderful energy, you know? I have a blast with them when I get over there. I could easily be one of them. I could just jump in and hang out, you know?"<p> <h3>Writer/Directors Mark Levin and Jennifer Flackett</h3><p> <b>Which is more difficult to direct &#150; kids or animals?</b><p> Mark Levin: "Well animals are more difficult than kids to direct."<p> Jennifer Flackett: "Especially this kid. Abigail Breslin is not hard to direct. She is a joy."<p> Mark Levin: "And different animals are different. Sea lions are easier than pelicans."<p> <b>And your adult actors, you couldn't ask for better, could you?</b><p> Jennifer Flackett: "No, we got our first choice. I mean, beyond our first choice in every single role. It was far beyond what we thought when we sat down."<p> Mark Levin: "To have Jodie Foster and Gerard Butler in our movie was a dream come true for us."<p> <b>And then you've got the built-in female audience for Gerry that's screaming across the street for him?</b><p> Mark Levin: "They seem to love Gerry Butler and for good reason."<p> <b>Is it extra weight on your shoulders when you're adapting something that is so well loved?</b><p> Jennifer Flackett: "I do think it was an easy book to adapt because the story had a really simple through-line about these three characters finding each other. And that always led us through."<p> <h3>More Coverage of <i>Nim's Island</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/nimsisland/a/nimsjf032408.htm">Jodie Foster Shows Off Her Comedy Skills in <i>Nim's Island</i></a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/nimsisland/a/nims031108.htm">Curse Words Cost Gerard Butler Cash</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/library/weekly/blnimsislandpicsa.htm"><i>Nim's Island</i> Photo Gallery</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/nimsisland/"><i>Nim's Island</i> Trailer, Poster and Credits</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/butlergerard/">Gerard Butler Photos, Interviews and Movies</a></li><br> aboutvideo_6404 Fri, 22 Feb 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/greekfood/Spetzofai--Greek-Sausage-Dish.htm Spetzofai is a rustic Greek sausage and pepper dish. This versatile spetzofai recipe is quite simple to make, yet it bursts with flavor. See how it's done! spetzofai, greek, food, sausage, peppers 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. spetzofai, greek, food, sausage, peppers Hi, I'm Chef John Mitzewich for About.com. Today we're doing a Greek recipe called Spetzofai. It's a delicious and very easy sausage and pepper dish. <h3>Sausage Spetzofai Ingredients</h3> This dish starts with 1 lb of spicy country sausage. I'm using a nice spicy Italian sausage. We're going to cut it into about 1-inch pieces. And for the rest of the ingredients we need:<ul> <li>2 chopped bell pepper</li> <li>1 chopped onion</li> <li>6 Greek pepperoncini, which are a little bit spicy</li> <li>1 tsp dried oregano</li> <li>1/2 cup tomato - I used canned plum tomatoes because tomatoes aren't in season</li> </ul> <h3>Heat the Spetzofai Sausages</h3> In a saute pan, take 3 tbsp of olive oil and on medium heat, and saute the sausage pieces until they are nicely brown. Take your time, you want some nice color and caramelization on there. See that. Here's a sausage close up. A nice color on those is going to help flavor the dish. It's also going to cook out some of the extra fat. <h3>Add the Onions</h3> Once those have cooked for 7-8 minutes, you could drain these in a colander, but I'm going to tilt the pan and use a paper towel to wipe out the excess grease. Then dump in the onions and cook those until they get nice and soft, sweet and slightly browned. About 5-6 minutes on medium heat. <h3>Cook the Peppers</h3> Then add the peppers. Throw in the pepperoncini, I'm going to leave them whole, I just want to subtly flavor this with a little heat and sharpness from the brine. I'm not going to cut those so people can pick them out. I'm going to put in the 1/2 cup of tomatoes diced, the dried oregano, and a couple tablespoons of wine, red or white. <h3>Serve the Spetzofai</h3> Cook that on medium heat until the vegetables are just tender. You can leave them a little crisp if you want, but I like to cook them almost soft. And that's it! So simple. Now, you could add garlic to this dish, but my sausage had a lot of garlic so I didn't, but that's up to you. Serve that warm. <br><br> It's very versatile; great with eggs, great with potatoes, rice, pasta, or just serve it like this, as is. There we go, that is our Greek spetzofai, much easier to make than say, by the way. I hope you give it a try. Enjoy. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us online at About.com. aboutvideo_4685 Fri, 21 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/chinesefood/Moo-Shu-Beef-Wraps.htm Fold this tasty moo shu beef dish in a warm tortilla wrap and top it with hoisin sauce for a dinner that will delight the palate. Learn how to make moo shu beef wraps. Moo Shu, Beef, Recipes, dinner, main course, chinese food 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Moo Shu, Beef, Recipes, dinner, main course, chinese food Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make moo shu beef wraps. <h3>Moo Shu Beef Wrap Ingredients</h3> For this recipe you will need:<ul> <li>1 pound sliced beef</li> <li>3.5 oz. sliced shiitake mushrooms</li> <li>2 cups packaged coleslaw mix</li> <li>2/3 cup sliced green onions</li> <li>1 tablespoon cornstarch dissolved in 1/4 cup water</li> <li>8 medium flour tortillas</li> <li>1/3 cup hoisin sauce</li> <li>2 tbsp canola oil</li> <li>2 tablespoons reduced-sodium soy sauce</li> <li>1 tablespoon dark sesame oil</li> <li>2 cloves garlic, minced</li> <li>1/2 tsp. ground ginger</li> <li>1/4 tsp. cayenne pepper</li> </ul> <h3>Cook the Beef and Mushrooms</h3> Heat oil in the pan. Pour in the beef, and then add the mushrooms. Cook the meat 2-3 minutes and then flip the slices over so it cooks on both sides. If needed, cook the beef in batches so there's room in the pan. <h3>Add the Scallions and Coleslaw</h3> Once all the meat and mushrooms are cooked, place them all back into the pan. Then add the scallions and the coleslaw. Mix and cook for another 3 minutes. <h3>Mix the Moo Shu Sauce</h3> In a small bowl, combine the soy sauce, sesame oil, garlic, ginger and cayenne pepper. Mix this sauce together. <h3>Add the Sauce to the Skillet</h3> Then pour it over the skillet. Next, pour the cornstarch mixture and stir everything together. Continue to heat the dish so the sauce bubbles and thickens. <h3>Wrap the Moo Shu Beef in Warm Tortillas</h3> Easily heat the tortillas by microwaving them for 10 seconds. Spread about 1 tbsp. of hoisin sauce on tortillas; then, place some of the beef mixture in the center of the circle. Fold bottom edge over the filling and fold right and left sides to center. <h3>Serve the Moo Shu Beef Wraps</h3> Hold the folded side with your fingers, lift, and enjoy! Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6441 Fri, 29 Feb 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Steve-Carell-on-Get-Smart.htm Steve Carell ('The Office') takes on the role Don Adams made famous in 'Get Smart,' playing Maxwell Smart in the movie version of the classic television show. Carell did his own take on the character while keeping in mind he had big shoes to fill. Steve Carell, Interview, get smart 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Steve Carell, Interview, get smart Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2008 San Francisco Wonder Con.<p> <h3>Steve Carell ('Maxwell Smart' in <i>Get Smart</i>)</h3><p> <b>I always viewed Maxwell Smart as not a stupid man, just different &#150; a little klutzy. How do you view him?</b><p> Steve Carell: "I totally agree. I don't think he's bumbling or silly. He's not a Clouseau character. I see him as very proficient, maybe a bit earnest. But I think the best word to describe him would be counterintuitive. He always seems to land on his feet, whether it's the way he intended to land or not. But he always seems to&#133;things seem to work out for him in the end. I think that's the joy of that character is that he's not a bumbler. He's not an idiot. He actually is quite smart. He's very proficient. And in this movie, it's kind of an origin story. He starts out as an analyst as opposed to a spy, aspires to be a spy but just can't get past that part of it. And, obviously, in the course of the film he's promoted to spy, and then he can try out the things he's been practicing for years."<p> <b>How difficult was it to deliver those lines that Don Adams made famous?</b><p> Steve Carell: "Really hard. Yeah, honestly that was the toughest part of the movie because they are so iconic. It's hard to hear them any other way but the way he says them. And you don't want to say them a different way <i>just</i> for the sake of saying it differently. You want to say them, I hate to use the word organically, but you want to say them in relevance to the situation. So, that's the way I tried to look at them and however they came out was based on whatever situation we were then."<p> <b>Did you ever view yourself as an action hero-type guy in the movies?</b><p> Steve Carell: "Day one. I knew as a little kid that I would be doing action movies because I think I'm just... I have the looks for it. I have the physique. I think when people look at me it registers that I am tough. I'm sort of a hard-as-nails, kick-ass kind of guy. So yeah, it was just begging, begging for me to come in and be an action hero. Not in a million years, and it was a ball. It was so much fun to do. From the cast to Pete (Segal) the director, it's probably the most fun I've ever had doing anything. So it's been a great time."<p> <b>I'm sure we're going to have fun watching it.</b><p> Steve Carell: "I hope so. You know, I think it comes across how much fun everybody is having. I hope people like it."<p> <h3>More on <i>Get Smart</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/getsmart/a/getsmart011808.htm">Behind the Scenes of <i>Get Smart</i></a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/getsmart/a/getsmart072807.htm">Interview with Director Peter Segal</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/getsmart/"><i>Get Smart</i> Photos, News, Credits, and Trailer</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/carellsteve/">Steve Carell Films, Photos, and Interviews</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/hathawayanne/">Anne Hathaway Photos and Movies</a></li><p> aboutvideo_8025 Wed, 06 Aug 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Lohman-and-Long-Interview.htm Alison Lohman plays an ambitious loan officer who turns down the wrong person in Sam Raimi's 'Drag Me to Hell.' Justin Long co-stars as Lohman's professor boyfriend in the film which returns Raimi to his 'Evil Dead' roots. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2008 San Diego Comic Con.<p> <h3>Alison Lohman ('Christine') and Justin Long ('Clay') - <i>Drag Me to Hell</i></h3><p> <b>The premise of this movie sounds pretty freaky. How tough was it to play this?</b><p> Alison Lohman: "It was really tough. I mean, you know, it was more exhausting because the scenes are so physical and intense. My character's being beaten up every day. So, yeah, it was tiring."<p> <b>Alison was just mentioning keeping up the level of tension while on the set, and that a lot of it has to do with Sam Raimi. So tell me what it's actually like being on a Sam Raimi set.</b><p> Alison Lohman: "It's really great."<p> Justin Long: "It's great. He's just so nice. I mean, I know that this sounds like a trite thing to say but he's so&#8230;it's rare."<p> Alison Lohman: "Generous and has a great sense of humor. He lightens up the crew."<p> Justin Long: "Oh god, everyone just loves working for him. It's just such a nice atmosphere on the set. Like very easy. And also the whole crew, he makes people feel like they're all equally involved. He's really got this great sense of camaraderie about the movie. It's really refreshing."<p> <b>So was it easy in between scenes to let things down since it was such a high level of tension?</b><p> Alison Lohman: "I think it was."<p> Justin Long: "You had a lot more. I mean, Alison goes through the wringer. She had all this stuff to do. It's her movie."<p> Alison Lohman: "I think it just comes back to Sam. He just has this great way on set. He makes you feel really comfortable and confident."<p> Justin Long: "Was it easier for you to decompress then? You go through crazy&#8230;"<p> Alison Lohman: "I mean, I would have to have a few shots after work but&#8230;"<p> Justin Long: "She means shots of heroin in her arm. Let's clarify that."<p> <h3>More on <i>Drag Me to Hell</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/dragmetohell/"><i>Drag Me to Hell</i> Photos and Resources</a></li><p> aboutvideo_3785 Tue, 06 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/desktoppub/Charts-in-Publisher.htm Learn how to better organize and convey your data to colleagues- create your own professional-looking charts in Microsoft Publisher. Computing,Software,Microsoft Publisher,Publishing,Charts,Tables,Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Software,Microsoft Publisher,Publishing,Charts,Tables,Design Hi. I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I'll show you how to create an organization chart in Microsoft Publisher. This is a great way to show how information relates. First open Microsoft Publisher. I will start with a blank publication but you could use a pre-designed publication. <br><h3>Tools to Create a Chart in Publisher</h3>On the left toolbar click Autoshapes, then select connectors. Drag the handle at the top of the drop down menu out so it stays on the screen. <br><br>Do the same thing for the basic shapes found under Auto shapes. <br><h3>Add Shapes to a Publisher Chart</h3>Click the shape you want to use in your organization chart such as a rectangle. Then click the publication to insert the shape. <br><br>Change the size, color, fill, or line of the shape by double clicking on it. To delete a shape, simply select it, and press the delete key. <br><br>When the shape looks the way you want it, right click the shape then click copy. Right click where you want the object, then click paste. <br><br>You can move them around anytime. <br><h3>Add Connectors to a Publisher Chart</h3>After you have your shapes in place, click the type of connector line you want. <br><br>Click where you want one end of the connector, then click where you want the other end of the line to go to connect the shapes. <br><br>To change the color or weight of the connector lines double click one or to select multiple connectors, hold down shift while you click each connector. <br><br>On the format menu, click auto shape then click the colors and lines tab. Under line, select the options that you want. <br><h3>Add Text to a Publisher Chart</h3>To add text to a shape in an organization chart, click the shape then type the text you want. <br><br>To format the text, select the text inside the shape, then use the options on the toolbar at the top of the screen. <br><h3>Finalize a Chart in Publisher</h3>If you need to move shapes or connector lines in a chart, click the shape you want to move, and drag it to a new position. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com. aboutvideo_8028 Wed, 06 Aug 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Meagan-Good-The-Unborn.htm Meagan Good stars in writer/director David Goyer's 'The Unborn' alongside Odette Yustman, Gary Oldman and Cam Gigandet. But Good doesn't need to be involved in a scary movie to have weird things happen to her... 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2008 San Diego Comic Con.<p> <h3> Meagan Good - <i>The Unborn</i></h3><p> <b>Tell me about your role in this.</b><p> Meagan Good: "I play Romy and I'm the best friend of Casey, who's Odette [Yustman]. And basically while this craziness is happening to her and she's discovering that she's a twin and she's discovering that there's a possibility that she might be being haunted by her twin that was never born, I'm basically trying to convince her that she's not crazy. But then over time weird things start happening to me as well, then it's kind of like, you know, we're basically trying to get through and trying to be her support system."<p> <b>That sounds totally freaky. Did it spook you?</b><p> Meagan Good: "It spooked me a little bit. Especially to find out that there was a lot of truth to the different things, the different elements that David had brought to the script in terms of just like in the Holocaust, how they did all type of different&#8230;just tried different things with twins to see what made two people come out looking the same. Just like the stuff with the eye &#8211; her eye changing colors &#8211; and just about the medical condition, what that is. It's pretty freaky. So there's some real stuff in there. "<p> <b>Did you do any extra research?</b><p> Meagan Good: "I did a little bit of research just in terms of the twin stuff, just because I was curious about how much of it was true. David gave me some information and come to find out there's a lot of it that's very exactly on point. Of course there's always the world of when people pass away and spirits, and stuff like that. I believe in that."<p> <b>They always say that on a horror movie set strange things happen. Did anything happen on this one?</b><p> Meagan Good: "For me, other than it just being kind of really spooky and eerie and I just did a lot of praying&#8230; But Odette told me about a lot of different things that happened when they were in the insane asylum. They said that they took a picture that was being passed around the set where you could actually see someone's hands coming around a person in the picture. And someone else saw that it was like a face kind of like on the side. That's kind of freaky. I've seen a ghost before."<p> <b>Where did you see a ghost?</b><p> Meagan Good: "It's really strange. I was at Sundance and it was my first year at Sundance and I had this little apartment to myself. I was already kind of freaked out because I was staying in it by myself. And I couldn't get to sleep and finally just when I started to fall asleep, I started to have this dream of two of my girlfriends being in my room saying, 'Don't wake me up, don't wake me up.' 'Don't wake Meagan up,' or whatever, and I dreamed that one of them threw my cell phone above like where I was sleeping to try and like get my attention. And I woke up right then and I thought the dream was for real. And when I looked in the mirror in my room, I could see a black figure crouching at my bed where my friends would have been in my dream if it was real. The room was like - mind you, it's not dark - the TV was on so it's that grey kind of you can see everything around you. It was black and its reflection was black. And it was going, 'Don't wake her up. Don't wake her up.' And then all of a sudden it just stood up really quick and ran out of the room. I could see its reflection room out of the room."<p> <b>That gave me chills. How do you get over that?</b><p> <b>Meagan Good:</b> "I woke up. I called my mom in LA. I was like, 'Mom, I just saw a ghost!' She was like, 'Are you sure you weren't sleeping?' I was like, 'No, I definitely was not sleeping. I saw it in the mirror. I saw it run out of the room and go through the door, like disappear through the door.' She's like, 'Well, call your manager. He's across the hall.' I called and I'm like, 'Can I come to your room?' He was like, 'Yeah, just come over.' I was like, 'No, you have to open your door first because I'm going to make a run for it.' So I ran in the room and got in there and got settled and everything, but I was still freaked out. But I didn't see it again and since then I've only seen like one kind of thing where I'm not really sure what it was. I was shooting a scary movie a couple of years back that Jim Gillespie did called <i>Venom</i>. And in the old spooky house that was supposed to be my grandmother's house, I saw little sparks of light that would come in front of my face. They would twinkle down to the ground. And every once in a while it just kind of like happen. It was kind of like puffs of cloud, the kind that look like stars &#8211; what you would think they would look like close-up. And it would just go in front of my face and go away."<p> <b>But that didn't scare you though. That doesn't sound that scary.</b><p> Meagan Good:</b> "It didn't scare me but it scared me when I was watching a documentary on TV and they were talking about the different forms that ghosts and spirits appear in. That was one of the forms that they described, as well as the black figure that's like a shadow. That freaked me out."<p> <b>You're a total believer at this point.</b><p> Meagan Good: "Absolutely."<p> <b>What was it like working with David Goyer?</b><p> Meagan Good: "He's awesome. He's so much fun, so brilliant. He just knew exactly what he wanted. Every picture was already painted before we got there. But there was still the liberty to do what you felt was appropriate and right for your character. Just the big thing for me is when a director lets you trust your instincts and he did. Me and Odette had an awesome time so it was a great experience."<p> <b>He was also the writer so how free is he with the script?</b><p> Meagan Good: "He was very free with the script. He was like, 'You and Odette come downstairs. We're going to look through the script.' We go through the whole script; we go through all the dialogue. He's like, 'Would you say that or would you not say that?' I was like, 'I wouldn't say that.' He was like, 'What about this?' I was like, 'I don't know.' And I'm like, 'What about this?' He's like, 'Perfect. It's in the script.' He was just awesome."<p> <h3>More on <i>The Unborn</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/library/weekly/bltheunbornpicsa.htm"><i>The Unborn</i> Photos</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/theunborn/"><i>The Unborn</i> Credits, Interviews, and News</a></li><p> aboutvideo_3680 Thu, 08 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/windows/Windows-XP-File-Associations.htm Did you know you can control which software opens which file extensions on your computer in Windows XP? Learn how to edit file asssociations and default to your favorite programs. Computing,Operating Systems,Windows XP,Files,Settings,Organization 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Operating Systems,Windows XP,Files,Settings,Organization Hi. I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><h3>Why Edit File Associations</h3>Today I'll show you how to edit file associations in Windows XP. Sometimes when installing new software, it can overwrite the file associations for other software. Follow these steps to change the default file association so that double clicking a file will open the program you choose instead of the last program you installed. <br><h3>Association by File Type</h3>First, find the file of the type you want to associate to a program. I'll choose a JPG picture. <br><br>Right click the icon and a menu will appear. Choose Open with&#133; A window will open asking you to choose a program to open that file type. <br><br>Pick a program from the list. I'll choose Photoshop. <br><br>If the program isn't on your list, choose Other to navigate to another file or program on your hard drive. <br><h3>Windows File Association Caution</h3>Make sure the program to which you associate a file type that is capable of opening that type of file. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_6731 Wed, 30 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Mila-Kunis-on-Max-Payne.htm Mila Kunis gets to kick some bad guy bootie in 20th Century Fox's action thriller 'Max Payne.' Kunis joined her fellow 'Max Payne' cast members Mark Wahlberg and Chris Bridges at the 2008 Comic Con to discuss the film. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2008 San Diego Comic Con.<p> <h3>Mila Kunis &#8211; 'Mona Sax' in <i>Max Payne</i></h3><p> <b>Tell me about your character in this because I'm not sure what the female does in this movie.</b><p> Mila Kunis: "I play an assassin named Mona Sax who teams up with Mark [Wahlberg's] character, Max Payne. My sister gets murdered, she accuses Max Payne of doing it, finds out that they're both looking for the same bad guy, and they kind of team up together on a revenge spree."<p> <b>So is there a lot of action for you? Are you kicking ass?</b><p> Mila Kunis: "I'm kicking ass. I'm mostly killing people with guns. Yeah, that's my action in it."<p> <b>Did you do a lot of training?</b><p> Mila Kunis: "I did a little bit of training. Yeah, yeah, yeah."<p> <b>And how was that for you? Had you handled a gun before?</b><p> Mila Kunis: "No, that was my first time. I'm really good, I've got to tell you. I passed the SWAT team test. I was really good."<p> <b>So if the acting thing doesn't turn out&#8230;</b><p> Mila Kunis: "I can always become an assassin by profession."<p> <b>As a female, why will females like this movie?</b><p> Mila Kunis: "Because she's not a damsel in distress. She's a really strong female. It's a really great sad story. A man loses his wife and child and goes on a revenge spree and tries to capture the revengers. It's a fun movie. You get to look at Mark for an hour and a half, which is never that bad."<p> <b>And you.</b><p> Mila Kunis: "Yes, and me. And Chris [Bridges], so yes."<p> <h3>More on <i>Max Payne</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/maxpayne/"><i>Max Payne</i> Interviews, Credits, and Trailer</a></li><br> <li>More on <i>Max Payne</i> Star <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/wahlbergmark/">Mark Wahlberg</a></li><p> aboutvideo_6819 Mon, 29 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/graphicssoft/The-Magic-Eraser-Tool.htm Adobe Photoshop's Magic Eraser Tool provides you with a quick and easy way to change a picture's background or other color area with just a few clicks. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Photography,Graphic Design 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Computing,Programs,Software,Adobe Photoshop,Pictures,Photography,Graphic Design Hi. I am Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today, I am going to show you how to use the magic eraser tool in Adobe Photoshop CS 2. This tool makes it very easy to change the backgrounds of your pictures. <br><h3>When to Use Photoshop Magic Eraser</h3>First, open up Adobe Photoshop. Go to file, open, and select your digital picture. I want to get rid of the sky and replace it with something else. I could use the regular eraser and start erasing. However, this is time consuming and very hard to do especially with this picture because there are all those little trees in the background. <br><h3>Finding Magic Eraser Tool</h3>Instead I want to use the magic eraser tool. This is located in the same place as the regular eraser. Just click and hold down on the eraser icon and select the magic eraser tool. <br><h3>Photoshop Magic Eraser Effect</h3>With just one click, this tool will erase all pixels that are the same color or near the same color as where I click. So I am just going to go over to the sky and click once. The entire sky, both the blue sky and the white clouds, disappear. However, see the trees. It deleted too much of them. <br><h3>Revising Magic Eraser Effects</h3>So I am going to go up to edit, undo and reset the picture. At the top of the screen are some options. A high tolerance number will delete a larger range of pixels. So I am going to change this value to a lower number. <br><br>Let's see what happens now. That is close and good enough for now. Now let me go to file, open and select another picture. <br><h3>Integrating your Work with Photoshop Images</h3>I will choose the rectangular marquee, press ctrl A or Apple A on a Mac to select the entire picture. To copy it I will go up to Edit, Copy. Let s go back to my first picture and create a new layer by clicking the new layer icon. <br><br>Now go up to Edit, Paste to insert the new picture. In the layers palette I need to drag this new layer below the original layer. And finally drag up the picture higher with the move tool. Now I've got a very different picture. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information, please visit us online at Computing.About.com.<br> aboutvideo_6738 Mon, 28 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Carla-Gugino-Interview.htm Carla Gugino describes her character, Sally Jupiter, in 'Watchmen' as a broad - and that's the perfect word to use to sum up the ex-costumed crimefighter who pushed her daughter into following in her footsteps. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2008 San Diego Comic Con.<p> <h3>Carla Gugino &#8211; 'Sally Jupiter' / 'Silk Spectre' in <i>Watchmen</i></h3><p> <b>They age you in this. How was that?</b><p> Carla Gugino: "Yes. That was amazing. I had full prosthetics. Full check pieces and a whole neck piece and eyes, and it took about four hours so those days were really long. And it takes about an hour and a half to take it off. But yeah, it was really wild. I start at 25 years old in the 1940s and I age to 67 years old in the 1980s, and it was pretty wild. I've never played a character that's had quite that journey, you know? And Sally Jupiter is a really flawed and kind of beautiful character to me because of that, but she's a broad. She's got a lot going on, you know?"<p> <b>Could you relate to any part of her character, because she is a broad and she's got her personality out there?</b><p> Carla Gugino: "Yeah. You know, it's funny. I definitely have had a lot of tough, strong women in my life, I definitely think, and people who've had hard knocks and therefore their view of the world has been informed by that. So I definitely can relate to it. And I think also I decided to act when I was 13 and of course have had a lot of really hard times, but I've also been incredibly fortunate and I've been able to support myself and work pretty consistently for a long time. I've seen a lot of people who that's not been the case for. And I think that this character, this woman, Sally Jupiter as Silk Spectre, really wanted to shine and be the light and be the star, and ultimately that didn't happen for her and it was kind of crushing. And she tried to do that through her daughter, and all those dynamics are so&#8230; You know, that's what's so amazing about this movie is that it illuminates the human condition in so many ways."<p> <b>You do take her through such an arc. Which was more of a challenge for you to play &#8211; her as the young superhero-type person or her older knowing everything?</b><p> Carla Gugino: "Definitely the older. Definitely the older because the young was so fun. I mean, I'm a huge fan of film noir. I love film noir dialogue. I love a great 'dame'. I sort of feel like I should have been born during that time. I'm much more of that ilk than the modern kind of. And so that was just really fun. <i>Really</i> fun. And the stuff of her as an older woman was definitely more challenging and incredibly exciting because of that. But it's also very strange to have prosthetics on your face because you don't know what's being conveyed. You sort of feel like you have to sort of make your gestures possibly slightly larger &#8211; and she's also a larger-than-life character, so there was a really fine line in doing that dance."<p> <b>Do we ever get to see her fight as a younger woman?</b><p> Carla Gugino: "We see&#8230; No. There's a very, you know, famous rape scene unfortunately which involves some stunts but there's not one. We see pictures of her in her crimefighting ways, but we don't see a lot of that."<p> <h3>More on <i>Watchmen</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/watchmen/ig/Watchmen-Movie-Photos/"><i>Watchmen</i> Photos</a></li><br> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/watchmen/"><i>Watchmen</i> Credits, Trailer, News, and Poster</a></li><p> aboutvideo_3488 Sat, 03 Feb 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/pcsupport/motherboard-mov.htm When your motherboard breaks your computer does too. Learn how to replace your computer's motherboard by yourself so you'll be able to continue on after a problem as quickly as possible. DIY,Computing,Gadgets,Computer Hardware,IDE Hard Drive,Disk Space,Drive Space 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. DIY,Computing,Gadgets,Computer Hardware,IDE Hard Drive,Disk Space,Drive Space Hi. I am Don Schechter for About.com Computing. <br><br>Today I am going to show you how to install a motherboard in a desktop PC. Before I begin, you should know that the example I'm giving here may not be exactly how your motherboard will be installed. Motherboards come in many different sizes and have different features. Therefore, consult your motherboard s manual to read about any specific settings that you have to do. <br><h3>Before You Install a Motherboard</h3>As a general guideline, make sure you have all your pieces ahead of time and don't force things into place if they don't want to go. <br><br>First, open your computer case. Some computers have a button or buttons that you press to open the box. Some have screws on the rear of the case which must be removed. I just need to remove the screws on the back of the case. <br><br>The new motherboard is going to be mounted onto the motherboard tray. Some computers have removable trays, but for our example we re going to use this embedded tray. <br><h3>Motherboard Installation</h3>Pop-out the pre-installed connector plate on the rear of the case and replace it with the one that came with your new motherboard. <br><br>Onto the motherboard. You need to determine where you're going to mount the board. As you can see, there are many locations to attach screws on this motherboard tray. The mounting locations coincide with screw holes on the motherboard. <br><br>First mount the standoff screws on the tray. These screws separate the motherboard from the metal casing. Sometimes these require special tools, so check ahead of time to make sure you have the right stuff. <br><br>Fasten the motherboard by starting in the center and then corners. <br><h3>Data Connections</h3>Attach the control wires for the power button, reset button, and LEDS, on the front of your computer. Again, check your manual to see where these are located on your motherboard. <br><br>Attach the power connector from the power supply. This is the largest plug in the bunch. <br><h3>Other Connections</h3>Now you can install the rest of your devices like hard drives and CD burners using their appropriate cables. Also set any jumpers that might be required for your motherboard. <br><br> Close up your computer and plug in all your cables. <br><br>Thanks for watching. For more information please visit us online at Computing.About.com aboutvideo_4894 Wed, 14 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/italianfood/Insalata-Caprese.htm If you've got time to shop for a few basic ingredients and about five minutes for preparation, then you too can put together an amazing Italian appetizer for a few or for many: Insalata Caprese. Insalata Caprese, tomatoes, mozzarella, salad, italian food 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Insalata Caprese, tomatoes, mozzarella, salad, italian food Hi! I'm Jonathon Stewart for About.com Food, and today, it's all about Insalata Caprese...or "salad in the style of Capri," to you and me. This dish is about as easy as it gets to prepare, and is a perfect appetizer for an intimate dinner, or for a rockin' house party. <h3>Insalata Caprese Ingredients</h3> For today's recipe, here's what you'll need - check it out: <ul><li>1/2 lb of fresh mozzarella cheese</li> <li>2 or 3 organic or vine-ripened tomatoes</li> <li>1/2 c. to 1 c. of fresh basil leaves</li> <li>sea salt and ground pepper</li> <li>About 1/4 c. of extra-virgin olive oil</li></ul> <h3>Insalata Caprese Ingredient Hints</h3> A couple notes on the ingredients: <br><br>First, make sure you buy the freshest tomatoes and basil you can find, and the best cheese and olive oil you can afford. Ideally, the cheese should be "mozzarella di bufala," but since water buffalo milk is a little tough to come by in the States, a good cow's milk mozz will do just fine as well. <br><br>Second, and it pains me to say this, don't improvise on this one. Insalata Caprese is all about highlighting the amazing flavors of these simple ingredients. <h3>Cut your Mozzarella and Tomatoes</h3> Start by bringing your tomatoes and mozzarella to room temperature, then take the cheese out of its packaging and pat dry. Cut your tomatoes and mozzarella into quarter-inch discs - slice the tomatoes latitudinally, and be careful cutting the mozz which can be a little on the slippery side. Be sure to rinse off your cutting board in between, to preserve the color of your cheese. <h3>Tomato Ripeness for Insalata Caprese</h3> Many Italians prefer their tomatoes to be slightly under-ripe, which gives them just a hint of tartness absent in vine-ripened tomatoes. This one's up to you, just know that should you choose to use vinegar, balsamic or otherwise, you're in danger of offending the Caprese purists. You filthy American pig, you. <h3>Arrange the Insalata Caprese</h3> Starting with the tomato, layer in slices of the mozzarella, in any fashion that's most appealing to you and the occasion. Rows, rings, and other configurations are acceptable. There's a little flexibility in the basil as well. You can insert whole leaves in between the slices of cheese and tomato if you like, or simply tear them into smaller pieces and scatter them around the plate. Sprinkle your salad with fresh ground pepper and sea salt, and you're in the home stretch. <h3>Add the Olive Oil</h3> The last thing you should do, and only do just prior to serving, is drizzle your caprese with extra-virgin olive oil. Never let your salad sit in the oil, and definitely make sure it's of top-quality. <br><br>Apparently there are some schuysters out there trying to pass off less-expensive hazelnut oil for pristine extra-virgin olive - unfortunately it's a little tough to tell the difference as an overseas consumer. Just stick to the organic food stores and steer clear of shady back-alley olive-oil deals and you should be fine. <h3>Serving Insalata Caprese</h3> You might also choose to garnish your plate with slices of cherry tomatoes for a final touch. This recipe for Insalata Caprese serves about four. Although, this Insalata Caprese is about to serve one. <br><br> Thanks for watching! To learn more, visit us on the web at food.about.com. <br><br> aboutvideo_4899 Tue, 09 Oct 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/japanesefood/Japanese-Rare-Cheesecake.htm Served with fresh fruit, rare cheesecakes are the no-bake version of cheesecake in Japan. Learn to make this dessert that has a delightful texture and subtly sweet taste. Japanese Rare Cheesecake, Recipe, cheesecake recipe, rare cheese 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Japanese Rare Cheesecake, Recipe, cheesecake recipe, rare cheese Hi, I'm Natasha Levitan for About.com Food. Today, I'll show you how to make Japanese rare cheesecake. <h3>Japanese Rare Cheesecake Ingredients</h3> You'll need:<ul> <li>3/4 cup cream cheese, softened </li> <li>3/4 cup and 2 tbsp plain yogurt </li> <li>1/3 cup sugar </li> <li>2 tbsp lemon juice </li> <li>1 tbsp powder gelatin</li> <li>1/4 cup water </li> <li>1 package of graham crackers </li> <li>3 tbsp butter</li> </ul> You'll also need a rolling pin and a plastic bag. <h3>Make the Graham Cracker Crust</h3> Take a package of graham crackers and place it in a plastic bag. Roll over it with a rolling pin mashing it into the crumbs. Melt the butter in a microwave. In a medium bowl, add your freshly made graham cracker crumbs, melted butter and a tablespoon of sugar and mix it together. Press the crumbs into the bottom of a round cake pan (8 inch). <h3>Make the Cheesecake Filling</h3> Mix powder gelatin and water in a small cup and set aside. Stir cream cheese in a bowl until softened. Put water and gelatin mixture into microwave and heat for a minute. Add yogurt, sugar, lemon juice, and gelatin into softened cream cheese and mix well. Pour the filling into the crust and spread evenly. Refrigerate for 3 hours. <h3>Serving Japanese Rare Cheesecake</h3> If your pan has a removable bottom, place it on a large can, and pull down the sides. Slide the cake into a serving platter and cut it into wedges. Serve with your favorite fruit or jam. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us online at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3690 Fri, 30 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/windows/Burn-a-CD-or-DVD-in-Windows-XP.htm Homemade CDs and DVDs make great gifts, and they're also easy to compile. Find out how to burn a CD or DVD in Windows XP without using an outside application. burn, cd, dvd, windows, xp 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. burn, cd, dvd, windows, xp Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to burn a CD on Windows XP without using an outside application. <h3>Burn a CD in Windows XP</h3> <ul> <li>CLICK Start / My computer </li> <li>FIND music or files to burn </li> <li>CLICK on multiple files while holding the control key or select all the files in a folder <li>CLICK Edit / Select All</li> <li>RIGHT-CLICK your selection</li> <li>CLICK 'Send To' and CHOOSE CD-RW drive</li> <li>CLICK Start / My Computer and open CD-RW drive</li> <li>CLICK 'Write these files to CD" link on the left</li> <li>TYPE name of your CD into the Windows CD Writing Wizard</li> <li>INSERT blank CD</li> </ul> Thanks for watching. For more information visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6695 Tue, 29 Jul 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/movies/Gil-Kenan-City-of-Ember.htm Gil Kenan followed up his Oscar-nominated work as the director of 'Monster House' with another movie aimed at younger audiences: 'City of Ember.' At the 2008 Comic Con, Kenan talked about bringing the story alive onscreen. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Rebecca Murray from About.com Hollywood Movies at the 2008 San Diego Comic Con.<p> <h3><i>City of Ember</i> Director Gil Kenan</h3><p> <b>Tell me about keeping close to the source material &#8211; how difficult was that?</b><p> Gil Kenan: "Well, it was easy because the source material was fantastic. The thing I really had to do was to take something that was word-based, a puzzle-based novel, and turn it into a cinematic adventure. And to do that, it was kind of part of what was really fun about making this movie. I had to think about the design of this town and how to weave a puzzle into it. So to make this kind of living puzzle, it was actually a real treat."<p> <b>The city is so much an integral character in the movie, so how did you bring it to life?</b><p> Gil Kenan: "Well, you know, I had some experience. I'd just come from making a house a living character and so this is kind of the natural extension. It's less animated, but it's no less alive. It's got a beating heart under it. I took a lot of those things in the novel that to me created a kind of larger living metaphor for the city, and kind of put a little bit more attention to them. I made this generator a real integral part of the story. I created visual motifs that really made this place a living, breathing place."<p> <b>Did you have to lose anything that you regretted having to lose from the source material?</b><p> Gil Kenan: "Probably, but they don't come to mind. My process is that I read the book, you know, was inspired by it. It kicked off this entire journey. But I don't go back and like flip a page and make sure I missed a line. You know, it's really an interpretation of the novel. It's not a page to screen translation."<p> <b>Because they never are.</b><p> Gil Kenan: "No, and I think that that does a disservice to both. I think you have to let a movie be a movie. And you know, there's a really interesting process that every reader goes through when they read a book for the first time. They always say, 'I saw a movie in my head.' You have a real cinematic relationship with that material. I feel like my duty is to sort of put a lid on that first movie that played in my head and try to nurture it to the screen."<p> <b>That makes sense. How hard was it to find the two leads because they don't work, the whole movie doesn't work?</b><p> Gil Kenan: "No, and that's a good point. Thanks for the pressure. It was really hard. I waited to make sure that I got it right, and I did. And to do that I had to be a little bit less than precise about the ages of the kids in the novel. But to me it was more important that I got the spirit of the character, their nature, their chemistry. And Saoirse Ronan as Lina and Harry Treadaway as Duke, they really pop off the screen. They're alive."<p> <b>You got her [Saoirse] before she got big.</b><p> Gil Kenan: "Yeah, that's right."<p> <b>She may never want to do another action movie again.</b><p> Gil Kenan: "Well, she's really good. She moves well so it would be a shame if she didn't do another one."<p> <h3>More on <i>City of Ember</i>:</h3> <li><a href="http://movies.about.com/od/cityofember/"><i>City of Ember</i> Photos, Credits, and Trailer</a></li><br> <li> <a href="http://movies.about.com/od/cityofember/a/ember100507.htm">On the Set of <i>City of Ember</i> with Saoirse Ronan & Harry Treadaway</a></li><p> aboutvideo_6992 Thu, 28 Jun 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/gourmetfood/New-England-Style-Oyster-Stew.htm Savor the taste of this traditional oyster stew, straight from New England to your kitchen. A simple, yet elegant recipe, you can whip up oyster stew in no time! oyster stew, oysters, seafood, legal seafoods 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. oyster stew, oysters, seafood, legal seafoods My name's Rich Vellante, Executive Chef from Legal Sea Foods in Boston MA, for About.com Food. And today we are going to show you an old New England classic - and it oyster stew. <h3>Oyster Stew Ingredients</h3><ul> <li>2 tbsp. butter</li> <li>2 tbsp. leeks</li> <li>1 tbsp. celery</li> <li>5 shucked oysters in liquid</li> <li>1 cup heavy cream</li> <li>1/2 tsp. chives</li> <li>salt and pepper to taste</li> </ul> <h3>Prepare the Leeks</h3> The simple ingredients based off of colonial times is - we have some vegetables here is we have celery and we have leeks. And I wanted to show you first off in this dish we are going to use the white part of this. And so well do is we will cut it at an angle and Ill cut the certain sizes that we want and I will Julianne this. What I will do is then put this in some water and let the dirt fall to the bottom. <h3>Soften the Vegetables</h3> I'm going to get my pan started. The first step that we'll do is to soften the celery and the leeks. I'll start out here by adding a little bit of butter and well soften the butter up and then add the vegetables. As you see we are slowly softening the celery and leeks on the pan. <br><br>As I am building the flavor profile it is important that we salt and pepper it at different times. You can use white pepper or black pepper. I have chosen to use black pepper. And as you can see this is slowly slowly cooking. And the whole object here is to soften - we are looking to soften the vegetables. <h3>Open the Oysters</h3> So these are the oysters, and this is the oyster knife. There is a little hinge in the back here. And what I'll do is, I'll hit it like this to stun it a little bit and let it know I'm coming at it. And there is a hinge in the back that you just open up. <br><br>Now, it is important to not let all the juices come out of it. You have to run your knife along the top end. What I have is the oyster, and I am saving the juices, and it is important to get all of the liquor in there. <h3>Cook the Oyster Stew</h3> The key is you want to use all of the juice and you put that in and slowly just let it meld together. Now that I have established a little bit of temperature, I am going to add the cream. Now this part is the most important part, is just making sure that we meld all the flavors together and slowly bring it up to a little bit of a simmer. We really don't want to boil it; we just want o heat it all the way through. The oysters are very, very sensitive. <h3>Garnish the Oyster Stew</h3> Turn the heat off and it will gently continue to cook. And I'll add the stew to the bowl. To finish this off, Ill add a little bit of chopped chives to it. It is important when cooking chives that you are not just bruising them but slicing them. Sprinkle them on and add some oyster crackers for added texture. <br><br> And there you have it: oyster stew. Very simple, yet very elegant. Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4399 Mon, 14 May 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/greekfood/Greek-Yogurt-Sauce.htm Tangy Greek-style yogurt sauce goes great with potato dishes, salads, and wraps. Watch how to make this quick and tasty recipe. Saltsa Yiaourtiou, greek recipes, yogurts, sauces, videos 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Saltsa Yiaourtiou, greek recipes, yogurts, sauces, videos Hi, this is Lea Elleseff for About.com Food. Today I'm going to show you how to make a Greek-style yogurt sauce. This light and breezy recipe makes a great topping for potato dishes and salads, and works really well as a substitute for sandwiches and pita wraps. <h3>Ingredients for Greek Yogurt Sauce</h3> Here is what you'll need: <ul> <li>16 oz. strained plain yogurt</li> <li>5-6 leaves mint</li> <li>2 cloves minced garlic</li> <li>1/3 c. + 2 tbsp. mayonnaise</li> <li>2 tbsp. red wine vinegar</li> <li>1 tsp. salt</li> <li>1/2 tsp. pepper</li> <li>a blender</li> </ul> <h3>Combine the Ingredients</h3> Like I said, this recipe is breezy. All you have to do is blend all of the ingredients in the blender, except for the mayonnaise, on low speed until they're smooth and creamy. <br><br> For our next and last step we will pour the blended mixture in with the mayonnaise and gently whisk together. <br><br> And just like that, your Greek-style sauce is done and ready to serve. But please remember, if you're not going to serve it right away, refrigerate until you do. <br><br> Thank you for joining me. To learn more, please visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_6617 Wed, 28 May 2008 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/travelwithkids/Secure-Home-Before-a-Vacation.htm One of the most important things that will set your mind at ease while you're on vacation is knowing that your home is safe and secure. Find out how to lock it down before you leave town, and you'll be relaxing without worry in no time. 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. Hey guys - Jonathon Stewart here for About.com with today's 90 second quick tip. Going on vacation is one of the most enjoyable times of the year for many families, but coming home to a disaster is a sure way to quickly subdue all the fun memories you just created. Take just a few precautions before you head out the door, and the chances of your happy homecoming will be high. Check it out. <h3>Find a House Sitter</h3> Probably the number one, best way to look out for your home's safety while you're away, is to appoint a full-time house sitter. If you can wrangle a trusted family member or close friend to actually stay in your home, it won't just look lived in, it will be lived in. <br><br> But, sure. If your sister looks out for your house while you're away, then her cousin has to look after her apartment while she's looking after your house, and then your sister's cousin's mom has to watch over his pad while he's sitting for your sister... Eventually, you've got to throw a homeless person into the mix, which can be a little risky. <h3>Don't Let Mail Build Up</h3> If you're going to be away for more than a couple days, call up your newspaper and trot down to the post office and have delivery suspended. Consider putting your lights on timers, or investing in outdoor motion detectors which can give the illusion of someone being up inside. <h3>Secure Your Home</h3> Security systems are invaluable but can also be expensive - some of the most affordable advice is to simply check and double check that all locks are bolted and all windows are shut, on every floor of your house, and to keep any valuables out of plain view. <h3>Don't Advertise Your Absence</h3> In any event, it's definitely a good idea to give your contact info to a neighbor, and to let them know how long you'll be away and to keep an eye out for anything suspicious. Beyond that, don't publicize the fact you'll be out of town on your voicemail, or in your Grand Theft Auto gamer group. Not that video games influence real life behavior, or anything like that... <br><br> Thanks for watching! To learn more, visit us on the Web at About.com. aboutvideo_6867 Wed, 11 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/italianfood/Artichokes.htm Artichokes are fun to eat and taste great in recipes. Watch three easy ways to cook an artichoke, plus learn how to find the artichoke's heart. artichoke,vegetable,cook,prepare,artichoke heart,vegetarian 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. artichoke,vegetable,cook,prepare,artichoke heart,vegetarian Hi, I'm Rachel Edelman for About.com Food. Cooking an artichoke may seem a bit intimidating, but it's not as complicated as it looks. Today I'm going to show you three different ways to cook an artichoke. <h3>Prepare the Artichoke</h3> Here's the artichoke we are going to use. First, rinse the artichoke and pull off any of the bottom discolored leaves. With your knife, cut off the entire stem right at the base. <h3>Steam the Artichoke</h3> To steam the artichoke, boil an inch or two of water, and place your steamer on top with the artichoke. Cover and steam for 25 to 45 minutes. You'll see the color of the artichoke change. Place it upside down on a rack to drain. <h3>Boil the Artichoke</h3> To boil, place the artichoke in a pot with three inches of boiling water and cover. Boil gently for 25 to 40 minutes. You can test to see if it's ready by pulling out a stem close to the middle of the artichoke. If it pulls out easily, you're done. <h3>Microwave the Artichoke</h3> You can also microwave your artichoke. Place it in a microwave-safe dish, upside down, with 1/4 cup of water and some lemon juice. Cover and microwave for 5 to 7 minutes. Then let stand for another 5 minutes. <br><br> Test the artichoke by pulling out a petal. The bottom, pulpy part of the petal should be soft. It is fun to eat from the petals. Pull the bottom of the petal through your teeth, or use a spoon. <h3>Find the Artichoke Heart</h3> To get to the heart, pull apart all of the center petals. Remove the small purple leaves and the white fuzzy parts. Underneath the fuzz is the artichoke heart. This is the part that most people use for their recipes. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3702 Tue, 24 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/presentationsoft/Start-PowerPoint.htm From the boardroom to the classroom, PowerPoint is an effective tool in creating dynamic presentations and demonstrations. Get started in PowerPoint with this tutorial. PowerPoint Presentations, powerpoint tutorial, video 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. PowerPoint Presentations, powerpoint tutorial, video Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to start a presentation using PowerPoint <h3>Begin the PowerPoint Presentation</h3> First, open PowerPoint. Notice the 'slide' and 'outline' tabs at the left side of the screen. One slide is already up for you. Click the first box that says, 'Click to Add Title' and type the title of your presentation. <h3>Add Content to the Presentation</h3> It helps to have all the content for your presentation together before starting. You can move the text boxes around by clicking the border of the box. You will see a 4-arrow icon. Click and drag to move the text. <h3>Add Slides to the Presentation</h3> To add another slide, go to 'Insert' and click 'New Slide.' Or you can go to the toolbar at the top of the screen and click on New Slide. A new slide will appear and you will have two in the Slide Tab. <h3>Choosing Slide Layouts</h3> There are many slide layouts you can choose from on the right side of the screen. You can choose to have just text, or graphs, pictures, and tables. Scroll down and you will see more options including having both Text and Content together. Select a slide first. I'll apply a layout to my second slide. The guidelines will appear and you can type in your information. <h3>Choose a Presentation Background</h3> Now you can add a background to your presentation to make it more interesting. Click the 'design' button on the toolbar and your background templates appear on the right where your layout choices were. Choose your background and it will be applied to all of your slides. If you want to go back to change your layout simply click the Back Arrow at the top of the right sidebar. <h3>View the Presentation as a Slideshow</h3> To see a slideshow of your presentation, go to 'View' and click on 'Slideshow.' Your presentation will take up the whole screen and you can use the arrow keys on your keyboard or just click your mouse to go through your presentation. <h3>Move the Slide Order in PowerPoint</h3> If you want to change around the order of your slides go to the left sidebar on the 'Slide' tab. Here you can click and drag the slide you wish to move. <br><br>You can also go to the bottom of the sidebar and change the 'View' to the 'Slide Sorter View.' The icon looks like 4 tiny squares. If your slideshow is long, this is a great way to move slides around. Just click and drag a slide where you want it. <br><br>Go back to the normal view by clicking the small icon to the left of the 'Slide Sorter View' button. <h3>Deleting PowerPoint Slides</h3>Delete a slide by right clicking, and select 'Delete Slide.' <br><br>You now have the basics for PowerPoint. Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us on the Web at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_4395 Thu, 15 Nov 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/windows/Shut-Off-Notification-Balloons.htm Are you tired of notification balloons popping up? Learn the easy steps to shutting off notification balloons in Windows XP so they don't appear when you plug in your mp3 player or other devices. windows xp, tutorial, notification, balloons 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. windows xp, tutorial, notification, balloons Hi, I'm Don Schechter for About.com Computing. Today I'll show you how to stop notification balloons from popping up every time you plug in your mp3 player or other device. <p></p> <li>CLICK Start menu</li> <li>CLICK Run</li> <li>TYPE 'regedit'</li> <li>CLICK 'OK'</li> <li>DOUBLE CLICK HKEY_CURRENT_USER / Software / Microsoft / Windows / CurrentVersion / Explorer / <li>Advanced (on the left column)</li> <li>CLICK Edit / New / DWORD Value</li> <li>NAME the key EnableBalloonTips (with no spaces like this) </li> <li>DOUBLE-CLICK EnableBalloonTips entry to open the Edit DWORD value window</li> <li>ENTER '0' into the value data box to disable notifications</li> </ul> <p></p> If you ever decide to turn the notifications back on, type '1.' In order for these changes to be applied to your computer, you must close out of the registry editor and reboot your computer. <br><br> Thanks for watching. For more information visit us online at computing.about.com. aboutvideo_6748 Wed, 24 Jan 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/japanesefood/Sushi-Video.htm Craving a California roll? Watch as sushi chef Lin demonstrates how simple it is to make this delicious Japanese dish in your kitchen, so you can enjoy a California roll right in your own home. sushi,recipe,how to,california roll,wasabi,nori,ginger,japanese 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. sushi,recipe,how to,california roll,wasabi,nori,ginger,japanese Hi I'm Li Chen for About.com Food. I'm going to show you how to make sushi today.<br><br> <H3>Gather Supplies to Make a California Roll</H3> First you need nori, which is seaweed. The sushi rice we mix with the rice vinegar and sugar. You have to make sure you have a cup of clear, clean water. This way the rice will not stick to your hands. <br> <H3>Prepare the California Roll</H3> First with a small amount of the rice I put it on top of the seaweed and make the rice flat and I make sure I have about a half inch of seaweed that's not covered by the rice. Then we sprinkle on <b>sesame seeds</b>, then we spread <b>masago</b> which is the fish eggs. <br> Then we turn it over, place <b>crab meat</b>, <b>avocados</b>, anything you like, then we move it to a bamboo mat and roll it over and then we take off the bamboo. <br> <H3>Serving the California Roll</H3> You can cut it into 8 pieces or 6 pieces, whichever you prefer. This is a California roll - and of course you can't have sushi without ginger or wasabi.<br><br> To learn more, please visit us on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_4415 Tue, 18 Sep 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/southernfood/Southern-Fried-Chicken.htm You don't need a fancy deep fryer to make fried chicken at home. Learn how to prepare this delicious and crispy chicken classic. fried chicken, chicken, recipe, southern fried chicken, dinner 2008 About, Inc., A part of The New York Times Company. All rights reserved. fried chicken, chicken, recipe, southern fried chicken, dinner Hi, I'm Chris Chmura for About.com food. Grab a hen and 11 herbs and spices. It's time for some fried chicken. <h3>Southern Fried Chicken Ingredients</h3> You'll need the basics for any fried food:<ul> <li>flour</li> <li>bread crumbs</li> <li>eggs</li> </ul> Plus, a boiler fryer chicken. Not one of those huge things, just a small, cheap one. <h3>Prepare the Chicken</h3> Open the chicken up and slice it into quarters. Then, if you'd like cut the leg from the thigh. Just be sure to cut at the joints. You can leave the breast meat on the bone, but I'm going to take it off and fry it boneless. <br><br> After you're done, be sure to sanitize where you were working with raw meat. E coli never tastes good. <h3>Soak the Chicken</h3> Soaking the chicken in buttermilk is an option before moving on. I don't think it tastes too much better and I'm in a hurry here, so we're going to skip it this time. <h3>Prepare Fried Chicken Ingredients</h3> Now prepare your dredging stations - one bowl for flour plus your favorite flavoring. You really don't need 11 herbs and spices like the Colonel, but feel free to experiment. Salt and pepper will probably do. <br><br> Back to the bowls. Another for eggs, and one last one for bread crumbs. Some cooks limit the recipe to a flour dredge. My family likes a crunchy bird, so bread crumbs it is. <h3>Dredge the Chicken</h3> Pass the pieces into the flour and spice mixture. Toss them around a bit, then move on to the egg. Dredging is crucial because this coat will act as the glue. One last stop in the bread crumbs, and you're ready to fry. <h3>Heat the Frying Oil</h3> Now add an inch and a half of oil to wide, shallow pan and turn the burner to medium. Don't add the chicken until the oil reaches 350 degrees. <h3>Fry the Chicken</h3> Dunk the pieces one at a time and fry for about 10 minutes on each side. Boneless breasts will fry faster. The chicken is done when juices run clear. Don't let them cook too long or they'll quickly bypass golden brown and go right to burned. <h3>Drain the Chicken</h3> Instead of draining on pricey paper towels, we're going to line a cookie sheet with newspaper-- your least favorite section-- and place a cooling rack on top. With the pieces in place, excess oil will slowly drip off as you finish the batch; and eye those messy bowls that are just waiting for you. <h3>Serve the Southern Fried Chicken</h3> Fried chicken can be served so many ways. Here we've just placed in on a platter with a bit of coleslaw and a bowl of buttermilk biscuits. If you have to have your fried chicken from a bucket, look no farther than your local home improvement store. You'll find them for less than a dollar in the paint supply section. <br><br> Thanks for watching. To learn more, visit us here on the Web at food.about.com. aboutvideo_3661 Sun, 22 Apr 2007 00:00:00 GMT http://video.about.com/presentationsoft/Powe